X351 - Service & Repair Manual 2010 To 2012 PDF

Workshop Manual
X351 - XJ
TDV6 3.0 Litre Diesel
2010 to 2012
VIN V00325 to V39426
Version 1.3
March 2016
Table of Contents
1: General Information
100: Service Information
100-00: General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual
Application and Use of Specifications
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Active Safety Belt Module (SPMA/SPMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Air Suspension Control Module (RLM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Central Junction Box (BCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Climate Controlled Seat Module - Front/Rear (SCME/
SCMF)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver Door Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexTDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Audio Module (ACM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Luggage Compartment Powered Lid Module (RGTM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Climate Control Module (RHVAC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Entertainment Module (REM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Speed Control Module (CCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Transmission Shift Module (GSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Television Module (TVM)
Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
General Service Information
Health and Safety Precautions
How To Use This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Standard Workshop Practices
Symbols Glossary
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions
Road/Roller Testing
Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
100-01: Identification Codes
Identification Codes
100-02: Jacking and Lifting
Jacking
Lifting
100-04: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Diagnosis and Testing
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
General Procedures
Exhaust System Neutralizing
2: Chassis
204: Suspension
204-00: Suspension System - General Information
Specification
Suspension System
General Procedures
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Four-Wheel Alignment
Front Toe Adjustment (57.65.01)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Toe Adjustment (57.65.08)
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
204-01: Front Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
Front Suspension
Removal and Installation
Front Shock Absorber (60.30.04)
Front Lower Arm (60.35.53)
Rear Lower Arm
Rear Lower Arm Bushing (60.40.12)
Shock Absorber Bushing (60.30.16) (60.30.23)
Front Stabilizer Bar - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Stabilizer Bar Link (60.10.02)
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (60.10.03)
Upper Arm LH (60.35.41) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Upper Arm RH (60.35.42) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Wheel Knuckle
204-02: Rear Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm
Lower Arm (64.35.43)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08)
Rear Wheel Bearing
204-04: Wheels and Tires
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Wheels and Tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Wheel and Tire
204-05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
General Procedures
Air Leaks
Ride Height Adjustments
Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize
Air Suspension Manual Tight Tolerance Setting Mode
Adaptive Damping Module
Air Suspension Compressor
Air Suspension Control Module
Air Suspension Reservoir
Air Suspension Solenoid Valve Block
Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Front Suspension Height Sensor
Rear Suspension Height Sensor
Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
204-06: Ride and Handling Optimization
Component Location
Overview
205: Driveline
205-00: Driveline System - General Information
Driveline System
205-01: Driveshaft
Specification
Driveshaft
General Procedures
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
205-02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling
Differential Case
Differential Front Bushing
Drive Pinion Seal
205-05: Rear Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Halfshaft
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.33)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.32)
206: Brake System
206-00: Brake System - General Information
Specification
Brake System
General Procedures
Brake Disc Runout Check
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.03)
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On
206-03: Front Disc Brake
Specification
Front Disc Brake
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
206-04: Rear Disc Brake
Specification
Rear Disc Brake
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
206-05: Parking Brake and Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Parking Brake
General Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
Parking Brake Cable LH
Parking Brake Cable RH
Parking Brake Module (70.35.47)
Parking Brake Release Actuator
Parking Brake Switch
206-06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Specification
Overview
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.30.16)
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08)
206-07: Power Brake Actuation
Specification
Power Brake System
Brake Booster (70.50.17)
Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
206-09: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.60.02)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (70.60.18) (70.60.19)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (70.60.04)
Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer
211: Steering System
211-00: Steering System - General Information
Specification
Steering System
General Procedures
Power Steering System Bleeding (57.15.02 )
Power Steering System Flushing (57.15.08)
Power Steering System Filling
211-02: Power Steering
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Power Steering
Steering Gear
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Power Steering Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
211-03: Steering Linkage
Specification
Steering Linkage
Tie Rod End
211-04: Steering Column
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column
Steering Column
Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Steering Wheel
211-05: Steering Column Switches
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column Switches
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Steering Column Lock Actuator
Ignition Switch
3: Powertrain
303: Engine
303-00: Engine System - General Information
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Piston Inspection
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment
Cylinder Head Gasket Selection - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Compression Test - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
303-01A: Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Camshaft Front Seal
Camshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Vibration Damper
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH
Engine Mount RH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Flexplate
Oil Filter Element
Oil Pan
Oil Pan Extension
Oil Pump
Timing Belt
Timing Cover
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-03A: Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Auxiliary Radiator
Coolant Expansion Tank
Coolant Pump
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Radiator (26.40.01)
Thermostat
303-04A: Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Charging and Controls
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injector
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
303-04B: Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Turbocharger LH
Turbocharger RH
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Fixed Vane Turbocharger Actuator
303-05A: Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)
303-06A: Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Starting System
Starting System - Vehicles With: Smart Key
Starter Motor
303-06B: Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Starting System
Starting System - Vehicles With: Smart Key
Starter Motor
303-07A: Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Ignition
Ignition Coil-On-Plug - V8 5.0L Petrol
Ignition Coil-On-Plug - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-07B: Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glow Plug System
Glow Plugs
303-08A: Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Emission Control
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube RH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
303-12A: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Overview - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
System Operation and Component Description - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Element (19.10.08)
Charge Air Cooler
303-14A: Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Electronic Engine Controls
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential Pressure Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Oil Level Sensor
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor RH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Oil Temperature Sensor
Post Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Post DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
Pre Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Pre DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
307-01: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Diagnostic Strategy
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
307-02: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Transmission Cooling
Transmission Fluid Cooler - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
307-05: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls
Specification
Component Location
Overview
External Controls
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Upshift Paddle Switch
Downshift Paddle Switch
309: Exhaust System
309-00A: Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Component Location
Diesel Particulate Filter
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Exhaust System
Front Muffler
Rear Muffler
310: Fuel System - General Information
310-00: Fuel System - General Information
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel Tank Draining - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
310-01A: Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Cooler
Fuel Filter
Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
310-03: Speed Control
Specification
Component Location - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Overview - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
System Operation and Component Description - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Module
Speed Control Sensor
Speed Control Switch
4: Electrical
412: Climate Control System
412-00: Climate Control System - General Information
Specification
Climate Control System
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (82.30.30)
Air Conditioning (A/C) SystemFlushing
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
Electronic Leak Detection
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Inspection and Assembly Requirements
Manifold Gauge Set Connection
Refrigerant System Tests
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Commissioning
412-01: Climate Control
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Overview
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Blower Motor
Blower Motor Control Module
Center Registers
Climate Control Assembly
Climate Control Module
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator - LHD RWD
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator - RHD RWD
Desiccant Bag
Driver Side Register
Evaporator
Floor Console Register
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator - LHD RWD
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator - RHD RWD
Heater Core
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Passenger Side Register
Pollen Filter
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Sunload Sensor
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
412-02: Auxiliary Climate Control
Specification
Electric Booster Heater
412-03: Air Conditioning
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Condenser Core - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Pressure Cutoff Switch (82.10.32)
413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413-01: Instrument Cluster
Component Location
Overview
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
413-08: Information and Message Center
Component Location
Overview
Information and Message Center
413-09: Warning Devices
Component Location
Overview
Warning Devices
Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Switch
Blindspot Monitoring Sensor LH
413-13: Parking Aid
Component Location
Overview
Parking Aid
Proximity Camera
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Parking Aid Camera
Parking Aid Module
Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Rear Outer Parking Aid Sensor
414: Battery and Charging System
414-00: Battery and Charging System - General Information
Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain
Charging System
414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Battery
General Procedures
Battery Disconnect and Connect
Battery
414-02A: Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Generator
Generator
415: Information and Entertainment Systems
415-00: Information and Entertainment System - General Information
Navigation System Map Updates
Information and Entertainment System
Cellular Phone
Navigation System
415-01A: Information and Entertainment System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Overview
Audio Unit
Audio Unit Amplifier
Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Audio and Climate Control Assembly
Digital Audio Module
Front Door Speaker
Information and Entertainment Display
Information and Entertainment System Antenna Base
Instrument Panel Speaker
Rear Door Speaker
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Subwoofer Speaker
Video Display
415-01B: Information and Entertainment System - DTC: Audio Input Control Module
Audio Input Control Module
417: Lighting
417-01: Exterior Lighting
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Headlamps
Autolamps
Stoplamps
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps
Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Fog Lamps
Driving Lamps
Reversing Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Headlamp Leveling
General Procedures
Headlamp Adjustment
Headlamp Masking
Approach Lamp
Headlamp Assembly
Headlamp Bulb
Headlamp Leveling Module
High Mounted Stoplamp
Rear Lamp Assembly
Side Turn Signal Lamp
417-02: Interior Lighting
Component Location
Overview
Interior Lighting
417-04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
418: Electrical Distribution
418-00: Module Communications Network
Communications Network
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Engine Junction Box (EJB)
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
418-02: Wiring Harnesses
Wiring Harness
General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
419: Electronic Feature Group
419-01A: Anti-Theft - Active
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Theft - Active
Anti-Theft Alarm Horn (86.52.03)
419-01B: Anti-Theft - Passive
Component Location
Overview
Anti-Theft - Passive
419-10: Multifunction Electronic Modules
Specification
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Rear Door Module (RDM)
5: Body and Paint
501: Body and Paint
501-02: Front End Body Panels
Specification
Air Deflector
Cowl Vent Screen (76.10.01)
Fender Splash Shield
Hood
Radiator Splash Shield
Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH
Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH
501-03: Body Closures
Component Location
Overview
Front Door
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Luggage Compartment Lid (76.19.01)
Luggage Compartment Lid Hinge (76.19.28)
Luggage Compartment Lid Strut
Rear Door
501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
General Procedures
Glass Roof Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
A-Pillar Trim Panel
B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Cowl Side Trim Panel
Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Instrument Panel Speaker Grille
Glass Roof Panel Blind
Glass Roof Panel Blind Motor
Headliner
Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel LH
Loadspace Trim Panel RH
Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Parcel Shelf
Rear Door Trim Panel
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Sun Visor (76.10.48)
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
501-08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
Radiator Grille
501-09: Rear View Mirrors
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear View Mirrors
Exterior Mirror
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Glass
Exterior Mirror Motor
Interior Rear View Mirror
501-10: Seating
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Seats
Heater Mats
Seats - Vehicles With: Climate Controlled Seats
General Procedures
Seat Smoothing
Driver Seat Cushion
Driver Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Front Seat
Front Seat Backrest Cover
Front Seat Backrest Cushion
Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Front Seat Bolster Pump
Front Seat Control Switch
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Front Seat Recliner Motor
Front Seat Track Motor
Front Seat Head Restraint
Front Seat Head Restraint Motor
Front Seat Tilt Motor
Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Front Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Front Seat Cushion Extension Motor
Front Seat Folding Tray
Front Seat Folding Tray Hinge
Lumbar Assembly
Massaging Lumbar Assembly
Memory Seat Position Switch
Passenger Seat Cushion
Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Passenger Seat Cushion
Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Rear Seat Armrest
Rear Seat Backrest
Rear Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Rear Seat Backrest Cover
Rear Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Rear Seat Control Switch
Rear Seat Cushion
Rear Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Rear Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Rear Seat Massaging Lumbar Assembly
Rear Seat Recliner Motor
Seat Base
501-11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Specification
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass
General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Rear Glass Roof Panel Lubrication
Driver Door Window Control Switch
Front Door Window Glass
Front Glass Roof Panel
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Glass Roof Panel Blind Drive Assembly
Glass Roof Panel Blind Feet
Passenger Door Window Control Switch
Rear Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Glass Roof Panel
Rear Quarter Window Glass
Rear Window Glass
Windshield Glass
501-12: Instrument Panel and Console
Specification
Floor Console
Floor Console Double Cup Holder
Floor Console Side Trim Panel
Floor Console Stowage Compartment Lid Latch
Glove Compartment
Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement
Instrument Panel Lower Section
Instrument Panel Upper Section
Overhead Console
501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Luggage Compartment Lid Release Switch
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Front Door Latch
Interior Front Door Handle
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch Actuator
Rear Door Latch
Interior Front Door Handle Latch Release Cable
501-16: Wipers and Washers
Specification
Wipers and Washers
Headlamp Washer Jet
Headlamp Washer Pump
Rain Sensor
Windshield Washer Reservoir
Windshield Wiper Motor - LHD RWD
Windshield Wiper Motor - RHD RWD
Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Windshield Washer Pump
501-17: Roof Opening Panel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Roof Opening Panel
General Procedures
Roof Opening Panel Alignment
Motor Synchronization (76.82.48)
Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
Roof Opening Panel Blind
Roof Opening Panel Blind Drive Assembly
Roof Opening Panel Blind Feet
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Centre
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Front
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Rear
Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Regulator
Roof Opening Panel Weatherstrip
501-19: Bumpers
Specification
Front Bumper
Front Bumper Cover
Front Bumper Cover Insert
Rear Bumper Cover
Rear Bumper
501-20A: Safety Belt System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Safety Belt System
Front Safety Belt Buckle
Front Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Safety Belt Buckle
Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
501-20B: Supplemental Restraint System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
General Procedures
Air Bag Disposal
Clockspring
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Crash Sensor
Driver Air Bag Module
Front Door Side Impact Sensor
Passenger Air Bag Module
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Seat Position Sensor
Side Air Bag Module
Side Air Curtain Module
Occupant Detection Sensor
501-20C: Pedestrian Protection System
Component Location
Overview
Pedestrian Protection System
Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH
501-25A: Body Repairs - General Information
Body Repairs
501-25B: Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection
501-25C: Body Repairs - Water Leaks
Water Leaks
501-26: Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks
Body and Frame
501-27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
Front End Sheet Metal
Fender Apron Panel
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Front Fender
Front Side Member and Suspension Top Mount Assembly
Front Side Member Closing Panel Section
Front Side Member Section
Front Side Member To Deformation Element Bracket
Hood Hinge
Hood Latch Panel
Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
Side Member Deformation Element
Suspension Top Mount
501-28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
Roof
Roof Panel
501-29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
Side Panel Sheet Metal
A-Pillar Outer Panel
A-Pillar Reinforcement
Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer Panel
B-Pillar Inner Panel
B-Pillar Reinforcement
Rocker Panel
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
501-30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
Rear End Sheet Metal
Back Panel
Inner Quarter Panel Extension
Inner Quarter Panel Rear Section
Quarter Panel
Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Rear Bumper Mounting
Rear Floor Side Extension
Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section
Rear Side Member Section
Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Spare Wheel Well
502: Frame and Mounting
502-00: Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System
Specification
Front Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Subframe Rear Bushing (64.25.36) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.
It is structured into groups and sections, with specific system sections collected together under their relevant group.
A group covers a specific portion of the vehicle. The manual is divided into five groups, General Information, Chassis,
Powertrain, Electrical and Body and Paint. The number of the group is the first number of a section number.
Within Etis, the navigation tree will list the groups. After selecting a group the navigation tree will then list the sections
within that group. Each section has a contents list detailing Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing,
General Procedures, Disassembly and Assembly, Removal and Installation.
References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)
All LH and RH references to the vehicle are taken from a position sitting in the driver seat looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition
Item Part Number Description

1 - LH
2 - RH
All LH and RH references to the engine are taken from a position at the flywheel looking towards the crankshaft front pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition
Item Description
1 front
2 right
3 rear
4 left
How to use Repair Procedures

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. It provides general
descriptions for accomplishing repair work with tested and effective techniques.
Important Safety Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles as
well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle integrity
is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the vehicle or
equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the generic
warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and operation
procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
es
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedur
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color of the
electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed when
removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will have the
following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets
The following list details the general policy for the reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets.
Types of self-locking nuts and bolts
NOTE: There are more types of self-locking fasteners available than shown in following illustration.
Item Description
1 Completely coated self-locking bolt
2 Partially coated self-locking bolt
3 Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
4 Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
5 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)
6 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)
7 Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
All types of seals and gaskets must be discarded and new seals and gaskets installed unless otherwise stated within
the procedure.
Nuts and bolts with a chemical coating for locking and/or sealing and/or antiseize must be discarded unless the
procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.
Nuts and bolts with a mechanical locking such as thread inserts, thread deformation or locking washers must be
discarded and new nuts and bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure.
Torque to yield bolts must be discarded and new torque to yield bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the
procedure, recognizable by a tightening torque with more than one stage together with a torque angle.
Specification data
Specification procedures will only contain technical data that is not already part of a repair procedure.
Sequence of tasks
If components must be removed or installed in a specific sequence, the sequence will be identified numerically in a graphic and
the corresponding text will be numbered accordingly.
Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures
Special tools will be shown with the tool numbers in the illustration. The special tool numbers, general equipment, materials
and torque figures used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

Green and Brown - Additional components that need to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled prior to the
target component.
Yellow - Component that is touched or affected in a way but remains in the vehicle. It may be detached, attached,
moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.
Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and clips.
Pale Blue - Special tool(s) and general equipment.
One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and
clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden details.
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following paragraphs
describe the various types and categories of symbols.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks. These symbols are
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk or
severity of possible injuries.
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is to be set.
Pointer symbols are used to draw attention to components and give special instructions such as a required sequence or number
of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A sequence number is located inside
the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such as tightening torques or chemicals to a
particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include specific values
inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols can include
specific values if required.
How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures
Inspection and Verification
Visual Inspection Charts, Symptom Charts and other information charts (such as diagnostic routines) or supplement test
procedures with technical specifications will navigate the user to a specific test procedure.
Symptom Chart
The symptom chart indicates symptoms, sources and actions to address a condition.
Pinpoint Tests
For electrical systems, pinpoint test steps are used to identify the source of a concern in a logical, step-by-step manner.
Pinpoint tests have two columns: CONDITIONS and DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS.
The CONDITIONS column is used exclusively for graphics and icons (with or without captions) and the DETAILS/RESULTS
/ACTIONS column provides direction to another test step or specific corrective actions.
The boxed numbers indicate the order in which the described action is to be carried out.
Component Tests
A component test is used when a component is tested in multiple pinpoint tests, or if a procedure is too complicated to be
formatted within a single page of the pinpoint test.
Graphics
Test graphics show the measurement or test to be carried out in a test step.
A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.
If multiple measurements are made in a single graphic, the test leads are drawn with a solid line until the test lead splits to
indicate the multiple measurements, at which point dashed lines are used.
Breakout box type testers are represented by a double circle test pin. Test pins are labeled with the pin number.
General Information - Application and Use of Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque specifications are shown in the torque specifications chart located at the front of the relevant section.
General Information - Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear safety goggles when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution.
EYE CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the eyes, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the skin, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If acid is swallowed, rinse the mouth with plenty of water and then drink plenty of water or milk. Do not
induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases. Do not allow naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the
battery.
When charging the battery shield your face and wear safety goggles. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Boost charging with excessive current or voltage above 16 volts will damage the battery.
General Information - Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
EYE CONTACT: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly
after handling. If brake fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush the eyes with plenty of cold running water for 15 minutes.
Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. If swallowed, drink plenty of water. Seek immediate
medical attention.
INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
Published: 20-Apr-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Active
Safety Belt Module (SPMA/SPMB)
Active Safety Belt Module (SPMA/SPMB)
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool to
the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places,
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'DTC Monitor' tab on the manufacturers
approved diagnostic system.
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Active Safety Belt Module, for additional
Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

U1A14-00 CAN Initialization
Failure - No sub Power distribution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and
type information fault to control ground connections to the module. Using the manufacturer
module approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
CAN network fault test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
network. After installing a new control module, updating
software or repairing a wiring harness perform an On Demand
Self Test and Retract and Release Self Test using the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system
U2001-68 Reduced System

Function - Event Seat belt retractor
NOTE: If required, it is only necessary to install a new
information mechanism has
component on the side affected by the DTC.
exceeded the
design limit for Confirm the Safety belt retractor mechanism has exceeded the
the durability design limit for durability by interrogating the Active Safety
Belt Module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system check the Dynamic Safety belt Health Status at
PID5824, if the Safety belt status is confirmed as 'not healthy'
(01) install a new retractor mechanism as required. If the
Safety belt status is 'healthy' (00) clear the DTC and Refer to
the workshop manual section 501-20A and perform the Retract
and Release Self Test using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect
U2101-00 Control Module
Configuration The control Check the vehicle configuration file to ensure the vehicle
Incompatible - No module is not configuration is correct for the installed hardware. The Active
sub type compatible with Safety Belt Control Modules are handed (connector shell is
information the vehicle different between LH and RH sides) and cannot be installed on
another vehicle as they store VIN data. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system run the routine RID 0402h to clear
self learnt data (except VIN). Cycle the ignition and the
module should re-learn the correct configuration. clear the DTC
and Refer to the workshop manual section 501-20A and
perform the Retract and Release Self Test using the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component
is suspect
U3000-45 Control Module -

Program memory Component Install a new control module, refer to the Warranty Policy and
failure internal memory Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect. After
failure installing a new control module, updating software or repairing
a wiring harness perform an On Demand Self Test and Retract
diagnostic system

Internal electronic Component Install a new control module, refer to the Warranty Policy and
failure internal electronic Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect. After
failure installing a new control module, updating software or repairing
diagnostic system
U3000-4B Control Module -

Over temperature Belt retraction During 'aggressive' cornering or braking the belt mechanism
motor has will operate to ensure the occupant is correctly positioned in
exceeded the the seat. This DTC is set when the belt retraction motor has
design operating exceeded the temperature threshold and functionality is
temperature inhibited until the motor has cooled. Allow the motor to cool
and then clear the DTC. If the DTC resets refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. After installing a new control module, updating
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system carry out
Number - Invalid identification the new module configuration routine
serial data received number not stored
New module
configuration
routine not
completed
U3003-62 Battery Voltage -

Signal compare Power distribution This DTC is set when the control module registers a difference
failure fault to control of more than 2 volts between the CAN reference battery
module voltage and the module supply voltage. Refer to the electrical
CAN network fault circuit diagrams and check the power and ground connections
to the module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network. After
installing a new control module, updating software or repairing
diagnostic system

Input Power "A" - Vehicle battery This DTC is set when the measured supply voltage is below 9
Circuit voltage discharged volts. Refer to the battery care manual and confirm vehicle
below threshold Power distribution battery is fully charged and serviceable. Refer to the relevant
fault to control section in the workshop manual and check the charging system
module causing is performing correctly. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
volt drop on and check the power and ground connections to the module. If
supply circuits no faults are found suspect the control module, refer to the
Internal control Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component
module fault is suspect
Input Power "A" - Vehicle charging This DTC is set when the measured supply voltage is above 16
Circuit voltage system fault volts. Refer to the battery care manual and confirm vehicle
above threshold Internal control battery is fully charged and serviceable. Refer to the relevant
module fault section in the workshop manual and check the charging system
is performing correctly. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the power and ground connections to the module. If
no faults are found suspect the control module, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component
is suspect
U0452-29 Invalid Data

Received From Supplementary Check the Restraints Control Module for related DTCs and refer
Restraints Control Restraints System to the relevant DTC index
Module - Signal fault
invalid Restraints Control
Module fault

Received From Supplementary Check the Restraints Control Module for related DTCs and refer
Restraints Control Restraints System to the relevant DTC index
Module - No signal fault
Restraints Control
Module fault

Received From Anti-Lock Braking Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module for related
Anti-Lock Braking System fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
System (ABS) Anti-Lock Braking
Control Module - System control
Signal invalid module fault

Received From Anti-Lock Braking Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module for related
Anti-Lock Braking System fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
System (ABS) Anti-Lock Braking
Control Module - No System control
signal module fault

Received From Body Central Junction Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs and refer to
Control Module - Box system fault the relevant DTC index
Signal invalid
Received From Body Central Junction Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs and refer to
Control Module - No Box system fault the relevant DTC index
signal
Received From Instrument Panel Check the Instrument Panel Control Module for related DTCs
Instrument Panel Control Module and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - system fault
Signal invalid
Received From Instrument Panel Check the Instrument Panel Control Module for related DTCs
Instrument Panel Control Module and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - No system fault
signal
U0001-88 High Speed CAN
Communication Bus Power distribution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and
- Bus off fault to control ground connections to the module. Using the manufacturer
module approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
CAN network fault test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
network. After installing a new control module, updating
U0104-00 Lost
Communication Power distribution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and
With Cruise Control fault to control ground connections to the module. Using the manufacturer
Module - No sub module approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
type information CAN network fault test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
network between the Active Safety Belt Module and Speed
Control Module
Received From Speed control Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs and refer to
Cruise Control system related the relevant DTC index
Module - Signal fault
invalid
U0103-00 Lost
Communication Power distribution Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and
With Gear Shift fault to control ground connections to the module. Using the manufacturer
Control Module A - module approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
No sub type CAN network fault test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
information network between the Active Safety Belt Module and
Transmission Shift Control Module
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Adaptive
Damping Module (SUMB)
Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Adaptive Damping Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).

C101D-12 Left Front
vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
sensor - Short to circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
battery system
C101D-14 Left Front

vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. If
sensor - Short to circuit short to ground, no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace sensor, clear
ground or open open circuit DTC and retest the system
Vertical acceleration
sensor fault
C101D-22 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Front Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left front vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly installed sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Left front vertical suspect, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101D-26 Left Front
vertical Left front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
sensor - Signal signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the warranty policy and
rate of change another circuit procedures manual if a module is suspect. Replace the sensor,
below threshold Left front vertical clear the DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101D-78 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical Check Left Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
sensor - bracket bent warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Alignment or Left front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
adjustment acceleration sensor retest the system
incorrect damaged
C101E-12 Right Front

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
battery system

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - Short to circuit short to ground, circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
ground or open open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
sensor fault

vertical Right front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted to 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
amplitude > Right front vertical loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
maximum acceleration sensor suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly installed sensor. Check the
signal circuit short to sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit required. refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Right front vertical if a module is suspect, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Front
below threshold Right front vertical clear the DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Check Right Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Right front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1024-00 System
Temporarily Loss of power to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
Disabled Due To control module whilst ground circuits to Adaptive Damping Control Module for
Power driving intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
Interruption required, clear DTC and retest the system
During Driving -
No sub type
information
C102C-12 Right Rear
vertical Right Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear
battery system
C102C-14 Right Rear

sensor fault
C102C-22 Right Rear

vertical Right Rear vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Rear
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted to 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
amplitude > Right Rear vertical loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
maximum acceleration sensor suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly installed sensor. Check the
signal circuit short to sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit required. refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Right Rear vertical if a module is suspect, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C102C-26 Right Rear

below threshold Right Rear vertical clear the DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C102C-78 Right Rear

vertical Right Rear vertical Check Right Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Right Rear vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1030-12 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
battery system
C1030-14 Left Rear

vertical Left rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
sensor fault
C1030-22 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Rear Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left Rear vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly installed sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Left Rear vertical suspect, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030-26 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Rear
below threshold Left Rear vertical clear the DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030-78 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Check Left Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Left Rear vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1A03-12 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Circuit short to shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
battery cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
Height sensor internal
fault
C1A03-14 Left Front

Height Sensor - Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
Circuit short to (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
ground or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
ground terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical
Wiring to height continuity between the two connectors for each of the 3
sensor short to other terminals. Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module
cable only. C: Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
Height sensor internal connector (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle
electrical fault body. • Voltage to sensor ground connection should be ~0v •
Voltage to sensor signal connection should be ~0v • Voltage
to sensor supply connection should be ~5v All voltages
should be within ± 0.15v
C1A03-21 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
Signal amplitude not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
< minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
bracket loose re-calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part
Height sensor bracket number is installed, as specified in the service parts
bent database. To check height sensor: Disconnect electrical
Incorrect height connector to height sensor and inspect connecter pins &
calibration terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress. If no
Height sensor linkage corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control Module. A:
toggled Check for short circuits between any of the 3 terminals and
Height sensor water vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical continuity between the
ingress two connectors for each of the 3 terminals. Reconnect
Wiring to height electrical connector at Control Module only. C: Check voltages
sensor partial short to at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor not
ground connected), with respect to vehicle body. • Voltage to sensor
Wiring to height ground connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor signal
sensor short to other connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor supply
cable connection should be ~5v All voltages should be within ±
Height sensor 0.15v. To check sensor operation on the vehicle: Check for
electrical fault water ingress around the height sensors, electrical connectors
Height sensor linkage or shaft end. Check for excessive movement in the shaft in all
bent directions. Raise vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until
Incorrect height suspension on corner under investigation is at rebound to
sensor installed gain access to height sensor. Access may be improved by
removing road wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor
link from the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor
signal voltage output for the height sensor under
investigation. Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid
position and confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts.
Move the sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid
position and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly
between around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are
incorrect or do not change smoothly then replace sensor.
NOTE: For angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor
signal will clamp to a voltage of ~0.15v or ~4.85v, depending
on position of sensor lever. This is normal. When
investigation is complete, refit height sensor link to upper
arm. If any fixings to the height sensor body or mounting
bracket were slackened or found to be loose or if a height
sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual for the calibration procedure
C1A03-22 Left Front

> maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
C1A03-76 Left Front

Height Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
Wrong mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
C1A03-78 Left Front
Alignment or calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
adjustment
incorrect
C1A04-12 Right Front
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
power cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
fault




position
adjustment
incorrect
C1A05-12 Left Rear Height
Sensor - Circuit Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
short to battery shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
fault

Sensor - Circuit Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
short to ground (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude < not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude > not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be

Sensor - Wrong Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
adjustment
incorrect
C1A06-12 Right Rear
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
battery cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
fault
C1A06-14 Right Rear

C1A06-21 Right Rear

C1A06-22 Right Rear

C1A06-76 Right Rear

position
C1A06-78 Right Rear
adjustment
incorrect
C110C-01 Left Front
Damper Solenoid Left front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
- General solenoid circuit fault damper solenoid circuit for faults, If no faults are evident
electrical failure suspect a faulty control module, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module is suspect
C110C-14 Left Front

Damper Solenoid Front Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
- Short to Solenoid circuit - short Damper Solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
ground or open to ground, open circuit Check for corrosion, backed out terminals and poor crimping of
or high circuit terminals
Resistance
Front Left Damper
Solenoid Failure
C110C-18 Left Front

- Circuit current Actuator open circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
below threshold at startup should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
C110C-19 Left Front

- Circuit current Solenoid circuit current Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
above threshold above threshold should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
C110C-1D Left Front

- Circuit current Solenoid circuit - short Damper Solenoid circuit for short to ground, power or open
out of range to ground/power, open circuit. Check and install a new Front Left Shock Actuator as
circuit required refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Front Left Damper a module is suspect
Solenoid failure
C110C-64 Left Front

- Signal Solenoid Measured Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
plausibility Current control loop should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
failure failed
Front Left Damper
Solenoid open circuit
C110D-01 Right Front

Damper Solenoid Right front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right

Damper Solenoid Front Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
- Circuit short to Solenoid circuit - short Damper Solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
Resistance
Front Right Damper
Solenoid Failure


C110D-1DRight Front
out of range to ground/power, open circuit. Check and install a new Front Right Shock Actuator as
Front Right Damper a module is suspect
Solenoid failure
failure failed
Front Right Damper
C110E-01 Left Rear

Damper Solenoid Left Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
C110E-14 Left Rear

Damper Solenoid Rear Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
- Short to Solenoid circuit - short Damper Solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
Resistance
Rear Left Damper
Solenoid Failure
C110E-18 Left Rear

C110E-19 Left Rear

C110E-1D Left Rear

out of range to ground/power, open circuit. Check and install a new Rear Left Shock Actuator as
Rear Left Damper a module is suspect
Solenoid failure
C110E-64 Left Rear

failure failed
Rear Left Damper
C110F-01 Right Rear

Damper Solenoid Right Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
C110F-14 Right Rear

Damper Solenoid Rear Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
- Circuit short to Solenoid circuit - short Damper Solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
Resistance
Rear Right Damper
Solenoid Failure
C110F-18 Right Rear

C110F-19 Right Rear

C110F-1D Right Rear

out of range to ground/power, open circuit. Check and install a new Right Shock Actuator as
Rear Right Damper a module is suspect
Solenoid failure
C110F-64 Right Rear

failure failed
Rear Right Damper
C1B14-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage A - Out Left Front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Sensor or Right Front supply for circuit fault. Check all height sensors. Check
Height Sensor or Left module sensor supply output voltage measured voltage
Rear Height Sensor or should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Right Rear Height
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Height
Sensor or Right Front
Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor internal failure
Internal control
module failure
C1B15-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage B - Out Left Front Vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Acceleration Sensor or supply for circuit fault. Check all Vertical Acceleration Sensors.
Right Front Vertical Check control module sensor supply output voltage Measured
Acceleration Sensor or voltage should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Left Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor or
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or ground.
Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or ground
Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
internal failure
Internal control
module failure
U0001-88 High speed CAN

communication Lost Communication Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
bus - Bus off With Engine Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for faults,
Module (ECM) (CAN check CAN circuits for open circuits or shorts to power, ground
Bus circuit fault) or other circuits
U0100-00 Lost
Communication Missing message from Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With ECM/PCM A Engine Control Module electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit fault
- No sub type (ECM)
information
U0101-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
with TCM - No with Transmission the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit
sub type Control Module (TCM) fault
information (CAN Bus circuit fault)
U0103-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Gear Shift With Transmission electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus for circuit faults
Control Module Shift Module (CAN Bus
A - No sub type circuit fault)
information
U0121-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Anti lock Braking System Control Module for stored
With Anti-Lock With Anti-Lock Braking DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can
Braking System System (ABS) Control Bus circuit to Anti lock Braking System Control Module for
(ABS) Control Module (CAN Bus circuit faults
Module - No sub circuit fault)
type information
U0132-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
With Suspension With Air Suspension the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Air
Control Module Control Module (CAN Suspension Control Module for circuit faults
A - No sub type Bus circuit fault
information
U0136-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
With Differential With Rear Differential to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
Control Module - Control Module (CAN Rear Differential Control Module for circuit faults
Rear - No sub Bus circuit fault)
type information
U0140-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Central With Central Junction electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Central
Junction Box - Box (CAN Bus circuit Junction Box for faults
No sub type fault)
information
U0142-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Central rear smart junction electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to
Junction Box B - box (CAN Bus circuit Auxiliary Junction Box for faults
No sub type fault)
information
U0155-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Instrument Cluster for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Instrument With Instrument electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus to Instrument
Panel Cluster Cluster (CAN bus Cluster for circuit fault
(IPC) Control circuit fault)
Module - No sub
type information
U0300-00 Internal control
module software CAN master Check Front Smart Junction Box vehicle configuration file,
incompatibility - configuration ID check part number of adaptive damping control module
No sub type incorrect
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Engine Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the relevant
ECM/PCM A - from Engine Control DTC index
Event Module
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs. Refer to relevant
TCM - Event from Transmission DTC index
information Control Module

Received from Invalid data received Check Transmission Shift Control Module for DTCs. Refer to
Gear Shift from Transmission the relevant DTC index
Control Module Shift Control Module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check for Anti lock Braking System DTCs. Refer to the relevant
Anti-Lock From Anti-Lock DTC index
Braking System Braking System (ABS)
(ABS) Control Control Module
Module - Event
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
Suspension From Air Suspension the relevant DTC index
Control Module Control Module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
Central Junction From Central Junction relevant DTC index
Box - Event Box (Front Smart
information Junction Box)

Received From Invalid Data Received Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
Differential From Rear Differential to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - Control Module
Rear - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check Auxiliary junction box for DTCs and refer to relevant
Central Junction From Auxiliary DTC index
Box B - Event Junction Box
information
U1A14-00 CAN
initialization CAN network harness Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for fault
failure - No sub short, disconnected (short to power, ground or open circuit)
type information
U2100-00 Initial
Configuration Car Configuration Data Install car config to Central Junction Box. Clear DTC and
Not Complete - not loaded (Central retest systems
No sub type Junction Box installed
information to vehicle and not
initialized)
Internal Central
Junction Box failure

Configuration Car Configuration Data Carry out the new module software installation procedure
Incompatible - transmitted over CAN
No sub type does not match
information adaptive damping
control module
internal config
U3000-01 Control module -

General General electrical Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to module.
Electrical Failure failure Check damper negative circuits for short to Ground. Refer to
the new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Install a new Adaptive Damping Control Module

System Internal Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check all damper
Failure solenoid circuits for short to power. If no harness faults are
found suspect adaptive damping control module. Install a new
module, refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
a module is suspect

Special memory Module Internal failure Suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
failure Install a new module, refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect

Program memory Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
failure ground circuit for fault. Clear DTC turn off ignition, wait 1
minute. Turn on ignition, check for DTCs. If DTC returns
suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the warranty policy and

Watchdog / Module Internal If this DTC is logged contact your local in-market support
safety Micro Failure
controller failure
Not activated Adaptive Damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
Control Module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and not
programmed
Missing Adaptive damping Refer to the workshop manual. Install the latest software /
calibration control module has Carry out the new-module (software) install procedure
been replaced and no
software is installed
U3003-1C Battery voltage

- Circuit voltage Circuit voltage out of Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
out of range range (Supply Voltage to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
at adaptive damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
control module < the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
10.5v or Supply and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
Voltage at adaptive control module for faults, including intermittent high
damping control resistance
module > 18v for 30s
)
U3003-62 Battery Voltage

- Signal compare High Resistance Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
failure Connections to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
Adaptive Damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
Control module the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Internal Failure and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high
resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Air
Suspension Control Module (RLM)
Air Suspension Control Module (RLM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Air Suspension Control Module, for
additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1A84-55 Car Configuration
Data - Not System not configured Configure the car configuration file (CCF) using the
configured - Data does not approved diagnostic system. Ensure the ride levelling
match that control module software is the correct version
expected for (available from the Global Technical Reference
specification web-site). Clear the DTC and test for normal
Incorrect software version operation
loaded
C112F-72 Air Spring Valve -

Actuator stuck open Corner valve stuck open Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
(fully or partially) routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Vehicle driven while system. Complete corner valve checks. If necessary,
system in "Tight Tolerance" clear tight tolerance mode. Clear the DTC and retest
mode
C1130-66 Air Spring Air Supply

- Signal has too Air spring leak Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Where
many Leak in air harness to air possible, refer to the guided diagnostic routine for
transitions/events spring this DTC on the approved diagnostic system
Corner valve leak to gallery
Compressor assembly fault
Vehicle driven while
system in "Tight Tolerance"
mode
C1130-7A Air Spring Sir Supply
- Fluid leak or seal Detached or burst air pipe Visually inspect the system for an excessive air leak.
failure Leaking air spring or pipe Check the height sensor linkage(s) for
to air spring (large leak) damage/restrictions. Visually inspect the air harness
Loose pipe connection for evidence of melting, crushing, kinking or
Insufficient pressure from collapsing. Where possible, refer to the guided
compressor diagnostic routine for this DTC on the approved
Height sensor fault diagnostic system
C1131-92 Air Supply -

Performance or Loose or burst air pipe Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Check
incorrect operation Detached air pipe the reservoir valve block pipes for correct routing and
Leaking pipe from reservoir installation
valve block to air supply
unit or either axle valve
block
Insufficient pressure from
compressor
Reservoir valve block piped
incorrectly
C1A03-1C Left Front Height

Sensor - Circuit Height sensor Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
voltage out of range disconnected electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
Height sensor harness circuit for continuity or short circuit. Check sensor
wiring short circuit to signal changes when sensor is rotated. If any height
ground, short circuit to sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose, or
power or high resistance a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride
Height sensor fault height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the system
using the approved diagnostic system
C1A03-26 Left Front Height

Sensor - Signal rate Sensor signal rate of Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
of change below change below damaged. Visually inspect the height sensor for
threshold threshold/signal voltage security, damage and correct orientation/installation.
stuck Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
Height sensor linkage electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
disconnected circuit for continuity or short circuit. Repair/renew as
Height sensor fault necessary. Where possible, refer to the guided
Height sensor harness diagnostic routine for this DTC on the approved
wiring short circuit to diagnostic system
ground, short circuit to
power or high resistance

Sensor - Signal rate Left-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
of change above sensor signal rate of electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
threshold change above threshold circuit for continuity or short circuit. Visually inspect
Height sensor harness the height sensor for security, damage and correct
wiring short circuit to orientation/installation. Repair/renew as necessary.
ground, short circuit to Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
power or intermittent routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
connection system
Height sensor fault

Sensor - Signal Left-hand front height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
invalid sensor signal invalid system
Incorrect height calibration
process

Sensor - Alignment Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
or adjustment adjustment incorrect; damaged. Visually inspect the height sensor for
incorrect signal out of range security, damage and correct orientation/installation.
Height sensor linkage not Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
connected electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
Height sensor linkage circuit for continuity or short circuit. Repair/renew as
toggled necessary. Where possible, refer to the guided
Height sensor loose diagnostic routine for this DTC on the approved
Height sensor bracket bent diagnostic system. If any height sensor fixings are
Incorrect height calibration slackened or found to be loose, or a height sensor
Wiring to height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride height must be
short to ground re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the
Wiring to height sensor approved diagnostic system
short to other cable
Height sensor electrical
fault
Sensor - Performance Left-hand front height
NOTE: If any height sensor fixings are slackened or
or incorrect sensor height performance
found to be loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the
operation not as expected/signal
vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated.
changing slower than
expected Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check
Axle valve block pipes the height sensor for correct installation and torque
connected incorrectly of fixings. If necessary, calibrate the system using
Height sensor incorrectly the approved diagnostic system. Where available,
installed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on
Blocked/damaged or the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air
crushed gallery pipe spring leak. Check the air harness for evidence of
Blocked/damaged or melting, crushing, kinking or collapsing. Check the
crushed air spring pipe front and rear valve block pipes for correct routing
Corner valve stuck closed and installation. Refer to the approved diagnostic
(mechanically) system for corner, reservoir and exhaust valve
Reservoir valve stuck open checks. Check the corner valve for leaks
(mechanically)
C1A04-1C Right Front Height

Sensor - Circuit Right-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
voltage out of range sensor signal voltage out electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
of range circuit for continuity or short circuit. Check sensor
Height sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If any height
disconnected sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose, or
Height sensor harness a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride
wiring short circuit to height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the system
ground, short circuit to using the approved diagnostic system
power or high resistance
Height sensor fault
C1A04-26 Right Front Height

Sensor - Signal rate Right-hand front height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
of change below sensor signal rate of damaged. Visually inspect the wiring harness and
threshold change below connectors for water ingress. Where possible, refer
threshold/signal voltage to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
stuck approved diagnostic system
Height sensor linkage
disconnected
Height sensor fault
Height sensor harness
wiring short circuit to
ground, short circuit to
power or short to each
other

Sensor - Signal rate Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors
of change above sensor signal rate of for damage or water ingress. Visually inspect the
threshold change above threshold height sensor for security, damage and correct
Height sensor harness orientation/installation. Repair/renew as necessary.
wiring short circuit to Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
ground, short circuit to routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
power or high resistance system
Height sensor fault

Sensor - Signal Right-hand front height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
invalid sensor signal invalid system
Incorrect height calibration
process

Sensor - Alignment Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
or adjustment adjustment incorrect; damaged. Visually inspect the height sensor for
incorrect signal out of range security, damage and correct orientation/installation.
Height sensor linkage not Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to the
connected electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
Height sensor linkage circuit for continuity or short circuit. Repair/renew as
toggled necessary. Where possible, refer to the guided
Height sensor loose diagnostic routine for this DTC on the approved
Height sensor bracket bent diagnostic system. If any height sensor fixings are
Incorrect height calibration slackened or found to be loose, or a height sensor
Wiring to height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride height must be
short to ground re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the
Wiring to height sensor approved diagnostic system
short to other cable
Height sensor electrical
fault
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Anti-Lock
Braking System (ABS)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Anti-Lock Braking System module, for
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Diagnosis
and Testing).

C0021-09 Brake Booster
Performance - No vacuum available from Check integrity of brake booster vacuum hose.
Component Failures engine due to split/leaking Check and install a new brake booster as required
hose etc
Brake booster servo has
failed due to lack of vacuum
C0030-38 Left Front Tone

Wheel - Signal Left front magnetic pulse Check the left front magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0031-12 Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor - Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Short to battery fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to power. Repair
Sensor internal fault harness as required. If no harness fault found,
suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect
Circuit short to fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground or
ground or open Sensor internal fault open circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
harness fault found, suspect wheel speed sensor.
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect

Signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for partial or
shape/waveform Sensor internal fault intermittently grounded signal circuit. Repair
failure harness as required. If no harness fault found,
module/component is suspect. To validate the repair
and extinguish the lamps, the vehicle needs to be
driven above 9mph/15kph
C0031-2F Left Front Wheel

Signal erratic fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
required. If no harness fault found, suspect wheel
speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. To validate the repair and extinguish the
lamps, the vehicle needs to be driven above
9mph/15kph

Speed Sensor - No Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for open circuit or high
Magnetic pulse ring resistance. Check connectors for damage or
de-magnetised or damaged corrosion. Check the wheel speed sensor for correct
Sensor internal fault location and contamination. Check the magnetic
pulse wheel for contamination, damage or
de-magnetisation. Clean or replace the sensor or
wheel bearing as required. Refer to the Warranty

Signal compare fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
failure Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
9mph/15kph

Speed Sensor - Incorrect wheels/tyres Check the correct wheels and tyres are installed.
Signal plausibility installed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure Electrical wiring harness wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
fault power, or ground. Check for EMC influences on the
EMC influences on left front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
wheel speed sensor and wheel for damage/contamination and
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a
Magnetic pulse wheel new sensor or wheel bearing as required. Refer to
damaged/contaminated, the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
de-magnetised module/component is suspect
Sensor internal fault
C0032-11 Left Front wheel

Speed Sensor Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Supply - Circuit fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
short to ground Sensor internal fault Repair harness as required. If no harness fault
found, suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
C0033-38 Right Front Tone
Wheel - Signal Right front magnetic pulse Check the right front magnetic pulse ring for
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated damage or contamination. Clean or replace as
Incorrect component required. If no damage/contamination found,
installed suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Sensor internal fault Policy and Procedures manual if a
driven above 9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C0034-12 Right Front Wheel



C0034-2F Right Front Wheel

9mph/15kph


9mph/15kph

EMC influences on right front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair wiring harness, install a

C0036-38 Left Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Left rear magnetic pulse ring Check the left rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0037-12 Left Rear Wheel



C0037-2F Left Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph

9mph/15kph

EMC influences on left rear speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a

C0039-38 Right Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Right rear magnetic pulse Check the right rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. . If
Incorrect component no damage/contamination found, suspect wheel
installed speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Sensor internal fault Procedures manual if a module/component is
9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C003A-12 Right Rear Wheel



C003A-2F Right Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Audio
Amplifier Module (AAM)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Amplifier Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B128A-11 Speaker #13 -
Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
ground fault speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
Speaker fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
Audio amplifier amplifier module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
fault manual if a module/component is suspect

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
battery fault speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short

Circuit open Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
fault speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
B128A-1A Speaker #13 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
below threshold fault speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
B128A-1E Speaker #13 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
out of range fault speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
Speaker fault Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or
Audio amplifier speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module. Refer to the
fault Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
B128B-11 Speaker #14 -

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
ground fault speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
battery fault speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short

Circuit open Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
fault speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
B128B-1A Speaker #14 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
below threshold fault speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
B128B-1E Speaker #14 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
out of range fault speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
Speaker fault Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or
Audio amplifier speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module. Refer to the
fault Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
B128C-11 Speaker #15 -

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
ground fault circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open
Speaker fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio amplifier module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
fault module/component is suspect

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
battery fault circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open

Circuit open Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
fault circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
B128C-1A Speaker #15 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
below threshold fault circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
B128C-1E Speaker #15 -

Circuit resistance Wiring harness Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
out of range fault circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit. Check
Speaker fault speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker
Audio amplifier fault suspect audio amplifier module. Refer to the Warranty
fault Policy and Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
B128D-11 Speaker #16 - NOTES:

Circuit short to Wiring harness
ground fault
Speaker fault
Audio amplifier Only applies to vehicles fitted with Premium or Super Premium
fault audio system
On vehicles fitted with Super Premium sound systems this DTC

refers to the high frequency center speaker circuit
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the front center

speaker circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair circuit as
required, clear DTC and retest
If fault persists, check and install a new speaker as required.
Clear DTC and retest
If no harness or speaker faults are evident, check and install a
new audio amplifier module as required. Clear DTC and retest

Circuit short to Wiring harness
battery fault
Speaker fault
fault audio system


speaker circuit for short circuit to power. Repair circuit as

Circuit open Wiring harness
fault
Speaker fault
fault audio system


speaker circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Check for poor or
corroded connections and backed out pins. Repair circuit as
B128D-1A Speaker #16 - NOTES:

Circuit resistance Wiring harness
below threshold fault
Speaker fault
fault audio system

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the wiring harness

and connectors on the front center speaker circuit. Repair circuit
as required, clear DTC and retest
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Blind Spot Monitoring System Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Warning Devices (413-09 Warning Devices, Diagnosis and Testing).

B11C9-11 Driver Display Status LED -
Circuit short to ground System status LED circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Short circuit to ground check the system status LED circuit for short
circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required,
clear DTC and retest
B11C9-15 Driver Display Status LED -

Circuit short to battery or System status LED circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open Short circuit to power, open check the system status LED circuit for short
circuit, high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
B11D6-11 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to ground Warning status LED circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Short circuit to ground check the warning status LED circuit for short
circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required,
B11D6-15 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to battery or Warning status LED circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open Short circuit to power, open check the warning status LED circuit for short
circuit, high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
U0010-00 Medium Speed CAN
Communication Bus - No CAN fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sub type information check the power and ground connections to
the module
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity
test
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the CAN network. Repair circuit as
U0140-00 Lost Communication With

Body Control Module - No Loss of CAN communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sub type information with central junction box check the power and ground connections to
the central junction box
test
check the CAN network between the central
junction box and blindspot monitoring control
module(s). Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest

Instrument Panel Cluster Loss of CAN communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
(IPC) Control Module - No with instrument cluster check the power and ground connections to
sub type information the instrument cluster
test
check the CAN network between the
instrument cluster and blindspot monitoring
control module(s). Repair circuit as required,

Side Obstacle Detection Loss of CAN communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Control Module - Left - No with left side blindspot check the power and ground connections to
sub type information monitoring control module the left side blindspot monitoring control
Harness fault between left module
side mirror and left side Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module system, complete a CAN network integrity
test
check the CAN network between the left side
blindspot monitoring control module and the
right side blindspot monitoring control
module. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC
and retest
check the left side harness between the left
side mirror and the left side blindspot
monitoring control module. Repair circuit as

Side Obstacle Detection Loss of CAN communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Control Module - Right - No with right side blindspot check the power and ground connections to
sub type information monitoring control module the right side blindspot monitoring control
Harness fault between right module
side mirror and right side Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module system, complete a CAN network integrity
test
check the CAN network between the right
side blindspot monitoring control module and
the left side blindspot monitoring control
module. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC
and retest
check the right side harness between the
right side mirror and the right side blindspot
monitoring control module. Repair circuit as
U0300-00 Internal Control Module
Software Incompatibility - The blindspot monitoring Check the central junction box for related
No sub type information control module or module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
software is not compatible Check the restraints control module for
with the vehicle related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Check that the latest module software
version is installed in the blindspot
monitoring control module(s)
Check the blindspot monitoring control
module(s) part number, install the correct
part as required. Clear DTC and retest
U0415-68 Invalid Data Received From

Anti-Lock Brake System Unexpected data received Check the ABS control module for related
(ABS) Control Module - from ABS control module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Event information
U0422-68 Invalid Data Received From
Body Control Module - Unexpected data received Check the central junction box for related
Event information from central junction box DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U2100-00 Initial Configuration Not

Complete - No sub type Car configuration file Check and amend the car configuration file as
information incorrect required using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Configuration Incompatible Car configuration file Check and amend the car configuration file as
- No sub type information information incompatible to required using the manufacturer approved
blindspot monitoring control diagnostic system
modules
U3000-44 Control Module - Data

memory failure Blindspot monitoring control Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault
module(s) - Internal failure persists, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the power and ground
circuits to the module. Repair as required,
If fault persists, check and install a new
blindspot monitoring control module as
required

Watchdog/safety Blindspot monitoring control Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault
microcontroller failure module(s) - Internal failure persists, refer to the electrical circuit
required
U3000-49 Control Module - Internal

electronic failure Blindspot monitoring control Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault
module(s) - Internal failure persists, refer to the electrical circuit
required
U3003-62 Battery Voltage - Signal

compare failure Blindspot monitoring control Refer to relevant section of workshop manual
module(s) voltage differs and battery care manual. Check battery state
more than ±2V compared to of charge and starting/charging system
central electronics module performance. Check power supply circuit from
voltage rear junction box to the blindspot monitoring
control modules
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
the power and ground supply circuits to the
modules. Repair wiring harness as required.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Central
Junction Box (BCM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Central Junction Box, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1008-11 Wiper Mode Switch -
Circuit short to ground Master wipe switch input Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit at ground for more master wipe switch circuit between the wiper
than 1 second switch and the central junction box for short to
ground. Repair wiring harness as required. If no
fault is found in the harness suspect the switch.
Check switch for short to ground, install a new
switch as required. If the switch is not at fault
suspect the central junction box
B1008-15 Wiper Mode Switch -

Circuit short to battery Master wipe switch input Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
or open circuit at battery voltage or master wipe switch circuit between the wiper
open load for more than 1 switch and the central junction box for short to
second power or open circuit. Repair wiring harness as
required. If no fault is found in the harness
suspect the switch. Check switch for short to
power or open circuit, install a new switch as
required. If the switch is not at fault suspect the
central junction box
B1008-1E Wiper Mode Switch -

Circuit resistance out of Master wipe switch input Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
range circuit signal out of range master wipe switch circuit between the wiper
for more than 1 second switch and the central junction box for partial
short or open circuit, high resistance across
connectors, or short to another circuit. Repair
wiring harness as required. If no fault is found in
the harness suspect the switch. Check switch for
damaged connector pins, install a new switch as
required
B1009-51 Ignition Authorization -

Not programmed Configure the central junction box as a new
NOTE: This DTC is only likely
module using the manufacturers approved
to occur following component
diagnostic system
replacement applications failing
prior to completion
Security identifier not

programmed in central
junction box (Part of
immobilization set-up)

Signal compare failure Configure the module using the manufacturers
approved diagnostic system. If problem persists
carry out CAN network integrity test and on
demand self-test using manufacturer approved
prior to completion
diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
Encrypted data exchange electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuit
between instrument cluster
and the central junction
box does not match

Circuit/component Circuit/component
NOTE: Only diagnose this DTC if the Customer is
protection time-out protection time-out
reporting a start related issue
CAN circuit fault
Instrument cluster fault Clear the DTC and retest. Check for additional
Central junction box fault ignition related DTCs and rectify as necessary. If
Battery voltage too low problem persists, carry out CAN network integrity
test and on demand self-test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
circuits

Invalid serial data Invalid serial data received
received CAN circuit fault
Instrument Cluster fault
Clear the DTC and retest. Check for additional
ignition related DTCs and rectify as necessary. If
problem persists, carry out CAN network integrity
test and on demand self-test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
circuits
B100D-51 Column Lock

Authorization - Not Configure the central junction box as a new
programmed module using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system
prior to completion
Security identifier not

programmed in central
junction box (Part of
Immobilization set-up)

Authorization - Signal Signal plausibility failure
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the
plausibility failure Steering column lock
Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
unable to perform lock
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
action
CAN network fault Check the serviceability of the steering column
Anti-lock braking system, and lock. Clear the DTC and retest. If problem
engine control module, persists, carry out CAN network integrity test and
central junction box fault on demand self test using manufacturer approved
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
Authorization - Signal Signal incorrect after event
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no
incorrect after event Instrument cluster fault
fault condition is present and should be ignored unless
CAN network fault
the customer has reported a vehicle / engine start
concern. Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer
concern prior to diagnosis
Check for additional related DTCs. Clear the DTC

and retest. If problem persists, carry out CAN
network integrity test and on demand self test
using manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits

Authorization - Invalid Configure the central junction box as a new
serial data received module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. If the problem persists, carry
out CAN network integrity test and on demand
prior to completion
self-test using the manufacturer approved
Encrypted data exchange diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
between steering column electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
lock and the central
junction box does not
match

Authorisation - Missing Missing message
message CAN fault
No response from electric
steering column lock
control module, instrument
cluster, central junction box
Battery voltage at electric Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
steering column lock the key fob and retest. Check for related DTCs
control module too low and refer to the relevant DTC index
Electric steering column If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that
lock control module, the steering column lock may fail to unlock if the
instrument cluster, central vehicle is parked with a high steering angle or
junction box fault with the road wheel against a curb. If the column
lock is failing to disengage, the customer may be
able to rectify this by rotating the steering wheel
while pressing the engine start button
If fault persists, complete a CAN network
integrity test using the manufacturers approved
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
required

Authorisation - Battery voltage at electric
Component internal steering column lock
failure control module too low
Torque load on steering
column
CAN fault
Electric steering column Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
lock control module - the key fob and retest
Internal failure If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
required
Ensure the column lock bolt movement is not
obstructed or restricted (the parked position of
the road wheels may be exerting a turning force
through the steering column, preventing the lock
from releasing. The steering wheel may need to
be held against the force to allow the column
lock to release). Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and
unlock car using the key fob and retest
If fault persists, complete a CAN network
integrity test using the manufacturers approved
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check and install a new electric
steering column lock control module as required
B1024-83 Start Control Unit -

Value of signal Value of signal protection Clear the DTC and retest. Refer to the electrical
protection calculation calculation incorrect circuit diagrams and check immobilizer antenna
incorrect Immobilizer antenna unit unit circuits. If the problem persists, renew the
fault immobilizer antenna unit
LIN network fault
B1024-87 Start Control Unit -

Missing message Value of signal protection Clear the DTC and retest. Refer to the electrical
calculation incorrect circuit diagrams and check immobilizer antenna
Immobilizer antenna unit unit circuits. If the problem persists, renew the
fault immobilizer antenna unit
LIN network fault
B1026-11 Steering Column Lock -

Circuit short to ground Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
electric steering column lock circuits
B102B-67 Passive Key - Signal

incorrect after event Configure the central junction box as a new
module using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. If the problem persists, carry
out CAN network integrity test and on demand
prior to completion
self-test using the manufacturer approved
Passive key authorization diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
signal incorrect after event electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
Encrypted data exchange
between electric steering
column lock control module
and central junction box
does not match
Low speed CAN fault
Keyless vehicle module
fault
Central junction box fault
B102B-87 Passive Key - Missing

message Passive key authorization
NOTE: The action below is only required if this DTC
missing message
and DTC B1B01-87 have been stored, or vehicle start
Confirm placement of key
issue has been reported
within vehicle
Low speed CAN fault Check whereabouts of keys, including spare and
Key fob battery low/battery confirm correct functionality
contact issue Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Interference from other RF the power and ground circuits to the keyless
signal vehicle module and receiver
Electromagnetic Check CAN communications between central
compatibility/noise junction box and keyless vehicle module
Keyless vehicle module Check key fob battery
fault Check vehicle surroundings for possible sources
Receiver fault of interference, move vehicle and retest. Check
Receiver not programmed CAN network for interference/electromagnetic
correctly compatibility related issues
Serial communication fault Check serial circuit between receiver and keyless
(between receiver and vehicle module. Refer to the electrical circuit
keyless vehicle module) diagrams and check circuits to all three antennas
Key fault Disconnect battery, then re-connect - confirm
Passive antenna fault correct operation by re-programming keys using
Central junction box fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Published: 05-Aug-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Climate
Control Module (HVAC)
Climate Control Module (HVAC)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Climate Control Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1030-01 Left Front Seat
Heater - General Left front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
electrical failure heater circuit short seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
to ground, short to circuit. Check connection to LIN 1 / A bus and power. Check
power, open circuit car configuration set up. Check and install a new left front
Left front seat seat heater element as required. Check and install a new
heater element(s) left front heated seat module as required. Check and install
failure a new Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the
Left front seat warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
heater thermistor suspect
failure
Left front heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1030-4B Left Front Seat

Heater - Over Left front seat Check and install a new left front heater element as
temperature heater thermistor required. Check and install a new left front heated seat
failure module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
Left front heated Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
seat module failure procedures manual if a module is suspect
Climate Control
Module failure
Heater - Missing Left front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
message heater LIN circuit seat heater LIN 1 / A circuit for short to ground, short to
short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a new left front heated
short to power, open seat module as required. Check and install a new Climate
circuit Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Left front heated procedures manual if a module is suspect. If seen with
seat module failure B1032-87, U0422-86 or U3000-55, this is an indication of an
Climate Control incorrect or unrecognised car configuration file.
Module failure
Configuration fault
B1031-01 Left Rear Seat

Heater - General Left rear seat heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
electrical failure circuit short to seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
ground, short to circuit. Check connection to LIN 1 / A bus and power. Check
power, open circuit car configuration set up. Check and install a new left rear
Left rear seat heater seat heater element as required. Check and install a new
element(s) failure left rear heated seat module as required. Check and install a
Left rear seat heater new Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the
thermistor failure warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Left rear heated suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1031-4B Left Rear Seat

Heater - Over Left rear seat heater Check and install a new left rear heater element as required.
temperature thermistor failure Check and install a new left rear heated seat module as
Left rear heated required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
seat module failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Climate Control if a module is suspect
Module failure

Heater - Missing Left rear seat heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
message LIN circuit short to seat heater LIN 1 / A circuit for short to ground, short to
ground, short to power, open circuit. Check and install a new left rear heated
power, open circuit seat module as required. Check and install a new Climate
Left rear heated Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
seat module failure procedures manual if a module is suspect. If seen with
Climate Control B1033-87, U0422-86 or U3000-55, this is an indication of
Module failure incorrect or unrecognised car configuration file
Configuration fault
B1032-01 Right Front Seat

Heater - General Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
to ground, short to circuit. Check connection to LIN 2 / B bus and Power. Check
power, open circuit car configuration set up. Check and install a new right front
Right front seat seat heater element as required. Check and install a new
heater element(s) right front heated seat module as required. Check and install
failure a new Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the
Right front seat warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
heater thermistor suspect
failure
Right front heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1032-4B Right Front Seat

Heater - Over Right front seat Check and install a new right front heater element as
temperature heater thermistor required. Check and install a new right front heated seat
Right front heated Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater - Missing Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
message heater LIN circuit seat heater LIN 2 / B circuit for short to ground, short to
short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a new right front
short to power, open heated seat module as required. Check and install a new
circuit Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty
Right front heated policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect. If seen
seat module failure with B1030-87, U0422-86 or U3000-55, this is an indication
Climate Control of incorrect or unrecognised car configuration file
Module failure
Configuration fault
B1033-01 Right Rear Seat

Heater - General Right rear seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
to ground, short to circuit. Check connection to LIN 2 / B bus and Power. Check
power, open circuit and install a new right rear seat heater element as required.
Right rear seat Check and install a new right rear heated seat module as
heater element(s) required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Right rear seat if a module is suspect
heater thermistor
failure
Right rear heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1033-4B Right Rear Seat

Heater - Over Right rear seat Check and install a new right rear heater element as
temperature heater thermistor required. Check and install a new right rear heated seat
Right rear heated Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater - Missing Right rear seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
message heater LIN circuit seat heater LIN circuit for short to ground, short to power,
short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a new right rear heated seat
short to power, open module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
circuit Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Right rear heated procedures manual if a module is suspect. If seen with
seat module failure B1031-87, U0422-86 or U3000-55, this is an indication of
Climate Control incorrect or unrecognised car configuration file
Module failure
Configuration fault

Heater Element - Left front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
General electrical heater circuit short seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new left front seat heater
power, open circuit element as required. Check and install a new left front
Left front seat heated seat module as required. Check and install a new
heater element Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
Left front heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater Element - Left rear seat heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
General electrical circuit short to seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
failure ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new left rear seat heater element
power, open circuit as required. Check and install a new left rear heated seat
Left rear seat heater module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
element failure Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Left rear heated procedures manual if a module is suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater Element - Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new right front seat heater
power, open circuit element as required. Check and install a new right front
Right front seat heated seat module as required. Check and install a new
Right front heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
Heater Element - Right rear seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new right rear seat heater
power, open circuit element as required. Check and install a new right rear
Right rear seat heated seat module as required. Check and install a new
Right rear heated
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater Sensor - Left front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new left front seat heater as
power, open circuit required. Check and install a new left front heated seat
Left front seat module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
heater sensor failure Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Left front heated procedures manual if a module is suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure

Heater Sensor - Left rear seat heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
General electrical circuit short to seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
failure ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new left rear seat heater as
power, open circuit required. Check and install a new left rear heated seat
Left rear seat heater module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
sensor failure Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Left rear heated procedures manual if a module is suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B103A-01 Right Front Seat

Heater Sensor - Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new right front seat heater as
power, open circuit required. Check and install a new right front heated seat
Right front seat module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
Right front heated procedures manual if a module is suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B103B-01 Right Rear Seat

Heater Sensor - Right rear seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
failure to ground, short to circuit. Check and install a new right rear seat heater as
power, open circuit required. Check and install a new right rear heated seat
Right rear seat module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
Right rear heated procedures manual if a module is suspect
seat module failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B105A-01 Cabin Temperature

Sensor Fan - In car temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
General electrical sensor aspirator and ground supplies to the in car temperature and humidity
failure circuit fault sensor. Check the aspirator diagnostic line for open circuit,
In car sensor unit short circuit. Repair wiring as required. Check and install a
internal fault new sensor as required. Check and install a new Climate
Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
B1083-01 Recirculation
Damper Motor - Recirculation motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
General electrical circuit short to recirculation motor circuit for short to power, open circuit.
failure ground, short to Check recirculation motor has not jammed or been
power, open circuit obstructed. Check and install a new recirculation motor as
Recirculation motor required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
jammed required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Recirculation motor if a module is suspect
failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1085-00 Defroster Damper

Motor - No sub type Foreign object
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault condition
information obstructing
is present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported
windshield
a climate control system concern. Verify the customer concern prior
distribution door
to diagnosis
Windshield
distribution motor Check and remove any obstruction in windshield distribution
circuit short to door. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground, short to windshield distribution motor circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit short to power, open circuit. Check and install a new
Damaged windshield windshield distribution door as required. Check and install a
distribution door new windshield distribution motor as required. Refer to the
Windshield warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
distribution motor suspect
failure
B1085-49 Defroster Damper

Motor - Internal Windshield Check and install a new windshield distribution motor as
electronic failure distribution motor required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
failure if a module is suspect
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus

off LIN bus "A" circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN bus "1 /
short to ground, A" circuit for short to ground, short to power, high resistance,
short to power, high open circuit. Check and install new front actuators as
resistance, open required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
circuit required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
All front actuators if a module is suspect
failed
Climate Control
Module failure
B1088-88 LIN Bus "B" - Bus

off LIN bus "B" circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN bus "2 /
short to ground, B" circuit for short to ground, short to power, high resistance,
short to power, high open circuit. Check and install new front actuators as
resistance, open required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
circuit required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
All front actuators if a module is suspect
failed
Climate Control
Module failure
B10BE-11 Solar Sensor -

Circuit short to Solar sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check solar
ground short to ground sensor circuit for short to ground. Check and install a new
Solar sensor failure solar sensor as required. Check and install a new Climate
Climate Control Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Module failure procedures manual if a module is suspect
B11ED-68 Electric Heater

Control - Event Event information -
information electric heater
invalid
an electric booster heater concern. Verify the customer concern prior
communication
to diagnosis
message
Clear the DTC. With engine coolant temperature low, set
climate control temperature to high and retest. If DTC
remains in isolation suspect the Electric booster heater. If
additional LIN related DTCs are logged refer to the actions
for those DTCs. Check and install a new electric heater as
required, refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
if a module is suspect

Control - Missing LIN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
message Electric heater and ground supplies to the electric heater module. Check the
module fault LIN circuits. Repair and wiring harness faults, clear the DTC
and retest the system. If the DTC resets suspect the electric
heater module, refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect
Control - LIN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
Component internal Electric heater and ground supplies to the electric heater module. Check the
failure module fault LIN circuits. Repair and wiring harness faults, clear the DTC
and retest the system. If the DTC resets suspect the electric
heater module, refer to the warranty policy and procedures
B11EE-01 A/C Compressor -

General electrical Refrigerant solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check refrigerant
failure valve circuit short to solenoid valve circuit for short to ground, short to each
ground, short to other. Check and install a new refrigerant solenoid valve as
each other required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
Refrigerant solenoid required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
valve failure if a module is suspect
Climate Control
Module failure
B11F0-11 Air Intake Damper

Position Sensor - Recirculation motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to circuit short to recirculation motor circuit for short to ground. Check and
ground ground install a new recirculation motor as required. Check and
Recirculation motor install a new Climate Control Module as required. Refer to
failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Climate Control suspect
Module failure
B11F0-15 Air Intake Damper

Position Sensor - Recirculation motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to circuit short to recirculation motor circuit for short to power, open circuit.
battery or open power, open circuit Check and install a new recirculation motor as required.
Recirculation motor Check and install a new Climate Control Module as required.
failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
Climate Control module is suspect
Module failure
B11FF-84 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Insufficient Check the timestamp for the DTC to see if it was set during
below allowable refrigerant in system cold ambient conditions (below 9 degrees C (49 degrees F).
range Air conditioning If so allow the vehicle to warm soak to verify the DTC was
compressor fault set correctly. Check the refrigerant system using a suitable
Refrigerant pressure charging station. Check the air conditioning compressor for
sensor failure correct operation. Check and install a new refrigerant
Refrigerant solenoid pressure sensor as required. Check and install a new
valve failure refrigerant solenoid as required. Check and install a new
Climate Control Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty
Module failure policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
B11FF-85 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Excessive refrigerant Check the refrigerant system using a suitable charging
above allowable in system station. Check the condenser and pipework for damage or
range Blockage in air restriction. Check and install a new Refrigerant pressure
conditioning system sensor as required. Check and install a new refrigerant
pipework or solenoid as required. Check the air conditioning fan for
condenser correct operation. Check and install a new refrigerant
Air conditioning fan solenoid as required. Check and install a new Climate
inoperative Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Refrigerant pressure procedures manual if a module is suspect
sensor failure
Refrigerant solenoid
valve failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1A59-11 Sensor 5 Volt

Supply - Circuit Sensor 5 volt supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor 5
short to ground circuit short to volt supply circuit for short to ground. Check and install a
ground new Refrigerant pressure sensor as required. Check and
Refrigerant pressure install a new Fresh - Re-circulated air mode motor as
sensor failure required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
Fresh - Re-circulated required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
air mode motor if a module is suspect
failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1A59-13 Sensor 5 Volt
Supply - Circuit Sensor 5 volt supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor 5
open circuit open circuit volt supply circuit for open circuit. Check and install a new
Refrigerant pressure Refrigerant pressure sensor as required. Check and install a
sensor failure new Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the
Climate Control warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Module failure suspect
B1A60-11 Pollution Sensor -

Hydrocarbon - Air quality sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air quality
Circuit short to circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground. Check and install a new air
ground ground quality sensor as required. Check and install a new Climate
Air quality sensor Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual if a module is suspect
Climate Control
Module failure
B1A61-11 Cabin Temperature

Sensor - Circuit Cabin temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check cabin
short to ground sensor circuit short temperature sensor circuit for short to ground. Check and
to ground install a new cabin temperature sensor as required. Check
Cabin temperature and install a new Climate Control Module as required. Refer
sensor failure to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Climate Control suspect
Module failure
B1A61-15 Cabin Temperature

Sensor - Circuit Cabin temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check cabin
short to battery or sensor circuit short temperature sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit.
open to power, open Check and install a new cabin temperature sensor as
circuit required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
Cabin temperature required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
sensor failure if a module is suspect
Climate Control
Module failure
B1A63-11 Right Solar Sensor -

Circuit short to Right solar sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right solar
ground circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground between rear parcel shelf
ground and rear climate control panel. Check car configuration
Right solar sensor values. Check and install a new solar sensor as required.
failure Check CAN connection from Rear Climate Control Module.
CAN network fault Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B1A64-11 Left Solar Sensor -

Circuit short to Left solar sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left solar
ground circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground between rear parcel shelf
ground and rear climate control panel. Check car configuration
Left solar sensor values. Check and install a new solar sensor as required.
failure Check CAN connection from Rear Climate Control Module.
CAN network fault Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B1A67-13 Sensor Ground -

Circuit open Sensor(s) ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
circuit open circuit circuit for open circuit. DTCs B1A61-15, B1A59-13 and
Climate Control P0530-15 will also be logged. Check and install a new
Module failure Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
B1A69-01 Humidity Sensor -

General electrical Humidity sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check humidity
failure circuit fault sensor circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
Humidity sensor circuit. Check and install a new combined cabin temperature
failure & humidity sensor as required. Check and install a new
Climate Control Climate Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty
Module failure policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
B1B62-11 Pollution Sensor -

NOx - Circuit short Air quality sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air quality
to ground circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground. Check and install a new air
ground quality sensor as required. Check and install a new Climate
Air quality sensor Control Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual if a module is suspect
Climate Control
Module failure
B1B71-11 Evaporator
Temperature Sensor Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
- Circuit short to temperature sensor temperature sensor circuit for short to ground. Check and
ground circuit short to install a new evaporator temperature sensor as required.
ground Check and install a new Climate Control Module as required.
Evaporator Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
temperature sensor module is suspect
failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1B71-15 Evaporator
Temperature Sensor Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
- Circuit short to temperature sensor temperature sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit.
battery or open circuit short to Check and install a new evaporator temperature sensor as
power, open circuit required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
Evaporator required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
temperature sensor if a module is suspect
failure
Climate Control
Module failure
B1B72-11 LIN Bus #1 Power

Supply Circuit - LIN bus 1 circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN bus 1
Circuit short to short to ground circuit for short to ground. Check and install new stepper
ground Defrost stepper motors as required. Check and install a new seat heater
motor failure module as required. Check and install a new Climate Control
Front right foot Module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
stepper motor procedures manual if a module is suspect
failure
Front right face
stepper motor
failure
Front right air mix
stepper motor
failure
Rear right air mix
stepper motor
Front left seat
heater
Rear left seat heater
Climate Control
Module failure
B1B73-11 LIN Bus #2 Power

Supply Circuit - LIN bus 2 circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN bus 2
Circuit short to short to ground circuit for short to ground. Check and install new stepper
ground Front left foot motors as required. Check and install a new electric heater
stepper motor as required. Check and install new seat heater module as
Front left face required. Check and install a new Climate Control Module as
stepper motor required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Front left air mix if a module is suspect
stepper motor
Rear left foot
stepper motor
Rear left face
stepper motor
Rear left air mix
stepper motor
Front right seat
heater
Rear right seat
heater
Electric booster
heater (Diesel only)
Climate Control
Module failure
B134C-00 Left Front Face

Damper Motor - No Foreign object
sub type obstructing left front
information face distribution
door
to diagnosis
Left front face
distribution motor Check and remove any obstruction in left front face
circuit short to distribution door. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short to check left front face distribution motor circuit for short to
power, open circuit ground, short to power, open circuit. Check and install a new
Damaged left front
face distribution left front face distribution door as required. Check and install
door a new left front face distribution motor as required. Refer to
Left front face the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
distribution motor suspect
failure
B134C-49 Left Front Face

Damper Motor - Left front face Check and install a new left front face distribution motor as
Internal electronic distribution motor required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
failure failure if a module is suspect
B1351-00 Left Front Foot

sub type obstructing left front
information foot distribution
door
to diagnosis
Left front foot
distribution motor Check and remove any obstruction in left front foot
ground, short to check left front foot distribution motor circuit for short to
Damaged left front left front foot distribution door as required. Check and install
foot distribution a new left front foot distribution motor as required. Refer to
door the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Left front foot suspect
distribution motor
failure
B1351-49 Left Front Foot

Damper Motor - Left front foot Check and install a new left front foot distribution motor as
B1352-00 Left Front

Temperature Foreign object
Damper Motor - No obstructing left front
sub type temperature
information distribution door
to diagnosis
Left front
temperature Check and remove any obstruction in left front temperature
distribution motor distribution door. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short to check left front temperature distribution motor circuit for
ground, short to short to ground, short to power, open circuit. Check and
power, open circuit install a new left front temperature distribution door as
Damaged left front required. Check and install a new left front temperature
temperature distribution motor as required. Refer to the warranty policy
distribution door and procedures manual if a module is suspect
Left front
temperature
distribution motor
failure
B1352-49 Left Front

Temperature Left front Check and install a new left front temperature distribution
Damper Motor - temperature motor as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Internal electronic distribution motor procedures manual if a module is suspect
failure failure
B1353-00 Right Front Face

sub type obstructing right
information front face
distribution door
to diagnosis
Right front face
distribution motor Check and remove any obstruction in right front face
ground, short to check right front face distribution motor circuit for short to
Damaged right front right front face distribution door as required. Check and
face distribution install a new right front face distribution motor as required.
door Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
Right front face module is suspect
distribution motor
failure
B1353-49 Right Front Face

Damper Motor - Right front face Check and install a new right front face distribution motor as
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Climate
Controlled Seat Module - Front/Rear (SCME/SCMF)
Climate Controlled Seat Module - Front/Rear (SCME/SCMF)
NOTES:
If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component.
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Climate Controlled Seat Module -
Front/Rear (SCME/SCMF), for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10B9-13 Blower Control - Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Circuit open LH seat blower + circuit, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LH seat
LH seat blower - circuit, blower + circuit for open circuit. Check LH seat blower - circuit
open circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors or
Connectors disconnected damaged connector pins. Check blower motor assembly for
Connector pin damage open circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Blower motor assembly manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry
open circuit out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
Climate Control Seat diagnostic system to confirm rectification. Alternatively carry
Module failure out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
B10B9-4B Blower Control - Check for mechanical restriction or debris in blower motor
Over temperature Mechanical restriction in assembly. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
blower motor assembly manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault
LH seat blower + circuit, is present. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check LH
short to ground seat blower + circuit for short to ground. Check LH seat blower
LH seat blower - circuit, - circuit for short to ground. Check blower motor assembly for
short to ground short to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Blower motor assembly, manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry
short to ground out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
B1157-13 Blower Control B - Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Circuit open RH seat blower + circuit, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RH seat
RH seat blower - circuit, blower + circuit for open circuit. Check RH seat blower - circuit
open circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors or
Connectors disconnected damaged connector pins. Check blower motor assembly for
Connector pin damage open circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Blower motor assembly manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry
open circuit out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
B1157-4B Blower Control B - Check for mechanical restriction or debris in blower motor
Over temperature Mechanical restriction in assembly. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
blower motor assembly manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault
RH seat blower + circuit, is present. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RH
short to ground seat blower + circuit for short to ground. Check RH seat blower
RH seat blower - circuit, - circuit for short to ground. Check blower motor assembly for
short to ground short to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Blower motor assembly, manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry
short to ground out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
B120E-13 Right Thermal Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Electric Device RH seat back thermal approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Control - Circuit electric device + circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat back
open open circuit thermal electric device + circuit for open circuit. Check RH seat
RH seat back thermal back thermal electric device - circuit for open circuit. Check RH
electric device - circuit, seat cushion thermal electric device + circuit for open circuit.
open circuit Check RH seat cushion thermal electric device - circuit for open
RH seat cushion thermal circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
electric device + circuit, connector pins. Check climate seat backrest thermal electric
open circuit device assembly for open circuit. Check climate seat cushion
RH seat cushion thermal thermal electric device assembly for open circuit. Refer to the
electric device - circuit, warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate Control
open circuit Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST)
Connectors disconnected using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Connector pin damage rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
Climate seat backrest associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
thermal electric device diagnostic system.
assembly, open circuit
Climate seat cushion
thermal electric device
Climate Control Seat
Module failure
B120E-19 Right Thermal Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Electric Device RH seat back thermal approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Control - Circuit electric device + circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat back
current above short to ground thermal electric device + circuit for short to ground. Check RH
threshold RH seat back thermal seat back thermal electric device - circuit for short to ground.
electric device - circuit, Check RH seat cushion thermal electric device + circuit for
short to ground short to ground. Check RH seat cushion thermal electric device
RH seat cushion thermal - circuit for short to ground. Check climate seat backrest
electric device + circuit, thermal electric device assembly for short to ground. Check
short to ground climate seat cushion thermal electric device assembly for short
RH seat cushion thermal to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
electric device - circuit, if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On
short to ground Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
Climate seat backrest diagnostic system to confirm rectification. Alternatively carry
thermal electric device out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
assembly, short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
assembly, short to ground
Module failure
B120E-4B Right Thermal Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device air
Electric Device Restriction in thermal path. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
Control - Over electric device air path manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault
temperature RH seat back thermal is present. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check,
electric device + circuit, RH seat back thermal electric device + circuit for short to
short to ground ground. Check RH seat back thermal electric device - circuit for
RH seat back thermal short to ground. Check RH seat cushion thermal electric device
electric device - circuit, + circuit for short to ground. Check RH seat cushion thermal
short to ground electric device - circuit for short to ground. Check climate seat
RH seat cushion thermal backrest thermal electric device assembly for short to ground.
electric device + circuit, Check climate seat cushion thermal electric device assembly
short to ground for short to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and
RH seat cushion thermal procedures manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is
electric device - circuit, suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Climate seat backrest rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
thermal electric device associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
assembly, short to ground diagnostic system.
Module failure
B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion - Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device fan
Component or The Climate Control Seat exhaust vent. Check for restricted thermal electric fan
system over Module LH cushion sensor movement. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
temperature input circuit temperature manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
exceeds 65 Degrees C rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
continuously for more than associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
4 seconds during cooling diagnostic system.
The Climate Control Seat
Module LH cushion sensor
input circuit temperature
is greater than 110
Degrees C for more than 4
seconds during heating
Blocked or restricted
thermal electric device fan
exhaust vent
Restricted thermal electric
fan movement
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Temperature RH seat cushion sensor approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat
open RH seat cushion sensor - cushion sensor circuit for open circuit. Check RH seat cushion
circuit, open circuit sensor - circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected
Connectors disconnected connectors or damaged connector pins. Check Climate seat
Connector pin damage cushion temperature sensor assembly for open circuit. Refer to
Climate seat cushion the warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate
temperature sensor Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test
assembly, open circuit (ODST) using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
Climate Control Seat confirm rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
Module failure associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
B1224-13 Left Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Temperature LH seat back thermal approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit electric device + circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat back
open open circuit thermal electric device + circuit for open circuit. Check LH seat
LH seat back thermal back thermal electric device - circuit for open circuit. Check LH
electric device - circuit, seat cushion thermal electric device + circuit for open circuit.
open circuit Check LH seat cushion thermal electric device - circuit for open
LH seat cushion thermal circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
electric device + circuit, connector pins. Check climate seat backrest thermal electric
open circuit device assembly for open circuit. Check climate seat cushion
LH seat cushion thermal thermal electric device assembly for open circuit. Refer to the
electric device - circuit, warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate Control
open circuit Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST)
Connectors disconnected using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Connector pin damage rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
Climate seat backrest associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
thermal electric device diagnostic system.
Module failure
B1224-19 Left Thermal Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Electric Device LH seat back thermal approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Control - Circuit electric device + circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat back
current above short to ground thermal electric device + circuit for short to ground. Check LH
threshold LH seat back thermal seat back thermal electric device - circuit for short to ground.
electric device - circuit, Check LH seat cushion thermal electric device + circuit for
short to ground short to ground. Check LH seat cushion thermal electric device
LH seat cushion thermal - circuit for short to ground. Check climate seat backrest
electric device + circuit, thermal electric device assembly for short to ground. Check
short to ground climate seat cushion thermal electric device assembly for short
LH seat cushion thermal to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
electric device - circuit, if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On
short to ground Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
Climate seat backrest diagnostic system to confirm rectification. Alternatively carry
thermal electric device out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
assembly, short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Module failure
B1224-4B Left Thermal Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device air
Electric Device Restriction in thermal path. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
Control - Over electric device air path manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault
temperature LH seat back thermal is present. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check,
electric device + circuit, LH seat back thermal electric device + circuit for short to
short to ground ground. Check LH seat back thermal electric device - circuit for
LH seat back thermal short to ground. Check LH seat cushion thermal electric device
electric device - circuit, + circuit for short to ground. Check LH seat cushion thermal
short to ground electric device - circuit for short to ground. Check climate seat
LH seat cushion thermal backrest thermal electric device assembly for short to ground.
electric device + circuit, Check climate seat cushion thermal electric device assembly
short to ground for short to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and
LH seat cushion thermal procedures manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is
electric device - circuit, suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Climate seat backrest rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
thermal electric device associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
assembly, short to ground diagnostic system.
Module failure
B1225-13 Right Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Temperature RH seat back sensor approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat back
open RH seat back sensor - sensor circuit for open circuit. Check RH seat back sensor -
circuit, open circuit circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors
Connectors disconnected or damaged connector pins. Check Climate seat back
Connector pin damage temperature sensor assembly for open circuit. Refer to the
Climate seat back warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate Control
temperature sensor Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST)
assembly, open circuit using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Climate Control Seat rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
diagnostic system.
B1229-13 Left Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Temperature LH seat back sensor approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat back
open LH seat back sensor - sensor circuit for open circuit. Check LH seat back sensor -
circuit, open circuit circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected connectors
Connectors disconnected or damaged connector pins. Check Climate seat back
Connector pin damage temperature sensor assembly for open circuit. Refer to the
Climate seat back warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate Control
temperature sensor Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST)
assembly, open circuit using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Climate Control Seat rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
diagnostic system.
B122A-11 Right Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed RH cushion fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH cushion
short to ground Blower motor assembly, fan speed for circuit short to ground. Check blower motor
short to ground assembly for short to ground. Refer to the warranty policy and
Climate Control Seat procedures manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is
Module failure suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
B122A-12 Right Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed RH cushion fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH cushion
short to battery Blower motor assembly, fan speed for circuit short to power. Check blower motor
short to power assembly for short to power. Refer to the warranty policy and
diagnostic system.
B122B-11 Right Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed RH seat back fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat back
diagnostic system.
B122B-12 Right Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed RH seat back fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, RH seat back
diagnostic system.
B122C-11 Left Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed LH cushion fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH cushion
diagnostic system.
B122C-12 Left Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed LH cushion fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH cushion
diagnostic system.
B122D-11 Left Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed LH seat back fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat back
diagnostic system.
B122D-12 Left Seat Back Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Blower Speed LH seat back fan speed, approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat back
diagnostic system.
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device fan
- Component or The Climate Control Seat exhaust vent. Check for restricted thermal electric fan
system over Module RH cushion sensor movement. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
temperature input circuit temperature manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
exceeds 65 Degrees C rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
continuously for more than associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
4 seconds during cooling diagnostic system.
Module RH cushion sensor
input circuit temperature
is greater than 110
Degrees C for more than 4
seconds during heating
exhaust vent
fan movement
B122F-98 Right Seat Back - Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device fan
system over Module RH seat back movement. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
temperature sensor input circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
temperature exceeds 65 rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
Degrees C continuously for associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
more than 4 seconds diagnostic system.
during cooling
Module RH seat back
sensor input circuit
temperature is greater
than 110 Degrees C for
more than 4 seconds
during heating
exhaust vent
fan movement
B1230-98 Left Seat Back - Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric device fan
system over Module LH seat back movement. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
temperature sensor input circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
temperature exceeds 65 rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
Degrees C continuously for associated with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
more than 4 seconds diagnostic system.
during cooling
Module LH seat back
sensor input circuit
temperature is greater
than 110 Degrees C for
more than 4 seconds
during heating
exhaust vent
fan movement
B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid Check for blockage or restriction in seat back thermal electric
leak or seal failure The Climate Control Seat device fan ducts. Check seat back thermal electric device fan
Module has detected an exhaust vent is clear. Check for blockage or restriction in seat
input temperature cushion thermal electric device fan ducts. Check seat cushion
difference greater than thermal electric device fan exhaust vent is clear. Carry out On
expected between RH seat Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
back sensor and RH diagnostic system to confirm rectification. Alternatively carry
cushion sensor out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Climate seat back manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
assembly air path leaking
Seat assembly damaged
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid Check for blockage or restriction in seat back thermal electric
leak or seal failure The Climate Control Seat device fan ducts. Check seat back thermal electric device fan
Module has detected an exhaust vent is clear. Check for blockage or restriction in seat
input temperature cushion thermal electric device fan ducts. Check seat cushion
difference greater than thermal electric device fan exhaust vent is clear. Carry out On
expected between LH seat Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
back sensor and LH diagnostic system to confirm rectification. Alternatively carry
cushion sensor out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Climate seat back manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Seat assembly damaged
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
Temperature LH seat cushion sensor approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is present.
Sensor - Circuit circuit, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, LH seat
open LH seat cushion sensor - cushion sensor circuit for open circuit. Check LH seat cushion
circuit, open circuit sensor - circuit for open circuit. Check for any disconnected
Connectors disconnected connectors or damaged connector pins. Check Climate seat
Connector pin damage cushion temperature sensor assembly for open circuit. Refer to
Climate seat cushion the warranty policy and procedures manual if the Climate
temperature sensor Control Seat Module is suspect. Carry out On Demand Self Test
assembly, open circuit (ODST) using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
Climate Control Seat confirm rectification. Alternatively carry out any pinpoint tests
diagnostic system.
U0010-88 Medium Speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
Communication Medium Speed CAN and ground connections to the module. Using the manufacturer
Bus - Bus off communication bus off approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
network.
U0140-00 Lost
Communication CAN harness link between
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
With Body Control Climate Control Seat
condition is present and should be ignored unless the
Module - No sub Module and Central
customer has reported a climate seat concern. Clear the DTC
type information Junction Box malfunction
and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Module has not received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
the expected CAN signal Central Junction Box for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
from the Central Junction Index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Box within the specified carry out network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
time interval diagrams and check Central Junction Box power and ground
circuits for open circuit. Check CAN harness between Climate
Control Seat Module and Central Junction Box, repair as
necessary.
U0142-00 Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Communication CAN harness link between Rear Junction Box for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
With Body Control Climate Control Seat Index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module "B" - No Module and Rear Junction carry out network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type Box malfunction diagrams and check Rear Junction Box power and ground
information The Climate Control Seat circuits for open circuit. Check CAN harness between Climate
Module has not received Control Seat Module and Rear Junction Box, repair as
the expected CAN signal necessary.
from the Rear Junction Box
within the specified time
interval

Communication CAN harness link between Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) for DTCs and refer to the
With Instrument Climate Control Seat relevant DTC Index. Using the manufacturer approved
Panel Cluster (IPC) Module and Instrument diagnostic system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
Control Module - Panel Cluster (IPC) the electrical circuit diagrams and check Instrument Panel
No sub type network malfunction Cluster (IPC) power and ground circuits for open circuit. Check
information The Climate Control Seat CAN harness between Climate Control Seat Module and
Module has not received Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC), repair as necessary.
the expected CAN signal
from the Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC) within the
specified time interval

Communication CAN harness link between Information and Entertainment Control Module for DTCs and
With Information Climate Control Seat refer to the relevant DTC Index. Using the manufacturer
Center "A" - No Module and Information approved diagnostic system, carry out network integrity test.
sub type and Entertainment Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Information
information Module network and Entertainment Control Module power and ground circuits
malfunction for open circuit. Check CAN harness between Climate Control
The Climate Control Seat Seat Module and Information and Entertainment Control
Module has not received Module, repair as necessary.
the expected CAN signal
from the Information and
Entertainment Control
Module within the
specified time interval
U0300-00 Internal Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

Module Software Incorrect or invalid re-configure the Climate Control Seat Module and the Rear
Incompatibility - software has been Junction Box. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
No sub type installed manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
information rectification. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if the Climate Control Seat Module is suspect.
U0401-00 Invalid Data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Received from The Engine Control Module Engine Control Module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
ECM/PCM A - No (ECM) has transmitted Index.
sub type engine speed quality
information factor CAN signal at a
specific value for a greater
than expected time period
U2101-00 Control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

Configuration Calibration re-configure the Climate Control Seat Module and the Rear
Incompatible - No incomplete/corrupt Junction Box. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
sub type manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
information rectification.
U3000-04 Control Module - Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if the
System internal Climate Control Seat Climate Control Seat Module is suspect.
failures Module failure
Module microprocessor
failed internal ROM and/or
RAM checksum test
U3003-62 Battery Voltage - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check that power
Signal compare Mismatch in battery supply voltage at Climate Control Seat Module and Rear
failure voltage of 2 volts or more Junction Box is not different by more than 2 volts. Rectify as
between the measured required. Carry out On Demand Self Test (ODST) using
battery voltage at the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
Climate Control Seat rectification.
Module and the battery
voltage signal sent from
the Rear Junction Box
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Digital Audio
Broadcast Module (DABM)
Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Digital Audio Broadcast Module, for

B11A4-11 L-Band Antenna -
Circuit short to L-Band antenna circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground ground the circuit between the antenna and the tuner
module
B11A4-15 L-Band Antenna -

Circuit short to L-Band antenna circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open power or open circuit the circuit between the antenna and the tuner
module
B11A5-11 Band 3 Antenna -

Circuit short to Band 3 antenna circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground ground the circuit
B11A5-15 Band 3 Antenna -

Circuit short to Band 3 antenna circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open power or open circuit the circuit

System internal Digital audio broadcast module Renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
failures internal failure policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect
Data memory Digital audio broadcast module Renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
failure internal RAM memory failure policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect
U3000-4A Control Module -

Incorrect Digital audio broadcast module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
component incorrect component installed system select the vehicle configuration main
installed - The module has been menu, select configure existing modules menu
installed to a vehicle not and program the module
configured to accept it

Not configured Digital audio broadcast module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
not configured correctly system select the vehicle configuration main
menu, select configure existing modules menu
and program the module

Missing message Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system select the vehicle configuration main
menu, select configure existing modules menu
and program the module

Component or Digital audio broadcast module Check that the digital audio broadcast module
system over component or system over cooling vents/air circulation is not obstructed
temperature temperature Cool the vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in
the shade and have the A/C on cool. When cool,
clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
renew the module. Refer to the warranty policy

Signal compare Digital audio broadcast module Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer
failure voltage differs more than ±2V to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
compared to central electronics Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module voltage the power and ground supply circuits to the
modules
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Driver Door
Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Door Module
(DDM/PDM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B108F-23 Cabin Lock/Unlock
Switch - Signal stuck Switch pressed longer than Check for mechanical faults/sticking on the left
low 20 seconds and right door trim switches. Check circuits for
Circuit fault short to ground or other circuits. Replace switch
or repair wiring as required
B109C-15 Front Courtesy Light -

Circuit short to battery Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
or open circuit front courtesy light circuit for short to power or
open circuit
B109D-11 Front Courtesy Light -

Circuit short to ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
front courtesy light circuit for short ground
B10EB-11 Driver Door Double

Locking Motor - Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to ground driver door double locking motor circuit for short
ground
B10EB-15 Driver Door Double

Locking Motor - Circuit Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to battery or circuit driver door double locking motor circuit for short
open to power or open circuit
B10EC-11 Passenger Door Double
short to ground passenger door double locking motor circuit for
short ground
B10EC-15 Passenger Door Double

short to battery or circuit passenger door double locking motor circuit for
open short to power or open circuit
B10ED-11 Rear Door Driver Side

Double Locking Motor - Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to ground driver door double locking motor circuit for short
ground
B10ED-15 Rear Door Driver Side

Double Locking Motor - Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to battery circuit driver door double locking motor circuit for short
or open to power or open circuit
B10EE-11 Rear Door Passenger

Side Double Locking Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Motor - Circuit short to driver door double locking motor circuit for short
ground ground
B10EE-15 Rear Door Passenger

Side Double Locking Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Motor - Circuit short to circuit driver door double locking motor circuit for short
battery or open to power or open circuit
B1108-11 Driver Door Central

short to ground driver door central locking motor circuit for short
ground
B1108-15 Driver Door Central

short to battery or circuit driver door central locking motor circuit for short
open to power or open circuit
B1109-11 Passenger Door Central

short to ground passenger door central locking motor circuit for
short ground
B1109-15 Passenger Door Central

short to battery or circuit passenger door central locking motor circuit for
open short to power or open circuit
B1163-11 Left Mirror Heater

Output Short To Ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to left mirror heater output circuit for short to
ground ground
B1163-15 Left Mirror Heater

Output Short To Power Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to circuit left mirror heater output circuit for short to
battery or open power or open circuit
B1164-11 Right Mirror Heater

- Circuit short to right mirror heater output circuit for short to
ground ground
B1164-15 Right Mirror Heater

Output Short To Power Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to circuit right mirror heater output circuit for short to
battery or open power or open circuit
B1165-11 Left Front Puddle Lamp

- Circuit short to left front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
ground ground
B1165-15 Left Front Puddle Lamp

Output Open Load Or Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Short To Battery - circuit left front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
Circuit short to battery power or open circuit
or open
B1166-11 Right Front Puddle
Lamp Output Short To Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Ground - Circuit short right front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
to ground ground
B1166-15 Right Front Puddle

Lamp Output Open Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Load Or Short To circuit right front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
Battery - Circuit short power or open circuit
to battery or open
B117E-07 Front Power Window
Up - Mechanical failure Mechanical fault Inspect the relevant door mechanism for
obstructions or mechanical faults. Repair as
required. Clear DTC and retest. If DTC remains
suspect relevant door module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect

Up - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant door module. Refer to the
open sticking open warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect

Up - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant door module. Refer to the
closed sticking closed warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B117F-72 Front Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer to
open sticking open the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B117F-73 Front Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer to
closed sticking closed the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B1189-29 Front Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sensor 1 or 2 the hall sensor circuit between the door module
Sensor circuit fault and window motor. Repair as necessary. If the
Hall sensor fault problem persists, renew the window motor
B118A-29 Rear Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sensor 1 or 2 the hall sensor circuit between the door module
Sensor circuit fault and window motor. Repair as necessary. If the
Hall sensor fault problem persists, renew the window motor
B118C-04 Left Blindspot Warning

Indicator - System Camera module internal fault Check Blindspot Monitoring System Module for
internal fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
B118E-00 Left Front Window - No

sub type information Window travel limits not Refer to the workshop manual and operate the
learned window to allow the door module to learn the
fully open and closed positions. Clear the DTC
and retest.
B118F-00 Right Front Window -

No sub type Window travel limits not Refer to the workshop manual and operate the
information learn window to allow the door module to learn the
and retest.
B1190-00 Left Rear Window - No

sub type information Window travel limits not Refer to the workshop manual and operate the
learned window to allow the door module to learn the
and retest.
B1191-00 Right Rear Window -

No sub type Window travel limits not Refer to the workshop manual and operate the
information learn window to allow the door module to learn the
and retest.
B11D1-83 LIN Bus Circuit "C" -
Value of signal Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
protection calculation calculation incorrect LIN circuits between driver door switchpack and
incorrect Driver Door Module for short/open circuits, clear
DTC and re-test

Signal invalid Signal Invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuits between driver door switchpack and
Driver Door Module for short/open circuits, clear
DTC and re-test

Missing message Missing Message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuits between driver door switchpack and
Driver Door Module for short/open circuits, clear
DTC and re-test
B11F6-11 Driver Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and mirror
ground movement control circuits between driver door
mirror and Driver Door Module for short to
ground, repair wiring as required, clear DTC and
re-test. If DTC remains suspect mirror, refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect
B11F6-15 Driver Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and mirror
battery or open open circuit movement control circuits between driver door
mirror and Driver Door Module for short to power
or open circuit, repair wiring as required, clear
DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect mirror,
refer to the warranty policy and procedures
B11F7-11 Passenger Folding

Mirror Motor - Circuit Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and mirror
short to ground movement control circuits between passenger
door mirror and Passenger Door Module for short
to ground, repair wiring as required, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains suspect mirror, refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
a module is suspect
B11F7-15 Passenger Folding

Mirror Motor - Circuit Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and mirror
short to battery or open circuit movement control circuits between passenger
open door mirror and Passenger Door Module for short
to power or open circuit, repair wiring as
required, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
suspect mirror, refer to the warranty policy and
B1A94-11 Driver Mirror - Circuit

short to ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
driver mirror fold motor circuit for short to ground
B1A94-15 Driver Mirror - Circuit

short to battery or Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
open circuit driver mirror fold motor circuit for short to power
or open circuit
B1A95-11 Passenger Mirror -

passenger mirror fold motor circuit for short to
ground
B1A95-15 Passenger Mirror -

or open circuit passenger mirror fold motor circuit for short to
power or open circuit
B1A98-83 LIN Bus Circuit #1 -

Value of signal Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
protection calculation calculation incorrect LIN circuit between driver switch pack and DDM
incorrect for short/open circuits, clear DTC and re-test. If
DTC remains install a new switch pack
Signal invalid Signal Invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuit between driver switch pack and DDM
for short/open circuits, clear DTC and re-test. If

Missing message Missing Message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuit between driver switch pack and DDM
for short/open circuits, clear DTC and re-test. If
B1C09-11 Driver Left/Right Mirror

Motor Circuit - Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to ground driver left/right mirror motor circuit for short to
ground

Motor Circuit - Circuit Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to battery or circuit driver left/right mirror motor circuit for short to
open power or open circuit
B1C10-11 Driver Up/Down Mirror

Motor Circuit - Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to ground driver up/down mirror motor circuit for short to
ground

Motor Circuit - Circuit Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to battery or circuit driver up/down mirror motor circuit for short to
open power or open circuit
B1C11-11 Passenger Left/Right

Mirror Motor Circuit - Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to ground passenger left/right mirror motor circuit for short
to ground

Mirror Motor Circuit - Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to battery circuit passenger left/right mirror motor circuit for short
B1C12-11 Passenger Up/Down

Mirror Motor Circuit - Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to ground passenger up/down mirror motor circuit for short
to ground

Mirror Motor Circuit - Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit short to battery circuit passenger up/down mirror motor circuit for short

Motor Feedback Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to driver up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for
ground short to ground

Motor Feedback Circuit Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to circuit driver up/down mirror motor feedback circuit for
battery or open short to power or open circuit

Motor Feedback Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to driver left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for
ground short to ground

Motor Feedback Circuit Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
- Circuit short to circuit driver left/right mirror motor feedback circuit for
battery or open short to power or open circuit

Mirror Motor Feedback Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit - Circuit short to passenger up/down mirror motor feedback circuit
ground for short to ground
Mirror Motor Feedback Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit - Circuit short to circuit passenger up/down mirror motor feedback circuit
battery or open for short to power or open circuit

Mirror Motor Feedback Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit - Circuit short to passenger left/right mirror motor feedback circuit
ground for short to ground

Mirror Motor Feedback Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Circuit - Circuit short to circuit passenger left/right mirror motor feedback circuit
battery or open for short to power or open circuit
B1C39-29 Key Lock Switch -

Signal invalid Lock and unlock signals both Check key lock switch for damage/mechanical
active or inactive for more faults. Check lock circuits for short circuit to each
than 20 seconds other
B1D06-11 Left Turn Indicator -

left door indicator circuit for short to ground
B1D06-15 Left Turn Indicator -

or open circuit left door indicator circuit for short to power or
open circuit
B1D07-11 Right Turn Indicator -

right door indicator circuit for short to ground
B1D07-15 Right Turn Indicator -

or open circuit right door indicator circuit for short to power or
open circuit
C1B14-11 Sensor Supply #1 -

window sensor supply circuit for short to ground
C1B14-15 Sensor Supply #1 -

or open circuit window sensor supply circuit for short to power
or open circuit

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Carry out network integrity test using
No sub type communication Bus manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
information to electrical circuit diagrams and test Medium
speed CAN network for open, short circuit and
high resistance
U0140-00 Lost Communication

With CJB - No sub type Logged when subscribed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
information message missing from power and ground supplies to Central Junction
Central Junction Box Box. Check CAN network between Driver Door
Module and Central Junction Box. Carry out
network integrity test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system

With Driver Seat Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Module (DSM) - No sub power and ground supplies to Driver Seat
type information Module. Check CAN network between Driver Door
Module and Driver Seat Module. Carry out
network integrity test using manufacturer

Software Car configuration file
NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set
Incompatibility - No mismatch with vehicle
the ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing
sub type information specification
the DTCs

system, check and up-date the car configuration
file as necessary
U0300-4A Internal Control Module
Software DTC is set if an incorrect Check correct door modules are installed on the
Incompatibility - front or rear door vehicle. Reprogram the modules using the
Incorrect component module/software is manufacturers approved diagnostic system
installed connected
U2002-24 Switch - Signal stuck

high Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a
new passenger side window switch
U2010-11 Switch Illumination -

Circuit short to ground Circuit short to ground Carry out CAN network tests using the
U2010-12 Switch Illumination -

Circuit short to battery Circuit short to power Carry out CAN network tests using the
U2012-08 Car Configuration

Parameter(s) - Bus Bus signal/message failures Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC
signal/message remains, re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box
Failures using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U2013-24 Switch Pack - Signal

stuck high Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a
new driver side window switch pack

Hardware - Data Data Memory Failure Install a new Driver Door Module/Passenger Door
memory failure Module, refer to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC Index
U2100-00 Initial Configuration

Not Complete - No sub No sub type information Re-configure the Driver Door Module/Passenger
type information Door Module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Configuration Incorrect component Check/configure the car configuration using the
Incompatible - No sub installed approved diagnostic system
type information Vehicle not configured
correctly

Internal electronic Internal electronic failure Install a new Driver Door Module/Passenger Door
failure Module, refer to the new module installation
U3002-55 Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) - Not Driver/passenger door Re-configure the relevant module as new using
configured module is not configured the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
correctly and re-test. If DTC remains install a new
module, refer to the new module installation

Number (VIN) - Invalid Vehicle/component Install original module, check for DTCs and refer
serial data received mis-match. Corrupt VIN data to relevant DTC Index
being transmitted, module
previously installed to other
vehicle

Signal compare failure Mis-match of battery Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer
voltage, of 2 volts or lower, to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
between Driver Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module/Passenger Door the power and ground supply circuits to both
Module and Auxiliary Junction modules
Box
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC:
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
NOTES:
account.
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Seat Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B105D-11 Seat Bolster Inflate Output
- Circuit short to ground Circuit short to ground Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the seat bolster circuit
B105D-15 Seat Bolster Inflate Output

- Circuit short to battery or Circuit short to power or Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
open open security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
B105E-11 Seat Bolster Deflate

Output - Circuit short to Circuit short to ground Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
ground security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
B105E-15 Seat Bolster Deflate

Output - Circuit short to Circuit short to power or Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
battery or open open security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
B1060-11 Seat Headrest Motor

Output - Circuit short to Circuit short to ground Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
ground security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the seat headrest motor
circuit
Output - Circuit short to Circuit short to power or Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
battery or open open security/integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the seat headrest motor
circuit

Sensor - No signal Harness/connector Check the seat wiring harness/connectors for
problem security/integrity
No signal from sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Sensor/motor malfunction check the seat headrest motor sensor circuit.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
B1065-24 Cushion Extend Switch -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Check the switch function. Check the seat
Switch malfunction wiring harness/connectors for security/integrity.
check the switch circuit
B1066-24 Cushion Retract Switch -

B1067-24 Lumbar In Switch - Signal

stuck high Signal stuck high Check the switch function. Check the seat
B1068-24 Lumbar Out Switch - Signal

B1069-24 Lumbar Up Switch - Signal

B106A-24 Lumbar Down Switch -

B106B-24 Bolster Inflate Switch -

B106C-24 Bolster Deflate Switch -

B106D-24 Headrest Up Switch -

B106E-24 Headrest Down Switch -

B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value of

signal protection LIN bus checksum error Check for other LIN Bus related DTCs. Refer to
calculation incorrect - Value of signal the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
protection LIN Bus circuit
calculation
incorrect
Generic LIN bus failure
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Electric
Parking Brake (PBM)
Parking Brake Module (PBM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Brake Module (PBM), for
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1142-64 Ignition Status 1 -
Signal plausibility Mismatch between the Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure parking brake module parking brake module ignition power supply
ignition signal and the circuit short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
power mode value resistance
broadcast on the CAN bus
C1127-31 Position Sensor - No

Signal Parking brake actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
position sensor circuit short parking brake actuator position sensor circuit for
circuit to ground, short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance
C1129-39 Actuator Engage -

Incorrect has too few Service brake adjustment
NOTE: This DTC is logged when the maximum
pulses incorrect after brake lining
motor engage current is reached before full apply travel
replacement
distance
Parking brake cables
seized, trapped Carry out parking brake calibration procedure
Brake caliper mechanical Install new parking brake cable(s) as required
failure Install new rear brake caliper(s) as required
C1129-3A Actuator Engage -
Incorrect has too many Service brake adjustment
NOTE: This DTC is logged when the motor engage
pulses incorrect after brake lining
current is not reached or actuator has travelled too far
replacement
upon apply
Parking brake cables broken
Brake caliper mechanical Carry out parking brake calibration procedure
failure Install new parking brake cable(s) as required
Install new rear brake caliper(s) as required
C112A-39 Actuator Disengage -

Incorrect has too few Parking brake actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
pulses circuit open circuit, high the parking brake actuator circuit for open circuit,
resistance high resistance
Service brake adjustment Carry out parking brake calibration procedure
incorrect after brake lining Install new parking brake cable(s) as required
replacement Install new rear brake caliper(s) as required
Parking brake cables
seized, trapped
Brake caliper mechanical
failure
C1D00-11 Park Brake Apply Switch

- Circuit short to ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: Circuit reference
system, check datalogger signals - Primary Apply
APPLY_SW_1 / APPLY_SW_2
Switch Voltage Data (0xD932) - Secondary Apply
Parking brake Switch Voltage Data (0xD934). Refer to the
primary/secondary apply electrical circuit diagrams and check the parking
switch circuit short circuit brake primary/secondary apply switch circuits for
to ground short circuit to ground
Parking brake switch Check and install a new parking brake switch as
internal failure required

- Circuit short to battery Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
or open system, check datalogger signals - Primary Apply
to power, open circuit, high short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance resistance
C1D00-1C Park Brake Apply Switch

- Voltage out of range Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check datalogger signals - Primary Apply
to ground, short circuit to short circuits to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance Check and install a new parking brake switch as
Parking brake switch required
internal failure

- Signal compare failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the parking brake primary/secondary apply switch
APPLY_SW_1 / APPLY_SW_2 /
circuits for short circuit to primary/secondary
RELEASE_SW_1 / RELEASE_SW_2
release switch circuits
Parking brake Check and install a new parking brake switch as
primary/secondary apply required
switch circuit short circuit
to primary/secondary
release switch circuit
Parking brake switch
internal failure

- Signal plausibility Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, check datalogger signals - Primary Apply
brake primary/secondary apply switch circuits for
switch circuit short circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
to ground, short circuit to open circuit, high resistance
power, open circuit, high Check and install a new parking brake switch as
resistance required
internal failure
C1D01-11 Park Brake Release

Switch - Circuit short to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground system, check datalogger signals - Primary
Release Switch Voltage Data (0xD933) -
Parking brake Secondary Release Switch Voltage Data
primary/secondary release (0xD935). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
switch circuit short circuit and check the parking brake primary/secondary
to ground release switch circuits for short circuit to ground

Switch - Circuit short to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
battery or open system, check datalogger signals - Primary
Release Switch Voltage Data (0xD933) -
Parking brake Secondary Release Switch Voltage Data
primary/secondary release (0xD935). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
switch circuit short circuit and check the parking brake primary/secondary
to power, open circuit, high release switch circuits for short circuit to power,
resistance open circuit, high resistance
C1D01-1C Park Brake Release

Switch - Voltage out of NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC may be set due to resting of an
range RELEASE_SW_1 / RELEASE_SW_2 object (for example, a hand) on the switch with only a
light pressure
Parking brake
primary/secondary release Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch circuit short circuit system, check datalogger signals - Primary
to ground, short circuit to Release Switch Voltage Data (0xD933) -
power, open circuit, high Secondary Release Switch Voltage Data
resistance (0xD935). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Parking brake switch and check the parking brake primary/secondary
internal failure release switch circuits for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Check and install a new parking brake switch as
required

Switch - Signal compare Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the parking brake primary/secondary release
RELEASE_SW_1 / RELEASE_SW_2 /
switch circuits for short circuit to
primary/secondary apply switch circuits
primary/secondary release required
switch circuit short circuit
to primary/secondary apply
switch circuit
internal failure

Switch - Signal NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC may be set due to resting of an
plausibility failure RELEASE_SW_1 / RELEASE_SW_2 object (for example, a hand) on the switch with only a
light pressure
Parking brake
primary/secondary release Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch circuit short circuit system, check datalogger signals - Primary
to ground, short circuit to Release Switch Voltage Data (0xD933) -
power, open circuit, high Secondary Release Switch Voltage Data
resistance (0xD935). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Parking brake switch and check the parking brake primary/secondary
internal failure release switch circuits for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
required
P1536-62 Parking Brake Switch
Circuit - Signal compare Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the parking brake primary/secondary apply switch
APPLY_SW_1 / APPLY_SW_2 /
circuits for short circuit to primary/secondary
primary/secondary apply required
switch circuits short circuit
to primary/secondary
internal failure
P1536-66 Parking Brake Switch

Circuit - Signal has too System abuse
NOTE: The Electric Parking Brake system will be
many transitions / Parking brake switch
locked out if the module receives more than 30
events internal failure
apply/release requests within 1 minute
Cycle the ignition to clear the fault mode. Clear

the DTC and test the system
required
P1571-64 Brake Switch - Signal

plausibility failure Brake pedal switch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incorrectly adjusted system, check datalogger signal - Brake Switch.
Brake pedal switch circuit Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
short circuit to ground, manual and remove and install the brake pedal
short circuit to power, open switch
circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Anti-lock brake system fault system, check datalogger signal - Brake Switch.
the brake pedal switch circuit for short circuit to
resistance
system, check the anti-lock brake system control
module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index

Communication Bus - Missing message from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Missing message another control module via system, check the snap shot data to determine
the high speed CAN bus the missing message source control module,
check the relevant control module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index

Communication Bus - High speed can bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Bus off short circuit to ground, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
short circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, high resistance the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
resistance

with ECM/PCM A - No Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sub type information power or ground circuit the engine control module power and ground
open circuit, high resistance circuits for open circuit, high resistance
High speed CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to ground, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Engine system fault ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
system, check the engine control module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0103-00 Lost communication

With Gear Shift Module Transmission control switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
A - No sub type power or ground circuit the transmission control switch power and
information open circuit, high resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Transmission control switch ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
fault resistance
system, check the transmission control switch for

With Cruise Control Adaptive speed control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module A - No sub type module power or ground the adaptive speed control module power and
information circuit open circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN bus circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
short circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit to power, open the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Adaptive speed control resistance
system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the adaptive speed control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index

with Anti-Lock Braking Anti-lock brake system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
System (ABS) Control control module power or the anti-lock brake system control module power
Module - No sub type ground circuit open circuit, and ground circuits for open circuit, high
information high resistance resistance
Anti-lock brake system fault ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
DTC index

With Instrument Panel Instrument cluster power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control ground circuit open circuit, the instrument cluster power and ground circuits
Module - No sub type high resistance for open circuit, high resistance
information High speed CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Instrument cluster fault ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
system, check the instrument cluster for related

Software Incompatibility Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type mismatch with vehicle system, check and update the car configuration
information specification file as necessary
Incorrect parking brake Install a new parking brake module as necessary
module installed
U0401-00 Invalid Data Received

From ECM/PCM - No sub Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information the engine control module system, check the engine control module for

From Gear Shift Control Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module A - No sub type the transmission control system, check the transmission control switch for
information switch related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index

From Anti-Lock Braking Missing/invalid data from
System (ABS) Control the anti-lock brake system
Module - No sub type control module
the customer has reported a parking brake concern.
information Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern
prior to diagnosis

DTC index
From Central Junction Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Box - No sub type the central junction box system, check the central junction box for
information related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index

From Instrument Panel Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control Module - No sub the instrument cluster system, check the instrument cluster for related
type information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index

From Cruise Control Missing/invalid data from
NOTE: The parking brake module has received a
Front Distance Range the adaptive speed control
request to apply the parking brake from the adaptive
Sensor - Signal module
speed control module but the conditions were not
plausibility failure correct for the apply to take place. For example, the
vehicle was moving. The parking brake module will
ignore the request but this DTC is logged for safety
reference

system, check the adaptive speed control module
index
U2001-68 Reduced System

Function - Event Ignition switched off while Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information vehicle speed >3kph system, clear the DTCs and re-test
Missing/invalid data from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the anti-lock brake system system, check the anti-lock brake system control
control module module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U2005-64 Vehicle Speed - Signal

implausibility failure Missing/invalid data from
NOTE: Implausible speed is defined as passing
the anti-lock brake system
from high speed dynamic mode to static mode without
control module
passing through low speed dynamic mode

DTC index
U200D-4B Control Module Output

Power A - Over Parking brake actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
temperature circuit short circuit to the parking brake actuator circuit for short circuit
ground, short circuit to to ground, short circuit to power
power
U2011-11 Motor - Circuit short to

ground Parking brake actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to the parking brake actuator circuit for short circuit
ground to ground
U2011-12 Motor - Circuit short to

battery Parking brake actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to power the parking brake actuator circuit for short circuit
to power
U2011-13 Motor - Circuit open

Parking brake actuator Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit open circuit, high parking brake actuator circuit for open circuit,
resistance high resistance

Watchdog/safety micro Parking brake module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
controller failure internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new parking brake module

Number (VIN) - Invalid The park brake module has Check and install the original, or a new park
serial number previously been installed to brake module
another vehicle

compare failure Mismatch between the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage at the parking system, check data logging signal - Main ECU
brake module and the Voltage Supply (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical
voltage value broadcast on circuit diagrams and check the parking brake
the CAN bus module power and ground circuits for open
U3006-16 Control Module Input

Power A - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage below threshold LOGIC_BATT / GND system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
Voltage Supply (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant
Battery/charging system section of the workshop manual and test the
fault battery and charging system

Power A - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage above threshold LOGIC_BATT / GND system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
Voltage Supply (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical
Parking brake module power circuit diagrams and check the parking brake
or ground circuit open module power and ground circuits for open
circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Battery/charging system Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
fault manual and test the battery and charging system

Power B - Circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground or open the parking brake module power circuit for short
BATT_SUPPLY / GND
circuit to ground
Parking brake module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short circuit to the parking brake module power or ground circuit
ground for open circuit, high resistance
Parking brake module power
or ground circuit open
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index TDV6 3.0L Diesel ,
DTC: Engine Control Module
Engine Control Module 3.0L Tdv6 (PCM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged in the engine control module, for additional Diagnosis and
Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Diagnosis and Testing).
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Diesel Particulate Filter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1087-93 LIN Bus "A" - No operation
Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
communication circuit failure check the generator LIN bus circuit, for short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground, open
circuit. Repair wiring harness as required.
B10A2-32 Crash Input - Signal low

time < minimum This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
NOTE: - Circuit SRS_INPUT -
signal supplied by the restraints control
Restraints control module module is outside the specification expected
fault by the engine control module
Auxiliary junction box fault Check the restraints control module for DTCs
Harness fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
the supplementary restraints system input
circuit for faults. This circuit is a single wire
which connects the restraints control module
to the auxiliary junction box and the engine
control module. Check this circuit for short
circuit to power or ground, open circuit
including intermittent faults. Repair wiring as
required. Clear DTC and retest
B10A2-35 Crash Input - Signal high

time > maximum This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
Restraints control module module is outside the specification expected
fault by the engine control module
Auxiliary junction box fault Check the restraints control module for DTCs
Harness fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
the supplementary restraints system input
circuit for faults. This circuit is a single wire
B10A2-36 Crash Input - Signal

frequency too low This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
The engine control module module is outside the specification expected
detected excessive duration by the engine control module
for one cycle of the output Check the restraints control module for DTCs
across a specified sample and refer to the relevant DTC index
size Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Restraints control module refer to the relevant DTC index
fault Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Auxiliary junction box fault the supplementary restraints system input
Harness fault circuit for faults. This circuit is a single wire
B10A2-37 Crash Input - Signal

frequency too high This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
The engine control module module is outside the specification expected
detected insufficient by the engine control module
duration for one cycle of the Check the restraints control module for DTCs
output across a specified and refer to the relevant DTC index
sample size Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Restraints control module refer to the relevant DTC index
fault Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Auxiliary junction box fault the supplementary restraints system input
Harness fault circuit for faults. This circuit is a single wire
B11D9-00 Vehicle Battery - No sub

type information Harness fault This DTC is set when the battery monitoring
Battery fault system fails a diagnostic check
Battery monitoring system Refer to the battery care manual and verify
module fault that the vehicle battery is fully charged and
serviceable before continuing with further
diagnostic tests. If a battery fault is
indicated Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are clean
and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present on
the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector. Ensure
the battery ground connection is clean and
secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the battery
monitoring system module. Check LIN bus
integrity. If no fault found in wiring harness
suspect battery monitoring system module
failure. Refer to the warranty policy and
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring Module -

Missing message Harness fault This DTC is set when the engine control
Battery monitoring system module has lost communication with the
module fault battery monitoring system module
Refer to the battery care manual and verify
that the vehicle battery is fully charged and
serviceable before continuing with further
diagnostic tests. If a battery fault is
indicated Refer to the warranty policy and
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are clean
and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present on
the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector. Ensure
the battery ground connection is clean and
secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the battery
monitoring system module. Check LIN bus
integrity. If no fault found in wiring harness
suspect battery monitoring system module
failure. Refer to the warranty policy and
B1206-68 Crash Occurred - Event

information Event information - the This DTC is set if the restraints control
engine control module has module has deployed the restraints systems
received a crash signal from following activation of the crash sensors.
the restraints control Check the restraints control module for DTCs
module and refer to the relevant DTC index
P0030-11 HO2S Heater Control Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit LPPH_A -
short to ground system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
The engine control module Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
has detected a ground Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
measurement for a period circuit diagrams and check the pre catalyst
longer than expected or has oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground)
detected a ground circuit for short circuit to ground. This circuit
measurement when another runs from the engine control module through
value was expected the transmission harness to the exhaust
Harness fault - Pre catalyst system. Check for external harness damage
oxygen sensor heater due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as
control circuit short circuit to required. Clear DTC and retest
ground Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets. Heater
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuit resistance measured at the
failure component connector at approximately 20ºC
ambient temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0
Ohms. Refer to the warranty policy and

short to battery system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
has detected a vehicle Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
power measurement for a circuit diagrams and check the pre catalyst
oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground)
period longer than expected circuit for short circuit to power. This circuit
or has detected a vehicle runs from the engine control module through
power measurement when the transmission harness to the exhaust
another value was expected system. Check for external harness damage
Harness fault - Pre catalyst due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as
oxygen sensor heater required. Clear DTC and retest
control circuit short circuit to Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets. Heater
power circuit resistance measured at the
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor component connector at approximately 20ºC
failure ambient temperature should be 2.4 - 4.0

open system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
has determined an open Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
circuit via lack of bias circuit diagrams and check the pre catalyst
voltage, low current flow, no oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground)
change in the state of an circuit for open circuit. This circuit runs from
input in response to an the engine control module through the
output transmission harness to the exhaust system.
Harness fault - Pre catalyst Check for external harness damage due to
oxygen sensor heater chafing or heat. Repair harness as required.
control circuit open circuit Clear DTC and retest
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets. Heater
failure circuit resistance measured at the
component connector at approximately 20ºC
P0030-4B HO2S Heater Control Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Over Harness fault - Pre catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
temperature oxygen sensor heater system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
control circuit short circuit to Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
power Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuit diagrams and check the pre catalyst
failure oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground)
circuit for short circuit to power. This circuit
runs from the engine control module through
the transmission harness to the exhaust
system. Check for external harness damage
due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as
Suspect sensor failure if DTC resets. Heater
circuit resistance measured at the
component connector at approximately 20ºC
P0033-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Bypass Valve Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit CRV -
Circuit / Open - No sub system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
type information Harness fault - Boost air dynamic test) routine
recirculation solenoid control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit open circuit check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Boost air recirculation control circuit between the engine control
solenoid failure module and the control valve for open circuit.
Check the power supply to the control valve.
Repair any wiring faults found. Clear DTC and
retest
If no fault found in wiring harness suspect
boost air recirculation solenoid failure. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component
Bypass Valve Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Low - No sub type system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
information Harness fault - Boost air dynamic test) routine
recirculation solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Boost air recirculation circuit between the engine control module
solenoid failure and the control valve for a short circuit to
ground. Check the power supply to the
control valve. Repair any wiring faults found.
Bypass Valve Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit High - No sub type check the boost air recirculation solenoid
information Harness fault - Boost air circuit between the engine control module
recirculation solenoid circuit and the control valve for a short circuit to
short circuit to power power. Check the power supply to the control
Boost air recirculation valve. Repair any wiring faults found. Clear
solenoid failure DTC and retest
P0039-4B Turbocharger/Supercharger
Bypass Valve Control Harness fault - Boost air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit Range/Performance - recirculation solenoid circuit check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Over temperature short to ground, short circuit circuit between the engine control module
to power, high resistance and the control valve for a short circuit to
Boost air recirculation ground, short circuit to power, high
solenoid failure resistance. Check the power supply to the
control valve. Repair any wiring faults found.
P004A-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit VGT_POS -
Open - No sub type system check datalogger signals,
VGT_NEG -
information Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
Harness fault - Variable (0x0533), Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
geometry turbocharger controller output (0x03DE). Refer to the
actuator vane control circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit variable geometry turbocharger actuator vane
control circuit for open circuit. This circuit
consists of a twisted pair of wires between
the engine control module and the variable
geometry turbocharger actuator vane control
unit. Check both of the circuits for open
circuit. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC
and retest
P004A-71 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Open - Actuator stuck system check datalogger signals,
VGT_NEG -
Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
Harness fault - Variable (0x0533), Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
geometry turbocharger controller output (0x03DE). Refer to the
actuator vane control circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit variable geometry turbocharger actuator vane
Variable geometry control circuit for open circuit. This circuit
turbocharger actuator vane consists of a twisted pair of wires between
failure the engine control module and the variable
unit. Check both of the circuits for open
circuit. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC
and retest
Check and install new turbocharger actuator
vane control unit as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is
in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module/component
P004B-16 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Circuit VGT_NEG - system check datalogger signals,
Voltage Below Threshold Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
The engine control module (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
measured a voltage below a diagrams and check the variable geometry
specified range but not turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
necessarily a short circuit to high resistance or short circuits to another
ground circuit. This circuit consists of a twisted pair
Harness fault - Variable of wires between the engine control module
geometry turbocharger and the variable geometry turbocharger
actuator vane control circuit actuator vane control unit. Check both of the
Variable geometry circuits for faults. Repair wiring as required.
turbocharger actuator vane Clear DTC and retest
control unit failure If no fault found in wiring harness suspect
variable geometry turbocharger control
module failure. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P004B-19 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Current Above Threshold Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
Harness fault - Variable (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
geometry turbocharger diagrams and check the variable geometry
actuator vane control circuit turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
short circuit to ground, short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, high high resistance. This circuit consists of a
resistance twisted pair of wires between the engine
Variable geometry control module and the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane turbocharger actuator vane control unit.
control unit failure Check both of the circuits for faults. Repair
wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest
module failure. Refer to the warranty policy
module/component
P004B-1D Turbocharger/Supercharger
Current Out Of Range Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
Variable geometry short circuits to another circuit. This circuit
turbocharger actuator vane consists of a twisted pair of wires between
control unit failure the engine control module and the variable
Mechanical fault on actuator geometry turbocharger actuator vane control
mechanism unit. Check both of the circuits for faults.
Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
retest
If no fault found in wiring harness check
module for failure
Check for mechanical fault on actuator
mechanism. Refer to the warranty policy and
P004B-4B Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit Harness fault - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Over geometry turbocharger system check datalogger signals,
temperature actuator vane control circuit Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
short circuit to ground, short (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, high diagrams and check the variable geometry
resistance. turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
Variable geometry short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
turbocharger actuator vane high resistance. This circuit consists of a
control unit failure twisted pair of wires between the engine
Mechanical fault on actuator control module and the variable geometry
mechanism turbocharger actuator vane control unit.
Check both of the circuits for faults. Repair
If no fault found in wiring harness check
module for failure
Check for mechanical fault on actuator
mechanism. Refer to the warranty policy and
P004C-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit Low Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type information VGT_NEG - system check datalogger signals,
short circuit to ground short circuit to ground. This circuit consists
of a twisted pair of wires between the
engine control module and the variable
unit. Check both sides of this circuit. Repair
- Circuit short to ground system check datalogger signals,
VGT_NEG -
has detected a ground diagrams and check the variable geometry
measurement for a period turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
longer than expected or has short circuit to ground. This circuit consists
detected a ground of a twisted pair of wires between the
measurement when another engine control module and the variable
value was expected geometry turbocharger actuator vane control
Harness fault - Variable unit. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
geometry turbocharger retest
actuator vane control circuit
short circuit to ground
circuit - Short to battery system check datalogger signals,
VGT_NEG -
has detected a vehicle diagrams and check the variable geometry
power measurement for a turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
period longer than expected short circuit to power. This circuit consists of
or has detected a vehicle a twisted pair of wires between the engine
power measurement when control module and the variable geometry
another value was expected turbocharger actuator vane control unit.
Harness fault - Variable Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
geometry turbocharger retest
actuator vane control circuit
short circuit to power
Boost Control B Circuit Low Harness fault - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Commanded position not geometry turbocharger system check datalogger signals,
reachable actuator vane control circuit Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
short circuit to ground, high (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance, open circuit diagrams and check the variable geometry
Harness fault - Variable turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
geometry turbocharger short circuit to ground, high resistance, open
sensor circuit, short circuit circuit. This circuit consists of a twisted pair
to ground, high resistance, of wires between the engine control module
open circuit and the variable geometry turbocharger
Variable geometry actuator vane control unit. Repair wiring as
turbocharger actuator vane required. Clear DTC and retest
control unit failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the variable geometry turbocharger
sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, high
resistance, open circuit
module failure or mechanical fault on
actuator mechanism. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or determine
if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P004D-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit High Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type information VGT_NEG - system check datalogger signals,
geometry turbocharger diagrams and check the boost control circuit
actuator vane control circuit for short circuit to power. This circuit consists
short circuit to power of a twisted pair of wires between the
engine control module and the variable
unit. Check both sides of this circuit. Repair
P004D-77 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit High Harness fault - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Commanded Position Not geometry turbocharger system check datalogger signals,
Reachable actuator vane control circuit Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
short circuit to power (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
Harness fault - Variable diagrams and check the variable geometry
geometry turbocharger turbocharger actuator vane control circuit for
sensor circuit, short circuit short circuit to power. This circuit consists of
to power a twisted pair of wires between the engine
Variable geometry control module and the variable geometry
turbocharger actuator vane turbocharger actuator vane control unit.
control unit failure Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
retest
check the variable geometry turbocharger
sensor circuit for short circuit to power
module failure or mechanical fault on
actuator mechanism. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P006A-00 MAP - Mass or Volume Air

Flow Correlation - No sub Intake air system, high If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
type information pressure boost leak bank A P0402-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
Intake air system, high system, high pressure boost leak bank A
pressure boost leak bi-turbo If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
mode bank B intake air system, high pressure boost leak
Intake air system, low bi-turbo mode bank B
pressure boost leak bank A If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
Intake air system, low P0401-00, suspect intake air system, low
pressure boost leak bank B pressure boost leak bank A
If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00, suspect
intake air system, low pressure boost leak
bank B
system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
dynamic test) routine
P006A-22 MAP - Mass or Volume Air

Flow Correlation - Signal The engine control module Check for other DTCs associated with intake
Amplitude > Maximum measured a signal voltage and boost airflow control actuators, refer to
above a specified range but the relevant DTC index and act on those
not necessarily a short DTCs first
circuit to power, gain too Refer to workshop manual and check intake
high air circuit, boost air circuit and associated
Error path indicating control valves, intercooler and air filter for
whether over boost leaks, blockages, restrictions and control
monitoring is active or not valve actuator malfunctions
Fault in induction air circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fault in boost air circuit check both mass air flow sensor circuits for
Mass air flow sensor circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, short high resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring as
circuit to power, high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open circuit Check manifold absolute pressure sensor
Manifold absolute pressure wiring circuits for short circuit to ground,
sensor circuit short circuit to short circuit to power, high resistance, open
ground, short circuit to circuit. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC
power, high resistance, open and retest
circuit If no fault found in wiring harness suspect
Mass air flow sensor failure mass air flow sensor or manifold absolute
Manifold absolute pressure pressure sensor. Check and install new mass
sensor failure air flow or manifold absolute pressure sensor
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
P0070-16 Ambient Air Temperature

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit
Voltage Below Threshold system check datalogger signals, Ambient Air
AMBIENT_AIR_TEMP -
Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA),
The engine control module Ambient Air Temperature (0xF466). This DTC
measured a voltage below a is set when the ambient air temperature
specified range but not sensor signal line voltage at the engine
necessarily a short circuit to control module is less than the threshold
ground value. The ambient air temperature sensor
Harness fault - ambient air thermistor is mounted in the left door mirror
temperature sensor circuit and the circuit consists of a ambient air
Ambient air temperature temperature sensor signal line and a sensor
sensor fault ground circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check both sides of the circuit
for high resistance or short circuits. Repair
wiring as required
If no faults are found in the wiring circuits
suspect the ambient air temperature sensor,
refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and check the sensor operation.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P0070-17 Ambient Air Temperature

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit
Voltage Above Threshold system check datalogger signals, Ambient Air
AMBIENT_AIR_TEMP -
Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA),
The engine control module Ambient Air Temperature (0xF466). This DTC
measured a voltage above a is set when the ambient air temperature
specified range but not sensor signal line voltage at the engine
necessarily a short circuit to control module is greater than the threshold
power value. The ambient air temperature sensor
Harness fault - ambient air thermistor is mounted in the left door mirror
temperature sensor circuit and the circuit consists of a ambient air
Ambient air temperature temperature sensor signal line and a sensor
sensor fault ground circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check both sides of the circuit
for high resistance or short circuits. Repair
wiring as required
suspect the ambient air temperature sensor,
P007A-16 Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit ACT -
(Bank 1) - Circuit Voltage system check datalogger signals, Charge Air
Below Threshold The engine control module Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). This DTC is
measured a voltage below a set when the air charge temperature sensor
specified range but not signal line voltage at the engine control
module is less than the threshold value. The
necessarily a short circuit to air charge temperature sensor thermistor is
ground located in the air intake system downstream
Harness fault - air charge of the intercooler and consists of a signal
temperature sensor circuit line and a sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
Air charge temperature electrical circuit diagrams and check both
sensor fault sides of the circuit for high resistance or
short circuits. Repair wiring as required
suspect the air charge temperature sensor,

Temperature Sensor Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit ACT -
(Bank 1) - Circuit Voltage system check datalogger signals, Air Charge
Above Threshold The engine control module Temperature (0x051C). This DTC is set when
measured a voltage above a the air charge temperature sensor signal line
specified range but not voltage at the engine control module is
necessarily a short circuit to greater than the threshold value. The air
power charge temperature sensor thermistor is
Harness fault - air charge located in the air intake system downstream
temperature sensor circuit of the intercooler and consists of a signal
Air charge temperature line and a sensor ground circuit. Refer to the
sensor fault electrical circuit diagrams and check both
sides of the circuit for high resistance or
short circuits. Repair wiring as required

Temperature Sensor Circuit Harness fault - air charge Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(Bank 1) - Signal Compare temperature sensor circuit system check datalogger signals, Charge Air
Failure short circuit to ground, short Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
circuit to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check air
resistance, open circuit charge temperature sensor circuit for short
Air charge temperature circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
sensor fault resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring as
required
P0087-00 Fuel Rail/System Pressure -

Too Low - No sub type Low level fuel condition Check the fuel volume available in the fuel
information Fuel gauge sender unit tank is sufficient, add fuel as required. Clear
sticking DTC and retest
Fuel rail pressure sensor Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
signal circuit short circuit to operation
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines restricted check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
Fuel lines leaking short circuit to power
Fuel pump failure Check fuel lines for restriction
Fuel rail pressure sensor Check fuel lines for leakage
signal circuit short circuit to Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
ground to the relevant DTC index
Fuel rail pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signal circuit open circuit check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
circuit high resistance resistance
Fuel rail pressure sensor Repair wiring as required. If no wiring faults
failure are found suspect fuel rail pressure sensor.

Too Low - Circuit Voltage The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Below Threshold measured a voltage below a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
specified range but not short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
necessarily a short circuit to resistance
ground Repair wiring as required. If no wiring faults
Fuel rail pressure sensor are found suspect fuel rail pressure sensor.
circuit, short circuit to Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
ground, open circuit, high manual, or determine if any prior approval
resistance programme is in operation, prior to the
Fuel rail pressure sensor installation of a new module/component
failure

Too Low - Signal Amplitude The engine control module Check fuel lines for restriction
< Minimum measured a signal voltage Check fuel lines for leakage
below a specified range but Check fuel injector's for stuck open, leakage
not necessarily a short Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
circuit to ground, gain low to the relevant DTC index
Fuel lines restricted Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines leaking check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
Fuel injector's stuck open, short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
leaking resistance
Fuel pump failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel rail pressure sensor check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
circuit short circuit to short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel pressure control valve check fuel volume control valve circuit for
circuit short circuit to short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
Fuel volume control valve pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
circuit short circuit to and procedures manual, or determine if any
ground, open circuit, high prior approval programme is in operation,
resistance prior to the installation of a new
Fuel rail pressure sensor module/component
failure If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel
Fuel pressure control valve pressure control valve. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual, or determine
Fuel volume control valve if any prior approval programme is in
failure operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel
volume control valve. Refer to the warranty
module/component

Too High - No sub type Fuel gauge sender unit Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
information sticking operation
signal circuit short circuit to check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
power short circuit to power
ground circuit high check fuel rail pressure sensor ground circuit
resistance for high resistance
ground circuit open circuit check fuel rail pressure sensor ground circuit
Fuel pressure control valve for open circuit
circuit short circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, open circuit, high check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
resistance short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
Fuel volume control valve high resistance
circuit short circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, open circuit, high check fuel volume control valve circuit for
resistance short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
Fuel rail pressure sensor high resistance
failure If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
Fuel pressure control valve pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual, or determine if any
Fuel volume control valve prior approval programme is in operation,
failure prior to the installation of a new
module/component
pressure control valve. Refer to the warranty
module/component
module/component

Too High - circuit voltage The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
above threshold measured a voltage above a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
specified range but not short circuit to power
necessarily a short circuit to
power
Fuel rail pressure sensor
signal circuit short circuit to
power

Too High - Signal Amplitude The engine control module Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
> Maximum measured a signal voltage operation
above a specified range but Check fuel lines for restriction
not necessarily a short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, gain too check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
high short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
Fuel gauge sender unit high resistance
sticking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines restricted check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
circuit short circuit to power, high resistance
ground, open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check fuel volume control valve circuit for
Fuel pressure control valve short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
circuit short circuit to power, high resistance
ground, open circuit, high If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
resistance pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
Fuel volume control valve and procedures manual, or determine if any
circuit short circuit to power, prior approval programme is in operation,
ground, open circuit, high prior to the installation of a new
resistance module/component
Fuel rail pressure sensor If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel
failure pressure control valve. Refer to the warranty
Fuel pressure control valve policy and procedures manual, or determine
failure if any prior approval programme is in
Fuel volume control valve operation, prior to the installation of a new
failure module/component
Fuel pump failure If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel
module/component
Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
P0089-21 Fuel Pressure Regulator

Performance - Signal The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Amplitude < Minimum measured a signal voltage check fuel pressure regulator circuit for short
below a specified range but circuit to ground
not necessarily a short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, gain low check fuel pressure regulator circuit for open
Fuel pressure regulator circuit
signal circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground check fuel pressure regulator reference
Fuel pressure regulator voltage circuit for high resistance
signal circuit open circuit If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
Fuel pressure regulator pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
reference voltage circuit and procedures manual, or determine if any
high resistance prior approval programme is in operation,
Fuel pressure regulator prior to the installation of a new
failure module/component
P0089-22 Fuel Pressure Regulator
Performance - Signal The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Amplitude > Maximum measured a signal voltage check fuel pressure regulator circuit for short
above a specified range but circuit to power
not necessarily a short If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
circuit to power, gain too pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
high and procedures manual, or determine if any
Fuel pressure regulator prior approval programme is in operation,
signal circuit short circuit to prior to the installation of a new
power module/component
Fuel pressure regulator
failure
P0090-13 Fuel Pressure Regulator 1

Control Circuit/Open - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit PCV -
Circuit open system check datalogger signals, Fuel
The engine control module Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
has determined an open (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit via lack of bias diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
voltage, low current flow, no valve control circuit for open circuit. Repair
change in the state of an wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest
input in response to an
output
Harness fault - Fuel
pressure control valve
control circuit open circuit
P0090-4B Fuel Pressure Regulator 1

Control Circuit/Open - Over Fuel pressure control valve Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
temperature signal circuit short circuit to system check datalogger signals, Fuel
power, open circuit Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
Fuel pressure regulator (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check fuel pressure control
valve circuit for short circuit to power, open
circuit
If no wiring faults are found suspect fuel rail
pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
module/component

Control Circuit Low - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground system check datalogger signals, Fuel
has detected a ground (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
measurement for a period diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
longer than expected or has valve circuit for short circuit to ground. Check
detected a ground harness from engine control module to
measurement when another control valve connector for external damage
value was expected caused by chafing or heat. Check power
Harness fault - fuel pressure supply circuit to control valve. Repair wiring
control valve circuit short as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground If no wiring faults are found suspect the fuel
Fuel pressure control valve pressure control valve. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual, or determine
module/component

Control Circuit Low - Circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Voltage Below Threshold system check datalogger signals, Fuel
measured a voltage below a (0x03C3). This DTC is set when the voltage
specified range but not on the fuel pressure control valve circuit is
necessarily a short circuit to less than the threshold expected by the
ground engine control module. Check harness from
Harness fault - fuel pressure engine control module to control valve
control valve circuit connector for external damage caused by
Fuel pressure control valve chafing or heat. Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check the power supply circuit
to the control valve. Check the control circuit
between the engine control module and the
fuel pressure control valve for faults such as
high resistance, short circuit to ground,
intermittent open circuit. Repair wiring as
If no wiring faults are found suspect the fuel
module/component

Control Circuit High - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit short to battery system check datalogger signals, Fuel
has detected a vehicle (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
power measurement for a diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
period longer than expected valve circuit for short circuit to power. Check
or has detected a vehicle harness from engine control module to
power measurement when control valve connector for external damage
another value was expected caused by chafing or heat. Check power
Harness fault - fuel pressure supply circuit to control valve. Repair wiring
control valve circuit short as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to power

Control Circuit High - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Voltage Above system check datalogger signals, Fuel
Threshold The engine control module Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
measured a voltage above a (0x03C3). This DTC is set when the voltage
specified range but not on the fuel pressure control valve circuit is
necessarily a short circuit to more than the threshold expected by the
power engine control module. Check harness from
Harness fault - fuel pressure engine control module to fuel pressure
control valve circuit control valve connector for external damage
Fuel pressure control valve caused by chafing or heat. Refer to the
failure electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control circuit between the engine control
module and the fuel pressure control valve
for faults such as high resistance, short
circuit to power. Repair wiring as required.
If no wiring faults are found suspect the fuel
module/component
P00AA-16 Intake Air Temperature NOTES:

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Voltage Below system check datalogger signals, Intake Air
Threshold Temperature Sensor (0x1279), Intake Air
- Circuit AIR_INTAKE_TEMP - Temperature (0xF40F). This DTC is set when
the voltage on the intake air temperature
sensor circuit is less than the threshold
Circuit diagram component expected by the engine control module. The
name maf/iat sensor bank 2 intake air temperature sensor is integrated
into the electronics package of the mass air
The engine control module flow. The sensor circuit consists of a
measured a voltage below a thermistor exposed to air passing through
specified range but not the mass air flow sensor, the engine control
necessarily a short circuit to module signal line voltage passes though the
ground thermistor and shares the same ground
Harness fault - Intake air circuit as the mass air flow element of the
temperature sensor circuit sensor. Check the harness between the
Intake air temperature engine control module and the mass airflow
sensor fault (part of mass sensor for damage caused by chaffing or
air flow sensor) heat. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check all the circuits connected to the
mass air flow sensor for open circuits, short
circuits, high resistance and intermittent
connections. Check mass airflow sensor 2
circuits as both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair wiring as required, clear
the DTC and retest the system
If the DTC resets and there are no harness
faults suspect the intake air temperature
sensor fault (part of mass air flow sensor).
P00AA-17 Intake Air Temperature NOTES:

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Voltage Above system check datalogger signals, Intake Air
Threshold Temperature Sensor (0x1279), Intake Air
- Circuit AIR_INTAKE_TEMP - Temperature (0xF40F). This DTC is set when
the voltage on the intake air temperature
sensor circuit is greater than the threshold
Circuit diagram component expected by the engine control module. The
name maf/iat sensor bank 2 intake air temperature sensor is integrated
into the electronics package of the mass air
The engine control module flow. The sensor circuit consists of a
measured a voltage above a thermistor exposed to air passing through
specified range but not the mass air flow sensor, the engine control
necessarily a short circuit to module signal line voltage passes though the
power thermistor and shares the same ground
Harness fault - Intake air circuit as the mass air flow element of the
temperature sensor circuit sensor. Check the harness between the
Intake air temperature engine control module and the mass airflow
sensor fault (part of mass sensor for damage caused by chaffing or
air flow sensor) heat. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check all the circuits connected to the
mass air flow sensor for open circuits, short
circuits, high resistance and intermittent
connections. Check mass airflow sensor 2
circuits as both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair wiring as required, clear
P00AA-62 Intake Air Temperature

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - Harness fault - Intake air Check the harness between the engine
Signal Compare Failure temperature sensor circuit control module and the mass airflow sensor
Intake air temperature for damage caused by chaffing or heat. Refer
sensor fault (part of mass to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
air flow sensor) all the circuits connected to the mass air
flow sensor for open circuit, short circuit,
high resistance and intermittent connections.
Check mass airflow sensor 2 circuits as both
sensors share the ground connection. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
P00BC-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
Air Flow Too Low - No sub shut bi-turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck shut bi-turbo mode
type information Turbine intake solenoid If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
Intake system low pressure stuck shut
boost leak bank 2 If this DTC is logged with P006A-00, suspect
intake system low pressure boost leak bank
2
P00BC-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
NOTE: Circuit diagram
Air Flow Too Low - from sensor 1 is less than the value
component name maf/iat sensor
Mechanical Failures expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 1
to the relevant sections of the workshop
Airflow disruption at sensing manual and check the induction system for
element of mass air flow air leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
condition of the air filter and examine the
sensor induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
Mass air flow sensor failure air flow at the sensing element. Clear the
DTC and retest the system
faults suspect the mass air flow sensor .
P00BD-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - Refer to the relevant sections of the
Air Flow Too High - No sub component name maf/iat sensor workshop manual and check the induction
type information system for air leaks
bank 1
Air leak at air intake system check mass air flow sensor for short circuit to
A power. Repair wiring as required, clear the
Harness fault - Mass air flow DTC and retest the system
sensor circuit short circuit to If the DTC resets and there are no harness
power faults suspect the mass air flow sensor .
Mass air flow sensor failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P00BD-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
Air Flow Too High - open mono turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck open mono turbo
Mechanical Failures Turbine intake solenoid mode
leakage when closed If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
Turbine intake solenoid turbine intake solenoid leakage when closed
stuck open If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
Intake air system, blocked P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
low pressure air intake. This turbine intake solenoid stuck open
failure mode can be caused If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
by snow packing in the P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
intake system. Symptoms intake air system, blocked low pressure air
often disappear after the intake
vehicle has been warmed If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
and heat soaked. Similar P1247-00 suspect, primary turbocharger
symptoms to seized primary seized
turbo Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Primary turbo charger seized system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
P00BE-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
Air Flow Too Low - No sub component name maf/iat sensor boost air recirculation solenoid stuck open.
type information Refer to the relevant sections of the
bank 2
workshop manual and check the boost air
Boost air recirculation recirculation solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid stuck open bi-turbo to power, ground, open circuit. Check and
mode install a new boost air recirculation solenoid
Airflow disruption at sensing as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
element of mass air flow procedures manual, or determine if any prior
sensor 2 approval programme is in operation, prior to
Harness fault - Mass air flow the installation of a new module/component.
sensor circuit short circuit to Refer to the relevant sections of the
ground, high resistance, workshop manual and check the induction
open circuit system for air leaks, and obstructions to
Mass air flow sensor 2 flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
failure examine the induction pipes for debris which
could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and
retest the system
If the DTC resets suspect the mass air flow
sensor. Check and install a new mass air flow
sensor 2 as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P00BE-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow B
Air Flow Too Low - from sensor 2 is less than the value
Mechanical Failures expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 2
Mass air flow failure condition of the air filter and examine the
induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
air flow at the sensing element. Clear the
P00BF-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - Air leak at air intake system If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00, suspect
Air Flow Too High - No sub B boost air recirculation solenoid stuck open.
type information Harness fault - Mass air flow Refer to the relevant sections of the
sensor circuit short circuit to workshop manual and check the boost air
power recirculation solenoid circuit for short circuit
Mass air flow sensor 2 to power, ground, open circuit. Check and
failure install a new boost air recirculation solenoid
the installation of a new module/component.
Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the induction
system for air leaks
check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
to power. Repair wiring as required, clear the
module/component
P00BF-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - Intake air system, high If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
Air Flow Too High - pressure boost leak bank A P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
Mechanical Failures system, high pressure boost leak bank A
P00CF-62 Secondary Compressor

Outlet Pressure Sensor - Boost air circuit leak or This DTC is set when the engine control
Signal compare failure blockage module detects a signal compare failure on
Boost air recirculation the boost air pressure sensor signal. Check
solenoid fault the sensor hose for blockages or leaks.
Boost air solenoid fault Check the sensor and harness for mechanical
Mechanical fault - sensor damage caused by heat or chaffing. Check
hose blocked or leaking for DTCs relating to faults on the Accelerator
Harness fault - Boost air Pedal Position sensor as these sensors share
pressure sensor circuit power supply and ground connections
Boost air pressure sensor The boost air pressure sensor has three
failure circuits, a 5 volt supply, a sensor ground, and
an analogue voltage signal line. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the
sensor voltage and ground supplies for open
circuits or short circuit to ground. Check the
signal line for open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground. Repair the
wiring harness as required
boost air pressure sensor failure. The sensor
provides an analogue voltage output in
response to the pressure applied at the
sensing orifice. The output voltage range is
between 0.2 and 4.8 volts. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is
P0101-21 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Signal Amplitude < from sensor 1 is less than the value
Minimum expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 1
The engine control module manual and check the induction system for
measured a signal voltage air leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
below a specified range but condition of the air filter and examine the
not necessarily a short induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
circuit to ground, gain low air flow at the sensing element
Airflow disruption at sensing Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
element of mass air flow system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
sensor dynamic test) routine
Harness fault - Mass air flow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor circuit short circuit to check mass air flow sensor for short circuit to
ground, high resistance, ground, high resistance, open circuit. Repair
open circuit wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
Mass air flow sensor failure the system
sensor as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0101-22 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Signal Amplitude > from sensor 1 is less than the value
Maximum expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 1
above a specified range but condition of the air filter and examine the
circuit to power, gain too air flow at the sensing element
high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Airflow disruption at sensing check mass air flow sensor for short circuit to
element of mass air flow power. Repair wiring as required, clear the
sensor DTC and retest the system
Harness fault - Mass air flow If the DTC resets suspect the mass air flow
sensor circuit short circuit to sensor. Check and install a new mass air flow
power sensor as required. Refer to the warranty
Mass air flow sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0101-92 Mass or Volume Air Flow

Sensor "A" Circuit Airflow disruption at sensing This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Range/Performance - element of mass air flow from sensor 1 is less than the value
Performance or incorrect sensor expected by the engine control module. Refer
operation Harness fault - Mass air flow to the relevant sections of the workshop
sensor circuit short circuit to manual and check the induction system for
ground, short circuit to air leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
power, open circuit, high condition of the air filter and examine the
resistance induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
Mass air flow sensor failure air flow at the sensing element
check mass air flow sensor for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair wiring as required,
clear the DTC and retest the system
sensor as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0102-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A NOTES:
Circuit Low - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
- Circuit MAFS_B - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system check datalogger signals, Air Flow
Rate From mass air flow Sensor Bank 1
Circuit diagram component (0x0504). This DTC is set if the mass air flow
name maf/iat sensor bank 1 signal from sensor 1 is less than the value
expected by the engine control module. Refer
Airflow disruption at sensing to the relevant sections of the workshop
element of mass air flow manual and check the induction system for
sensor air leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
Harness fault - Mass air flow condition of the air filter and examine the
sensor circuits induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
Mass air flow sensor failure air flow at the sensing element
check the power and ground circuits for the
mass air flow sensors for high resistance,
short circuits to power or ground, check the
mass air flow signal line between the engine
control module and the mass air flow sensor
for high resistance, and intermittent faults.
retest the system
sensor. Refer to the warranty policy and
P0103-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A NOTES:

Circuit High - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system check datalogger signals, Air Flow
Rate From Mass Air Flow Sensor Bank 1
- Circuit MAFS_B - (0x0504). This DTC is set if the mass air flow
signal from sensor 1 is greater than the
value expected by the engine control module.
Circuit diagram component Refer to the relevant sections of the
name maf/iat sensor bank 1 workshop manual and check the induction
system for air leaks, and obstructions to
Airflow disruption at sensing flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
element of mass air flow examine the induction pipes for debris which
sensor could disrupt air flow at the sensing
Harness fault - Mass air flow element. Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor circuits diagrams and check the power and ground
Mass air flow sensor failure circuits for the mass air flow sensors for high
resistance, short circuits to power or ground,
check the mass air flow signal line between
the engine control module and the mass air
flow sensor for high resistance, and
intermittent faults. Repair wiring as required,
clear the DTC and retest the system. If the
DTC resets suspect the mass air flow sensor.
(0x0504). This DTC is set if the mass air flow
Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the induction
flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
examine the induction pipes for debris which
could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
retest the system
P0105-16 Manifold Absolute

Pressure/BARO circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
NOTE: - Circuit MAP -
Circuit voltage below check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
threshold The engine control module circuits, high resistance, short circuit to
measured a voltage below a ground. Check the sensor ground for open
specified range but not circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
necessarily a short circuit to signal circuit for short circuit to ground, high
ground resistance. Repair wiring as required, clear
Harness fault - Manifold the DTC and retest the system
absolute pressure sensor If the DTC resets and there are no harness
circuits faults suspect the manifold absolute
Manifold absolute pressure pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
sensor failure and procedures manual, or determine if any
Blockage or leak between prior approval programme is in operation,
the intake manifold and the prior to the installation of a new
manifold absolute pressure module/component
sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system check datalogger signals, Corrected
Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure (0x0322),
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
(0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure Bank 1
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the voltage
on the manifold absolute pressure sensor
signal circuit is less than the threshold
expected by the engine control module. This
sensor is a pressure transducer with a 5 volt
sensor supply, a sensor ground, and a signal
circuit. Refer to the workshop manual and
check the manifold absolute pressure sensor
is correctly connected to the air intake
manifold and there are no blockages or air
leaks preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor. Check for DTCs associated with the
throttle position sensor which has a common
power supply

Pressure/BARO circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit voltage above check the 5 volt supply circuit for short circuit
threshold The engine control module to power. Check the sensor ground for open
measured a voltage above a circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
specified range but not signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
necessarily a short circuit to wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
power the system
Harness fault - Manifold If the DTC resets and there are no harness
absolute pressure sensor faults suspect the manifold absolute
circuits pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
Manifold absolute pressure and procedures manual, or determine if any
sensor failure prior approval programme is in operation,
Blockage or leak between prior to the installation of a new
the intake manifold and the module/component
manifold pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
signal circuit is greater than the threshold
circuit. The sensing element is connected to
intake manifold pressure downstream of the
throttle plate. Refer to the workshop manual
and check the manifold absolute pressure
sensor is correctly connected to the air
intake manifold and there are no blockages
or air leaks preventing communication of
pressure changes between the manifold and
the sensor. Check for DTCs associated with
the throttle position sensor which has a
common power supply

Pressure/Barometric Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pressure Sensor Circuit - check the 5 volt supply circuit for short circuit
Signal has too few Harness fault - Manifold to power. Check the sensor ground for open
transitions / events absolute pressure sensor circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
circuits signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
Manifold absolute pressure wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
sensor failure the system
Blockage or leak between If the DTC resets and there are no harness
the intake manifold and the faults suspect the manifold absolute
manifold pressure sensor pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
module/component
Intake Manifold Pressure downstream of the
common power supply

Pressure/Barometric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Pressure Sensor Circuit Low system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
- No sub type information Harness fault - Manifold dynamic test) routine
absolute pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuits check the 5 volt supply circuit for short circuit
Manifold absolute pressure to power. Check the sensor ground for open
sensor failure circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Blockage or leak between signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
the intake manifold and the wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
manifold pressure sensor the system
faults suspect the manifold absolute
module/component
Intake Manifold Pressure downstream of the
common power supply

Pressure/Barometric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Pressure Sensor Circuit Low system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
- Circuit voltage below The engine control module dynamic test) routine
threshold measured a voltage below a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
specified range but not check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
necessarily a short circuit to circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
ground ground. Check the sensor ground for open
Harness fault - Manifold circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
absolute pressure sensor signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
circuits power, short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
Manifold absolute pressure as required, clear the DTC and retest the
sensor failure system
Blockage or leak between If the DTC resets and there are no harness
the intake manifold and the faults suspect the manifold absolute
manifold pressure sensor pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
module/component
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the manifold
absolute pressure sensor signal voltage is
lower than expected by the engine control
module. This sensor is a pressure transducer
with a 5 volt sensor supply, a sensor ground,
and a signal circuit. The sensing element is
connected to intake manifold pressure
downstream of the throttle plate. Refer to
the workshop manual and check the manifold
absolute pressure sensor is correctly
connected to the air intake manifold and
there are no blockages or air leaks
preventing communication of pressure
sensor

Pressure Sensor Circuit check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
High - No sub type Harness fault - Manifold circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
information absolute pressure sensor ground. Check the sensor ground for open
circuits circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Manifold absolute pressure signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
sensor failure power, short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
Blockage or leak between as required, clear the DTC and retest the
the intake manifold and the system
manifold pressure sensor If the DTC resets and there are no harness
faults suspect the manifold absolute
module/component
greater than expected by the engine control
connected to Intake Manifold Pressure
absolute pressure sensor is corrected
sensor

Pressure Sensor Circuit check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
High - Circuit voltage above The engine control module circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
threshold measured a voltage above a ground. Check the sensor ground for open
specified range but not circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
necessarily a short circuit to signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
power power, short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
Harness fault - Manifold as required, clear the DTC and retest the
absolute pressure sensor system
circuits If the DTC resets and there are no harness
Manifold absolute pressure faults suspect the manifold absolute
sensor failure pressure sensor. Refer to the warranty policy
Blockage or leak between and procedures manual, or determine if any
the intake manifold and the prior approval programme is in operation,
manifold pressure sensor prior to the installation of a new
module/component
greater than expected by the engine control
connected to intake manifold pressure
absolute pressure sensor is corrected
sensor
P010A-92 Mass or Volume Air Flow

Sensor "B" Circuit - This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Performance or incorrect from sensor 2 is greater than the value
operation expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 2
Harness fault - Mass air flow condition of the air filter and examine the
sensor circuit short circuit to induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
ground, short circuit to air flow at the sensing element
power, open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
Mass air flow failure to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair wiring as required,
module/component
P010B-21 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Signal Amplitude < from sensor 2 is less than the value
Minimum expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 2
below a specified range but condition of the air filter and examine the
circuit to ground, gain low air flow at the sensing element
Airflow disruption at sensing Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
element of mass air flow dynamic test) routine
Harness fault - Mass air flow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor circuit short circuit to check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
ground, high resistance, to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
open circuit Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and
Mass air flow failure retest the system
module/component
P010B-22 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Signal Amplitude > from sensor 2 is less than the value
Maximum expected by the engine control module. Refer
bank 2
above a specified range but condition of the air filter and examine the
circuit to power, gain too air flow at the sensing element
high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Airflow disruption at sensing check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
element of mass air flow to power. Repair wiring as required, clear the
sensor 2 DTC and retest the system
Harness fault - Mass air flow If the DTC resets suspect the mass air flow
sensor circuit short circuit to sensor. Check and install a new mass air flow
power sensor 2 as required. Refer to the warranty
Mass air flow failure policy and procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P010C-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B NOTES:

Circuit Low - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
- Circuit MAFS_A - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit diagram component (0x0505). This DTC is set if the mass air flow
name maf/iat sensor bank 2 signal from sensor 2 is less than the value
expected by the engine control module. Refer
Airflow disruption at sensing to the relevant sections of the workshop
element of mass air flow manual and check the induction system for
Harness fault - Mass air flow air leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
sensor circuits condition of the air filter and examine the
Mass air flow failure induction pipes for debris which could disrupt
air flow at the sensing element
retest the system
P010D-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B NOTES:

Circuit High - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system check datalogger signals, Air Flow
- Circuit MAFS_A - (0x0505). This DTC is set if the mass air flow
Circuit diagram component Refer to the relevant sections of the
name maf/iat sensor bank 2 workshop manual and check the induction
Airflow disruption at sensing flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
element of mass air flow examine the induction pipes for debris which
Harness fault - Mass air flow could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
sensor circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mass air flow failure check the power and ground circuits for the
retest the system
P0116-00 Engine Coolant

Temperature Sensor 1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
NOTE: - Circuit ECT -
Circuit Range/Performance - system check datalogger signals, Engine
No sub type information Engine coolant level or flow Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
fault Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
Harness fault - engine DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
coolant temperature sensor value fails plausibility checks by the engine
circuits control module. Refer to the workshop
Engine coolant temperature manual and check the engine cooling system
sensor failure to ensure the coolant condition and level is
correct
check the engine coolant temperature sensor
circuits for high resistance, short circuit to
other circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
the system
If the DTC resets suspect the engine coolant
temperature sensor. Refer to the warranty
module/component

Circuit Voltage Below The engine control module Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
Threshold measured a voltage below a Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
specified range but not DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
necessarily a short circuit to sensor signal voltage is less than the value
ground expected by the engine control module. Refer
Engine coolant level or flow to the workshop manual and check the
fault engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
Harness fault - engine condition and level is correct
coolant temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuits check the engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature circuits for high resistance, short circuit to
sensor failure other circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
the system
module/component

Circuit Voltage Above The engine control module Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
Threshold measured a voltage above a Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
specified range but not DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
necessarily a short circuit to sensor signal voltage is greater than the
power value expected by the control module. Refer
Engine coolant level or flow to the workshop manual and check the
fault engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
Harness fault - engine condition and level is correct
coolant temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuits check the engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature circuits for high resistance, short circuit to
other circuits, intermittent faults. Repair
sensor failure wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
module/component

Temperature Sensor 1 The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Range/Performance - measured a signal voltage system check datalogger signals, Engine
Signal Amplitude < below a specified range but Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
Minimum not necessarily a short Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
circuit to ground, gain low DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant level or flow sensor signal amplitude is lower than the
fault value expected by the control module. Refer
Harness fault - engine to the workshop manual and check the
coolant temperature sensor engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
circuit short circuit to condition and level is correct
ground, high resistance, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit check the engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature for short circuit to ground, high resistance,
sensor failure open circuit. Repair wiring as required, clear
temperature sensor. Check and install a new
engine coolant temperature sensor as
required

Temperature Sensor 1 The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Range/Performance - measured a signal voltage system check datalogger signals, Engine
Signal Amplitude > above a specified range but Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
Maximum not necessarily a short Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
circuit to power, gain too DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
high sensor signal amplitude is greater than the
Engine coolant level or flow value expected by the control module. Refer
fault to the workshop manual and check the
Harness fault - engine engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
coolant temperature sensor condition and level is correct
circuit short circuit to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine coolant temperature check the engine coolant temperature sensor
sensor failure circuit for short circuit to power. Repair wiring
as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
temperature sensor. Check and install a new
engine coolant temperature sensor as
required
P0130-00 O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1

Sensor 1) - No sub type Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A -
information check the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
LPPC_A
for open circuit. Repair wiring harness as
Harness fault - Pre catalyst required. Clear DTC and retest
oxygen sensor circuit open If no fault found in wiring harness suspect
circuit pre catalyst oxygen sensor. Refer to the
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor warranty policy and procedures manual, or
component fault determine if any prior approval programme is
P0130-11 O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor

1) - Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A -
check the pre catalyst oxygen sensor circuits
The engine control module for short circuit to ground. Repair wiring
has detected a ground harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
measurement for a period If no fault found in wiring harness suspect
longer than expected or has pre catalyst oxygen sensor. Refer to the
detected a ground warranty policy and procedures manual, or
measurement when another determine if any prior approval programme is
value was expected in operation, prior to the installation of a
Harness fault - Pre catalyst new module/component
oxygen sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor
component fault
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Headlamp
Control Module (HCM)
Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Control Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1041-04 Levelling Control -
System internal No Headlamp control Install a new Headlamp Control Module as required.
failures module functionality - Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Module internal failure
B1041-54 Levelling Control -

Missing calibration Levelling sensor
NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out
calibration routine not
with the vehicle unladen and with correct tire pressures.
carried out
Carry out the levelling sensor calibration routine using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

signal protection Checksum error Clear the DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains install a
calculation incorrect new Headlamp Control Module. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual
B1087-86 LIN Bus "A" - Signal

invalid Signal invalid Clear the DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains install a
new Headlamp Control Module. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus off

Bus Off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
LIN Bus circuit short LIN bus circuit. Check for other related DTCs
circuit to ground
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Headlamp
Control Module B (HCMB)
Headlamp Control Module B (HCMB)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Control Module B, for
For additional information, refer to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1286-16 Interior Mirror - Circuit
voltage below threshold Mirror circuit voltage below threshold This DTC is for information only. Clear
- The electrochromic function the DTC and retest. If the problem
does not work persists, renew the mirror module. Refer
B1286-17 Interior Mirror - Circuit

voltage above threshold Mirror circuit voltage above threshold This DTC is for information only. Clear
- The electrochromic function the DTC and retest. If the problem
does not work persists, renew the mirror module. Refer
B1286-44 Interior Mirror - Data

memory failure Mirror control module data memory Renew the interior mirror module. Refer
failure to the warranty policy and procedures
- The electrochromic function manual if a module is suspect
does not work
B1286-47 Interior Mirror -

Watchdog/safety micro Control module watchdog/safety This DTC is for information only. Clear
controller failure Micro controller failure the DTC and retest. If the problem
- The electrochromic function persists, renew the mirror module. Refer
does not work to the warranty policy and procedures
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Instrument
Cluster (IPC)
Instrument Cluster (IPC)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Instrument Cluster, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1009-51 Ignition Authorisation - Not
programmed Configure the Instrument Cluster as a New
NOTE: This DTC is only
module using the manufacturer approved
likely to occur following
diagnostic system
component replacement
applications failing prior to
completion
Security Identifier not

programmed in Central
Junction Box (Part of
Immobilization set-up)
B1009-87 Ignition Authorisation -

Missing message Missing message
CAN circuit fault
Instrument Cluster fault
Central Junction Box fault Clear the DTC and retest
Battery voltage low Check for additional ignition related DTCs and
rectify as necessary
If problem persists, carry out CAN Network
Integrity Test and On Demand Self Test using
check CAN circuits
B100D-64 Column Lock Authorisation -
Signal plausibility failure Instrument Cluster can
not enable Steering
fault condition is present and should be ignored
Column Lock Module
unless the customer has reported a vehicle / engine
ground
start concern. Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the
CAN Network fault
customer concern prior to diagnosis
Anti-lock Braking System,
Engine Control Module, Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem
Instrument Cluster fault persists, carry out CAN Network Integrity Test
and On Demand Self Test using the
diagrams and check CAN network
B100E-64 Video Input "A" - signal

plausibility failure Low voltage differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signal (LDVS) circuit fault check the low voltage differential signal
Module internal failure (LDVS) circuit between the instrument panel
cluster and the touch screen display for fault
B1026-12 Steering Column Lock -

Circuit short to battery Steering column lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short to power check the Steering Column Lock Module ground
circuit
B108E-13 Display - Circuit open

Cluster display connector Renew the Instrument Cluster. Refer to the
fails continuity check warranty policies and procedures before
- Continuity circuit renewing the module
in display flex
cable open circuit
B10B7-86 Rear Air Discharge

Temperature - Signal invalid Display illumination area Check the harness connector to the Instrument
temperature sensor Cluster for security and integrity. Clear the
signal is out of range DTC and retest the switch function. If the
problem persists, renew the Instrument
Cluster. Refer to the warranty policies and
procedures before renewing the module
B115C-7A Transfer Fuel Pump - Fluid

leak or seal failure Transfer fuel pump fault Check for other fuel pump related DTCs.
- Fluid leak or seal Renew the transfer fuel (jet) pump
failure
B1264-13 Control Module Connector(s)

Loose Or Disconnected - Display not adequately Suspect the Instrument Cluster, install a new
Circuit open connected to Instrument Instrument Cluster as necessary. Refer to the
Cluster circuit board Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
module is suspect

Loose Or Disconnected - Airbag Telltale not Suspect the Instrument Cluster, install a new
Internal electronic failure adequately connected to Instrument Cluster as necessary. Refer to the
Instrument Cluster circuit Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
board module is suspect

Loose Or Disconnected - Security Telltale not Suspect the Instrument Cluster, install a new
Incorrect assembly adequately connected to Instrument Cluster as necessary. Refer to the
Instrument Cluster circuit Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
board module is suspect
B12FE-09 Fan - Component Failures

Cooling fan is stalled/not Check for foul condition at fan
running at full speed
B12FE-12 Fan - Circuit short to battery

Cooling fan ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
cannot be applied. Short check cooling fan ground circuit for short to
to power power
B12FE-13 Fan - Circuit open

Cooling fan ground
cannot be applied. Open
circuit
unless the customer has reported an instrument panel
cluster display reduced brightness concern. Clear the
DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis
Check for DTC P0607-4B (Control module

performance system internal failure - over
temperature). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the instrument panel
cooling fan ground for broken wire, open circuit
B1A14-96 RCM Warning Lamp -

Component internal failure SRS LED failure
Warning lamp circuit fault
unless the customer has reported an airbag warning
lamp self check concern. Clear the DTC and retest.
Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Check the harness connector to the Instrument

Cluster for security and integrity. Clear the
DTC and retest the switch function. If the
B1A68-86 Ambient Temperature Sensor

- Signal invalid Internal board Check the harness connector to the Instrument
temperature sensor Cluster for security and integrity. Clear the
signal is out of DTC and retest the switch function. If the
range/invalid problem persists, renew the Instrument
B1A85-96 Ambient Light Sensor -

Component internal failure Internal light sensor
failure
cluster brightness concern. Clear the DTC and retest.
Check the harness connector to the Instrument

DTC and retest the switch function. If the
P0607-4B Control Module Performance

- Over temperature Cluster over temperature Check the cluster cooling fan/circuit and rectify
as necessary. Clear the DTC and retest
P060A-08 Internal Control Module

Monitoring Processor Internal communication
Performance - Bus errors are causing
Signal/Message Failures lock-ups and resets
cluster concern. Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the
customer concern prior to diagnosis
Suspect the Instrument Cluster. Refer to the

warranty policies and procedures before
renewing the module
P0610-55 Control Module Vehicle

Options Error - Not Control module Configure the module using the manufacturers
configured incorrectly configured approved diagnostic system

Communication Bus - Bus off CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the power and ground connections to
the module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network

Communication Bus - Bus off Bus off Carry out the CAN Network Integrity Test using
the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
diagrams and check CAN network to
Instrument Cluster
ECM/PCM "A" - No sub type No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information check the power and ground connections to
diagrams and check the CAN network between
the Engine Control Module and Instrument
Cluster
U0101-00 Lost Communication with

TCM - No sub type No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information check the power and ground connections to
the Transmission Control Module and
Instrument Cluster

Gear Shift Control Module A - No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
No sub type information check the power and ground connections to
the Transmission Shift Control Module and
Instrument Cluster

Cruise Control Module - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Speed Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Anti-Lock Braking System No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
(ABS) Control Module - No check the power and ground connections to
sub type information the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Anti-lock Braking System Module and
Instrument Cluster

Park Brake Control Module - No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Parking Brake Module and Instrument
Cluster

Suspension Control Module Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
"A" - no sub type information fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuits
CAN Bus circuit fault to the continuously variable damping (CVD)
Module internal failure module. Using the manufacturer approved
integrity test

Differential Control Module - No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rear - No sub type check the power and ground connections to
information the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Rear Differential Control Module and
Instrument Cluster
Suspension Control Module No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
"B" - No sub type check the power and ground connections to
the Adaptive Damping Control Module and
Instrument Cluster

Suspension Control Module Bus signal/message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
"B" - Bus Signal/Message failures check the power and ground connections to
Failures the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Adaptive Damping Control Module and
Instrument Cluster

Body Control Module - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Central Junction Box and Instrument
Cluster

Body Control Module "A" - no Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sub type information fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuit to
CAN Bus circuit fault the body control module for fault. Using the
Module internal failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test

Restraints Control Module - No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Restraints Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Restraints Occupant No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Classification System Module check the power and ground connections to
- No sub type information the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Restraints Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Parking Assist Control CAN Link Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module "A" - No sub type Cluster /parking aid check the power and ground connections to
information module missing message the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Parking Aid Module and Instrument Cluster

HVAC Control Module - No CAN Link Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sub type information Cluster/HVAC module check the power and ground connections to
missing message the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Climate Control Module and Instrument
Cluster
"Door Control Module A" - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Door Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

"Seat Control Module A" - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Seat Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Remote Function Actuation - No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
the Remote Function Actuation Module and
Instrument Cluster

Side Obstacle Detection No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Control Module - Left - No check the power and ground connections to
sub type information the module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Side Object Detection module and
Instrument Cluster

Headlamp Control Module No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
"A" - No sub type check the power and ground connections to
the Headlamp Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Headlamp Control Module No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
"B" - No sub type check the power and ground connections to
the Headlamp Control Module and Instrument
Cluster

Impact Classification System Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module - No sub type fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuit to
information CAN Bus circuit fault the restraints control module (RCM) for fault.
Module internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test

Front Controls / Display Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Interface Module - No sub fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuit to
type information CAN Bus circuit fault the front controls display interface module
Module internal failure (FCDIM) for fault. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
network integrity test
U025D-00 Lost Communication With

Front Controls Interface Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module "B" - no sub type fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuit to
information CAN Bus circuit fault the front controls interface module B (FCIMB)
Module internal failure for fault. Using the manufacturer approved
integrity test

Camera Module- Rear - no Power or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sub type information fault check the power, ground and CAN Bus circuit to
CAN Bus circuit fault the rear view camera for fault. Using the
Module internal failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

Software Incompatibility - No sub type information Check for other modules reporting CAN Bus off
No sub type information or lost communication faults. If other modules
report problems, check the software version in
the Central Junction Box using the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system. If
no other modules report problems, check the
software version in the Instrument Cluster.
Update/configure as necessary
U0402-68 Invalid Data Received from

TCM - Event information Event information Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs.
Refer to relevant DTC index
U1A00-00 Private Communication

Network - No sub type No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information check the LIN Bus circuit
U2013-02 Switch Pack - General signal

failure General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the LIN Bus circuit
U2013-08 Switch Pack - Bus

Signal/Message Failures General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the LIN Bus circuit
U210A-86 Temperature Sensor - Signal Internal MOST Fibre Optic

invalid Transceiver temperature sensor Check the ventilation fan and ducting are not
signal is out of range obstructed. Allow system to cool, put vehicle
in the shade and operate the climate control
on cool. Clear the DTC and recheck the system

Calibration/parameter Odometer reading on Check the harness connector to the Instrument
memory failure cluster is missing or Cluster for security and integrity. Clear the
incorrect - calibration / DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
parameter memory failure the Instrument Cluster. Refer to the warranty
policies and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Check the harness connector to the Instrument
DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
the Instrument Cluster. Refer to the warranty
policies and procedures manual if the module
is suspect
U3000-55 Control Module - Not

configured Speedometer is Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
inaccurate system select the vehicle configuration main
Tire size compensation is menu, select configure existing modules menu
incorrectly configured and program the module
U3000-87 Control Module - Missing

message Car configuration file Configure the car config file using the
missing message approved diagnostic system

Number - Invalid serial data Invalid vehicle Configure the car config file using the
received identification number approved diagnostic system
U3003-16 Control Module - Circuit

voltage below threshold Circuit voltage below Check vehicle battery and charging system.
threshold (9V) Refer to the relevant section in the workshop
manual. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the power supply circuits to the
module
U3003-17 Control Module - Circuit
voltage above threshold Circuit voltage above Check vehicle battery and charging system.
threshold (16V) Refer to the relevant section in the workshop
module
U3003-62 Control Module - Signal

compare failure Signal compare failure Check vehicle battery and charging system.
Refer to the relevant section in the workshop
module
Published: 21-Jul-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Audio Module (ACM)
Integrated Audio Module (ACM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Audio Module , for additional

P150E-00 Electronic Control
Module Cooling Fan Integrated audio module Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC returns suspect
Circuit - No sub internal cooling fan fault integrated audio module internal fault
type information
B119F-11 GPS Antenna -
Circuit short to Confirm global positioning system antenna is connected
NOTE: Circuit - GPS_SIG -
ground to the integrated audio module
GPS_SCN -
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Global positioning antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
system antenna not
connected to integrated
audio module
Global positioning
system antenna circuit
short to ground
B119F-13 GPS Antenna -

Circuit open NOTE: Circuit - GPS_SIG - NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
GPS_SCN - condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
Global positioning retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
system antenna not
connected to integrated Confirm global positioning system antenna is connected
audio module to the integrated audio module
Global positioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
system antenna circuit antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B11A3-49 Gyroscope -
Internal electronic Integrated audio module Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC returns suspect
failures internal fault with integrated audio module internal fault
gyroscope
B121C-13 Hard Drive - Circuit

open Internal fault with
communication with hard
condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
drive
retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Clear DTC and retest. If the DTC returns

Check navigation system for correct operation
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
check and install latest relevant level of software to the
integrated audio module
Insert a CD and copy one track to the hard drive to
confirm correct operation. Return vehicle to standard
settings and delete the file
If DTC returns suspect integrated audio module internal
fault
B121C-49 Hard Drive -

Internal electronic Internal fault with Clear DTC and retest
failures integrated audio module Check navigation system for correct operation
hard drive Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Insert a CD and copy one track to the hard drive to
confirm correct operation. Return vehicle to standard
settings and delete the file
If DTC returns suspect integrated audio module internal
fault
B1252-09 USB Port -

Component failures Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
NOTE: Circuit - USB_POS -
supply and ground to integrated audio module
USB_GND - USB_DATA_NEG -
Check universal serial bus circuits, repair as required
USB_DATA_POS -
Clear DTC and retest. If DTC returns suspect integrated
No Universal Serial Bus audio module internal fault
function
B1252-19 USB Port - Circuit

current above Excessive current drawn
NOTE: If this DTC is logged, this suggests that the
threshold by a universal serial bus
universal serial bus port has been overloaded, by a portable
device/cable
device or faulty cable
Universal serial bus
device internal failure Confirm universal serial bus port operation, and using
Universal serial bus the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
device cable internal integrated audio module for related DTCs and refer to
failure the relevant DTC index
Disconnect all the universal serial bus connected
devices. Close all the doors and lock the vehicle, wait
for a few minutes (to shut down the media orientated
system transport ring). Restart the vehicle and check if
the universal serial bus operation has recovered
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. Advise the customer of the
use of faulty devices/cables. Some devices will draw
more current when charging such as iPads and can
cause this DTC to log. This is not a permanent fault
B1296-4A Navigation Map

Data - Incorrect Navigation map does not
component match the market of the
installed vehicle
Update map data as required

check and up-date the car configuration file as required
Clear DTC and retest. If DTC returns suspect integrated
audio module internal fault
B1A56-11 Antenna - Circuit

short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check AM/FM
NOTE: Circuit - AM_FM_SIG
antenna circuits. If no faults found suspect the
- AM_FM_SCN -
AM/FM antenna circuit
short to ground

open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check AM/FM
NOTE: Circuit - AM_FM_SIG
antenna circuits. If no faults found suspect the
- AM_FM_SCN -
AM/FM antenna circuit
open
B1D50-07 Digital Disk Player -

Mechanical failures Mechanical fault
Test the mechanism with two or three disks to confirm

correct operation
Perform basic visual inspection for foreign matter inside
disk player. Remove foreign matter if possible. If no
objects are found suspect integrated audio module
B1D55-11 Antenna#2 - Circuit

short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
NOTE: Circuit - FM2_SIG -
FM/Traffic Message Channel antenna circuits. If no
FM2_SCN -
faults found suspect the integrated audio module
FM/TMC antenna circuit
short to ground
B1D55-13 Antenna#2 - Circuit

open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
NOTE: Circuit - FM2_SIG -
FM/Traffic Message Channel antenna circuits. If no
FM2_SCN -
faults found suspect the integrated audio module
FM/Traffic Message
Channel antenna circuit
open circuit
B1D57-11 Antenna#4 Circuit -

Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit - VICS_SIG - NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication System
ground VICS_SCN - (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system used in the
Japan market only
Vehicle Information and
Communication System Check Vehicle Information and Communication System
beacon antenna short to beacon antenna is connected to the integrated audio
ground module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check Vehicle Information and Communication System
beacon antenna circuits. If no faults found suspect the
B1D57-13 Antenna#4 Circuit -

Circuit open NOTE: Circuit - VICS_SIG - NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication System
VICS_SCN - (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system used in the
Japan market only
Vehicle Information and
Communication System Check Vehicle Information and Communication System
beacon antenna circuit beacon antenna is connected to the integrated audio
open circuit module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check Vehicle Information and Communication System
beacon antenna circuits. If no faults found suspect the
B1D78-11 Auxiliary Input -

Circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
NOTE: Circuit -
ground auxiliary input #1 circuits. If no faults found suspect
AUX_1_RIGHT_POS -
the integrated audio module
AUX_1_LEFT_POS - AUX_1_NEG
Auxiliary #1 input circuit

short to ground
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Control Panel (FCIMB)
Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel, for additional

B10B8-23 Push Buttons - Signal
stuck low Front Controls Interface Check that no objects are pressing on the Front
Module button held in Controls Interface Module buttons
(pressed by external Check for contamination of panel/buttons such
object in contact with as spilt drinks/food etc. Clean the control button
button) and retest the system
Button contaminated / If the button sticking cannot be resolved by
sticking external cleaning suspect an internal fault
Front Controls Interface Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Module internal fault manual if a module or component is suspect
U0010-88 Medium Speed Can

Communication Bus - Bus Wiring harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
off power distribution the power and ground connections to the module
Wiring harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
medium speed CAN system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
network Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network

Body Control Module - Bus Wiring harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
signal/message failures power distribution the power and ground connections to the module
Wiring harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the Central Junction
Box and Front Controls Interface Module

HVAC Control Module - Wiring harness fault -
NOTE: Reduced HVAC performance indicated on
Bus signal/message power distribution
vehicle display
failures Wiring harness fault -
medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
network the power and ground connections to the module
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the HVAC Control
Module and Front Controls Interface Module

HVAC Control Module - Wiring harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Rear - Bus power distribution the power and ground connections to the module
signal/message failures Wiring harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the HVAC Control
Module - Rear and Front Controls Interface
Module
U0300-00 Internal control Module

Software Incompatible - Software incompatible Check part numbers for all software components.
No sub type information Install correct software as required

Configuration Configuration incompatible
NOTE: Reduced HVAC performance indicated on
incompatible - No sub vehicle display
type information
Check and install valid software, clear DTC and
confirm the system is operating correctly

compare failure Power distribution fault to
NOTE: This DTC is set when the control module
control module
registers a difference of more than 2 volts between the
CAN network fault
CAN reference battery voltage and the module supply
voltage
Check other modules for supply voltage related

DTCs, refer to the relevant index
the power and ground connections to the module
the CAN network
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Luggage
Compartment Powered Lid Module (RGTM)
Luggage Compartment Powered Lid Module (RGTM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Luggage Compartment Powered Lid
Module, for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,

C2006-11 Left Actuator -
Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the
ground Powered trunk lid powered trunk lid spindle actuator motor circuits (spindle
spindle actuator motor power and spindle motor ground) for short to ground.
internal fault Check the hall sensor positive supply line for short to
Rear Gate/Trunk ground. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest
Control Module system. If no harness faults are found suspect (1) the
powered trunk lid spindle actuator, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk
Control Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures

Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the
battery Powered trunk lid powered trunk lid spindle actuator motor circuits (spindle
spindle actuator motor power and spindle motor ground) for short to power.
internal fault Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest system. If no
Rear Gate/Trunk harness faults are found suspect (1) the powered trunk lid
Control Module spindle actuator, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module.
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a

Circuit open Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the
Powered trunk lid powered trunk lid spindle actuator motor circuits (spindle
spindle actuator motor power and spindle motor ground) for open circuit.
internal fault Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest system. If no
Rear Gate/Trunk harness faults are found suspect (1) the powered trunk lid
Control Module spindle actuator, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module.

Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the hall
battery or open Powered trunk lid sensor positive supply line for short to power or open circuit.
spindle actuator Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest system. If no
internal fault harness faults are found suspect (1) the powered trunk lid
Rear Gate/Trunk spindle actuator, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module.
Control Module Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a

Circuit current Trunk lid movement This DTC is set if the current on the powered trunk lid
above threshold blocked spindle actuator motor circuits exceeds a predetermined
Wiring harness fault value. Check that the trunk lid movement is not inhibited by
Powered trunk lid an obstruction above or inside the luggage compartment.
spindle actuator Check mechanical linkages/hinges are in good condition.
internal fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the
Rear Gate/Trunk powered trunk lid spindle actuator motor circuits (spindle
Control Module motor power and spindle motor ground) for short circuit.
Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest system. If no
harness faults are found suspect (1) the powered spindle
actuator, (2) the trunk lid Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module.
C2006-31 Left Actuator - No

signal Wiring harness fault This DTC is set if at least one of the hall sensors is not
Powered trunk lid producing a signal when the trunk lid is activated. Refer to
spindle actuator the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the hall sensor
internal fault signal circuits and the hall sensor power and ground supplies
Rear Gate/Trunk for open circuit, short circuit. Repair wiring as required. Clear
Control Module DTC and retest system. If no harness faults are found
suspect (1) the powered trunk lid spindle actuator, (2) the
Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
B10D0-23 Trunk Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal Wiring harness fault Check the trunk lid latch for mechanical blockages. Refer to
stuck low Trunk lid latch the electrical circuit diagrams and check both the power and
switch fault ground supplies to the Trunk lid Latch Switch for open circuit,
Rear Gate/Trunk short circuit. Check the secondary signal line for open circuit,
Control Module short to ground. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
retest system. If no harness faults are found suspect (1) the
trunk lid latch switch, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control
Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
B11C4-23 Boot/Trunk Close

Button - Signal Trunk lid close Check the trunk lid close switch is not jammed. Refer to the
stuck low switch held down electrical circuit diagrams and check the signal line from the
Wiring harness fault Trunk lid Close Switch to the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module
Trunk lid close for short to ground. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and
switch fault retest system. If no harness faults are found suspect (1) the
Rear Gate/Trunk trunk lid close switch, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control
Control Module Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
B1316-02 Boot/Trunk Latch

Power Close Unit - Wiring harness fault Check the trunk lid final close movement is not blocked.
General signal Power close unit Check the child entrapment lever is not stuck in the pulled
failure fault position. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Rear Gate/Trunk the striker home signal line from the power close unit to the
Control Module Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module for open circuit or short to
power. Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest
system. If no harness faults are found suspect (1) the power
close unit, (2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
B1316-93 Boot/Trunk Latch

Power Close Unit - Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the motor
No operation Power close unit power and motor ground supply circuits to the power close
fault unit for open circuit, short to power. check the striker home
Rear Gate/Trunk signal line from the power close unit to the Rear Gate/Trunk
Control Module Control Module for open circuit or short to power. Check the
power close unit ground for open circuit, short to power.
Repair wiring as required. Clear DTC and retest system. If no
harness faults are found suspect (1) the power close unit,
(2) the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the

Communication Bus MS CAN bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
- Bus off and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a MS
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the MS CAN network
U0140-00 Lost
Communication Lost communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
With Central with Central Junction and ground connections to the module. Using the
Junction Box - No Box manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a MS
sub type CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information diagrams and check the MS CAN network between the Rear
Gate/Trunk Control Module and Central Junction Box
U0300-00 Internal Control

Module Software Software stored in Check the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module is configured
Incompatibility - No Rear Gate/Trunk correctly. Reconfigure using the manufacturers approved
sub type Control Module is diagnostic equipment. Clear the DTC and retest the system
information not compatible with
master configuration

Received From Rear Gate/Trunk Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs and refer
ECM/PCM A - Event Control Module has to the relevant DTC index
information received invalid data
for the Engine
Control Module

Received From Rear Gate/Trunk Check the Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Control Module for
Anti-Lock Braking Control Module has related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
System (ABS) received invalid data
Control Module - for the Anti-Lock
Event information Braking System
(ABS) Control
Module
U201A-51 Control Module

Main Calibration Rear Gate/Trunk Program the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module using the
Data - Not Control Module has manufacturer approved diagnostic equipment. Clear the DTC
programmed main calibration and retest the system
data missing
U201A-52 Control Module

Main Calibration Rear Gate/Trunk Program the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module with the correct
Data - Not Control Module has calibration file using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
activated incompatible main equipment. Clear the DTC and retest the system
calibration data

Not Complete - No Central Car Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
sub type Configuration file and ground connections to the module. Using the
information not received by Rear manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a MS
Gate/Trunk Control CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module diagrams and check the MS CAN network between the Rear
Gate/Trunk Control Module and Central Junction Box. Program
the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module using the manufacturer

Configuration Compatible Central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
Incompatible - No Car Configuration and ground connections to the module. Using the
sub type file not received by manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a MS
information Rear Gate/Trunk CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Control Module diagrams and check the MS CAN network between the Rear
Gate/Trunk Control Module and Central Junction Box.
Check/amend the car configuration file Using the
Data memory Internal Rear Install a new Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the
failure Gate/Trunk Control Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
Module RAM memory module/component is suspect
failure

Program memory Internal Rear Install a new Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the
Module ROM memory module/component is suspect
failure

Calibration / Internal Rear Install a new Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the
parameter memory Gate/Trunk Control Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
failure Module Non Volatile module/component is suspect
memory failure

Internal electronic Internal Rear Install a new Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module. Refer to the
Module electronic module/component is suspect
failure detected

Over temperature The Rear Gate/Trunk The ambient air temperature value received by the Rear
Control Module has Gate/Trunk Control Module from the Engine Control Module
received an ambient has exceeded 80 degrees Celsius. This signal is transmitted
temperature value on CAN. If the Value exceeds 80 degrees Celsius the Rear
which exceeded 80 Gate/Trunk Control Module's strategy is to protect the
degrees Celsius Powered trunk lid spindle actuator by inhibiting operation.
Check the Engine Control Module for ambient temperature
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check if
the vehicle has been exposed to very high ambient
temperatures e.g. a paint curing oven. Clear the DTC and
retest the system

Signal compare Power distribution This DTC is set if there is a difference of more than 2 volts
failure fault between the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module supply line and
the reference battery voltage broadcast on MS CAN. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and
ground connections to the Rear Gate/Trunk Control Module
and the Central Junction Box. Repair any wiring faults, clear
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Occupant Classification System module,
for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,

B1193-53 Crash Event Storage
Full and Locked - The vehicle has been Confirm if vehicle has been involved in a collision, if so
Deactivated involved in a collision take appropriate repair actions
Clear DTC and retest system
B1A54-01 Occupant Belt

Tension Sensor - Safety belt tension Check safety belt for twists in the webbing or damaged
General electrical sensor jammed for more webbing. Ensure no objects are jamming operation of
failure than 3 seconds the belt. Remove any external causes of jamming, clear
DTC and retest system. If DTC remains suspect belt
tension sensor fault

Tension Sensor - Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
General signal failure Control Module Fault belt tension sensor signal circuit for short circuit to the
pressure sensor signal circuit. Repair wiring as required,
clear DTC and retest system. If DTC remains suspect
control module internal fault
Circuit short to Occupant belt tension belt tension sensor signal circuit for short to ground.
ground sensor internal fault Repair wiring as required, clear DTC and retest system.
Control Module internal If DTC remains suspect occupant belt tension sensor
fault internal fault, check sensor for internal short from
signal pin to ground pin
If no fault found with tension sensor suspect control
module

Circuit short to Occupant belt tension belt tension sensor signal circuit for short to power.
battery sensor internal fault Repair wiring as required, clear DTC and retest system.
Control Module internal If DTC remains suspect occupant belt tension sensor
fault internal fault, check sensor for internal short from
signal pin to reference voltage pin
module

Circuit open Occupant belt tension belt tension sensor signal circuit for open circuit. Repair
sensor internal fault wiring as required, clear DTC and retest system. If DTC
Control Module internal remains suspect occupant belt tension sensor internal
fault fault
module
B1A62-02 Pressure Sensor -

General signal failure Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Control Module Fault belt tension sensor signal circuit for short circuit to the
pressure sensor signal circuit. Repair wiring as required,
clear DTC and retest system. If DTC remains suspect
control module internal fault

Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ground Pressure sensor internal pressure sensor signal circuit for short to ground.
fault Repair wiring as required, clear DTC and retest system.
Control Module internal If DTC remains suspect pressure sensor internal fault,
fault check sensor for internal short from signal pin to ground
pin
If no fault found with pressure sensor suspect control
module

Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
battery Pressure sensor internal pressure sensor signal circuit for short to power. Repair
fault wiring as required, clear DTC and retest system. If DTC
Control Module internal remains suspect pressure sensor internal fault
fault If no fault found with pressure sensor suspect control
module
B1A62-7A Pressure Sensor -

Fluid leak or seal Internal sensor fault Install a new pressure sensor control module
failure
B1A62-7B Pressure Sensor -
Low fluid level Internal sensor fault Install a new sensor bladder

Communication Bus - Wiring harness fault Check other control modules for related DTCs and refer
No sub type Control module fault to the relevant DTC index
information Check other control modules for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check for short circuit between CAN high
and CAN low circuits. Repair wiring fault and perform
network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. If no wiring faults are found in the
wiring harness suspect an internal fault within a control
module

With Restraints Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Control Module - No Power distribution fault power and ground connections to the module. Using the
sub type information manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between
the Restraints Control Module and Occupancy
Classification System Control Module

Module Software Car configuration file Check all control modules for related DTCs and refer to
Incompatible - No stored in Occupancy the relevant DTC index
sub type information Classification System Check the components installed on the vehicle were
Control Module does not installed by the factory or a dealer
match the master car Install the original components or a new one as
configuration file required
Master car configuration
file not being
transmitted by master
control module

System internal Occupancy Classification Install a new control module
failures System control module Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
internal fault module/component is suspect
U3000-51 Control Module - Not

programmed Occupancy Classification Program the control module using the manufacturer
System control module approved diagnostic system
application missing

Missing calibration Calibration missing Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
perform the empty seat offset routine. Clear the DTC
and retest the system

Circuit voltage below Battery fault The Occupancy Classification System Control Module
threshold Charging system fault has detected a supply voltage below 8 volts
Power distribution fault Check the Engine Control Module for charging circuit
related DTCs. Refer to the Battery Care Manual and the
Workshop Manual and check the vehicle battery and
charging circuit performance
If the vehicle battery and charging system are
performing correctly check power and ground supplies to
the control module. Rectify wiring fault and clear the
DTC. Retest the system

Circuit voltage above Battery fault The Occupancy Classification System Control Module
threshold Charging system fault has detected a supply voltage above 18 volts
Check the Engine Control Module for charging circuit
related DTCs. Refer to the Battery Care Manual and the
Workshop Manual and check the vehicle battery and
charging circuit performance
Rectify battery and any wiring faults and clear the DTC.
Retest the system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Parking Aid
Module (PAM)
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
NOTES:
warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places and with a
current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into account
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent
concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor' tab on the
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under warranty.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Aid Control Module (PACM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1B36-01 Front Right Outer
Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Electrical Failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
- Component internal sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
failure to power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
Check the connector for integrity and damage, then
re-connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect sensor
from the bumper. Inspect the sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Exchange the
suspect sensor with another sensor within the
bumper that is not reporting a fault. Clear the DTC
and run the on demand self test to confirm if the
fault code now appears for the new position of the
suspect sensor. Renew the faulty sensor
Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
to battery front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace any

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
internal failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
B1B38-01 Front Right Inner

Electrical Failure Front Right Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required


internal failure Front Right Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
B1B40-01 Front Left Outer
Electrical Failure Front Left Outer Sensor - front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
Component internal sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
harness as required


internal failure Front Left Outer Sensor - front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
B1B42-01 Front Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure Front Left Inner Sensor - front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
battery front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure Front Left Inner Sensor - front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
B1B44-01 Rear Right Outer

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
Component internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failure power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
to battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B46-01 Rear Right Inner

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
to battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B48-01 Rear Left Outer Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
harness as required

- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B50-01 Rear Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
harness as required

- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B54-11 Function LED - Park Aid

ground Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to ground.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B54-12 Function LED - Park Aid

battery Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Control Module - Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Component internal clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
failure problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B57-11 Front Sensors Power

Circuit- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Check front and rear bumper harness for signs of
ground Control Module - damage and security of connections
Component internal Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1B58-11 Rear Sensors Power

Circuit - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Check rear and front (if front parking aid system
to ground Control Module - fitted) bumper harness for signs of damage and
Component internal security of connections
failure Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front parking aid system
fitted) for short circuit to ground. Repair or replace
any wiring harness as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1C30-73 Disable Switch -

Actuator stuck closed Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Control Switch - parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair or
Component internal replace any wiring harness as required
failure Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
problem persists, suspect the control switch
Check the switch function

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
No sub type failure - bus off Parking aid control module high speed CAN bus for
information short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance, or short circuit between the
paired CAN wires
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC
is still logged

With Body Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module - No sub type communication with power and ground connections to the central junction
information central junction box box. Clear DTC and retest
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the central junction box and the parking aid
control module

With Instrument Panel Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Cluster (IPC) Control communication with power and ground connections to the instrument
Module - No sub type instrument cluster cluster. Clear DTC and retest
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the central junction box and the parking aid
control module

Module Software Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incompatibility - No stored in Parking aid check all other control modules, for related DTCs and
sub type information control module does not refer to the relevant DTC index
match the master car Check the components installed on the vehicle were
configuration file installed by the factory or a dealer
Master car configuration Install the original component or a new one as
file not being transmitted required.
by master control module

From Body Control Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub type check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged
Clear the DTC and re-test
From Instrument Panel Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No check instrument cluster, for related DTCs and refer
sub type information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged
Clear the DTC and re-test

Not Complete - No sub Car configuration file not
NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the
type information the same as expected by
ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs
the parking aid control
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check and update the car configuration file as
required. Clear the DTC and retest

Configuration Parking aid control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incompatible - No sub module configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
type information error required. Clear the DTC and re-test

Internal electronic Parking aid control Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
failure module internal failure clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module

Number - Invalid serial VIN Mismatch, stored Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
data received VIN does not match clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
broadcast VIN check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid
control module

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
battery voltage, of 2 check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
volts or more, between to the relevant DTC index
parking aid system Check the vehicle charging system performance to
control module and ensure the voltage regulation is correct
central junction box Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance
parking aid control module power and ground circuits
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
Clear the DTC and retest
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear Climate
Control Module (RHVAC)
Rear Climate Control Module (RHVAC)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Climate Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B10B8-23 Push Buttons - Signal
stuck low Front Controls Check if the Integrated Control Panel button is sticking.
Interface Module Check/clean button. Clear DTC then wait for 2 minutes with
button stuck ignition on before retesting system. If DTC resets suspect
Integrated Control Panel. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect

Circuit short to Wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
battery or open fault hand sunload sensor circuit for short to power or open
Sun load sensor circuit. If DTC B1A63-15 is also logged check the ground
fault supply to the solar sensor. Repair wiring harness as
Rear HVAC control required. Clear DTC and retest the system. If no wiring
module fault fault found suspect (1) sunload sensor, (2) Rear HVAC
control module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is suspect

Circuit short to ground Wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
fault hand sunload sensor circuit for short to ground. Repair
Sun load sensor wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest the
fault system. If no wiring fault found suspect (1) sunload
Rear HVAC control sensor, (2) Rear HVAC control module. Refer to the
module fault Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Entertainment Module (REM)
Rear Entertainment Module (REM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Entertainment Module, for additional

B125E-4A Left Rear Display -
Incorrect component Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
NOTE: This diagnostic
installed and ground circuits to the left rear display screen. Check
trouble code is set when the
private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. Check
module has not read the
the installed screen is correct for the vehicle and has not
display screen serial number
been substituted. If a new component has been installed
within 25 seconds
check it was installed correctly
Rear display screen
serial number not
received
Rear display screen
serial number invalid
B125E-96 Left Rear Display -

Component internal Left rear display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
failure screen reported and ground circuits to the left rear display screen. Check
internal failure private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. If no
wiring faults are found suspect the screen. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
B125E-98 Left Rear Display -
Component or system Check the ventilation of the screen is not obstructed.
NOTE: This diagnostic
over temperature Move the vehicle into the shade and operated the climate
trouble code is set when the
control on a cool setting to reduce the temperature. Allow
module has not read the
the screen to cool before performing further diagnostic
display screen serial number
steps. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
within 25 seconds
power and ground circuits to the left rear display screen.
Left rear display Check private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. If
screen reported over no wiring faults are found suspect the screen. Refer to the
temperature warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if
condition any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
B125F-4A Right Rear Display -

Incorrect component Rear display screen Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
installed serial number not and ground circuits to the right rear display screen. Check
received private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. Check
Rear display screen the installed screen is correct for the vehicle and has not
serial number invalid been substituted. If a new component has been installed
check it was installed correctly
B125F-96 Right Rear Display -

Component internal Right rear display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
failure screen reported and ground circuits to the right rear display screen. Check
internal failure private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. If no
wiring faults are found suspect the screen. Refer to the
B125F-98 Right Rear Display -

Component or system Right rear display Check the ventilation of the screen is not obstructed.
over temperature screen reported over Move the vehicle into the shade and operated the climate
temperature control on a cool setting to reduce the temperature. Allow
condition the screen to cool before performing further diagnostic
steps. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power and ground circuits to the right rear display screen.
Check private CAN circuits for open circuit, short circuit. If
no wiring faults are found suspect the screen. Refer to the
B12ED-88 Video Input "F" - Bus

off Left rear display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
screen circuit short display screen circuit for short to ground, short to power,
to ground, short to open circuit, high resistance. Check video source. Clear the
power, open circuit, diagnostic trouble code and retest
high resistance
Incompatible /
corrupted video
source
B12F8-88 Video Input "G" - Bus

off Right rear display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
screen circuit short display screen circuit for short to ground, short to power,
to ground, short to open circuit, high resistance. Check video source. Clear the
power, open circuit, diagnostic trouble code and retest
high resistance
Incompatible /
corrupted video
source
U200E-19 Control Module

Output Power B - The Remote control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit current above is consuming excess power harness from the rear entertainment module to the
threshold current remote docking station circuit for short to ground, short to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring as
required and retest the system

Hardware - Incorrect hardware Check and verify the hardware installed on the vehicle is
Invalid/incomplete for installed software correct. Install/configure the correct hardware as required
configuration
U2016-56 Control Module Main
Software - The installed Install the correct software using the manufacturer
Invalid/incomplete software is not approved diagnostic system
configuration intended for the
installed hardware
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Remote
Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Remote Keyless Entry Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,

B102B-00 Passive Key - No sub
type information Passive key response Re-Program the key using the manufacturers approved
error diagnostic system
Incorrect key
Key incorrectly
programmed
B10A9-00 Remote Keyless Entry

Less Than 2 Keys Secret key has been Re-Program the key fobs using the manufacturers
Programmed - No sub programmed to the approved diagnostic system
type information vehicle but less than
2 key fobs have been
programmed
B10C1-00 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - Signal stuck No power supply to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open door handle power supply to the door handle. Check the switch circuit
Switch circuit open, is not open circuit or short to power. Repair wiring as
or short circuit to required
power
B10C1-24 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - Signal stuck Switch circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ON circuit to ground switch circuit is not short to ground. Repair wiring as
Switch fault required. If no wiring harness faults suspect switch, refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
B10C2-00 Left Rear Unlock Pull

power
B10C2-24 Left Rear Unlock Pull

B10C3-00 Right Front Unlock Pull

power
B10C3-24 Right Front Unlock Pull

B10C4-00 Right Rear Unlock Pull

power
B10C4-24 Right Rear Unlock Pull

B10C5-24 Trunk Unlock Pull

B10C6-00 Exterior Trunk Antenna

- No sub type Passive Trunk open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information does not function, loadspace RHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
antenna failure to power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If
the problem persists, check and install new loadspace
RHS antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect

- Circuit short to One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground wires shorted to loadspace RHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
ground or shorted to to each other. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and
each other retest

battery wires shorted to loadspace RHS antenna circuit for short to power. Clear
battery the diagnostic trouble code and retest

- Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
wires open loadspace RHS antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
diagnostic trouble code and retest
B10C6-1C Exterior Trunk Antenna
- Circuit voltage out of Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
range supply to all antenna required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
drivers manual if a module/component is suspect
B10C7-00 Interior Trunk Antenna

- No sub type Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information headliner LHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
to power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If
the problem persists, check and install new headliner
LHS antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy

ground wires shorted to headliner LHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
each other retest

battery wires shorted to headliner LHS antenna circuit for short to power. Clear

- Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
wires open headliner LHS antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B10C7-1C Interior Trunk Antenna

B10C8-00 Interior Center

Antenna - No sub type Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information headliner RHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
the problem persists, check and install new headliner
RHS antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground wires shorted to headliner RHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
each other retest

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery wires shorted to headliner RHS antenna circuit for short to power. Clear

Antenna - Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
wires open headliner RHS antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B10C8-1C Interior Center

Antenna - Circuit Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
voltage out of range supply to all antenna required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
B10C9-00 Interior Front Antenna

- No sub type Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior
information front cabin antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If
the problem persists, check and install new interior front
cabin antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy

- Circuit short to One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior
ground wires shorted to front cabin antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
ground or shorted to each other. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest
each other
- Circuit short to One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior
battery wires shorted to front cabin antenna circuit for short to power. Clear the
battery diagnostic trouble code and retest

- Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior
wires open front cabin antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B10C9-1C Interior Front Antenna

B10CA-00 Left rear door handle

Antenna - No sub type Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
information door handle antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If
the problem persists, check and install new left rear door
handle antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
to ground wires shorted to door handle antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
each other

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
to battery wires shorted to door handle antenna circuit for short to power. Clear the

Antenna - Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
wires open door handle antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B10CA-1C Left rear door handle

B10CB-00 Right rear door handle

Antenna - No sub type Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
information rear door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
short to power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and
retest. If the problem persists, check and install new left
rear door handle antenna as required. Refer to the

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to ground wires shorted to rear door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
ground or shorted to short to each other. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and
each other retest

Antenna - Circuit short One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to battery wires shorted to rear door handle antenna circuit for short to power. Clear

Antenna - Circuit open One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
wires open rear door handle antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear
the diagnostic trouble code and retest
B10CB-1C Right rear door handle

B10CC-24 Left Front Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ON switch circuit circuit for short to ground, if no wiring harness fault
Switch fault suspect switch. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
B10CD-24 Left Rear Latch Clutch
Switch - Signal stuck Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
B10CE-24 Right Front Latch

Clutch Switch - Signal Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
stuck ON switch circuit circuit for short to ground, if no wiring harness fault
B10CF-24 Right Rear Latch

Clutch Switch - Signal Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
stuck ON switch circuit circuit for short to ground, if no wiring harness fault
B10D1-24 Left Front Lock Button

- Signal stuck ON Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
switch circuit circuit for short to ground, if no wiring harness fault
B10D2-24 Left Rear Lock Button -

Signal stuck ON Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
B10D3-24 Right Front Lock

Button - Signal stuck Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
B10D4-24 Right Rear Lock Button

- Signal stuck ON Short to ground on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
B12D5-00 Door Handle Proximity

Sensor - No sub type Short to ground at Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
information door handle switch circuit for short to ground. Repair wiring as required, if no
supply circuit wiring harness fault suspect keyless vehicle module.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
B12D5-16 Door Handle Proximity

Sensor - Circuit Module supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
voltage below voltage low power and ground circuits to the module. Repair circuit as
threshold Keyless vehicle required. Clear DTC and retest
module - Internal Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and battery
failure care manual. Check battery state of charge and
Door handle switch starting/charging system performance
power supply circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the door
Short circuit to handle switch power supply circuit for short to ground,
ground, open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit as required.
high resistance Clear DTC and retest
If fault persists, check and install a new keyless vehicle
module as required
B12D6-00 Fast Door Unlock/Open

Actuator - No sub type E latch circuit failure Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check E latch relay
information output circuits for short to power or ground, if no wiring
harness fault suspect keyless vehicle module. Refer to
B12EA-96 Radio Frequency (RF)

Receiver - Component RF receiver has an Renew the receiver
internal failure internal HW failure
B1334-24 Tailgate Glass Release

Switch - Signal stuck NOTE: This NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
ON circuit/switch is available as
an option Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
tailgate glass release switch circuit for short circuit to
ground. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and retest
Tailgate glass If fault persists, check and install a new tailgate glass
release switch circuit release switch as required
- Short circuit to
ground
Switch fault
B1335-00 Front Triangulation /

Loadspace Antenna - Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check center
No sub type console front antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
information power. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If
the problem persists, check and install new center
console front antenna as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect

Loadspace Antenna - One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check center
Circuit short to ground wires shorted to console front antenna circuit for short to ground, short to
each other

Circuit short to battery wires shorted to console front antenna circuit for short to power. Clear the

Circuit open wires open console front antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B1335-1C Front Triangulation /

Loadspace Antenna - Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
Circuit voltage out of supply to all antenna required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
range drivers manual if a module/component is suspect
B1336-00 Left Front Door

External Antenna - No Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
sub type information front door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
retest. If the problem persists, check and install new left
front door handle antenna as required. Refer to the

External Antenna - One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Circuit short to ground wires shorted to front door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
each other retest

Circuit short to battery wires shorted to front door handle antenna circuit for short to power. Clear

Circuit open wires open front door handle antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear
B1336-1C Left Front Door

External Antenna - Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
B1337-00 Right Front Door

External Antenna - No Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
sub type information front door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
retest. If the problem persists, check and install new
right front door handle antenna as required. Refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
External Antenna - One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit short to ground wires shorted to front door handle antenna circuit for short to ground,
each other retest

Circuit short to battery wires shorted to front door handle antenna circuit for short to power. Clear

Circuit open wires open front door handle antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear
B1337-1C Right Front Door

External Antenna - Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
B133D-00 Loadspace/Interior
Boot Antenna - No sub Antenna failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
type information loadspace LHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
the problem persists, check and install new right front
door handle antenna as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
Boot Antenna - Circuit One or both antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground wires shorted to loadspace LHS antenna circuit for short to ground, short
each other retest
short to battery wires shorted to loadspace LHS antenna circuit for short to power. Clear
open wires open loadspace LHS antenna circuit for open circuit. Clear the
B133D-1C Loadspace/Interior
Boot Antenna - Circuit Fault with voltage Check and install new keyless vehicle module as
C1017-24 Boot/Trunk Primary

Switch - Signal stuck NOTE: This NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
ON circuit/switch is available as
an option Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
luggage compartment lid lock switch circuit for short
Luggage circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC
compartment lid lock and retest
switch circuit - Short If fault persists, check and install a new luggage
circuit to ground compartment lid door handle as required
Switch fault

Communication Bus - CAN communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
No sub type failure power and ground connections to the module. Using the
information manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
diagrams and check the CAN network. Clear the
diagnostic trouble code and retest. If the problem
persists, check and install new keyless vehicle module as
required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures

With Body Control CAN connection open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module - No sub type or fault in body power and ground connections to the module. Using the
information control module manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
diagrams and check the CAN network between the central
junction box and keyless vehicle module. Clear the
diagnostic trouble code and retest. If the problem
persists, check and install new body control module as
required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures

Module Software Signal configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incompatibility - No file not loaded check and up-date the car configuration file as required.
sub type information Clear the diagnostic trouble code and re-test
U201F-00 External Receiver - No

sub type information Communication to Check K-Line wiring. Refer to the electrical circuit
the RF receiver diagrams and check the module K-Line, power and
module has been ground circuits. Clear the diagnostic trouble code and
lost, short either to retest. If the problem persists, check and install new
ground, or battery keyless vehicle module or RF receive module as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
U201F-31 External Receiver - No

signal Communication to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check remote
the RF receiver keyless entry module circuit for short to power, open
module has been circuit, high resistance
lost Check and install a new RF receiver module or keyless
vehicle module as required
U201F-95 External Receiver -

Incorrect assembly The RF receiver Verify car config value for RF frequency is correct. If not,
frequency does not re-configure body control module with proper car
match the car config configuration file. If correct, replace RF receiver with
file parameter proper frequency unit.

Not Complete - No sub Calibration file has Reload the correct calibration file for the vehicle type
type information not been received or into the module using the manufacturer approved
is incomplete diagnostic system

Configuration Car configuration Verify car config value sent by body control module is
Incompatible - No sub parameter is outside correct for the vehicle. If not, re-configure body control
type information expected value module with proper car configuration file. If correct,
reload the correct calibration file for the vehicle type into
the module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

Internal electronic Internal electronic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure failure power and ground circuits to the module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

Number - Invalid serial Invalid vehicle Configure the car configuration file using the
data received identification number manufacturer approved diagnostic system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Restraints
Control Module (RCM)

WARNINGS:
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED
BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Do not use a multimeter to probe the restraints control module. It is possible for the power from the meter battery to
trigger the activation of the airbags. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
account.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the restraints
control module or associated systems.
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Diagnosis and Testing) /
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Diagnosis and Testing).
B0001-11 Driver Frontal Stage 1
Deployment Control - Driver airbag (stage 1) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground circuit short circuit to driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
ground ground. Check for intermittent short circuit within
the clockspring by rotating the steering column
during the checks. Install a new wiring harness as
necessary. Install a new clockspring as necessary. If
no wiring harness fault exists, using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
driver airbag

Circuit short to battery circuit short to power driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
power. Check for intermittent short circuit within the
clockspring by rotating the steering column during
the checks. Install a new wiring harness as
driver airbag

Circuit open circuit open circuit, high driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for open circuit, high
resistance resistance. Check for intermittent short circuit within
driver airbag
B0001-1A Driver Frontal Stage 1

Circuit resistance below circuit short circuit driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit
threshold between power and between power and ground. Check for intermittent
ground short circuit within the clockspring by rotating the
steering column during the checks. Install a new
wiring harness as necessary. Install a new
clockspring as necessary. If no wiring harness fault
exists, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new driver airbag
B0001-2B Driver Frontal Stage 1

Signal cross coupled circuit short circuit to driver airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
another restraints circuit another restraints circuit. Check for intermittent
short circuit within the clockspring by rotating the

Deployment Control - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect assembly module is not configured re-configure the restraints control module with the
correctly latest level software

Circuit short to ground circuit short circuit to driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit to
ground ground. Check for intermittent short circuit within
driver airbag
Circuit short to battery circuit short to power driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit to
power. Check for intermittent short circuit within the
clockspring by rotating the steering column during
the checks. Install a new wiring harness as
driver airbag

Circuit open circuit open circuit, high driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for open circuit, high
resistance resistance. Check for intermittent short circuit within
driver airbag
B0002-1A Driver Frontal Stage 2

Circuit resistance below circuit short circuit driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit
threshold between power and between power and ground. Check for intermittent
ground short circuit within the clockspring by rotating the
B0002-2B Driver Frontal Stage 2

Signal cross coupled circuit short circuit to driver airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit to
another restraints circuit another restraints circuit. Check for intermittent
short circuit within the clockspring by rotating the

Deployment Control - Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect assembly module is not configured re-configure the restraints control module with the
correctly latest level software
B0010-11 Passenger Frontal

Stage 1 Deployment Passenger airbag (stage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Control - Circuit short 1) circuit short to ground passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
to ground ground. Install a new wiring harness as necessary. If
passenger airbag

Control - Circuit short 1) circuit short to power passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
to battery power. Install a new wiring harness as necessary. If
passenger airbag

Control - Circuit open 1) circuit open circuit, passenger airbag (stage 1) circuit for open circuit,
high resistance high resistance. Install a new wiring harness as
necessary. If no wiring harness fault exists, using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new passenger airbag
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Satellite
Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Satellite Digital Audio Radio System
Module, for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.

B1A89-11 Satellite
Antenna - Circuit short to power. The Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to Satellite Radio Module has Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna cable for short to
ground detected a vehicle power ground. Install Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna
measurement for a period harness as required. Suspect the Satellite Radio Module,
longer than expected, or has check and install a new Satellite Radio Module as
detected a vehicle power required. Suspect the Satellite Digital Audio Radio
measurement when another antenna, check and install a new Satellite Digital Audio
value was expected Radio antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy
Satellite Digital Audio Radio and procedures manual if a Module is suspect
antenna cable short to
ground
Internal failure Satellite
Radio Module
Digital Audio Radio antenna
B1A89-12 Satellite
Antenna - Circuit short to power. The Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to Satellite Radio Module has Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna cable for short to
battery detected a vehicle power power. Install Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna
measurement for a period harness as required. Suspect the Satellite Radio Module,
longer than expected, or has check and install a new Satellite Radio Module as
detected a vehicle power required. Suspect the Satellite Digital Audio Radio
measurement when another antenna, check and install a new Satellite Digital Audio
value was expected Radio antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy
Satellite Digital Audio Radio and procedures manual if a module is suspect
antenna cable short to power
Radio Module
B1A89-13 Satellite
Antenna - Circuit open. The Satellite Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open Radio Module has determined Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna cable for open
an open circuit via lack of circuit. Install Satellite Digital Audio Radio antenna
bias voltage, low current harness as required. Suspect the Satellite Radio Module,
flow, no change in the state check and install a new Satellite Radio Module as
of an input in response to an required. Suspect the Satellite Digital Audio Radio
output antenna, check and install a new Satellite Digital Audio
Satellite Digital Audio Radio Radio antenna as required. Refer to the warranty policy
antenna cable open circuit and procedures manual if a module is suspect
Radio Module

- System Satellite Radio Module Suspect the Satellite Radio Module, check and install a
internal failures internal failure new Satellite Radio Module as required, Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect
U3000-4A Control Module

- Incorrect Satellite Radio Module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
component Incorrect component installed select the vehicle configuration Main Menu, vehicle
installed Car configuration mismatch configuration, display and or modify the vehicle
configuration file data. Check update as required

- Not Satellite Radio Module, not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
configured configured select the vehicle configuration main menu, select
Incorrect car configuration configure existing Modules menu and program the
file data received Satellite Radio Module

- Missing The Satellite Radio Module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
message has not received the check that the Satellite Radio Module is configured
configuration file correctly. Check that the configuration file is being
Master module not transmitted by the master module
transmitting configuration file

- Component or Satellite Radio Module Check for possible causes of the Satellite Radio Module
system over cooling vents obstructed overheating. Check that the ventilation is not
temperature Circuit fault obstructed . Check for short circuit related DTCs. Check
Internal electronic failure for internal electronic failure related DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check ground circuit for
high resistance. Check antenna circuit for short to power
or ground. Repair wiring harness as required. Refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
U3003-62 Battery Voltage

- Signal Power distribution fault There is a difference of more than 2 volts between the
compare failure Wiring harness fault power supply to the Satellite Radio Module and the
battery voltage value broadcast on MOST. Check other
control modules for battery voltage related DTCs. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the Satellite Radio Module.
Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Speed
Control Module (CCM)
Speed Control Module (CCM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Speed Control Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-03 Speed Control, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Speed Control - 5.0L (310-03 Speed Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Actions

B1A84-81 Car Configuration Data -
Invalid serial data Central Junction Box Re-configure the Central Junction Box using the
received reporting invalid data manufacturer approved diagnostic system and
re-test. If DTC remains suspect speed control
module. Refer to the warranty policy and
C1A67-54 Forward Looking Sensor -

Missing calibration Missing calibration Carry out speed control sensor adjustment
procedure. Refer to section 310-03 - Speed
Control, General Procedures

Invalid serial data Yaw rate voltage - out of Fault may be cleared by driving vehicle at
received range speeds greater than 23mph (36kph) then cycling
ignition status. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the power supply circuit to
the yaw rate sensor. Check the forward looking
sensor circuits and repair as necessary

Missing message Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the forward looking sensor circuits. Check CAN
connection between forward looking sensor and
speed control module. Repair as necessary
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Steering
Column Lock Module (VIM)
Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Steering Column Lock Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Diagnosis and Testing).

Authorisation - Not Module not programmed Configure the Steering Column Lock Module using the
programmed manufacturers approved diagnostic system

Authorisation - Signal compare failure Configure the modules using the manufacturers approved
Signal compare - This DTC will be diagnostic system. If the problem persists, complete a
failure logged if the CAN network integrity test using the manufacturers
encrypted data approved diagnostic system. Perform an on demand
exchange does self-test and retest
not match
between Steering
Column Lock and
the Central
Junction Box

Authorisation - Signal plausibility failure
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Signal plausibility Steering Column Lock
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
failure unable to perform lock
diagnostic system
action
CAN Network fault Check the serviceability of the steering column and lock.
Anti-lock Braking Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, carry
System, Engine Control out CAN Network Integrity Test and Module Self Test
Module, Central Junction using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Box fault Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN Network

Authorisation - Missing message
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Missing message CAN fault
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
No response from
diagnostic system
electric steering column
lock control module, Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the key
instrument cluster, fob and retest. Check for related DTCs and refer to the
central junction box relevant DTC index
Battery voltage at If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that the
electric steering column steering column lock may fail to unlock if the vehicle is
lock control module too parked with a high steering angle or with the road wheel
low against a curb. If the column lock is failing to disengage,
Electric steering column the customer may be able to rectify this by rotating the
lock control module, steering wheel while pressing the engine start button
instrument cluster, If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity test
central junction box fault using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system.
Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN circuits between the central junction box, the
instrument cluster and the electronic steering column
lock. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
central junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock power and ground supply
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required.
Clear DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required

Communication Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Bus - Bus off power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
diagrams and check the CAN network

Module Software No sub type information Refer to network communication section of the workshop
Incompatibility - manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
No sub type supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Using the
information manufacturers approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN integrity test. Perform an on demand self-test and
retest

Internal electronic Internal electronic Refer to network communication section of the workshop
failure failure detected during manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
self test or lock/unlock supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Perform an on
operation demand self-test and if the DTC returns suspect the
electric steering column lock, refer to the warranty policy

Missing message Configuration message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
not received power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
diagrams and check the CAN network. Check modules are
configured correctly using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Invalid vehicle Confirm the correct VIN details are stored in Steering
Number - Invalid identification number Column Lock Module using the approved diagnostic
serial data system
received
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Touch
Screen Display (FCDIM)
Touch Screen Display (FCDIM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Touch Screen Display, for additional
Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section. For additional information, refer to:
(415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information)
Navigation System Map Updates (Description and Operation),

Information and Entertainment System (Diagnosis and Testing).

signal protection LIN bus fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
calculation incorrect the LIN bus circuit to the rear view camera for
fault. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
B1087-86 LIN Bus "A" - Signal

invalid LIN bus fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the LIN bus circuit to the rear view camera for
retest
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - Missing

message LIN bus fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
retest

LIN bus fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
retest
B1D21-13 Remote Control Switch -
Circuit Open Steering wheel switch
NOTE: No steering wheel remote in-car
fault
entertainment switchpack functionality. This DTC is
Steering column rotary
logged if the module detects an open circuit on the
coupling fault
steering wheel audio switch signal line
Wiring harness fault
the signal line running from the steering wheel
audio switchpack through the steering column
rotary coupling to the touch screen for insecure
connectors, open circuits, including intermittent
faults (rotate steering wheel during checks).
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
Also check ground connections to the touch
screen for open circuits. Repair circuit as required,

communication Bus - No Power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sub type information CAN fault the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network

communication Bus - Power supply fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Supervised software CAN fault the power and ground connections to the module.
failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network

with Parking Assist Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Module A - No communication with park the power and ground connections to the park
sub type information distance control module distance control module
the CAN network between the park distance
control module and the touch screen
Check the park distance control module for
U0164-00 Lost Communications

With HVAC Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module - No sub type communication with the power and ground connections to the
information automatic temperature automatic temperature control module
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the automatic
temperature control module and the touch screen
Check the automatic temperature control module
index

With Auxiliary Heater Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Module - No sub communication with fuel the power and ground connections to the fuel
type information fired booster heater fired booster heater
the CAN network between the fuel fired booster
heater and the touch screen
Check the fuel fired booster heater for related

With Radio - No sub Loss of MOST Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
type information communication with the power and ground connections to the
integrated audio module integrated audio module
system, complete a MOST network integrity test.
the MOST network between the integrated audio
module and the touch screen
Check the integrated audio module for related
U0184-4A Lost Communications

With Radio - Incorrect The serial number of the Check the serial number of the integrated audio
component installed integrated audio module module is valid (as installed at the factory), if the
does not match the serial part has been installed by a dealer the
number stored in the installation routine has not been performed
master module correctly. Configure the integrated audio module
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear the DTC and retest the system

With Audio Amplifier A - Loss of CAN
No sub type information communication with audio
amplifier module
the customer has reported an information and
entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and retest.

the power and ground connections to the audio
amplifier module
the CAN network between the audio amplifier
Check the audio amplifier module for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0186-4A Lost Communication

With Audio Amplifier A - The serial number of the Check the serial number of the audio amplifier
Incorrect component audio amplifier module module is valid (as installed at the factory), if the
installed does not match the serial part has been installed by a dealer the
number stored in the installation routine has not been performed
master module correctly. Configure the audio amplifier module

With Television - No sub Loss of CAN
type information communication with TV
control module

the power and ground connections to the TV
control module
the CAN network between the TV control module
and the touch screen
Check the TV control module for related DTCs and

With Television - The serial number of the Check the serial number of the TV control module
Incorrect component TV control module does is valid (as installed at the factory), if the part
installed not match the serial has been installed by a dealer the installation
number stored in the routine has not been performed correctly.
master module Configure the TV control module using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear

With Digital Audio Loss of CAN
Control Module A - No communication with
sub type information satellite radio control
module

the power and ground connections to the satellite
radio control module
the CAN network between the satellite radio
Check the satellite radio control module for

With Digital Audio The serial number of the Check the serial number of the satellite radio
Control Module A - satellite radio control control module is valid (as installed at the
Incorrect component module does not match factory), if the part has been installed by a dealer
installed the serial number stored the installation routine has not been performed
in the master module correctly. Configure the satellite radio control
diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the
system

With Digital Audio Loss of CAN
Control Module B - No communication with digital
sub type information radio control module

the power and ground connections to the digital
radio control module
the CAN network between the digital radio control
Check the digital radio control module for related

With Digital Audio The serial number of the Check the serial number of the digital radio
Control Module B - digital radio control control module is valid (as installed at the
Incorrect component module does not match factory), if the part has been installed by a dealer
installed the serial number stored the installation routine has not been performed
in the master module correctly. Configure the digital radio control
diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest the
system

With Entertainment Loss of CAN
Control Module - Rear A communication with rear
- No sub type seat entertainment control
information module

the power and ground connections to the rear
seat entertainment control module
the CAN network between the rear seat
entertainment control module and the touch
screen
Check the rear seat entertainment control module
index

With Entertainment The serial number of the Check the serial number of the rear seat
Control Module - Rear A rear seat entertainment entertainment control module is valid (as
- Incorrect component control module does not installed at the factory), if the part has been
installed match the serial number installed by a dealer the installation routine has
stored in the master not been performed correctly. Configure the rear
module seat entertainment control module using the

With "Seat Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module "A" - No sub communication with driver the power and ground connections to the driver
type information seat module seat module
the CAN network between the driver seat module
and the touch screen
Check the driver seat module for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index

With "Seat Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module "B" - No sub communication with the power and ground connections to the
type information passenger seat module passenger seat module
the CAN network between the passenger seat
Check the passenger seat module for related
U023B-00 Lost Communication

With Image Processing Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module B - No sub type communication with the power and ground connections to the
information proximity camera control proximity camera control module
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the proximity camera
Check the proximity camera control module for
U025D-00 Lost Communication

With Front Controls Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Interface Module - No communication with the power and ground connections to the
sub type information integrated control panel integrated control panel
the CAN network between the integrated control
panel and the touch screen
Check the integrated control panel for related

Software Incapability - Touch screen is not Check the touch screen part number, install the
No sub type information compatible with the correct part as required. Check the correct
vehicle software is installed. Configure the touch screen

Software Incapability - Touch screen software Check the part numbers of the software installed
Not programmed incorrect or missing and download new software as required.
Configure the touch screen using the
U1A24-87 MOST Ring Complete. No

Communication - Missing MOST ring complete
message MOST ring node internal
fault

the MOST ring for fault, bypass each MOST
module in turn to isolate faulty node
U2003-87 Fibre Optic

Communication Bus - MOST ring incomplete Check MOST ring for disconnected modules or
Missing message fibreoptic cable concerns
U3000-4B Control Module - Over

temperature Touch screen panel Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
backlight - high check/monitor system for re-occurrence, if DTC
temperature detected re-occurs, check and install a new touch screen
display as required
Component or system System shut down request This DTC is logged if the touch screen receives a
over temperature from another module on system shut down request from another MOST
MOST ring module that is registering as over temperature.
MOST module - internal Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
temperature over limit check/monitor system for re-occurrence
If DTC re-occurs, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check each MOST module for signs
of overheating and related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index

compare failure Mismatch in supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
voltage to touch screen power supply circuits to the touch screen. Check
compared to reference for high resistance, short to ground. Check for
battery voltage charging system DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index. Check vehicle battery and charging
circuit performance. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Control Module (TCM)
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).

P0121-86 Throttle/Pedal Position
Sensor A Circuit Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Range/Performance - Sensor Fault (Data
Signal invalid received over CAN Bus)
P0219-86 Engine Overspeed

Condition - Signal invalid Engine speed too low or Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A -

Invalid serial data Vehicle Speed Sensor Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
received fault (Data received over DTCs
CAN Bus)
P0501-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A

Range/Performance - Vehicle Speed receive Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
Invalid serial data over CAN Bus does not DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
received match Transmission vehicle
Output-Shaft speed
P0561-1C System Voltage Unstable

- Circuit voltage out of Power supply voltage out Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
range of range when engine Check Charging System and Battery condition
running
P0562-21 System Voltage Low -
Signal amplitude < Circuit low voltage. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and
minimum Battery supply voltage to Ground Circuit for fault. Check Engine Control
Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Check Charging System
Module and Battery condition
P0563-22 System Voltage High -

Signal amplitude > High Battery charge, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
maximum alternator fault Check Charging System and Battery condition
P0601-41 Internal Control Module

Memory Check Sum Error Software error Re-configure the Transmission Control Module
- General checksum Transmission Control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure Module failure system, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
new Transmission Control Module as required,
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect.

Random Access Memory Shift-by-Wire fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
(RAM) Error - No sub type new Transmission Control Module as required,
information refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Read Only Memory (ROM) General checksum failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Error - General checksum new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0606-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-26 TCM Processor - Signal

rate of change below Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
threshold component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-49 TCM Processor - Internal

electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-06 TCM Processor -

Algorithm Based Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-11 TCM Processor - Circuit

Short to Ground Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Short to Battery Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Ground or Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude < minimum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude > maximum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-47 TCM Processor -

Watchdog / safety Micro Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
controller failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0613-49 TCM Processor - Internal

electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-68 TCM Processor - Event

Information Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P061B-02 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - General Module - positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
signal failure signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P061B-26 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - Signal rate Module positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
of change below signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P062F-04 Internal Control Module

EEPROM Error - System EEPROM communication Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures error new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0642-21 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit Low - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum fault low new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0643-22 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit High - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum fault high new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0657-13 Actuator Supply Voltage

A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open control valves etc) Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0657-1C Actuator Supply Voltage

A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
voltage out of range control valves etc) Transmission Control Module connector for signs of
voltage plausibility fault water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short to
Power or Ground (should NOT be connected and
harness terminal should have a bung installed). If
no fault identified, suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Check and install a new
Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
module/component is suspect.

A Circuit Low - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Ground control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

A Circuit High - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Battery control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0667-01 PCM / ECM / TCM Internal

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - new Transmission Control Module as required,
General Electrical Failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Temperature Sensor A Internal Electronic Failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
System Internal Failures refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Temperature Sensor A Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal electronic failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0700-02 Transmission Control

System (MIL Request) - General Signal failure Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
General signal failure Investigate as required

System (MIL Request) - Double fault from If any of the following DTCs are also present;
Signal amplitude > monitoring of internal P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
maximum power supply and P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the
pressure Transmission Control Module, check and install a
regulator/solenoid control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

System (MIL Request) - Emergency Position Not Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
Emergency Position Not Reachable investigate as required
Reachable
P0710-13 Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor A Transmission fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit - Circuit Open temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
General Electrical Failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Temperature Sensor A Signal amplitude > Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Circuit maximum. Excessive driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Range/Performance - jump in temperature is achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
Signal amplitude > the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Circuit Low - Circuit Short temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit High - General Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Electrical Failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Circuit High - Circuit temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0716-14 Turbine/Input Shaft

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Short to Ground or Open Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude < small Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
minimum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/input shaft speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
No Signal - Circuit Short sensor A Circuit Short to Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Battery Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0720-12 Output Shaft Speed

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Battery shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Ground or Open shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - shaft speed sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Output shaft speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - negative gradient too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal rate of change high Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
above threshold the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Signal plausibility failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal plausibility failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0731-07 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio -
Mechanical Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
required, refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
P0736-07 Reverse Incorrect Ratio -

suspect.
P0740-13 Torque Converter Clutch

Solenoid Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Open 2 Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new

Solenoid Circuit Too high slip at torque Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a
Performance/Stuck Off - converter clutch. new torque converter, refer to the warranty policy
Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. If transmission fluid is in very poor
condition and dirty, install a new transmission,
P0745-04 Pressure Control Solenoid

A - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

A - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0758-12 Shift Solenoid B Electrical
- Circuit Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0758-13 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

- Circuit Open Solenoid valve 1 or Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Pressure control Solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
G Circuit Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0771-71 Shift Solenoid E

Performance/Stuck Off - Actuator stuck Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Actuator stuck new Transmission Control Module as required,

B - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

B - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0781-07 1-2 Shift - Mechanical

Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P0781-77 2-1 Shift - Commanded

position not reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
suspect.

suspect.
P0798-1A Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below C Circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0798-1E Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground C electrical circuit short new Transmission Control Module as required,
to ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum C Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude < minimum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0814-62 Transmission Range

Display Circuit - Signal Transmission Range Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
compare failure Display Circuit signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
compare failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0826-08 Up and Down Switch

circuit - Bus Signal Invalid CAN signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
Message Failures Central Junction for stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for
Box/Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN bus for a circuit fault
CAN bus circuit fault

Circuit - Invalid serial Invalid Can signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
data received Central Junction Box / for stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for
Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN Bus for Circuit fault
CAN Bus Circuit fault

Circuit - Bus off Steering Wheel Module to Check Central Junction Box and Steering Wheel
Central Junction Box / Ice Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit
Instrument Cluster LIN diagrams and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
Bus failure

suspect.

Position Not Reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P084F-01 Park / Neutral Switch
Input Circuit - General Wrong voltage level Check for correct output at Transmission Control
Electrical Failure detected on Park/No Park Module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12
signal volts in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
identified, suspect the Transmission Control
Module. Install a new Transmission Control Module
as required, refer to the warranty policy and
suspect. If no fault identified, check Park signal
circuit to Transmission Shift Module for short, open
circuit
P0850-01 Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - General General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Electrical Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

Input Circuit - General General signal failure Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation
signal failure is correct, suspect the transmission control
module. Check and install a new transmission
control module as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to

Input Circuit - Signal Signal invalid Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation
invalid is correct, suspect the transmission control
module. Check and install a new transmission
control module as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
P0850-1C Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - Circuit Circuit voltage out of Check parklock mechanism, if parklock operation
voltage out of range range correct suspect the Transmission Control Module.
Install a new Transmission Control Module as
suspect.
P0919-93 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - No No shifting despite driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0919-94 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - Shifting without driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Unexpected operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0938-29 Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Sensor Transmission fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Range/Performance - temperature compared driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Signal invalid with module temperature is achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
fault the Transmission Control Module. Install a new

A Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery 1 Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Open B Control Circuit Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or B Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

B Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 2 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

C Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

C Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0972-22 Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - 1 current too large new Transmission Control Module as required,
Signal amplitude > refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
maximum if a module/component is suspect.

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Shift solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open 1 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0973-1A Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0973-1E Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,
range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0976-11 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0976-14 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P1674-04 Control Module Software
Corrupted - System System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1674-48 Control Module Software

Corrupted - Supervision Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Software Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1707-07 Transfer Case Neutral or

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable circuit - mechanical the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
failures and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
component is found Clear DTC and the DTC returns
suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Actuator Stuck park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Open circuit - Actuator stuck the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
open and replace as required. If no faulty parklock

Park/Neutral Indication Commanded position not Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded reachable and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
P2700-07 Transmission Friction

Element A Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Range/Performance - Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
Mechanical Failures internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
suspect.

Element B Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element C Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element D Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
Element E Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

D - System Internal System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

D - Supervision Software Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum D Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude > maximum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below D circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range D circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery D Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures E system internal failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure E supervision control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum E Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below E electrical resistance new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold below threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range E circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or E Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground E Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery E Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

F - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures F no sub type information new Transmission Control Module as required,

F - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure F supervision software new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum F Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

F Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold resistance below refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.

F Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
resistance out of range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit Low - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit High - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Pressure Control Solenoid Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit High - F Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Battery refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Pressure Control Solenoid Torque converter clutch Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit Low - pressure control solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground control Circuit Short to refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Ground if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1A Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Below control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Threshold below threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1E Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Out Of control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Range out of range if a module/component is suspect.

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Battery Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Open Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open Circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Circuit diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive /

sequence counter Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
incorrect / not updated Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)

signal protection Checksum error Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
calculation incorrect Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - Missing

message Transmission Shift Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
Module is NOT visible to Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
the Transmission Control Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module on the LIN Bus Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)

LIN Bus Circuit fault. Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Check hardware of LIN Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
connection between Module LIN bus circuit for Short, Open Circuit.
transmission and Check Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
Transmission Shift
Module

Communication Bus - Bus CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
off CAN Bus for Circuit fault
www.JagDocs.com
ECM/PCM "A" - Alive / Alive counter fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
sequence counter
incorrect / not updated
ECM/PCM "A" - Value of Checksum fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
signal protection
calculation incorrect
ECM/PCM "A" - Missing CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine Control Module
message if an Engine Control Module Timeout DTC is only logged in
the Transmission Control Module, the failure is NOT with
the Engine Control Module
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.

Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Gear Shift Control Module Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Alive / sequence Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
counter incorrect / not
updated
Gear Shift Control Module Checksum fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Value of signal Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
protection calculation
incorrect
Gear Shift Control Module CAN Timeout Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Missing message Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Vehicle Dynamics Control Alive counter fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Alive / DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
sequence counter
Vehicle Dynamics Control Checksum fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Value of signal DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
protection calculation
incorrect
Vehicle Dynamics Control CAN Timeout Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Missing DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Steering Angle Sensor Lost Communication With Check SAC for stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit
Module - No sub type Steering Angle Sensor for fault
information Module

Park Brake Control CAN timeout electronic Check Electronic Parking Brake Module (EPB) for
Module - Missing parking brake module stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Body Control Module - Alive counter fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Alive / sequence counter CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Body Control Module - Checksum fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Value of signal protection CAN Bus Circuit for fault
calculation incorrect
Body Control Module - CAN Timeout Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Missing message CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Instrument Panel Cluster CAN timeout instrument Check Instrument Cluster for stored DTCs. Check
(IPC) Control Module - cluster CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Missing message
U0300-68 Control Module - Event
information Transmission software Check Central Junction Box software level, Check
does not match vehicle Transmission Control Module Software level,
network Update software as required using the
manufacturer approved process
From ECM/PCM A - Bus Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs,
Signal Message Failures torque information Check CAN Bus circuit for faults

from ECM/PCM A - Event Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
information torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from ECM/PCM A - Signal Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Invalid torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect CAN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Event received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
information Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect LIN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Invalid Serial received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Data Received Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

From Vehicle Dynamics Event information brake Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Control Module - Event information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
information
From Body Control Event information invalid Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Module - Event Power mode information CAN Bus Circuit for fault
information
U101B-87 Lost Communication With
GSM - Multiple Bus - Missing message lost Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Missing message communication with Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module (multiple Bus)

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
U3000-4B Control Module - Circuit

resistance above Internal electronic failure Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
threshold through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
Transmission Control Module. Install a new
U3000-81 Control Module - Invalid

serial data received Vehicle or Engine type Reflash the Transmission Control Module using the
signal incorrect from manufacturer approved process
Central Junction Box or
incorrect Transmission
Control Module software
installed
U3001-94 Control Module Improper

Shutdown - Unexpected Control Module Improper Check Engine Control Module For Power
operation Shutdown (voltage (alternator) faults. Check Power and Ground
related) Circuit and Battery for fault. Clear DTCs. Road
Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Shift Module (GSM)
Transmission Shift Module (GSM)
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Shift Module, for additional
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1087-08 LIN Bus "A" - Bus
Signal / Message LIN Bus "A" Error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Failures and check LIN input signal circuit for
short, open circuit
B1087-81 LIN Bus "A" -

Invalid serial data Transmission Control Module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
received message error: complement fault and check LIN input signal circuit for
short, open circuit faults. Check
Transmission Control Module for related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive

/ sequence counter Transmission Control Module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
incorrect / not message error: Alive counter fault and check LIN input signal circuit for
updated short, open circuit faults. Check
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value

of signal protection Transmission Control Module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
calculation incorrect message error: checksum fault and check LIN input signal circuit for
short, open circuit faults. Check
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Television
Module (TVM)
Television Module
NOTES:
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Television Module, for additional

short to ground Antenna 1 signal circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground check Antenna 1 signal circuit for short to
ground

short to battery Antenna 1 signal circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power check Antenna 1 signal circuit for short to
power

open Antenna 1 signal circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check Antenna 1 signal circuit for open circuit
B1D55-11 Antenna #2 -
Circuit short to Antenna 2 signal circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground ground check Antenna 2 signal circuit for short to
ground
Circuit short to Antenna 2 signal circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery power check Antenna 2 signal circuit for short to
power
Circuit open Antenna 2 signal circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check Antenna 2 signal circuit for open circuit
B1D56-11 Antenna #3
Circuit - Circuit Antenna 3 signal circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground ground check Antenna 3 signal circuit for short to
ground
B1D56-12 Antenna #3
short to battery power check Antenna 3 signal circuit for short to
power
B1D56-13 Antenna #3
Circuit - Circuit Antenna 3 signal circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open check Antenna 3 signal circuit for open circuit
B1D57-11 Antenna #4
short to ground ground check Antenna 4 signal circuit for short to
ground
B1D57-12 Antenna #4
short to battery power check Antenna 4 signal circuit for short to
power
B1D57-13 Antenna #4
Circuit - Circuit Antenna 4 signal circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open check Antenna 4 signal circuit for open circuit
B1D58-11 Television Output

- Circuit short to Color, Video, Blank and Sync (CVBS) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground signal circuit output to Touch Screen check the CVBS circuit for short to ground
Display short to ground

- Circuit short to Color, Video, Blank and Sync (CVBS) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery signal circuit output to Touch Screen check the CVBS circuit for short to power
Display short to power

- Circuit open Color, Video, Blank and Sync (CVBS) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signal circuit output to Touch Screen check the CVBS circuit for open circuit
Display open circuit

Internal Internal communications Error Suspect the Television Module, refer to the
electronic failure Warranty Policy and Procedures manual prior
to installing a new module

Over temperature Internal temperature over 90°C Check airflow to module, ensure there are no
foreign objects blocking the airflow to and
around the module
Clear the DTC and retest, if the DTC returns
suspect an internal fault. Replace the
Television Module as required, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual prior
to installing a new module

Not programmed Not programmed Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check and update the Television
Module software as required

Missing Missing calibration Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic
calibration system, check and update the Television
Module software as required

Signal compare There is a difference of more than 2
NOTE: Check other control modules for battery
failure volts between the power supply to
voltage related DTCs.
the Television Module and the battery
voltage value broadcast on MOST If also logged in other modules, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check vehicle
charging system and power distribution
system
If not logged in other modules, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power and ground supply circuits to the
Television Module. Repair wiring as required,
General Information - Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Provide adequate ventilation when working on fuel systems.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of skin
immediately.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as possible. Do
not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the risk of
fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery position. If
breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms including
drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at rest. If
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary.
Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Make sure that non-plated tools are used.
Tools must be cleaned using a new brush and fresh suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
Make sure to use a steel topped workbench covered with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure to wear non-powdered latex type gloves.
Make sure to protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material before using the
suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
NOTE: Soot, discomfort and irritation usually give adequate warning of hazardous fume concentrations.
Published: 28-Dec-2012
General Information - General Service Information
Repairs and Replacements

When service parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Jaguar/Daimler replacements are used.
Attention is drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the installation of replacement parts and accessories:
Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than genuine parts are installed. In certain territories,
legislation prohibits the installation of parts which are not produced to the vehicle manufacturer's specification.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified, must
be installed. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
Owners purchasing accessories while travelling abroad should make sure that the accessory and its installed location on
the vehicle conform to mandatory requirements existing in their country of origin.
The vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the installation of other than genuine Jaguar/Daimler parts. All
Jaguar/Daimler replacements have the full backing of the factory warranty.
Jaguar/Daimler dealers are obliged to supply only genuine service parts.
Vehicle Specifications
Purchasers are advised that the specification details set out in this manual apply to a range of vehicles and not to any specific
one. For the specification of a particular vehicle, purchasers should consult their dealer.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to vary the specifications, with or without notice, and at such times and in such manner as
the Manufacturer thinks fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved, in accordance with the Manufacturer's policy of
continuous improvement.
Whilst every effort is made to make sure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this manual, neither the Manufacturer nor
the Dealer, by whom the manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy or the consequences
thereof.
Service Repair Operation Numbering

A master index of numbered operations has been compiled for universal application to all vehicles manufactured by Jaguar
Land Rover Limited.
Each operation is allocated a number from the master index and cross-refers with an identical number in the Repair Operation
Times schedule. The number consists of six digits arranged in three pairs.
Each maintenance procedure in this manual is described in the sequence necessary to complete the operation in the minimum
time, as specified in the Repair Operation Times schedule.
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2 are made with regard to the engine. When viewed from the flywheel the right-hand bank will
be Bank-1 and the left-hand bank will be Bank-2.
Special Tools
Any special tools and equipment required to perform a maintenance procedure, are shown at the beginning of each procedure.
When possible, illustrations are given to assist in identifying the tool needed.
Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

Always stop the engine before disconnecting the battery negative lead and make sure the battery positive lead is isolated i.e.
wrapped in a suitable cloth.
WARNING: Radio code saving devices must not be used when conducting work on Air Bag or Fuel systems. It must be
noted that, when using these devices, the vehicle electrical system is still live albeit with a reduced current flow.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the battery make sure that the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact
disc player keycodes are known and, that no data is required from the Engine Control Module (ECM) as battery disconnection
will erase any fault codes and idle/drive values held in the Keep Alive Memory (KAM).
Always disconnect the battery before commencing repair operations which require:
The vehicle to be jacked up

Work on the engine
Work underneath the vehicle
Arc welding
Alternatively a Radio Code Saver may be used, when not working on the Air Bag or Fuel systems. With the battery
disconnected, a Radio Code Saver will allow sufficient current to pass to maintain the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc
player and compact disc player memory, operate the clock and supply the door operated interior lights while isolating the
battery in the event of a short circuit.
Reconnecting the Battery
WARNING: If the battery has been on bench charge the cells may be giving off explosive hydrogen gas. Avoid creating
sparks, and if in doubt cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp cloth.
Always make sure that all electrical systems are switched OFF before reconnecting the battery to avoid causing sparks or
damage to sensitive electrical equipment.
Always reconnect the battery positive lead first and the negative last, ensuring that there is a good electrical contact and the
battery terminals are secure.
Restart the clock (where installed) and set it to the correct time.
Enter the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact disc player keycodes and preset' frequencies, if known.
Following reconnection of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle until it has reached normal operating temperature
as the stored idle and drive values contained within the ECM have been lost. Allow the vehicle to idle for a further three
minutes. Drive the vehicle at constant speeds of approximately 48 km/h (30 mph), 64 km/h (40 mph), 80 km/h (50 mph), 96
km/h (60 mph) and 112 km/h (70 mph) for three minutes each. This will allow the ECM to relearn idle and drive values, and
may cause driveability concerns if the procedure is not carried out.
Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads
WARNING: If the slave battery has recently been charged and is gassing, cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp
cloth to reduce the risk of explosion should arcing occur when connecting the jump leads.
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there will be
an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing when the jump leads are
connected.
Whilst it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the only
practical way to mobilize a vehicle. In such an instance the discharged battery must be recharged immediately after jump
starting to avoid permanent damage.
Always make sure that the jump leads are adequate for the task. Heavy duty cables must be used.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be connected
in parallel.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jump leads. This reduces the risk
of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.
WARNING: Make sure that the ends of the jump leads do not touch each other or ground against the vehicle body at any
time while the leads are attached to the battery. A fully charged battery, if shorted through jump leads, can discharge at a rate
well above 1000 amps causing violent arcing and very rapid heating of the jump leads and terminals, and can even cause the
battery to explode.
Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.
Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Slave battery negative next and then vehicle ground at least, 300 mm (12 in) from the battery terminal e.g. engine
lifting bracket.
Always reduce the engine speed to idle before disconnecting the jump leads.
Before removing the jump leads, switch on the heater blower (high) or the heated rear screen, to reduce the voltage peak
when the leads are removed.
Always disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting sequence and take great care not to short the ends of
the leads.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in excess of 8
hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Component Cleaning
To prevent ingress of dirt, accumulations of loose dirt and greasy deposits should be removed before disconnecting or
dismantling components or assemblies.
Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.
Cleaning Methods:
Dry Cleaning
Removal of loose dirt with soft or wire brushes
Scraping dirt off with a piece of metal or wood
Wiping off with a rag
CAUTION: Compressed air is sometimes wet so use with caution, especially on hydraulic systems.
Blowing dirt off with compressed air (Eye protection should be worn when using this method)
Removal of dry dust using vacuum equipment. This method should always be used to remove friction lining material
dust (asbestos particles)
Steam Cleaning
Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment
WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.
It is of fundamental importance that certain essential equipment e.g. torque wrenches, multimeters, exhaust gas analysers,
rolling roads etc., are regularly calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Use of Control Modules

Control modules may only be used on the vehicle to which they were originally installed. Do not attempt to use or test a
control module on any other vehicle.
Functional Test
On completion of a maintenance procedure, a thorough test should be carried out, to ensure the relevant vehicle systems are
working correctly.
Preparation
Before disassembly, clean the surrounding area as thoroughly as possible. When components have been removed, blank off
any exposed openings using grease-proof paper and masking tape. Immediately seal fuel, oil and hydraulic lines when
separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and the entry of dirt. Close the open ends of oil ways, exposed
by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs. Immediately a component is removed,
place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated parts. Before dismantling a
component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that the agent will not damage any of the materials
within the component. Clean the bench and obtain marking materials, labels, containers and locking wire before dismantling a
component.
Dismantling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when parts of the brake, fuel or hydraulic systems
are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a fragment of cloth could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in these systems.
Clean all tapped holes, crevices, oil ways and fluid passages with compressed air.
WARNING: Do not permit compressed air to enter an open wound. Always use eye protection when using compressed air.
Make sure that any O-rings used for sealing are correctly reinstalled or renewed if disturbed. Mark mating parts to make sure
that they are replaced as dismantled. Whenever possible use marking materials which avoid the possibilities of causing
distortion or the initiation of cracks, which could occur if a center punch or scriber were used. Wire together mating parts where
necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g roller bearing components). Tie labels on to all parts to be renewed and to
parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly. Place labelled parts and other parts for rebuild in
separate containers. Do not discard a part which is due for renewal until it has been compared with the new part, to make sure
that the correct part has been obtained.
Inspection
Before inspecting a component for wear or performing a dimensional check, make sure that it is absolutely clean; a slight
smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against figures quoted for
it, use the correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges etc.) in serviceable condition. The use of makeshift
equipment can be dangerous. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside the limits quoted, or if damage is apparent. A
component may be reinstalled if its critical dimension is exactly to the limit size and it is otherwise satisfactory. Use
Plastigauge 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearance, e.g. big end bearing shell to crank journal. Instructions for
the use of Plastigauge and a scale giving bearing clearances in steps of 0,0025 mm (0.0001 in) are supplied with the package.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

This vehicle uses programmed electronic control systems to provide engine management and emission regulation, automatic
transmission operation and anti-lock braking control. These control systems are integral with the On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)
facility that is used in conjunction with either the Jaguar approved diagnostic system or the more restricted scan tools.
The OBD information in this manual provides diagnostic and rectification procedures for emission related electrical and
mechanical systems. The information is intended to facilitate fault diagnosis and the subsequent rectification of the vehicle
without recourse to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:
System principles of operation with links to the relevant Description and Operation sections
Self tests (where appropriate)
Inspection and Verification - manual checks, symptom and Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) driven diagnostic charts with
actions required to rectify concerns
Component tests (where appropriate)
Circuit Diagrams
To understand the relationship between the vehicle electrical system and the system circuit diagrams, Refer to the Electrical
Guide.
In the interest of clarity, single lines may represent multiple wires. Refer to the color code (1st alpha) followed by the wire
reference (numeric/alpha/numeric) to trace origin and destination.
e.g. BW 647B002. BW (black with white trace) 647 (wire reference) B002 (stage from origin).
Glossary of Terms
This glossary of terms is intended to cover mainly emissions-related (to SAE J 1930) terminology, and other abbreviations that
may be used in this manual.
The required term may be looked-up in the left-hand column, and subsequent columns give the standard acronym, unit or
abbreviation, and definition.
Acronym/Unit
Term(s) /Abbreviation Definition
Air Conditioning A/C
Accelerator Pedal Position APP Is a multitrack sensor which inputs the drivers demand into the engine
control module (ECM)
After Bottom Dead Center ABDC Event occurring after bottom dead center
After Top Dead Center ATDC Event occurring after top dead center
Anti-lock Brake System ABS System which prevents wheel lock-up under braking by sensing lack of
rotation of a wheel(s) and diverting fluid pressure away from it (them)
Alternating Current ac
Amplitude Modulation AM
Automatic Temperature Control ATC
Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF
Ampere A SI unit of current
Ampere hour Ah
Barometric Pressure BARO Pressure of surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude
Battery positive voltage B+ The positive voltage from a battery or any circuit connected directly to it
Before Bottom Dead Center BBDC Event occurring before bottom dead center
Before Top Dead Center BTDC Event occurring before top dead center
Bottom Dead Center BDC Lowest point of piston travel in a reciprocating engine
Battery Junction Box BJB
Brake Pedal Position BPP
Brake Horsepower BHP Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor, as measured by a
brake applied to its output shaft
British Standard BS Standard specification issued by the British Standards Institution
Brake Traction Control System BTCS
Acronym/Unit
Bus Topology of a
communication
network
Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS
Camshaft Position CMP Indicates camshaft position
Carbon dioxide CO² Colorless gas with a density of approximately 1.5 times that of air
Carbon monoxide CO Poisonous gas produced as the result of incomplete combustion
Chlorofluorocarbon CFC
Catalytic converter In-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine exhaust
emissions
Celsius C SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at zero and boiling
point at 100 degrees
Compact Disc CD
Cylinder Head Temperature CHT Sensor A sensor for measuring the temperature of the cylinder head
Sensor
Central Junction Box CJB
Crankshaft Position CKP Indicates crankshaft position
Clutch Pedal Position CPP Indicates clutch pedal position
Controller Area Network CAN A communication system which allows control modules to be linked
together
Constant Velocity CV
Cubic centimeter cm³
Central Security Module CSM Electronic module to support security system functionality
Data Link Connector DLC Connector providing access and/or control of the vehicle information,
operating conditions, and diagnostic information
Driver Door Module DDM Electronic module to support driver door functionality
Driver Seat Module DSM Electronic module to support driver seat functionality
Daytime Running Lamps DRL
Deutsche Institut fur Normung DIN German standards regulation body
Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD) system
Direct current dc Current which flows in one direction only, though it may have appreciable
pulsations in its magnitude
Domestic Data Bus D2B
Digital Versatile Disc DVD
Electronic Automatic EATC
Temperature Control
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGRT Sensing EGR function based on temperature change
Temperature Sensor
Electronic Brake Force EBD
Distribution
Engine Control Module ECM Electronic module to support engine functionality
Electronic Crash Sensor ECS Sensor to measure severity of impact
Engine Coolant Temperature ECT
Engine Oil Pressure EOP
European On-Board Diagnostic EOBD
Electronic Pressure Control EPC
Electrically Erasable EEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Erasable Programmable EPROM
Read-Only Memory
Evaporative Emission EVAP System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere.
Typically includes a charcoal filled canister to absorb fuel vapor
Flash Electrically Erasable FEEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Front Electronic Module FEM
Flash Erasable Programmable FEPROM
Read-Only Memory
Frequency Modulation FM
Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM
Fuel Rail Pressure FRP
Generic Electronic Module GEM
Ground GND Electrical conductor used as a common return for an electrical circuit or
circuits, and with a relative zero potential
Global Positioning System GPS
Global System for Mobile GSM
Communication
Gross Vehicle Weight GVW
Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling corrections
Acronym/Unit
Hydrofluorocarbon HFC
High tension HT
Hydrocarbon HC
Idle Air Control IAC Stepper motor driven device which varies the volume of air by-passing the
throttle to maintain the programmed idle speed
Intake Air Temperature IAT Temperature of intake air
Inertia Fuel Shut-off IFS An inertia system that shuts off the fuel supply when activated by
pre-determined force limits brought about by (e.g.) collision
Input Shaft Speed ISS Indicates input shaft speed
Key On, Engine Off KOEO
Key On, Engine Running KOER
Kilogram (mass) kg
Kilogram (force) kgf
Kilogram force per square kgf/cm²
centimeter
Kilometer km
Kilometer per hour km/h
Kilopascal kPa
Kilovolt kV
Knock Sensor KS Sensor which detects the onset of detonation, and signals the ECM to
retard the ignition
Liquid Crystal Display LCD Optical digital display system, to which applied voltage varies the way the
crystals reflect light, thereby modifying the display
Lighting Control Module LCM
Light Emitting Diode LED
Low Tension LT Primary circuit of the ignition system, linking the battery to the primary
winding in the ignition coil
Left-Hand LH
Left-Hand Drive LHD
Mass Air Flow MAF System which provides information on the mass flow rate of the intake air
to the engine
Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP Absolute pressure of the intake manifold air
Manifold Absolute Pressure and MAPT
Temperature
Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL A required on-board indicator to alert the driver of an emission related
malfunction
Meter (measurement) m
Metric (screw thread, e.g. M8) M
Farad F Unit of electrical capacitance
Millimeter mm
Millimeter of mercury mmHg
Millisecond ms
Model year MY
Newton N SI unit of force. 1 N = 0.2248 pounds force
Newton Meter Nm SI unit of torque. Must not be confused with nm (nanometer)
Negative Temperature NTC
Coefficient
Naturally aspirated N/A Fuelling system using intake air at atmospheric pressure; not
supercharged or turbocharged
Noise, Vibration and Harshness NVH
North American Specification NAS Vehicles for sale in the USA and Canadian markets
On-Board Diagnostic OBD A system that monitors some or all computer input and output control
signals. Signal(s) outside the pre-determined limits imply a fault in the
system or a related system
Oxides of Nitrogen Nox
Oxygen Sensor O2S A sensor which detects oxygen content in the exhaust gases
On-board Refuelling Vapour ORVR
Recovery
Output State Control OSC
Output Shaft Speed OSS
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation PAD
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection PAIR
Passive Anti-Theft System PATS
Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV
Parameter Identification PID An index number referring to a parameter within a module without
knowledge of its storage location
Park/Neutral Position PNP
Pulse Width Modulation PWM
Programmable Electronic PECUS Process whereby a common ECM is programmed on the production line to
Control Units System suit the market requirements of a particular vehicle
Acronym/Unit
Programmable Read-only PROM ROM with some provision for setting the stored data after manufacture
Memory
Portable Support Electronics PSE
Power Steering Pressure PSP
Polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE
Random Access Memory RAM Fast access memory store which is accessible for entry or extraction of
data
Read Only Memory ROM Fast access memory in which data is fixed and may not be changed
Restraints Control Module RCM Electronic module to support functionality of the Supplemental Restraints
System
Radio Data System RDS
Rear Electronic Module REM
Remote Keyless Entry RKE
Right-hand RH
Right-hand drive RHD
Research Octane Number RON
Rear Seat Module RSM Electronic module to support functionality of rear seats
Supercharger SC An intake system which utilizes a supercharger (mechanically driven
device that pressurizes intake air, thereby increasing density of charge air
and the consequent power output from a given displacement)
Serial Communications Link SCL
Standard Corporate Protocol SCP A high-speed, serial communications system linking all body system
control modules. Control messages and data are passed between modules
at up to 786 messages per second
Supplemental Restraints SRS
System
Shift Solenoid SS Controls shifting in an automatic transmission
Seat Control Module SCM Module controlling the seat motor systems (not electric raise/lower-only
seats)
Secondary Air Injection AIR System used for a period of time each time the engine is started, unless
certain temperature criteria are met. Pumps air directly into the exhaust
system which generates extra heat and reduces the time taken for the
catalytic converters to reach operating temperature
Service Repair Operation SRO Number generated by Jaguar Methods & Techniques system which relates
(number) to the time allowed to complete a repair operation. Further information on
the system can be found in the separate Jaguar Publications (for each
model range) entitled 'Repair Operation Times'
Society of Automotive SAE
Engineers
Timing/Coast Clutch Solenoid T/CCS
Torque Converter Clutch TCC
Transmission Control Indicator TCIL
Lamp
Throttle Position TP
Top Dead Center TDC
Transmission Control Module TCM Controls the shifting pattern of the (automatic) transmission
Transmission Control Switch TCS Modifies the operation of electronically controlled transmissions
Transmission Fluid Temperature TFT Indicates temperature of transmission fluid
Transmission Range TR The range in which the transmission is operating
Turbine Shaft Speed TSS Indicates rotational speed of transmission output shaft or turbine shaft
Variable Assist Power Steering VAPS
Variable Camshaft Timing VCT A system by which the relationship of the crankshaft and camshaft may be
altered during engine running
Vehicle Identification Number VIN Number assigned to the vehicle by the manufacturer, primarily for
licensing and identification purposes
Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS Sensor which provides vehicle speed information
Worldwide Diagnostic System WDS Jaguar approved diagnostic system
Wide Open Throttle WOT Full throttle position
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated with
their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included in the following list either in their own
right or as an ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Acids and Alkalis

See also Battery Acids.
e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.
Used in batteries and cleaning materials.
Irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Cause burns. Can destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not breath
mists.
Ensure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.
Used as a part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), mounted in various positions around the vehicle.
The inflator contains a high-energetic propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500° C).
The gas generant used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in the module and is completely
consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as this will lead to the risk of exposure
to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical waste
site.
Following any direct contact with gas generant.
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Seek medical assistance if necessary
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted
before repairing or replacing any SRS components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery negative
cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal and/or recycling of air bag modules must be carried out in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety and transportation.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Do store modules in an upright position
Do keep modules dry
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body
Do place modules with their cover side upwards
Do carefully inspect modules for damage
Do stand to one side when connecting modules
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained
Do wash you hands after handling deployed air bags
Do wear safety glasses when carrying out repairs to the SRS or when handling an air bag module
Only carry out a system test with the air bag modules fully installed
Do inspect the condition of the impact sensor mounting bracket and sensor flylead if the vehicle has been involved in
an impact. Replace if damaged, even if there has been no deployment.
Air Bags - Do Nots
Do not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators
Do not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80° C
Do not store modules upside down
Do not attempt to open a gas generator housing
Do not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat
Do not place anything on top of a module cover
Do not use damaged modules
Do not handle a deployed device or gas generator for at least 20 minutes
Do not probe air bag module electrical connectors or any other SRS component
Air Conditioning Refrigerant

See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should also be
rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution and should not be rubbed. SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE IF NECESSARY.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots
Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost
Do not drop refrigerant bottles
Do not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance
Do not mix refrigerants i.e. R12 (Freon) and R134a
Antifreeze
See also Fire, Solvents.
e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.
Used in vehicle coolant systems, brake air pressure systems, screenwash solutions.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze (glycol) when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed can be fatal and medical
attention should be sought immediately.
These products must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system which is connected or linked to general, food
preparation or drinking water supplies.
Asbestos
Used in brake and clutch linings, transmission brake bands and gaskets. Jaguar original production and replacement items are
asbestos free.
See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.
Breathing asbestos dust may cause lung damage or, in some cases, cancer.
The use of drum cleaning units, vacuum cleaning or damp wiping is preferred.
Asbestos dust waste should be dampened, placed in a sealed container and marked to make sure safe disposal. If any cutting
or drilling is attempted on materials containing asbestos the item should be dampened and only hand tools or low speed
power tools used.
Battery Acids
See also Acids and Alkalis.
Gases released during charging are explosive. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently charged
batteries.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

See also Fire.
Splashes to the skin and eyes may cause irritation. Avoid skin and eye contact as far as possible. Vapor inhalation hazards do
not arise at ambient temperatures because of the very low vapor pressure.
Brazing
See Welding.
Chemical Materials
See also Legal Aspects.
Chemical materials such as solvents, sealers, adhesives, paints, resin foams, battery acids, antifreeze, brake fluids, fuels, oils
and grease should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic, harmful, corrosive,
irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent; cumulative;
superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life-expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in any
accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be obtained from
manufacturers
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practical after soiling. Change heavily soiled
clothing and have it cleaned
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes, and the breathing in of vapors,
aerosols, dusts or fumes
Do wash before breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical materials
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free from spills
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children
Chemical Materials - Do Nots
Do not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions; some chemicals can form other toxic or
harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together
Do not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces e.g. when people are inside a
vehicle
Do not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions. Some are highly
flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes
Do not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations. Some fumes
are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas, pits etc.
Do not transfer chemical materials to unlabeled containers
Do not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and may cause
irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities
Do not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised conditions
Do not sniff or smell chemical materials. Brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or harmful
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)
There is concern in the scientific community that CFCs and Halons are depleting the upper ozone layer which filters out harmful
ultraviolet radiation. Decreased filtration of ultraviolet radiation may result in increases in skin cancer, cataracts and immune
system suppression in humans, as well as decreased productivity of crops and aquatic systems.
CFCs are used primarily as refrigerants in vehicle air conditioning systems and as aerosol propellants. Halons are used as fire
extinguishants.
Jaguar supports worldwide elimination of CFC usage and it is recommended that Company subsidiaries and affiliates should
phase out CFC usage as soon as acceptable substitutes are commercially available.
Clutch Fluids
See Brake fluids.
Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Corrosion Protection Materials

See also Solvents, Fire.
Highly flammable, flammable – observe No Smoking policy.
These materials are varied and the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. They may contain solvents, resins,
petroleum products etc. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in conditions of adequate
ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Cutting
See Welding.
Dewaxing
See Solvents and Fuels (Kerosene).
Dusts
Powder, dusts or clouds may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from powdery chemical materials or those
arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and/or sources of ignition.
Electric Shock
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good condition.
Ensure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be labelled
and preferably removed from the work station.
Ensure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged.
Ensure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
Ensure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim

If this is not possible push or drag the victim from the source of electricity using dry non-conductive material
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so
SUMMON MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
Engine Oils
See Lubricants and Grease.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides, aldehydes, lead
and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust extraction or general ventilation
and not in confined spaces.
Gasolene (petrol) engine

There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be immediate or
delayed.
Fibre Insulation
See also Dusts.
Used in noise and sound insulation.
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the use of
gloves.
Fire
See also Welding, Foams, Legal Aspects.
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or harmful
fumes if burnt.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical equipment or
welding processes.
Ensure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases, fumes etc. should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist, consult a
doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving the information on the container or label. Do not induce vomiting
unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomer
See Viton.
Foams - Polyurethane
See also Fire.
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases should not
work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapor/mists have cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked flames or the
use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not be allowed. Any heat
cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be conducted with extraction ventilation.
Freon
See Air Conditioning Refrigerant.
Fuels
See also, Fire, Legal Aspects, Chemicals and Solvents.
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Swallowing can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in drowsiness and
unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs e.g. through vomiting, is a very
serious hazard.
Gasoline dries the skin and can cause irritation and dermatitis on prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid in the eye causes
severe pain.
Motor gasoline may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation, and the concentration of
gasoline vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation, nausea, headache,
depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of consciousness.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline. Great care must be taken to avoid the serious
consequences of inhalation in the event of vapor build up arising from spillages in confined spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline storage tanks.
Gasoline should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth. See First Aid.
Gas - oil (Diesel Fuel)

See warnings and cautions in relevant manual sections.
Combustible.
Gross or prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils may also cause serious skin disorders including skin cancer.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid aspiration into
the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from kerosene at
elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and make sure there is
adequate ventilation.
Gas Cylinders
See also Fire.
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 13.790 kPa, (2000
lb/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to them or to the valve gear
attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow, or direct sunlight. Fuel gases (e.g.
acetylene and propane) should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines, and to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
Gases
See Gas Cylinders.
Gaskets (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment

It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used where
required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never over – load equipment such
as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not always immediately apparent
and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A damaged
grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment, working with asbestos-based materials or using
spraying equipment.
Ensure adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment

See also Lubricants and Greases.
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, e.g. diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the under - lying tissue etc.,
and cause serious injury.
Halon
See CFCs.
Legal Aspects
Many laws and regulations make requirements relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in workshops. Some of these laws which apply in the UK are listed. Similar laws exist for other territories:
The Factories Act (1961)

The Asbestos Regulations (1969)
Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquified Petroleum Gases Regulations (1972)
Control of Pollution Act (1974)
Health and Safety at Work Act (1974)
The Classification, Packaging and Labelling of Dangerous Substances Regulations (1978, 1981, 1983, 1984)
Control of Lead at Work Regulations (1980)
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1989)
Abrasive Wheels Regulations (1970)
Reporting of injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences regulations 1985 (RIDDOR)
Workshops should be familiar, in detail, with these and associated laws and regulations.
Consult the local factory inspectorate if in any doubt.
Lubricants and Greases

Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes and skin.
Used Engine Oil

Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural oils from the skin, leading to dryness,
irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
There are publications describing the problems and advising on precautionary measures. For the UK a typical Health and Safety
Executive publication is: SHW 397: Cautionary Notice: Effects of mineral oil on the skin.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable
Do not put oily rags into pockets
Avoid contaminating clothing with oil
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to enable easier removal of dirty oil and grease from the
skin
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations
containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in addition an
eye wash facility should be provided
Environmental Precautions
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. In the UK the
heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for small burners of less than 0.4 MW. If in doubt
check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of approved appliances.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors or licensed waste disposal sites, or to
the waste oil reclamation trade, batteries should also be disposed off under similar arrangements. If in doubt, contact the
relevant local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil, antifreeze and automatic transmission fluid on to the ground, down sewers, drains, or into water
courses.
Noise
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear protection
must be worn.
Noise Insulation Materials

See Foams, Fibre Insulation.
0-Rings (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
Paints
See also body and paint manual.
See also Solvents, Chemical Materials.

Highly flammable, flammable - observe No Smoking policy
Pressurized Equipment
See High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment.
Solder
Solders are a mixture of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals (normally
lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame is used.
Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease etc. and inhalation of these
should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which can give
toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust from clothing.
Solvents
See also Chemical Materials, Fuels (Kerosene), Fire.
e.g. acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and de-waxing materials, paints, plastics, resins, thinners etc.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged contact. Some
can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure to high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness, headaches
and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not be
adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs (e.g. through vomiting) is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Ensure good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers tightly sealed. Do not
use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, e.g. paints, adhesive, coatings, use extraction ventilation or personal respiratory
protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturer's instructions.
Sound Insulation
See Fibre Insulation, Foams.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised load e.g.
suspended engine, etc.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands, slings, etc., are adequate and suitable for the job,
in good condition and regularly maintained.
Transmission Brake Bands

See Asbestos.
Underseal
See Corrosion Protection.
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers' vehicles, some components installed to the Jaguar range have 'O' rings, seals or
gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. It is commonly used for 'O' rings, gaskets
and seals of all types. Although Viton is the most well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and
Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to temperatures in
excess of 400º C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the body.
'O' rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black sticky
substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected 'O' ring, seal
or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious and assume that the material may
be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the commencement
of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool and a
limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralize the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue and final
cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
See also Fire, Electric Shock, Gas Cylinders.
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding (and cutting).
Resistance Welding (Spot Welding)
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultraviolet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and to other
persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal protection must be worn,
and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc spectrum is
believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in blindness when the lens
is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any applied
coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and inhalation of these
should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area may be necessary particularly
in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is anticipated. In extreme cases or confined
spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators may be necessary.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of these gases,
with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultraviolet emission is much less than that from arc welding,
and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if brazing rods
containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes and expert advice may
be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS WHICH HAVE
CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, E.G. BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles

Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out service or
repair operations on the vehicle.
The most commonly found decals are reproduced below together with an explanation of the warnings.
1. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle and open book symbol advise consultation of the relevant
section of the owners handbook before touching or attempting adjustments of any kind.
2. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle with the electrified arrow and open book symbol give
warning of inherent high voltages. Never touch these with the engine running or the ignition switched on. See Electric
Shock in this subsection.
3. Jaguar vehicles and replacement parts which contain asbestos are identified by this symbol. See Asbestos in this
subsection.
4. Components or assemblies displaying this symbol give warning that the component contains a corrosive substance. See
Acids and Alkalis in this subsection.
5. Vehicles displaying the caution circle with a deleted lighted match symbol, caution against the use of naked lights or
flames within the immediate vicinity due to the presence of highly flammable or explosive liquids or vapors. See Fire in
this subsection.
6. All vehicles with the passenger air bag installed from the factory have a warning sticker attached to the instrument
panel, prohibiting the use of rear facing child seats in the front seating position. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury.
White Spirit
See Solvents.
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Working on the fuel system results in fuel and fuel vapor being present in the atmosphere. Fuel vapor is extremely
flammable, hence great care must be taken whilst working on the fuel system. Adhere strictly to the following precautions:
Do not smoke in the work area

Display 'no smoking' signs around the area
Disconnect the battery before working on the fuel system
Do not connect/disconnect electrical circuits, use electrical equipment or other tools or engage in working practices
which in any way may result in the production of sparks
Ensure that a CO² fire extinguisher is close at hand
Ensure that dry sand is available to soak up any fuel spillage
Empty fuel using suitable fire proof equipment into an authorized explosion proof container
Do not empty fuel while working in a workshop or a pit
Ensure that working area is well ventilated
Ensure that any work on the fuel system is only carried out by experienced and well qualified maintenance personnel
Ensure that fume extraction equipment is used where appropriate
Fume extraction equipment must be in operation when solvents are used e.g. Trichloroethane, white spirit, sbp3,
methylene chloride, perchlorethylene. Do not smoke in the vicinity of volatile degreasing agents.
Whenever possible, use a ramp or pit whilst working beneath a vehicle, in preference to jacking. Position chocks at the wheels
as well as applying the parking brake. Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Use axle stands, or blocks carefully
placed at the jacking points, to provide a rigid location. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity and is
fully serviceable. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located. When using electrical tools and
equipment, inspect the power lead for damage and check that it is properly earthed. Disconnect the earth (grounded) terminal
of the vehicle battery. Do not disconnect any pipes of the air conditioning refrigeration system unless you are trained and
instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to come into contact with the eyes. Ensure that
adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being used.
Adhere strictly to handling and safety instructions given on containers and labels. Keep oils and solvents away from naked
flames and other sources of ignition. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free seized nuts or fittings; as well as causing
damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage from stray heat to electronic equipment and brake lines. Do not leave
tools, equipment, spilt oil etc. around the work area. Wear protective overalls and use barrier cream when necessary.
Environmental Protection
In some countries it is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. The burning of
used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers is not recommended unless emission control equipment is installed. Dispose
of used oil through authorized waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites or to the waste oil reclamation
trade. If in doubt, contact the Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.
General Information - How To Use This Manual
Workshop Manual Organization

This manual covers descriptive, diagnostic (including OBD), and repair aspects to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is arranged in sections, each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system. For example, Section 412-03
[Air Conditioning] covers air conditioning, which is part of the climate control system.
The first digit of the section number indicates the group (in the above example this being Electrical). There are five groups:
General Information.
Chassis.
Powertrain.
Electrical.
Body and Paint.
The second and third digits of the section number indicate the vehicle system (12 in the above example being Climate
Control).
The last two digits of the section number indicate the part of the system covered by the section (03 in the example denotes
Air Conditioning).
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles,
as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for accomplishing service and
repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill of the
person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each.
Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first establish that neither personal safety
or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or give off
fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about any substance,
particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application, contact the
manufacturer of the product for information regarding storage, handling and application.
The Solvents, Sealers and Adhesives subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated
with their use, and safety measures to be taken.
Adhesives and Sealers

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Generally should be stored in No Smoking' areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed e.g. disposable paper
covering benches; should be dispensed from applicators where possible; containers, including secondary containers, should be
labelled appropriately.
Solvent - based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents

Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Water - based Adhesives/Sealers

Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber latexes may contain small amounts of volatile toxic and harmful chemicals. Skin
and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives

In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the inhalation
of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut - out and adequate extraction.
Resin - based Adhesives/Sealers e.g. Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin - based

Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas, as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful chemicals
through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (Super - glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives

Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and/or respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover with a clean
moist pad and seek immediate medical attention. Do not attempt to pull tissue apart. Use in well ventilated areas as vapors
can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two - pack systems see Resin - based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers

See also Resin - based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity reactions
can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the nervous
system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to vapor concentrations
may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and, in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in exhaust ventilated booths removing vapors and spray droplets from the
breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.

General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Protecting the Vehicle

Always install covers to protect the fenders before commencing work in the engine compartment. Always install the interior
protection kit, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside the vehicle. Avoid spilling hydraulic
fluid, antifreeze or battery acid on the paintwork. In the event of spillage, wash off with water immediately. Use polythene
sheets in the luggage compartment to protect carpets. Always use the recommended service tool, or a satisfactory equivalent,
where specified. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts or installing caps.
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
The parking brake is applied or the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle moving forwards or backwards
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose to remove exhaust fumes is installed
There is adequate room to jack up the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment
The battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the vehicle is jacked up
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the possibility of a
surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, ensure a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Screw Threads
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads with a tap
or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTES:
During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap. Where this
is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of the correct size and
thread is used.
New Taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be reused. New bolts
having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to be discarded, the
repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not use proprietary thread
locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated ('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are replacing.
Castellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this forms part of an
adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud can split
the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a false torque
reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of components or
faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is given to tighten in stages,
these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly where certain stages involve
tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the specified
torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be reused, the following procedures must be carried out:
Check that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.
Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The following
guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of
ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water, acids or heavy
metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or bring into contact with electricity
before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if the webbing
shows signs of fraying.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle installed with an SRS
system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C (185° F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system. The same
care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS components; these
include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the following
operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure under
crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to avoid the risk of
accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so that it is
ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before installation. Do not install a
part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions are always
adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an approved test
procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and make sure that all
fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTES:
Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but will need to
be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only approved JLR
diagnostic equipment to diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS components,
it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and must be
handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to a strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the cover
uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. Always use the
luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow anything to
rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down, accidental
deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the empty
packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT hold by
the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder or around neck.
For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube pointing towards the ground
and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners
by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term storage,
they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has been registered
with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage area
available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you suspect
the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures for disposal of
the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in such a
way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when installing such
equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses. Look for
possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any sign of
damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors. Avoid direct
exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care not to damage sensor
or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS repairs
section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly. Observe the following
precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road wheels in
the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation procedure.
If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is not
broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels
WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who have
undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The following
precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been designated
for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away from the
deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS section of this
manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before connecting to airbag
module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and seal
deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be replaced.
DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this case
airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its correct mounting
position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the vehicle is not being scrapped,
deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy

CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause airbag
deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for example, a front, side and
rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated and the RCM must be
installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints control module
(RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following guidelines
are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side (thorax) airbag

Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners

Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact

General Information - Symbols Glossary
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display.
Movement Symbols
Movement symbols provide detailed information to a required component movement. These component movements can be
rotational or 1-3 dimensional movements.

1 - Minor component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
2 - Major component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
3 - Component movement to the left/right/up/down
4 - Component movement towards/away
5 - 3 dimensional component movement
6 - 2 dimensional component movement
7 3 dimensional component rotation
8 3 dimensional component cycling
Turn Symbols
Turn symbols are used to provide further information on the direction or angle of component turns.
Item Description
1 Turn the component clockwise through 45°
2 Turn the component counterclockwise through 45°
7 Turn the component clockwise through 2 complete turns
8 Turn the component counterclockwise through 2 complete turns
Steering Wheel Symbols
Steering wheel symbols are used to provide further information to a required steering wheel position or steering column lock
status.
Item Description
1 Steering wheel in straight ahead position
2 Steering column lock locked
3 Steering column lock unlocked
4 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° left position
5 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° right position
6 Turn the steering wheel to the left-hand end position
7 Turn the steering wheel to the right-hand end position
Item Description
1 3, 4, 5-door body style
2 Wagon body style
3 Sports utility vehicle body style
4 Coupe body style
5 Convertible body style
6 Van body style
7 3, 4, 5-door body style - Top View
8 Wagon body style - Top View
9 Underview
10 Right-hand drive (RHD) vehicle
11 Left-hand drive (LHD) vehicle
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols are used to show the lever position that is required to be selected to carry
out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Set the selector lever to the park (P) position
2 Set the selector lever to the reverse ®) position
3 Set the selector lever to the neutral (N) position
4 Set the selector lever to the drive (D) position
5 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the park (D) position
6 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the manual (M) position
7 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift down (-) position
8 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift up (+) position
9 Set the gearshift lever to the neutral (N) position
10 Further gearshift lever positions that may appear in illustrations
Screwdriver symbols
The screwdriver symbols are used to show which screwdriver bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Screwdriver
2 Cross bladed screwdriver
3 Flat bladed screwdriver
4 Hexagonal screwdriver
5 TORX screwdriver
Pliers symbols
The pliers symbols are used to show which pliers is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Combination pliers
2 Side cutter pliers
3 Securing ring pliers - inner
4 Securing ring pliers - outer
5 Hose clamp pliers
6 Locking pliers
7 Long nose pliers
Drill symbols
The drill symbols are used to show which type and size of drill bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Drill bit with a specified diameter
2 Hole saw with a specified diameter
3 Stepped drill bit with a specified diameter
4 Tap with a specified diameter
5 Die with a specified diameter
6 Scraper for circular holes
7 Scraper for straight edges
Cutting tool symbols
The cutting tool symbols are used to show which type of cutting tool is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Cutting knife
2 Air body saw
3 Scissors
4 Grinder
5 Jig saw
6 Plasma cutter
7 Sanding Paper
8 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a specified diameter
9 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a suitable diameter
10 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a specified diameter
11 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a suitable diameter
12 Wire brush
Apply Chemical or load symbols
The apply chemical or load symbols are used to show where to apply which type of chemical or load to carry out a procedure
step.
Item Description
1 Apply a bead from the specified tube
2 Apply a bead from the specified cartridge
3 Apply the specified chemical with a brush
4 Apply the specified load to the specified component
5 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified tube
6 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified cartridge
7 Apply the specified chemical with a roller
8 Apply hot glue to the specified component
9 Apply the specified amount of fluid from the fluid can
10 Apply fluid from the fluid can
11 Clean the specified component with the specified material
12 Apply a broken bead from the specified tube
13 Apply the specified chemical from a spray can
14 Apply the specified lubricant to the specified component
15 Apply spot welds to the specified component
16 Apply a continuous weld to the specified component
17 Handle the fluid using a syringe
18 Extract the specified amount of fluid using a syringe
Measurement symbols
The measurement symbols are used to show where to measure which type of measurement to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Measure the current using a digital multimeter
2 Measure the voltage using a digital multimeter
3 Measure the resistance using a digital multimeter
4 Measure the length/distance
5 Check that the specified pressure is available using a suitable pressure gauge
6 Measure the pressure at the specified port using a suitable pressure gauge
7 Measure the time using a suitable stopwatch
8 Wait for the specified period of time
9 The specified task requires the specified minimum temperature
10 The specified task requires the specified maximum temperature not to be exceeded
11 The specified task requires the specified temperature range
12 The specified task requires the specified temperature
13 Measure and check for the specified value using a dial indicator gauge
14 Measure and check for the specified MAX value using a dial indicator gauge
15 Measure and check for the specified MIN value using a dial indicator gauge
General equipment symbols
The general equipment symbols are used to show where to use which type of general equipment to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Hot air gun
2 Soldering iron
3 Scraper
4 Scriber
5 Securing strap
6 File with a specified size
7 Center punch
8 Marker
9 Metal inert gas (MIG) welding equipment
10 Hose clamp
11 Interior trim remover
12 Vacuum cleaner
13 Strap wrench
14 Wedge
15 Pin Punch
Material symbols
The material symbols are used to show where to use which type of material to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Remove/Install the specified blind rivet
2 Apply tape to the specified component/area
3 Remove/Install the specified cable tie
Miscellaneous symbols
These symbols provide further information that is required to carry out a procedure step.
Item Description
1 Set the ignition switch to the 0 position
2 Set the ignition switch to the II position
3 The procedure step requires the aid of the specified number of supporting technicians
4 Self contained breathing apparatus
5 General prohibition used in combination with another symbol
6 Do not use power tools
7 Visual check
8 Noise check
9 Dispose the specified component
10 Replaced by item 9 (Dispose the specified component)
11 Set the engine speed to the specified value
12 Fully apply the parking brake lever
13 Fully release the parking brake lever
14 Do not dispose of batteries into the waste bin
15 Visual check using a mirror
16 Area/component must be dry
Mandatory Protective equipment - Health and safety symbols
The protective equipment symbols advise to use a mandatory protective equipment to avoid or at least reduce possible health
and safety risks.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Wear protective gloves
2 Wear face guard
3 Wear safety goggles
4 Wear ear protectors
5 Wear safety goggles and ear protectors
6 Wear a respirator
Prohibition - Health and safety symbols and component damage
The prohibition symbols are used to prohibit the specified actions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
Item Description
1 General prohibition symbol
2 No naked flames
3 No smoking
4 No water
5 Do not touch
6 Do not switch
7 No grinding
Warning symbols - Health and safety and component damage
The warning symbols are used to advise on hazardous conditions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
Item Description
1 Hazardous voltage/Electrical shock/Electrocution
2 Fire Hazard/Highly flammable
3 Burn hazard/Hot surface
4 Automatic start-up
5 Toxic
6 Explosive material
7 Battery hazard
8 Corrosive material
9 Lifting hazard
10 Hand crush/Force from above
11 Cutting of fingers or hand
12 Pressure hazard
Control Diagram symbols - Description and Operation procedures
These symbols provide further information on the type of connectivity, direction of flow or type of data bus of a system.
Item Description
1 Mid-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
2 High-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
3 Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
4 Wires crossing not connected
General Information - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on pyrotechnic components.
INHALED: Exposure to pyrotechnic residue may cause low blood pressure, severe headache, irritation of mucous
membranes, fainting, shortness of breath or rapid pulse. Move a victim to fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to unburned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with plenty of cold running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to burned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with diluted boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Unburned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
immediately with plenty of soap and water. Seek medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Burned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash with
plenty of water. Do not use soap. Seek medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Unburned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. If conscious drink plenty of water then induce vomiting.
Seek immediate medical attention. If unconscious, or in convulsions do not attempt to induce vomiting or give anything by
mouth. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Burned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. Drink plenty of water and seek immediate medical attention.
The deployment key must only be accessible to authorized personnel.
Make sure that the deployment key remains removed from the deployment equipment except during deployment.
If permenantly disabling or enabling the passenger air bag a new seat belt for vehicles without or with a passenger air
bag must be installed.
Undeployed pyrotechnic components must not be deployed in the vehicle.
Pyrotechnic components must be deployed following local regulations.
Check thoroughly that no loose objects can be spread during the deployment of pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must be transported following local regulations.
Never carry out any electrical measurement on disconnected, undeployed pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must not be disassembled.
Pyrotechnic components are not interchangeable between vehicles.
Always carry a live air bag module away from the body with the air bag or trim cover pointing upwards.
Live air bag modules must be placed in a suitable cage when removed from the vehicle. The air bag or trim cover must be
facing upwards.
Do not install a rearward facing child safety seat to the passenger seat with an activated passenger air bag.
CAUTIONS:
Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to temperatures higher than 110°C.
Never install aftermarket accessories to the vehicle on or adjacent to the supplemental restraint system module.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or roller testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks, through engine starting
and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test is given in this section.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead, those
items particularly relevant to the system/s being checked can be extracted.
Pre - Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found, do not
attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak is found and
rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test checks, and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal operations
of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or roller test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test
All around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make a note of any
apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the leak on completion of
the test
Starting the Engine
CAUTION: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal beyond
half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high engine speed or
with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied

The transmission selector lever is in Park
All instrument gauges (except fuel gauge) read zero
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lamps come on

Engine coolant temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank
The operation of the parking brake and brake fluid level warning lamps
On Road or Roller Test Check:
CAUTION: If road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before continuing with the test. If
the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road test until the fault has been found
and rectified.
Initial gear engagement is smooth

Parking brake control operates smoothly and the parking brake releases quickly and completely
Transmission takes up the drive smoothly, without judder
The engine power output is satisfactory, full power is achieved, acceleration is smooth and pedal operation not stiff or
heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or overrun
conditions
Steering operation, including power steering, is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or
vibration. Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering
Speedometer, oil pressure warning lamp, coolant temperature gauge and tachometer register the correct readings or
operate correctly
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning lamps operate correctly and the direction indicator
control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively
Brake operation and efficiency
Brake Testing
WARNING: When brake testing, avoid breathing the smoke or fumes from hot brakes, this may contain asbestos dust
which is hazardous to health, see Health and Safety Precautions.
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake pads/discs or
linings/drums until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full efficiency until the
bedding-in process is complete.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note any
tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature. A disc
which feels hot, or appreciably hotter than the others, indicates that the brake is binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks

Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission, axle etc., which might
indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication
General Information - Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Cured polyurethane (PU) adhesive can degrade if subjected to high temperatures. Isocyanide compounds can be released
when grinding or welding in close proximity to cured PU adhesive.
SKIN CONTACT: Prolonged exposure to polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause skin irritation. If PU adhesive comes into
contact with the skin, remove any contaminated clothing. Immediately wash the skin with soap and water. Seek medical
attention for any persistent skin irritation or abnormality.
EYE CONTACT: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause severe irritation or damage. If PU adhesive comes into contact with
the eyes, immediately flush eyes with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive is swallowed, flush the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Provide
rest, warmth and fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Persons having a respiratory allergy may have an allergic reaction when handling polyurethane (PU) adhesive.
INHALED: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive can cause asthma like symptoms. Isocyanate vapor from primer or PU adhesive can
cause allergies in the respiratory tract.
INHALED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive fumes are inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Provide oxygen if necessary. If
breathing stops, provide artificial respiration. Keep a victim warm and at rest. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the direct glazing for bonded glass cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid
damage to the body and trim panels.
During the curing period of the PU adhesive, the door windows must be left open to avoid a build up of pressure when the
doors are opened and closed.
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The official Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) for title and registration purposes is stamped on a metal plate and fastened to
the instrument panel. It is positioned close on the left-hand side of the vehicle and is visible from the outside.
The VIN is also located on the vehicle certification label.

1 — VIN (stamped)
2 — VIN label
3 — E label (Europe/Rest of World shown)
4 — VIN plate
Vehicle Identification Number (Typical)
Item Description
1 World manufacturer identifier
2 Market, air bag specification
3 Transmission and steering code
4 Body code
5 Emission control system
6 Check digit
7 Model year
8 Assembly plant, model line
9 Production sequence number
World Manufacturer Identifier

VIN Positions 1
Codes Manufacturer Make Type
SAJ Jaguar Land Rover Limited, England Jaguar Passenger Car
Market, Air Bag Specification

VIN position 2
VIN code Description
A Rest of World with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
K Japan with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
W USA with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
X Canada with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Y Mexico with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Transmission, Steering Code

VIN Position 3
VIN Code Description
A Automatic LHS
C Automatic RHS
Body Code
VIN Position 4
10 SWB 5 seat saloon - Luxury (JT2)
12 & 1C SWB 5 seat saloon - Premium luxury (JT3)
16 & 1G SWB 5 seat saloon - Portfolio (JT5)
18 & 1J SWB 5 seat saloon - Supersport (JT6)
20 LWB 5 seat saloon - Luxury (JT2)
22 & 2C LWB 5 seat saloon - Premium luxury (JT3)
26 & 2G LWB 5 seat saloon - Portfolio (JT5)
28 & 2J LWB 5 seat saloon - Supersport (JT6)
29 & 3J LWB 4 seat saloon – Ultimate (JT6)
31 LWB 4 seat saloon - Armoured portfolio (JT5)
36 & 3F SWB 5 seat saloon – Supersport Sp Pack (JT6)
37 & 3G LWB 5 seat saloon – Supersport Sp Pack (JT6)
38 & 3H SWB 5 seat saloon – Portfolio Sp Pack (JT5)
40 & 3K LWB 5 seat saloon – Portfolio SP Pack (JT5)
Engine Emission System

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1. "EU" includes the following markets: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Rep., Denmark, Estonia,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Poland, Portugal,
Rep. of Ireland, Romania, Serbia, Slovenia, Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands) Sweden & UK
*2. East Europe includes the following markets: Albania, Bosnia, Kosovo, Macedonia & Montenegro
*2. East Europe includes the following markets: Croatia, Serbia, Albania, Bosnia, Kosovo, Macedonia & Montenegro
*3. Russia includes the following markets: Belarus,Kazakhstan, Ukraine & Uzbekistan
*4. Middle East includes the following markets: Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar, Saudi
Arabia, Yemen.
*5. Caribbean includes the following markets: Grand Caymen, Bahamas, Barbados, Grenada, Jamaica, Trinadad & Tobago
VIN
Code Engine Market
F 5.0L Algeria, Angola, Azerbaijan, Caribbean*5, Costa Rica, Dominican Rep, Egypt, Ghana, Guatemala,
Libya, Nigera Middle East*4, Morocco, Panama, Paraguay, Phillipines, Syria, Tunisia, Uruquay &
Vietnam
L 5.0L Supercharged Algeria, Angola, Azerbaijan, Caribbean*5, Costa Rica, Dominican Rep, Egypt, Ghana, Guatemala,
(575 Nm) Libya, Nigera Middle East*4, Morocco, Panama, Paraguay, Phillipines, Syria, Tunisia, Uruquay &
Vietnam
G 5.0L Supercharged Algeria, Angola, Caribbean*5, Costa Rica, Dominican Rep, Egypt, Ghana, Guatemala, Libya, Nigera
(625 Nm) Middle East*4, Morocco, Panama, Paraguay, Phillipines, Syria, Tunisia, Uruquay & Vietnam
2 3.0 TDV6 (Euro 5 - Chile, EU*1, Israel, Morroco Norway, Russia*3, Taiwan, Turkey, Switzerland & Tunisia
600 Nm)
D 3.0L Egypt, Iraq, Middle East*4, Morocco, Syria, Tunisia, China (not SWB) and Russia*3
5 3.0 TDV6 (Non DPF - Angola, Argentina, Bermuda, Chile, China (not SWB), Dominican Rep, Ghana, Guadeloupe,
Euro 4- 600 Nm) Guatemala, India, Kenya, Malaysia, Martinique, Mauritius, Morocco, Nigera, Panama, Phillipines,
Russia*3, Turkey, Tunisia, Uruquay & Vietnam, South Africa , Singapore, Thailand and Zimbabwe
H 3.0L (Euro 4) China (LWB only), Morocco, Russia
P 5.0L Argentina, Chile, China (not SWB), EU*1, East Europe*2, Israel, Norway, Russia*3, Switzerland,
J 5.0L Supercharged Taiwan & Turkey
(575 Nm)
R 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
X 5.0L Brazil
K 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
Y 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
B 5.0L korea
E 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
VIN
Code Engine Market
C 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
2 3.0 TDV6 (Euro 5 -
600 Nm)
P 5.0L Japan
J 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
R 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
B 5.0L USA
E 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
C 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
B 5.0L Canada
E 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
C 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
B 5.0L Mexico
E 5.0L Supercharged
(575 Nm)
C 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
F 5.0L Indonesia, Caribbean*5, Kenya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, South Africa , Singapore,
L 5.0L Supercharged Tanzania, Thailand and Zimbabwe
(575 Nm)
G 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
P 5.0L Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, India (not diesel) , Malaysia, Malta, New Zealand, UK (& Eire),
J 5.0L Supercharged Singapore (not diesel)
(575 Nm)
R 5.0L Supercharged
(625 Nm)
2 3.0 TDV6 (Euro 5 -
600 Nm)
Check Digit
VIN Position 6
0 - 9 or X Calculated in accordance with American standard CFR part 565
Model Year
VIN Position 7
A 2010 model year
B 2011 model year
C 2012 model year
Assembly Plant and Model Line

VIN Position 8
L Castle Bromwich 5.0L Normally aspirated
M Castle Bromwich 5.0L Supercharged
N Castle Bromwich 3.0L TDV6
F Castle Bromwich 3.0L
Production Sequence Number

VIN Position 9
Sequence Number
V00001 - V99999
VIN Label
VIN Label (Europe and Rest of world)
Item Description
1 Whole Vehicle Type Approval (WVTA) - Only shown for certain markets
2 VIN
3 Gross vehicle weight
4 Gross train weight
5 Maximum permitted front axle loading
6 Maximum permitted rear axle loading
7 Date of manufacture
8 Interior trim code
9 Paint code
VIN Label (North America)
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Type
8 Paint code
VIN Label (Saudi Arabia and Gulf States)
Item Description
2 VIN
4 Paint code
VIN Label (Canada)
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Paint code
8 Type
VIN Label (China)
Item Description
1 Occupant number
2 Engine specification (Type/Capacity/Power)
3 VIN
4 Trade mark
5 Vehicle type
8 Manufacturer name
VIN Label (Argentina)
Item Description
1 VIN
2 Trade mark and manufacturer adress (in Spanish)
4 Gross train weight
9 Paint code
Automatic Transmission Number

The serial number of the transmission unit is displayed on a metal label or bar code (if equipped) attached to the transmission
casing.
Engine Number(s)
Engine Number - 3.0L Diesel
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the right-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 5.0L and 5.0L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 3.0L
The engine number is contained on a bar code label on the front cover and is also stamped in the cylinder block casting on the
left-hand side of the engine below the engine mounting.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
Safety Precautions
WARNING: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to raise the vehicle for any other purpose. Refer to the Driver Handbook when
using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The following safety precautions must be observed when raising the vehicle to carry out service operations:
Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Always use suitable vehicle stands to provide rigid support.
When working beneath a vehicle, whenever possible use a vehicle hoist instead of a jack and vehicle stands.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on firm, level ground before using a jack.
Do not rely on the parking brake alone; chock the wheels and put the automatic transmission into Park if possible.
Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity for the load being lifted and is in correct working order.
Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Lifting Points—Twin-Post Hoist

CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the hoist adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, stabilizer bar, rear subframe stabilizer
brackets or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering
linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters of two-post hoists prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Never use the rear axle as a lift point. Damage to the rear axle seals and bushes may occur.
When using a twin post hoist, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
Lifting Points—Floor Jack and Axle Stands

CAUTIONS:
If the vehicle is to be lifted using floor jacks, two jacks must be used to raise either the front or rear of the vehicle. If
one jack only is used, excessive body twist may occur.
When using a floor jack to jack up the rear of the vehicle, the jack head must be aimed at the NVH bar securing bolts to
aviod fuel tank damage or body damage.
When using a floor jack, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
When using axle stands, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid damage to the body or rear subframe assembly.
Vehicle Recovery
NOTES:
Prior to vehicle recovery, make sure the vehicle keys are available and the security system is disarmed.
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Vehicle recovery methods are:
By flat-bed transporter.
By rear suspended tow.
Transporter or Trailer Recovery
When the vehicle is being recovered by transporter or trailer:
the parking brake must be applied and the wheels chocked.

the gear selector lever must be in Neutral. Do not select Park on automatic transmission vehicles, as the parking lock
mechanism may be damaged by the forward and backward rocking motion of the vehicle.
the vehicle must be securely tied down to the transporter or trailer.
Rear Suspended Tow
When the vehicle is being recovered by rear suspended tow:
the ignition key must be removed from the vehcile to lock the steering.
the rear wheels must be correctly positioned in the lifting cradle and securely tied down.
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If the engine is not running, the steering will become heavy and the force necessary to effectively apply the
brakes will be greatly increased.
CAUTION: A vehicle with a defective transmission must be towed by rear suspended tow.
When the vehicle is being towed on its own wheels:
Local regulations for the towing of vehicles must be followed. In some countries the registration number of the towing
vehicle and an 'On Tow' sign or warning triangle must be displayed at the rear of the towed vehicle.
The gear selector lever must be in Neutral.
The ignition must be switched on to release the steering lock and make the direction indicators, horn and stop lamps
operate.
A distance of 0,8 km (0.5 mile) must not be exceeded.
A speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) must not be exceeded.
The tow rope must be attached to the front towing eye.
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) is becoming more important as vehicles become more sophisticated and passenger
comfort levels increase. This section is designed to aid in the diagnosis, testing and repair of NVH concerns.
Noise is defined as sounds not associated with the operation of passenger compartment equipment that interface with
customer satisfaction.
Vibration is defined as impulses felt by the customer that are not caused by road surface changes.
Harshness is a ride quality issue where the customer feels that the vehicle response to the road surface is sharply
transmitted to the customer.
Diagnostic Theory
Diagnosis is more than just following a series of interrelated steps in order to find the solution to the specific condition. It is a
way of looking at systems that are not functioning the way they should and finding out why. Also it is knowing how the system
should work and whether it is working correctly.
There are basic rules for diagnosis. If these rules are followed, the cause of the condition is usually found the first time
through the system.
Know the System

Know how the parts go together.
Know how the system operates as well as its limits and what happens when the system goes wrong.
Sometimes this means checking the system against one that is known to be working correctly.
Know the History of the System

A clue in any one of these areas may save time:
How old or new is the system?

What kind of treatment has it had?
Has it been repaired in the past in such a manner that might relate to the present condition?
What is the repair history?
Know the History of the Condition

Did it start suddenly or appear gradually?
Was it related to some other occurrence such as a collision or previous part renewal?
Know how the condition made itself known; it may be an important clue to the cause.
Know the Probability of Certain Conditions Developing

Look for the simple rather than the complex.
For example:
- Electrical conditions usually occur at connections rather than components.
- An engine no-start is more likely to be caused by a loose wire or small adjustment rather than a sheared-off
camshaft.
Know the difference between impossible and improbable. Certain failures in a system can be improbable but still
happen.
New parts are just that, new. It does not mean they are always good functioning parts.
Do Not Cure the Symptom and Leave the Cause

Lowering the pressure in a front tire may correct the condition of a vehicle leaning to one side, but it does not correct the
original condition.
Be Positive the Cause is Found

Double check the findings.
What caused a worn component?
A loose transmission or engine mount could indicate that other mounts are also loose.
Diagnostic Charts
Charts are a simple way of expressing the relationship between basic logic and a physical system of components. They help
discover the cause of a condition in the least time. Diagnostic charts combine many areas of diagnosis into one visual display:
probability of certain things occurring in a system

speed of checking certain components or functions before others
simplicity of carrying out certain tests before others
elimination of checking huge portions of a system by carrying out simple tests
certainty of narrowing down the search to a small portion before carrying out in-depth testing
The fastest way to find a condition is to work with the tools that are available. This means working with proven diagnostic
charts and the correct special equipment for the system.
Published: 16-Sep-2013
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of Noise, Vibration and Harshness issues, refer to the Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer's concerns by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. Visually inspect the vehicle to determine any obvious cause(s) of the concern(s).
3. If the inspection reveals obvious causes that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and refer to the Symptom Chart.
How To Use This Diagnostic Procedure Section

Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) concerns have become more important as vehicles have become more sensitive to
these vibrations. This section is designed as an aid to identifying these situations
The section provides diagnostic procedures based on symptoms. If the condition occurs at high speed, for instance, the
most likely place to start is under High Speed Shake
The road test procedure will tell how to sort the conditions into categories and how to tell a vibration from a shake
A series of Road Test Quick Checks is provided to make sure that a cause is either pinpointed or eliminated
Name the condition, proceed to the appropriate section and locate the correct diagnosis. When the condition is
identified, the job is partly done
Follow the diagnostic procedure as outlined
Quick Checks are described within the step, while more involved tests and adjustments are outlined in General
Procedures
Always follow each step exactly and make notes to recall important findings later
Customer Interview
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information that will help identify the concerns and will provide
direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
Identify the Condition

NVH problems usually occur in a number of areas:
tires
engine accessories
suspension
driveline
air leakage (wind noise)
squeaks and rattles
heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
electrical (e.g. motor noise)
transmission
engine
It is important, therefore, that an NVH concern be isolated into its specific area(s) as soon as possible. The easiest and
quickest way to do this is to carry out the Road Test as outlined.
Noise Diagnostic Procedure
Non-Axle Noise
The five most important sources of non-axle noise are exhaust, tires, roof racks, trim and mouldings, and transmission.
Therefore, make sure that none of the following conditions are the cause of the noise before proceeding with a driveline tear
down and diagnosis.
Under certain conditions, the pitch of the exhaust may sound very much like gear noise. At other times, it can be
mistaken for a wheel bearing rumble
Tires, especially snow tires, can have a high pitched tread whine or roar, similar to gear noise. Radial tires, to some
degree, have this characteristic. Also, any non-standard tire with an unusual tread construction may emit a roar or
whine type noise
Trim and mouldings can also cause whistling or a whining noise
Clunk may be a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in reverse or drive, or it may occur
when the throttle is applied or released. It is caused by backlash somewhere in the driveline
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a damaged wheel bearing
Noise Conditions
Gear noise is typically a howling or whining due to gear damage or incorrect bearing preload. It can occur at various
speeds and driving conditions, or it can be continuous
Chuckle is a particular rattling noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel. It occurs
while decelerating from approximately 64 km/h (40 miles/h) and can usually be heard all the way to a stop. The
frequency varies with vehicle speed
Knock is very similar to chuckle, though it may be louder and occurs on acceleration or deceleration. The tear down will
disclose what has to be corrected
Check and rule out tires, exhaust and trim items before disassembling the transmission to diagnose and correct gear noise.
The noises described under Road Test usually have specific causes that can be diagnosed by observation as the unit is
disassembled. The initial clues are the type of noise heard on the road test and the driving conditions.
Vibration Conditions
NOTE: New Constant Velocity (CV) joints should not be installed unless disassembly and inspection revealed unusual
wear.
Clicking, popping or grinding noises may be caused by the following:
Cut or damaged CV joint boots resulting in inadequate or contaminated lubricant in the outboard or inboard CV joint
bearing housings
Loose CV joint boot clamps
Another component contacting the rear drive half shaft
Worn, damaged or incorrectly installed wheel bearing, suspension or brake component
Vibration at highway speeds may be caused by the following:
Out-of-balance front or rear wheels

Out-of-round tires
Driveline imbalance
Driveline run-out (alignment)
NOTE: Rear drive half shafts are not balanced and are not likely to contribute to rotational vibration disturbance.
Shudder or vibration during acceleration (including from rest) may be caused by the following:
Driveline alignment
Excessively worn or damaged outboard or inboard CV joint bearing housing
Excessively high CV joint operating angles caused by incorrect ride height. Check ride height, verify correct spring rate
and check items under Inoperative Conditions
Excessively worn driveshaft components
Leakage Conditions
1. Inspect the CV joint boots for evidence of cracks, tears or splits.
2. Inspect the underbody for any indication of grease splatter in the vicinity of the rear drive half shaft, outboard and
inboard CV joint boot locations, which is an indication of CV joint boot or CV joint boot clamp damage.
3. Inspect the inboard CV joint bearing housing seal for leakage.
Inoperative Conditions
If a CV joint or rear drive half shaft pull-out occurs, check the following:
suspension components for correct location, damage or wear

bushings for wear
subframe for damage
bent or worn components
- Stabilizer bar link
- Left-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Right-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Rear wheel hub and rear drive half shaft
Road Test
A gear-driven unit will produce a certain amount of noise. Some noise is acceptable and may be audible at certain speeds or
under various driving conditions as on a newly paved blacktop road. The slight noise is in no way detrimental and must be
considered normal.
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information needed to identify the condition and give direction to
the correct starting point for diagnosis.
1. Make notes throughout the diagnosis routine. Make sure to write down even the smallest piece of information, because
it may turn out to be the most important.
2. Do not touch anything until a road test and a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle have been carried out. Leave the
tire pressures and vehicle load just where they were when the condition was first observed. Adjusting tire pressures,
vehicle load or making other adjustments may reduce the conditions intensity to a point where it cannot be identified
clearly. It may also inject something new into the system, preventing correct diagnosis.
3. Make a visual inspection as part of the preliminary diagnosis routine, writing down anything that does not look right.
Note tire pressures, but do not adjust them yet. Note leaking fluids, loose nuts and bolts, or bright spots where
components may be rubbing against each other. Check the luggage compartment for unusual loads.
4. Road test the vehicle and define the condition by reproducing it several times during the road test.
5. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks as soon as the condition is reproduced. This will identify the correct diagnostic
procedure. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks more than once to verify they are providing a valid result. Remember,
the Road Test Quick Checks may not tell where the concern is, but they will tell where it is not.
Road Test Quick Checks

1. 24-80 km/h (15-50 miles/h): With light acceleration, a moaning noise is heard and possibly a vibration is felt in the
front floor pan. It is usually worse at a particular engine speed and at a particular throttle setting during acceleration at
that speed. It may also produce a moaning sound, depending on what component is causing it. Refer to Tip-In Moan in
the Symptom Chart.
2. Acceleration/deceleration: With slow acceleration and deceleration, a shake is sometimes noticed in the steering
wheel/column, seats, front floor pan, front door trim panel or front end sheet metal. It is a low frequency vibration
(around 9-15 cycles per second). It may or may not be increased by applying brakes lightly. Refer to Idle Boom/Shake
/Vibration in the Symptom Chart.
3. High speed: A vibration is felt in the front floor pan or seats with no visible shake, but with an accompanying sound or
rumble, buzz, hum, drone or booming noise. Coast with the clutch pedal depressed or shift control selector lever in
neutral and engine idling. If vibration is still evident, it may be related to wheels, tires, front brake discs, wheel hubs
or front wheel bearings. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
4. Engine rpm sensitive: A vibration is felt whenever the engine reaches a particular rpm. It will disappear in neutral
coasts. The vibration can be duplicated by operating the engine at the problem rpm while the vehicle is stationary. It
can be caused by any component, from the accessory drive belt to the torque converter which turns at engine speed
when the vehicle is stopped. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
5. Noise/vibration while turning: Clicking, popping, or grinding noises may be due to a worn, damaged, or incorrectly
installed front wheel bearing, rear drive half shaft or CV joint.
6. Noise/vibration that is road speed relative: This noise/vibration can be diagnosed independent of engine speed or gear
selected (engine speed varies but torque and road speed remain constant). The cause may be a rear drive
axle/differential whine.
Road Conditions
An experienced technician will always establish a route that will be used for all NVH diagnosis road tests. The road selected
should be reasonably smooth, level and free of undulations (unless a particular condition needs to be identified). A smooth
asphalt road that allows driving over a range of speeds is best. Gravel or bumpy roads are unsuitable because of the additional
road noise produced. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road noise variable is eliminated from the test
results.
NOTE: Some concerns may be apparent only on smooth asphalt roads.
If a customer complains of a noise or vibration on a particular road and only on a particular road, the source of the concern
may be the road surface. If possible, try to test the vehicle on the same type of road.
Vehicle Preparation
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle before carrying out the road test. Note anything which is unusual. Do not
repair or adjust any condition until the road test is carried out, unless the vehicle is inoperative or the condition could pose a
hazard to the technician.
After verifying the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
Lift Test
After a road test, it is sometimes useful to do a similar test on a lift.
When carrying out the high-speed shake diagnosis or engine accessory vibration diagnosis on a lift, observe the following
precautions:
WARNING: If only one drive wheel is allowed to rotate, speed must be limited to 55 km/h (35 miles/h) indicated on the
speedometer since actual wheel speed will be twice that indicated on the speedometer. Speed exceeding 55 km/h (35 miles/h)
or allowing the drive wheel to hang unsupported could result in tire disintegration, differential failure, constant velocity joint
and drive half shaft failure, which could cause serious personal injury and extensive vehicle damage. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The suspension should not be allowed to hang free. When the CV joint is run at a very high angle, extra
vibration as well as damage to the seals and joints can occur.
The rear suspension lower arm should be supported as far outboard as possible. To bring the vehicle to its correct ride height,
the full weight of the vehicle should be supported in the rear by floor jacks. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Jacking (Description and Operation),

Lifting (Description and Operation).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
2. Explore the speed range of interest using the Road Test Quick Checks as previously described.
3. Carry out a coast down in neutral. If the vehicle is free of vibration when operating at a steady indicated speed and
behaves very differently in drive and coast, a transmission concern is likely.
Note, however, that a test on the lift may produce different vibrations and noises than a road test because of the effect of the
lift. It is not unusual to find vibrations on the lift that were not found in the road test. If the condition found on the road can
be duplicated on the lift, carrying out experiments on the lift may save a great deal of time.
Exhaust Neutralization Procedure

1. Raise vehicle on lift and slacken all exhaust fixings.
2. With all fixings loose, neutralize the exhaust system.
3. Tighten all fixings to correct torque, starting at the rear-most point working towards the front of the vehicle.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action

High-speed shake GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Wheel end vibration
Engine/transmission
Driveline
Tip-in moan GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Air cleaner
Power steering
Powertrain
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Idle boom/shake/vibration, or shudder GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Cable(s)/hoses(s)
Intake air distribution and filtering system
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Belt/pulleys
Wheel end vibration analysis GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Suspension/rear drive halfshaft and CV joints
Tires/wheels
Wheel bearings
CV joint boots
Non-axle noise GO to Pinpoint Test E.

Trim/mouldings
A/C system
Accessories
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: These Pinpoint Tests are designed to take the technician through a step-by-step diagnosis procedure to determine
the cause of a condition. It may not always be necessary to follow the chart to its conclusion. Carry out only the Pinpoint Test
steps necessary to correct the condition. Then check operation of the system to make sure the condition is corrected.
After verifying that the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
PINPOINT TEST A : HIGH-SPEED SHAKE
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
A1: NEUTRAL COAST 1 Carry out the neutral coast test.
Does the vibration disappear during the neutral coast test?
Yes Check and install/re-balance wheels and tires and driveshaft. Check and install new
engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
No
GO to D1.
PINPOINT TEST B : TIP-IN MOAN
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE AIR CLEANER
1 Check the air cleaner.
Check the air cleaner, inlet tube, outlet tube, resonators and all other components associated with
the air induction system for correct installation and tightness of all connections.
Are the components OK?

Yes
GO to B2.
No
Correct the condition. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B2: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Repair as necessary. Restore vehicle. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B3: CHECK THE POWER STEERING
1 Remove the auxiliary drive belt and test for tip-in moan.
Is the tip-in moan OK?
Yes
Repair the power steering as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 211-00.
No
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST C : IDLE BOOM/SHAKE/VIBRATION/SHUDDER
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK CABLE/HOSES
1 Check the engine compartment for any component that may be grounding between the engine and body
or chassis. Example: air conditioning (A/C) hoses.
Are the components OK?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: CHECK THE COOLING RADIATOR
1 Check the engine cooling radiator mountings and bushings for security and condition. Check the radiator
installation for any component that may have a touch condition.
Are the installation and bushings OK?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat Road Test.
PINPOINT TEST D : WHEEL END VIBRATION ANALYSIS
TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS

D1: INSPECT THE TIRES
1 Inspect the tires.
Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Inspect the tires for:
Correct tire size
Tire/wheel compatibility
Wear or damage
Tire beads correctly seated
Are the tires OK?

Yes
GO to D2.
No
Inspect the wheels. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
D2: INSPECT WHEEL BEARINGS
1 Inspect the wheel bearings. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D3: INSPECT THE CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOTS
1 Inspect the CV joint boots.
Spin the rear tire by hand
Inspect for evidence of cracks, tears, splits or splattered grease
Are the CV joint boots OK?

Yes
GO to D4.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D4: INSPECT WHEEL AND TIRE RUNOUT
1 Inspect the wheel and tire runout.
Carry out the Wheel and Tire Check procedure.

REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
Is the wheel and tire runout OK?

Yes
Balance the wheels and tires. Refer to the wheel balance equipment manufacturers instructions.
No
Repair as necessary.
Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST E : NON-AXLE NOISE
CONDITIONS
E1: INSPECT VEHICLE TRIM
1 Check the grille and trim mouldings to see if they are the source of the noise.
Are the vehicle trim components causing the noise?
Yes
Install new trim or repair as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 501-08.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM FOR NOISE
1 Check the A/C system components for noise by turning the A/C system on and off.
Is the A/C system causing the noise?
Yes
Diagnose the A/C system.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK NON-FACTORY ACCESSORIES
1 Inspect any accessories for being the source of the noise. Example: grounding body-to-frame,
antennas, visors, bug deflectors and fog lights?
Are the accessories the cause of the noise?
Yes
Adjust, repair or install new accessories or fasteners as required.
No
Verify the customer concern.
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Exhaust System Neutralizing
General Procedures
1. Loosen the muffler inlet pipe and resonator pipe to exhaust manifold
fasteners at the flanges and the muffler inlet connection.
2. Place a stand to support the muffler parallel to the vehicle frame with
the muffler pipe bracket free of stress.
3. Tighten the muffler connection.
4. Position the exhaust pipes to the manifolds and tighten. Make sure that
the catalytic converter and heat shield do not contact the frame rails.
5. With the complete exhaust system tight (and cooled) the rear hanger
insulator should be angled forward, to allow the system to expand
rearward when heated during normal running
Suspension System - General Information -
Vehicle Ride Height
Description Measurement
Description Front/Rear Kerb mm (inch) Tolerance mm (inch)
All markets except India Front 405 (15.94) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 403 (15.86) ±12 (0.5)
India Front 415 (16.33) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 413 (16.26) ±12 (0.5)
All wheel drive Front 405 (15.94) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 403 (15.86) ±12 (0.5)
Ride height is measured from the centre of the wheel to the apex of the wheel arch, through the wheel centre line.
Kerb - with all fluids at full and a full tank of fuel, no occupants/luggage.
General Specifications
Item Specification
Clear Vision
Clear vision (negative value is counterclockwise) 0° ± 3°
Ball Joint Radial Play
Lower ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)
Upper ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)
Wheel Alignment Specification - Front - RHD markets and Japan (excluding India)
NOTE: All figures are with vehicle at 'Showroom' ride height - full fluids, full tank of fuel, no occupants/luggage, tires
inflated to normal pressures
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.50° ± 0.75° -0.10° ± 0.75° -0.40° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -30' ± 45' -6' ± 45' -24' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.25° 0.25° -0.85° 0.65° -1.15° 0.35°
Degrees/minutes -1°15' 15' -51' 39' -1°9' 21'
Castor Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 7.16° ± 0.75° 6.63° ± 0.75° 0.54° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 7°10' ± 45' 6°38' ± 45' 32' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 6.41° 7.91° 5.88° 7.38° -0.21° 1.29°
Degrees/minutes 6°25' 7°55' 5°53' 7°23' -13' 1°17'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.09° ±0.10° 0.09° ±0.10° 0.17° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.19° -0.02° 0.19° -0.03° 0.37°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Front - India

Decimal degrees -0.29° ± 0.75° 0.11° ± 0.75° -0.40° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -17' ± 45' 7' ± 45' -24' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.04° 0.46° -0.64° 0.86° -1.15° 0.35°
Degrees/minutes -1°2' 28' -38' 52' -1°9' 21'

Decimal degrees 7.02° ± 0.75° 6.48° ± 0.75° 0.54° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 7°1' ± 45' 6°29' ± 45' 32' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 6.27° 7.77° 5.73° 7.23° -0.21° 1.29°
Degrees/minutes 6°16' 7°46' 5°44' 7°14' -13' 1°17'

Decimal degrees 0.09° ±0.10° 0.09° ±0.10° 0.17° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.19° -0.02° 0.19° -0.03° 0.37°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Front - LHD markets

Decimal degrees -0.05° ± 0.75° -0.55° ± 0.75° 0.50° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -3' ± 45' -33' ± 45' 30' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -0.80° 0.70° -1.30° 0.20° -0.25° 1.25°
Degrees/minutes -48' 42' -1°18' 12' -15' 1°15'

Decimal degrees 6.89° ± 0.75° 6.89° ± 0.75° 0° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 6°53' ± 45' 6°53' ± 45' 0' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 6.14° 7.64° 6.14° 7.64° -0.75° 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 6°8' 7°38' 6°8' 7°38' -45' 45'

Decimal degrees 0.09° ±0.10° 0.09° ±0.10° 0.17° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.19° -0.02° 0.19° -0.03° 0.37°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Front - All wheel drive

Decimal degrees -0.05° ± 0.75° -0.55° ± 0.75° 0.50° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -3' ± 45' -33' ± 45' 30' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -0.80° 0.70° -1.30° 0.20° -0.25° 1.25°
Degrees/minutes -48' 42' -1°18' 12' -15' 1°15'
Decimal degrees 5.29° ± 0.75° 5.29° ± 0.75° 0° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 5° 17' ± 45' 5° 17' ± 45' 0' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 4.54° 6.04° 4.54° 6.04° -0.75° 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 4° 32' 6° 2' 4° 32' 6° 2' -45' 45'
Decimal degrees 0.09° ±0.10° 0.09° ±0.10° 0.17° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 10' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.02° 0.19° -0.02° 0.19° -0.03° 0.37°
Degrees/minutes -1' 11' -1' 11' -2' 22'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Rear - All markets (excluding India)
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance Thrust Angle

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.67° ± 0.75° -0.67° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -40' ± 45' -40' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.42° 0.08° -1.42° 0.08°
Degrees/minutes -1°25' 5' -1°25' 5'
Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance

Decimal degrees 0.10° ± 0.14° 0.10° ± 0.14° 0.20° ± 0.20° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 6' ± 8' 6' ± 8' 12' ± 12' 0' ± 8'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -0.04° 0.24° -0.04° 0.24° 0° 0.40° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes -2' 14' -2' 14' 0' 24' -8' 8'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Rear - India

Decimal degrees -0.44° ± 0.75° -0.44° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -26' ± 45' -26' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.19° 0.31° -1.19° 0.31°
Degrees/minutes -1°11' 19' -1°11' 19'

Decimal degrees 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.16° ± 0.20° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 5' ± 8' 5' ± 8' 10' ± 12' 0' ± 8'
Decimal degrees -0.06° 0.22° -0.06° 0.22° -0.04° 0.36° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes -4' 13' -4' 13' -2' 22' -8' 8'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Rear - All wheel drive

Decimal degrees -0.67° ± 0.75° -0.67° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -40' ± 45' -40' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.42° 0.08° -1.42° 0.08°
Degrees/minutes -1°25' 5' -1°25' 5'

Decimal degrees 0.10° ± 0.14° 0.10° ± 0.14° 0.20° ± 0.20° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 6' ± 8' 6' ± 8' 12' ± 12' 0' ± 8'
Decimal degrees -0.04° 0.24° -0.04° 0.24° 0° 0.40° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes -2' 14' -2' 14' 0' 24' -8' 8'
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual.
REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation) /
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).
WARNING: Before carrying out a road test, make sure the vehicle is safe to do so. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
1. Gather as much information from the driver as possible and verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test, as
closely as possible reproducing the conditions under which the fault occurs.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Tire pressures
Damaged wheels or tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
Damaged or leaking air suspension components
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
Damaged chassis
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the symptom chart.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action

Crabbing Check the rear alignment. Check the front and rear suspension for signs of
Incorrect rear thrust damage or wear.
angle
Damaged/worn front or
rear suspension
components
Drift/Pull/Wander Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual inspection). Check for
Tire pressures uneven tire wear, investigate the cause and rectify as necessary. Check
Uneven tire wear the steering for wear/damage. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Damaged steering necessary. Check for binding brakes, rectify as necessary. Advise the driver
components of the load issues.
Wheel alignment
Brake drag
Unevenly loaded or
overloaded vehicle
Front bottoming Check the suspension components for damage. Check the dynamic
or riding low Damaged suspension suspension.
components
Air spring fault
Uneven tire wear Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual inspection). Check and
Incorrect tire pressure adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
(rapid centre rib or inner REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General
and outer edge wear) Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Incorrect front or rear toe Balance the wheels and tires as necessary.
(rapid inner or outer edge
wear)
Incorrect camber (rapid
inner or outer edge wear)
Tires out of balance (tires
cupped or dished)
Harsh ride Check the suspension components for damage. Check the dynamic
Damaged suspension suspension.
components
Air spring fault
Shimmy or wheel Check the wheels and tires for condition and balance. Check and tighten
tramp Wheels/tires the wheel nuts and suspension fasteners to specification. Check the front
Loose wheel nut(s) wheel bearings, suspension bushings, ball joints and steering components
Loose front suspension for wear or damage. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
fasteners REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General
Front wheel bearing(s) Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
fault
Worn or damaged
suspension component
bushing
Loose, worn or damaged
ball joint(s)
Loose, worn or damaged
steering components
Front wheel alignment
Poor return ability Check the steering column universal joints, etc. Check the ball joints and
of the steering Steering column other steering components.
(self-centering) Ball joints
Steering components
Sway or roll Check the stabilizer bar security and condition. Rectify as necessary. Check
Loose front or rear the air springs.
stabilizer bar
Worn lower suspension
arm stabilizer bar
insulators
Air spring fault
Vehicle leans to Check the front and rear suspension. Check the air springs.
one side Front or rear suspension
components
Air spring fault
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Published: 10-Oct-2013
Suspension System - General Information - Camber and Caster Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Adjustments made to the camber setting will affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the camber and toe may need to be
adjusted at the same time.
Make sure the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
NOTES:
This procedure must be carried out using a 4-post ramp.
The camber and caster adjustment for the left-hand side is shown, the procedure for adjusting the right-hand side is
similar.
Adjustments to the caster will affect the toe settings. Therefore, the caster and toe may need to be adjusted at the
same time to achieve the correct settings.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension specification

section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Check and adjust tire pressures.
3. Position the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
4. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and wheels
and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
5. Release the vehicle parking brake.
6. For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Manual Tight

Tolerance Setting Mode (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, General
Procedures).
7. Using only four-wheel alignment equipment approved by Jaguar, check

the wheel alignment.
8. Check the front toe adjustment.
9. Check the rear toe adjustment.

10. To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock nuts.
Loosen, but do not fully remove the nut.
11. Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.

12. CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does
not rotate while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.

Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
13. To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock nuts.
14. Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
15. CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does

Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.

17. Check the rear toe adjustment.

Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Adjustments made to the camber setting will affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the camber and toe may need to be
adjusted at the same time.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
NOTE: Adjustments to the caster will affect the toe settings. Therefore, the caster and toe may need to be adjusted at
the same time to achieve the correct settings.

section.
components.
4. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.

Procedures).

8. Adjust the rear toe.
To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.
9. CAUTION: Do not allow the gaiter to twist.
Adjust the rear toe.

10. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the
component from rotating.
Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).
11. To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock nuts.
12. Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
13. CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does

Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.

14. To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock nuts.
15. Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.

16. CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.


To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
NOTE: Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal amount.
Adjust the front toe.
19. Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Front Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.

section.
components.
4. Position the vehicle on a 4 post lift.

Procedures).

8. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

NOTES:
Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal amount.
Adjust the front toe.
Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm.

Published: 14-Feb-2012
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
2. Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.

Push the brake pads back to release the brake caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange
may be as
required shown.
under
the
tool.
Usethe
brake
caliper
support
bolt
and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not
exceed 0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation).
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 115 Nm.

Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
2. Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

Push the brake pads back to release the brake caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange
may be as
required shown.
under
the
tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt
and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not
exceed 0.015 mm.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension,
10. Tighten the brake caliper support bolts to 115 Nm.

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:

section.
components.
4. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.

Procedures).

8. To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.

9. Adjust the rear toe.
10. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel
Hub Runout Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
It is recommended that the DTI is capable of measurements of 0.005 mm.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
Tires, Removal and Installation).

Push the brake pads back to release the brake
caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side
with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special tool 100-053 on the lower caliper support
bracket as shown.
A spacer washer may be required under the tool.
Use the brake caliper support bolt and suitable nut.
6. CAUTION: Take care not to contact the studs.
Position the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge probe on the

hub flange as shown.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub
runout. Hub runout must not exceed 0.025 mm.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02 Rear
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
10. Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 103 Nm.

Front Suspension -
Torque Specification
NOTE: * Ensure new nut and/or bolt is fitted
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in

Steering gear to subframe retaining bolts 100 74 -
* Toe link ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 133 98 -
* Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 43 32 -
* Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut 70 52 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolts 55 41 -
* Rear lower arm to wheel knuckle ball joint retaining nut 133 98 -
* Rear lower arm to subframe retaining nut 175 129 -
* Front lower arm to subframe retaining nut 175 129 -
* Front lower arm to rear lower arm retaining nut and bolt Stage 1 - 60 Stage 2 - 135 Stage 1 - 44 Stage 2 - 135 -
degrees degrees
* Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 90 66 -
* Upper arm to body retaining nuts 70 52 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body 28 20 -
retaining nuts
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm retaining 175 129 -
nut and bolt
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining 27 20 -
nut
* Wheel hub and bearing assembly to wheel knuckle retaining 90 66 -
bolts
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Spring and damper assembly
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
5 Wheel hub and bearing assembly
6 Lower lateral control arm
7 Lower forward control arm
8 Stabilizer bar
9 Stabilizer bar link
Published: 20-Jun-2011
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The front suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a non-isolated subframe. Each front wheel knuckle attaches
to unequal length wishbone-type upper and lower control arms, which minimize track and camber changes during articulation. A
stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe and connected to each rear lower control arm with a link assembly. A
spring and damper assembly is installed between each rear lower control arm and the related front suspension housing.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
Component Description
FRONT SUSPENSION
Item Description
1 Subframe
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
7 Lower lateral control arm
8 Lower forward control arm
9 Stabilizer bar
Upper Control Arm
The forged-aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design and connects to the vehicle body through two plain bushes, and
links to the swan neck wheel knuckle by an integral ball joint. The upper control arm is inclined to provide anti-dive
characteristics under heavy braking, while also controlling geometry for vehicle straight-line stability.
Lower Control Arm
The forged aluminum lower control arms are of the wishbone design; the arms separate to allow for optimum bush tuning:
The rear lateral control arm is fitted with a bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the subframe. The
arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides the adjustment of the suspension camber geometry. The outer end
of the control arm has a tapered hole which locates on a ball joint fitted to the wheel knuckle. An integral clevis bracket
on the forward face of the lateral control arm allows for the attachment of the forward control arm. A bush is fitted
below the clevis bracket to provide for the attachment of the stabilizer bar link. A cross-axis joint is fitted to a
cross-hole in the control arm to provide the location for the clevis attachment of the spring and damper assembly.
The forward control arm is fitted with a fluid-block rubber bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the
subframe. The arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides adjustment of the castor and camber geometry. The
outer end of the control arm is fitted with a cross-axis joint and locates in the integral clevis bracket on the lateral
control arm.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle is a swan neck design and attaches to the upper control arm and lower lateral control arm.
The lower lateral control arm locates on a non serviceable ball-joint integral with the wheel knuckle. The lower boss on the
rear of the knuckle provides for the attachment of the steering gear tie-rod ball joint.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
Wheel hub and bearing assembly.

The wheel speed sensor (integral to the wheel hub and bearing assembly).
Brake caliper and disc shield.
Stabilizer Bar
The tubular stabilizer bar helps to control the roll rate of the vehicle. There are three versions of stabilizer bar, depending on
which engine is installed:
30 mm (1.18 in.) diameter joggled, on 3.0L diesel vehicles.

30 mm (1.18 in.) diameter straight, on 5.0L naturally aspirated and SC (supercharger) vehicles.
A tubular 32 mm (1.26 in.) diameter on armored vehicles.
The stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe with bushes and mounting brackets. The pressed steel mounting
brackets locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts screwed into threaded locations in the
subframe. The stabilizer bar has collars crimped into the bar at the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways
movement of the stabilizer bar.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each stabilizer link is secured to
a bush in the lower lateral arm with a bolt and locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel
providing maximum effectiveness.
Spring and Damper Assembly
The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower lateral arm and the front suspension housing. Each spring
and damper assembly incorporates:
An adaptive dynamics damper, which enables the damping characteristics of the suspension to be adjusted.
Refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Description and Operation).
A conventional coil spring, individually tuned to provide the required characteristics for the different engine variants.
The spring rate of the coil spring differs between models and is color coded for identification.
India-Specific Spring and Damper Assembly Spacers

Front spring and damper assemblies are fitted with spacers to raise ride height in India-specific vehicles. The color of these
spacers is grey. Rear air spring and damper assemblies are built by the supplier and the increase in ride height is contained in
the assemblies which are sealed.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual.REFER to: (204-01)
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),

Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension damper
Fluid on damper from an external source Damper not faulty, do not renew
Fluid leaking from damper GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTES:
Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will not affect
the function of the damper.
Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage

Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in the
tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly

REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal and
Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the distance
between the damper tube cap and the piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension damper.
Enclose a record of the stickout dimension with the returned
part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal and
Installation).
Front Suspension - Front Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Suspension spring compressor
204-476-01
Removal
All vehicles
Raise and support the vehicle.
2. For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
3. Release the shock absorber from the lower arm.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

removing the nut.
Discard the nut.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

5. NOTE: RH side only.
Release the fuse box.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Position the fuse box aside for access to the inboard
retaining nut.
Vehicles with 5.0L engine
6. NOTE: LH side only.
Release the coolant expansion tank for access.
All vehicles
7. Disconnect the electrical connector.

8. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but
the essential information is always correct.
Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.
9. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Install the shock absorber and spring assembly in the spring compressor.
10. WARNING: The spring is under extreme tension, care

must be taken at all times. Failure to follow these instuctions
may result in personal injury.
Compress the spring.
11. Remove the shock absorber retaining nut
12. CAUTIONS:
Mark the components to aid installation.
Note the fitted position of the component prior to

removal.
Carefully release the spring tension.

13. Remove the shock absorber.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: Make sure that these components are installed to the

noted removal position.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Tighten the nut to 27 Nm (20 lb.ft)

Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

Tighten the nuts to 27 Nm (20 lb.ft).
4. Connect the electrical connector.
Secure the fuse box.

Tighten the nuts to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Install the coolant expansion tank.

All vehicles
7. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
CAUTIONS:
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

installing the nut.
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

Secure the upper arm to the wheel knuckle.

Tighten the nut to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
8. Connect the shock absorber and spring assembly to the lower

arm.
Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
9. For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm
Removal
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire.

3. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Release the forward lower control arm.

Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
4. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

removed for access only.
Remove the air deflector.

Installation
1. NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.
Install the air deflector.
Install the forward lower control arm.

Install the front lower arm inner retaining nut and
bolt, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm (44 lb.ft)
+ 135 degrees.
4. Install the wheel and tire.

5. Lower the vehicle.
6. CAUTION: The final tightening of the front lower arm

inner retaining nut and bolt must be carried out with the
vehicle on its wheels
Tighten the 14mm bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).

the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm
Special Tool(s)
204-327
Remover, Ball Joint
Removal
CAUTIONS:
The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
1. Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
2. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Raise and support the body.
4. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6. Refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar Link (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
7. Torque: 100 Nm
8. Torque: 175 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9. NOTE: Install a new retaining nut and bolt.
Torque:
Stage 1 60 Nm
Stage 2 135°
10.
11. CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball
pin hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the lower ball joint boot.
Torque: 133 Nm
12. WARNING: Make sure the special tool is supported

while carrying out the operation. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the special tool is supported while carrying

out the operation. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the special tool.
Make sure the special tool is correctly located and the

lower ball joint boot is not damaged while carrying out the
operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Special Tool(s): 204-327

CAUTIONS:


NOTE: Do not carry out this step if the rear lower arm
ball joint released from the wheel knuckle lower pivot in the
step above.
Strike the top surface of the special tool directly above the
rear lower arm ball joint at the point indicated using a
copper mallet.
Torque: 175 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that a new lower arm ball joint nut is
installed.
2. Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General

Information, General Procedures).
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Rear lower arm bushing remover and installer
204-464
Rear lower arm bushing remover
204-333
Rear lower arm bushing installer
204-332
204-465
204-334
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
2. Remove the rear lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lower Arm (204-01 Front
3. NOTE: Note the fitted bush orientation and measured
height relative to arm.
4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower arm rear
bushings.
Installation
1. Install the special tools to the rear lower arm.

Tighten the bolts.
2. NOTE: Align to the orientation noted on removal.
Position the bushing in the special tool.
3. Using the special tools, partially install the lower arm bushing.
4. NOTE: Change the special tools, then complete

installation of the bushing to the measured height noted on
removal.
5. Change the special tools, then complete installation of the
bushing.
6. Install the rear lower arm.

Front Suspension - Shock Absorber Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Replacer support-bush
204-337
Replacer-bush
204-338
Remover-bush
204-336
Remover support-bush
204-335
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.

3. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the shock absorber bushing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the shock absorber bushing boot is

correctly located into the special tool.
Install the bushing into the special tool.
2. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Using the special tools, install the shock absorber bushing.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
2. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
Installation).
Installation).
5. Torque: 43 Nm
6. Torque: 43 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16. Torque: 7 Nm
17. Torque: 12 Nm
18. During installation tighten the bolts in the following

sequence.
Torque:
Bolt 1 55 Nm
Bolt 2 55 Nm
Bolt 1 55 Nm
19.
20.
www.JagDocs.com
21. Torque: 90 Nm
22. CAUTION: Make sure the wings and trim panels are
covered and protected, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint rotating.
Install the stabilizer bar link.

Tighten the upper nut to 43 Nm (32 lb.ft).
Tighten the lower nut to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).

Front Suspension - Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bush installer
204-340
Bush remove
204-342
Support
204-341
Support
204-339
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.

4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the stabilizer bar
link bushing.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the stabilizer bar link bushing.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm LH TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
2. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front
3. Remove the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. Release the secondary bulkhead outer LH panel.

Remove the bolt.
Release the cable clip.
Release the wiring harness clip.
5. Aside the secondary bulkhead outer LH panel.

Tie aside.
6. Remove the air cleaner.
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the upper arm retaining nut.

9. Remove the upper arm.
Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

2. Install the upper arm retaining nut, but do not tighten fully
at this stage.
at this stage.
4. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

5. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension
components must be carried out with the vehicle on its
wheels.
Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).

wheels.
7. Install the air cleaner.

Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
8. Release the secondary bulkhead outer LH panel.
Cut the cable tie.
9. Secure the secondary bulkhead outer LH panel.

Tighten the bolt to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
Secure the cable in the clip.
Secure the wiring harness clip.
10. Install the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH
Front Suspension - Upper Arm RH TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
2. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

3. Remove the RH secondary bulkhead panel.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH
4. Release the fuse box.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Position the fuse box aside for access to the inboard
retaining nut.

6. Release the glow plug control unit
Remove the nut.

8. Remove the upper arm.
Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

at this stage.
at this stage.
4. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

wheels.

wheels.

7. Secure the fuse box.
Install the 2 nuts and tighten to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
8. Secure the glow plug control unit.

Install the nut and tighten to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
9. Install the RH secondary bulkhead panel.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH
Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
2. Torque: 125 Nm
3. NOTE: Secure with cable ties.
Torque: 115 Nm
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to

the noted removal position.
7. CAUTION: Do not attempt to release the wheel hub by
hitting it with a hammer directly, loosen the wheel hub
retaining bolts partially before applying an even amount of
force to the head of each bolts to release the wheel hub
from the wheel knuckle. Failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the component.
NOTES:
Install the components to their original fitted

positions.
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation

Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
204-327
Remover, Ball Joint
Removal
2. Refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension,
3. WARNING: Make sure that a new tie-rod end nut is

installed.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.
Torque: 133 Nm
4.
5. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.

6. CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball
pin hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the lower ball joint boot.
Torque: 133 Nm

CAUTIONS:



CAUTIONS:


NOTE: Do not carry out this step if the rear lower arm
ball joint released from the wheel knuckle lower pivot in the
step above.
Strike the top surface of the special tool directly above the
rear lower arm ball joint at the point indicated using a
copper mallet.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that a new lower arm ball joint nut is
installed.

Rear Suspension -
NOTE: + New nut must be installed.

Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
Lower arm to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 192 142 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 192 142 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining bolt 192 142 -
Non XJR version - Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut + 96 71 -
XJR version - Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut + - - -
Stage 1: 48 35 -
Stage 2: 60 Degrees 60 Degrees -
Upper arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 115 85 -
Toe link to subframe ball joint retaining nut 90 66 -
Toe link to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 63 46 -
Toe link setting nut 55 41 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body retaining nuts 28 21 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut 27 20 -
Shock absorber to lower arm retaining bolt 133 98 -
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 48 35 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolt 55 41 -
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut 48 35 -
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 OF 3
Item Description
1 Rear subframe (reference)
2 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
7 Wheel knuckle
8 Lower control arm
9 Stabilizer bar
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) front suspension height sensor
2 RH (right-hand) front suspension height sensor
3 RH rear suspension height sensor
4 RH rear spring and damper assembly
5 Air suspension module
6 Valve block
7 Air compressor assembly
8 Reservoir
9 Silencer
10 LH rear spring and damper assembly
11 LH rear suspension height sensor
Item Description
1 Valve block to RH air spring pipe
2 Valve block to LH air spring pipe
3 Compressor to valve block pipe
4 Valve block to reservoir pipe
5 Compressor inlet/exhaust pipe
6 Filter
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The double wishbone type rear suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a steel subframe. Large diameter
bushes isolate the subframe from the vehicle's body.
Toe links, installed between the wheel knuckles and the subframe, are used to adjust the toe angle of the rear wheels.
The wheel knuckles are attached to the upper and lower control arms. A spring and damper assembly is located between each
lower control arm and the vehicle body.
The spring and damper assemblies incorporate air springs controlled by the air suspension system.
Air Suspension System
The air suspension system provides a fully automatic self-leveling function that ensures the vehicle maintains a constant
attitude, irrespective of load, by adjusting the rear ride height to match the front ride height.
The air suspension system comprises of:
An air spring in the spring and damper assembly of each rear wheel.
An air compressor assembly.
A valve block.
A reservoir.
A silencer.
A network of pipes to connect the individual components.
Four suspension height sensors (one for each corner of the vehicle).
An air suspension module.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network).
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item Description
1 ECM (engine control module)
2 RH (right-hand) front height sensor
3 RH rear height sensor
4 LH (left-hand) front height sensor
5 LH rear height sensor
6 Valve block
8 RJB (rear junction box)
9 CJB (central junction box)
10 TCM (transmission control module)
11 ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION - AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
The air suspension module adjusts the quantity of air in the springs to maintain the rear suspension at the required height.
The air suspension module calculates a target height for the rear suspension based on the average height of the front
suspension. If the actual height of the rear suspension is outside the tolerance band for the target height, for a given length
of time, the air suspension module then adjusts the actual height to the target height. The normal tolerance band is ±9 mm
(0.35 in.). This changes to ±3 mm (0.12 in.) when the vehicle is parked for 5 minutes with the engine running and all doors
closed, or by putting the air suspension module into a special mode using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. When a door
is open the tolerance band changes to -5/+20 mm (-0.20/+0.79 in.).
To decrease suspension height, the air suspension module opens the exhaust valve in the air compressor assembly and the air
spring valves in the valve block to release air from the air springs. To raise the suspension height , the module opens the air
spring valves to introduce air into the air springs using air from the reservoir and/or the compressor.
When vehicle speed is 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, the air suspension module normally uses air from the reservoir when it needs
to raise the rear suspension. This ensures that the occupants are not disturbed by noise from the air compressor assembly.
However, if the rear suspension is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.) below the target height, and there is insufficient pressure in the
reservoir, the air suspension module uses the compressor to lift the suspension. When the rear suspension is more than 50
mm (2 in.) low, the air suspension module also sends a signal to the instrument cluster on the high speed CAN bus to display
a Suspension Too Low message. If the vehicle is stationary the message is displayed with an amber triangle warning indicator;
if the vehicle is moving a red triangle warning indicator is displayed with the message.
Air Suspension System Schematic

Item Description
1 Reservoir valve
2 Pressure sensor
3 Valve block
4 RH air spring valve
5 RH air spring
6 LH air spring valve
7 LH air spring
8 Pilot exhaust valve
9 Inlet/Exhaust
10 Silencer
11 Filter
12 Main exhaust valve
13 Electric motor
14 Compressor
16 Reservoir
17 Air drier
System Inhibits
The air suspension module is programmed to inhibit normal height change operation under conditions where it is undesirable.
To reduce the trap hazard, height changes are restricted when any of the vehicle doors are open. This restriction is removed if
the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If the vehicle is jacked, the air suspension module detects the condition a few seconds after starting to correct the suspension
height. The same logic also detects if the rear of the vehicle is grounded. If it detects one of these conditions, the air
suspension module inhibits normal leveling control. If the rear wheels subsequently start to spin, the air suspension module
raises the rear suspension to help release the vehicle from grounding. Normal leveling control resumes when the engine is
running and the rear suspension is more than 30 mm (1.18 in.) below the nominal kerb weight height, or the vehicle speed
exceeds 10 mph (15 km/h).
Diagnostics and Maintenance
When vehicles are set to transportation mode the air suspension system adopts different functionality to optimize the rear
suspension height for loading and off-loading clearances. The vehicle can be switched in and out of transportation mode using
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. In transportation mode, the rear suspension height is set to 25 mm (1 in.) above the
nominal design height. If the suspension height is lower than the transportation mode set point, the message Vehicle Too Low
is also displayed in the message center. When the correct height is reached (engine running) the Vehicle Too Low message is
switched off.
The air suspension system has a number of special modes that may be used during vehicle servicing or repair. These modes
can disable the air suspension system, make it operate within tighter tolerances or deflate the air springs and/or reservoir.
While one of these modes is active the message Air Suspension Not in Customer Mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The air suspension system is set in and out of these modes using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
If a fault occurs in the air suspension system, a related DTC (diagnostic trouble code) is stored in the air suspension module.
The air suspension module adopts a default leveling strategy which is most appropriate for the fault and vehicle safety. This
reduces the functionality of the air suspension system depending on the type and severity of fault. A message is displayed,
and an amber or red warning indicator is illuminated, in the instrument cluster. A warning chime may sound when the fault
message is displayed.
The following table lists the air suspension system warning indicators, messages and chimes:
Triangle
Warning
Indicator Message Chime Fault Action
Amber Suspension Fault Alert chime when message first Fault detected that may result Rectify fault
displayed in some reduction in system
performance or refinement
Amber Vehicle Too Low Vehicle in transportation mode: Vehicle rear too low when Wait until vehicle has
Information chime repeated while loading. Displayed when risen before driving
vehicle is too low; chime stops when vehicle at rest if too low
transportation height achieved
Amber Vehicle Too Low Vehicle not in transportation mode: No The rear suspension is more Wait until vehicle has
chime than 50 mm (2 in.) below risen before driving
nominal height and the vehicle
is at rest
Triangle
Warning
Indicator Message Chime Fault Action
Red Vehicle Too Low Vehicle in transportation mode: Vehicle rear too low when Stop until vehicle has
Information chime repeated while loading and vehicle is moving risen
vehicle is too low; chime stops when
loading height achieved
Red Vehicle Too Low Vehicle not in transportation mode: No The rear suspension is more Stop or proceed
chime than 50 mm (2 in.) below cautiously until vehicle
nominal height and the vehicle has risen
is moving.
Amber Air Suspension No chime Air suspension system is in Change to customer
Not In Customer special mode used for vehicle mode with Jaguar
Mode servicing or repair approved diagnostic
equipment
The following system fault will not necessarily cause a DTC to be set:
Symptom Possible Cause

Vehicle leans / tilts after being left overnight or for some days Leak from air spring or air spring valve
Calibration or height setting is the process of adjusting the values stored in the air suspension module for the suspension
height sensor offsets for each of the four corners. Each of the suspension height sensors measures the position of the
associated wheel with respect to the vehicle chassis and generates a corresponding voltage signal. Each of these voltage
signals is read by the module and converted to a height value in millimeters. Ideally this height value would exactly match the
actual value for each wheel, however, due to build and component tolerances there can be an offset between these two sets of
values.
The calibration process sets the necessary value for this offset for each suspension height sensor so that the actual and
calculated values are equal. System calibration is required in the following cases:
A suspension height sensor is removed or replaced.

A replacement air suspension module is fitted.
If the suspension on any corner is dismantled and rebuilt.
The calibration procedure is carried out using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment and a suspension height measurement
tool.
The air suspension module contains a self test function, that can be activated by Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. The
test is primarily an electrical test. Checks for stuck valves or leaking valves etc. are not included.
The test routine activates each output (valves and compressor) in turn, and monitors electrical connections. The routine takes
approximately 30 seconds to complete, but may be terminated immediately by switching the ignition off. Operation of the
valves during this test may cause small quantities of air flow into or out of the air springs. As a result the vehicle may make
small changes in height.
The self test operates in the following sequence:
Opens exhaust valve 100%, then closes valve.

Turns compressor on and off.
Opens rear left air spring valve 100%, then closes valve.
Opens rear right air spring valve 100%, then closes valve.
Opens the reservoir valve 100% for 2 seconds, then closes valve.
To de-pressurize the system air is vented through the valve block, the air compressor assembly (which regenerates the air
drier), the filter and the silencer to atmosphere. The system is pressurized using the air compressor assembly. The
de-pressurization and pressurization of the air suspension system is initiated using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
REAR SUSPENSION
Item Description
1 Rear subframe
2 Stabilizer bar
3 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
6 Wheel knuckle
9 Lower control arm
Upper Control Arm
The cast aluminum upper control arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and links to
the wheel knuckle via an integral ball joint.
Lower Control Arm
The aluminum lower arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and to the wheel knuckle
via a second plain rubber bush.
The rear of the control arm has mounting points for the damper and the stabilizer link.
Toe Link
Each toe link is located between the wheel knuckle and a bracket on the subframe.
The toe links comprise an inner rod with integral axial ball joint. The inner ball joint has a threaded spigot which locates in the
bracket on the subframe and is secured with a locknut. The rod has an internal thread which accepts the outer rod.
The outer rod has a cross-axis joint at its outer end which is located in a clevis on the wheel knuckle, and is secured with a
bolt and locknut.
The length of the toe link can be adjusted by rotating the inner rod. This allows for adjustment of the toe angle for the rear
wheel. Once set, the inner rod can be locked in position by tightening a locknut on the outer rod against the inner rod.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle attaches to:
The upper control arm via a ball-joint located in the arm.

The lower control arm via a plain rubber bush located in the arm.
The toe link via a cross-axis joint located in the toe link.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
Wheel hub assembly.

Wheel bearing.
Wheel speed sensor.
Brake caliper.
Brake disc shield.
Stabilizer Bar
All vehicles have a 17 mm ( in.) stabilizer bar installed to help control the roll rate of the vehicle.
The stabilizer bar is attached to the top of the subframe with two bushes and mounting brackets. The stabilizer bar has collars
crimped into the bar at the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each link is attached via a
second ball joint to a cast bracket on the lower control arm. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel
providing maximum effectiveness.
Spring and Damper Assembly
Each spring and damper assembly is attached to a cast bracket on the lower control arm and to the vehicle body by four studs
secured by torque retaining nuts.
Each spring and damper assembly incorporates:
An adaptive dynamics damper, which enables the damping characteristics of the suspension to be adjusted.
An air spring, controlled by the air suspension system.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Air Springs
Section Through Air Spring

Item Description
1 Top mount assembly
2 Polyurethane damper mounting
3 Pressure retaining valve
4 Damper mounting seal
5 Air spring isolator
6 Air spring rolling sleeve
7 Air spring piston
8 Air spring rolling sleeve to piston crimp ring
9 Decoupled air spring guide
The air springs take the place of conventional coil springs on the rear suspension. In the air spring, a piston compresses the
air as the suspension moves into bump/jounce, which cushions the movement. A rubber rolling sleeve is guided by an outer
metal support sleeve and assembled around the damper. The metal support sleeve is decoupled from the top mount assembly,
which allows greater damper articulation without trapping the air sleeve. This design delivers improved ride characteristics
compared to a non-guided air spring, and reduces high frequency generated inputs such as those produced by a coarse road
surface, for example.
The key sealing points for the air spring are between the:
Piston and damper body.

Spring unit and top mount.
The method of achieving a pressure-tight seal between the air spring and the damper means that spring and damper
assemblies must be replaced as a complete unit.
The air-tight top mount assembly isolates the damper from the body structure while maintaining pressure within the spring. A
pressure retaining valve in the top mount ensures that air cannot be exhausted from the air spring when the pressure is less
than 3.0 bar (43.5 lbf/in2). This ensures that the rolling sleeve does not crease and become damaged. The maximum pressure
in the full-bump condition at GVW (gross vehicle weight) is approximately 20 bar (290 lbf/in2).
Air Compressor Assembly
Item Description
1 Air drier
2 Pilot exhaust valve
3 Electrical connector
4 HP (high pressure) outlet port (to valve block)
5 Main exhaust valve
6 Electric motor
7 Air intake/exhaust port
8 Compressor housing
The air compressor assembly is installed in the luggage compartment, on a bracket in the rear right corner of the spare wheel
well. For NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) reasons, the air compressor assembly is attached to the bracket by three
isolator mountings, each incorporating a rubber snubbing bush and a metal spring.
The air compressor assembly incorporates:
A two stage compressor driven by an electric motor.

An air drier.
A main exhaust valve.
A pilot exhaust valve.
An air intake / exhaust port.
A HP outlet port.
The compressor motor is operated by power from the air suspension relay in the RJB, which is controlled by the air suspension
module. To prevent damage caused by overheating, the temperature of the compressor and motor is calculated by a software
model in the air suspension module. The calculated temperature is based on compressor operating pressure, voltage, time and
ambient air temperature. The air suspension module discontinues compressor operation if the calculated temperature increases
to 100 °C (212 °F). Compressor operation resumes when the air suspension module calculates the temperature has decreased
to 80 °C (176 °F).
The air drier removes moisture from the air delivered by the compressor to the HP outlet port, and consists of a chamber that
contains water absorbing desiccant beads. When the air suspension system is depressurized, air is vented back through the air
compressor assembly, to initiate air drier regeneration. The clean dry air vented from the system re-activates the desiccant
beads.
The main exhaust valve controls the release of air from the air suspension system through the air intake / exhaust port. It also
acts as a PRV (pressure relief valve) and minimum pressure retention valve. The PRV function limits the maximum pressure
from the compressor to 17.5 bar (254 lbf/in2). The minimum pressure retention function limits the minimum pressure in the
system to between 0.25 and 1.00 bar (3.75 and 14.5 lbf/in2).
The pilot exhaust valve is a solenoid operated valve that controls the operation of the main exhaust valve. A PWM (pulse
width modulation) signal from the air suspension module controls the pilot exhaust valve to apply system pressure to the pilot
chamber of the main exhaust valve.
Valve Block
Item Description
1 LH air spring pipe connector
2 Reservoir pipe connector
3 Compressor pipe connector
4 RH air spring pipe connector
The valve block is used by the air suspension module to control the flow of air between the air compressor assembly, the
reservoir and the two air springs. The valve block is installed in the luggage compartment spare wheel well, on the same
bracket as the air compressor assembly. Three isolator grommets locate the valve block mounting plate on the bracket.
The valve block incorporates:
Three normally closed solenoid valves, one for each of the rear air springs and one for the reservoir.
A pressure sensor to monitor the pressure in the line between the air compressor assembly and the three solenoid
valves.
The solenoid valves control the air flow into and out of the air springs and the reservoir, and are operated by PWM signals from
the air suspension module.
The air suspension module uses the pressure sensor signal to decide when to pressurize the air springs directly from the air
compressor assembly, or from the pressurized air stored in the reservoir.
Reservoir
The reservoir stores a supply of pressurized air for immediate use by the system, which enables quiet system operation at low
speeds. The reservoir is installed in the luggage compartment, on a bracket under the spare wheel, and has a capacity of 3.7
liters (226 in.3). Pressure in the reservoir is controlled by the air suspension module at a nominal maximum of 16.5 bar (239
lbf/in.2).
Silencer
Item Description
1 Air intake/exhaust pipe connector
2 Reservoir bracket
3 Air intake/exhaust cap
The silencer is integrated into the reservoir bracket, and functions as an air intake and exhaust silencer. Air is exhausted as
the system is leveling down.
Air Distribution Pipes
A series of pipes carry pressurized air between the system components. The air spring pipes are integrated into the electrical
harnesses. The air compressor assembly to valve block pipe is separate from the other pipes, while the valve block to reservoir
pipe is clipped together with the intake/exhaust pipe. A filter, attached to the underside of the air compressor assembly, is
installed in the intake/exhaust pipe.
Air Suspension Module
The air suspension module uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the suspension height
sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states. Using this information, the air suspension module applies algorithms to
control the rear suspension height required for the current driving conditions.
The air suspension module is installed on the RH side of the luggage compartment, together with the adaptive damping
module, on a bracket attached to the rear quarter panel.
The air suspension module receives the following signals on the high speed CAN bus:
Vehicle speed - ABS module.

Wheel speed sensors - ABS module.
Lateral acceleration - ABS module.
Steering wheel angle - ABS module.
Steering wheel angle status - ABS module.
Engine speed - ECM.
Gear position target - TCM.
Vehicle information parameters - CJB.
CCF (car configuration files) - CJB.
Power mode (ignition signal) - CJB.
The air suspension module outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
Fault message - instrument cluster.

Individual suspension heights - other systems as required.
Suspension Height Sensors
NOTE: Rear sensor shown, front sensors similar.
Four suspension height sensors are used in the air suspension system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframe and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension. On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into
rotary movement of the sensor shaft.
Each suspension height sensor contains two independent sensors:
Sensor 1 is used by the air suspension system.

Sensor 2 is used by the adaptive dynamics system.
The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the vehicle and output a corresponding
analogue signal to the air suspension module. The data from the sensors is filtered and processed by the air suspension
module, and used to ensure that the vehicle remains level and at the correct height at all times by regulating the supply of air
to each rear air spring unit.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the air suspension module via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and
signal return.
Each sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
attached magnet. The signals from each of the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit,
to generate an output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of ± 40° around
its nominal position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mv/° of shaft rotation.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
For additional information.

REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Removal
NOTES:
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Raise and lower the vehicle on a 4 post ramp.
Installation).
4. Refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02 Rear Suspension,
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Torque: 38 Nm
8. NOTE: Discard the nut.
Torque:
Non XJR version only 96 Nm
XJR version only
Stage 1:48 Nm
Stage 2:60°
9. Torque: 115 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General

www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTES:
Before commencing work on the vehicle ensure the park brake is in the off position.
3. Remove the wheel and tire.

4. Release the spring and damper assembly from the lower arm.
5. Release the stabilizer bar link.

6. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the
brake hose.
Release the brake caliper and tie aside.
7. Release the lower arm from the wheel hub assembly.
8. Remove the lower arm.
Installation
1. Install the lower arm.

2. Secure the lower arm to the wheel hub assembly.
3. Secure the brake caliper.

Tighten the bolts to 103 Nm.
4. Secure the stabilizer bar link.

Tighten the nut to 48 Nm.
5. Secure the spring and damper assembly to the lower arm.

8. Tighten to 192 Nm.

Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, General Procedures).
3. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and

Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and
Installation).
5. CAUTION: Using a suitable blanking plug, blank off

the end of the air pipe to prevent dirt ingress.
Discard the air line connector.
Refer to: Air Line Connector (204-05, General Procedures).

6.
7.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
Mark the components to aid installation.

removal.
10.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that these components are installed to the noted
removal position.
2.
3. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
4. Torque: 63 Nm
5. Torque: 48 Nm
6. Torque: 28 Nm
7. Install a new air line connector.

Torque: 5 Nm
Installation).

10. Tighten the bolt at normal ride height.
Torque: 133 Nm
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
2. Remove the rear wheels and tires.

3. NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.
TORQUE: 7 Nm
TORQUE: 10 Nm

TORQUE: 48 Nm

TORQUE: 96 Nm
9. TORQUE: 115 Nm
10. NOTE: Move aside for access and secure the arm.
TORQUE: 115 Nm

12.
Vehicles with supercharger
13.
All vehicles
14.
15. CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts and bolts when the
suspension is at the normal ride height. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.
TORQUE: 133 Nm
16. TORQUE: 30 Nm
17.
18. CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust system is
supported with suitable retaining straps.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.
19.
20.
21. TORQUE: 58 Nm
22. NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
23. Repeat the above 4 steps for the other side.
24. NOTES:
LH side only.
Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

25. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
NOTE: RH side only.
26. Check for correct alignment.

27.
28. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
TORQUE: 133 Nm
Repeat the above step for the other side.
29. During installation tighten the bolts in the following
sequence.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.
Bolt 2: 55 Nm.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.

TORQUE: 22 Nm
32.
Installation

2. CAUTION: Make sure that new subframe bolts are
installed.
TORQUE: 80 Nm + 240°
Rear Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing
Special Tool(s)
204-250
Wheel bearing install and removal tool
204-269
Flange remover forcing screw
204-305
Remover, Wheel Bearing
204-726
Remover/Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-727A
Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-791
Installer, Wheel Bearing
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
205-725
Remover/Installer, Wheel Hub
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the
halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491-1, 205-491, 204-269

12. Special Tool(s): 204-726, 205-725

13. Special Tool(s): 204-305, 204-726, 205-725
14.
15. Special Tool(s): 204-726
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure correct alignment of the bearing is

maintained when installing into the hub carrier.
Special Tool(s): 204-727A, 204-791
2.
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct alignment of the drive

flange is maintained when installing into the hub carrier
and bearing assembly.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-250

5. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.

8. Torque: 6 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 103 Nm
Installation).

13. Torque: 96 Nm
14. Torque: 192 Nm
15. Torque: 63 Nm
16. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
Wheels and Tires -
Description Nm lb/ft lb/in
Wheel nuts 125 92 -
Tire Pressures
NOTE: * All except vehicles with supercharger.
Manufacturer Front Axle - Original Tire Size Rear Axle - Original Tire Size Tire Pressures kpa (PSI)
* Dunlop Sport Max X Gt J 245/50 ZR18 104 X/L (Y) 275/45 ZR18 107 X/L (Y) 220 (32)
Dunlop Sport Max X Gt J 245/45 ZR19 102 X/L (Y) 275/40 ZR19 105 X/L (Y) 220 (32)
Dunlop Sport Max X Gt J 245/40 ZR20 99 X/L (Y) 275/35 ZR20 102 X/L (Y) 220 (32)
Tire Pressures
Manufacturer-Winter Tires Front Axle - Original Tire Size Rear Axle - Original Tire Size Tire Pressures kpa (PSI)
Pirelli Sotto Zero 245/45 R19 102V XL 275/40 R19 105V XL 220 (32)
Pirelli Sotto Zero 245/40 R20 99V XL 275/35 R20 102V XL 220 (32)
Tire Pressures
Manufacturer-All Season Tire Front Axle Rear Axle Tire Pressures kpa (PSI)
Pirelli P Zeronero M+S J 245/45 R19 102 X/L H M+S 275/40 R19 105 X/L H M+S 220 (32)
Tire Pressures
NOTES:
* All except vehicles with supercharger.
** Only vehicles with supercharger.
Manufacturer-Space Saver Tires Front Axle - Original Tire Size Rear Axle - Original Tire Size Tire Pressures kpa (PSI)
* Pirelli T135/80 R18 104M T135/80 R18 104M 420 (60)
** Pirelli T135/70 R19 105M T135/70 R19 105M 420 (60)
Wheel Specification
NOTES:
* All except for the North America market or vehicles with supercharger.
Wheel Type Front Wheel Size Rear Wheel Size

* Meru 8.0J x 18 9.0J x 18
Aleutian 9.0J x 19 10.0J x 19
Kasuga 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
Kasuga Polished 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
** Amirante 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
ETO Polished Toba 9.0J x 19 10.0J x 19
ETO Decal Silver Toba 9.0J x 19 10.0J x 19
ETO JT6 Wheel Orona Polished 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
ETO JT6 Wheel Orona Diamond Turn 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
ETO Diamond Turn Mataiva 9.0J x 20 10.0J x 20
Space Saver Wheel Specification
NOTES:
* All except vehicles with supercharger.
Wheel Type Front Wheel Size Rear Wheel Size

* Alloy Spare 4J x 18 ET15 4J x 18 ET15
** Alloy Spare 4J x 19 ET00 4J x 19 ET00
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Component
Location
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) front tire pressure sensor
2 Tire pressure receiver
3 RH rear tire pressure sensor
4 RH rear tire pressure monitoring system initiator
6 LH (left-hand) rear tire pressure monitoring system initiator
7 LH rear tire pressure sensor
8 LH front tire pressure sensor
9 LH front tire pressure monitoring system initiator
10 RH front tire pressure monitoring system initiator
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Overview
TIRES
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to ensure an
air tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
Care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is not damaged.
Item Description
1 Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 High tire and bead tension area
4 Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction. This will relieve the high
tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side
of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Run-Flat Tires
Run-flat tires can be handled, fitted and removed using the same principles as used for normal low profile and
high-performance tires, with two exceptions:
They are always fitted with tire pressure sensors.

They have thicker bead cores and more rigid sidewalls which require special care when being mounted on the rims.
It is recommended that the tire fitting machine is fitted with plastic rollers for the upper and lower bead. This will ensure that
the bead is removed gently, protecting the rims and the tire pressure sensors.
Adequate amounts of special fitting lubricant must be used to ensure that the sidewalls move with the minimum exertion and
locate on the rim flange correctly.
Run-flat tires can be identified by the marking 'RSC' on the tire sidewall.
NOTE: Vehicles fitted with run flat tires are supplied with a spare wheel, vehicle jack and wheel brace.
Tread Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label,
positioned on the driver's side B-pillar, which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load
of passengers and luggage weight the vehicle can safely carry. This label will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be
installed on the production line.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it
came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the
original fitment.
NOTE: If tires and wheels of a non-standard size are fitted to the vehicle, the car configuration file must be updated
using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label is
requested from Jaguar parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - System
Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired: O = LIN bus: F = RF Transmission: N = Medium speed CAN bus: W = LF Transmission
Item Description
1 Instrument cluster
3 TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) receiver
4 TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) initiators
5 Tire pressure sensors
System Operation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The controlling software for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is located within the CJB. The software detects the
following:
When the tire pressure is below the recommended low pressure value - under inflated tire.
The location of the tire on the vehicle that is below the recommended pressure.
Malfunction warning.
The TPMS system comprises:
CJB located behind the rear seats.

Tire pressure receiver is located above the roof concole.
Two front initiators positioned forward of the wheels and behind the fender splash shields.
Two rear initiators positioned rearward of the wheels and assembled on dedicated brackets located behind the fender
splash shields.
Four sensors, each sensor is integral with a tire valve and located within the tire; the space saver spare wheel is not
fitted with a sensor.
The four initiators are hard wired to the CJB. The initiators transmit 125 KHz Low Frequency (LF) signals to the tire pressure
sensors which respond by modifying the mode status within the Radio Frequency (RF) transmission. The 315 or 433 MHz RF
signals are detected by the tire pressure receiver which is connected directly to the CJB. The received RF signals from the tire
pressure sensors are passed to the CJB and contain identification, pressure, temperature and acceleration information for each
wheel and tire.
The CJB communicates with the instrument cluster via the medium speed CAN bus to provide the driver with appropriate
warnings. The CJB also indicates status or failure of the TPMS or components.
Tire Location and Identification

The TPMS can identify the position of the wheels on the vehicle and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a
specific position on the vehicle, for example front left, front right, rear left and rear right. This feature is required because of
the different pressure targets and threshold that could exist between the front and rear tires.
The wheel location is performed automatically by the CJB using an 'auto-location' function. This function is fully automatic and
requires no input from the driver. The CJB automatically re-learns the position of the wheels on the vehicle if the tire pressure
sensors are replaced or the wheel positions on the vehicle are changed.
The TPMS software can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more new tire pressure sensors have been fitted

one or more tire pressure sensors have stopped transmitting
CJB can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors which do not belong to the vehicle
two 'running' wheels on the vehicle have changed positions.
If a new tire pressure sensor is fitted on any 'running' wheel, the CJB can learn the new sensor identification automatically
through the tire learn and location process.
The tire-learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or traveling at less than 12
mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to be driven at
speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the learn
process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the timer is
resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and process
starts again.
Low Pressure Monitoring

The tire low pressure sensor transmits by RF (315 MHz or 433 MHz depending on market) signal. These signals contain data
which corresponds to tire low pressure sensor identification, tire pressure, tire temperature, acceleration and tire low pressure
sensor mode.
Each time the vehicle is driven, the tire pressure monitoring system module activates each LF antenna in turn. The
corresponding tire low pressure sensor detects the LF signal and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF
transmission.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h) for 12 minutes. In parking
mode the tire low pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the tire pressure monitoring system module once every 13
hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more than 0.06 bar (1 lbf/in²) the tire low pressure sensor will transmit more often as
pressure is lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the tire pressure monitoring system module, it is assigned a position on the
vehicle and is monitored for the remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h),
the antennas fire in turn for 6 seconds on all except North American specification vehicles or for 18 seconds on North American
specification only vehicles in the following order:
Front left
Six second pause (for the tire pressure monitoring system module to detect a response from the tire low pressure
sensor)
Front right
Six second pause
Rear right
Six second pause
Rear left
Six second pause.
Each tire low pressure sensor responds in turn so the tire pressure monitoring system module can establish the tire low
pressure sensor positions at the start of the drive cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the tire low
pressure sensor positions are already known in the tire pressure monitoring system module.
This process is known as 'Auto Location' and takes:

three to five minutes on all except North American specification vehicles to complete, and
seven to eight minutes on North American specification vehicles to complete.
During this period the tire low pressure sensors transmit at regular intervals:
once every 5 seconds on all except North American specification vehicles, and
once every 15 seconds on North American specification vehicles.
For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire low pressure sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure
is sensed until the vehicle stops and the tire pressure monitoring system returns to parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the antennas stop firing and do not fire again until the vehicle has been parked for
more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each tire low pressure sensor continue at one minute intervals whilst the
vehicle is being driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure. The warning occurs at 25% deflation and comprises
the low tire pressure warning indicator and an appropriate message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The
message center will also display additional information about the position of the affected wheel(s).
Spare Tire Monitoring

Tire pressure sensors are not fitted to the space saver spare wheel and therefore the spare wheel is not monitored.
Initiator
Each initiator has a connector which connects to the vehicle body harness. The initiator is a passive, LF transmitter. The
initiators transmit their signals which are received by the tire pressure sensors, prompting them to modify their mode status
The CJB energizes each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the LF signal and
responds by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS uses active tire pressure sensors which are located on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor incorporates the
tire valve and is secured in the wheel by a nut on the outside of the wheel. The sensor contains a Printed Circuit Board which
houses a PTC (positive temperature coefficient) sensor, a Piezo pressure sensor, a radio receiver and transmitter and a lithium
battery.
The tire pressure sensors use the PTC sensor and the Piezo sensor to periodically measure the pressure and temperature of
the air inside the tire. The data is transmitted by RF data signals at either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependant on market
requirements.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data. This allows the TPMS to
identify the wheel on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt through the
learn and location process.
NOTE: For important information regarding the removal and fitting of tire pressure sensors and associated valves, see the
Tire Changing section.
Instrument Cluster Indications
Item Description
1 Message center
2 General warning indicator
3 Low tire pressure warning indicator
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. The driver is alerted to system warnings by
a low tire pressure warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an applicable text message in the message centre.
The CJB passes system status information to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The instrument cluster
converts this data into illumination of the warning indicator and the display of an appropriate message.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning indicator is illuminated for 3 seconds for a bulb check.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate.
The instrument cluster checks, within the 3 second bulb check period, for a CAN bus message from the TPMS. During this time
the TPMS performs internal tests and CAN bus initialization. The warning indicator will be extinguished if the CJB does not
issue a fault message or tire pressure warning message.
If a TPMS fault warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will flash for 72
seconds after the 3 second bulb check period and then remain permanently illuminated.
If a tire pressure warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will extinguish
briefly after the 3 second bulb check period, before re-illuminating to indicate a tire pressure warning.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events:
Event Instrument Cluster Indications

Low pressure warning limit reached in one wheel Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK TYRE PRESSURE' message displayed
and applicable tire highlighted on display.
Low pressure warning limit reached in one or Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message
more wheels in low speed mode (only if displayed.
programmed or learning)
TPMS fault Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
No transmission from a specific tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or Specific tire pressure sensor fault illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE NOT
MONITORED' message displayed.
Event Instrument Cluster Indications
No transmission from more than one tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or more than one tire pressure sensor illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
fault PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
CAN (controller area network) signals missing Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
Vehicle enters high speed mode (only available in Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE LOW FOR SPEED' message
certain markets) displayed.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant description and operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Description and Operation),

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Description and Operation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (Description and Operation).
General Notes
Factory installed tires and wheels are designed to operate satisfactory when inflated to the recommended inflation pressures;
refer to the Specifications sub-section. The recommended pressures apply to vehicle loads up to and including full-rated load
capacity
Correct tire pressures and driving technique have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid
acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase tire wear
Replacement tires should follow the recommended:
size
speed rating
load range
radial construction type
The use of any other size or type may seriously affect:
safety
ride
handling
speedometer and odometer calibration
vehicle ground clearance
tire clearance between body and chassis
wheel bearing life
brake cooling
Wheels need to be renewed when:
impact damaged
heavily corroded
porous
wheel stud holes or seats become damaged
they have excessive radial or lateral runout
Safety Notes
WARNINGS:
Do not mix different types of tires on the same vehicle. Handling may be seriously affected resulting in loss of control.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
When using winter tires, observe the direction of the sidewall moulded indicators; correct tire rotational direction is
critical. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
A tire and wheel must always be correctly matched. Wider or narrower tires than recommended could cause danger
through sudden deflation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
When using the temporary spare wheel, maximum speed must not exceed 80 km/h (50 mile/h). Drive with caution and
replace with the specified wheel and tire assembly as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Traction control (if available) must not be engaged with a temporary spare wheel fitted. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
When changing a wheel, make sure that the vehicle cannot move. Always apply the parking brake and select the
transmission park position. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, for example, when changing the wheel. The wheel resting on the
ground may cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Tighten the wheel nuts to specification. Too tight may cause damage, too loose may allow the wheel to become
detached. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Use only wheels and wheel nuts supplied by Jaguar. Aftermarket wheels or wheel nuts may not fit or function correctly
and could cause injury or damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.

1. Verify the customer concern by driving the vehicle
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Incorrect tire pressure

Wheel imbalance
Tires worn beyond tread wear indicators
Cuts
Abrasions
Bulges (blister)
Ply separation
Embedded objects
Impact damage
Incorrect speed rating
Incorrect load rating
Incorrect rotational direction
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart
Tire Wear Inspection

To maximize tire performance, inspect the tires for signs of incorrect inflation and uneven wear which may indicate a need for
balancing, rotation or front suspension alignment. Tires should also be checked frequently for cuts, stone bruises, abrasions,
blisters, and for objects that may have become embedded in the tread. More frequent inspections are recommended when
rapid or extreme temperature changes occur or when road surfaces are rough or occasionally littered with debris
Tire Wear Diagnosis

New tires should be installed if the wear indicators are exposed or if there is severe shoulder wear. Shoulder wear is usually
caused by either excessive camber or excessive toe on radial tires
Sometimes incorrect rear toe settings or damaged struts will cause severe cupping' or scalloped' tire wear on non-drive wheels
Incorrect rear toe alignment will also cause other unusual wear patterns
Road Test
A tire vibration diagnostic procedure always begins with a road test. The road test and customer interview (if available) will
provide much of the information needed to find the source of a vibration
During the road test, drive the vehicle on a road that is smooth and free of undulations. If vibration is apparent, note and
record the following:
The speed at which the vibration occurs

What type of vibration occurs in each speed range
- Mechanical or audible
How the vibration is affected by changes in the following:
- Engine torque
- Vehicle speed
- Engine speed
Type of vibration-sensitivity: torque sensitive, vehicle speed sensitive or engine speed sensitive
The following explanations help isolate the source of the vibration
Torque Sensitive
This means that the condition may be improved or made worse by accelerating, decelerating, coasting, maintaining a steady
vehicle speed or applying engine torque
Vehicle Speed Sensitive

This means that the vibration always occurs at the same vehicle speed and is not affected by engine torque, engine speed or
the transmission gear selected
Engine Speed Sensitive

This means that the vibration occurs at varying vehicle speeds when a different transmission gear is selected. It may
sometimes be isolated by increasing or decreasing engine speed with the transmission in NEUTRAL or by stall testing with the
transmission in gear. If the condition is engine speed sensitive, the cause is probably not related to the tires
If the road test indicates that there is tire whine, but no shake or vibration, the noise originates with the contact between the
tire and the road surface
A thumping noise usually means that the tire has a flat or soft spot making a noise as they slap the roadway. Tire whine may
be distinguished from axle noise. Tire whine remains the same over a range of speeds
Symptom Chart

Tires show excess wear on
edge of treads Tires under-inflated Correct pressure to specification
Vehicle overloaded Correct as necessary
Tires show excess wear on

edge of treads (having the Incorrect toe setting Set to specification
correct tire pressures)
Tires show excess wear in
centre of tread Tires over-inflated Set pressure to correct specification
Other excessive tire wear

problems Incorrect tire pressure Set pressure to correct specification
Incorrect tire and wheel usage Install correct tire and wheel
Loose or leaking air springs combination
Geometry out of alignment Tighten or install new air springs as
Loose, worn or damaged suspension necessary
components Check and adjust geometry to
Wheel and tire assembly out of balance specification
Excessive lateral or radial runout of wheel Inspect, repair or install new suspension
or tire components as necessary
Balance wheel and tire assembly
Check, repair or install a new wheel or
tire as necessary
Check, repair or install a new wheel or
tire as necessary
Wheel mounting is difficult

Incorrect application or mismatched parts, Clean or install new components as
including wheel studs and wheel nuts. necessary
Corroded, worn or damaged components
Wobble or shimmy affecting

wheel runout Damaged wheel (eventually damaging Inspect wheel rims for damage and
wheel bearings and causing uneven tire runout. Install a new wheel rim as
wear) necessary
Excessive vibration, rough

steering or severe tire wear Loose or incorrect installation of Tighten or install new components as
components necessary
Vehicle vibrations
Tires and wheels mismatched Install correct tire and wheel
Inflation pressure too high or too low combination
Uneven tire wear Set pressure to correct specification
Out-of-balance wheel, tire, wheel hub or Refer to tire wear information in this
disc assembly Symptom Chart
Damaged or distorted wheel from road Determine the out-of-balance
impact hazard or incorrect handling component and balance or install a new
Excessive radial runout component as necessary
Excessive lateral runout Install a new wheel as necessary
Incorrectly seated tire Check for incorrect wheel and tire
Loose wheel mountings - damaged wheel specifications. Install a new wheel or
studs, wheel nuts, worn or broken wheel tire as necessary
hub face or foreign material on mounting Install a new wheel or tire as necessary
faces Re-mount the tire as necessary
Defective wheel bearings Clean mounting surfaces. Tighten or
Brake disc imbalance install new components as necessary
Water in tires Install a new bearing set as necessary
Loose engine or transmission mounts Refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
Incorrect front end alignment Testing section in the Workshop Manual.
Loose or worn driveline or suspension REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake
parts System - General Information, Diagnosis
Excessive driveshaft runout or imbalance and Testing).
Worn or damaged flexible drive joint Remove water
Tighten or install a new mount as
necessary
Carry out front end alignment
procedures as required
Repair or install new driveline or
suspension components as necessary
Balance or install new driveshaft as
necessary
Install new flexible drive joint as
necessary
Damaged wheel hub stud

threads Sliding wheel across the wheel studs Install new wheel studs as necessary
during installation
Loose wheel nuts
Broken wheel studs

Loose or overtightened wheel nuts Install new wheel studs as necessary
Corrosion and contamination

streaks from the wheel hub Loose wheel nuts Check complete assembly. Install new
wheel stud holes components as necessary. Follow correct
torque procedure
Damaged wheel nuts

Loose wheel assembly Install new wheel nuts as necessary.
Over-tightened wheel nuts Follow correct torque procedure
Frozen wheel nuts

Corrosion or galling
CAUTION: Do not permit lubricant to
contaminate wheel hub stud holes or wheel nut
seats
If corrosion is light, wire brush away

corrosion. If corrosion is excessive
install new wheel studs and wheel nuts
as necessary
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (BCM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
For a detailed description of the tire pressure monitoring system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation) /
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation) /
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low tire
pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
(refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to be used. Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this warning it is essential that,
with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the
vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the passenger/driver door aperture.
NOTES:
The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage with an
artificial ambient temperature)
If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not correctly
calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Rotate wheels approximately 180 degrees

Increase the tire pressures by 3psi
Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire pressures
to the correct pressure.
Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that are
required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will flash for
approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect wheel arch Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Antennas and check for system DTCs. External visual damage to the tire low pressure sensors
and air leaks will not cause system fault warnings (note: nut and seal system should be replaced at each tyre
change using the available service kit). Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels
(note: a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
and Operation).
NOTE: NO DTCs WILL BE SET WITH A LOW PRESSURE WARNING AS THIS IS A STANDARD FUNCTION OF THE SYSTEM.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : U201F11 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

A1: U201F11 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
3 Measure the resistance between.
C3MC45, harness side Battery

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: U201F11 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Central Junction Box electrical connector, C3BP01A.

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.
A3: U201F11 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC U201F11 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: U201F11 CHECK THE CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Central Junction Box electrical connector, C3BP01A.
Yes
Replace Central Junction Box.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : U201F12 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER

B1: U201F12 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition OFF.
3 Measure the resistance between

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B2.
No
GO to B3.
B2: U201F12 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
2 Measure the resistance between

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to B4.
B3: U201F12 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
B4: U201F12 CHECK THE CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : U201F87 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
MISSING MESSAGE

C1: U201F87 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition OFF.
C3MC45, harness side C3BP01A, harness side

Pin 1 Pin 25
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
C3: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to C4.
No
C4: U201F87 CHECK CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX.
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST D : C1A5712, C1A5714, C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112, C1A6114, C1A6312, C1A6314
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING ANTENNA SHORT OR OPEN CIRCUIT

D1: C1A5712, C1A5714, C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112, C1A6114, C1A6312, C1A6314 CHECK FOR SHORT/OPEN
CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Central Junction Box electrical connector, C3BP01E. (Front LF Initiators).
3 Disconnect the Central Junction Box electrical connector, C3BP01G. (Rear LF Initiators).
4 Measure the resistance of Front Right Hand Initiator.
C3BP01E, harness side C3BP01E, harness side

Pin 1 Pin 2
5 Measure the resistance of Front Left Hand Initiator.
C3BP01E, harness side C3BP01E, harness side

Pin 14 Pin 15
6 Measure the resistance of Rear Right Hand Initiator.
C3BP01G, harness side C3BP01G, harness side

Pin 30 Pin 31
7 Measure the resistance of Rear Left Hand Initiator.
C3BP01G, harness side C3BP01G, harness side

Pin 18 Pin 19
Are any of the Initiator resistance measurements less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit as required.
No
REPAIR the open circuit as required. Clear DTC’s and retest.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the tire from the wheel, release the tire bead from the rim 180
degrees from the valve.
4.
5.
Discard the tire valve and retaining nut.
Installation 1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the seal is correctly located.
Make sure that new components are installed.
Install the washer and seal, making sure the valve remains
pressed fully onto its seat.
2. WARNINGS:
Make sure that any corrosion or dirt is removed from the

mating surfaces.
Make sure that a new tire valve, valve core, seal, washer,
cap and retaining nut is installed.
CAUTIONS:
Use lint free cloth.
Only use moderate force when installing the sensor.
NOTE: Only tighten the nut finger tight at this stage.
Install the tire low pressure sensor and support the

sensor body in position.
Support the back of the valve stem in order to prevent
rotation to the tire low pressure sensor body.
Gently push the nut towards the center of the wheel.
Tighten the nut.
Torque: 8 Nm
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.
Installation).
Lower the vehicle.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Removal
NOTES:
The ignition must be switched off.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. Torque: 1.5 Nm
4. NOTE: Component illustrated, removed for clarity.
Installation

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Removal
NOTES:
2. Remove the rear wheel and tire.
Installation).
3. Torque: 1.5 Nm
4.
Installation

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Overhead Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

2. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is secured in

the retainer.
Release the component first, before disconnecting

the electrical connector.
Installation

Wheels and Tires - Wheel and Tire
Removal
2. Torque: 125 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Apply a small amount of grease to the hub and wheel

mating surfaces before installation. Make sure the grease does not come
into contact with the vehicles braking components and the wheel stud
threads. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Air suspension control module to support bracket nut 7 - 62
Adaptive damping module to support bracket nut 12 8 -
Support bracket to body nut 12 8 -
Front suspension vertical accelerometer to body nut 5 - 44
Rear suspension vertical accelerometer to body nut 5 - 44
Front suspension height sensor bracket to front subframe bolt 20 15 -
Rear suspension height sensor to rear subframe bolt 4 - 35
Air line connector 5 - 44
Air suspension reservoir to body nuts 7 - 62
Air suspension reservoir to body bolt 7 - 62
Air suspension compressor to body bolts 9 - 80
Air suspension compressor to body nut 9 - 80
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
2 RH front spring and damper assembly
3 Front vertical accelerometer
5 ADM (adaptive damping module)
6 RH rear vertical accelerometer
7 RH rear spring and damper assembly
8 LH (left-hand) rear vertical accelerometer
9 LH rear spring and damper assembly
11 LH front suspension height sensor
12 LH front spring and damper assembly
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The adaptive dynamics system is an electronically controlled suspension system, which continuously adjusts the damping
characteristics of the suspension dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions.
The system is controlled by the ADM. The ADM receives signals from three body vertical accelerometers, four suspension height
sensors and from other vehicle systems to determine vehicle state, body and wheel motions, and driver inputs. These signals
are used by the ADM to continuously control the damping characteristics of each damper to the appropriate level, to give the
optimum body control and vehicle ride.
The ADM also contains the controller for the electronic differential, where fitted.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Item Description
4 LH (left-hand) front suspension height sensor
6 Front body vertical accelerometer
7 RH rear body vertical accelerometer
8 LH rear body vertical accelerometer
9 LH rear damper
10 RH rear damper
11 LH front damper
12 RH front damper
15 DLM (differential locking module) (where fitted)
16 JaguarDrive selector module
20 ADM
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The ADM uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the body vertical accelerometers and
suspension height sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states and driver inputs. Using this information, the ADM
applies algorithms to control the dampers for the current driving conditions.
The ADM receives the following signals on the high speed CAN bus from the stated system components:
Brake pressure - ABS module.

Brake pressure quality factor - ABS module.
Car configuration parameters - CJB.
Engine speed - ECM.
Engine speed quality factor - ECM.
Engine torque flywheel actual - ECM.
Engine torque flywheel actual quality factor - ECM.
Gear position target - TCM.
Lateral acceleration - ABS module.
Power mode (ignition signal) - CJB.
Power mode quality factor - CJB.
Roll stability control mode - ABS module.
Steering wheel angle - ABS module.
Steering wheel angle speed - ABS module.
Steering wheel angle status - ABS module.
Terrain mode requested - JaguarDrive selector.
Torque converter slip - TCM.
Vehicle information parameters HS - CJB.
Vehicle speed - ABS module.
Vehicle speed quality factor - ABS module.
Front left wheel speed - ABS module.
Front left wheel speed quality factor - ABS module.
Front right wheel speed - ABS module.
Front right wheel speed quality factor - ABS module.
Rear left wheel speed - ABS module.
Rear left wheel speed quality factor - ABS module.
Rear right wheel speed - ABS module.
Rear right wheel speed quality factor - ABS module.
The ADM also outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
Fault message - Instrument cluster.

Terrain mode change status - JaguarDrive selector.
Terrain mode - JaguarDrive selector.
Front left suspension height - other systems as required.
Front right suspension height - other systems as required.
Rear left suspension height - other systems as required.
Rear right suspension height - other systems as required.
The ADM monitors the input signals and operates the damper solenoids. The input signals are used in control functions and a
force required for each damper, for each function, is calculated. An arbitrator monitors the force requirements from each
function and apportions a force to a damper. The force is converted to the appropriate current and sent to the damper.
The control functions are as follows:
Body Control – Uses body vertical accelerometer and CAN inputs. Calculates road induced body motions 100 times a
second and sets each damper to the appropriate level to maintain a flat and level body attitude. Provides improved
body control without loss of ride quality.
Roll Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle roll rate due to driver steering inputs 100 times a second and
increases damping to reduce roll rate. Provides improved control and driver confidence.
Pitch Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle pitch rate due to driver throttle and braking inputs 100 times a
second and increases damping to reduce pitch rate. Provides improved control and driver confidence.
Bump Rebound Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times
a second and increases the damping rate as the damper approaches the end of its travel. Provides improved ride
quality.
Wheel Hop Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and detects when the wheel is at its natural frequency and increases the damping. Provides improved ride
quality.
Under normal road conditions when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the dampers are set to the firm condition
to reduce power consumption.
The ADM receives its power supply via a relay and fuse in the CJB. The relay remains energized for a period of time after the
ignition is off. This allows the ADM to record and store any DTC (diagnostic trouble code) relating to adaptive dynamics system
faults.
DAMPERS
Item Description
A Front spring and damper assembly
B Rear spring and damper assembly
The adaptive dynamics dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units, which are integrated with a conventional coil
spring (front suspension) or an air spring (rear suspension) to form the spring and damper assemblies. The dampers are
continuously variable, which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The dampers
provide the optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort.
The dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the center of the top mount.
In each damper, the damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an alternative
path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through the main (firm) valve.
When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a spring. The control blade
incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In compression, oil flows from
the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the slider housing and orifice and
into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil flows in the opposite
direction.
In the firm setting oil flows through the main (firm) valve only, but when the bypass is opened by any amount the oil flows
through both valves in a pressure balance. When fully energized the solenoid moves the armature and therefore the slider to
the maximum extension and opens the orifice completely. The damper operates continuously between these two boundary
conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a separate 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ADM. The ADM
continuously varies the current of the PWM signals between a minimum of 0 A and a maximum of 1.5 A (i.e. between the
maximum firm setting when de-energized and the maximum soft setting when fully energized) to independently increase and
decrease the damping of each damper as required.
Sectioned Views of Damper Operating States
Item Description
A Firm setting
B Soft setting
C Main oil flow
D Bypass oil flow
1 Bypass valve (open)
2 Main valve
3 Tube
4 Bypass valve (closed)
5 Piston and rod assembly
BODY VERTICAL ACCELEROMETERS
Three body vertical accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system:
A front body vertical accelerometer is attached to the body behind the right front wheel, on the front sidemember to
dash gusset.
A rear body vertical accelerometer is installed on each side of the luggage compartment, attached to the related rear
quarter panel.
The body vertical accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the
ADM. The algorithms in the ADM calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle, which are used by the controller to
control road induced body motion.
Each body vertical accelerometer is connected to the ADM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other dependant on
the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied acceleration. This capacitance
is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is processed by means of a dedicated integrated
circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal voltage of
approximately 1 ± 0.05 v/g.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT SENSORS
NOTE: Rear sensor shown, front sensors similar.
Four suspension height sensors are used in the adaptive dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframe and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension. On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into
rotary movement of the sensor shaft.
Each suspension height sensor contains two independent sensors:
Sensor 1 is used by the air suspension system.

Refer to: Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).
Sensor 2 is used by the adaptive dynamics system.
The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the vehicle and output a corresponding
analogue signal to the ADM. The algorithms in the ADM calculate the position, velocity and frequency content of the signals
and use the results for individual wheel control.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the ADM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
Each sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
attached magnet. The signals from each of the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit,
to generate an output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of ± 40° around
its nominal position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mv/° of shaft rotation.
ADAPTIVE DAMPING MODULE
The ADM is installed on the right side of the luggage compartment, in a bracket attached to the rear quarter panel.
System Fault Message
If a fault is detected by the ADM, a message is sent via the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster and the message
ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT is displayed. The ADM also logs an appropriate DTC. The ADM can be interrogated using a Jaguar
If a fault is detected, the ADM implements a strategy based on the type of fault. If there is an electrical power fault, or the
ADM cannot control the dampers, they default to the firm condition. If a sensor fails that only affects one or more control
modes an intermediate damper setting is used as the lower threshold. The remaining working modes can demand higher
damping as required.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For a detailed description of the adaptive damping system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Coil spring(s) Fuse(s)

Shock absorber(s) Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Accelerometer(s) installation Accelerometer(s)
Adaptive Damping Control Module
the next step.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index.
Symptom Chart
Possible Other
Symptom Possible Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
Vehicle on bump Visually inspect the wiring harness
stops Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to and connectors for water ingress.
fault repeated wiring harness or Visually inspect the system for air
regularly Red connectors leakage. Check the system mode and
indicator Air leak(s) calibration using the approved
permanently Vehicle in diagnostic system. Check for
illuminated transportation mode implausible articulation symptoms, i.e.
System not height sensor or linkage fault,
calibrated or deflated air spring, under inflated tire
calibration corrupt etc. Note implausible articulation
Implausible symptoms may be caused by an
articulation un-calibrated height sensor. Check for
symptoms detected height sensor DTCs and refer to the
Failure of multiple DTC index. Refer to the warranty policy
height sensors and procedures manual if a module is
Air suspension suspect.
control module
failure
Vehicle does not Visually inspect the wiring harness

sit level Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to and connectors for water ingress.
fault repeated wiring harness or Visually inspect the system for air
regularly Red connectors leakage and refer to the guided
indicator Air leak(s) diagnostic routine on the approved
permanently Calibration corrupt diagnostic system. Check the system
illuminated cross-link valve fault calibration using the approved
Height sensor fault diagnostic system. For front and rear
Reservoir valve stuck cross link valve tests refer to the
open guided diagnostic routine on the
Exhaust valve stuck approved diagnostic system. Check for
closed height sensor DTCs and refer to the
Corner valves stuck DTC index. For reservoir and exhaust
open valve tests refer to the guided
Air suspension diagnostic routine on the approved
Possible Other
Symptom Possible Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
control module diagnostic system. Check for corner
failure valve DTCs and refer to the DTC index.
Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is
suspect.
Vehicle sits too Visually inspect the wiring harness
low Suspension Two chimes, Water ingress to and connectors for water ingress.
fault amber wiring harness or Visually inspect the system for air
Dynamic indicator connectors leakage. For air compressor
stability permanently Air leak(s) temperature sensor, inlet air filter,
control illuminated Air suspension exhaust valve and air compressor
(DSC) One chime compressor tests refer to the guided diagnostic
DSC amber temperature sensor routine on the approved diagnostic
indicator fault system. For Air suspension control
permanently Inlet air filter module lost communication with ABS
illuminated blockage/restriction module, refer to the lost
ABS indicator Air suspension communication codes statement at
permanently compressor fault the end of this table. Check for ABS
illuminated Exhaust valve DTCs, Refer to the relevant section of
stuck/sticking the workshop manual. Refer to the
Air suspension warranty policy and procedures manual
control module lost if a module is suspect.
communication with
ABS module
ABS fault.
Air suspension
control module
failure
Vehicle sits too For reservoir valve and exhaust valve

high Suspension Two chimes, Reservoir valve stuck tests refer to the guided diagnostic
fault amber open routine on the approved diagnostic
indicator Exhaust valve stuck system. Check for corner valve DTCs
permanently closed and refer to the DTC index. Refer to
illuminated Corner valves stuck the warranty policy and procedures
open manual if a module is suspect.
Air suspension
control module
failure
System detects Refer to the guided diagnostic routine

extended mode - - Crossed gallery and on the approved diagnostic system.
unnecessarily air spring pipes
when lowering Incorrect valve block
installed to front or
rear
Damage or blockage
in air harness
Vehicle Refer to the guided diagnostic routine

leans/tilts after - - Leaking air spring(s) on the approved diagnostic system.
being left Leak from corner
over-night or for valve to gallery
some days Exhaust valve stuck
open
After vehicle left Refer to the guided diagnostic routine

over-night or for Suspension - Leaking air spring(s) on the approved diagnostic system.
some days vehicle Leaking reservoir
system regularly raising
indicates slowly
"Suspension
vehicle raising
slowly" when
first driving off
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB) (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Leaks
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Any spray used must have a corrosion inhibitor, and

must not cause damage to paintwork, plastics, metals or plastic pipes.
NOTE: The recommended leak detection spray is GOTEC LDS,

Jaguar part number C2C 22398.
The recommended leak detection spray should be used to identify any

suspected leaks. This procedure should also be used where any of the
air suspension components have been disturbed.
2. Clean around the area of the suspected air leak.
3. Using the recommended leak detection spray, spray around all of the air
suspension components, working systematically until the source of the
air leak has been found.
4. NOTE: If a new air suspension component is to be fitted, and no

air leak has been detected at the pipe connectors, remove and discard
the new air pipe connections supplied with the component.
If any of the air suspension components are found to be leaking e.g. air
spring, compressor, reservoir or the solenoid valve block repair is
effected by replacement only. If an air leak from the pipe connector has
also been identified, a new air pipe connector, supplied with the air
suspension component, must be installed.
5. NOTES:
Only Jaguar approved connectors have been tested to the correct

pressure and temperature specifications.
Air pipes must only be cut using either Hose cutter 204-494,
available from SPX LTD or Hose cutter YA1000A, available from Snap-On
Tools.
If the color coded markings adjacent to the pipe connections are

removed when cutting air pipes, the cut end of the air pipe must be
clearly marked with a suitable colored tape or paint mark.
If the source of the air leak is found to be a pipe connection cut 5 mm

(0.2 in) off the end of the air pipe and fit a new connector.
6. NOTES:
Air pipes must only be cut using either Hose cutter 204-494,
available from SPX LTD or Hose cutter YA1000A, available from Snap-On
Tools.
Only Jaguar approved air pipes have been tested to the correct
pressure and temperature specifications.
If the source of the air leak is found to be in a section of pipe cut out
the damaged section of air pipe and replace with new air pipe and air
pipe connectors as required.
7. NOTE: If the repair has been unsuccessful repeat the above steps
until the air leak is rectified.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system ensure that the system is
fully pressurized.
8. Using the recommended leak detection spray, spray around all of the air
suspension components, working systematically to make sure that the
source of the air leak has been found.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Ride Height Adjustments
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Ride height gauge.
204-484
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheels and tires, tie rod ends, suspension joints and wheel bearings are free from damage, wear and free
play.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
The ride height must be measured with the vehicle weight supported by the suspension.
With the engine running and all vehicle doors closed, make sure the air suspension is functioning and the vehicle height
can be raised and lowered using the air suspension switch.
Drive the vehicle on to a flat, level surface.
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out after replacement of the air suspension control module, removal or replacement
of a height sensor, removal or replacement of the front or rear suspension arms, replacement of body panels incorporating
suspension fixing points.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the vehicle is not moved once it has been
positioned to take measurements.
Position the vehicle on a flat level surface.
2. NOTES:
Make sure the fender splash shields are correctly fitted.
Fit special tool 204-484 as illustrated.
Make sure the special tool is square to the wheel face

with the measuring rod in a vertical position.
Take the measurement from the top edge of the slider on

the special tool.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system carry out the ride
height adjustments.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension System Depressurize and
Pressurize
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
A small amount of air pressure will be left in the air suspension system.
Eye protection must be worn.
Wear protective gloves.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure tailgate, hood and all doors are closed.
Make sure the vehicle is in a clear working area.
1. WARNING: The air suspension is pressurised. Make sure dirt or

grease does not enter the system. Always wear hand, eye and ear safety
standard protection when working on the system.
Using the diagnostic tool, depressurize the air suspension system.

Follow the on-screen prompts.
2. Using the diagnostic tool, pressurize the air suspension system.

Start and run the engine.
Published: 21-Nov-2013
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Manual Tight Tolerance Setting
Mode
General Procedures
Activation
NOTES:
If this procedure has been successful the instrument cluster will emit two soft chimes 1 second after the drivers door is
closed. The instrument cluster will then emit two soft chimes each time the drivers door is closed to confirm that air
suspension manual tight tolerance setting mode is still active.
Apply 3 light applications to the brake pedal during this procedure. Make sure that the pedal is returned to the fully off
position before the next application.
1. Make sure the transmission is in the P position.
2. Run the engine.
3. Open the drivers door.
4. Press the brake pedal 3 times (making sure that the pedal is fully
returned to the rest position before applying the next application).
5. Close the drivers door within 10 seconds of the first brake pedal
application.
Deactivation
1. Turn the engine off or drive the vehicle over 5 mph (8 Km/h).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and

2. Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 12 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor
Removal
WARNING: The air suspension is pressurised. Make sure dirt or grease does not enter the system. Always wear hand, eye
and ear safety standard protection when working on the system.
CAUTION: Do not depressurise the air suspension system before raising the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Air Suspension Solenoid Valve Block (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
3.
4.
5. CAUTION: Using a suitable blanking plug, blank off the
end of the air pipe to prevent dirt ingress.
A new air line connector must be installed.

Torque: 3.5 Nm
6.


Torque: 3.5 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Control Module
Removal
CAUTION: Calibration of the air suspension system must be carried out after the following components have been
replaced: air suspension control module, suspension height sensor, suspension components and body panels incorporating
suspension fixing points.
1. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
2. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).

4. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Ride Height Adjustments (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,

General Procedures).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir
Removal
NOTES:

2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5. WARNING: Loosen the pipes no more than one full

turn to allow the stored air pressure to vent for a minimum
of three seconds.
CAUTION: Using a suitable blanking plug, blank off the


Torque: 3.5 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
2. Check the diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)s using the approved diagnostic
tool. Clear or repair as necessary
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Solenoid Valve Block
Removal
CAUTION: Do not depressurise the air suspension system before raising the vehicle.
NOTES:


4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the colour coded air

lines prior to removal
Discard the air line connectors.

Torque:
4 mm pipe 2 Nm
6 mm pipe 3.5 Nm
6.
Installation
1. NOTE: New air line connectors must be installed.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal
2. Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Suspension Height Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean.
NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

5. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Suspension Height Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components,

make sure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean.
4. CAUTION: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal

2. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
2 ADM (adaptive damping module)
3 DLM (differential locking module)
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - Overview
OVERVIEW
JaguarDrive control is a selectable vehicle optimization system designed to fine-tune the driving characteristics of the vehicle
by accommodating different driving conditions or driving styles. The system allows the performance envelope of the vehicle to
be stretched and prevents the necessity for a single, compromised configuration for all conditions. JaguarDrive control
increases the vehicle's abilities by changing the characteristics of engine mapping, transmission shifts, stability and traction
interventions, suspension settings and, on SC (supercharger) vehicles, the electronic differential settings.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - System
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (50 A midifuse)
3 CJB (central junction box) (fuse 66)
4 Diagnostic socket
8 High speed CAN connection to other systems
11 ADM
13 DLM
System Operation
Engine Management System
The EMS (engine management system) varies the accelerator pedal maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of
pedal travel. The EMS can also change the accelerator pedal response to control the allowed torque change relative to the
speed of pedal travel.
Each driving mode uses a combination of operating parameters for each sub-system. Changing between driving modes initiates
a different set of operating characteristics, which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in engine
response when, for example, the accelerator pedal is held in a constant position and the driving mode is changed from winter
to dynamic, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. Similarly, if the mode is changed from normal or
dynamic to winter, the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse
the JaguarDrive control system operation with an EMS fault.
Transmission Control
The TCM changes the shift maps for the JaguarDrive control mode selected. This changes the shift points providing early or
late upshifts and downshifts. For example, on slippery surfaces in winter mode the transmission will select 2nd gear for
starting from a standstill on a flat surface to minimize wheel slip.
Anti-lock Braking System Control
The ABS module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these functions to optimize the
selected JaguarDrive control mode. Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to improve traction and vehicle
composure.
If TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched off, then subsequently the JaguarDrive control mode is changed, DSC is automatically
switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected mode, reducing the requirement for the driver to change
the DSC system mode for optimum performance in various driving scenarios.
Incorrect Mode Usage
Selection of an inappropriate mode is discouraged in the following ways:
The active mode icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center and on the selected mode
button on the JaguarDrive selector module.
In dynamic mode, when the ignition has been in the off position continuously for more than 6 hours, the JaguarDrive
control system defaults to the special modes off (DSC on).
Selection of an inappropriate mode for the conditions will not endanger the driver or immediately cause damage to the vehicle.
Continued use of an inappropriate mode may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice a different vehicle
response, with the engine and transmission responses being different than in the special modes off.
Driver Information
The message center contains the JaguarDrive control mode icons, which display the currently selected mode. If no symbol is
displayed, no special mode is selected and the system is in special modes off.
In dynamic mode when the transmission is in sport and manual mode, the gear information is displayed in red when the
appropriate engine speed is reached for the optimum sporty change point.
Diagnostics
The JaguarDrive control system relies on the correct functionality of the sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a
fault, the JaguarDrive control system will not function, even though the fault is not in the JaguarDrive control system.
The JaguarDrive selector module and the mode buttons should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of
the sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the JaguarDrive control system will function normally
after an engine on and off cycle.
JaguarDrive Control Sub-System Faults

If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate message
for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. No JaguarDrive control message will be shown when a failed
sub-system displays its own message.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different JaguarDrive control mode or at the next
ignition on cycle, a message WINTER MODE UNAVAILABLE or DYNAMIC MODE UNAVAILABLE will appear in the message center.
This generally implies that the JaguarDrive control system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed once per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the driver
using the JaguarDrive control buttons or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message WINTER MODE UNAVAILABLE or DYNAMIC MODE UNAVAILABLE can also in very rare circumstances be
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive selector module.
It is not possible for the JaguarDrive selector module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or message
generation) in any of the sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related message
will never be associated with a JaguarDrive selector module or JaguarDrive control system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN bus signal from the JaguarDrive selector module. If a fault in
the JaguarDrive control system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the special modes off setting. The
sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the JaguarDrive control CAN signal. These faults can be
retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the
JaguarDrive selector module or the CAN bus network.
JaguarDrive Control System or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the JaguarDrive control system, all button icon LED (light emitting diode) will be turned off (if applicable,
background illumination will remain on) and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored. The instrument cluster
message center will display a message WINTER MODE UNAVAILABLE or DYNAMIC MODE UNAVAILABLE when the fault occurs, if
the fault is present and the driver attempts to select a special mode (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next
ignition on cycle.
The JaguarDrive control buttons and selector module are an integrated unit. If a fault occurs in either component, the whole
unit will require replacement, however, this is extremely unlikely.
CAN Bus Faults
If a CAN bus fault exists and prevents JaguarDrive control system operation, all of the JaguarDrive control button icon LED will
be illuminated and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a JaguarDrive control system CAN bus message from the JaguarDrive selector
module, the message SPECIAL MODES UNAVAILABLE will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every
ignition on cycle.
User Error
A special mode change will not occur while DSC or ABS is active (including ABS cycling). This may be misinterpreted as a
system fault.
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROLS
JaguarDrive Mode Buttons and Warning Indicators
Item Description
1 DSC warning indicator
2 DSC/TracDSC mode button
3 Dynamic mode button
4 Winter mode button
5 DSC OFF warning indicator
The system is controlled by buttons adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector on the floor console. The buttons allow the selection
of one of the following three modes:
Special modes off

Winter mode
Dynamic mode.
The instrument cluster will display the selected JaguarDrive control mode in the message center.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
The JaguarDrive control system uses a combination of a number of vehicle sub-systems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the mode selected. The following sub-systems make up the JaguarDrive control system:
EMS (engine management system). For additional information, refer to:

Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Automatic transmission.
Refer to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Description and Operation).
Brake system.
Refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
Adaptive dynamics.
Electronic differential control (where fitted).
The JaguarDrive control software is stored in the JaguarDrive selector module located below the JaguarDrive selector. The
module detects the selection made using the buttons and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN bus, which is received by
each of the sub-system control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software, which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the JaguarDrive control mode selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides feedback for the selected mode so that the JaguarDrive control software can
check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the
participating sub-systems. All participating sub-systems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive
control. The JaguarDrive selector module should not be replaced until all other options have been exhausted.
Winter Mode
To activate winter mode, press the winter mode button briefly (not less than 500 ms) to activate or de-activate the mode.
NOTE: Winter mode cannot be active at the same time as dynamic mode.
When active the winter mode icon and message appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm the activation.
Dynamic Stability Control
Press the DSC (dynamic stability control) mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to switch between DSC and TracDSC. The
instrument cluster message center will temporarily display either DSC ON or TRAC DSC depending on which selection is made.
When TracDSC is selected, the DSC OFF warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated and the DSC button is
illuminated. TracDSC is intended only for use on dry tarmac by suitably experienced drivers.
DSC can be manually switched off by pressing the DSC mode button for more than 10 seconds. Confirmation is given by a
chime from the instrument cluster, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC OFF warning
indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE: DSC is operational at all times when the engine is running unless manually switched off.
Dynamic Mode
To activate dynamic mode, press the button briefly. The dynamic mode button is illuminated. Dynamic mode confirmed
message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
NOTE: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the same time as winter mode.
In transmission sport mode and manual mode, the driver has full control over the transmission shift points and the TCM will
not intervene to prevent engine overspeed (i.e. automatic upshifts are inhibited). In this setting, the gear indicator in the
instrument cluster will turn red at high engine speeds to indicate an appropriate manual upshift point.
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
For a detailed description of the driveline system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Diagnosis and Testing),
Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing),
Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Diagnosis and Testing).

If a road test is necessary make sure the vehicle is safe to do so.
2. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical faults.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Wheel rim and tire damage or runout

Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for damage including dents, cracks and excessive runout
Check all the CV joint gaiters for splits, damage and security
Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for correct alignment
Check the driveshaft mounting bolts security
Check all the driveshaft and halfshaft joints for excessive movement
Check the rear driveshaft centre support bearing for security, damage and excessive wear
Check the rear differential mounting bolts and bushes for wear, damage and security
Check the rear differential for oil leaks
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Vibration through the Road test the vehicle. If the vibration is only at a specified speed,
vehicle body at a Road wheel balance the road wheels. Test for normal operation. Disconnect the rear
specified speed imbalance driveshaft. Check CV and universal joints for smooth and full movement.
Driveshaft Disconnect the front driveshaft. Check CV joints for smooth and full
imbalance movement. If any joints are faulty, replace the driveshaft. Test for
normal operation.
Vibration through the Road test the vehicle. Check the rear driveshaft for correct alignment
vehicle body at all Misalignment of the through the centre support bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal
speeds rear driveshaft operation. Check for a damaged or bent stub axle. Rectify as necessary.
Bent or misaligned
stub axle
Rumbling noise from the Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear
rear of the vehicle Rear differential differential pinion bearings and output bearings, the rear wheel bearings
varying at different bearings worn and the rear driveshaft centre bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for
vehicle speed and load Rear wheel normal operation.
bearings worn
Rear driveshaft
centre support
bearing worn
Rumbling noise from the Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the front
front of the vehicle Front differential differential pinion bearings and output bearings and the front wheel
varying at different bearings worn bearings. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal operation.
vehicle speed and load Front wheel
bearings worn
Whining noise from the Check and top up the rear differential oil level if necessary. Using a
rear of the vehicle during Rear differential suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear differential.
acceleration and overrun gears worn or Replace the rear differential unit if there is excessive gear noise.
conditions damaged REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive
Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing).
Knocking, clicking or Disconnect the rear driveshaft. Check joint mounting bolt holes for
clunking noise from rear Rear driveshaft elongation. Check the joints. Disconnect the rear halfshafts. Check the
of vehicle during joint fixings shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the CV joints. Rectify as
acceleration and overrun insecure necessary. With the rear driveshaft and halfshafts disconnected, check
conditions Rear driveshaft the rear differential for tight spots or excessive play. Rectify as
joints worn or necessary.
damaged
Rear halfshaft
joints or splined
shaft worn or
damaged
Rear differential
internal
components worn
or damaged
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00 General Information,
Driveshaft -
Centre bearing retaining bolts 48 35 -
Transmission flexible joint retaining bolts 127 94 -
Rear drive axle constant velocity (CV) joint retaining bolts 75 55 -
Driveshaft - Driveshaft

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic

System.
Driveshaft - Driveshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
CAUTION: Apply the parking brake, chock the wheels and ensure that all personnel are clear of the vehicle before carrying
out the following procedure.
NOTE: Select NEUTRAL before disconnecting the battery, to allow the driveshaft to be turned.
1.
2.
4. NOTE: The ignition must be switched on.

7. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
8.
9. NOTE: Mark the position of the driveshaft on the

transmission flange.
10. CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the flexible

coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
11. CAUTION: Do not use the 5mm hole on the
differential case flange for the alignment mark.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
12. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do

not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

installed to the recess on the driveshaft.

13. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do
not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.
14.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the
differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
3. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
4. NOTE: Make sure that you re-align the driveshaft to

the transmission flange using the alignment mark.

driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
6. Torque: 48 Nm
7.
8. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
10. NOTE: The ignition must be switched on.

12.
13.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Item Specification
Differential fluid - vehicles without supercharger Castrol SAF XO (75W 90)
Differential fluid - vehicles with supercharger Castrol BOT 720 (75W 90)
Initial Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.9 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.3 Liters
Service Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.85 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.25 Liters
Differential case front retaining bolt 90 66 -
Differential case rear retaining bolts 192 142 -
Differential filler plug 27 20 -
Differential drain plug 27 20 -
Halfshaft constant velocity joint nut 300 221 -
Driveshaft retaining bolts 73 54 -
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Component
Location
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL - V8 5.0L PETROL AND TDV6 3.0L DIESEL VEHICLES
Item Description
1 Open differential
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Overview
OVERVIEW
The rear differential has two functions:
to convert the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distribute drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear wheels.
to compensate for differences in the rotational speeds of the vehicle's rear wheels during cornering.
Two types of rear differential are installed:
an open rear differential on V8 5.0L Petrol AND TDV6 3.0L Diesel vehicles
an electric rear differential on V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol vehicles.
Both types of rear differential are attached to the rear subframe at four mounting points. Each mounting point incorporates a
rubber bush to reduce NVH (noise, vibration and harshness). The bushes in the forward mounting points are installed in the
differential. The bushes in the rear mounting points are installed in the rear subframe.
The open differentials are almost identical in their design and differ only in the final drive ratio and a heavier input flange
which is fitted to TDV6 3.0L Diesel vehicles. The final drive ratios for the open and the electric rear differentials are as follows:
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, V8 5.0L Petrol - 2.56:1

TDV6 3.0L Diesel - 2.44:1.
NOTES:
Two variants of the open and electric rear differential are available, the case can be constructed of cast steel or aluminum
and are similar in their construction. The internal components remain the same in both variants. The cast steel version is
shown in the illustrations in this document.
A mass damper can be fitted to the casing of the rear differential on some models.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus
Control Diagram - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Electric Rear Differential Only
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175 A)
3 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
4 Differential locking motor
5 Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
6 Oil temperature sensor
7 High speed CAN from suspension control module
System Operation
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL - V8 5.0L PETROL AND TDV6 3.0L DIESEL VEHICLES
Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the
pinion gear to the crown wheel drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential casing.
The cross-shaft, which is secured to the casing, also rotates at the same speed as the casing. The planet gears, which are
mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the casing. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left and
right hand sun gears, rotating the drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun gear is equal. In this
condition both drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed and the planet gears do not rotate.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to
travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun gears. The planet gears rotate on their axes to allow the
outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
ELECTRIC REAR DIFFERENTIAL - V8 S/C 5.0L PETROL VEHICLES

The multiplate clutch prevents excessive differential slip and therefore maximizes the traction performance of the vehicle. This
is fundamentally different from 'braked' traction control systems, which can only counteract differential slip when it occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS (anti-lock brake system). The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multiplate clutch actively controls the torque flow through the differential and optimizes the torque distribution in the
driveline. The clutch biases the torque from the differential to the wheel with the higher grip and prevents the wheel with the
lower grip from spinning.
www.JagDocs.com
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL - V8 5.0L PETROL, V6 3.0L S/C PETROL, GTDi 2.0L PETROL AND
TDV6 3.0L DIESEL VEHICLES
NOTE: Petrol differential shown - diesel similar
Item Description
1 Cover
2 LH (left-hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
3 Filler/Level plug
4 Input flange
5 Front mounting points with insulator assemblies
6 Carrier
7 Rear mounting points
8 Breather
9 RH (right-hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
10 Magnetic drain plug
The open rear differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. The final drive ratios differ between engine
type, refer to 'Overview' for ratio details.
The cast iron casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal components.
The cover is sealed to the carrier with Loctite RTV sealant and secured with nine bolts. The cover and carrier have cast fins,
which assist rigidity and cooling. A breather cap is fitted to the top of the carrier.
The diesel open rear differential differs from the petrol variants in respect to the final drive ratio and the input flange which
connects the propshaft to the differential. The diesel input flange is larger to address driveline NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) boom inherent with the diesel engine.
Exploded View of Open Rear Differential
Item Description
1 Bolt (9 off)
2 Oil seal
3 Cover
4 Shim
5 Bearing assembly
6 Bolt (10 off)
7 Differential case
8 Bearing assembly
9 Oil seal
10 Oil slinger inner
11 Oil slinger outer
12 Input flange
13 Pinion nut
14 Collapsible spacer
15 Shim
16 Bearing assembly
17 Pinion shaft
18 LH mounting insulator inner
19 LH mounting insulator rubber
20 LH mounting insulator outer
21 Carrier
22 RH mounting insulator inner
23 RH mounting insulator rubber
24 RH mounting insulator outer
25 Oil seal
26 Drain plug
27 Vent
28 Breather cap
29 Shim
30 Bearing assembly
31 Drive gear
32 Shaft
33 Planet gear (2 off)
34 Thrust washer (2 off)
35 Sun gear (2 off)
36 Spacer (2 off)
37 Roll pin
38 Fill/Level plug
The open rear differential contains a quantity of oil for splash lubrication of the internal components. A magnetic drain plug is
installed in the bottom of the carrier and a filler/level plug is installed in the cover.
The open rear differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid pinion gear, and a crown wheel drive gear attached to a
differential carrier. The differential carrier houses two planet gears and two sun gears
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end, which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by the
pinion nut. The input flange has six threaded holes for the driveshaft attachment bolts. An oil seal is pressed into the carrier
to seal the input flange to the carrier. The pinion shaft has a hypoid gear at its inner end, which mates with the crown wheel
drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the differential carrier and secured with ten bolts. The differential carrier is mounted
on taper roller bearings located in machined bores in the carrier and the cover. Shims are installed behind the bearing cups to
apply the correct bearing preload and hypoid backlash.
The differential carrier has a through hole, which provides location for a cross shaft. The planet gears are installed on the cross
shaft, with thrust washers between the planet gears and the differential carrier. A roll pin locks the cross shaft to the
differential carrier.
The sun gears are located in pockets in the differential carrier and mesh with the planet gears. Belville washers are fitted
between the sun gears and the differential carrier and set the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun
gears. Each sun gear has a machined bore with internal splines and a machined groove. The splines transfer drive to the rear
drive halfshafts. The groove provides positive location for the snap ring fitted to the inboard end of the rear drive halfshafts.
Oil seals are installed in the carrier and the cover to seal the rear drive halfshafts.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Fixings that secure Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)(Heat Fuses/relays

path for module heatsink) Damaged, loose or corroded connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/incorrect Location,
stretched or taught
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00 General Information,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Check
1. Refer to: Specifications (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential,

Specifications).
3.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
4.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
Drain the differential lubricant.
Adjustment
1.
Clean the drain plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the

filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential
with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
Make sure the correct specification and quanity of oil

is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of

lubricant.
3.
Clean the filler plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Case
Special Tool(s)
204-477
Replacer - Mounting Bolts Final Drive To Subframe
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and
Installation).
3. Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
4. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00B Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not use the 5mm hole on the differential case

flange for the alignment mark.
Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
6. NOTES:
Make sure that the special tool is correctly installed to

the recess on the driveshaft.
Note the illustrated orientation of the special tool.

7. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the
surrounding components when inserting the special tool.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.
8.
All vehicles
9.
11.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 90 Nm

Torque: 192 Nm
3.
All vehicles
4. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the
differential case.
Torque: 73 Nm
5. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 73 Nm
6. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and
Installation).
8. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00B Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
9. Check and top-up the differential case.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Front Bushing
Special Tool(s)
204-274
Bush install and removal tool
204-275
204-335
204-601
Bush install tool
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
Removal

2. Refer to: Differential Case (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal

and Installation).
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the new bushes are installed in the

correct orientation.
Special Tool(s): 204-275, 204-601, 303-1121, 204-274
2. Refer to: Differential Case (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal

and Installation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
204-265
Remover/Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
204-266
Adapter for 204-265
204-267
Adapter for 204-265
204-269
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
205-053-03
Adapter, Drive Pinion Flange
Removal
2. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
3. Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01

Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion
shaft.
5.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion
shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion flange.
Loosen the nut 180 degrees, then tighten back to
the mark and note the torque value.
6. Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
7. Special Tool(s): 204-266, 204-265, 204-269

8. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Installation
2.
3. Special Tool(s): 204-267, 204-266, 204-265
4. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange has no

end float and is free to rotate.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03

Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
6. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Item Specification
Constant velocity (CV) grease Optimal LN 584 LO
Fill Capacities
Description Grams
Grease for inner CV joint - all vehicles 140
Grease for outer CV joint - all vehicles 125
Torque Specifcations
NOTE: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
204-269
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
308-005
Remover, Axle oil seal
308-621-1
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
308-621-2
Installer/Guide, Halfshaft Oil Seal
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Installation).
4. CAUTION: Discard the nut.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Special Tool(s): 205-491-1, 205-491, 204-269

12.
13.
Special Tool(s): 308-005, 100-012
14.
Installation
1. Clean the components mating faces.
2.
Special Tool(s): 308-621-1, 308-621-2, 100-012
3.
4. CAUTION: The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left

in place, until the halfshaft is fully installed.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the halfshaft

splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
6. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft circlip is

installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft gently to make
sure it is engaged.


12. Torque: 6 Nm
13. Install the brake disc.
14. Torque: 103 Nm
Installation).

17. Torque: 90 Nm
18. Torque: 150 Nm
19. Torque: 55 Nm
20. Torque: 300 Nm

21. Check and top-up the differential case.
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal
CAUTIONS:
3. Remove the rear halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear Drive
Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Use suitable protective covers to protect the halfshaft.
Using a suitable clamp, secure the rear halfshaft.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the inner constant velocity (CV)

joint is not separated from the halfshaft.
NOTE: Discard the retaining clip.

6. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not
drop out of the CV joint.
7. NOTE: Discard the retaining clip.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
2. NOTE: Install a new retaining clip.
3. CAUTIONS:
Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar specification.
Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out

of the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint,

removing as much of the old grease as possible.
Fill the CV joint with 40 grams of grease.

Fill the CV joint boot with 100 grams of grease.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV joint is not separated from the

halfshaft.
Make sure enough air is present in the CV boot.
NOTE: Install a new retaining clip.

5. NOTE: Install a new clip.
6. Remove the rear halfshaft from the clamp.
7. Install the rear halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear Drive
Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal
CAUTIONS:
3. For additional information, refer to: Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Boot (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: Discard the retaining clips.

5.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out of
the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint, removing as much of

the old grease as possible.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
Fill the CV joint with 50 grams of grease.

Fill the CV joint boot with 85 grams of grease.
2. CAUTION: Make sure enough air is present in the CV
boot.
NOTE: Install new retaining clips.
3. For additional information, refer to: Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Boot (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
Brake System - General Information -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake Lining and Disc Specifications
Item Specification
Front brake pad material nominal thickness 13 mm (0.51 in)
Front brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Rear brake pad material nominal thickness 10.8 mm (0.43 in)
Rear brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 355 mm (14.0 in)
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 380 mm (15.0 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 32 mm (1.26 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 36 mm (1.42 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 30 mm (1.18 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 34 mm (1.34 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 326 mm (12.8 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 376 mm (14.8 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 20 mm (0.79 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 26 mm (1.02 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 18 mm (0.72 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 24 mm (0.94 in)
Maximum front brake disc runout (installed) 0.075 mm ( 0.003 in)
Maximum rear brake disc runout (installed) 0.09 mm ( 0.004 in)
Maximum front hub face runout (installed) 0.015 mm ( 0.0006 in)
Maximum rear hub face runout (installed) 0.025 mm ( 0.0009 in)
Front brake sliding caliper single piston diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 60 mm (2.36 in)
Front brake sliding caliper double piston diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 42 mm (1.66 in)
Rear brake sliding caliper single piston diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)
Front brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Rear brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the braking system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual.
NOTE: Visually examine the front and rear wheel and tire assemblies for damage such as uneven wear patterns, tread
worn out or sidewall damage. Verify the tires are the same size, type and, where possible, same manufacturer. Replace the
damaged wheel or excessively worn tire. Wheels and tires must be cleared of any foreign matter and tire pressures adjusted to
the correct specification. If the tires exhibit uneven wear or feathering, the cause must be corrected. Check the steering and
suspension components for damage or wear and, if necessary, check and adjust front wheel alignment.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Brake master cylinder Parking brake actuator

Brake caliper piston(s) Parking brake module
Brake discs Parking brake switch
Wheel bearings Damaged or corroded wiring harness
Brake pads Brake master cylinder fluid level switch
Power brake booster
Brake pedal linkage
Brake booster vacuum hose
Tires
Debris
Road Test
Carry out a road test to compare actual vehicle braking performance with the performance standards expected by the driver.
The ability of the test driver to make valid comparisons and detect performance deficiencies will depend on experience.
The driver should have a thorough knowledge of brake system operation and accepted general performance guidelines to make
good comparisons and detect performance concerns.
An experienced brake technician will always establish a route that will be used for all brake diagnosis road tests. The roads
selected will be reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface does not allow the
tires to grip the road equally. Crowned roads should be avoided because of the large amount of weight shifted to the low set
of wheels on this type of road. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road surface variable can be
eliminated from the test results.
Before a road test, obtain a complete description of the customer concerns or suspected condition. From the description, the
technician's experience will allow the technician to match possible causes with symptoms. Certain components will be tagged
as possible suspects while others will be eliminated by the evidence. More importantly, the customer description can reveal
unsafe conditions which should be checked or corrected before the road test. The description will also help form the basic
approach to the road test by narrowing the concern to specific components, vehicle speed or conditions.
Begin the road test with a general brake performance check. Keeping the description of the concern in mind, test the brakes at
different vehicle speeds using both light and heavy pedal pressure. To determine if the concern is in the front or rear braking
system, use the brake pedal and then use the parking brake control. If the condition (pull, vibration, pulsation) occurs only
with the parking brake, the concern is in the rear brake system.
If the concern becomes evident during this check, verify it fits the description given before the road test. If the concern is not
evident, attempt to duplicate the condition using the information from the description.
If a concern exists, use the Symptom Chart in order to isolate it to a specific sub-system and condition description. From this
description, a list of possible sources can be used to further narrow the cause to a specific component or condition.
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Brakes noisy GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Brake pads
Brake discs
Vibration when brakes GO to Pinpoint Test B.

are applied Wheels/tires out of balance
Wheel hub nuts loose
Brake caliper mounting bolts
loose
Brake pads
Foreign material/scratches
/corrosion on brake disc contact
surfaces
Excessive brake disc thickness
variation
Excessive brake disc runout
Wheel bearing wear or failure
Suspension bushing wear or
failure
Steering bushing wear or failure
The brakes pull or drift GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Tire pressures/wear
Brake calipers
Brake pads
Brake discs
Wheel alignment adjustment
Wheel bearing
Suspension bushings and ball
joints
The pedal feels spongy GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake booster/master cylinder
Brake pads
The pedal goes down GO to Pinpoint Test E.

fast Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake pads
The pedal goes down GO to Pinpoint Test F.

slowly Air in brake hydraulic system
Excessive brake pedal GO to Pinpoint Test G.

effort required Brake pads
Brake booster
Brake lockup during GO to Pinpoint Test H.

light brake pedal force Brake pads
Brake calipers
Brakes drag GO to Pinpoint Test I.

Parking brake control
applied/malfunction
Seized parking brake cables
Seized brake caliper slide pins
Seized brake caliper
Brake booster
Pedal gear
Excessive/Erratic brake GO to Pinpoint Test J.

pedal travel Hydraulic system
Brake pads
Brake discs
Hub and bearing assembly
The red brake warning Fill the system to specification. Check for leaks. Install a new
indicator is always on Fluid level brake master cylinder fluid reservoir as required. Refer to the
Brake master cylinder fluid level relevant section in the workshop manual for parking brake
sensor control and circuit tests.
Parking brake control
Electrical circuit
Slow or incomplete GO to Pinpoint Test K.
brake pedal return Brake pedal binding
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) (100-00 General Information,
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : BRAKES NOISY

A1: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect the condition of the front and rear brake pads. Check for damage to any anti-squeal shims.
Are the brake pads OK?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Clean/install new front and rear brake pads as required. Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
A2: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Inspect the brake discs for excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation.
Does excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation exist?
Yes
Install new front and rear brake discs and brake pads as required. Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
No
No action required, vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST B : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED
CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) without applying brakes.
Is the vibration present?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section in the workshop manual for noise vibration and harshness tests.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK FOR BRAKE VIBRATION
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check the brake caliper mounting bolts and wheel hub nuts and tighten to specification as required. Check
the balance of all road wheels and tires and repair as required. Check the brake discs for excessive wear,
runout, thickness variation or cracks. Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. GO to B3.
No
B3: IS VIBRATION STILL PRESENT UNDER BRAKE APPLICATION?
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check for wear or failure of steering gear bushings. Check for wear or failure of steering gear ball joints.
Check for wear or failure of front wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Check for wear or
failure of rear wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Refer to relevant section in workshop
manual and install new components as required.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : THE BRAKES PULL OR DRIFT
CONDITIONS
C1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Does the vehicle pull or drift?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: INSPECT TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE
1 Check for excessive tire wear or incorrect pressures.
Are the tires at the correct pressure and in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Adjust the tire pressures or install new tires if excessively worn. Re-test the system for normal
operation.
C3: CHECK CALIPERS
1 Check the disc brake caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Rectify sticking pins and install new brake calipers as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
C4: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Check the brake discs for excessive damage, thickness variation or runout.
Does excessive damage or runout exist?
Yes
Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
C5: INSPECT THE FRONT HUB AND WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front hub and wheel bearing assembly.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
Install new wheel bearings as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
C6: CHECK SUSPENSION BUSHINGS AND BALL JOINTS.
1 Check all suspension bushings and ball joints.
Are the suspension bushings and ball joints OK?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Install new front suspension bushings and ball joints as required. Install new rear suspension bushings
and ball joints as required. Refer to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
C7: CHECK VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
1 Check the vehicle alignment.
Is the alignment within specification?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
Adjust the alignment as required.
PINPOINT TEST D : THE PEDAL FEELS SPONGY
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FOR SPONGY PEDAL (ENGINE OFF)
1 Check for a firm brake pedal.
Is the brake pedal effort and brake pedal travel normal?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE OFF)
1 Pump the brake pedal 10 times and hold on the final application.
Does the brake pedal feel firm on final application?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Bleed the brake system.
D3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE ON)
1 With engine running at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to recover.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
Check the vacuum to brake booster.
D4: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
Bleed the brake system. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
Check for leaking brake system and rectify as required. Add fluid and bleed the brake system. Re-test
the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST E : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN FAST
CONDITIONS
E1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Yes
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM
1 Pump the brake pedal rapidly (five times).
Does the brake pedal travel build up and then hold?
Yes
Bleed the brake system. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Is there a leak present?
Yes
Repair as necessary, add fluid and bleed brake system. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN SLOWLY
CONDITIONS
F1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE - CHECK BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
1 Check if the condition occurs during actual stopping application by applying the brake pedal while the
vehicle is moving.
Does the condition occur when the vehicle is moving?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Are there any external brake system leaks?
Yes
Rectify as necessary. Add fluid and bleed the brake system. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to F3.
F3: CARRY OUT A BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BYPASS TEST
1 Test for brake master cylinder bypass condition. Refer to Brake master cylinder component test in this
section.
Has a concern been identified?
Yes
Install a new brake master cylinder, add fluid and bleed the brake system. Re-test the system for
normal operation.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : EXCESSIVE BRAKE PEDAL EFFORT
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK BRAKE PADS
1 Check the brake pads for wear, contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VACUUM
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster.
2 Connect a vacuum/pressure tester to the vacuum hose.
3 Run the engine at normal operating temperature.
4 Record the vacuum reading.
Is the reading 40.5 kPa (12 in-Hg) or greater?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
Locate and rectify the source of low vacuum. Re-test the system for normal operation.
G3: INSPECT SYSTEM
1 Switch the engine off.
2 Reconnect the vacuum hose.
3 Inspect the brake booster, rubber grommet, and all vacuum plumbing for cracks, holes, damaged
connections, or missing clamps.
4 Pump the brake pedal several times to exhaust the vacuum. Push down on the brake pedal and hold.
Does the brake pedal move down when the engine is started?
Yes
Vacuum system is OK.
No
GO to G4.
G4: CHECK POWER BRAKE BOOSTER VALVE
1 Check the brake booster valve. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section.
Is the power brake booster valve OK?
Yes
Check the brake booster. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section. Install a new brake booster as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
Install a new brake booster valve. Re-test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST H : BRAKE LOCKUP DURING LIGHT BRAKE PEDAL FORCE

H1: TEST BRAKE LOCKUP
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal lightly.
Do the brakes lockup?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
H2: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect brake pads for contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to H3.
H3: INSPECT BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Inspect brake calipers for binding, leaking or sticking.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake calipers as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
PINPOINT TEST I : BRAKES DRAG
CONDITIONS
I1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes.
Are the brakes functioning correctly?
Yes
No
GO to I2.
I2: CHECK BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Check the front and rear calipers pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Inspect the brake calipers and parking brake cables. Install new components as required. Re-test the
system for normal operation.
No
GO to I3.
I3: CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER
1 Check the brake booster connecting rod alignment and travel.
Is the connecting rod OK?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
Install a new brake booster as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST J : EXCESSIVE/ERRATIC BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
CONDITIONS
J1: TEST ON ROUGH ROAD
1 Road test the vehicle on rough road conditions.
2 Apply the brakes slowly.
Yes
No
GO to J2.
J2: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
Check brake master cylinder reservoir sealing points. For additional information, refer to Brake master
cylinder component test in this section. Add brake fluid and bleed the brake system. Re-test the system
for normal operation.
J3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE
1 Run engine at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to replenish.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to J4.
No
Check the vacuum to the brake booster.
J4: CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front wheel bearing assembly.
Are the front wheel bearings loose/damaged?
Yes
Tighten to specification or install a new front wheel bearing as required. Re-test the system for normal
operation.
No
Check the front brake discs for thickness variances.
PINPOINT TEST K : SLOW OR INCOMPLETE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
CONDITIONS
K1: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
1 Run the engine at idle while making several brake applications.
2 Pull the brake pedal rearward with approximately 44.5 N (10lb) force.
3 Release the brake pedal and measure the distance to the toe board.
4 Make a hard brake application.
5 Release the brake pedal and measure the brake pedal to toe board distance. The brake pedal should
return to its original position.
Does the brake pedal return to its original position?
Yes
No
GO to K2.
K2: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL BINDING
1 Disconnect the brake booster from the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal to ensure free operation.
Is the brake pedal operating freely?
Yes
Install a new brake booster as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
Repair or install new brake pedal. Re-test the system for normal operation.
Brake System - General Information - Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
Check
1. Remove the wheel and tire.

2. Install all wheel nuts and tighten equally to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).

Make sure that the brake disc is fully seated against the hub
face.
3. Install a dial test indicator gauge and holding fixture to a suitable

mounting point.
4. NOTE: If the runout is outside specification, check the hub face

runout.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the inner and outer faces of the
brake disc.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc
Brake, Specifications).
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the disc 10 mm (0.4 in)
from the outer edge.
2. Slowly rotate the hub/disc assembly. Note the reading.
5. If a front hub runout check is required, remove the front brake disc
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard
Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
6. If a rear hub runout check is required, remove the rear brake disc.
Performance Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake,
7. NOTE: The hub surface should be free from dirt and corrosion. Do
not use abrasive cloths to clean hub faces.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the hub face runout.
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the mounting tube
between the stud and the chamfer.
2. Slowly rotate the hub and note the runout. For additional
information, refer to the specification chart.
If the front hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
If the rear hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
8. If the front hub face is within specification, install a new brake disc.
Performance Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation)
/
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake,
If the rear hub face is within specification, install a new disc.
Performance Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake,

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
All vehicles
2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are no signs of
a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected, investigate and
rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the brakes.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder cover.

Remove the 4 clips.
4. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter

the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct
specification from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of
brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean
the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.

5. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
Left-hand drive vehicles
6. Install the bleed tube to the right hand rear brake caliper
bleed screw and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in
a bleed jar, containing a small quantity of approved brake
fluid.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
www.JagDocs.com
Right-hand drive vehicles
7. Install the bleed tube to the left hand rear brake caliper
bleed screw and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in
a bleed jar, containing a small quantity of approved brake
fluid.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
All vehicles
8. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a

turn.
9. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new,
clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: If the bleed tube used, does not have a one way valve the
bleed screw will need to be closed before the brake pedal is returned to
the rest position. Then opened again and the procedure repeated for
each pedal application.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through its full stroke
and allow it to return to the rest position. Repeat the procedure until
brake fluid, clean and air-free flows into the bleed jar.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after
bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
Tighten the rear bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Tighten the front bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
12. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the sequence below.
13. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the sequence below.
All vehicles
15. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
16. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
17. Install the brake master cylinder cover.

Carefully secure the clips.
18. On completion, road test the vehicle and check the brake pedal
operation. The pedal travel should be short with a firm feel.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
1. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential

information is always correct.
RH illustration shown, LH similar
All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
3. Mount the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown with tool
100-053.
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.

5. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge of the
disc.
Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one complete
revolution to measure disc runout.
6. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.

7. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge of the
disc.
8. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.075 mm.
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange and
bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures).
9. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
10. Install the wheel.

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as shown
above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
11. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.

12. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 90 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On
General Procedures
1. NOTES:

All measurements must taken be with the wheel installed.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
3. Modify tool 100-053 with an M8 bolt and nut as shown.
4. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge on the tool
as shown.
5. Securely mount the DTI on the bottom calliper mounting
bolt, a spacer washer maybe required under the tool.
6. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge of the

disc.
7. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.
8. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge of the

disc.
9. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.09 mm.
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange and
bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (204-00 Suspension
10. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
11. Install the wheel.
Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as shown
to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
12. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.
13. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 103 Nm.

Front Disc Brake -

Brake caliper anchor plate retaining bolts 115 85 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 58 43 -
Brake hose retaining bolt 42 31 -
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.
NOTES:

2. Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.
Installation).

4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to
prevent contamination.
NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the

special tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in
) below the rest position.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.
5. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate

procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of the

spring until either side is released.
6. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is damaged
a new brake caliper must be installed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on

the brake hose.
7.
Release the clip.
8.
Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake components.

Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing,

the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
2.
Apply grease C2C-33568 to the areas indicated.
3.
4.
5.
Torque: 58 Nm
6.
Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle spring
under the bottom anchor bracket of the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the correct
position, under the upper anchor bracket, whilst
retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central locating tag
into the locked position.
7.
Torque: 42 Nm

9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the road wheels are in the straight

ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted and is

correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc
Brake, Removal and Installation).
3. Torque: 115 Nm
4. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.
Installation

Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
with water.
NOTES:
The brake pad wear warning indicator sensor must be replaced each time the brake pads are serviced.

2. Remove the front road wheels.
Installation).




the brake hose.
6.
Release the clip.
7.
9.
Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake components.

Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing,

the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
to overflow.
NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.

3.
Apply grease C2C-33568 to the areas indicated.
4.
5.
6.
Torque: 58 Nm
7.
Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle spring
under the bottom anchor bracket of the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the correct
position, under the upper anchor bracket, whilst
retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central locating tag
into the locked position.

9. CAUTIONS:

ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to

Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted and is

correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
10.
11. Install the front road wheels.
Installation).
12. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid if necessary.
Rear Disc Brake -
Brake hose to brake caliper 42 31 -
Brake caliper anchor plate 103 76 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 28 21 -
Brake caliper logo badge retaining bolts - Vehicles with high performance brakes 10 7 -
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.

Installation).
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and
Actuation, General Procedures).

5. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected

area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the

special tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in
) below the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm
6.
Release the 2 clips.
7.
Release the clip.


the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm
9.
Installation

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc
Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
Torque: 103 Nm
4. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Installation

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
206-081
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service procedures,
could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
with water.
NOTES:
Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.
The brake pad wear warning indicator sensor must be replaced each time the brake pads are serviced.

2. Remove the rear road wheels.
Installation).
5.
Release the 2 clips.
6.
Release the clip.


the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm
8.
9.
Using the special tools, fully retract the brake
caliper piston.
11.
Installation
1. NOTES:
The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang must be

installed to the sensor prior to installation to the brake
pad.
RH side only.
3.
4. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid if necessary.
Parking Brake and Actuation -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Parking brake actuator - bolts 20 15 -
Parking brake module - nuts 4 3 35
Parking brake switch- bolts 6 4 53
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Component Location
Item Description
1 EPB (electronic parking brake) module
2 Parking brake actuator
3 Primary cable assembly
4 LH (left-hand) cable assembly
5 Equalizer
6 RH (right-hand) cable assembly
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Parking brake warning indicator (all except NAS (North American Specification) vehicles)
2 Parking brake warning indicator (NAS vehicles)
3 Stoplamp switch
4 Parking brake switch
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Overview
OVERVIEW
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates on the rear brake calipers. Cables are connected to the rear
brake calipers, and act directly on the same pistons used for normal, hydraulic rear brake actuation.
The parking brake is controlled by the EPB (electronic parking brake) module. In response to commands from the driver through
the parking brake switch, the EPB module controls operation of the parking brake actuator. The actuator adjusts the tension of
the brake cables to apply and release the rear brake calipers. Features of the parking brake include:
Manual apply.
Manual release.
Automatic release.
A service routine to release cable tension, using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, must be performed prior to working on
the EPB system. This decouples the components, to prevent damage to the actuator, and inhibits all parking brake switch
functions. There is also a procedure for the emergency release of cable tension.
Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - System Operation and
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box)
5 EPB (electronic parking brake) module
6 Stoplamp switch
8 Parking brake switch
9 Parking brake actuator
10 EJB (engine junction box)
System Operation
STATIC APPLY
The EPB module receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module on the high speed CAN bus. If
the parking brake switch is pulled to the apply position and vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), the EPB module will
instigate the static apply mode and drive the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
The EPB module monitors the current drawn by the actuator and compares this to information held within its configuration
software to determine when full braking force has been applied.
DYNAMIC APPLY
There are two dynamic apply modes; low speed dynamic and high speed dynamic. The low speed dynamic mode operates at
speeds between 2 and 20 mph (3 and 32 km/h). The high speed dynamic mode operates at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the apply position and vehicle speed is within the low speed dynamic range, the EPB
module drives the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the apply position and vehicle speed is within the high speed dynamic range, the
EPB module will apply braking force to the rear wheels at a slower rate until full braking load is reached or the switch is
released. The rate with which braking force is applied is controlled by the EPB module, which monitors both current drawn by
the actuator and positional information from the actuator hall sensor and compares this to information held within its
configuration software.
DRIVE AWAY RELEASE

The EPB module will initiate a drive away release function and automatically release the parking brake if the following
conditions are detected:
The engine is running.

Drive or reverse is selected.
Positive throttle movement is detected.
The EPB module receives messages of gear selector position and throttle angle over the high speed CAN bus from the TCM
(transmission control module) and the ECM (engine control module) respectively.
RELEASE FROM PARK

The EPB module will initiate the release from park function and automatically release the parking brake if the gear selector is
moved from P (park).
REPAIRS
Before carrying out any work on the parking brake system, use Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to perform the service
routine to release cable tension. The routine can be found in the vehicle configuration area, under the set-up and configuration
menu. After any work has been carried out on the parking brake, the system will require resetting.
CAUTION: Do not use the emergency release tool to allow work to be carried out on the parking brake. Work can only be
carried out on the parking brake system after the service routine to release cable tension has been run.
RESETTING
If the electrical supply is disconnected from the EPB module, the position memory will be lost. On battery re-connection and
ignition on, Apply Foot And Park Brake will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center indicating the parking brake
requires resetting.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
OPERATING VOLTAGES
The EPB module will only operate the actuator if the power supply from the battery is between 9 and 16 V. At any voltage
within this range, the actuator is able to fully tighten and release the brake cables. If the power supply falls outside of the
range, a fault code is stored in the EPB module and can be retrieved using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
The parking brake switch is mounted in the floor console, rearward of the rotary gear selector. The switch has three states:
Apply: When the switch is pulled up to apply the parking brake.

Release: When the switch is pushed down to release the parking brake.
Neutral: The central default position. The switch returns to this position regardless of parking brake status.
The parking brake switch contains a pair of micro-switches for both the apply and release actions. The EPB module provides an
individual hardwired electrical feed to each of the four micro-switches plus a single ground connection, allowing it to constantly
monitor switch status.
EPB MODULE
The EPB module is mounted in the luggage compartment on the RH (right-hand) side quarter panel and is connected to the
vehicles electrical wiring by two multiplugs. The EPB module is connected to the high speed CAN bus, allowing it to
communicate with other vehicle systems.
The EPB module monitors the condition of the parking brake switch through a series of hardwired electrical connections and
controls operation of the parking brake actuator accordingly.
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR
The parking brake actuator is mounted on the back of the rear subframe. Operation of the actuator is controlled by the EPB
module in response to parking brake switch requests from the driver.
A Hall sensor is located within the actuator and provides positional information back to the EPB module. The principle function
of the Hall sensor is to ensure the actuator fully releases the parking brake when a static release request is made. The signal
provided by the Hall sensor is compared to configuration information contained within the EPB module software to determine
when a full release has been carried out.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal mounting bracket. One of the prerequisites for releasing the parking brake
is that the foot brake is applied. The EPB module is able to determine the position of the foot brake by monitoring the status
of the stoplamp switch via a hardwired electrical connection.
The stoplamp switch also supplies status signals to the CJB and the ECM.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
The instrument cluster contains a red warning indicator for the EPB. The warning indicator is permanently illuminated while the
EPB is applied. If the warning indicator flashes, the EPB has an electrical fault.
If there is an EPB fault, the message Cannot Apply Park Brake or Park Brake Fault appears in the instrument cluster message
center. If the vehicle is moving with the parking brake applied, the message Caution! Park Brake Applied appears in the
message center accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster.
Refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
Parking Brake Calibration

The parking brake system must be calibrated whenever the battery has been disconnected or has been in a state of discharge,
or repairs have been carried out to the rear service or parking brake system.
NOTE: If new rear brake pads have been installed, pressure must be applied to the brake pedal a minimum of five times
prior to calibration of the parking brake system.
To calibrate the parking brake system:
1. Place gear selector lever in 'P' Park position.
2. Release parking brake cable tension to service position.
3. Set the ignition status to 'ON'.
4. Apply and hold the footbrake then pull up the parking brake switch.
5. To release the parking brake, apply and hold the footbrake then release and press down the parking brake switch.
Visual Inspection
Parking brake cable Fuse(s)

Parking brake actuator Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Brake caliper Check for bent/corroded pins
Brake pads Parking brake switch
Stabilizer bar drop link caps Parking brake module
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and proceed to
the DTC Index , alternatively, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart

The parking brake will not
engage or release (with no Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage.
Service brake incorrectly adjusted following Inspect the rear brake linings for
lining change wear.
Caliper malfunction Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration
procedure.
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and
operation.
The parking brake will not
engage or release (with Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage.
Actuator malfunction Inspect the rear brake linings for
Caliper malfunction wear.
Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration
procedure.
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and
operation.
No communication with the

parking brake module Fuse Check fuses
Module off Bus Ensure battery is fully charged
CAN network error and in serviceable condition.
Parking brake module fault Check battery voltage at parking
brake module.
Check CAN network using
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
'Park brake Fault' displayed on

message centre with Parking brake system fault Check the parking brake module
associated warning lamps for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Index (100-00,
Brakes drag
Parking brake not re-calibrated after battery has Re-calibrate parking brake, refer
been disconnected or has been in a state of to the calibration procedure.
discharge, or repairs have been carried out to Check the service brake for
the rear service or parking brake system correct operation.
Service brake system fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Electric parking brake release tool 206-082. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
Electric parking brake release tool link lead 206-082-01. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
1. WARNING: Always use Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to

release the cable tension, when carrying out repair operations on the
electric park brake which require cable tension release.
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to release the

electric parking brake cable tension.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. WARNING: The procedure below should only be used in emergency

situations, to release the electric park brake. All calibration of the
parking brake system will be lost, and the parking brake will need to be
re-calibrated to function correctly.
NOTE: The tools shown must only be used in the event of an

emergency.
Remove the RH loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may result
in a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) being generated.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the parking

brake module, in the sequence illustrated.

Connect the special tool to the parking brake module.
5. Release the parking brake cable tension.

An audible 'click', signals complete parking brake cable
tension release.
6. Remove the special tool and carry out any necessary repairs on the
system.
7. Connect the electrical connectors in the sequence shown.
8. Install the RH loadspace trim panel.

9. WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment is not
available disconnect the battery for approximatly 30 seconds , the
vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out the calibration procedure
as per the vehicle hand book on re-connection.
Calibrate the electric park brake.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - GTDi 2.0L Petrol (502-00, Removal and
Installation).
4.
5. NOTE: Note the fitted position.

6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH
Removal
Installation).
4.

6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect

(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
2. For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05

3.
4. TORQUE: 8 Nm
5.
6. TORQUE: 4 Nm
Installation
2. WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment is not
available disconnect the battery for approximatly 30 seconds , the
Re-calibrate the electric park brake.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Release Actuator
Removal
Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
2. CAUTION: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic system. If the Jaguar approved diagnostic system is not
available disconnect the battery for approximately 30 seconds, the
Calibrate the electric parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic tool.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
1. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of

the component.
2. Torque: 4 Nm
3.
the component.
5. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation

Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4
Brake fluid Shell ESL Super Dot 4
Brake master cylinder retaining nuts. 25 18 -
Brake fluid tubes to master cylinder 17 13 -
Brake fluid reservoir retaining bolt 4 - 35
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Overview
Overview
The hydraulic brake system is a diagonally split dual line system. The system consists of a brake pedal, vacuum brake booster,
brake master cylinder assembly, HCU (hydraulic control unit), hydraulic pipes and brake hoses.
Brake pipes from the master cylinder supply pressure to the brake calipers at the four corners of the vehicle via the HCU.
Braided steel hoses are used to connect the brake pipes to the front and rear brake calipers.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - System Operation
and Component Description
System Operation
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the master cylinder primary piston along the
bore of the housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary spring,
overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial movement of the
pistons away from the piston stops closes the primary and secondary center valves in the master cylinder. Further movement of
the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary chambers and thus the brake circuits. The fluid in the
chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted through the inlet ports
between the chambers and the reservoir.
Pressurized fluid enters the HCU (hydraulic control unit), which is mounted on the front of the ABS (anti-lock brake system)
module. The HCU modulates the supply of pressurized fluid to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
Brake Master Cylinder and Fluid Reservoir
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) installation shown, RHD (right-hand drive) installation is opposite hand.
The brake booster and master cylinder assembly is fitted in the engine compartment. The brake master cylinder housing
consists of two hydraulic chambers containing two pistons in tandem. The primary piston (adjacent to the brake booster)
produces pressure for the primary braking circuit and this pressure acts on the secondary piston and hence creates pressure in
the secondary circuit. A brake fluid reservoir is mounted on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid to the
brake system. The reservoir cap is fitted with a brake fluid level switch.
Brake Fluid Level Switch

The brake fluid level switch is located in the fluid reservoir and is hardwired to the instrument cluster. When the level of fluid
in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level, the switch contacts close and provide a signal feed back to the instrument
cluster. On receipt of the signal, the brake fluid red warning indicator will illuminate and 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' will be displayed
in the message center.
ABS Module
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) front brake
2 RH (right-hand) rear brake
3 LH rear brake
4 RH front brake
5 Primary circuit inlet port
6 Secondary circuit inlet port
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The HCU is a four channel unit
that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within the HCU.
The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the RH front and LH rear brakes. The secondary circuit in the HCU
has separate outlet ports to the LH front and RH rear brakes.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU are a single unit and must not be separated.
HCU Schematic Diagram
Item Description
1 Brake booster
2 Primary circuit
3 Secondary circuit
4 HCU
5 Pulsation damper
6 Pulsation damper
7 Separation valve
8 Damping chambers
9 Separation valve
10 Shuttle valve
11 Hydraulic pumps
12 Motor
13 Shuttle valve
14 Pressure sensor - all vehicles
15 Low pressure accumulator
16 Check valve
17 Low pressure accumulator
18 Inlet valve
19 Inlet valve
20 Inlet valve
21 Inlet valve
22 Outlet valve
23 Outlet valve
24 Outlet valve
25 Outlet valve
26 Pressure sensors - vehicles fitted with adaptive speed control only
27 RH front brake
28 LH rear brake
29 RH rear brake
30 LH front brake
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
2. For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End
Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
3. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter

the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct
specification from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of
brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

affected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water.
Using a suitable suction device drain the brake fluid

resrvoir.
Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap,
remove the cap.
4.
5. TORQUE: 4 Nm
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
Install the new seals.
Installation
2. Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00
Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal
All vehicles
2. CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06

Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
3. TORQUE: 4 Nm
All vehicles
4.
5. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If

spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.
TORQUE: 17 Nm
6. TORQUE: 25 Nm
Install new retaining nuts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the master cylinder is correctly

aligned. Failure to make sure the master cylinder is correctly
aligned to the brake booster actuation rod may cause
component damage or poor brake performance.
Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.

Install a new O-ring seal.
3. For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00

Power Brake Actuation -
Brake booster retaining nuts - all vehicles 25 18 -
Exhaust gas recirculation valve coolant pipe - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 9 - 80
Brake vacuum pump retaining nut - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump threaded stud - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 13 10 -
Brake vacuum pump retaining bolts - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump retaining bolts - vehicles with 5.0L 12 9 -
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
NOTES:
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
All vehicles

2. For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06

Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
3. For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH

4. For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH

All vehicles
5. For additional information, refer to: Speed Control Deactivator Switch

(310-03 Speed Control, Removal and Installation).
6. For additional information, refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering

Column, Removal and Installation).
7. For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Flexible Coupling

(211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
8. TORQUE: 3 Nm
9. TORQUE: 25 Nm
10.
11. NOTE: Replace the brake booster/pedal box gasket.
Discard the gasket.

Installation

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
2. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
6. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

blanking caps.
7. Torque: 9 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Torque: 9 Nm
9. Torque: 23 Nm
10. Torque: 13 Nm
11. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 23 Nm
Installation
1. NOTES:
Install a new gasket.
Apply silicone gasket sealant or equivalent meeting

Jaguar specification.
The application of sealant must be 10 mm square in

two places. Install the brake vacuum pump immediately
after applying the sealant.
Make sure that the drive coupling is aligned with

camshaft coupling.
The brake vacuum pump should be fitted directly to

the engine without smearing the sealant.

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake tube to hydraulic control unit (HCU) 17 13 –
Rear wheel speed sensor retaining bolt 6 – 53
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer retaining nuts 7 – 62
HCU retaining nuts 8 – 71
Steering wheel rotation sensor retaining screws 4 – 35
Steering column lower shroud retaining screws 1 – 9
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installations shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installations similar.
Item Description
2 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
3 RH rear wheel speed sensor
4 LH (left-hand) rear wheel speed sensor
5 LH front wheel speed sensor
Item Description
1 DSC (dynamic stability control) OFF warning indicator
2 Brake warning indicators (all except NAS)
3 Brake warning indicators (NAS)
4 ABS warning indicator (all except NAS)
5 ABS warning indicator (NAS)
6 DSC warning indicator
7 Steering angle sensor
8 Stoplamp switch
9 DSC switch
10 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
Overview
OVERVIEW
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) and DSC (dynamic stability control) system features a Bosch modulator, which is an
integrated four-channel HCU (hydraulic control unit) and ABS module. The unit is located in the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger side, and is installed in the brake hydraulic circuit between the brake master cylinder and the four brake
calipers.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other vehicle
system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to correct the
vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may also request the ECM
(engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the ABS and DSC system comprises the following components:
DSC switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
Steering angle sensor.
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
Stoplamp switch.
Instrument cluster warning indicators.
Integrated ABS module and HCU.
Two variants of ABS module are available, Bosch ESP®8.1 and Bosch ESP®plus8.1. The Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system is fitted to
vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control) and incorporates a feature known as electronic brake prefill.
Electronic brake prefill, senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure build-up of approximately 3
to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in2) in anticipation of the brakes being applied. This application produces a quicker brake pedal
response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. When the ECM detects rapid throttle lift off it signals the ABS
module which controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
NOTE: All vehicles with ACC are supported by the Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system.
The ABS provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the vehicle or aid the driver:
ABS.
DSC, including Trac DSC.
CBC (corner brake control).
EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
ETC (electronic traction control).
EBA (emergency brake assist).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
EUC (enhanced understeer control).
Electronic brake prefill (vehicles with ACC only).
All the brake functions listed are automatically active when the ignition is in power mode and the engine is running. The DSC
system can be selected to off using the DSC switch.
WARNING: Although the vehicle is fitted with DSC, it remains the drivers responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; V = Private CAN bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (250 A megafuse to EJB (engine junction box); 50 A midifuse to CJB (central junction box))
3 EJB
4 LH (left-hand) front wheel speed sensor
5 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
7 LH rear wheel speed sensor
8 RH rear wheel speed sensor
10 Diagnostic socket
13 Stoplamp switch
15 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
16 CJB
System Operation
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. The wheels are
prevented from locking to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

DSC (dynamic stability control) uses brakes and powertrain torque control to assist in maintaining the yaw stability of the
vehicle. While the ignition is energized the DSC function is permanently enabled, unless selected off using the DSC switch.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in under-steer or over-steer situations that may occur in a bend. The
ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, steering input and individual wheel speeds, then
selectively applies individual or multiple brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce under-steer or
over-steer conditions.
In general:
In an under-steer situation initially powertrain torque is controlled then the inner rear wheel is braked to counteract the
yaw movement of the front axle towards the outer edge of the bend.
In an over-steer situation initially powertrain torque is controlled then the outer front wheel is braked to counteract the
yaw movement of the rear axle towards the outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor, and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data. Whenever
the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate control strategy.
The following interactions occur in an intervention situation:
High speed CAN signal to the ECM, to reduce engine torque.

Application of braking to the appropriate corner of the vehicle.
TRAC DSC
Trac DSC is an alternative setting of DSC with reduced system interventions. With Trac DSC engaged, traction may be
somewhat increased, although stability may be reduced compared to normal DSC.
WARNING: Trac DSC is intended for use only on dry tarmac by suitably experienced drivers and should not be selected for
other surfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill and training to operate the vehicle safely with the Trac DSC function engaged.
The less restrictive Trac DSC setting may be preferred, for example, by expert drivers engaged in high performance driving on
dry tarmac surfaces such as tracks and circuits.
Briefly pressing and releasing the DSC switch will switch the vehicle between normal DSC settings and Trac DSC settings. To
confirm which setting has been selected, either DSC ON or Trac DSC will be temporarily displayed in the instrument cluster
message center.
When Trac DSC is selected, the amber DSC OFF warning indicator located in the instrument cluster will illuminate. The DSC OFF
warning indicator will remain illuminated while Trac DSC is selected. If the DSC system is activated the DSC warning indicator
will flash.
NOTE: If speed control is engaged it will automatically disengage if DSC or Trac DSC becomes active.
CORNER BRAKE CONTROL

CBC (corner brake control) influences the brake pressures, below and within DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing
moment produced when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the
vehicle.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the
weight of the vehicle transfers forwards, reducing the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface.
This may cause the rear wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure to the rear brakes, below the point where ABS is
normally invoked.
NOTE: Only the rear brakes are controlled by the EBD function.
ELECTRONIC TRACTION CONTROL

ETC (electronic traction control) attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque and/or applying the brake of a
spinning wheel until traction is regained.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal is
not pressed. The ABS module sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request a reduction in engine torque. The
brake is then applied to the spinning wheel, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non-spinning wheel through
the drive line. If necessary, When the DSC function is selected off using the DSC switch, the braking and engine torque
reduction features are both disabled.
EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST

EBA (emergency brake assist) assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied
braking effort. The ABS module invokes EBA when:
The brake pedal is rapidly pressed.

The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU (hydraulic control unit). With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure
exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
ENGINE DRAG-TORQUE CONTROL

EDC (engine drag-torque control) prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the Jaguar sequential shift function on automatic transmission vehicles.
When the ABS module detects the onset of rear wheel drag slip without the brakes being applied, the ABS module signals the
ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque to increase the rear axle speed to match
vehicle reference speed.
UNDERSTEER CONTROL
Understeer Logic Control is a proactive system which monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw
rate and lateral acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, the ABS module signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request
a decrease in engine torque. If required the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the inside rear wheel
to correct the understeer. If the vehicle continues to understeer, EUC (enhanced understeer control) is activated and this
function uses multiple brakes (maximum of three brakes) to rapidly reduce the vehicle speed.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE PREFILL (VEHICLES WITH ACC ONLY)

Electronic brake prefill (Bosch ESP®plus8.1), senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure
build-up of approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in2) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control).
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it
controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SWITCH
The DSC switch is mounted in the floor console adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector.
DSC becomes active whenever the engine is running. A momentary press of the switch allows the driver to toggle between the
standard DSC settings and the optimized Trac DSC settings. The message Trac DSC or DSC ON will temporarily be displayed in
the instrument cluster message center. The amber DSC OFF warning indicator in the instrument cluster remains illuminated
while Trac DSC is selected.
The DSC can be switched off by pressing and holding the switch for more than 10 seconds. The message DSC OFF will then be
displayed in the instrument cluster message center, to confirm DSC has been switched off, and the amber DSC OFF warning
indicator in the instrument cluster will remain illuminated. The system can be switched back on again by simply pressing and
releasing the switch. The message 'DSC ON' will then temporarily appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm
the system is on.
NOTE: Switch requests may be delayed if the switch is pressed while a DSC operation is taking place. The switch request
will be displayed in the instrument cluster but the ABS module will not initiate any stability changes until it is safe to do so.
If a fault is detected with the DSC switch, the ABS module defaults to the 'DSC ON' setting and any switch requests are
ignored.
WARNING: It is recommended that when using snow chains, Trac DSC is switched off and JaguarDrive control winter mode
is selected.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS
Item Description
1 Front wheel speed sensor
2 Rear wheel speed sensor
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from
each road wheel. The head of each front wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder ring incorporated into
the inboard seal of the wheel bearing. The head of each rear wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder
ring incorporated into the rear wheel bearing assembly. Each encoder ring contains 46 north and south poles. A fly lead
connects each sensor to the vehicle harness.
The wheel speed sensors each have a signal and a return connection with the ABS module. When the ignition is ON the ABS
module supplies a signal feed to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation of the road wheels
induces current fluctuations in the return signals, which are converted into individual wheel speeds and overall vehicle speed
by the ABS module.
The ABS module broadcasts the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other
systems, although vehicle speed information to the roof opening panel motor/module is a hardwired connection.
If a wheel speed sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, ABS FAULT will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and an amber warning indicator will illuminate.
As the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not rotating. This enables
the ABS module to check the condition of the speed sensors while the vehicle is stationary.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle. These
measurements are received by the ABS module and broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The steering angle sensor is mounted on the steering column upper shroud mounting bracket, immediately behind the
multifunction switches, and is secured by 2 screws. A fly lead connects the sensor to the passenger compartment wiring
harness via a 4 pin multiplug.
The sensor is housed in a 'U' shaped plastic casing and contains two offset LEDs (light emitting diodes) facing two detectors.
An encoder ring is mounted on the inner steering column shaft and intersects the LEDs and detectors. The encoder ring
contains 60 slots which break and restore the light beams between the LEDs and the detectors as the steering wheel is
rotated. The ABS module is able to determine the direction of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring when the light
beams change state. The LEDs and detectors are mounted in such a way that only one beam will change state, either to
broken or restored, at any one time.
The center (straight ahead) position of the steering wheel has to be learned by the ABS module every time the ignition is
switched ON. The steering angle sensor is unable to determine the center position so inputs from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor and wheel speed signals are also used by the ABS module to help it perform this process. If extreme
weather conditions are present, for example ice causing extreme wheel spin or understeer/oversteer, the ABS module may not
be able to determine the center position of the steering wheel. In this situation, STABILITY CONTROL NOT AVAILABLE DRIVE
WITH CARE will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
The message STABILITY CONTROL NOT AVAILABLE DRIVE WITH CARE will also be displayed if the ABS module detects a
steering angle sensor fault. The amber warning indicator will illuminate until the fault is rectified.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is located on the floor tunnel, on the floor console rear mounting bracket. The
sensor is secured by two screws and connects to the vehicle wiring via a four pin multiplug.
When the ignition is ON, the sensor receives a power feed from the CJB. The sensor measures the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration of the vehicle, providing values to the ABS module via a dedicated, private high speed CAN bus connection. The
ABS module broadcasts these values on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
If a sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, STABILITY CONTROL NOT AVAILABLE DRIVE WITH CARE will be displayed in
the instrument cluster message center and the DSC warning indicator will illuminate.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box and is connected to the vehicle harness via a four pin multiplug.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the switch contacts close. This allows a hard wired signal feed to be sent to the ECM. A
stoplamp switch status message is then sent from the ECM to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. The ABS module is
then able to control braking force accordingly in conjunction with the HCU.
NOTE: The stoplamp switch also forms part of the speed control system.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING INDICATORS

The instrument cluster and message center contains warning indicators and warning messages to display the operating status
of the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The warning indicators and messages provide a visual notification of either
a system warning or information indication to the driver. There are four warning indicators on the instrument cluster and
several types of message relating to the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The DSC OFF warning indicator and
message are accompanied by an audible warning.
The following anti-lock control - stability assist warning indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
An amber ABS warning indicator.

A red brake warning indicator.
An amber DSC warning indicator.
An amber DSC OFF warning indicator.
ABS MODULE
Item Description
1 LH front brake outlet
2 RH rear brake outlet
3 LH rear brake outlet
4 RH front brake outlet
5 Primary inlet
6 Secondary inlet
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The module is mounted on the
rear face of the HCU, which it uses to control all braking and stability functions by modulating hydraulic pressure to the
individual wheel brakes.
Two types of ABS module are available; one for vehicles with standard Speed Control, one for vehicles fitted with Adaptive
Speed Control.
If an ABS modulator fault is detected, ABS FAULT will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber
ABS warning indicator will illuminate.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU comprise a single unit and must not be separated.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

The HCU is a four channel unit, secured to a mounting bracket located in the passenger side, rear engine bay. The HCU
modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
For a detailed description of the anti-lock control - stability assist system, refer to the relevant description and operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist)
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation).
2. Confirm if the anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light was illuminated, or still is
NOTE: An intermittent fault may allow the warning light to go off. This does not necessarily mean the fault is not
present. Some warnings will appear to clear when the ignition is cycled. This is often because the warning has flagged as a
result of one of the vehicle's on-board diagnostic routines having run to detect the fault. If the same routine is not run when
the ignition status is set to ON, the warning will not re-flag until the routine does run
Visual Inspection
Brake fluid level Warning light operation

Vacuum system Fuses
Wheel speed sensor installation Wheel speed sensors
Wheel speed sensor air gap Connectors/Pins
Magnetic pulse wheel(s) (damaged/contaminated) Harnesses
Steering angle sensor Steering wheel rotation sensor
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster installation Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster
Incorrect wheel or tire size Booster pressure sensor
Hydraulic control unit (HCU)
the next step
5. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) (100-00 General Information,
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Removal
1. NOTE: The anti-lock braking system (ABS) module mounted to the

hydraulic control unit (HCU) cannot be serviced separately. If the ABS
module requires replacement, the unit must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Remove the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (206-09
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Install the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (206-09
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
4.
5.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the


Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Removal

4.
5. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing
components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
6.
7.
9. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.


Loosen but do not remove the 2 nuts.

Installation
1. CAUTION: If accidentally dropped or knocked install a

new hydraulic control unit (HCU) and module.
NOTES:
Make sure the HCU locating grommet is correctly

seated in the bracket before installing the ABS module.
Make sure the HCU locating pin is correctly located in

the grommet, and the 2 isolators are fully seated in the
bracket slots.
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
TORQUE: 8 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that these components are installed to the

NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.

TORQUE: 17 Nm

4. TORQUE: 4 Nm
5. TORQUE: 3.5 Nm

7. TORQUE: 7 Nm
8. For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00

11. Using the diagnostic tool, configue the new units using the
Programmable Module Installation Routine.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
NOTES:

2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that the harness retaining
bracket is not removed. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the harness.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Release the wiring harness grommet.

prior to removal.
Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Remove the retaining bolt.
Release the wheel speed sensor.
Installation

the position noted on removal.

Tighten to 6 Nm.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Removal
2. Refer to: Clockspring (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal

and Installation).
3.
4.
Installation

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer
Removal
1. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).
2.
Installation

Steering System - General Information -
Power Steering Pump Specifications
Power steering pump relief pressure Specification
Vehicles with Diesel Engines 106-114 bar
Vehicles with Petrol Engines 114-122 bar
Item Specification
Power steering fluid Mobil ATF320
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the steering system operation, refer to the relevant description and operation sections of the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation),

Power Steering - AWD (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation),
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Tire condition/pressure Fuses

Fluid level Harnesses for damage/corrosion
Leaks Electrical connector(s)
Security, condition and correct installation of suspension components Damaged/corroded pins
Security, condition and correct installation of steering system components
CAUTION: If a steering gear assembly is returned under warranty with leaking output shaft seals, but there is also
damage to the steering gear boot/boots the steering gear warranty will be invalid. This is due to the steering gear output
shaft seals being damaged due to foreign materials entering the steering gear boot and damaging the steering gear output
shaft seals thereafter.
the next step
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart
Symptom Charts
WARNING: It is not possible to CHECK the torque of a patchlock bolt, if the torque is suspected to be low, the bolt must
be REMOVED/DISCARDED and a new bolt MUST be INSTALLED and torque to the correct value.
NOTE: If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
Fluid Leakage
NOTE: Confirm the location of the fluid leak. CLEAN the area of the leak, inspect the area and confirm the exact position.
Ensure the fluid is not from another system on the vehicle.
Power steering Overfilled system Correct the fluid level as required

Check and install new steering gear as required, refer to the new
Steering gear module/component installation note at the top of the symptom
charts
Damaged fluid
Check and install a new fluid cap/reservoir as required
cap/reservoir
Tighten the hose connection or latch plate fixing to the

recommended torque.
Loose or damaged
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General
fluid leakage hoses and fittings
Information, Specifications).
O-ring or Dowty seals
Check and install new components as required
Install new O-ring or Dowty seals as required
Check and install a new fluid cooler as required, refer to the new
Fluid cooler module/component installation note at the top of the symptom
charts
Check and install a new power steering pump as required, refer to

Power steering pump the new module/component installation note at the top of the
symptom charts
Functional
Check the steering alignment.

Steering wheel REFER to: Specifications (204-00
Steering not correctly centred
misalignment Suspension System - General
Check and tighten the steering

wheel retaining bolt as required.
Steering wheel loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Steering System - General
Check and install new

Excess play in the steering linkage
components as required
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to

adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to
follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty
Steering gear not correctly adjusted (causing
Excessive free play at
excessive backlash) Check and install a new steering
steering wheel (refer to
the steering linkage gear as required, refer to the
inspection and backlash new module/component
(free play) check in this installation note at the top of
section) the symptom charts
Check and tighten the lower

steering column pinch bolts as
Lower steering column universal joint pinch required.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Check and install a new steering

column or steering column lower
Excessive wear in steering column universal shaft as required, refer to the
joints new module/component
installation note at the top of
the symptom charts
Check/tighten and install new

steering gear mounting bolts as
Steering gear mounting bolts loose or required.
damaged REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Check and install new tie-rod

ends as required, refer to the
Wear in steering gear tie-rod end ball joints new module/component
the symptom charts
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The steering

gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles has a spring
loaded pinion to ensure the correct level of Check and install new steering
engagement between the rack and pinion. This play gear as required, refer to the
is optimized with the steering gear in the central new module/component
position and should not be confused with inner ball installation note at the top of
joint wear. Check for vertical motion in the inner ball the symptom charts
joint with the steering gear in the central position.
Wear in steering gear inner ball joints

Wear in suspension ball joints/bushings

Steering gear not correctly adjusted
gear as required, refer to the
the symptom charts
Check and rectify the source of

the contamination and install
new brake pads and discs as
Veer under braking Contamination of brake pads and discs required, refer to the new
module/component installation
note at the top of the symptom
charts
Check and rectify sticking slide

pins and install new calipers as
required, refer to the new
Seized front brake caliper slide pins or piston
charts
Damaged brake discs
Check and install new brake discs
as required, refer to the new
charts
For information on diagnosis of

uneven tire wear.
REFER to: Suspension System
(204-00 Suspension System -
Vehicle pulls to one side General Information, Diagnosis
Uneven tire wear
when driving on a level and Testing).
Incorrect tire pressure
surface Check and adjust tire pressures
as required.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04
Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
NOTE: Dealerships must keep a

copy of the BEFORE and AFTER
geometry figures with job card for future
reference
Check and adjust geometry as

required. REFER to: (204-00
Incorrect geometry settings Suspension System - General
Information)
(General Procedures),
Front Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures).
Notify the customer of incorrect

Vehicle is unevenly loaded or overloaded
vehicle loading

Steering gear is not correctly adjusted
gear as required, refer to the
the symptom charts

front suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn front suspension required.
components REFER to: Specifications (204-00
Suspension System - General

rear suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn rear suspension required.
Suspension System - General
For information on diagnosis of

the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00
Incorrect brake operation
Brake System - General
Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Set underbody alignment

referring to the Removal and
Incorrect underbody alignment Installation procedures in section
502-00 of the workshop manual
for instruction
Check and adjust the tire

pressures as required.
Vehicle wanders from Incorrect tire pressure or tire size Wheels and Tires,
side to side when driven Specifications).
straight ahead and the Check and install a new tire as
steering wheel is held in required
a firm position
Notify the customer of incorrect

Vehicle is unevenly or excessively loaded
vehicle loading
Check and adjust as required.

REFER to: (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information)
Incorrect toe adjustment (General Procedures),
Procedures),
Procedures).
Check/tighten and install a new

tie-rod end as required. REFER
to: (211-03 Steering Linkage)
Loose or worn steering gear tie-rod end(s)
Specifications (Specifications),
Tie Rod End (Removal and
Installation).
Check/tighten and install a new

suspension ball joint assembly
as required.
Loose or worn suspension ball joint(s)
Front Suspension,
Specifications).
Check/tighten the steering

column universal joint pinch bolt
Steering column universal joint pinch bolt to the correct torque.
loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00

rear suspension components as
Loose or worn rear suspension components required.
Rear Suspension, Specifications).
Check/adjust the tire pressure

and install correct tire as
required.
Incorrect tire pressure, size or type
Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).

reference
Check and adjust as required.

Incorrect geometry adjustment REFER to: (204-00 Suspension
Poor self center action System - General Information)
of the steering Camber and Caster Adjustment
Procedures),
Procedures).
Check the steering column and

steering column lower shaft are
Steering column/steering column lower shaft
free from interference from the
interference
engine harness, sound proofing
and floor covering
Steering column shroud fouling on the Correctly install/align as

steering wheel necessary
Check and install a new upper or

lower steering column as
Steering Column)
Steering column universal joints binding or
Steering Column (Removal and
stiff
Installation),
Steering Column Flexible
Coupling (Removal and
Installation).
Steering column lower shaft floor seal Correctly install or install new
incorrectly installed, binding or damaged lower shaft as required.
Check and install a new tie-rod

end as required.
REFER to: Steering Column
Binding or damaged steering gear tie-rod(s)
Flexible Coupling (211-04
Steering Column, Removal and
Installation).

front suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn front suspension required.
Front Suspension,
Specifications).
Check and rectify any fluid

leakage. Fill to correct level.
Low power steering fluid REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Damaged front end accessory drive belt Check and install a new FEAD
tensioner belt tensioner as required
Check hoses and cooler for

Power steering hose or fluid cooler restriction restriction/damage and install
new components as required
Excessive steering
efforts required during
low speed/rapid Bleed the power steering system.
manoeuvring and/or REFER to: Power Steering System
during parking Power steering fluid aeration Bleeding (211-00 Steering
manoeuvres System - General Information,
Refer to the electrical circuit

Steering transducer not closed - no feed
diagrams and test power steering
voltage or cable fault
solenoid circuit
NOTE: REFER to the power steering pressure

check in this section. Check and install a new power
steering pump or steering gear
Power steering fluid delivery pressure or flow as required
too low
Internal steering gear leakage

Steering operation is Steering transducer open early diagrams and test steering
very heavy when transducer circuit
VEHICLE IS IN MOTION
AT LOW SPEED, but
when stationary Check for vehicle speed related
manoeuvring is NORMAL Speedometer signal error DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index

Steering transducer not open, (no power
diagrams and test steering
steering fluid flow)
transducer circuit
Check for vehicle speed related

Speedometer signal error DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
Steering operation is
very light when VEHICLE
IN MOTION AT HIGHER Check for kinking or blockage of
SPEED, but when pipe/hose
stationary manoeuvring Power steering fluid low pressure pipe/hose Ensure correct installation and
is NORMAL restricted flow install a new power steering fluid
low pressure pipe/hose as
necessary
Check and install a new reservoir,

Fluid reservoir filter blocked refill with fluid and bleed the
system
Check the steering column is free

from interference from the engine
Lower steering column interference
harness, sound proofing or the
floor covering

reference.
Check and adjust the front wheel

alignment. REFER to: (204-00
Incorrect steering geometry Suspension System - General
Information)
Procedures),
Procedures).
heavy in one direction
NOTE: Refer to the power steering
pressure check in this section
Faulty rotary valve/seal If the power steering system

pressure is low but the power
steering pump maximum output
pressure is correct install a new
steering gear
Check for correct installation or

damage to wheel arch liner and
suspension components.
Tire fouling on the wheel arch liner or
Correctly install and install new
suspension components
Check tire for correct size, type
and pressure

Damaged steering gear cylinder feed pipe
Check and rectify any fluid leaks.

Refer to the fluid leakage
Low power steering fluid symptom charts in this section
heavy in both directions
Fill power steering system to
correct level
NOTE: Refer to the power steering

pressure check in this section
Faulty rotary valve/seal If the power steering system

pressure is low but the power
steering pump maximum output
pressure is correct, install a new
steering gear
NOTE: Refer to the power steering pressure

check in this section Check and install a new power
steering pump or steering gear
Power steering fluid delivery pressure or flow as required
too low
Internal steering gear leakage
Check and install a new power

steering pump as required.
REFER to:
Power Steering Pump - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel (211-02 Power Steering,
Removal and Installation),
Power Steering Pump - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (211-02
Power Steering, Removal and
Fluid loss at the power steering pump shaft Installation),
seal Power Steering Pump - V6 3.0L
Petrol (211-02 Power Steering,
Removal and Installation),
Power Steering Pump - V6 S/C
3.0L Petrol (211-02 Power
Steering, Removal and
Installation),
Power Steering Pump - GTDi 2.0L
Petrol (211-02, Removal and
Installation).

Steering Column)
Steering column universal joints binding or
Steering Column (Removal and
stiff
Installation),
Installation).

Seized front ball joints
Check and install new steering

Seized or worn steering gear
gear as required
Check the steering column is free

from interference from the engine
Lower steering column interference
harness, sound proofing and floor
covering
Steering operation
varies from heavy to Check for vehicle speed related
light when driving at Incorrect speedometer signal DTCs and refer to the relevant
constant speed DTC index

Power steering solenoid circuit fault diagrams and test power steering
solenoid circuit

Steering Column)
Steering column universal joint binding or stiff Steering Column (Removal and
Installation),
Installation).

Uncharacteristic
Power steering solenoid circuit fault diagrams and test power steering
effort/speed relationship
solenoid circuit
Check and adjust the tire

pressure and install correct tire
as required.
Incorrect tire pressure, size or type
Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The steering

gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles have a spring
loaded pinion to ensure the correct level of
engagement between the rack and pinion. This play
Excessive kick-back is optimized with the steering gear in the central Check and install new steering
through steering wheel position and should not be confused with inner ball gear and tie-rod ends as required
joint wear. Check for vertical motion in the inner ball
joint with the steering gear in the central position.
Badly worn steering gear/linkage
Tighten and install new front

suspension components as
Loose or worn front suspension required.
components/bushings REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Column will not adjust Electrical/electronic failure Check steering column movement
Column will not move to datalogger signal using the
memory position manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Check fuses/relays
Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
- If DTCs B1C3314,
B1C3514 are stored, and
the column inches when
the switch is activated
and there is no memory
recall function, there will
be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
- If DTCs B1C3277,
B1C3477 are stored,
these should be ignored
in this case
Check condition of wiring and
connectors
Carry out column calibration
application using the
diagnostic system. The BAR code
information is located in the right
hand luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
Check seat control memory
module
Motor locked/jammed Check to see if mechanism has

reached hard end stops
Free mechanism
Replace motor with appropriate
service kit
Column easy entry/exit Electrical/electronic failure Turn column adjust switch to

does not function AUTO position, check that
'Column Adjust AUTO' text is
displayed in the instrument
cluster message center
Check steering column movement
datalogger signal using the
diagnostic system
Check fuses/relays
Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
- If DTCs B1C3314,
B1C3514 are stored, and
the column inches when
the switch is activated
and there is no memory
recall function, there will
be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
- If DTCs B1C3277,
B1C3477 are stored,
these should be ignored
in this case
Check condition of wiring and
connectors
Carry out column calibration
application using the
diagnostic system. The BAR code
information is located in the right
hand luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
Check seat control memory
module for DTCs and refer to DTC
index
Internal lock failure Refer to the electrical circuit

Electromechanical diagrams and test steering
steering column lock will column lock circuit
not operate Install a new steering column
lock as required
Noise
Check for leaks and rectify as required. For further

information refer to the symptom charts for
Low power steering fluid level
leakage in this section. Fill power steering fluid
reservoir to correct level
Continuous noise
Bleed the power steering system.
NOTE: Look for small air bubbles
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
visible in the fluid, air may also get
(211-00 Steering System - General Information,
trapped in the hydraulic system
Air in hydraulic system
Power steering pipe/hose in Check and reposition, or install new IF

contact with the vehicle body damaged/deformed, power steering pipe/hose
Check and clear restriction to pipe/hose

Power steering pipe/hose
Reposition power steering pipe/hose. Install new
restricted or twisted
pipe/hose IF permanently damaged/deformed
Tighten the power steering pump mounting bolts

Power steering pump mounting to the correct torque.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
- General Information, Specifications).
Check and fill power steering fluid reservoir to

NOTE: Refer to the power correct level
steering pressure check in this section Bleed the power steering system.
Noise gets worse REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
when system is Low power steering fluid level (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
loaded Aerated fluid General Procedures).
Low power steering pump Check power steering pump pressure. If the pump
pressure pressure is low, install a new power steering
pump
Check front end accessory drive belt tension

Front end accessory Front end accessory drive belt
Check front end accessory drive belt condition and
drive belt squeal incorrectly tensioned or glazed
install a new belt as required
Chirp noise from the Check front end accessory drive belt tension
Loose or worn front end
steering pump when a Check front end accessory drive belt condition and
accessory drive belt
load is applied install a new belt as required
Scrape/grind noise Steering column shroud foul Correctly install the steering column shroud to
from behind steering condition or clockspring eliminate the foul condition
wheel while steering Install a new clockspring as required
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Click Clockspring or steering column Correctly install and install new components as
multifunction switch LH required
Loose universal joint pinch bolt Install a new universal joint pinch bolt and
tighten to correct specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Squeak Steering column shroud joints Apply Krytox spray to steering column shroud
joints
Clockspring Install new clockspring as required
Loose fixings (universal joint Tighten fixings to correct specification.

Knock pinch bolt and steering column REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
fixings) - General Information, Specifications).
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Rattle
Loose fixings Tighten steering column fixings to correct
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Electric motor/solenoid
NOTE: Before carrying out repairs/replacement,
assess column adjustment noise levels against other
vehicles of the same model
Noise while adjusting
column Install new components as required
Motor spindle/lead screw Lubricate lead screw
Vibration
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the

steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this
Loose or worn steering instruction will invalidate the steering gear
Wheel fight (kick back) - condition warranty.
where roughness is felt in the components/bushings
steering wheel by the driver when Tighten and install new steering
the vehicle is driven over rough components/bushings as required
surfaces
Loose or worn suspension Tighten and install new suspension

components/bushings components/bushings as required
Check for wheel and tire damage. Install

Road wheel and tire new components as required
Nibble (shimmy) - condition where
condition Check for tire uniformity. Install new
oscillation of the steering wheel
tire(s) as required
occurs (not vertical which is shake).
This is driven by road wheel
imbalance Check and adjust road wheel balance as
Road wheel imbalance
required
NOTE: Vibration smooths out Ensure tires installed are to Jaguar

Shake - condition where vertical
after several miles of driving specification. Install new tires as
vibration of the steering
required
wheel/column occurs (not
Road wheel imbalance due Check and adjust tire pressures to
oscillation which is nibble)
to tire flat-spotting correct specification
Component Tests
Steering Linkage Inspection and Backlash (Free play) Check
CAUTION: Steering gear boots must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Use new clamps when installing steering gear
boots.
Inspect the boots for cuts, deterioration, twisting or distortion. Check the steering gear boots to make sure they are tight.
Install new boots or clamps as required
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out with assistance.
1. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and the right to check for free
play
2. Free play should be between 0 and 6 mm (0 and 0.24 in) at the steering wheel rim. If the free play exceeds this limit,
either the ball joints are worn, the lower steering column joints are worn or the backlash of the steering gear is
excessive
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
3. The backlash of the steering gear cannot be adjusted, install a new steering gear if excessive backlash is diagnosed
4. Grasp the steering wheel firmly and move it up and down and to the left and right without turning the wheel to check
for column bearing wear, steering wheel or steering column
Power Steering Fluid Condition Check
1. Run the engine for 2 minutes
2. Check the power steering fluid system level
3. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown or black
4. Using a suitable clean syringe extract a suitable amount of fluid from the reservoir
5. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain
6. If evidence of solid material is found, the power steering fluid system should be drained for further inspection
7. If fluid contamination or steering component failure is confirmed by the sediment in the power steering fluid system,
refer to steering fault diagnosis by symptom charts in this section
Power Steering Pressure Test
Test Equipment

1 211-011 Pressure gauge hose
2 211-011-08 Pump return hose
3 211-011-07 Pump return hose connector
4 211-011-03/2 Test equipment to high pressure hose adaptor
5 211-011-03/1 Pump high pressure outlet to hose adaptor
6 211-011-02 Pump adaptor to control valve hose
7 211-011-01 Control valve
8 211-011 Pressure gauge
9 - 'O' ring seal
The measurement of the maximum system pressure, (which is governed by the pressure relief valve) is achieved by inserting
the service tool (pressure gauge and adaptors) into the fluid circuit of the power steering system. Run the engine at idle
speed, turn the steering from lock to lock and read the maximum pressure recorded on the gauge
Installing Test Equipment
To install the pressure test equipment:
Place a suitable drain tray below the power steering pump

Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to pump hose prior to disconnecting any hoses, to avoid unnecessary loss of fluid
Disconnect the hose from the power steering pump high pressure outlet
Install the pump outlet to hose adaptor (5). Do not omit the 'O' ring seal (9)
Connect the power steering pump adaptor to control valve hose (6) of the test equipment
Install the adaptor (4) in the high pressure hose previously removed from the power steering pump outlet
Connect the connector (3) of the test equipment hose (2) to the adaptor (4)
Remove the hose clamp from the reservoir hose
Start the engine to check the system pressure
With the control valve (7) OPEN and the engine idling, the following system pressures may be checked:
During turning when static (dry parking pressure)

When the steering is held on full lock (maximum system pressure or pressure relief)
With the steering at rest (idle pressure or back pressure)
CAUTIONS:
To avoid excessive heating of the power steering pump when checking the pressure, do not close the valve for more than
5 seconds maximum.
When checking the pump pressure DO NOT drive the vehicle with the test equipment installed.
With the control valve (7) CLOSED the power steering pump maximum output pressure can be checked
Removing Test Equipment
To remove the test equipment:
Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to power steering pump hose

Removing the test equipment is a reversal of the installation instructions
Install a new 'O' ring seal (9) to the power steering pump high pressure outlet to hose connection
Install the original hose to the power steering pump
Remove the clamp from the reservoir to the power steering pump hose
Top-up the reservoir fluid
Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
Description of Terms
General Steering System Noises
Boom
Rhythmic sound like a drum roll or distant thunder. May cause pressure on the ear drum
Buzz
Low-pitched sound, like a bee. Usually associated with vibrations
Chatter
Rapidly repeating metallic sound
Chuckle
Rapid noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel
Chirp
High pitched rapidly repeating sound, like chirping birds
Click
Light sound, like a ball point pen being clicked
Click/Thump
Heavy metal-to-metal sound, like a hammer striking steel
Grind
Abrasive sound, like a grinding wheel or sandpaper rubbing against wood
Groan/Moan
Continuous, low-pitched humming sound
Groan/Howl
Low, guttural sound, like an angry dog
Hiss
Continuous sound like air escaping from a tire valve
Hum
Continuous sound of varying frequencies, like a wire humming in the wind
Knock
Heavy, loud repeating sound like a knock on a door
Ping
Similar to knock, except at higher frequency

Rattle
A sound suggesting looseness, such as marbles rolling around in a can
Roar
Deep, long, prolonged sound like an animal, or winds and ocean waves
Rumble
Low, heavy continuous sound like that made by wagons or thunder
Scrape
Grating noise like one hard plastic part rubbing against another
Squeak
High-pitched sound like rubbing a clean window
Squeal
Continuous, high-pitched sound like running finger nails across a chalkboard
Tap
Light, hammering sound like tapping pencil on edge of table. May be rhythmic or intermittent
Whirr/Whine
High-pitched buzzing sound, like an electric motor or drill
Whistle
Sharp, shrill sound, like wind passing a small opening
Specific Steering System Noise Types
Belt Squeal
Belt squeal is a high frequency air-borne noise generated by slippage of the ribbed Vee belt on the power steering pump
pulley. Squeal increases with system loading and at full lock
Clonk
Clonk is a structure-borne noise heard as a loose-sounding rattle or vibration coming from the steering column. Clonk can be
identified by driving and turning over cobblestones, rough roads, or high frequency bumps such as 25-50 mm tall tar strips.
Clonk requires a tie-rod load impact
Column Knock
Column knock is a loose-sounding rattle or vibration generated by the steering column shaft contacting other portions of the
column assembly. The noise is both audible and tactile. Column knock is generated by driving over cobblestones or rough
pavement. It is not necessary to turn the steering wheel to create this noise
Column Rattle
Column rattle is a metallic sounding noise created when applying a highly impulsive force to the steering wheel. Column rattle
is often used to combine the more general group of column noises including clonk and column knock. Column rattle noises can
be caused by clonk, knock, loose column components, bonus parts etc. A series of parked, straight-line driving, and cornering
tests should be carried out to isolate the source/sources
Grinding/Scrape
Grinding is a low frequency noise in the column when the steering wheel is turned. It is generally caused by interference
between moving components such as the steering wheel to steering column shroud
Grunt (Squawk/Whoop)
Grunt is a 'honking' sound elicited when coming off one of the steering stops. Grunt is generally excited during parking
manoeuvres with a low to medium speed steering input
Hiss (Swish)
Hiss or Valve Hiss is a high-frequency sound coming from the steering gear when the system is loaded. It is a rushing or
'swish' noise that doesn't change frequency with RPM. Hiss is the general noise generated by the flow of hydraulic fluid through
restrictions in the steering system. Restrictions include the rotary steering valve, power steering tubes, connectors, tuning
orifices, etc. Hiss can be air-borne and structure-borne, but the structure-borne path through the steering intermediate shaft is
usually dominant
Moan (Groan)
Moan is the general structure-borne noise of the steering system. Moan is primarily transmitted to the driver via the body
structure through the pump mount, engine mounts, power steering lines and power steering brackets. On some vehicles, moan
is a loud humming noise, often present when the wheel is turned and the system is loaded. It may change frequency with
engine RPM and if the system is loaded or unloaded
Steering Gear Knock (Steering Gear Slap)
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
Steering gear knock is a rattle sound and steering wheel vibration caused by separation of the steering gear and pinion while
driving over bumps. It is a structure-borne noise transmitted through the intermediate shaft and column. Steering gear knock
can also be heard as a 'thump' or impact noise that occurs with the vehicle stationary when the steering wheel is released
from a loaded position and allowed to return to rest. Noise occurs with the engine on or off
Rattles
Rattles are noises caused by knocking or hitting of components in the steering system. Steering rattles can occur in the engine
compartment, the suspension, or the passenger compartment. Rattles can be caused by loose components, movable and
flexible components, and improper clearances
Squeaks/Scrapes
Squeaks/Scrapes are noises due to friction or component rubbing anywhere in the steering system. Squeaks/Scrapes have
appeared in steering linkages and joints, in column components and in column and steering wheel trim
Weep
Weep is an air-borne noise, occasionally generated when turning the steering across lock at a constant rate. When present on
a vehicle the noise, once initiated can often be maintained across a large proportion of the available steering movement
Whistle
Whistle is similar to hiss but is louder and of a higher frequency. It is also more of a pure tone noise than hiss. Whistle is
air-borne and is generated by a high flow rate of hydraulic fluid through a small restriction
Zip
Zip noise is the air-borne noise generated by power steering pump cavitation when power steering fluid does not flow freely
through the suction hose from the reservoir to the pump. Zip primarily occurs during cold weather at start-up
Steering System Vibrations and Harshness
Buzz
Buzz is a tactile rotary vibration felt in the steering wheel when steering inputs are slow. Buzz can also be called a grinding
feel and it is closely related to grunt and is caused by high system gain with low damping. Buzz is generally excited during
parking manoeuvres with low to medium speed steering input
Buzz (Electrical)
A different steering buzz can be caused by pulse width modulated (PWM) electric actuators used in variable assist steering
systems. This buzz is felt by turning the ignition key to run without starting the engine and holding onto the steering wheel.
In extreme cases, the buzz can be felt with the engine running also
Column/Steering Wheel Shake
Column shake is a low frequency vertical vibration excited by primary engine vibrations
Nibble (Shimmy)
Steering nibble is a rotary oscillation or vibration of the steering wheel, which can be excited at a specific vehicle speed.
Nibble is driven by wheel and tire imbalance exciting a suspension recession mode, which then translates into steering gear
travel and finally steering wheel nibble
Shudder (Judder)
Shudder is a low frequency oscillation of the entire steering system (tire, wheels, steering gear and linkage, etc.) when the
vehicle is steered during static-park or at low speeds. Shudder is very dependent on road surface
Torque/Velocity Variation (Phasing/Effort Cycling)

Steering wheel torque variation occurring twice in one revolution is normally as a result of problems with the lower steering
column (intermediate shaft), but foul conditions generally result in either constant stiffness or single point stiffness.
Depending upon the orientation of the joints, the steering can feel asymmetric (torque falling off in one direction and rising in
the other) or else it can simply have pronounced peaks and troughs as the steering moves from lock to lock
Wheel Fight (Kick Back)
Wheel fight is excess feedback of sudden road forces through the steering system and back to the driver. It is evaluated at all
vehicle speeds over cobblestones, rough roads, and potholes. The tires, wheels, and suspension generate forces into the
steering systems. Steering friction, hydraulic damping, hydraulic compliance, mechanical compliance, steering ratio, and assist
gain all affect how much is transmitted to the driver
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Steering Column Lock Module (VIM) (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (BCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Clean power steering fluid reservoir around the filler cap and fluid
indicator.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the

reservoir during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than 10

seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully lock to
lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Flushing
General Procedures
NOTES:
If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the system
flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the procedure below
must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

Detach but do not remove the power steering fluid
reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return hose from
the power steering fluid reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power
steering return hose, release the power steering
fluid return hose from the coupling by removing the
clip.
4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power steering

reservoir return pipe.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked or

twisted and is correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return hose to

allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTES:
The suitable funnel should have the a capacity of 4

litres and O-ring seal
The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed to the

power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering fluid

reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of each

other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
power steering system.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with the
specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two thirds full
in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in the

power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the minimum
power steering fluid level. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon as the

full 4 litres of power steering fluid has entered the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

Start the engine.
With assistance turn the steering slowly lock to lock
3 times at approximately 1 revolution every 5
seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering system until 4
litres of power steering fluid has been added to the
power steering reservoir. This should take
approximately 30 seconds.
Remove the suitable funnel.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering return

hose.

Connect the power steering return hose to the reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return
hose, release the power steering fluid return hose from the
coupling by removing the clip.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1.
Installation).
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

Filling

2. CAUTIONS:

Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 24 Nm

Fill the power steering reservoir.
5. Install the vacuum hand pump to the power steering fluid reservoir.
6. NOTE: Apply the maximum vacuum possible on the reservoir for 1

minute.
Apply a vacuum to the power steering fluid reservoir.
7. Remove the vacuum hand pump from the power steering fluid reservoir.

9.
Run the engine for 30 seconds.
Turn the steering fully lock-to-lock, stop the engine.
minute.

14.
minute.
19.
20.
Install the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
21. Check for fluid leaks.
Installation).
Power Steering -
NOTES:
* Only vehicles with diesel engines
** Only vehicles with Petrol engines
*** Only vehicles with AWD

Lower steering column to steering gear pinch bolt 35 26 -
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts 25 18 -
* Power steering pump outlet pipe bolt 24 17 -
** Power steering pump outlet pipe bolt 25 18 -
Steering gear retaining bolts 117 86 -
*** Steering gear retaining bolts (lower) 117 86 -
*** Steering gear retaining bolts (upper) 60 + 240° 44 + 240° -
Steering gear supply and return lines clamp bolt 25 18 -
Power steering pump union - vehicles with 2.0L petrol engines 25 18 -
Power steering pump pipe bracket - vehicles with 2.0L petrol engines 8 - 71
Power Steering - Power Steering - Component Location
POWER STEERING - COMPONENT LOCATION 3.0L V6 DIESEL
Item Description
1 Power steering fluid reservoir
2 Power steering pump
3 High pressure feed pipe to steering gear
4 Valve unit
5 Servotronic transducer valve
6 Tie-rod end (2 off)
7 Tie-rod (2 off)
8 Mounting bolt (3 off)
9 Steering gear
10 Low pressure fluid return hose
11 Feed pipe to pump
Power Steering - Power Steering - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering pump, a fluid
reservoir, a fluid cooler (if fitted) and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted unit with
the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
The steering rack is connected to the front wheel knuckles by adjustable tie-rods. The tie-rods allow for adjustment to
centralize the steering wheel and also adjust the toe setting of the front wheel geometry.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the centre, straight
ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steering as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides precise
and rapid steering response at high speeds and provides optimized steering of the vehicle when manoeuvring into parking
spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
Fluid is supplied to the steering gear by a fixed displacement vane pump on petrol models and a variable displacement pump
on diesel models. The pump is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pulley. On petrol models the pump is mounted on the LH
(left-hand) side of the engine. On diesel models the pump is mounted on the RH (right-hand) side of the engine. A fluid
reservoir is positioned at the front RH side of the engine compartment, forward of the front suspension housing on diesel
models and on the front LH side of the engine compartment, forward of the front suspension housing on petrol models.
On petrol engine vehicles, a fluid cooler is located in front of the engine cooling radiator. Diesel models do not have a fluid
cooler.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides easy
and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an integrated,
positive center feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving. The Servotronic 2 system is
controlled by software which is incorporated into the instrument cluster. The software responds to road speed signals and
controls the power assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve housing.
Power Steering - Power Steering - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral
position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
7 Feed fluid radial groove
8 Return fluid control edge
9 Return fluid chamber
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
17 Compression spring
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The
fluid passes through the pump and is delivered at pressure, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse
bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position , the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial
grooves. The fluid then passes through return fluid control edges and the return fluid grooves of the valve rotor, back to the
reservoir via the fluid cooler (if fitted).
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve and their associated pipes provide a connection to the left and right power
assist cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position

Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
8 Return fluid control edge
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the left in the piston bore. The valve
rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) and pressurized fluid is directed over the further opened feed fluid control edges and to
the associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The pressure
applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing
return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an
external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid
control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
Servotronic Operation
The Servotronic software contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car configuration file depending on the
vehicle mode and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only normal power
steering wheel be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored, but no warning lamps are illuminated and the driver
may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
When the vehicle is manoeuvred into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuvre), the Servotronic software uses
road speed data from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow
or stationary. The Servotronic software analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic
transducer valve. The Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction
chamber. An orifice also ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction'
ensuring that the steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the Servotronic software analyses the road speed signals from the ABS
module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve which increases the reaction pressure. This
modifies the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an improved 'road feel' allowing
precise steering and directional stability.
Steering Gear
Item Description
1 Locknut ( 2 off)
2 RH (right-hand) tie-rod
3 Steering gear boot (2 off)
4 Steering gear
5 Bolt and washer (3 off)
6 Servotronic valve
7 Valve unit
8 Input shaft
9 LH (left-hand) tie-rod
10 Steering gear mounting bushes
The steering gear is located at the rear of the engine and attached to the front sub-frame. The gear is secured to the
sub-frame with 3 bolts and washers which screw into threaded tubes in bushes which are integral with the sub-frame.
The steering gear comprises a cast aluminum, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve. The
mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic actuator are located in a aluminum cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is pressed
against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion is
connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of the
rack by the rack and pinion mechanism and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of the
road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The rack teeth angles vary from 20 degrees in the centre position to 40 degrees at the end sections of the rack. It is this
variation in teeth angles which provides the variable ratio.
The piston of the hydraulic actuator is located on the rack bar. Each side of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid
return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the rack bar has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are
sealed with boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe setting is achieved,
a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear rack bar has a central hole machined along most of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced
when the steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with clips.
Valve Unit
Item Description
1 Pressure/return to/from steering gear
3 Cut-off valve
4 Radial groove
6 Fluid feed radial groove
7 Radial groove
8 Orifice
9 Balls
11 Torsion bar
12 Valve rotor
13 Reaction piston
14 Reaction chamber
15 Centering piece
16 Return to reservoir
17 Pressure supply from pump
18 Pinion
19 Steering gear rack bar
20 Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide power assistance
(i.e. when parking) to optimize the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined
ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure
feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the
steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer diameter.
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes
are drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to accept
the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are closed and do not
continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate
shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position. The inner end of the input shaft forms
a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of relative
rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures that, if
the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central portion of
the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged alternately around
the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
input shaft by a drive pin. The torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter allows
the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tyres on the road
surface.
The pinion shaft has machined teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot, machined
in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the pinion
housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Servotronic Valve
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port in the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is a
transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from Servotronic software in the instrument cluster.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque required
to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with the optimum effort when the vehicle
is stationary or manoeuvred at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed, with the required
steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the driver with a good
feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The instrument cluster receives road speed signals from the ABS module and calculates the correct controlling signal for the
Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster has a diagnostic capability which allows a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the Servotronic valve. Two
fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and negative connection short to
ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster also contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car
configuration file depending on the vehicle model and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default level
of assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the instrument cluster. No warning lamps are
illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
Power Steering Pump - 5.0L V8 Petrol Models
The power steering pumps used on the different petrol engine variants are basically the same pump with different flow control
valve mechanisms. The pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies a constant fluid flow to the steering
gear valve unit. The pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to
maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum pressure
supplied to the steering gear to 118 bar (1711 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2). The flow control valve limits the maximum flow to
8.50 l/min (1.87 gal/min) ± 0.50 l/min (0.16 gal/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has a displacement of 11.0
cm3/rev (0.67 in3/rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a pressed-on drive pulley, the opposite end of
the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each end of the shaft prevent
leakage of hydraulic fluid. The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the
vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and
fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes. The
cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurises the hydraulic fluid
trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a
constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the
pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the centre of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the
pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of
the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
Power Steering Pump - 3.0L V6 Diesel Models
A variable displacement power steering pump is used on the diesel engine variants. The variable displacement, vane type
pump supplies the required hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve unit. The pump is located at the front of the engine
and is driven by the FEAD (front end accessory drive) Poly Vee belt which is directly driven from the crankshaft. The output
from the pump increases proportionally with the load applied to the steering valve unit.
NOTE: Typical pump section shown.
Item Description
1 Power steering fluid inlet port
2 Flow control valve
3 Power steering fluid outlet port
4 Variable Orifice
5 Pump rotor
6 High pressure
7 Adapter ring
8 Cam Ring
9 Low pressure
The pump consists of a shaft containing a number of slots into which vanes are inserted and these vanes run within a cam ring
in the pump body. The centerline of the shaft is not concentric with that of the bore of the body and this creates the expanding
and contracting cavities that form the pumping action.
The vanes rotate within the cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between
the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose
into the space between the vanes. As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid,
trapping the fluid between the vanes. The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially
compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic fluid trapped between them. Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the
outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to
the steering gear.
The cam ring in the pump body can move within the valve body. By moving the cam ring it is possible to vary the eccentricity of
the shaft and the vanes in relation to the cam ring. As the eccentricity is decreased, the volume of hydraulic fluid trapped
between the vanes decreases, maintaining the flow in response to pump speed. This reduces the load required to turn the
pump and therefore improves engine output and economy. This allows the flow rate to be matched to the system demands and
increased flow rate is only required when the steering wheel is turned.
The pump has an internal regulating valve which controls the eccentricity of the cam ring and therefore varies the flow rate
according to demand. The regulating relief valve limits the maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 110 bar (1595
lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2) and also limits the maximum flow to 8.5 l/min (1.86 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless
of engine speed.
Fluid Reservoir
NOTE: V8 petrol model shown
Item Description
1 Cap (2 off)
2 Reservoir body
3 Max/Min level
4 Return connection
5 Suction hose connection
6 Bolt, washer and rubber mounting (2 off)
7 Mounting bracket
The reservoir is located in the engine compartment, on the LH suspension housing on V8 Petrol models and the RH suspension
housing on diesel models. The reservoir is attached to a bracket via slide mounting, and the bracket is attached to the
suspension housing with 2 bolts and rubber mounts.
The reservoir is a plastic moulding with an integral 80 micron, non-serviceable filter. Two moulded ports at the base of the
reservoir provide for attachment of the fluid supply hose to the power steering pump and fluid return hose from the fluid cooler.
The reservoir is fitted with a removable cap which is screwed 1/4 turn to lock into the reservoir body.
The reservoir has upper and minimum marks moulded on its outside of the body.
Fluid Cooler (5.0L V8 petrol only)
Item Description
1 Hose - return to fluid reservoir
2 Hose - Return from steering gear valve unit
3 Fluid cooler
The fluid cooler is located in the return circuit from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler is an aluminum fin and tube
design. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows through the fins. The fins act as heat
exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Power Steering - Steering Gear
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
NOTES:
All vehicles
Installation).
3. Make sure the alignment mark, on the steering gear pinion

seal protection cover, is central to the steering gear pinion
casting.
4.
Vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine
5.
All vehicles
6. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Torque: 35 Nm
7.
8. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components,

make sure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean and dry. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
Cap the power steering line to prevent loses of fluid

and dirt ingress.
If power steering fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

effected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 55 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the gaiter to twist.
Make sure that the tie rod end is installed with the
same number of turns as when removed.
12. NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
Torque: 117 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System -

General Information, General Procedures).
3. Refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
1.
2. Siphon the fluid from the power steering reservoir.
Vehicles with diesel engine
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Vehicles with petrol engine
5. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System -

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling (211-00 Steering System -

4. Refer to: Turbocharger Bypass Valve (303-04B Fuel Charging and

Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 47 Nm
7. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Steering Linkage -
Tie-rod end retaining nut 133 98 -
Tie-rod end lock nut 55 41 -
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
Installation).

Vehicles with high performance brakes
4.
5.
All vehicles


7. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on
the brake hose.
Torque: 55 Nm
Torque: 133 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Note the number of turns when removing the tie rod

end to aid installation.
Make sure that the tie rod end is installed with the
same number of turns as when removed.
Installation

Steering Column -
Steering wheel retaining bolt 40 29 -
Steering column pinch bolt 30 22 -
Steering column retaining nuts 25 18 -
Steering column flexible coupling to body bolts 10 7
Steering Column - Steering Column - Component Location
Item Description
1 Electric steering lock mechanism
2 Column mounting plate
3 Upper shroud
4 Right Hand (RH) steering column multifunction switch
5 RH gear change paddle switch
6 Steering wheel
7 Left Hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch
8 Column adjust switch
9 Lower shroud
10 Rake adjustment housing
11 Reach adjustment housing
12 Column adjustment motor
13 Lower column - Upper collapse shaft
14 Bulkhead bearing and seal assembly
15 Lower column - Lower collapse shaft
Steering Column - Steering Column - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the intermediate shaft assembly and the steering wheel. The 3
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the
steering rack.
The electric steering column is a standard fitment on all models. The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for
steering wheel reach and rake, the electric column lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Steering adjustment memory
positions are stored in the driver's seat module. The column also features a 'tilt away' function which moves the steering
column away from the driver allowing easier exit and entry to the vehicle.
Column adjustment is provided by a single motor for both reach and rake adjustment. Operation of the column adjustment is
controlled by a four way joystick type switch located in the column lower shroud. Column adjustment is an integral part of the
driver position memory system.
Steering Column - Steering Column - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus
Steering Column Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Battery Junction Box (BJB)
3 Steering column adjust switch
4 Electric steering column lock
6 Rake adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
7 Reach adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
9 Central Junction Box (CJB)
System Operation
STEERING COLUMN OPERATION
Power for the steering column operation is supplied via a megafuse in the BJB (battery junction box) to the CJB (central
junction box). The CJB in turn supplies power to the column adjustment motor, the reach and rake solenoids and also the
adjustment potentiometers in response to driver requests made with the column adjust switch.
The column adjust switch is a joystick type, 2-axis switch with positions for reach and rake adjustment. The switch can also be
rotated to change the mode selection from auto to manual. The switch is hardwired to the CJB with 3 wires. The 3 wires
provide a power supply to the switch and the mode select switch, the third connection is a ground provided by the CJB.
Up/down (rake) and in/out (reach) selections on the switch are each passed through a resistor of differing values to the CJB.
The CJB monitors the output value from the switch and operates the column adjustment motor in the required direction and
simultaneously energizes the required solenoid for rake or reach adjustment. When the applicable solenoid is energized, a
clutch is engaged and locates on a lead screw. The motor rotates the lead screw and the rotational drive of the screw is
transferred into linear movement of the applicable clutch to move either the rake or reach adjustment. For reach adjustment,
the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For rake adjustment the lead screw drives a rake lever which
moves the column up or down as required.
The position of the column is monitored by potentiometers which are connected to the CJB. The CJB monitors the output signal
from the potentiometers to precisely control the positioning of the column in each plane.
The CJB controls the memory positioning of the column via a medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus connection to
the driver's seat module. The CJB receives information regarding the particular remote handset used to enter the vehicle and
outputs positional information relative to that stored for the handset. This information is used by the CJB to move the column
to the memorized position relating to the remote handset used.
The column logic in the CJB also incorporates an entry/exit mode. When the vehicle is unlocked or the ignition is switched off,
the CJB lifts the column upwards to its maximum rake position to allow the driver more room below the steering wheel and
improve access/egress of the vehicle. When the ignition is next switched on the column will adjust to its previous position.
The electric steering column lock is controlled by the CJB and is an integral function of the passive start system.
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
STEERING COLUMN
Item Description
1 Rake housing
3 Mounting plate
4 Rake lever
5 Crash tube
6 Distance keeper
7 Steering wheel mounting splines
8 Steering angle sensor ring
9 Crash adaptor
10 Rake lever pivot bearing (2 off)
11 Flanged locknut (4 off) - mounting to cross-beam
12 Rake solenoid
13 Rake clutch
14 Spindle
15 Reach solenoid
16 Reach clutch
18 Outer clamping yoke
19 Clamp bolt
20 Inner tube yoke
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle cross-beam and secured with 4 flanged lock nuts onto studs integral with the
cross-beam.
Item Description
1 Tube and clamping yoke pivot bearing
2 Tube yoke
3 Tolerance ring
4 Locking ring
5 Axial housing
6 Rake housing
7 Tube
8 Splined shaft
9 Crash adaptor
10 Steering angle sensor ring
11 Steering wheel mounting splines
12 Upper bearing
14 Lower bearing
15 Outer clamping yoke
16 Ball bearings (12 off)
17 Distance keeper
18 Crash tube
The column comprises a cast magnesium mounting bracket which provides for the attachment to the cross-beam. Attached to
the mounting bracket is a rake lever which is connected to the mounting bracket at the lower end with 2 pivot bearings. The
bearings allow the rake lever to rotate upwards or downwards to adjust the column rake.
The rake lever also provides for the attachment of the rake housing which can slide within the lever to provide reach
adjustment. Within the rake housing is the axial housing which is supported on each side with 6 ball bearings which allow the
rake housing to move forward or backwards. The bearings on each side are arranged in groups of 3 bearings and are separated
by a distance keeper which allows the housing to be supported on bearings along its length. Within the axial housing is a tube
which is supported at the upper end of the column on the upper bearing. The tube has a central splined hole which provides for
the fitment of the splined shaft. The splined shaft can slide within the tube on the splines when the column reach is adjusted
or the column collapses in a crash condition. The splined shaft also passes rotary motion from the steering wheel through the
length of the column to the outer clamping yoke which is supported on the lower bearing.
The electric steering column lock is attached to the top of the rake lever. A lock bolt within the steering column lock engages in
one of 8 slots in the locking sleeve located at the lower end of the column preventing rotation of the steering wheel. The
locking sleeve is retained by a tolerance ring which in turn is located on the outer diameter of the tube yoke. The tolerance
ring allows a specified amount of torque to be applied to the splined shaft before it slips, preventing damage to the column
lock due to excessive force being applied to the steering wheel when the lock is engaged. The tolerance ring is designed to
slip on the splined shaft when the applied torque exceeds the fitted slip load of 200 Nm minimum. Repeated rotation of the
lock collar will reduce its slipping torque to 100 Nm minimum. The lock is controlled by the CJB and is an integral function of
the passive start system.
A steering angle sensor is located at the upper end of the steering column and is attached to the crash adaptor. The sensor
measures steering rotation via a toothed wheel located on the splined tube at the upper end of the column. The sensor
receives a power supply from the CJB and supplies 2 signals (A and B) relating to the steering rotation to the ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module. The module transmits this data on the high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
The steering column is adjustable electrically, for reach and rake. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric adjustment
motor, a lead screw, a rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a reach clutch and a rake clutch. The column adjustment is controlled
manually using a joystick switch located on the LH (left-hand) side of the column lower cowl. The joystick can be moved
forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and down to adjust the rake. The switch selection
energizes the adjustment motor in the applicable direction and also engages the applicable solenoid and clutch.
When the joystick switch is rotated to the 'auto' position, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost rake position when
the ignition is switched off. It will re-adjust to the position corresponding to the memory position for the remote handset when
the ignition is switched on.
The memory function of the electric column is controlled by the CJB and linked to the driver';s seat module. The module
provides for the storage of three separate memory positions which are stored against 3 individual remote handsets.
Refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The steering wheel locates on a splined shaft in the upper column assembly and is secured with a bolt. The steering wheel
houses the driver's airbag and switches for the audio system, gear change and speed control. A clockspring is used to connect
the steering wheel electrical components to the vehicle harness.
Two plastic shrouds are fitted to the upper column assembly. The lower shroud is fitted with an energy absorbing foam pad to
minimize leg injury in the event of an accident.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Item Description
1 Yoke
2 Upper collapse shaft
3 Flexible coupling
4 Shaft plate
5 Rivet (4 off)
6 Upper tube
7 Plastic sleeve
8 Boot
9 Bearing (4 off)
10 Teeth tube
11 Lower shaft
12 Upper yoke
13 Spider
14 Bearing (4 off)
15 Lower yoke
16 Yoke clamp bolt (2 off)
The intermediate shaft assembly comprises 2 splined shafts connected by a universal joint in the center.
The upper collapse shaft has a flexible coupling at its upper end. The flexible coupling controls axial and torsional movements
and also assists with noise and vibration damping. The flexible coupling is fitted with a shaft plate which has a boss with
machined flats on it. The flats provide positive location on the upper column outer clamping yoke. A cut-out in the boss allows
for the fitment of a clamping bolt to secure the upper column outer clamping yoke. The cut-out ensures that the lower shaft
assembly can only be fitted in one orientation.
The upper collapse shaft is connected to the stopper plate of the flexible coupling with splines. The stopper plate is connected
to the shaft plate via the flexible coupling and is secured with rivets. The upper collapse shaft has a series of splines which
engage with the upper tube. The splines allow the upper collapse shaft to slide into the upper tube in the event of an
accident.
The upper tube is positively connected to the upper half of the yoke of the universal joint. A plastic tube is located around the
upper tube and provides for the attachment of a boot which seals the lower shaft assembly where it passes through the
vehicle bulkhead.
The yoke is attached to the teeth tube which in turn is located over the lower shaft on splines. The teeth tube is fitted with a
tolerance ring which provides resistance to movement of the splines on the lower shaft. The splines of the lower shaft allow it
to slide into the teeth tube with the tolerance ring controlling the collapse.
The lower shaft is fitted with a yoke which provides the attachment to the torsion bar of the steering valve unit.
Steering Column - Steering Column

Steering Column - Steering Column
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Lower Section (501-12 Instrument Panel and
Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor (206-09 Anti-Lock Control -

Stability Assist, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 30 Nm
10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Steering Column - Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
4. Torque: 30 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 30 Nm
7.
8.
Installation

Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Removal
2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint

System, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:

ahead position.
Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is centered

and pointing vertically prior to the steering wheel
installation. On removal of the special tool keep the
clockspring cables taught to prevent the cassette moving
from the set position. Do not allow the clockspring to
unwind. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Torque: 40 Nm

5. Torque: 6 Nm
6.
7. CAUTIONS:

removal.
Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
Torque: 6 Nm
8.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Component Location
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES - COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Left Hand (LH) steering wheel switch assembly
2 Steering column adjust switch
3 LH gear change (-) paddle switch
4 LH steering column multifnction switch
5 Clockspring
6 Right Hand (RH) steering column multifunction switch
7 RH gear change (+) paddle switch
8 RH steering wheel switch assembly
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column multifunction switches are situated on the steering column and consist of the wiper switch, the turn signal
indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The RH (right-hand) multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
Fast speed wipe
Wash/wipe
Rain sensing/variable wipe selection.
The LH (left-hand) multifunction switch controls the following functions:
Turn signal indicators

Side lamps
Headlamps
Autolamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 5
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment and also automatic and manual control.
The trip button allows the driver to cycle though an option menu and also reset trip cycle mileage calculations. The trip
computer information is displayed in the instrument cluster message centre.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions.
The steering wheel has an internal heating element. This is controlled by the driver via the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; O = Local Interconnect Network (LIN); D = High speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus; P =
Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring
Item Description
1 LH steering wheel switch assembly
2 RH steering wheel switch assembly
3 Clockspring
5 Engine Control Module (ECM)
6 Adaptive speed control module
7 Slip ring
8 Steering wheel heater module
10 To MOST ring
11 Touch Screen Display (TSD)
12 Steering wheel heater element
System Operation
LEFT HAND (LH) STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
The CJB (central junction box) outputs a reference voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. When the switch is in the central
off position, the voltage flows through 3 resistors which are connected in series and back to the CJBwhich monitors the signal
and determines the turn signal indicators are off.
When the switch is operated in the LH (left-hand) turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the CJB is routed
via 1 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the applicable turn signal indicators
until it detects the voltage through the 3 resistors to signal the the indicators are now off.
When the switch is operated in the RH (right-hand) turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the CJB is routed
via 2 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the applicable turn signal indicators
until it detects the voltage through the 3 resistors to signal the the indicators are now off.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
The CJB outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the light selection
function of the switch and the second feed being supplied to the autolamp exit delay function. The switch position is
determined by CJB by monitoring the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors in series
depending on the selection made.
When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The returned
signal voltage is detected by the CJB which determines that no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to the
autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that autolamp or exit
delay has not been selected.
When the lighting control switch is in the sidelamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the sidelamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay
switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that autolamp or exit delay has not been
selected.
When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activateS the headlamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit
delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that autolamp or exit delay has not
been selected.
When the lighting control switch is in the autolamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the autolamp function. The reference voltage to the autolamp
exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that autolamp has been
selected.
AUTOLAMP EXIT DELAY
When the lighting control switch is in any of the autolamp exit delay positions, the lighting control switch reference voltage
flows through 1, 2 or 3 of the 4 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which determines that
autolamp has been selected.
Depending on the selected position, the reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 3, 2 or 1 of the
resistors which is detected by the CJB. The CJB the activates the autolamp exit delay period that has been selected at 30, 60
or 120 seconds respectively.
TRIP FUNCTION BUTTON
The CJB outputs a reference voltage to the trip function button. When the function button is pressed a ground path is
completed and a signal voltage is returned to the CJB via a resistor in the switch. The returned reference voltage is detected
by the CJB which performs the requested trip function.
RIGHT HAND (RH) STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH

The CJB outputs 4 separate reference voltages to the following switch functions:
Wash/wipe switch
Intermittent wipe switch
Master wiper switch
Flick wipe switch
WASH/WIPE SWITCH
The reference voltage is supplied from the CJB to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being
operated the current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the CJB. When the wash/wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the CJB which activates the wash/wipe function.
INTERMITTENT DELAY/AUTO WIPE SWITCH
The reference voltage is supplied from the CJB to the switch and can pass through up to 7 resistors, connected in series, for
intermittent delay selections and the auto wipe function.
When the rotary switch is in the auto position the reference voltage flows through 1 resistor. The returned signal voltage is
detected by the CJB which determines auto wipe is selected and activates the auto wipe function.
With the rotary switch in one of the intermittent positions, the reference voltage is routed through up to 7 of the resistors
depending on the delay period selected. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which determines the selected
delay period and activates the selected intermittent wipe function.
NOTE: The delay period for the intermittent selections can vary according to vehicle speed.
MASTER WIPER SWITCH
The reference voltage supplied from the CJB to the master wiper switch. The voltage can pass through up to 4 resistors
connected in series.
When the switch is in the off position, the reference voltage passes through 4 resistors and the returned voltage is monitored
by the CJB which determines that no wiper selections have been requested.
With the switch in the intermittent, slow wipe or fast wipe position, the reference voltage passes through 3, 2 or 1 resistors
respectively. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which determines selected delay period. The
instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the selected wipe function.
FLICK WIPE SWITCH
The reference voltage is supplied FROM THE CJB to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being
operated the current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the CJB. When the flick wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the CJB which activates the flick wipe function.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUST SWITCH

The CJB supplies 2 reference voltages to the column adjust switch.
The first reference voltage is supplied to the joystick switch. When the switch is moved to one of its 4 positions, the switch
contact is completed and the reference voltage is passed through one of 4 different resistors with different values. The
returned signal voltage is measured by the CJB which determines the selected column adjust request. The CJB outputs a
supply to the steering column adjustment motor and energizes the applicable clutch solenoid to move the column to the
desired position.
The second reference voltage is supplied to the auto/manual selection of the switch. When the switch is in the auto position,
the reference voltage passes directly through the switch contacts and is measured by the CJB. The CJB outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the driver seat module which responds with the recorded memory
position setting. The CJB then activates the column adjustment motor and clutch solenoids to move the column to the
memorized position. When the switch is in the manual position the reference circuit is broken. The CJB detects the broken
circuit and allows manual operation of the column adjustment switch to move the column.
STEERING WHEEL HEATER

The heated steering wheel module receives a power supply from the ignition relay in the CJB. This is passed via a pair of slip
rings in the steering wheel to the heated steering wheel module. When the driver operates the heated steering wheel switch,
which is located on the LH steering wheel switch assembly, a path is completed between the switch and the steering wheel
heater module. This is sensed by a heated steering wheel status circuit located in the switch assembly. A status is passed
from the status circuit to the heated steering wheel module which operates the heater elements. The module monitors the
element temperature via a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) temperature sensor and controls the power supply to the
element to keep the wheel at the optimum temperature.
STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
The steering column multifunction switches are situated on the steering column and consists of the wiper switch, the turn
signal indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 4
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions. Refer to: Audio System (415-01A Information and
Entertainment System, Description and Operation).
LEFT HAND (LH) STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Item Description
1 High beam
2 Lighting control rotary switch
3 RH turn signal indicator
4 Headlamp flash
5 LH turn signal indicator
6 Trip computer function button
The LH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:

Side lamps
Headlamps
Auto lamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer.
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
H
RIGHT HAND (RH) STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Item Description
1 Auto/intermittent rotary switch
2 Fast wipe
3 Slow wipe
4 Intermittent wipe
5 Off position
6 Wash/wipe
7 Flick wipe
The RH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
Fast speed wipe
Wash/wipe
Rain sensing/variable wipe selection
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUST SWITCH

The column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud and held in place with a spring clip. The 4-way
joystick switch allows the adjustment of the steering column for both reach and rake angle.
The switch has a two position rotary switch which allows selection of auto and manual operation. The manual position allows
the driver to set the position of the steering column as required and disables the automatic positioning by the memory
function. The auto position allows the desired position of the column to be set by the driver using the driver's seat memory
buttons. The column position is automatically reset once the applicable remote handset has been detected by the vehicle
security systems.
STEERING WHEEL HEATER

On certain models the rim of the steering wheel contains a heater element. Operation of the heater is selected using a switch
on the LH steering wheel switch assembly.
The heater temperature is controlled by a heated steering wheel control module located within the steering wheel. Power for
the heater element is supplied to the steering wheel via 2 contacts on the clockspring and a slip ring mounted on the steering
wheel.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For a detailed description of the steering column switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Switches Fuse(s)
Electric steering column lock Electrical connector(s)
Wiring Harness
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
3. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: New units must be configured using the Programmable

Module Installation Routine in the diagnostic tool.

Steering Column Switches - Ignition Switch
Removal
1. Position the steering wheel fully lowered and fully extended.
2. NOTE: The steering wheel is shown removed for

clarity.
Torque: 2 Nm

clarity.
4.
5.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Engine TDV6 3.0L Diesel
As diagnosis of the different areas of the engine is covered in other sections and by general procedures, this section is limited
to an oil pressure test.
For a detailed description of the engine system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine (Description and Operation),

Engine (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Engine oil level

Coolant level
Transmission fluid level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
Visibly damaged or worn parts
Loose or missing nuts or bolts
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Sensor installation/condition
Viscous fan and solenoid
the next step.
Engine Oil Pressure Check
NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres), must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
Wear protective gloves.
Remove the oil pressure sensor.
2. Install the special tool to the oil filter housing.
3. Install the special tool gauge and tighten the union.

4. Check and top-up the engine oil, if required.
5. Start and run the engine.
6. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM.
7. Turn off the engine.
8. Remove the special tools.
9. Install the oil pressure sensor.
10. Check and top-up the engine oil, if required.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (100-00 General Information,
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

Using a micrometer measure the diameter at 90
degrees intervals to determine if the journals are
out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal to
determine if there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified range,
install a new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.

Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read and note
the maximum and minimum values on the dial indicator
gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification, install new

components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier caliper. The
difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active area. Minor
pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage to

connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil
passages.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is within
specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify the bearing
bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets, measure the end
play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft using a
lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install new
thrust half rings to take up the end float and repeat the
measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be in

place and tightened to the specified torque; however, the bearing
shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.

Carry out the measurements in different directions and at
different heights to determine if there is any out-of-
roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range, hone out
the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust manifold for
evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket surfaces, or

other damage that would make it unfit for further use.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a

wire brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.

Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and crown
and check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt, check
whether the connecting rod is twisted or bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair. Do

not mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a new
piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not mix
up the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new piston
and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install the

piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.

The values given in the specification refer to a gauge
ring used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston

groove. To determine the piston ring clearance, insert the
Feeler Gauge right to the back of the groove, behind the wear
ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring clearance.

Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each valve

spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve stems.

If the measurements are not to specification, install a
new valve.
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the smoke test
equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
smoke test equipment.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if the right
hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential leak
locations.
For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual supplied
with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to prevent the

hood from falling if the smoke test equipment is secured to
the hood. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable location

under the hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the battery
positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment negative

cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable body

ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery
voltage. In this case, place the battery on charge and make
sure that the battery is fully charged before using the
smoke test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke test

equipment. Make sure that a continuous green light is
displayed.
6. NOTES:
In some cases it may be necessary to remove the air

cleaner(s) to allow access to the air cleaner outlet pipes.
In some cases it will be necessary to cap one of the

air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the blanking caps supplied in
the kit to cap the open orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).

7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment adapter
is a good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe. This must be an
air tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to the air

cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air cleaner
outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to
the adapter link hose.
8. NOTES:
The flow control valve must be in the fully open

position.
Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The smoke test

equipment will automatically switch off after this period of
time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of smoke is
visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the more
fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for escaping
smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look for fluorescent dye
deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Gasket Selection TDV6
3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-979
Measuring Bridge, Piston Protusion
Check
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean and free

of foreign material.
Zero the gauge on the cylinder block machined face.

2. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean and free
of foreign material.
NOTE: Note the dial gauge readings.
Take 2 measurements on each piston crown.
3. Use the average piston protrusion measurement (taken from all piston
measurements), to select the correct thickness cylinder head gasket.
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,

Specifications).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
Check
1. Using a suitable metallic straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the
cylinder head face in the areas illustrated. Note the maximum value.
2. CAUTION: Machine the minimum thickness of material from the

cylinder head to meet specification. If a selection of cylinder head
gaskets are available, increase the thickness of the cylinder head gasket
by one size.
NOTES:
Prior to having the cylinder head machined, prior approval is
required by Jaguar or Land Rover engineering.
If the cylinder head requires machining, this must be carried out by

a local engineering company.
If the cylinder head exceeds the maximum value (0.2mm), the cylinder
head must be machined.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Compression Test TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
JLR-303-1623-2
Adaptor, Compression Tester
JLR-303-1629
SP 90 Degree Elbow, Compression Tester
Check
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
1. Refer to: Glow Plugs (303-07B Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3. NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.

4. NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is

disabled before carrying out a cylinder compression test.
Failure to follow this step may result in damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.

6. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is
disabled before carrying out a cylinder compression test.
Failure to follow this step may result in damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Install the oil filter element and housing.
Torque: 28 Nm
10. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is disabled before
carrying out a cylinder compression test. Failure to follow this step may
Crank the engine for approximately five seconds to remove any

remaining fuel in the cylinders.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is clean, free
of foreign material and lubricant.
Using a suitable tool, remove the corner edges of special

tool JLR-303-1629 as illustrated.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1629
12. NOTE: The compression test gauge requires special

tool JLR-303-1629 for cylinders 2 and 5.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1623-2, JLR-303-1629

Torque: 10 Nm
13. Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1623-2
Torque: 10 Nm
14. NOTES:
This step requires the aid of another technician.
Print graphic number E163867 in Step 15. Use this

graphic to record each cylinder compression figure.
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully

charged before carrying out this procedure.
Crank the engine for 10 seconds and record the figure

displayed on the compression test gauge. Make sure the
pressure is released from the compression test gauge after
each cylinder recording. Repeat the process for all cylinders.
15.
16. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
17. The minimum cylinder compression reading recorded must be within 10%
of the maximum cylinder compression reading recorded. If the difference
across the cylinders is higher than 10% please contact dealer technical
support (DTS) for further assistance.
18. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, read and clear any
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Torque Maximum Engine Power Compression
Engine Description Capacity (EEC) (SAE) (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
60° "Vee" • 6 Cylinder • 2993 ccm 600 Nm at 2000 RPM 202 kW at 4000 RPM 16.1:1 ± 0.5 84 90
24 Valves
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:4:2:5:3:6
Glow Plug
Specification
9X2Q-6M090-AC
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives
Description Specification
Engine oil (EUR) 5W–30 meeting Jaguar WSS–M2C934–B
Engine oil (ROW) 5W–30 meeting Jaguar WSS–M2C913–B or C
Sealant WSE–M4G323–A5
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar premium cooling system fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil initial fill 7.7
Engine oil service fill with oil filter change 6.6
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.980 ± 0.010
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.99mm +/- 0.15
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.45mm +/-0.15
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.027 - 0.063
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.037 - 0.073
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 27.8mm +/-0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 25.2mm +/-0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.935±0.008
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.925±0.008
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 38.9mm
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 38.9mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 31.22mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 31.22mm
Camshaft lobe max lift intake (mm) 3.75187mm
Camshaft lobe max lift exhaust (mm) 3.80999mm
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.040-0.090
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 25.950±0.010
Bearing diameter - all positions 26.015±0.015
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm) 0.030mm
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.010mm
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (flatness specification) 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Cylinder Head Gasket
Identification Gasket Thickness (mm) Piston Protrusion (mm)
2 1.17 0.552 - 0.603
3 1.22 0.604 - 0.655
4 1.27 0.656 - 0.707
5 1.32 0.708 - 0.760
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for correct torque sequence

Piston cooling nozzle 10 7 88
Engine coolant drain plug 18 13 159
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Oil filter housing retaining bolts 10 7 88
Fuel injection pump cradle retaining bolts 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump to cradle retaining bolts 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump bracket to cradle retaining 10 7 88
bolts
Fuel injection pump to bracket retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pump retaining bolts 10 7 88
Crankshaft rear oil seal housing retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pan extension retaining bolts M6 10 7 88
Oil pan extension retaining bolts M8 23 17 88
Oil pump pick up pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pan retaining bolts 10 7 88
Engine oil level sensor retaining nuts 10 7 88
Crankshaft timing belt pulley retaining bolt A - -
Crankshaft position sensor (CKP) retaining bolt 5 - 44
Timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 10 7 88
Camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts A - -
Timing belt idler pulley retaining bolt 45 33 398
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining 10 7 88
bolts
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining nut 50 37 442
Coolant outlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Coolant pump retaining bolts 10 7 88
Timing belt tensioner retaining bolt 26 19 230
Engine lifting eye bolts 23 17 203
Camshaft rear end accessory drive (READ) pulley Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - Stage 1 - 708 Stage 2 -
hub retaining bolt 80 degrees 80 degrees 80 degrees
Camshaft front timing pulley hub retaining bolt 80 + 80° 59 + 80 ° 708 + 80°
Camshaft READ pulley retaining bolt 23 17 203
Camshaft front timing pulley retaining bolt 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump timing belt tensioner bolt 23 17 203
Camshaft position sensor (CMP) retaining bolt 10 7 88
Intake manifold / camshaft cover retaining bolts 10 7 88
Brake vacuum pump retaining bolts 23 17 203
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch 14 10 124
Glow plug 11 8 97
Fuel rail retaining bolts 23 16 203
Fuel rail bracket retaining bolts 23 16 203
Fuel injector retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
High pressure fuel line bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
Turbocharger assembly to exhaust manifold 24 18 212
retaining nuts
Exhaust manifold to cylinder head retaining nuts A - -
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 97
Turbocharger heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 97
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining 10 7 88
bolts M6
Accessory drive belt idler pulley bracket retaining 83 61 735
bolts
Timing belt covers retaining bolts 10 7 88
Engine mount bracket to engine retaining bolts 90 66 796
Exhaust cross over pipe retaining nuts 24 18 212
Engine coolant inlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Coolant pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 221
Crankshaft pulley/vibration damper retaining 25 18 221
bolts
Throttle body retaining threaded stud 10 7 88
Wiring harness retaining nuts 10 7 88
Vacuum hose assembly retaining bolts 10 7 88
Flexplate retaining bolts A - -
Accessory drive component bracket retaining 23 17 203
bolts
Power steering pump retaining bolts 23 17 203
Generator retanining bolts 47 35 416
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 47 35 416
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 416
Air conditioning compressor bracket retaining 23 17 203
bolts
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 23 17 203
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Component Location
External Views
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0 liter diesel engine is a V6 configuration unit with 2 banks of 3 cylinders arranged at 60 degrees to each other. There
are 4 valves per cylinder, which are operated by 2 overhead camshafts per cylinder bank.
The cylinder block is cast in compacted graphite iron, which uses less material to produce compared to a conventional cast iron
block. This provides reduced weight and length with superior structural capabilities. A separate aluminum ladder frame, bolted
to the underside of the cylinder block, provides a lightweight, compact and very stiff bottom end of the engine.
The cylinder heads are cast aluminum with a moulded plastic camshaft cover with an integral air intake. The single-piece oil
pan is formed from stamped steel. The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy. A moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted
over the upper engine to absorb engine-generated noise.
A low compression ratio of 16:1 contributes to improved emissions quality, quieter combustion and compatibility with the
engine’s unique forced induction system. For additional information refer to Intake Air distribution and Filtering.
The low compression ratio also means less heat build-up in the piston bowl and more efficient fuel burn, resulting in the
production of lower levels of pollutants. It also assists with cold starting allowing a faster cranking speed.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
OPERATION
Operation of the engine is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic
Engine Controls.
ENGINE STRUCTURE
Item Description
1 Cylinder heads
2 Cylinder block
3 Stiffening frame
4 Oil pan
CYLINDER BLOCK COMPONENTS

The cylinder block is a single cast construction with a hollow beam structure, cast from compact graphite iron. This type of
construction provides outstanding strength and durability and uses less material than a conventional cast iron block, therefore
reducing engine weight and length.
The use of compact graphite iron allows the cross sectional areas of the casting to be reduced, compared with a conventional
gray cast iron block. This ensures reduced engine weight and length, with higher structural capabilities.
To maintain the stiffness of the bottom end of the cylinder block and crankshaft system, the cylinder block has a deep skirt
and bearing cap design. Each of the main bearing caps is double bolted at each side of the crankshaft bearing and cross bolted
back to the cylinder block.
The cylinder block assembly is further stiffened by coupling it to a separate die cast aluminium stiffening frame, which is
bolted to the cylinder block skirt faces and to the bearing caps.
Lubrication oil is distributed through the cylinder block, via a main oil gallery and channels bored in the block, to all critical
moving parts. These channels divert oil to the main and connecting rod bearings via holes machined into the crankshaft.
A tapping at the rear of the cylinder block connects a pipe to the turbochargers by means of banjo connections. Oil is supplied,
under pressure via this tapping, from the oil pump to provide lubrication for the bearings of the turbochargers.
Cylinder cooling is achieved by coolant circulating through chambers in the cylinder block casting.
Two hollow metal dowels are used to locate the cylinder heads to the cylinder block, 1 on each side at the rear of the unit.
A port is included at the RH (right-hand) and LH (left-hand) side of the cylinder block, below each of the turbochargers, to
connect the turbochargers oil return pipe to the oil pan.
Two coolant drain plugs are installed in the cylinder block; one is fitted in the rear RH side, and the other is fitted in the
middle of the cylinder block on the LH side.
Engine Data
NOTE: Arrow indicates front of engine

Item Description
1 Engine data locations
Engine data is marked at 2 locations at the back of the cylinder block. Component diameters are represented by alphabetical
and numerical codes; keys to the codes are in the removal and installation section of this manual.
Piston Cooling Jets
Item Description
1 Bolt
2 Cooling jet
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and piston pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil onto the inside of
the piston, the oil then flows through 2 internal wave shaped channels to help cool each piston crown.
CRANKSHAFT
Item Description
1 Oil pump drive
2 Main bearing Journal
3 Connecting rod bearing journal
4 Rear drive flange
5 Rear oil seal location
6 Trigger wheel location
The crankshaft is forged steel and fillet rolled with induction hardened journals, which run in 4 bearings with clamped 2 layer
bearing shells. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 4 are flanged, which limits the end float of the crankshaft. The
main bearing caps are double bolted and cross bolted to increase the strength and rigidity of the engine block.
The main bearings are aluminum/tin split plain selective bearings. An oil groove in the top half of each bearing transfers oil
into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 4 contain
integral thrust washers, which limit the end float of the crankshaft.
Rear Crankshaft Oil Seal
Item Description
1 Housing
2 Seal
3 Crankshaft
4 Rear oil seal retainer
5 Bolt (10 off)
The rear main oil seal and retainer assembly is a one-piece unit and is supplied with its own plastic fitting sleeve. The seal
and retainer have 2 locating dowels, 10 fixing bolts and a rubber seal. In addition, the retainer has a location for the
crankshaft position sensor.
Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
A torsional vibration crankshaft damper pulley is bolted to the front of the crankshaft.
Crankshaft Trigger Wheel
Item Description
1 Special Tool
2 Trigger wheel
The crankshaft trigger wheel is located on the rear of the crankshaft. It is pressed onto the crank using a special tool, which
also precisely aligns the trigger wheel for crankshaft position and timing.
The trigger wheel consists of 60 magnets minus 2 for ECM crankshaft position reference and synchronization. The magnets
cannot be seen on the trigger wheel, which therefore can only be positioned using a special tool.
If the trigger is removed for any reason, then a new trigger wheel must be fitted.
Stiffening Frame
Item Description
1 Stiffening Frame
The stiffening frame is fitted to the lower cylinder block to stiffen the base structure of the engine, helping to reduce noise,
vibration and harshness. The frame is made of high-pressure die cast aluminum and also incorporates an oil baffle plate to
reduce oil foaming and splash.
The stiffening frame is secured to the cylinder block with 2 dowels, 2 locator pins for the gasket and 18 retaining bolts; 3
different lengths of bolts are used:
M6 x 20 (6 off)
M8 x 75 (4 off)
M6 x 105 (8 off).
Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the stiffening frame, minimize main bearing clearance changes due to heat
expansion.
A gasket seals the joint between the stiffening frame and the cylinder block.
An oil pick-up pipe with an integral strainer, locates in the front of the stiffening frame to provide oil to the crankshaft driven
oil pump.
OIL PAN COMPONENTS

A pressed steel oil pan, manufactured from a ‘sound deadening steel’ material, is bolted to the stiffening frame with 14 M6 x
16 bolts and is sealed with a reusable gasket. An engine oil drain plug and the oil level and temperature sensor are located
towards the front of the oil pan.
Item Description
1 Oil pump
2 Oil suction tube
3 Oil pan
4 Oil level and temperature sensor
An ultrasonic sensor provides an electronic indication when the oil in the oil pan is low or high. This removes the requirement
for the mechanical dipstick. The sensor monitors the level of the oil continually during trips. An advantage in comparison with
the static 'dipstick' method is that all marginal influences, for example vehicle being on a slope, lateral and longitudinal
acceleration, are compensated for by averaging.
The values determined can be used to signal that the minimum oil level has been reached or to display the current oil level if
required.
Item Description
The sensor is mounted to the underside of the oil pan where it sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward, it then measures
the time for the pulse to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil.
Warnings will be displayed in the message center if the oil level is not maintained within the safe operating levels (minimum
and maximum). A warning will also be displayed if there is a fault with the oil level monitoring system.
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Item Description
1 Connecting rod bolts (2 off)
2 Connecting rod
3 Piston
4 Piston pin
5 Circlips
6 Connecting rod identification
The connecting rods are manufactured from sinter-forged steel and have fracture-split bearing caps. The bearing caps are
produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centre-line. As well as being easier
to manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is
etched on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The selective connecting rod
bearings are aluminum/tin split plain bearings. The connecting rod bearing is 'sputter coated', which is a manufacturing process
that layers the bearing material to produce a higher load capacity for improved durability.
NOTE: The connecting rods are not selective.

Piston and Connecting Rod Orientation
Item Description
1 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 4-6
2 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 1-3
3 Bolts (12 off)
4 Connecting rod bearing cap (6 off)
5 Connecting rod lower bearing (6 off)
When installing a connecting rod, ensure the back of the connecting rod faces the center of the 'vee'.
The pistons are made from aluminum alloy and are fitted with 3 rings. The piston crown incorporates a pronounced bowl; this
forms the combustion chamber, which promotes swirl and turbulence necessary for good combustion and improved emissions.
In addition, the piston skirt has a molybdenum-coated surface, which counteracts scoring of the cylinder bore and piston.
The piston also incorporates a double wave gallery within the piston crown to enhance piston cooling. The pistons are supplied
oil by means of spray jets located in the cylinder block oil gallery. These jets ensure optimum piston cooling to counteract the
high temperatures generated by the combustion process.
Each piston is installed on a piston pin located in an aluminum/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
Piston Ring Orientation
Item Description
1 Ring gap oil control
2 Ring gap upper compression
3 Spiral joint oil control
4 Ring gap lower compression
5 Upper compression ring
6 Lower compression ring
7 Oil control ring
When installing pistons, ensure that the arrows on the piston crowns all point to the front of the engine. All pistons are
common single grade/single part number for all engines.
The piston top ring is a taper type and is fitted with the taper to the top of the piston. All rings marked 'top' are assembled
with 'top' uppermost. All rings must be spaced evenly around the piston before installing. The circumference gap of the double
bevelled oil control ring must be opposite the spiral control joint.
CAMSHAFT TIMING COMPONENTS
Item Description
1 Rear engine accessory drive rear cover
2 Rear engine accessory drive tensioner
3 Bolt
4 Fuel pump pulley
5 Nut
6 Rear engine accessory drive camshaft pulley
7 Rear engine accessory drive belt
8 Bolt
9 Rear engine accessory drive front cover
10 RH chain tensioner
11 RH timing chain
12 RH intake camshaft
13 RH exhaust camshaft
14 LH intake camshaft
15 LH exhaust camshaft
16 LH chain tensioner
17 LH timing chain
18 Timing belt
19 Front cover bridge
20 Primary drive cover
21 Bolt
22 Tensioner
23 Bolt
24 Idler
25 Camshaft hub
26 LH camshaft timing pulley
27 Bolt (3 off)
28 Bolt
29 Idler
30 Bolt
31 Bolt (3 off)
32 Bolt
33 RH camshaft timing pulley
34 Camshaft hub
Primary drive is provided by a single toothed belt from the crankshaft to the exhaust camshaft gears of each cylinder bank via
2 idler pulleys and a tensioner.
Timing belt adjustment is carried out by an eccentric type tensioner mounted on the RH front face of the cylinder block.
A primary drive cover is made up from 3 separate plastic mouldings. The covers are secured to the front of the cylinder block
and cylinder heads with 15 bolts and 1 stud and nut. The 2 upper covers are partially sealed with a rubber seal.
Secondary Drive
Item Description
1 Timing chain
2 Bolts
3 Intake camshaft
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Tensioner firing pin
Secondary drive is provided by 2 short crossover chains, which transfer drive from the exhaust camshaft gears to the intake
camshaft gears. The crossover drives are located at the rear of the RH cylinder bank and the front of the LH cylinder bank. This
allows for a much shorter and simpler run for the main camshaft drive belt at the front of the engine.
Each crossover chain is tensioned via an automatic chain tensioner, which acts directly on the chains via a guide rail. The
tensioners are located between the exhaust and intake camshafts at the front or rear of the cylinder head, depending on the
cylinder bank.
The tensioner firing pin holds the automatic chain tensioner in a compressed state to aid installation.
CYLINDER HEAD COMPONENTS
NOTE: LH cylinder head shown; RH cylinder head similar.
Item Description
1 Hydraulic lash adjusters (12 off)
2 Valve spring retainers (12 off)
3 Roller rockers (12 off)
4 Valve stem seals (12 off)
5 Valve guides (12 off)
6 Exhaust valves (6 off)
7 Intake valve seats (6 off)
8 Exhaust valve seats (6 off)
9 Intake valves (6 off)
10 Valve springs (12 off)
11 Bolt
12 Bracket
13 Intake manifold
14 Lifting eye
15 Washer
16 Bolt
17 Bolt
18 Bolt
19 Seal
20 Cap
21 Intake manifold cover assembly
22 Washer
23 Bolt
24 Lifting eye
25 Seal
26 Camshaft bearing caps (7 off)
27 Bolts (18 off)
28 Gasket
29 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
30 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
31 Intake camshaft
32 Exhaust camshaft
33 Cylinder head
34 Cylinder head bolts (8 off)
35 Exhaust manifold studs (6 off)
36 Cylinder head gasket
37 Core plug
38 Plug
39 Seal
40 Oil filler tube
41 Oil filler cap
42 Intake manifold
43 Injectors (3 off)
44 Bolt (2 off)
45 Bolt
46 Vacuum pump
47 Water outlet assembly
48 Bolt (4 off)
Cylinder Heads
Item Description
1 Studs
2 Bolts
3 Blanking plug
The aluminum gravity die cast cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Eight deep-seated bolts help reduce distortion
and secure each cylinder head to the cylinder block. The cylinder head bolts are located beneath the camshafts, 4 under the
intake camshaft and 4 under the exhaust camshaft. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
NOTE: The cylinder heads cannot be reworked.
The cylinder head gasket is a 3-layer, laminated steel type and is available in 5 different thicknesses. The choice of gasket
thickness is dependent on the maximum piston protrusion. Gasket thickness is identified by serrations cut into the front end of
the gasket.
The cylinder head has 4 ports machined at each cylinder location, 2 exhaust ports and 2 intake ports. One of the intake ports
is helical and functions as a swirl port, the other is arranged laterally as a tangential port and functions as a charge port.
The camshafts are of a hollow steel tube construction, with pressed on sintered lobes. Each camshaft is retained by aluminum
alloy caps, 5 for the exhaust camshafts and 4 for the intake camshafts. Location letters, A to I for the intake camshaft and R
to Z for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps for each cylinder head.
The LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft is machined to accept a rear camshaft gear. The rear camshaft gear provides drive for
the high-pressure fuel pump.
Refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
The exhaust camshaft gear of the LH cylinder head also incorporates a trigger wheel, which is used in conjunction with the
camshaft sensor to measure engine position.
The RH cylinder head exhaust camshaft is machined at the rear end to provide a drive connection for the vacuum pump.
The fuel injection nozzles are centrally mounted above each cylinder.
Refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
The glow plugs are arranged centrally on the intake side of the cylinder heads, between the 2 intake ports of each cylinder.
Refer to: Glow Plug System (303-07B Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
The engine lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder head, 1 at the front and 2 at the rear, 1 per cylinder head.
Camshaft Covers
Item Description
1 Stud bolt M6 x 40 (6 off)
2 Bolt M6 x 40 (7 off)
3 Oil filler cap
4 RH camshaft cover assembly
The camshaft covers are manufactured from vinyl ester composite. The RH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the
full load engine breather and the engine oil filler cap. The LH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the part load
engine breather. For additional information refer to 303-08A engine Emission Control.
Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets seal the joints between the camshaft covers and the cylinder heads. Together with spacers
and seals on the camshaft cover fasteners, they also isolate the covers from direct contact with the cylinder heads, to reduce
noise.
Intake and Exhaust Valves
Item Description
1 Valve spring collet (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Valve spring retainer (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
3 Valve spring (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
4 Valve stem seal (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
5 Intake valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
6 Exhaust valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
Each cylinder head incorporates 2 overhead camshafts operating 4 valves per cylinder via steel roller rockers with hydraulic lash
adjusters.
Roller Rockers with Hydraulic Lash Adjusters
Item Description
1 Roller rocker (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Hydraulic lash adjuster (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
The lightweight valve gear provides good economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31 mm (1.220 in) for the
exhaust and 35 mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5 mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in sintered metal
seats and guide inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both intake and exhaust valves.
Valve stem seals are integrated into the spring seats.
Vacuum Pump
Item Description
1 Vacuum pump connections
2 Bolt (2 off)
3 Nut
4 Bracket (emission hose)
5 Stud
The vacuum pump is located at the rear of the RH side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
Exhaust Manifolds
NOTE: LH exhaust manifold shown; RH exhaust manifold similar.
Item Description
1 Cylinder head
2 Connecting pipe
3 Nut (2 off)
4 Nut (3 off)
5 Exhaust manifold
6 Bolt
7 Gasket
8 Turbocharger (primary turbocharger shown)
9 Manifold rear heat shield
10 Bolt
11 Bolt (2 off)
12 Manifold heat shield
The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy with a high nickel content giving excellent heat and corrosion resistance
properties. They are sealed to the cylinder head by means of a steel gasket. Sacrificial plastic sleeves are used to align the
manifolds. These sleeves must be changed when refitting the manifolds. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to
expand and retract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
Each manifold has a connection for the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) transfer pipe.
The engine is fitted with twin variable geometry turbochargers, which fix to the exhaust manifolds by a 3-hole flange with a
steel gasket.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Item Description
1 Inlet camshaft
2 Exhaust camshaft
3 Turbocharger oil supply
4 Primary turbocharger
5 Crankshaft and connecting rods
6 Oil pan
8 Oil pump
9 Oil cooler and filter assembly
10 Piston cooling jets
11 Secondary turbocharger
Oil is drawn from the oil pan and pressurized by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered and distributed
through internal oil passageways.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for operation of the hydraulic
adjusters and the timing gear chain tensioners.
Oil Cooler and Filter Assembly
Item Description
1 Filter housing
2 'O' ring seal
3 Paper element
4 Retaining bolt (6 off)
5 Coolant outlet connection
6 Cooler assembly
The engine is lubricated by a force-feed oil circulation system with a full flow oil filter. The oil cooler forms a unit with the oil
filter, which is mounted centrally in the middle of the cylinder block between the 2 banks of cylinders. The engine oil is cooled
using the engine cooling system. This eliminates the need for an additional engine oil cooler remotely mounted.
Oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick return
of the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the RH camshaft cover.
The moulded composite oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
attitudes. A mesh screen in the inlet prevents debris from entering the oil system.
NOTE: Fuel cooling is facilitated by a blast air fuel cooler in the return line to the fuel tank.
Oil Pump
Item Description
1 Oil pump
2 Bolt (10 off)
The oil pump is a gear type pump and is bolted and dowelled to the front of the cylinder block. It is sealed by means of a
rubber gasket, which is recessed into the oil pump housing. The pump inlet and outlet ports align with oil passages in the
stiffening frame.
The pumping element is an eccentric rotor, which is directly driven by flats on the crankshaft. An integral pressure relief valve
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 lb/in2).
The front crankshaft oil seal is housed in the oil pump casing and is fitted such that its front face is 1 mm (0.04 in) under flush
with the machined front face of the oil pump.
NOTE: The seal is not to be pushed all the way into the bore as this will block the seal drains.
The oil pressure switch, located in the 'vee' at the front of the LHcylinder head, connects a ground input to the instrument
cluster when oil pressure is present. The switch operates at a pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 bar (2.2 to 5.9 lb/in2).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine
For a detailed description of the engine system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )

Engine (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Engine oil level

Engine (turns freely)
Coolant level
Transmission fluid level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
Visibly damaged or worn parts
Loose or missing nuts or bolts
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Sensor installation/condition
Viscous fan and solenoid
the symptom chart.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Engine Control Module 3.0L Tdv6 (PCM) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
4. WARNING: Observe due care when draining engine oil

as the oil can be very hot.
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Discard the bolt.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain.
Drain the engine oil.
Filling
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.
Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Torque: 23 Nm
Installation).
4. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5. Fill the engine with oil.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from
filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum,
before starting the engine. To check engine oil level follow steps 9-16.
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
7.
8.
Start the engine and allow to run for 20 minutes, stop the
engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are
in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the engine
oil level to stabilize.
Turn the ignition on.
10.
Press the right-hand directional button to access the
instrument cluster menu.
11.
Press the right-hand OK button.
12.
Oil Level Display.
13.
Press the right-hand OK button and follow the
instructions.
14.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2
seconds.
15.
The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the engine oil
level display.
This display is now the live reading of the engine oil
level.
Take a reading from the level display and, if
necessary, top up with oil as instructed.
16. Turn the ignition off.
17. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there
has been additional oil top up.

18.
19.
20.
Oil Level Display.
21.
instructions.
22.
seconds.
23.
level display.
level.
24.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for
more than 2 seconds.
25.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
27. Turn the ignition on.
28.
www.JagDocs.com
29.
30.
Oil Level Display.
31.
instructions.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now
been updated.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
NOTES:
Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
2.
3. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the engine
off before starting oil extraction.
4.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out through
the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
5.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
Filling
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
2.
3. Fill the engine with oil.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from
filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum,
before starting the engine. To check engine oil level follow steps 7-14.
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
5. CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can

be obtained by tightening the cap until an audible click is
heard.
6.
Start the engine and allow to run for 20 minutes, stop the
engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are
in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the engine
oil level to stabilize.

8.
9.
10.
Oil Level Display.
11.
instructions.
12.
seconds.
13.
level display.
level.
15. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there
has been additional oil top up.

16.
17.
18.
Oil Level Display.
19.
instructions.
20.
seconds.
21.
level display.
level.
22.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for
more than 2 seconds.
23.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
25. Turn the ignition on.
26.
27.
28.
Oil Level Display.
29.
instructions.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now
been updated.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
303-1124
Holding Tool, Camshaft Front Pulley
310-213
Fuel Injector Removal Adapter
Removal
2. Refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory Drive -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01, Removal and Installation).

6.
7. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel Charging and
Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
8. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.
NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return line has
a maximum of 8 uses.
9.
10. Install the special tool.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213
11.
12. Remove the special tool.
13. Remove the 2 remaining fuel injectors.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
22.
24.
26.
27.
28.
30.
32.
33.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner plunger.
34. Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly.

35.
36. CAUTION: Discard the seals.
37.
38.
39.
Installation
1.
2.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the camshafts
are aligned at the 12 o'clock position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the engine.
NOTES:
Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft bearing

caps with oil meeting Jaguar specification prior to
installation.
Use hypoid oil to lubricate the camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install new seals.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant to the exhaust camshaft seal bearing
caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 2 mm wide, to the LH rear and RH
front camshaft bearing caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 7 mm diameter, to the LH front and RH
rear camshaft bearing caps.
7. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their original

positions.
Stage 1: Bolts 1 to 14, 1 Nm.
8.
9.

11. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
13. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this

stage.
14. Torque: 10 Nm
15.
17. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

stage.
20. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
corrosion and foreign material.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Torque: 10 Nm
21. Torque: 24 Nm
22.
23. Torque: 10 Nm
24. Torque: 7 Nm
25.
26.
27.
28. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel injector
ports are clean and free of foreign material and lubricant
prior to installing the fuel injector.
Make sure that a new sealing washer is installed.
29. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
31.
32. Install the 2 remaining fuel injectors.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
Timing Peg, Automatic Transmission
303-1124
303-1126
Timing Peg, Camshaft Pulley
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
3. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
4. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
6.
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment hole in

the flywheel or flexplate with the block aperture.
8. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly

aligned. If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft one full turn clockwise.
10.

13.

15. CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the
camshafts. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the engine or the special tools.
NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
16. CAUTIONS:
Discard the component.
Discard the bolt.
17. CAUTION: Discard the component.

18.

20.

22.
23.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner plunger.
24. Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly.

25.
26. CAUTION: Discard the seal.
27. Remove the RH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain

tensioner assembly.
28. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.

29. Remove the secondary timing chain from the camshafts.
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.
2. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the camshafts
are aligned at the 12 o'clock position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the engine.
NOTES:
Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft bearing

caps with oil meeting Jaguar specification prior to
installation.
Use hypoid oil to lubricate the camshafts.
Install the camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install a new seal.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant to the exhaust camshaft seal bearing
caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 2 mm wide, to the LH rear and RH
front camshaft bearing caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 7 mm diameter, to the LH front and RH
rear camshaft bearing caps.
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their original

positions.
8. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining pin.
9.
11. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

stage.
14.
15. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this stage.
16. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in

the clockwise position.
Install the new timing belt.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing
belt in a counter-clockwise direction, in the
sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft
pulley.
Stage two: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand
camshaft pulley.
Stage four: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH
camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt
tensioner.
17. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window

is aligned with the groove as illustrated.
Tension the timing belt.

Rotate the tensioner assembly counter-clockwise.
Torque: 26 Nm

Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft

pulley center retaining bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm
21. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

22. Install with the special tool.
23.
Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft
pulleys.

If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the
timing belt installation procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.
24. Torque: 80 Nm
25. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Torque: 10 Nm
26. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Torque: 24 Nm
27. Torque: 25 Nm
29.
30. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Front Seal
Removal

Remove the special tool.
4.

6.
8.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is correctly
seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the special tool.
Install the special tool.
10.
Installation

2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft front seal or

the camshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below the face
of the cylinder head.
4.
6. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

stage.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1118
Remover, Camshaft Seal
303-1119
Installer, Camshaft Seal
303-1124
Removal
2.
4.
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is correctly
seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the special tool.
8.
Installation 1. Install with the special tool.
2. CAUTIONS:
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below the face
of the cylinder head.
4.
6.
Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

stage.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1120
Remover, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
303-1122
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
Removal
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the crankshaft
front seal, special tools or the crankshaft. Failure to follow
NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.
2. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.

3. Install the special tool to the crankshaft.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the seal is seated 1mm under flush.
Discard the bolt.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.
7. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
Removal
3. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Special Tool(s): 303-D121
8. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the pulley washer is correctly seated

before installing the pulley.
Do not lubricate the components.
Torque:
Stage 1:150 Nm
Stage 2:300 Nm
Stage 3:90°
2.
3.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14A Electronic

Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
3.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the crankshaft rear oil seal is correctly

located.
Make sure the crankshaft seal mating faces are clean

and dry.
Apply an 8 mm bead of sealant to the cylinder block in the

areas shown.
2.
Lubricate the oil seal.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14A Electronic

Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Vibration Damper
Removal
NOTES:

3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cylinder Head LH
Removal
3. Refer to: Camshaft (303-01A, Removal and Installation).
5.
6. Refer to: Catalytic Converter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L

7. NOTE: Discard the sealing washers.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

16. CAUTION: Discard the studs.
17.
18.
Position the turbocharger to one side.
19.
20.
NOTE: Discard the gasket.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
2. CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to

the cylinder block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket
may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder

block dowels.
NOTES:
No additional lubrication to the cylinder head bolts is

required.
Torque: 80 Nm
Torque: 180°
5.
6. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 24 Nm
9. Torque: 14 Nm
CAUTION: Install the nuts finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 24 Nm
12. CAUTION: Install new studs.
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
14. Torque: 10 Nm
15. CAUTIONS:
Install new studs.
Check the turbocharger and exhaust manifold mating

faces for distortion.
Install a new turbocharger to exhaust manifold gasket

every time the turbocharger is removed.
Torque: 13 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm
CAUTION: Only tighten the nut finger tight at this

stage.
21. NOTES:
Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 24 Nm
22. CAUTION: Install a new seal.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
24. Torque: 33 Nm
25.
26. Torque: 7 Nm
27. Torque: 7 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29. CAUTION: Make sure that a new sealing washer is

installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
31.
33. Refer to: Camshaft (303-01A, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cylinder Head RH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable
3. Refer to: Turbocharger RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -

Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).


7.
8.
9.
10.
11. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
12.
Installation
foreign material.
Clean and inspect the cylinder head and cylinder block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to

the cylinder block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket
may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder

block dowels.
NOTES:
No additional lubrication to the cylinder head bolts is

required.
Torque: 80 Nm
Torque: 180°
5.
6. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10.

tightening.

Torque: 28 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

16. Reconnect the battery ground cable
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
2. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 10 Nm

Installation).
5.
Torque: 10 Nm

prior to removal.
NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Torque: 35 Nm
9. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.

10. NOTES:
Support as necessary.
RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Torque: 100 Nm
11.
12. Torque: 63 Nm
13. Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.
14. Torque: 90 Nm

prior to removal.
NOTES:
Position and secure component in a bench vice fitted

with soft jaws.
Do not disassemble further if the component is

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount RH
Removal

3.
4. Torque: 63 Nm
5. Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.

6. Torque: 90 Nm

prior to removal.
NOTES:
Position and secure component in a bench vice fitted

with soft jaws.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold LH
Removal
2. Refer to: Turbocharger LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -

3.

Installation

tightening.

Torque: 28 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Refer to: Turbocharger LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal


Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Install the nuts finger tight before final tightening.

Torque: 28 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm
4. CAUTION: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Torque: 28 Nm

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Removal

3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
13.
15.


Installation 1. NOTES:
New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be fitted

if the old studs are removed.
Install new gaskets.
Torque: 15 Nm
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be

fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 15 Nm
3. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be

fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 15 Nm
4.
CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight at this

stage.
CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight at this

stage.
stage.

stage.

stage.
10. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe RH support bracket.
11. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe LH support bracket.
12. Torque: 23 Nm
stage.

stage.
15. Torque: 23 Nm
16. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
17. Torque: 23 Nm
18. Torque: 23 Nm
19. Torque: 23 Nm
20. Torque: 23 Nm
21. Torque: 11 Nm
22. Torque: 11 Nm
23.
24. CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight at this

stage.
25. Torque: 25 Nm
26. Torque: 12 Nm
27. Torque: 22 Nm
28. Torque: 11 Nm
29.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Flexplate
Special Tool(s)
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
Removal
3. Refer to: Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Installation).
4.
NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
Installation
NOTES:
Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Loosely install all retaining bolts.
Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in the stages

shown.
Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm.

Stage 2: Tighten to 45 degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten to 45 degrees.
3.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Filter Element
Removal
2.
Rotate the oil filter element housing six complete
turns counter-clockwise.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil filter
element housing for two minutes.
Remove the oil filter element housing.
3. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

2. NOTE: Make sure that only a hand wrench and socket
is used to remove and install the oil filter cap.
Torque: 27 Nm
5. Check and top-up the engine oil.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pan
Removal
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, General Procedures).
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

removal.
Discard the bolt.
NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
7. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
8. NOTES:
RHD shown, LHD is similar.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
foreign material.
17.
18.

NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

Installation
Torque: 10 Nm

4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Install a new seal.
foreign material.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 7 Nm
11. Torque: 7 Nm
12. Torque: 7 Nm
13. Torque: 7 Nm
14. NOTE: Support as necessary.
Torque: 100 Nm
15.
Torque: 35 Nm
17.
18.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pan Extension
Removal

4. Refer to: Oil Pan (303-01, Removal and Installation).
5. NOTES:

Engine shown removed for clarity.

7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.
15.
16.
17.
Installation
2. Apply the sealant as shown.

stage.
Torque:
M8 10 Nm
M6 4 Nm
Torque:
M8 24 Nm
M6 10 Nm
6. Torque: 33 Nm
7.
8. Torque: 24 Nm

stage.
10. Torque: 24 Nm
11. Torque: 24 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14. Torque: 10 Nm
15. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque: 47 Nm
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
19. NOTES:

Torque:
M8 10 Nm
M6 7 Nm
20. Refer to: Oil Pan (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pump
Special Tool(s)
Crankshaft Front Seal Remover
303-1120
Crankshaft Front Seal Sleeve
303-1122
Crankshaft Front Seal Installer
303-1121
Removal

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
2. For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator and

Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
3. For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley.

6. For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A, Removal and
Installation).
7. Remove the oil pump lower retaining bolts.

8. Remove the timing belt cover sealing strips.
9. Remove the oil pump.

Remove the ten retaining bolts.
10. Remove the alignment dowels (if equipped).
Installation
1. Install a new oil pump gasket.
2. Prime the oil pump.

Fill the orifice shown with 20 ml of engine oil.
Rotate the oil pump drive 2 complete turns.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean
and free of foreign material.
Apply a 3 mm diameter bead of sealant, to the area shown.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
Install the oil pump.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Install two bolts to the oil pump, only finger tighten at this
stage.
Remove the oil pump locator.
6. Install the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
Tighten the 4 bolts to 10 Nm.
7. Secure the oil pump.

Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm .
8. Install the timing belt cover sealing strips.
9. For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A, Removal and
Installation).
10. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the crankshaft

front seal, special tools or the crankshaft. Failure to follow
NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are

clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.

11. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.
Remove the sleeve from the special tool.

13. Remove the special tool from the crankshaft.

15. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.

Use the crankshaft bolt with the service tool.
16. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
NOTE: Wait 10 seconds before removing the

crankshaft seal installation tool.

Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley retaining
bolt.
17. CAUTION: Make sure that a new crankshaft pulley bolt
is installed.
NOTE: Before installing the crankshaft pulley retaining

bolt, note the thread size of the bolt (there are two
different sized threads, M14 and M16). Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Install the crankshaft pulley.

Tighten the M14 retaining bolt in two stages:
1. Stage one: Tighten to 140 Nm.
2. Stage two: Tighten a further 90degrees.
Tighten the M16 retaining bolt in three stages:

1. Stage one: Tighten to 150 Nm.
2. Stage two: Tighten to 300 Nm.
3. Stage three: Tighten a further 90 degrees.
18. Install the generator.

For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator and
Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
19. Install the new timing belt kit.

For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6
20. Connect the battery ground cable.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Belt
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1126
Timing Peg, Camshaft Pulley
Removal
2. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01, Removal and Installation).
4.
5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment hole in
the flywheel or flexplate with the block aperture.
6. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly

aligned. If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft one full turn clockwise.

8.

NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.

11. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Installation
1.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in
the clockwise position.
Install the new timing belt.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing
belt in a counter-clockwise direction, in the
sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft
pulley.
Stage two: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand
camshaft pulley.
Stage four: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH
camshaft pulley.
3. CAUTIONS:
4. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window

is aligned with the groove as illustrated.
Tension the timing belt.

Rotate the tensioner assembly counter-clockwise.
Torque: 26 Nm

Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft

pulley center retaining bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm
Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

10.
Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft
pulleys.
If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the
timing belt installation procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.
11. Torque: 80 Nm

13.
15. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Cover
Removal
NOTES:

4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L
5. Torque: 14 Nm
6. Torque: 8 Nm
7. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

9. Torque: 3 Nm
10. Torque: 8 Nm
11. Torque: 3 Nm
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 8 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 3 Nm
19. Torque: 10 Nm
20.
21. Torque: 8 Nm
22. Torque: 8 Nm
23. Torque: 8 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

26. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover LH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Removal
7.
10.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213
12.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.

23.
24.

26.
27.
28.
and free of corrosion and foreign material.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 8 Nm
5. Torque: 3 Nm


7. Torque: 8 Nm
8. Torque: 14 Nm
10. Torque: 23 Nm
11.
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 5 Nm
14.
15.
16.
17. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the open
fuel injector ports are clean and free of foreign material and
lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
19. NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return line has
20.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover RH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Removal
NOTES:
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
6.

9.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213

11. Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213
www.JagDocs.com
14. NOTES:
This step is only required if new components have not

been installed.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Discard the sealing washers.
Repeat this step for each of the fuel injectors.
15. NOTE: This step is only required if new components

have not been installed.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of corrosion and
foreign material.
Torque: 10 Nm
2. Torque: 24 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5. Torque: 9 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11. NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.
12. CAUTION: Make sure that new sealing washers are

installed.
NOTES:
This step is only required if new components are not

installed.
Install new O-ring seals.
Repeat this step for each of the fuel injectors.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm

16.
18. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
19. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
20. Reconnect the battery ground cable
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1129
Engine Lifting Brackets
CAUTION: Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore
essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any
open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
2. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and

Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).

Transmission/Transaxle, Removal).


10. Refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L
12.
13. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
new blanking caps.
15. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

blanking caps.
16.
17. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
new blanking caps.
19. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
new blanking caps.
new blanking caps.
new blanking caps.
23. CAUTIONS:
Note the routing of the lines and hoses.

blanking caps.
NOTES:
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
25. NOTE: Take note of the routing.

27.


Torque: 22 Nm
30.
31.
32.
33.
34. Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
35. Install the lifting chains.
36. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
CAUTION: Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore
essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any
open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.

technician.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.
2. Remove the lifting chains.
3. Install the engine support tool.

5.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 63 Nm
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. Torque:
M8 10 Nm
M6 7 Nm
14. CAUTION: Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 10 Nm
16. Torque: 7 Nm
17.
Torque:
M6 10 Nm
Clip 7 Nm
19.
20.
21. Torque: 27 Nm
22.
23. Torque: 7 Nm
24.
25.

Procedures).
33. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS M97B44-D
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Flush EGR-M14P7-A
Engine Capacity (Dry) Capacity (Fill)

3.0D 12.53 Liters 9.7 Liters

Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 7 - 62
Coolant expansion tank bleed bolt 3 - 27
Cooling fan motor and shroud retaining nuts 7 - 62
Thermostat housing to shroud bolt 7 - 62
Coolant pump retaining bolts 25 18 -
Thermostat housing upper to lower bolts 4 - 35
Radiator panel bolts 9 - 80
Radiator drain plug 2 - 18
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Component Location
Component Location - 3.0L V6 Diesel
Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 RH (right-hand)EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) cooler
3 Heater core
4 Engine oil cooler
5 LH (left-hand)EGR cooler
6 Coolant pump
7 Transmission oil cooler
8 Radiator
9 Auxiliary radiator
10 Cooling fan
11 5 Way connector
12 Pressure relief thermostat
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine
operating conditions. It also provides:
Heating for the passenger compartment. For additional information refer to Heating and Ventilation 412-01.
Cooling for:
- The engine oil
- The fuel
- The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system -
Refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
- The transmission fluid.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - System Operation and
System Operation
COOLANT CIRCUIT FLOW
When the engine is running the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the coolant
pump, coolant flows through the cylinder block and the cylinder heads. Some of the coolant in the cylinder block is diverted
through the engine oil cooler before returning to the 5-way connector via the water outlet.
From the 5-way connector, the majority of the coolant flows to the pressure relief thermostat, either directly or via the radiator,
depending on the temperature of the coolant. Some of the coolant is also directed through the auxiliary cooling radiators
returning the cooled coolant to the Pressure Relief Thermostat (PRT) via the radiator bottom hose. From the outlet of the
thermostat the coolant flows to the inlet of the coolant pump.
A separate hose from the radiator allows extra-cooled coolant from the radiator to flow through the transmission oil cooler. The
coolant from the cooler is returned to the system via a branch in the bottom radiator hose.
Coolant from the water outlet also flows through the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) coolers and then to the heater core. From
the heater core outlet, the coolant flows to the outlet zone of the pressure relief thermostat.
The expansion tank allows expansion of coolant due to temperature increases to pass excess coolant back to the expansion
tank. A small hose is connected from the water outlet to the expansion tank for this purpose. As the coolant cools, the coolant
is allowed back into the system from the tank via a hose from the expansion tank into the radiator bottom hose.
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)

The thermostat is closed at temperatures below approximately 82°C (179°F). When the coolant temperature reaches
approximately 82°C the thermostat starts to open and is fully open at approximately 96°C (204°F). In this condition the full
flow of coolant is directed through the radiator. The thermostat is exposed to 90% hot coolant from the engine on one side
and 10% cold coolant returning from the radiator bottom hose on the other side. Hot coolant from the engine passes from the
by-pass pipe through four sensing holes in the flow valve into a tube surrounding 90% of the thermostat sensitive area. Cold
coolant returning from the engine, cooled by the radiator, conducts through 10% of the sensitive area.
In cold ambient temperatures, the engine temperature is raised by approximately 10°C (50°F) to compensate for the heat loss
of 10% exposure to the cold coolant returning from the bottom hose.
The by-pass flow valve is held closed by a light spring. It operates to further aid heater warm-up. When the main valve is
closed and the engine speed is at idle, the coolant pump does not produce sufficient flow and pressure to open the valve. In
this condition the valve prevents coolant circulating through the by-pass circuit and forces the coolant through the heater
matrix only. This provides a higher flow of coolant through the heater matrix to improve passenger comfort in cold conditions.
When the engine speed increases above idle, the coolant pump produces a greater flow and pressure than the heater circuit
can take. The pressure acts on the by-pass flow valve and overcomes the valve spring pressure, opening the valve and limiting
the pressure in the heater circuit. The valve modulates to provide maximum coolant flow through the heater core and yet
allowing excess coolant to flow into the by-pass circuit to provide the engine's cooling needs at higher engine speeds.
COOLING FAN
The cooling fan is operated by a fan control module integrated into the cooling fan motor. The fan control module regulates the
voltage, and subsequently the speed, of the cooling fan motor in response to a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM (engine control module). The ECM calculates the required fan speed from the engine temperature, A/C (air conditioning)
system pressure and transmission oil temperature. Under hot operating conditions, the fan may continue to operate for up to
four minutes after the engine has been switched off.
ENGINE COOLING - SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM
Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 Engine LH (left-hand) cylinder bank
3 Engine oil and fuel cooler
4 Engine RH (right-hand) cylinder bank
5 Engine water outlet
6 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor
7 EGR coolers
8 Bleed screw
9 Heater core
10 Pressure Relief Thermostat
11 Radiator
12 5 Way connector
13 Transmission fluid cooler
14 Auxiliary radiator
15 Coolant pump
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)
Item Description
1 Connection to expansion tank
2 Connection to radiator top hose
3 Heater core return connection
4 PRT body
5 Connection from radiator bottom hose
6 Connection to cylinder block water inlet
A plastic thermostat housing is located behind the radiator. The housing has 5 connections which locate the radiator bottom
hose, top hose from the 5-way connector, coolant pump feed hose to the cylinder block and return feed from the heater core.
The housing contains a wax element and a spring loaded by-pass flow valve.
The thermostat is used to maintain the coolant at the optimum temperature for efficient combustion and to aid engine
warm-up.
RADIATOR
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet to transmission fluid cooler
2 Coolant inlet
3 Locating spigot (2 off)
4 Support (2 off)
5 Coolant inlet from auxiliary coolers
6 Coolant outlet to pressure relief thermostat
7 Drain plug
The radiator is a cross-flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is located in the vehicle by locating
spigots and supports integrated into the end tanks. The supports are installed in rubber bushes in the upper chassis rails. The
locating spigots are installed in rubber bushes in the front end carrier. A drain plug is integrated into the LH end tank. Coolant
inlet and outlet connections are incorporated into the RH and LH end tanks respectively.
The LH end tank also has connections for coolant inlet from the auxiliary coolers and a coolant outlet to the transmission fluid
cooler.
AUXILIARY COOLING RADIATOR
Item Description
1 Auxiliary cooling radiator
2 Coolant outlet
3 Coolant inlet
4 Coolant outlet hose to radiator
5 Coolant inlet hose from 5 way connector
6 Ducting from front bumper
One auxiliary cooling radiator is used to maintain the optimum engine coolant temperature for performance driving.
The radiator is located behind the RH side of the front bumper and ducting provides are flow to the radiator via an aperture in
the bumper. The auxiliary radiator is connected to the main radiator with flow through the system controlled by the PRT.
COOLANT PUMP
Item Description
1 Bolt (3 off)
2 Drive hub
3 Housing
4 Impeller
5 Pulley
The coolant pump has a housing that supports a shaft with an impeller attached to one end and a drive hub at the other. The
housing is attached to the front of the cylinder block with the impeller located in a pumping chamber. The pump is driven by a
pulley attached to the drive hub and driven by the accessory drive belt.
Refer to: Accessory Drive (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
EXPANSION TANK
Item Description
1 Bleed screw
2 Level markings
3 Vent hose connection
4 Expansion hose connection
5 Level sensor
6 Filler cap
A pressurized expansion tank system is used which continuously separates the air from the cooling system and replenishes the
system through a hose connected between the expansion tank and the heater return hose. A continuous vent into the
expansion tank, through a hose connected to the engine's coolant outlet connector, prevents air locks from forming in the
cooling system.
The expansion tank is installed behind the top right corner of the radiator. A filler cap, bleed screw and level sensor are
incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and MIN level markings are molded into the interior of the tank below the filler cap.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill
Coolant expansion during warm-up
Air separation during operation
System pressurization by the filler cap
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 to 1 liter (1.06 to 2,11 US pints), above the MAX level, to allow for
coolant expansion.
COOLING FAN
Item Description
1 Shroud
2 Fan
3 Motor and fan control module
An electric, variable speed cooling fan is installed in a shroud attached to the rear of the radiator. The cooling fan is operated
by a fan control module, integrated into the electric motor, under the control of the ECM. Electrical connectors at the LH side of
the shroud provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the vehicle wiring.
ENGINE OIL COOLER
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet
2 Engine oil filter
3 Engine oil cooler
The engine oil cooler is attached to a common adapter assembly located in the vee of the cylinder block. Inlet and outlet ports
for engine oil, and an inlet port for coolant, are incorporated into the cylinder block mating face of the adapter assembly. A
metal gasket seals the joint between the adapter assembly and the cylinder block. From the cylinder block, coolant flows
through the adapter assembly and into the cooler. After passing through the cooler, the coolant then flows into the engine
coolant water outlet.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
Item Description
1 Transmission fluid inlet
2 Coolant outlet to radiator bottom hose
3 Transmission fluid outlet
4 Coolant inlet from radiator
6 Mounting bracket
The transmission fluid cooler is located near the lower LH corner of the radiator. The cooler is connected to the cooling system
with 2 hoses and receives cooled fluid from the upper section of the radiator, which flows through the cooler, reducing the
temperature of the transmission fluid.
ENGINE COOLANT
The coolant is silicate free and must not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling
For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),

Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses

Coolant hoses Harnesses
Coolant expansion tank Loose or corroded connector(s)
Radiator Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Heater core
Primary drive belt
Viscous fan
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart

Coolant loss Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a
Hoses pressure test. Rectify as necessary. Refer to the relevant section of the
Hose connections workshop manual
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Overheating Check the coolant level and condition. Check the thermostat and rectify as
Low/contaminated necessary. Carry out a cooling system pressure test. Refer to the relevant
coolant section of the workshop manual. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
Thermostat the viscous fan rotates freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the
Viscous fan radiator
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Engine not Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
reaching normal Thermostat the viscous fan is not seized
temperature Viscous fan
Thermostat
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC Index
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling
and Bleeding
General Procedures
Draining
2. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system

pressure, cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick
cloth.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
and Installation).
4. NOTE: Allow at least 15 minutes for the coolant to

drain from the radiator drain plug.
Filling
1.
2.
3.
4. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be
maintained at 50%.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level

mark of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant
is seen running from the coolant hose bleed point. Tighten
the bleed screw.
5.
6. Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level is reached.
7. Set the heating to the HOT position.
9. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM for 30 seconds.
10.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When the coolant stops dropping, continue to fill the coolant
untill the maximum level is reached.
11. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant
expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
12. Increase the engine speed to 3000rpm.
13.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off.
Hold the engine speed at 3000 RPM for a further 2 minutes.
14.
When the thermostat is opened increase the engine speed from
idle to 4000 RPM for 5 times.
Hold the engine at 3000 rpm for 1 minute.
15. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes.
16. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
17. Check and top up the cooling system as required when cool.
18. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of coolant
leakage.
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
Draining
and Installation).
3. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system

pressure, cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick
cloth.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.

6. Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three times,
filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two drains. At the
third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make sure that the cooling
system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be
maintained at 50%.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level

mark of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant
is seen running from the coolant hose bleed point. Tighten
the bleed screw.
6.
7. Set the heating to the HOT position.
9. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM for 30 seconds.
10.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When the coolant stops dropping, continue to fill the coolant
untill the maximum level is reached.
11. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant
expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
12. Increase the engine speed to 3000rpm.
13.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off.
Hold the engine speed at 3000 RPM for a further 2 minutes.
14.
When the thermostat is opened increase the engine speed from
idle to 4000 RPM for 5 times.
Hold the engine at 3000 rpm for 1 minute.
15. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes.
16. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
17. Check and top up the cooling system as required when cool.
leakage.
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Auxiliary Radiator
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).

5. Torque: 9 Nm
6.
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
1.
2. Using a syringe, remove the cooling fluid from the expansion tank.
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4.
5. Disconnect the coolant low level sensor electrical connector.
Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.
7.
Installation
2. Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the coolant expansion
tank.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Pump
Removal
Torque: 25 Nm
5. NOTES:
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.

Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean coolant.

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal
and Installation).
Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 7 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm

Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Radiator
Removal
4.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Protect the air conditioning (A/C) condenser.
Using suitable cable tie secure the A/C condenser

away from the radiator.
Torque: 7 Nm
10. Torque: 9 Nm

13. Torque: 7 Nm
14. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Thermostat
Removal

4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6.
7.
8. Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.

9.
11.
12.
13. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for the correct torque sequence.

Wiring harness bracket to left-hand cylinder head retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump bracket retaining bolts 3 - 27
Fuel injection pump bracket(s) to cylinder head retaining bolts 10 7 -
Turbocharger heat shield(s) retaining bolts 10 7 -
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining bolt 50 37 -
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolts 9 - 80
Rear end accessory drive (READ) pulley hub retaining bolt A - -
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner retaining bolt 23 16 -
READ pulley retaining bolts A - -
Wiring harness and coolant pipe retaining bracket bolts 10 7 -
Fuel injector retaining bolts 9 - 80
High-pressure fuel line bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts 24 18 -
High-pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
Fuel rail supply tube union nuts A - -
Fuel crossover line union nuts A - -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 10 7 -
Intake air shutoff throttle elbow retaining bolt 10 7 -
Intake air shutoff throttle retaining stud 10 7 -
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Charging and Controls -
Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 High pressure fuel supply
2 Common fuel rail
3 Fuel pressure control valve
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Injectors
6 Volume control valve
7 Fuel rail balance pipe
8 Fuel pressure sensor
9 High pressure fuel pump
Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine is equipped with a High Pressure (HP) common rail fuel injection system. With this fuel injection
process, a HP pump delivers a uniform level of pressure to the shared fuel lines (the common rails), which serve all 6 fuel
injectors. Pressure is controlled to the optimum level for smooth operation.
The common rail system supports a pre and pilot injection depending on engine operating conditions, which reduces
combustion noise levels, more commonly referred to as 'diesel knock'.
Fuel injection pressure is generated independently of engine speed and fuel injection events.
The fuel injection timing and volume are calculated by the ECM (engine control module), which then energizes the appropriate
piezo actuated injector. The common rail fuel injection system has the following features:
High fuel injection pressures of up to 2000 bar (29007 lbf/in2) for greater atomization of fuel (increasing performance
and lowering emissions).
Variable injection to optimize combustion in all engine operating conditions
Low tolerances and high precision throughout the life of the system.
The fuel system is divided into two sub systems:
Low Pressure (LP) system

HP system.
The LP system features the following components:
In-tank fuel pump

Fuel pressure regulator (integral to the fuel delivery module)
Fuel filter
Return pipes
Injector return pipes
Fuel coolers (engine and vehicle).
The LP system is regulated to 0.5 bar (7.25 lbf/in2).
The HP system features the following components:
HP pump
Fuel rails and diverter rail
HP fuel pipes
Injectors.
System Operation
ENGINE STARTING
During starting, the fuel rail pressure must be at least 150 bar (2175 lbf/in2). Should the pressure be below this figure, the
injectors will not operate, resulting in the vehicle not starting.
ENGINE STOPPING
To stop the engine the ECM (engine control module) stops energizing the actuators in the fuel injectors, therefore, no fuel is
injected and the engine speed drops to zero.
HP FUEL PUMP
When the HP fuel pump is rotated, pressure is created when the volume control valve is open and the pressure control valve is
closed. Both valves are electronically controlled by the ECM to allow variable fuel delivery and pressure control. When the ECM
actuates the piezo actuators, the fuel rail pressure drop is off-set by additional fuel being delivered to the fuel rails by the
pressure control valve. The fuel pressure in the system is reduced within a few seconds after the engine has stopped as the
pressure control valve no longer has the holding current it requires, and therefore opens. No residual pressure remains in the
system and the fuel is returned to the LP fuel return line to the fuel filter through the open pressure control valve.
LOW PRESSURE (LP) SYSTEM
LP Fuel Pump
The electric fuel pump is located inside the fuel tank. Fuel is pumped from the tank via the in-tank fuel pump, to the HP pump
via the fuel filter.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter is located on a bracket on the LH (left-hand) suspension turret in the engine compartment. Incorporated in the
fuel filter housing is a bimetallic, temperature sensing, regulating valve which will start to close at 30 °C (86 °F) and will fully
close at 50 °C (122 °F). This allows pre-heated diesel fuel, returning from the HP pump, to circulate inside the fuel filter to
prevent waxing in cold operating conditions. When the valve is closed the fuel from the HP pump is passed through the fuel
cooler before returning to filter to maintain the fuel at an optimum temperature.
The filter has an air bleed return to the fuel tank which returns excess air and fuel to the tank.
The fuel filter is also fitted with a water sensor to detect when moisture which has collected in the filter has reached an
unacceptable level.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Cooler
An air blast fuel cooler is located under the LH side of the vehicle floor pan. The fuel cooler has 2 connections; one is an inlet
which allows heated fuel from the HP pump to be cooled, the second allows the cooled fuel to be fed from the cooler into the
supply pipe from the LP fuel pump in the fuel tank, via a 'Y' connector back to the fuel filter.
When the regulating valve in the fuel filter is open, the heated fuel from the HP pump is routed direct to the fuel cooler before
returning to the fuel filter.
HIGH PRESSURE (HP) SYSTEM
HP Fuel Pump
The HP pump is a 2 piston radial plunger pump. The pump has the ability to produce a maximum pressure of 2000 bar (29007
lbf/in²). The housing is cast from iron, the flange is cast from aluminum.
The HP pump is driven from the LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft via a toothed belt. The drive from the belt rotates a cam
within the pump which operate a plunger within each pumping element. A procedure and special tools are required for pump or
belt replacement to time the pump.
The high-pressure pump comprises 2 high pressure pumping elements, a volume control valve, an internal transfer pump and a
fuel temperature sensor.
The fuel is delivered to the internal transfer pump via the external fuel filter and an electric fuel pump which is located in the
fuel tank.
The volume control valve is mounted on the high-pressure pump, and located in the feed port between the high pressure pump
elements and the internal transfer pump. The volume control valve is a variable position solenoid-operated valve that is
controlled by the ECM. The volume control valve determines the amount of fuel that is delivered from the internal transfer
pump to the HP pumping elements. When there is no signal to the volume control valve, the valve is closed and there is no
fuel delivery.
The fuel from the internal transfer pump is passed to the HP pumping elements at a constant pressure known as transfer
pressure. The transfer pressure is controlled by an internal pressure relief valve. Once the fuel enters each of the HP pump
elements the pressure rises rapidly, with each element providing a HP supply to one of the fuel rails. The high pressure is
controlled by the high pressure regulator valve and the fuel rail pressure sensor.
A controlled amount of fuel is allowed to leak-off from the internal transfer pump. This fuel is delivered to the pump internal
components to provide cooling and lubrication and is passed back the fuel filter via the LP feed line.
The pressure control valve is located in one of the fuel rails. The fuel pressure is monitored by a pressure sensor located in the
other fuel rail. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using the received signals from the pressure sensor. Reducing the
pressure in the fuel rails via the pressure control valve results in fuel returning from the fuel rails to the LP fuel return to the
fuel filter.
The fuel temperature sensor is located on the rear of the HP pump. It measures the fuel temperature in the low-pressure side
of the HP pump. The ECM continually monitors this signal to determine the fuel temperature to prevent overheating of the fuel
system. The ECM will also make fine adjustments to fuel injection quantity to adjust for fuel temperature.
Fuel Rails
Item Description
1 LH fuel rail
4 RH (right-hand) fuel rail
5 HP fuel connection from HP pump
6 Fuel rail balance pipe
The fuel rails are steel fabrications and are similar in their construction. Two fuel rails are used with each rail supplying high
pressure fuel to 3 fuel injectors.
Each rail has 5 threaded connections which provide for the attachment of the high pressure fuel supply from the HP pump, the
balance pipe and connections for the 3 injectors supplied with fuel from that rail.
The fuel pressure in the rails is detected by a fuel pressure sensor which is located in the end of the RH rail. The LH rail
houses a pressure control valve. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using signals from the pressure sensor.
The fuel rail pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive type sensor containing an actuating diaphragm. Deflection of the diaphragm
provides a proportional signal (output) voltage to the ECM, dependant on the fuel pressure within the fuel rail.
Both rails are connected together with a balance pipe which ensures the pressure in both rails is equal, even though each rail
is supplied from a different pumping element in the HP pump.
Fuel Injectors
Item Description
1 Fuel return
2 O-ring seal
3 Piezo stack actuator
4 Hydraulic coupler
5 Control valve
6 Nozzle body
7 Copper sealing washer
9 High pressure feed
10 Nozzle
Six fuel injectors are used in the fuel system. A piezo actuator in each injector is electronically controlled by the ECM to
operate the injector in response to engine speed and load conditions.
Each injector has an electrical connector which connects the injector to the engine harness. A fuel connection on the top of the
injector provides for the high pressure fuel inlet from the HP pump. A second fuel connection allows fuel leakage within the
injector to return to the HP pump.
Each injector is located in a machined hole in the cylinder head and is sealed in the cylinder head with a copper sealing washer
and an O-ring seal. The injector is retained in the cylinder head with a clamp plate and 2 bolts. If an injector is removed or
replaced, a new copper sealing washer and a clamp plate must be used when refitting the injector.
The injector can operate up to 5 times during one combustion cycle depending on engine speed and load. The injection
sequence can occur as follows:
1. Pilot injection - occurs before the main injection and improves fuel and air mixing
2. Pre-injection - shortens the main injection's ignition delay and therefore reduces the generation of nitrous oxides
3. Main injection - delivers the required engine torque
4. After injection - occurs after the Main injection and assists the re-burn of any remaining particulate matter
5. Post injection - helps manage the temperature of the exhaust gas for more effective exhaust-gas after-treatment
6. Injection delay 0.4 ms.
Each injector is calibrated to the ECM and applicable the cylinder to which it is fitted. Therefore, if an injector is removed it
must be refitted to the cylinder from which it was removed. If a new injector is fitted, a calibration routine using a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system must be performed to calibrate the injector unique code to the ECM.
The operating voltage of the injector is between 110 and 163 volts depending on engine speed and load and care must be
taken when working in the vicinity of the injectors. The voltage increases linearly from 200 to 2000 bar (2900 to 29007 lbf/in²).
Each injector has an electrical resistance value of between 150 - 250 kOhms.
CAUTION: Each injector operation is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and
recover from the injector. Never disconnect the wiring connection when the engine is running. The injector can remain open
thus causing engine damage.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Charging and Controls
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),

Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
Do NOT carry out any work on the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as
high as 2000 bar (29,008 lb/in²). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Eye protection must be worn at all times when working on or near any fuel related components. Failure to follow this
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. This should be done after the engine has
been run, but with the engine switched OFF. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow this instruction may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical
attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting any part of the system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around
components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
The fuel pipes between the injectors and the rail must be discarded after each use, and new pipes installed. Failure to
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs
to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and dust-free as possible. Areas in
which work on clutches, brakes or where welding or machining are carried out are not suitable in view of the risk of
contamination to the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material. Failure to follow this
Make sure that any protective gloves worn are new and are of the non-powdered latex type. Failure to follow this
Make sure that clean, non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose it's bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid prior to starting work on the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a steel-topped work bench and cover it with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to 3 decimal places, and
with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
Visual Inspection
Fuel level Glow plug indicator

Contaminated fuel Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch
Fuel supply line(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel return line(s) Sensor(s)
High-pressure fuel supply line(s) Engine Control Module (ECM)
Fuel tank filler pipe Fuel volume control valve (FVCV)
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pressure control valve (FPCV)
Fuel tank Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor
Fuel filler cap Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel filter Fuel injector(s)
Push connect fittings Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
Fuel rail
Fuel injection pump
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible causes Action

Engine cranks, Check that the inertia switch has not tripped. Check the fuel level and
but does not Inertia fuel shutoff condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand
start switch for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating
Low/Contaminated fuel water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for leaks. Check
Air leakage the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage.
Low-pressure fuel Check the fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control
system fault valve fault. Check the fuel pump. Check the crankshaft position sensor circuits.
Fuel pump module (lift Refer to the electrical guides.
pump) fault
Blocked fuel filter
Fuel volume regulator
blocked/contaminated
Fuel pressure control
valve
Fuel pump fault
Crankshaft Position
(CKP) sensor
Difficult to Check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the fuel
start Glow plug system fault level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to
(very cold conditions) stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel
Low/Contaminated fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for
Air leakage leaks. Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for
Fuel pump module (lift leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
pump) fault pressure control valve fault. Carry out EGR valve checks.
Low-pressure fuel
system fault
Blocked fuel filter
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Rough idle Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
Intake air system fault approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check
Low/Contaminated fuel to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid
Low-pressure fuel in the fuel. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the
system fault fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control valve
Blocked fuel filter fault. Carry out EGR valve checks.
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Lack of power Check the intake air system for leakage or restriction. Check for a
when Intake air system fault blockage/restriction in the exhaust system, install new components as
accelerating Restricted exhaust necessary. Check for DTCs indicating a fuel pressure fault. Carry out EGR valve
system checks. Carry out turbocharger actuator checks.
Low fuel pressure
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Turbocharger actuator
fault
Engine Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
stops/stalls Air leakage approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check
Low/Contaminated fuel to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid
Low-pressure fuel in the fuel. Check the fuel system for leaks/damage: Check for DTCs indicating
system fault a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. Carry out EGR valve checks.
High pressure fuel leak
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) valve
fault
Engine judders Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel
Low/Contaminated fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of
Air ingress the fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system
Low-pressure fuel for leaks. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the high
system fault pressure fuel system for leaks, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
Fuel metering valve pressure control valve fault. Check the fuel pump.
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Fuel pump fault
Excessive fuel Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check for DTCs
consumption Low-pressure fuel indicating a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. Check the fuel
system fault temperature sensor, fuel pump, etc for leaks. Check for injector DTCs. Carry out
Fuel volume control EGR valve checks.
valve
valve
Fuel temperature sensor
leak
Injector(s) fault
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Engine Control Module 3.0L Tdv6 (PCM) (100-00 General Information,
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as
high as 2000 bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine stops before commencing any repair to the high-pressure fuel injection system.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid, prior to starting work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign
matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result
in later malfunction.
NOTE: Pneumatic vacuum gun
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush cleaning fluid
onto the components being removed and onto the surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of cleaning fluid and
foreign material.
3. Dispose of any used cleaning fluid and the brush after completing the
repair.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump
Special Tool(s)
303-1124
Removal
NOTES:
5. Refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Pulley (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6
6. Refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil Separator (303-08A Engine Emission Control
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

11.
12. CAUTIONS:

13. CAUTIONS:


16. CAUTIONS:
Discard the components.

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.

Installation
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
3. Torque: 23 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
7. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
8.
9. Torque: 23 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 23 Nm
14. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the fuel supply line unions finger tight.
Make sure that a new component is installed.
15. CAUTIONS:

16. CAUTIONS:

17. CAUTIONS:

18. CAUTIONS:
"Make sure that new components are installed. "
19. Torque: 10 Nm
20. CAUTIONS:

21. Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to 15Nm.

Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to 15Nm.



27. Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 30Nm.

Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 30Nm.



33. Torque: 10 Nm
34.
35.
37. Refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Pulley (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6
41.
1. NOTE: A minimum of 12 litres of fuel in the fuel tank is
required for the following Steps.
Make sure the fuel tank has a sufficiant amount of fuel to carry
out the following Steps.
2. NOTES:
Do not start the vehicle.
Allow 15 seconds between each ignition cycle (between

each ignition ON and ignition OFF) to allow the fuel tank pump
to pump fuel to the fuel injection pump correctly.
Turn the ignition on and off four times.

3. Crank the engine until it starts.
4. Road test the vehicle for at least 10 miles (16 Km).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)s using the approved
diagnostic tool. Clear or repair as necessary.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injector
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Removal
All vehicles
3.
4.
5.
All vehicles

7.
8.
10.
11. CAUTIONS:
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel supply

lines.
13.
14.
15.
Installation
All vehicles

2. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this stage.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component is
installed.
Torque: 10 Nm

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
5.
Stage 1:Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line
unions at the fuel rail to 15Nm.
Stage 2: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line
unions at the injector to 15Nm.
6.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return line has
8.
9.

11.
All vehicles
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail LH
Removal
Installation).
5. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
6. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube LH (303-08A
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

16.
18.
19.

26.
27.
28.

30.
33.
34.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

2.
3.
4.
5.
stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

stage.
9. Torque: 24 Nm
10. CAUTION: Tighten the fuel supply line unions finger

tight.

tight.
12. CAUTIONS:

13.
14.
15.


20.

25. Torque: 10 Nm
26. Torque: 10 Nm
27. Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29. Torque: 10 Nm
30.

32. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this
stage.
33. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this

stage.
34. Torque: 10 Nm
35. Torque: 10 Nm
36. Torque: 10 Nm
37. Torque: 10 Nm
38. Torque: 10 Nm
39.
40.
41.
42. Torque: 10 Nm
43.
44. Torque: 27 Nm
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail RH
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
5. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube RH

(303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).

7.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

17.
18. NOTE: Right-hand shown, Left-hand similar.
19.
20.
22. CAUTIONS:

26.
27.
28.
29. CAUTIONS:

30.
33.
34.
35. CAUTIONS:
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

2.
3.
4.
5.
stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

stage.
9. Torque: 24 Nm

tight.

tight.
12. CAUTIONS:

tight.
14.

installed.

19.


24. Torque: 10 Nm
25. Torque: 10 Nm
26. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
27. Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29.
30. NOTE: Right-hand shown, Left-hand similar.

stage.

stage.
33. Torque: 10 Nm
34. Torque: 10 Nm
35. Torque: 10 Nm
36. Torque: 10 Nm
37. Torque: 7 Nm
38.
39.
40. Torque: 10 Nm
41.
Torque: 10 Nm
43. Torque: 10 Nm
44.
Installation).
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation).
11.
12.
13.
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Exhaust manifold threaded stud 13 10 -
Exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Turbocharger oil return tube to turbocharger retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil return tube to engine retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger bracket retaining bolts 23 17 -
Turbocharger to exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolt 11 8 -
Exhaust heatshield retaining bolt 9 - 80
Exhaust heatshield retaining nut 10 - 7
Turbocharger oil supply tube retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil supply tube union bolt 30 22 -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 9 - 80
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Turbocharger
- Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve
2 Turbocharger oil supply
3 Primary turbocharger (variable vane)
4 Primary turbocharger control module (variable vane actuator)
5 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve and shut-off valve
6 Charge air tube
7 Turbocharger oil drain
8 Secondary turbocharger (fixed vane)
- Overview
INTRODUCTION
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine uses two turbochargers; a fixed vane type (secondary) and a variable vane (primary) type. The fixed
vane turbocharger is fitted to the RH (right-hand) cylinder bank and the variable vane turbocharger is fitted to the LH
(left-hand) cylinder bank.
Both turbochargers are used in a parallel sequential turbocharging system which enables the engine to achieve quick throttle
response at low engine speeds and efficient use of exhaust gas energy at high engine speeds.
The variable vane turbocharger has an ECM (engine control module) controlled electronic rotary actuator. The rotary actuator
adjusts the turbine vanes to optimize the exhaust gas flow and velocity onto the turbine wheel to maintain the required boost
pressure.
The parallel sequential turbocharging system comprises the two turbochargers and the ECM. The primary variable nozzle
turbine operates through the entire engine speed range but is at its most efficient at engine speeds of up to 2800 rpm. At
engine speeds above 2800 rpm under load, the fixed vane secondary turbine comes into operation, with both of the
turbochargers now running in a parallel bi-turbo mode.
- System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
TURBOCHARGERS
The turbine wheel of the turbocharger uses the engine's exhaust gasses to drive the compressor wheel. The compressor wheel
draws in fresh air which is supplied to the engine cylinders in a compressed form.
The primary variable vane turbocharger allows the optimum inlet geometry (inlet area and flow angle) to be used over a wide
range of engine operating conditions. This allows a rapid speed of response and higher boost pressures at low engine speeds.
The variable vane angle determines both the inlet area as well as the flow angle, as controlled by the ECM (engine control
module). The variable vanes allow efficient use of the exhaust gas energy which in turn improves turbocharger and engine
efficiency.
Principles of Variable Vane Operation
Item Description
A Low engine speed
B Intermediate engine speed
C High engine speed
1 ECM
2 Electronic rotary actuator
3 Turbine housing
4 Variable vanes
5 Compressor wheel
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger are controlled by the ECM. The ECM controls a rotary electronic actuator
attached to the primary turbocharger which is used to adjust the pitch angle of the vanes by rotating the turbine housing. The
electronic rotary actuator also provides the ECM with a feedback signal to determine the pitch angle of the vanes.
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger improve the exhaust gas power transfer to the turbine wheel which in turn
drives the compressor wheel. At low engine speeds this greatly assists the increase in turbocharger boost pressure.
As engine speed, and therefore the exhaust gas velocity, increases, the vanes are opened. The amount of opening is
determined by the ECM to ensure that the power transfer from the turbine wheel to the compressor wheel is within the
turbocharger speed and boost pressure requirements.
At high engine speed and exhaust gas flow, the ECM increases the vane opening to avoid overspeed of the turbines and
provide a smooth high speed operation. At this point the dual mode boosting system comes into affect by utilizing the
secondary (fixed vane) turbocharger.
Dual Mode Boosting
The dual mode boosting system comprises two turbochargers and software within the ECM. The two turbochargers can operate
in two modes; mono turbocharger operation or bi-turbocharger operation.
Mono Turbocharger Operation
Mono Turbocharger Schematic Diagram
Item Description
1 Fixed vane turbine
2 Turbine shut-off valve
3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
4 Flexible center resonators
5 Catalytic Converter
6 Variable vane turbocharger
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF (mass air flow) meter
11 Charge air cooler
12 Compressor shut-off valve
13 Recirculation valve
Fresh air is drawn through the air filter and the MAF meter to the primary turbocharger compressor. The compressed air is then
passed through the charge air cooler and into the engine.
The turbine shut-off valve on the secondary turbocharger is closed and therefore exhaust gasses are unable to operate the
secondary turbocharger turbine. In this condition all turbocharging boost pressure is produced by the primary turbocharger.
Bi-Turbocharger Switching Operation
Bi-Turbocharger Switching Schematic Diagram
Item Description
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the engine operating parameters approach the limits (approximately 2800 rpm under load) of the primary turbocharger,
dual mode boosting control software within the ECM begins the switch to parallel bi-turbocharger operation. The secondary
turbocharger is brought into operation by the opening of the turbine shut-off valve which allows exhaust gasses to flow
through the turbine.
Initially, the secondary turbocharger does not produce a boost pressure to equal that of the primary turbocharger. Therefore,
the initial boost pressure from the secondary turbocharger is fed via the recirculation valve into the clean air inlet for the
primary turbocharger. As the secondary turbocharger boost pressure output increases, the recirculation valve is then closed and
the compressor shut-off valve opened to increase the boost pressure from the secondary turbocharger which is directed into
the charge air cooler.
Bi-Turbocharger Schematic Diagram
Item Description
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the secondary turbocharger has reached the required operating parameters, the recirculation valve is closed and the
compressor shut-off valve is opened. The ECM will maintain the engine operating in bi-turbocharger operation with both
primary and secondary turbochargers contributing to the air charge induction. When the dual mode boosting software
determines that the engine operating parameters no longer require the use of dual mode boosting, the system switches back
to mono turbocharger operation.
If the engine idles for more than 3 minutes, the secondary turbocharger is actuated to ensure correct lubrication. This is
achieved by pressurizing the turbine shaft bearing cavities through a pipe, which is connected to the air intake system and
periodically opening the turbine shut-off valve to operate the turbocharger.
CAUTION: Ensure both ends of the pipe are securely connected to the secondary turbo and the air intake system to
prevent damage to the turbo components.
Each turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine wheel and compressor wheel, enclosed separately in cast housings
and mounted on a common shaft, which rotates in two semi-floating bearings.
VARIABLE VANE TURBOCHARGER (PRIMARY)

The variable vane turbocharger is attached to the LH (left-hand) exhaust manifold and secured to 3 studs on a flange on the
manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the manifold. In-service
vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the manifold is disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 3 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the LH catalytic converter inlet
pipe. Three nuts secure the inlet pipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the components.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections. The central connection provides a clean air supply from the
air filter to the compressor. The second connection on the outside of the housing provides for a pipe connection from the
turbocharger to the charge air cooler
The turbocharger is a conventional design with both the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel sharing a common shaft
which is supported on bearings. The turbocharger receives an engine oil feed via a pipe from the cylinder block. The pipe
supplies both turbochargers with an oil supply for lubrication purposes. An oil drain pipe from the turbocharger allows oil to
drain from the turbocharger into the cylinder block.
An integral bracket houses the variable vane electronic rotary actuator. The rotary actuator is connected to an eccentric lever
which moves the turbine housing to adjust the position of the vanes. When the rotary actuator operates a boss is rotated,
which in turn moves the lever and changes rotary motion into linear motion. The lever is connected to the outside of the
turbine housing and the linear motion is converted back to rotary motion of the housing. Operation of the electronic rotary
actuator is controlled by the ECM.
FIXED VANE TURBOCHARGER (SECONDARY)

The fixed vane turbocharger is attached to the RH (right-hand) exhaust manifold and is secured to 3 studs on a flange on the
manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the manifold. In-service
vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the manifold is disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 2 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the RH exhaust system downpipe.
Two nuts secure the downpipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the downpipe and the turbocharger.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections; the central connection provides the clean air supply from
the air filter. The second connection on the outside of the turbocharger housing allows the connection from the turbocharger to
the charge air cooler
Attached to the rear of the turbocharger is a turbine shut-off valve. The valve is vacuum operated and electronically controlled
by the ECM. The valve is closed when the system is operating in mono-turbocharger mode, diverting exhaust gasses from the
RH exhaust manifold, via the exhaust cross-over duct to the LH exhaust manifold. When bi-turbocharger operation is required,
the ECM electronically operates the valve allow vacuum to open the shut-off valve allowing exhaust gasses from the RH
exhaust manifold to drive the turbine of the fixed vane turbocharger.
LH
Removal
CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
clockspring and steering wheel switches may occur.
All vehicles

2. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH (303-08A Engine

Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
3.

5.
6.
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the road wheels are in the

straight ahead position.
9.
10. CAUTION: Make sure to support the steering gear.
All vehicles
11.
12.
13.


18.
19.
Position the turbocharger to one side.
20.
21.
Do not disassemble further if removed for access
only
22.
Installation All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
Install new studs.


Torque: 13 Nm
2.
3.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm

stage.
8. NOTES:
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 24 Nm
12.
13. Torque: 7 Nm
14. Torque: 100 Nm

15.
16. CAUTION: Make sure that the road wheels are in the
straight ahead position.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
17. Torque: 7 Nm
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19. CAUTION: Make sure that a new sealing washer is

installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
20. Torque: 10 Nm
RH
Removal
2. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH (303-08A Engine

4.
5.
6.
7.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.


18.
Reposition the turbocharger.
19.
20.

22.
23.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:


2.
3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 13 Nm

stage.
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 33 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 7 Nm
16. Torque: 7 Nm
Torque: 30 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm
19. Torque: 22 Nm
20.
21. Torque: 11 Nm
23. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH (303-08A Engine
Bypass Valve
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fixed Vane
Turbocharger Actuator
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
All vehicles
4.
5.
6.
7. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
9.
10.
11. CAUTIONS:
Remove the Torx screws evenly and progressively.
Make sure component mating faces are not damaged

during removal.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, remove the

retaining bolts.
12. NOTES:
Make a note of the orientation of the gasket tang.
Remove and discard the gasket using the gasket tang.
13. NOTES:
Remove and discard the gasket.
Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.
Installation
All vehicles

NOTES:
Make sure that the gasket tang is installed in the

correct orientation as noted in the removal step.
NOTES:
Apply a small amount of grease in the areas indicated

to allow the gasket to remain in the position for
installation.
3. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the Torx screws evenly and progressively.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, Install the

retaining bolts.
Torque: 12 Nm
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5.
Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 22 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 11 Nm
Torque: 30 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
13. If a new fixed vane turbocharger actuator is installed, carry out the reset
procedure for the fixed vane turbocharger actuator using approved
diagnostic tool.
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt central idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 -
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining nut 50 37 -
Rear end accessory drive belt (READ) cover retaining 9 - 80
bolts
Camshaft rear hub bolt Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - 80 Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - 80 -
degrees degrees
Camshaft rear pulley retaining bolts 23 16 -
READ belt tensioner retaining bolt 23 16 -
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - Component Location
Item Description
2 Idler
3 Coolant pump
4 Idler
5 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
6 Crankshaft pulley
7 Generator
8 Belt tensioner
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - Overview
OVERVIEW
The crankshaft pulley drives a single ribbed belt which in turn drives all of the engine mounted accessories.
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - System Operation and
System Operation
OPERATION
The crankshaft pulley is attached to and rotates with the crankshaft. The pulley provides the drive for the accessory drive vee
belt which in turn provides rotational power for the front mounted accessories such as the generator, power steering pump,
coolant pump and the A/C (air conditioning) compressor.
The crankshaft pulley is a combined pulley and torsional vibration damper.
DESCRIPTION
The accessory drive belt, which is a maintenance free poly-V type belt, is automatically pre-loaded by the belt tensioner and
routed over idlers in order to maintain sufficient friction around the drive wheels. This ensures slip-free drive of the accessory
components.
The torsional vibration damper incorporates compressed rubber between its inner and outer diameters to absorb vibration and
shock loads.
The belt tensioner is calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given drive system. Unless a spring
within the tensioner assembly breaks, or some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the
tensioner for correct tension.
The accessory drive belt should be inspected at every routine service for excessive wear and damage.
The belt tensioner consists of an idler pulley, which is free to rotate on a bearing located at the end of a spring-loaded pivot
arm. The accessory drive belt has wear indicators which are incorporated on the bottom of the accessory drive belt tensioner.
When the indicators are aligned the accessory drive belt requires replacing.
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive
For a detailed description of the drive belt and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
Workshop Manual. REFER to: (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Accessory Drive (Description and Operation),

Accessory Drive (Description and Operation),
Accessory Drive (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)

Idler assembly
Generator
Engine cooling fan
Tensioner assembly
Engine coolant pump
Power steering pump
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
Torsional vibration damper
Tensioner assembly
Primary front drive belt
Security/correct installation of the fuel injection pump cover
Fuel injection pump belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner assembly
Fuel injection pump
Fuel injection pump belt
the symptom chart.
CAUTION: If the engine is run without the drive belt(s) connected to eliminate driven components, diagnostic trouble
codes, (DTCs) may be set which must be cleared before the vehicle is returned to the owner. The engine should not be run for
more than 2-3 minutes with the belts disconnected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle
Symptom Chart (Primary Drive Belt)

Noise Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
Belt condition Check the pulley alignment. Check the driven components for excessive
Belt tension resistance to rotation. Rectify as necessary
Pulleys misaligned
Driven components
(including tensioners)
Drive belt does Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
not hold tension Belt condition Rectify as necessary
Tensioner fault
Symptom Chart (Fuel Injection Pump Belt)
Noise Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the belt cover for indications
Belt condition of fouling (this may indicate a pump misalignment), refer to the relevant workshop
Belt fouling manual section. The belt tensioner must be renewed if the belt is removed, making
cover a check of the bearing impractical. Remove the belt, check the fuel injection pump
Tensioner pulley for security. Check the fuel injection pump for excessive resistance to rotation
bearing failure (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley securing nut to loosen as a
Fuel injection design feature). Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) indicating a pump
pump failure malfunction
Drive belt does Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
not hold tension Belt condition Rectify as necessary
Tensioner fault
Loss of drive Investigate the cause of the belt breakage/damage (a belt broken at a 45 degree
(with no drive to Belt angle normally indicates a shear, a break straight across the belt normally indicates
the fuel injection broken/stripped that the belt has been crimped). Check the fuel injection pump for excessive
pump, the engine teeth resistance to rotation (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley
will not run) Drive pulley(s) securing nut to loosen as a design feature). Check for DTCs indicating a pump
loose malfunction
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal

4.
5. Torque: 47 Nm
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. CAUTION: Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt

pulleys for damage.
NOTES:
Note the fitted position of the accessory drive belt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal

4. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the accessory drive

belt.
5. Torque: 8 Nm
6. Torque: 47 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly located on each
pulley.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for damage.

Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal

3. NOTES:
Note the fitted position of the accessory drive belt.
4. CAUTION: Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt

pulleys for damage.
Torque: 47 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly

located on each pulley.

Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Special Tool(s)
310-138A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
310-139A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
Removal
Special Tool(s): 310-139A

5.

8.
10.
Installation
1.

3. Torque: 50 Nm
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
310-212
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) belt Timing Tool
Removal
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NOTES:
Rotate the crankshaft until the mark on the rear camshaft

pulley is in the illustrated position.

15.
16.

19.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the READ belt tensioner

tang is correctly located to the READ belt rear cover. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
engine.
NOTE: Make sure that the rear end accessory drive

(READ) belt tensioner locking pin is not removed until the
READ belt tensioner is fully installed.
Torque: 23 Nm
2. CAUTION: Do not install the new READ belt to the

pulleys with the READ belt tensioner installed. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the READ
belt.
NOTES:
The READ rotates in a counter-clockwise direction

when viewed from the rear of the engine.
Make sure the new READ belt is correctly seated onto

the camshaft and fuel pump pulleys.
4. NOTE: Make sure that the READ belt tensioner locking

pin is not removed until the READ belt tensioner is fully
installed.
Make sure that the READ belt is aligned with the marks on
the rear camshaft pulley and READ pulley as illustrated.
5.
6. Torque: 23 Nm
7.
9.
10.
12.
13.
14. Torque: 10 Nm
15.
16. Torque: 10 Nm
17. Torque: 10 Nm
18. Torque: 5 Nm
19. Torque: 10 Nm
20.
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Starter motor to oil pan bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive terminal integral connector retaining nut 10 7 -
Solenoid terminal integral connector nut 7 - 62
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section. REFER to: (303-06A)
Starting System (Description and Operation),

Starting System (Description and Operation),
Starting System (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage
Visual Inspection
Starter motor Battery

Engine (turns freely) Fuses
Starter relay
Wiring harness(s)
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
the symptom chart
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed
Symptom Chart

The engine does Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position and correctly
not crank (starter Gear selector not in P or N adjusted. Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check for
motor does not position (vehicles with DTCs indicating an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay,
turn) automatic transmission) ignition switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Battery Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns freely.
Starter relay
Invalid key code received by
Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
Engine seized
The engine does Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter motor
not crank (starter Starter motor installation square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth
motor does turn) Starter motor for damage, foreign objects, etc.
Flywheel/Drive plate ring
gear
Engine cranks too Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the starter
slowly Battery motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the engine oil
Harness/Connectors grade and condition.
Starter motor
Oil grade
Engine cranks too Check the engine compressions.

fast Low engine compression
Excessive starter Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor square to
motor noise Starter motor engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing condition. Check the
Flywheel/Drive plate ring flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System Vehicles With: Smart
Key
For a detailed description of the starting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual.

Visual Inspection
Steering column Fuses

Brake pedal Harnesses and connectors
Smart key Warning lamp operation
Steering Wheel Smart key operation
Engine start operation
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed.
CAUTIONS:
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part number
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places and with a
current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into account
concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Symptom Chart
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test B.
NOTE: Back up start - 10MY onwards
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook

Press start and brake Engine fails to crank GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Steering column locked Ignition switches off after 3 seconds GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Ambient temperatures below zero GO to Pinpoint Test E.
NOTE: For diesel engines
Engine still not cranking
Pin Point Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
A1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
For automatic transmission vehicles, ensure the brake pedal is depressed and the park or neutral selected
1 Ensure the smart Key is within the cabin area. Check the smart key is not close to any electrical devices
e.g. Smart phones, laptops, laptop cases, games consoles and game console bags, briefcases, metal
objects etc. All can affect the system performance and may block its communication with the vehicle. If
the smart key battery low warning message has been displayed it is likely that the smart key battery has
insufficient charge. Refer to section 'Back Up Start' for 10MY onwards
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No further action required
No
Check and install a new battery as required. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, contact
dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST B : BACK UP START - 10MY ONWARDS - SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
B1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
1 On pressing the start button, smart key not found. When this warning is displayed the smart key should
be brought into close proximity with the immobilize antenna unit. Hold the key in the location and press
the start button again. If this process fails the first time, try repositioning the key around the immobilize
antenna unit location, repeat the sequence again
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No
Contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST C : PRESS START AND BRAKE
CONDITIONS
C1: ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are

PINPOINT TEST D : STEERING COLUMN LOCKED
CONDITIONS
D1: IGNITION SWITCHES OFF AFTER 3 SECONDS
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
For manual transmission vehicles ensure the clutch is fully depressed
If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and smart key
authorisation
1 Unlock the vehicle using the key fob, within 3 minutes of unlocking ensure the steering wheel can rotate
freely. Perform a further lock and unlock check and attempt to start vehicle. If the steering 'column locked'
message is still displayed, Lock the vehicle with the key fob and ensure the column is locked (If
installed) by turning the steering wheel. Then unlock the vehicle ensuring the column Steering wheel can
turn freely. Now perform another start attempt
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ENGINE STILL NOT CRANKING
CONDITIONS
E1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW ZERO
1 Hold the start button down for at least 4 seconds while starting the vehicle
2 Switch the ignition on, wet the windscreen and activate the wipers. when the wipers are in operation
press the start button, If the wipers stop, the Engine is allowed to start
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal

Installation).

prior to removal.
Torque: 35 Nm
4.
Torque: 100 Nm
6. Torque: 47 Nm
7. Torque:
M8 10 Nm
M6 7 Nm
Torque: 47 Nm
Installation

Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Glow plug 10 - 89
Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Glow Plug System - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Glow plug module
2 Glow plugs
3 Glow plug warning lamp
Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Glow Plug System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The glow plug system has a glow plug installed in the inlet side of each cylinder. The glow plugs heat the combustion
chambers before and during cranking, to aid cold starting, and after the engine starts to reduce emissions and engine noise
when idling with a cold engine.
The glow plugs are connected for each bank by a common harness which is connected into the main engine harness. The
harness for each bank connects into a connector block which attaches to each of the glow plugs for that bank. The glow plugs
are connected directly to the glow plug module which is controlled by glow plug software contained within the ECM (engine
control module).
Each glow plug is a tubular heating element which contains a spiral filament encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of
the tubular heating element is the heater coil. Behind the heater coil, and connected in series, is a control coil. The control coil
regulates the current to the heater coil to safeguard against overheating.
Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Glow Plug System - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = HS CAN (controller area network)
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Glow plug module
3 Glow plug (6 off)
6 Engine Junction Box (EJB) - (100A Midi-Fuse)
7 Battery Junction Box (BJB) - (250A Megafuse)
System Operation
System Operation
There are three phases of glow plug heating:
Pre heating
Crank heating
Post heating
The ECM (engine control module) determines the heating times from the ECT (engine coolant temperature). The lower the ECT,
the longer the heating times.
When the ignition is switched to power mode 9 (engine crank), the ECM calculates any required heating times and, if heating
is required, energizes the glow plug relay in the BJB (battery junction box). The glow plug relay supplies an ignition power
supply to the glow plug module. The glow plug module is controlled by the ECM which determines the pre-heat time required.
The module then supplies power to each of the glow plugs for the required time.
When pre-heating is required, the ECM also sends a message to the instrument cluster, on the high speed CAN, to request
illumination of the glow plug indicator. The glow plug indicator remains illuminated for the duration of the pre heating phase,
or until the ignition is switched to crank, whichever occurs first. If required, the ECM keeps the glow plug module energized
during cranking and for the duration of any post heating phase.
The ECM monitors the drive circuit of the glow plug module, via a direct diagnostic connection with the module, for plausibility
of operation, continuity, and short and open circuits. If a fault is detected, the glow plug module passes the fault information
to the ECM, which stores a related fault code and permanently illuminates the glow plug indicator while the ignition is in power
mode 9.
Pre Heating
Pre-heat is the length of time the glow plugs operate prior to engine cranking. The ECM controls the pre-heat time based on
ECT sensor output and battery voltage. If the ECT sensor fails, the ECM will use the IAT (intake air temperature) sensor value
as a default value. The pre-heat duration is extended if the coolant temperature is low and the battery is not fully charged.
The ECM receives the corresponding temperature signal from the ECT sensor.
The pre heating period is dependent on the temperature signal (low temperature = longer pre heating period).
The driver is informed that pre heating is in operation by the glow plug indicator light in the instrument cluster coming on. The
pre heating times become longer as the coolant temperature falls.
The BARO (barometric pressure) also has an influence on activation and deactivation of the glow plugs in the event of large
altitude differences.
Crank Heating
Crank heating is carried out at every start where the coolant temperature is below the predefined threshold of 20° C. Crank
heating begins if the engine speed exceeds 42 rpm for longer than 50ms, or the starter is active for longer than 4 sec. If the
coolant temperature sensor is defective, a default temperature of 0° C is used.
Post Heating
Post heat is the length of time the glow plugs operate after the engine starts. The ECM controls the post heating time based
on ECT sensor output. The post heat phase reduces engine noise, improves idle quality and reduces hydrocarbon emissions.
Preheating is followed by the post heating phase once the engine has started. The post heating phase depends upon how the
vehicle is driven.
In addition to ECT, BARO and engine speed, the injected fuel quantity is significant in this context. For example, if the injected
fuel quantity is 70 mg per piston stroke and the coolant temperature is below 20 °C, post heating is performed at engine
speeds between 1100 and 3500 rpm.
In the case of greater injection quantities and considerably lower engine temperatures, the post heating phase is also
activated depending on the engine speed. At 14 mg per piston stroke and an ECT of below 0 °C, for example, post heating is
performed at engine speeds between 1100 and 1500 rpm.
Glow Plug
The ceramic sheathed element glow plugs are made from a heat-resistant, electrically conductive ceramic material. The ceramic
sheathed-element glow plugs outer layer is heated directly and is self regulating. The self regulation allows the resistance of
the sheathed element to automatically increase as the heat increases preventing the glow plug from overheating. In addition,
during the heating process and under the control of the glow plug relay, the glow plugs can be operated above their nominal
voltages. This permits heat-up speeds of 1000°C per second. The sheathed-element glow plugs reach a maximum glow
temperature of 1300°C and can hold a temperature of 1150°C for several minutes after the first-start glow or at intervening
times.
The glow plug is a tubular heating element that protrudes into the combustion chamber of the engine. The heating element
contains a spiral filament encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of the tubular heating element is the heater coil.
Behind the heater coil is a control coil. The control coil is connected in series and regulates the heater coil to ensure that it
does not overheat.
Each cylinder bank has a separate harness connecting the three glow plugs. The harness connects into the engine wiring
harness and each harness has a connector block which attaches to each of the glow plugs for that bank.
The glow plug module receives a battery voltage feed via a 250A megafuse in the BJB and a 100A midi-fuse in the EJB (engine
junction box). Operation of the glow plug module is controlled by the ECM, which also controls the illumination of the glow
plug indicator in the instrument cluster.
The system has been designed as a low-voltage glow system. At 7 volts, the nominal voltage of the sheathed-element glow
plugs is significantly lower than the 12 volts of the main electrical circuit. The electronic glow plug module matches the voltage
to the sheathed-element glow plugs and controls their glow temperature precisely to the specific requirements of the engine.
This produces the optimum glow temperature even when the main circuit voltage is interrupted during engine starting. The
lower power consumption of the ceramic glow plugs and their time-staggered activation reduce to a minimum the peak load on
the main circuit during the cold start and immediate post-start periods.
In the event of glow plug failure, the engine may be difficult to start and excessive smoke emissions may be observed after
starting.
Glow Plug Module

The glow plug module is located in the RH (right-hand) side of the engine compartment. The module is attached to the power
steering reservoir bracket with a bolt and nut.
Two connectors are used on the module. One connector receives the power supplies from the battery via the BJB and EJB and
also provides for the connections to/from the ECM. The second connector supplies the outputs to the glow plugs.
Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Glow Plug System
For a detailed description of the glow plug system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-07B Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Glow Plug System (Description and Operation),

Glow Plug System (Description and Operation),
Glow Plug System (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Glow plug lamp

Fuses
Glow plug relays
Engine management control relay
Wiring harness(es)
Electrical connector(s)
Glow plug(s)
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart

Poor starting Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
(extreme weather Glow plugs the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug
conditions) inoperative/inefficient DTCs. The fuel system recycles fuel until operating temperature is reached
Fuel temperature too to reduce this possibility.
low
High cold-engine Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
emissions After-glow phase the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug
inoperative DTCs. After-glow is designed to function at engine temperatures below 50
degrees C (122 degrees F), and below 2,500 rpm.
High cold-engine Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
noise, vibration or After-glow phase the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug
harshness inoperative DTCs. After-glow is designed to function at engine temperatures below 50
degrees C (122 degrees F), and below 2,500 rpm.
DTC Index
Operation).
Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Glow Plugs
Removal
NOTES:
4. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01, Removal and Installation).
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
component.
8. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve to cylinder head retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve to EGR cooler retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve cooler mounting bracket retaining bolt 10 - 89
EGR valve outlet tube to EGR valve retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve outlet tube to timing cover retaining bolt 4 - 35
Fuel filter mounting bracket retaining M8 nuts 27 20 -
Fuel filter mounting bracket retaining M6 bolt 2 - 18
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Emission Control -
Component Location
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Component Location
Item Description
1 EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve motor
2 EGR outlet pipe
3 By-pass valve vacuum actuator
4 Vacuum pump
5 Solenoid valve
6 Vacuum pipe (2 off)
7 EGR cooler
8 EGR inlet pipe from exhaust manifold
9 Throttle intake manifold
Crankcase Ventilation Component Location
Item Description
1 Cylinder ventilation scavenger hose (2 off)
2 Crankcase gas to air intake hose
3 Crankcase breather cylinder block connections
4 Oil drain to oil filter housing
5 Crankcase breather and oil separator
Overview
OVERVIEW
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system is used to control the amount of exhaust gas being recirculated in order to reduce
exhaust emissions and combustion noise. EGR is enabled when the engine is at normal operating temperature and under
cruising conditions.
Crankcase Ventilation System
The crankcase ventilation system ensures that all gasses emitted from the crankcase during engine running are separated from
any oil particles and recirculated via the clean air induction system.
System Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM OPERATION
If small volumes of fuel are injected into a combustion chamber full of pure air, the effect is to create a very lean mixture. This
burns at a high temperature, which in turn causes the excess oxygen in the mixture to combine with the naturally occurring
nitrogen in the air to create nitrogen oxides (NOx), a noxious class of pollutants associated with acid rain. This is a particular
problem for diesel engines at low to medium loads (as the engine has no throttle, the cylinder is replenished with a full charge
of 'air' at every induction stroke). Exhaust gas is blended into the intake air charge to create the cylinder charge. As the
exhaust gas effectively contains no oxygen, it prevents the formation of a very lean mixture, so lowering combustion
temperatures and minimizing the formation of NOx.
At low engine speeds and loads, over 50 percent of the cylinder charge can be made up of recycled exhaust gas. This is routed
directly from the exhaust manifold and passes through a gas-water heat exchanger before being supplied to the inlet manifold.
The volume of exhaust gas added to the intake charge is regulated by an electronically controlled EGR (exhaust gas
recirculation) valve, actuated according to precise engine speed and load by the engine management system.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM OPERATION

Crankcase gasses are drawn into the oil separator unit from the crankcase and the cylinder head covers (both banks) by a
vacuum created by a connection into the air induction system.
The crankcase gasses are circulated around the oil separator where the gas and oil are separated. The gas is returned to the
inlet side of the air induction system prior to the primary turbocharger. The collected oil is drained down to the sump via the oil
cooler and filter housing on the cylinder block.
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
EGR System Control Components
Item Description
1 HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
2 LH (left-hand) exhaust pipe
3 EGR cooler
5 EGR valve motor
6 EGR outlet pipe
7 EGR cooler and valve housing
8 EGR inlet pipe
9 Exhaust system cross-over pipe
10 Pre and post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensors
The EGR system comprises an EGR cooler and housing assembly which is bolted to the cylinder head, above the exhaust
manifold. Each EGR assembly comprises an EGR cooler, a by-pass housing, a by-pass valve motor and a by-pass valve vacuum
actuator.
A pipe is connected to the exhaust manifold and directs exhaust gasses into the by-pass housing. A second pipe from the
by-pass housing connects to the throttle intake manifold and passes the cooled exhaust gasses into the intake manifold to
mix with the clean air entering the engine from the air filter.
The EGR cooler is attached to the by-pass housing with a gasket and 5 screws. The by-pass housing has an engine coolant
connection which allows coolant to flow from the engine oil cooler into the by-pass housing. Engine coolant flows from the
by-pass housing into a water jacket within the cooler which in cools the exhaust gasses by heat transfer within the cooler. The
engine coolant flows from the cooler through an outlet pipe and is passed back into the cooling system via the heater core.
The by-pass housing contains the EGR valve motor, the EGR valve and the by-pass valve.
By-pass Housing Components
Item Description
2 EGR valve motor
3 EGR valve
4 By-pass valve
By-Pass Valve
The by-pass valve is a vacuum operated valve which directs the flow of exhaust gasses either through the EGR cooler or
by-passes the cooler and directs the gasses directly to the intake manifold.
A vacuum actuator is located on a bracket attached to each EGR cooler. The actuator receives a vacuum which is produced by
the vacuum pump located at the rear of the engine. The vacuum actuator is connected to the by-pass valve within the by-pass
housing by a connecting rod.
The vacuum supply to the actuator is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). When by-pass control is required, the
ECM energizes a vacuum solenoid valve which applies vacuum to the vacuum actuators. The vacuum causes the actuators to
move the connecting rods in a linear direction. The linear movement of the rod is transferred to rotary movement of the
by-pass valve within the by-pass housing.
By-Pass Valve Closed
When the by-pass valve is closed, exhaust gasses are directed through the cooler before being passed to the intake manifold.
By-Pass Valve Open
When the by-pass valve is open, exhaust gasses are passed directly through the by-pass housing into the intake manifold with
no cooling applied to the gasses.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve motor is located on the by-pass housing. A 5 pin connector provides the power, ground and ECM signal and
feedback connections for the motor.
The motor is secured to the by-pass housing with 4 torx screws. A pinion gear on the motor spindle drives a geared rack which
www.JagDocs.com
is connected to the EGR valve in the by-pass housing.
The motor is controlled by the ECM which provides power supply to operate the motor as required. A 5 Volt feedback signal is
passed to the ECM which is used to establish motor position for precise control.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION
The crankcase ventilation system comprises an oil breather and separator. The breather receives crankcase directly from the
crankcase and also from the cylinder heads.
The breather is connected to the top of the cylinder block with two seals. Two scavenge pipes located on the top of the
breather are connected to the cylinder head covers. A breather pipe is connected from the top of the breather to the clean air
intake hose at a point prior to the primary turbocharger.
Clean air being drawn into the engine when it is running creates a vacuum in the breather pipe. This vacuum in turn creates a
vacuum in the oil breather and separator which draws gasses from the crankcase and cylinder heads into the breather. These
gasses are circulated around the breather, allowing oil particles to be separated from the gas. The gasses are drawn into the
breather pipe and are mixed with the clean air being drawn into the turbocharger.
The oil particles separated from the gasses accumulate in the oil separator and drain through a third connection at the bottom
of the oil breather and separator, through a connection on the oil cooler housing to the oil pan.
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Emission Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),

Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Engine breather hoses Fuse(s)

Oil separator Wiring harness
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes (check for cracks) Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
EGR valve(s) Intake air shut off throttle
EGR cooler(s) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve(s)
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart

Difficult to start Check the Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve.
Poor/Erratic idle Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
Lack of power when valve stuck open
accelerating
Engine stops/stalls Check the Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve. Check the engine
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) breather system. Check the oil separator. Check for Exhaust gas
valve stuck open recirculation (EGR) DTCs.
Breather system
disconnected/restricted/blocked
Excessive fuel
consumption Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
valve stuck open
Excessive black Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
smoke not operating
Excessive Breather system
emissions restricted/blocked
Excessive blow-by Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
Breather system
restricted/blocked
Engine oil leaks Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
Breather system
restricted/blocked
DTC Index
Operation).
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seals.
Make sure that all openings are sealed.
Installation

Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Valve LH
Removal
Installation).
8.
9.
10.
11.

14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
20.
22.
23.

30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
36.

39.
40.
41.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
3.
4.
5.

stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

stage.
9.
10. Torque: 24 Nm
11. Torque: 24 Nm

tight.

tight.
14. CAUTIONS:

stage.
16.
17.

installed.

22.

27. Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29. Torque: 10 Nm
30.
31. Torque: 10 Nm
32. Torque: 10 Nm
33.

stage.

stage.
37. Torque: 10 Nm
38. Torque: 10 Nm
39. Torque: 10 Nm
40. Torque: 10 Nm
41. Torque: 10 Nm
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47. Torque: 10 Nm
48.
49. Torque: 27 Nm
Installation).
Valve Outlet Tube LH
Removal
3.
4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed.
Installation

stage.
2. CAUTION: Install a new clamp. Close the clamp to the

first audible click by hand. Making sure that the clamp is in
a central position to the joint, close to the second audible
click using a suitable tool.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
Valve Outlet Tube RH
Removal
2.
4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed.
Installation

stage.
2. CAUTION: Install a new clamp. Close the clamp to the

first audible click by hand. Making sure that the clamp is in
a central position to the joint, close to the second audible
click using a suitable tool.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
Valve RH
Removal
Installation).

Installation).

8.
10.
11.

14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
20.
21. Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
22.
23.
25. CAUTIONS:

29.
30.
31.
32.
33. CAUTIONS:
34.

37.
38.
39. CAUTIONS:

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
3.
4.
5.

stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

stage.
9.
10. Torque: 24 Nm

tight.

tight.
13. CAUTIONS:

tight.
15.
www.JagDocs.com

installed.

20.


25. Torque: 10 Nm
26. Torque: 10 Nm
27. Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29. Torque: 10 Nm
30.
31.

stage.

stage.
34. Torque: 10 Nm
35. Torque: 10 Nm
36. Torque: 10 Nm
37. Torque: 10 Nm
38. Torque: 7 Nm
39.
40.
41.
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
44.
Torque: 10 Nm
46. Torque: 10 Nm
47.
Installation).
Installation).
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Air cleaner housing retaining bolt 8 - 71
Charge air cooler to radiator retaining bolts 7 - 62
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) intake manifold
2 Crankcase gas to clean air intake pipe
3 LH (left-hand) intake manifold
4 Charge air MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
5 Intake manifold throttle actuator
6 MAF (mass air flow) sensor (secondary turbocharger)
7 MAF / IAT (intake air temperature) sensor (primary turbocharger)
8 Air cleaner housing
9 Air intake scoop
11 Turbocharger inlet valve assembly
12 Pipe - Compressed air from primary turbocharger to charge air cooler
13 Primary turbocharger
14 Crankcase breather and separator
15 Intake air to primary turbocharger pipe
16 Charge air cooler to throttle intake manifold pipe
17 Pipe - Compressed air from secondary turbocharger to charge air cooler
18 Intake air to secondary turbocharger pipe
19 Secondary turbocharger
Distribution and Filtering TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Overview
OVERVIEW
The intake air distribution and filtering system comprises:
Two MAF (mass air flow) / IAT (intake air temperature) sensor
Charge air temperature sensor
Air cleaner and housing
Charge air cooler
Primary and secondary turbochargers.
The system cleans, cools and compresses the intake air. The turbochargers compress the air which is then cooled in the charge
air cooler before being mixed with the injected fuel in the cylinder producing a high energy combustion increasing engine
performance.
Distribution and Filtering TDV6 3.0L Diesel - System Operation and
System Operation
OPERATION
Air is drawn into the air intake system via the air intake scoop located at the front of the vehicle. The air passes into the air
cleaner housing and passes through the air cleaner. The air cleaner is a pleated, paper type filter which removes dust, pollen
etc. from the intake air.
The filtered clean air passes from the air cleaner housing to the turbocharger inlet valve assembly. Depending on engine load
and operating conditions, the intake air can be passed to only the primary turbocharger or to both the primary and secondary
turbochargers.
Exhaust gasses leaving the exhaust manifolds are used to drive a turbine in the turbocharger which is turn drives a
compressor. The rotational speed of the compressor is directly related to the speed of the exhaust gasses leaving the engine.
Increased exhaust gas emission drives the turbine, and subsequently the compressor, faster, further compressing the intake air
delivered to the engine.
The compression of the air by the turbocharger also heats the air which increases the air volume (density). The intake air is
passed into the charge air cooler which reduces the air temperature as it passes through the cooler. This in turn decreases the
air volume allowing more air molecules to be passed into the cylinders. The cooled and compressed air is mixed with the
injected fuel in the cylinder producing a high energy combustion increasing engine performance.
DESCRIPTION
Air Cleaner and Housing
The air cleaner housing is located in the front LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment. The housing has a water drain
with a grommet which is located in a hole in the LH chassis longitudinal structure. A bolt secures the air cleaner housing to a
captive nut in a bracket on the LH inner fender.
The air cleaner element is a pleated paper type element with an rubber seal around its perimeter. The seal locates in a groove
in the housing and prevents air by-passing the element. The housing upper lid can be removed by pulling back 2 plastic clips to
release the lid.
Charge Air Cooler
The charge air cooler is located at the front of the engine compartment, between the A/C (air conditioning) condenser and the
engine cooling radiator.
Turbochargers are designed to force more air mass into the engine intake manifold and combustion chambers. This
compression process by the turbocharger produces heat which can reduce the performance gains of turbocharging due to
reduced density of the intake air and an increase the cylinder combustion temperature. To counteract this the charge air cooler
is used to reduce the intake air temperature which increases the density of the air allowing more air molecules to be delivered
to the combustion chamber.
The cooler is a cross flow type cooler and has inlet and outlet connections. The LH connection is the inlet for the compressed
air deliver from the turbocharger compressors. The RH (right-hand) connection is the outlet for the cooled compressed air to be
delivered to the throttle intake manifold.
The charge air cooler is an air-to-air type cooler. Heated air from the turbochargers is passed through tubes in the cooler.
Ambient air passing over the tubes cools the intake air as it passes through the cooler.
Air Intake Components
The air intake components comprise 3 main components; airbox, intake manifolds and a throttle intake manifold.
Airbox
The airbox allows for the connection of the cooled intake air from the charge air cooler to the throttle intake manifold. The
airbox houses a charge air temperature sensor which measures the temperature of the air entering the combustion chambers
and passes this information to the ECM (engine control module).
A single pipe from the airbox connects to the secondary turbocharger. Boost pressure is applied via this pipe to the turbine
shaft of the secondary turbocharger to maintain the correct lubrication of the turbocharger during driving conditions where the
secondary turbocharger is inactive.
Throttle Intake Manifold
The throttle intake manifold is located between the 2 intake manifolds and the airbox. The manifold splits the air entering the
engine between the 2 intake manifolds.
The throttle intake manifold houses a DC electric throttle actuator which controls a flap in the body of the manifold. The flap is
controlled by the ECM and is constantly adjusted in response to driver inputs via the throttle pedal to precisely control the
amount of air allowed into the intake manifolds.
Pipe connections on either side of the throttle intake manifold allow for the attachment of the exhaust gas outlet pipes from
the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valves
Refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
A boost pressure sensor is located on the top of the manifold where the air flow splits for the 2 intake manifolds. The pressure
sensor measures the pressure of the intake air as delivered from the one or both of the turbochargers and passes this
information to the ECM for turbocharger control.
Intake Manifolds
The intake manifolds are an integral part of the cylinder head covers. Each intake manifold is connected to the throttle intake
manifold via a push fit, sealed connection. The intake manifolds direct intake air to the inlet valves for each combustion
chamber.
Distribution and Filtering
For a detailed description of the intake air distribution and filtering system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (Description and Operation),
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (Description and Operation),
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Hoses and ducts condition and installation Fuse(s)

Air cleaner element condition and installation Wiring harness
Restricted air intake Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Vacuum hoses condition and installation Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
Pipework to turbocharger condition and installation Air Charge Temperature (ACT) sensor
Turbocharger condition and installation Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Charge air coolers Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
Intake air shut-off throttle solenoid
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as necessary.
Vehicle does not Restricted/Blocked air intake
start/hard Restricted/Blocked air cleaner
starting element
Check the turbocharger. Check the intake air shutoff throttle function
Turbocharger fault (make sure the throttle body returns to the open position). Check the
Poor performance Throttle body fault intercooler hoses.
Intercooler hoses
Excessive intake Check the joint between the air intake elbow and the intake air shutoff
noise Intake air leak after the throttle. Check the joints between the throttle body outlets and the
turbocharger intake manifolds. Check the charge air cooler seals. Check the intake
Intake pipe system and hoses for correct installation/damage.
disconnected/damaged after
the air cleaner
Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
DTC Index
Operation).
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.

6. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner Element
Removal
1.
2. TORQUE: 8 Nm
3.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal
4.
5. Torque: 4.5 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Protect the air conditioning (A/C) condenser.
Using suitable cable tie secure the A/C condenser

away from the radiator.
Torque: 7 Nm
10. Torque: 9 Nm

13. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 5 - 44
Engine control module (ECM) retaining bolts 7 - 5
ECM to bracket retaining nuts 7 - 5
Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor 14 11 -
Engine oil level sensor retaining nut 11 8 -
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor 2 - 18
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 3 - 27
Exhaust gas temperature sensor RH 35 26 -
Pre catalytic converter temperature sensor 35 26 -
Post catalytic converter temperature sensor 35 26 -
Pre diesel particulate filter (DPF) exhaust gas temperature sensor 35 26 -
Post DPF exhaust gas temperature sensor 35 26 -
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) 48 35 -
Steering gear to subframe retaining bolts 100 74 -
Lower steering column to steering gear pinch bolt 35 26 -
Toe link ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 133 98 -
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Electronic Engine Controls -
Component Location
Component Location - Sheet 1 of 3
Item Description
1 Engine Junction Box (EJB)
4 Exhaust gas temperature sensor
5 Differential pressure sensor
6 Pre Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) temperature sensor
7 Post DPF temperature sensor
8 Post catalyst temperature sensor
9 Pre-catalyst temperature sensor
10 Heated Oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Item Description
1 Glow plug module
2 Active engine mount solenoid valve
4 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
5 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor
6 Brake lamp/brake test switch
7 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
10 Water in fuel sensor
11 Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
12 Primary turbocharger control module
13 Left Hand (LH) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
14 Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor
15 Engine oil level/temperature sensor
16 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve
17 Mass Air Flow (MAF) / Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor (primary turbocharger)
18 Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor (secondary turbocharger)
19 Charge air temperature sensor
Item Description
1 Fuel injector (6 off)
2 EGR cooler bypass vacuum solenoid valve
3 Fuel temperature sensor
4 Fuel volume control valve
5 Engine oil pressure sensor
7 Secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve
8 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve
9 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
10 Throttle actuator
11 Glow plug (6 off)
13 Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
14 Right Hand (RH) EGR valve
15 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve and position sensor
Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine has an ECM controlled engine management system. Multiple sensor inputs and precision control of
actuators are used by the ECM to achieve optimum performance during all driving conditions.
The ECM receives and processes information from the following input sources:
Oil level sensor

Secondary turbocharger shut-off sensor
Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
Alternator
Differential pressure sensor
Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
Fuel rail pressure sensor
Air charge temperature sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
Throttle Position (TP) sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) / Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
EGR sensors
HO2S
Catalyst and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) temperature sensors
Brake lamp switch
The Engine Control Module (ECM) outputs controlling signals to the following sensors and actuators:
Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor clutch solenoid

A/C compressor clutch
Fuel injectors
Glow plug module
Fuel pressure control valve
Fuel volume control valve
Fan control module
Vacuum control valves (EGR cooler by-pass, secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off, secondary turbocharger turbine
shut-off)
ABS module
Instrument cluster
Primary turbocharger control module
EGR recirculation valves
Alternator
Throttle actuator
Secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve
Active engine mount solenoid valve.
Control Diagram
3.0L V6 Diesel Control Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2
Item Description
NOTE:A = Hardwired
1 Battery
3 Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
4 Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor
5 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
7 Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
8 Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
9 Engine oil level/temperature sensor
10 Fuel volume control valve
11 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
12 Throttle actuator
13 Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
15 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) solenoid valve
16 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve
17 Secondary turbine compressor shut-off solenoid valve
18 Fuel temperature sensor
20 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve
3.0L V6 Diesel Control Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2
Item Description
NOTE:A = Hardwired; D = High Speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus
1 Glow plug relay
2 Active engine mounts solenoid valve
3 Left Hand (LH) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
4 Right Hand (RH) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
5 EGR cooler bypass vacuum solenoid valve
9 Primary turbocharger control module
10 Charge air temperature sensor
12 JaguarDrive selector
15 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
17 Restraints Control Module (RCM)
19 Glow plug (6 off)
System Operation
OPERATION
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine management system is controlled by an ECM (engine control module) and is able to monitor, adapt
and precisely control the fuel injection. The ECM uses multiple sensor inputs and precision control of actuators to achieve
optimum performance during all driving conditions.
The ECM controls fuel delivery to all six cylinders via a common rail injection system. The common rail system uses a fuel rail
to accumulate highly pressurized fuel and feed the six, electronically controlled injectors. The fuel rail is located in close
proximity to the injectors, which assists in maintaining full system pressure at each injector at all times.
The ECM uses the drive by wire principle for acceleration control. There are no control cables or physical connections between
the accelerator pedal and the engine. Accelerator pedal demand is communicated to the ECM by two potentiometers located in
an APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor. The ECM uses the two signals to determine the position, rate of movement and
direction of movement of the pedal. The ECM then uses this data, along with other engine information from other sensors, to
achieve the optimum engine response.
DESCRIPTION
The ECM is located on a bracket on the passenger side of the engine compartment bulkhead.
The ECM connected to the vehicle harnesses via 2 connectors. The ECM contains data processors and memory microchips. The
output signals to the actuators are in the form of ground paths provided by driver circuits within the ECM. The ECM driver
circuits produce heat during normal operation and dissipate this heat via the casing. Some sensors receive a regulated voltage
supplied by the ECM. This avoids incorrect signals caused by voltage drop during cranking.
The ECM performs self diagnostic routines and stores fault codes in its memory. These fault codes and diagnostics can be
accessed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. If the ECM is to be replaced, the new ECM is supplied 'blank' and must
be configured to the vehicle using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. A 'flash' EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable
read only memory) allows the ECM to be externally configured, using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system, with market specific
or new tune information. The current engine tune data can be accessed and read using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
When a new ECM is fitted, it must also be synchronized to other system control modules using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system. ECM's cannot be 'swapped' between vehicles as they must be 'matched' with security information to other system
modules.
The ECM is connected to the engine sensors which allow it to monitor the engine operating conditions. The ECM processes
these signals and decides the actions necessary to maintain optimum engine performance in terms of drive ability, fuel
efficiency and exhaust emissions. The memory of the ECM is programmed with instructions for how to control the engine. The
memory also contains data in the form of maps which the ECM uses as a basis for fuelling and emission control. By comparing
the information from the sensors to the data in the maps, the ECM is able to calculate the various output requirements. The
ECM contains an adaptive strategy which updates the system when components vary due to production tolerances or ageing.
The ECM is connected to other system control modules and receives data from these modules on the high speed CAN
(controller area network) bus to enable precise engine control under all vehicle operating conditions.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is located at the rear of the engine block on the LH (left-hand) side. The sensor lead
passes through a cover in an aperture on the side of the engine block. The sensor is secured to a bracket on a plate which
locates the rear crankshaft oil seal. The sensor tip is aligned with a magnetic trigger reluctor wheel which is attached to the
end of the crankshaft. The trigger wheel is a press fit on the end of the crankshaft. The trigger wheel must be carefully aligned
to the crankshaft to ensure correct timing. The sensor produces a square wave signal, the frequency of which is proportional to
engine speed.
The ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal and can detect engine over-speed. The ECM counteracts engine over-speed by
gradually fading out speed synchronized functions. The CKP is a Hall effect sensor. The sensor measures the magnetic field
variation induced by the magnetized trigger wheel.
The trigger wheel has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. The missing teeth represent 12º of crankshaft rotation and provide a
reference point for the angular position of the crankshaft at 21º BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1.
When the space with the two missing teeth pass the sensor tip, a gap in the signal is produced which the ECM uses to
determine the crankshaft position. The air gap between the sensor tip and the ring is important to ensure correct signals are
output to the ECM. The recommended air gap between the CKP and the trigger wheel is 0.4 mm- 1.5 mm.
The ECM uses the signal from the CKP sensor for the following functions:
Synchronization
Determine fuel injection timing
Produce an engine speed signal which is broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP (camshaft position) is located on the front face of the LH cylinder head. The sensor tip protrudes through an aperture
in the front face of the cylinder head to pick up on a reluctor behind the camshaft pulley. The CMP sensor is a Hall effect type
sensor.
The ECM uses the CMP sensor signal to determine if the piston in No. 1 cylinder is at injection TDC (top dead center) or
exhaust TDC. Once this has been established, the ECM can then operate the correct injector to inject fuel into the cylinder
when the piston is at injection TDC
The CMP sensor is a Hall effect sensor which used by the ECM at engine start-up to synchronize the ECM with the CKP sensor
signal. The ECM does this by using the CMP sensor signal to identify number one cylinder to ensure the correct injector timing.
Once the ECM has established the injector timing, the CMP sensor signal is no longer used.
The CMP sensor receives a 5V supply from the ECM. Two further connections to the ECM provide ground and signal output.
If a fault occurs, an error is registered in the ECM. Two types of failure can occur; no CMP sensor signal or a synchronization
error of the CMP and CKP sensors. The error recorded by the ECM can also relate to a total failure of the crankshaft signal or
crankshaft signal dynamically implausible. Both components should be checked to determine the cause of the fault.
If a fault occurs with the CMP sensor when the engine is running, the engine will continue to run but the ECM will deactivate
boost pressure control. Once the engine is switched off, the engine will crank but will not restart while the fault is present.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Item Description
1 MAF (mass air flow) sensor
2 MAF/IAT (intake air temperature) sensor
The MAF/IAT sensors are located on the inlet air duct directly after the air filter box. Two sensors are fitted; the lower sensor
is a combined MAF/IAT sensor and the upper sensor is a MAF sensor only.
The MAF sensors work on the hot film principle. Each sensor has 2 sensing elements which are contained within a film. One
element is maintained at ambient (air intake) temperature, e.g. 25°Celsius (77°F). The other element is heated to 200°Celsius
(392°F) above the ambient temperature, e.g. 225°Celsius (437°F). Intake air entering the engine passes through the MAF
sensors and has a cooling effect on the film. The ECM monitors the current required to maintain the 200°Celsius (392°F)
differential between the two elements and uses the differential to provide a precise, non-linear, signal which equates to the
volume of air being drawn into the engine.
The MAF sensor output is a digital signal proportional to the mass of the incoming air. The ECM uses this data, in conjunction
with signals from other sensors and information from stored fuelling maps, to determine the precise fuel quantity to be
injected into the cylinders. The signal is also used as a feedback signal for the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system.
The IAT sensor in the lower sensor incorporates a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor in a voltage divider circuit.
The NTC thermistor works on the principle of decreasing resistance in the sensor as the temperature of the intake air
increases. As the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground, the voltage sensed by the ECM decreases. The change in
voltage is proportional to the temperature change of the intake air. Using the voltage output from the IAT sensor, the ECM can
correct the fuelling map for intake air temperature. The correction is an important requirement because hot air contains less
oxygen than cold air for any given volume.
The MAF sensor receives a 12V supply from the EJB (engine junction box) and a ground connection via the ECM. Two further
connections to the ECM provide a MAF signal and IAT signal.
The IAT sensor receives a 3.3V reference voltage from the ECM and shares a ground with the MAF sensor. The signal output
from the IAT sensor is calculated by the ECM by monitoring changes in the supplied reference voltage to the IAT sensor voltage
divider circuit.
The ECM checks the calculated air mass against the engine speed. If the calculated air mass is not plausible, the ECM uses a
default air mass figure which is derived from the average engine speed compared to a stored characteristic map. The air mass
value will be corrected using values for boost pressure, atmospheric pressure and air temperature.
If one of the MAF sensor fails the ECM implements the default strategy based on engine speed. In the event of a MAF sensor
signal failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
EGR system off

Delayed engine response
Reduced engine performance.
If the IAT sensor fails the ECM uses a default intake air temperature of 40° Celsius (104°F). In the event of an IAT sensor
failure, the following symptom may be observed:
Under fuelling, resulting in reduced engine performance.
Electronic Throttle Actuator
The electronic throttle actuator is located on the side of the throttle intake manifold.
The electronic throttle actuator controls the volume of air allowed into the inlet manifolds by means of a DC motor which
controls a flap in the body of the throttle. The actuator is controlled by the ECM which operates the actuator in response to
driver inputs from the APP sensor and other engine related sensors to provide the correct air flow to the intake manifolds.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor is located in the LH EGR cooler coolant inlet pipe, at the front of the engine. The
ECT sensor provides the ECM and the instrument cluster with engine coolant temperature status.
The ECM uses the temperature information for the following functions:
Fuelling calculations
Limit engine operation if engine coolant temperature becomes too high
Cooling fan operation
Glow plug activation time.
The instrument cluster uses the temperature information for generation of engine temperature messages. The engine coolant
temperature signal is also transmitted on the medium speed CAN bus by the instrument cluster for use by other systems.
The ECT sensor circuit consists of an internal voltage divider circuit which incorporates an NTC thermistor. As the coolant
temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases and vice versa. The output from the sensor is the change in
voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative to the temperature of the coolant.
The ECM compares the signal voltage to stored values and adjusts fuel delivery to ensure optimum drive ability at all times.
The engine will require more fuel when it is cold to overcome fuel condensing on the cold metal surfaces inside the combustion
chamber. To achieve a richer air/fuel ratio, the ECM extends the injector opening time. As the engine warms up the air/fuel
ratio is leaned off.
The input to the sensor is a 3.3V reference voltage supplied from the voltage divider circuit within the ECM. The ground from
the sensor is also connected to the ECM which measures the returned current and calculates a resistance figure for the sensor
which relates to the coolant temperature.
If the ECT sensor fails, the following symptoms may be observed:
Difficult cold start

Difficult hot start
Engine performance compromised
Temperature gauge inoperative or inaccurate reading.
In the event of ECT sensor signal failure, the ECM applies a default value of 80°Celsius (176°F) coolant temperature for
fuelling purposes. The ECM will also permanently operate the cooling fan at all times when the ignition is switched on, to
protect the engine from overheating.
The table that follows shows ECT sensor values and the corresponding sensor resistance and voltage values.
Temperature (Degrees Celsius) Resistance (KOhms) Voltage (Volts)

- 40 925 3.23
- 30 496 3.16
- 20 277 3.06
- 10 160 2.91
-0 96 2.70
10 59 2.42
20 37 2.09
30 24 1.75
40 16 1.41
50 11 1.11
60 7.55 0.86
70 5.34 0.66
80 3.84 0.50
90 2.80 0.38
100 2.08 0.29
110 1.56 0.22
120 1.19 0.17
130 0.918 0.14
140 0.715 0.11
150 0.563 0.08
Engine Oil Level and Oil Temperature Sensor
Item Description
1 Engine oil level and temperature sensor
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine is not fitted with a conventional dipstick. The dipstick is replaced with an ultrasonic oil level and
temperature sensor which is located on 3 studs in the underside of the oil pan and secured with 3 locknuts.
The sensor uses ultrasonic pulses to determine the oil level in the oil pan. The level sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically
upward and measures the time taken for the pulse to be reflected back to the sensor from the upper surface of the oil. A
second reference pulse is also transmitted across a reference distance. The time periods of the first and second pulses are
compared and the sensor calculates the oil height in the oil pan. The sensor then converts the results into a PWM (pulse width
modulation) signal to the ECM which converts the frequency of the signal into a oil level height.
The sensor uses an NTC type sensor to determine the oil temperature. The sensor measures the oil temperature and converts
the sensor signal into a PWM signal to the ECM which converts the frequency of the signal into an oil temperature.
If the oil level is incorrect or a system fault occurs, a warning message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
The messages that follow can be displayed in the message center:
Warning System Status

ENGINE OIL LOW (Amber warning The oil is at the minimum level for safe operation. Top-up with 1 liter (1.8 pints) of oil.
triangle displayed)
ENGINE OIL HIGH (Amber warning This warning is displayed when the engine is started, if the oil is above the maximum level
triangle displayed) for safe operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and seek qualified
assistance to have the engine oil drained, before driving the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY LOW (Red The oil is below the minimum level for safe operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
warning triangle displayed) permits and top-up with 1.5 liters (2.6 pints) of oil. Wait for 10 minutes, re-check the oil
level reading and top-up again if necessary.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR A fault with the oil level monitoring system is indicated. Seek qualified assistance as soon
SYSTEM FAULT (Amber warning as possible.
triangle displayed)
Oil Level Check
The engine oil level is automatically monitored and is displayed in the trip computer area of the message center.
The steps that follow allow the driver to view the current 'average' engine oil level providing the following parameters are met:
It is recommended that a reading is taken after a journey (when the oil is hot)
The engine is stopped and the transmission is in park
The vehicle is parked on level ground
10 minutes has passed after stopping the engine (to allow the oil level to stabilize)
Press the 'TRIP' button on the end of the LH steering column multifunction switch repeatedly, until the oil can icon is displayed
at the bottom of the message center.
NOTE: The system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
Item Description
A Oil at recommended level. No top-up required.
B Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.
C Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.
D Oil above maximum for safe operation. Do not drive vehicle. Seek qualified assistance.
E Oil level below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil, then recheck level.
F1 Oil level stabilizing, oil level not available. Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil level display.
F2 If this display is accompanied by the warning message 'ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT', a fault with the oil
level monitor is indicated. Seek qualified assistance.
Engine Oil Top-Up
CAUTIONS:
Failure to use an oil that meets the required specification, could cause excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge and
deposits and increase pollution. It could also lead to engine failure and invalidation of vehicle warranty.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe engine damage.
Use the procedure that follows to replenish the engine oil level:
With the ignition on, but the engine not running, unscrew the oil filler cap.
Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as indicated by the message center oil level display). Wait 10 minutes to allow the
oil level stabilize and re-check the level. Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.
Once the correct level is achieved, refit the filler cap and hand-tighten securely until one click is heard.
NOTES:
The approximate quantity of oil required to raise the level from the minimum level of safe operation to the maximum, is
1.5 litres (2.6 pints).
The ignition must be left on during the top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can register and display the new oil level.
This enables an accurate level re-check.
Live Reading/Average Reset
A procedure is available to allow the technician to access the actual engine oil level, rather than the average engine oil level
which is available to the driver. An additional procedure is also available to reset the average engine oil level. Refer to Engine -
3.0L Diesel - General Procedures -
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
Brake Lamp/Brake Test Switch
The brake lamp/brake test switch is located on the pedal box and is operated by the brake pedal. The 2 pole switch has a
normally open circuit switch connected to battery voltage which closes the circuit when the driver has depressed the brake
pedal and a normally closed circuit which is connected to ground when the driver depresses the brake pedal. The switch
contacts are connected directly to the ECM and the ECM also receives a brake pressure signal on the high speed CAN bus from
the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.
The ECM uses the brake signal for the following:
To limit fuelling during braking

To inhibit/cancel Speed control if the brakes are applied.
In the event of a brake switch failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
Speed control inactive

Increased fuel consumption.
Fuel Pressure Control Valve
The fuel pressure control valve is incorporated into the forward end of the common fuel rail for the LH cylinder bank. The
control valve regulates the fuel pressure within the fuel rails and is controlled by the ECM. The control valve is a PWM
controlled solenoid valve.
When the solenoid is de-energized, an internal spring holds an internal valve closed. At fuel pressure of 100 bar (1450 lbf/in2)
or higher, the force of the spring is overcome, opening the valve and allowing fuel pressure to decay into the fuel return pipe.
When the pressure in the fuel rail decays to approximately 100 bar (1450 lbf/in2) or less, the spring force overcomes the fuel
pressure and closes the valve. When the ECM energizes the solenoid, the valve is closed allowing the fuel pressure to build.
The pressure in the fuel rail in this condition can reach approximately 2000 bar (29000 lbf/in2).
The ECM constantly monitors the fuel pressure and activates the fuel pressure control valve accordingly to control the fuel rail
pressure within the require parameters. Relieved fuel from the fuel rails is directed through the fuel rail leak-off pipe to the
fuel filter return circuit.
The ECM controls the fuel rail pressure by operating the control valve solenoid using a PWM signal. By varying the duty cycle of
the PWM signal, the ECM can accurately control the fuel rail pressure and hence the pressure delivered to the injectors
according to engine load. This is achieved by the control valve allowing a greater or lesser volume of fuel to pass from the high
pressure side of the pump to the un-pressurized fuel return line, regulating the pressure on the high pressure side.
The fuel pressure control valve receives a PWM signal from the ECM of between 0 and 12V. The ECM controls the operation of
the control valve using the following information to determine the required fuel pressure:
Fuel rail pressure

Engine load
APP sensor position
Engine coolant temperature
Engine speed.
In the event of a total failure of the fuel pressure control valve, the engine will not start. In the event of a partial failure of
the fuel pressure control valve, the ECM will activate the solenoid with the minimum duty cycle which results in the injection
quantity being limited.
Fuel Pressure Sensor
The fuel pressure sensor is located in the forward end of the common fuel rail for the RH (right-hand) cylinder bank. The sensor
is screwed into a threaded port in the end of the fuel rail.
The fuel pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive type sensor containing an actuating diaphragm. Deflection of the diaphragm
provides a proportional signal (output) voltage to the ECM, dependant on the fuel pressure within the fuel rails.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the torque demand from the engine via injection control.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured to a bracket with 3 screws.
The APP sensor is incorporated into the pedal box assembly. The APP sensor is a twin track rotary potentiometer type sensor
which is integral with the throttle pedal housing.
A six pin electrical connector provides the interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle
on the RH side of the APP sensor. The APP sensor receives two separate electrical supplies and generates two different
outputs.
Both tracks are analogue output signals connected to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the
secondary track has half the voltage output of the primary track.
If there is a fault with the primary track, the secondary track is used and the vehicle/engine response to pedal demand will be
sluggish. If both analogue signals have a fault, the engine adopts a constant high speed of 1300 rpm to allow the vehicle to
move. Torque application and reduction of engine speed back to normal idle speed can be subsequently controlled via brake
lamp/brake test switch operation.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stored a fault code if it detects a fault.
EGR Cooler Bypass Vacuum Solenoid Valve
The EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the rear of the engine, adjacent to the vacuum pump.
The solenoid valve has a vacuum pipe connection to the vacuum pump which provides the vacuum when the engine is running.
Two outlets from the solenoid valve each connect to an EGR bypass vacuum actuator.
When the EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve is energized, vacuum created by the vacuum pump is applied to each EGR bypass
vacuum actuator and exhaust gasses by-pass the EGR cooler. The default position is for exhaust gas cooling. The actuators
move under the influence of the vacuum and move a valve within the EGR cooler to divert the exhaust gasses straight through
the cooler. This system is used when the engine management system determines that exhaust gas cooling is not required.
The EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve receives a 12 volt supply from the EJB. The ECM controls the operation of the solenoid
valve by controlling the ground path for the solenoid.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Motor
The EGR valve motors each receive a 12 volt supply and ground from the ECM.
The 12 volt power supply from the ECM operates the EGR valve motor. Three further wires connect the EGR valve to the ECM a
5 volt reference voltage, a ground and a position signal feedback.
The valve is used to direct a calculated proportion of exhaust gas back into the combustion chamber.
Oil Pressure Sensor
The oil pressure sensor is located in a threaded port in the LH cylinder head. The sensor is connected directly to the
instrument cluster.
The sensor is not connected to the ECM but is supplied with a reference voltage from the instrument cluster. The sensor ground
is through the sensor body and the engine. When the oil pressure falls to below a predetermined threshold, the sensor internal
switch contacts close, completing a circuit from the instrument cluster. This circuit is sensed by the instrument cluster which
displays and appropriate warning message and warning lamp to alert the driver.
Glow Plugs
Item Description
1 Glow plug
Three glow plugs are located in each of the cylinder heads, on the inlet side. The glow plugs and the glow plug module are a
vital part of the engine starting strategy. The glow plugs heat the air inside the cylinder during cold starts to assist
combustion. The use of glow plugs helps reduce the amount of additional fuel required on start-up, and consequently reduces
the emission of black smoke. The use of glow plugs also reduces the amount of injection advance required, which reduces
engine noise, particularly when idling with a cold engine.
There are three phases of glow plug activity:
Pre-heat
During crank
Post heat.
The ceramic sheathed element glow plugs are made from a heat-resistant, electrically conductive ceramic material. The ceramic
sheathed-element glow plugs outer layer is heated directly and is self regulating. The self regulation allows the resistance of
the sheathed element to automatically increase as the heat increases preventing the glow plug from overheating. In addition,
during the heating process and under the control of the glow plug module, the glow plugs can be operated above their nominal
voltages. This permits heat-up speeds of 1000°C per second. The sheathed-element glow plugs reach a maximum glow
temperature of 1300°C and can hold a temperature of 1150°C for several minutes after the first-start glow or at intervening
times.
The glow plugs are controlled by the ECM using the glow plug module and external sensor values to control the glow plug
operation via internal software.
Fuel Injectors
Item Description
1 Fuel return
2 O-ring seal
3 Piezo stack actuator
4 Hydraulic coupler
5 Control valve
6 Nozzle body
7 Copper sealing washer
9 High pressure feed
10 Nozzle
Six fuel injectors are used in the fuel system. A piezo actuator in each injector is electronically controlled by the ECM to
operate the injector in response to engine speed and load conditions.
Each injector is calibrated to the ECM and applicable the cylinder to which it is fitted. Therefore, if an injector is removed it
must be refitted to the cylinder from which it was removed. If a new injector is fitted, a calibration routine using a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system must be performed to calibrate the injector unique code to the ECM
The operating voltage of the injector is between 110 and 163 volts depending on engine speed and load and care must be
taken when working in the vicinity of the injectors. The voltage increases linearly with the injector operating pressure from 200
to 2000 bar (2900 to 29000 lbf/in2).
Each injector has an electrical resistance value of between 150 - 250 kOhms.
CAUTION: Each injector operation is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and
recover from the injector. Never disconnect the wiring connection when the engine is running. The injector can remain open
causing engine damage.
Charge Air Temperature Sensor
The is charge air temperature sensor is located in the rear of the intake chamber immediately preceding the throttle intake
manifold. The sensor is used to measure the intake air temperature from the turbochargers in order to calculate the required
amount of fuelling.
The charge air temperature sensor incorporates a NTC thermistor in a voltage divider circuit. The NTC thermistor works on the
principle of decreasing resistance in the sensor as the temperature of the charge air increases. As the thermistor allows more
current to pass to ground, the voltage sensed by the ECM decreases. The change in voltage is proportional to the temperature
change of the charge air. Using the voltage output from the charge air temperature sensor, the ECM can correct the fuelling
map for charge air temperature. The correction is an important requirement because hot air contains less oxygen than cold air
for any given volume.
The charge air temperature sensor receives a 3.3V reference voltage from the ECM. The signal output from the charge air
temperature sensor is calculated by the ECM by monitoring changes in the supplied reference voltage to the charge air
temperature sensor voltage divider circuit.
If the charge air temperature sensor fails the ECM uses a default charge air temperature of -5°C (23°F). In the event of an
charge air temperature sensor failure, any of the following symptoms may be observed:
Over fuelling, resulting black smoke emitting from the exhaust

Idle speed control inoperative.
High Pressure Fuel Pump Volume Control Valve
The volume control valve is mounted on the high pressure pump, and located in the feed port between the high-pressure pump
elements and the internal transfer pump. The volume control valve is a variable position solenoid-operated valve that is
controlled by the ECM.
The volume control valve is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM to allow a defined amount of 'leak off' from the high
pressure fuel pump. The leak off fuel provides cooling and lubrication for the high-pressure pump internal components. The fuel
is returned through a leak off pipe to the fuel filter, where it cools and is returned into the fuel filter via the low pressure
return line.
The volume control valve determines the amount of fuel that is delivered from the internal transfer pump to the high pressure
pumping elements. When there is no signal to the volume control valve, the valve is closed and there is no fuel delivery. The
ECM applies a varying PWM signal of between 0 to 100% to control the required fuel volume.
High Pressure Fuel Pump Inlet Temperature Sensor
The fuel temperature sensor is located on the rear of the high pressure fuel pump. It measures the fuel temperature in the
low-pressure side of the high pressure fuel pump.
The ECM continually monitors this signal to determine the fuel temperature to prevent overheating of the fuel system. The
ECM will also make fine adjustments to fuel injection quantity to adjust for fuel temperature.
The inlet temperature sensor is an NTC thermistor. As the fuel temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases
and visa versa. The ECM measures the change in voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative to
the fuel temperature.
Primary Turbocharger Control Module
The primary turbocharger control module is attached to a bracket which is an extension of the turbocharger body.
The primary turbocharger control module comprises a stepper motor which electronically controls the primary turbocharger
variable vanes by moving an actuating lever. When the stepper motor drive shaft turns, a position signal is created. The ECM
receives the position signal to determine the angular position of the vanes.
The stepper motor is connected to an output shaft. The output shaft has a connecting rod attached eccentrically which
converts the rotary motion of the shaft into linear motion of the connecting rod. The opposite end of the connecting rod is
attached to an actuating lever. The actuating lever moves with the connecting rod and adjusts the variable vanes mechanically.
The ECM provides the stepper motor with a power and ground for stepper motor operation and also a reference voltage, ground
and position signal connections for variable vane position control.
Secondary Turbocharger Boost Pressure Sensor
The secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor is located on the steering pump mounting bracket on the RH side of the
engine. The sensor is connected via a hose to the charge air outlet pipe from the primary turbocharger compressor.
The sensor provides a voltage signal to the ECM relative to the output charge air pressure from the secondary turbocharger.
The boost pressure sensor has a 3 pin connector which is connected to the ECM and provides a 5V reference supply from the
ECM, a signal input to the ECM and a ground for the sensor.
The boost pressure sensor uses a diaphragm transducer to measure pressure. The ECM uses the boost pressure sensor signal
for the following functions:
Maintain manifold boost pressure

Reduce exhaust smoke emissions when driving at high altitude
Control of the EGR system
To help smooth control of the mono to bi and bi to mono turbo transitions
To aid the air path diagnostics.
lve
Secondary Turbocharger Turbine Shut-off Solenoid Va
The secondary turbine shut-off solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the front of the engine, above the LH front cylinder
cover assembly. The bracket is shared with the secondary turbocharger recirculation solenoid valve. The secondary turbine
shut-off solenoid valve is the innermost of the two solenoid valves.
The secondary turbine shut-off solenoid receives a vacuum supply from the vacuum pump. The valve is connected by a pipe to
the turbine shut-off valve vacuum actuator which is located on the rear of the secondary turbocharger. A position sensor is
attached to the turbine shut-off valve vacuum actuator to inform the ECM of the turbine shut-off position.
Operation of the valve vacuum actuator is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM and the secondary turbocharger turbine
shut-off valve solenoid. When the shut-off solenoid is energized by the ECM a 4.5V PWM current is applied to operate the
solenoid, vacuum is then applied to the shut-off valve vacuum actuator. The valve is opened allowing the secondary
turbocharger turbine to be driven by the exhaust gasses for as long as the valve is open. When the valve is to be closed the
ECM applies a 0.5V PWM current to the solenoid.
Valve
Secondary Turbocharger Compressor Shut-off Solenoid
The secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the front of the engine, above the LH
front cylinder cover assembly. The bracket is shared with the secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve. The
secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve is the outermost of the two solenoid valves.
The secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve receives a vacuum supply from the vacuum pump. The valve is
connected by a pipe to the compressor shut-off vacuum actuator located on the charge air intake manifold tube. When the
vacuum is applied to the vacuum actuator, the actuator operates to open the shut-off valve allowing charge air to flow into the
air intake pipe.
Operation of the secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off valve is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM; 0% is off and
100% is on (solenoid activated). The solenoid valve is opened when bi-turbocharger operation is required allowing compressed
charge air from the secondary turbocharger compressor to enter the air intake system.
ve
Secondary Turbocharger Compressor Recirculation Val
The secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve motor is located on the compressor recirculation valve housing,
adjacent to the compressor shut-off valve. The solenoid valve is attached to the compressor recirculation valve with 3 screws.
The secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve motor is controlled by the ECM. The valve is used during operation
of the secondary turbocharger. When the ECM is switching to bi-turbocharger operation, the valve motor is operated which
opens the recirculation path to the primary turbocharger. This allows the secondary turbocharger to increase its speed. When
the secondary turbocharger has reached its optimum operating speed the recirculation valve motor is operated, closing the
recirculation path to the primary turbocharger.
Secondary Turbocharger Turbine Position Sensor
The secondary turbocharger turbine position sensor is located on the turbine vacuum shut-off valve. The sensor has three
connections to the ECM; a 5V reference voltage, a ground and a signal return.
The sensor is connected to the turbine shut-off vacuum actuator and senses when the actuator has operated. The sensor
returns a 0 - 5V analogue position signal to the ECM to confirm that the vacuum actuator has operated.
Active Engine Mounts Solenoid
The active engine mount solenoid is attached to the power steering reservoir bracket, adjacent to the glow plug module. The
solenoid is connected to the vacuum pump, located at the rear of the engine, by pipes. Further pipes connect the solenoid to
the active engine mounts.
The active engine mount system is designed to reduce force transmitted to the body of the car by engine vibration at idle. The
engine mounts are 2 state hydromounts. They are operational throughout the operating range of the engine and can change
from soft (on) to hard (off) between engine idle speed and engine load conditions respectively, via a control output from the
ECM.
This output controls a single solenoid that either softens or stiffens the LH and RH engine mounts by applying or removing a
vacuum through the solenoid.
When the engine is at idle speed, the solenoid is energized (on) and vacuum from the pump is applied, via the solenoid, to
the engine mounts, changing their state to soft. At engine speeds above idle speed, the solenoid is de-energized (off) and the
vacuum is lost, changing the engine mounts state to hard. The ECM strategy is designed to control when the active engine
mounts solenoid should be energized or de-energized in relation to the following vehicle operating parameters:
Engine speed
Vehicle speed
Engine speed gradient
Vehicle speed gradient
Engine coolant temperature
Ignition state
Cranking state
Engine running status
Transmission selector position.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Electronic Engine Controls
For a detailed description of the 3.0L Diesel electronic engine controls and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),

Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Engine oil level Battery charge and condition

Cooling system coolant level Fuses
Fuel level Wiring harness
Fuel contamination Electrical connector(s)
Fuel leaks Sensor(s)
Air ingress into fuel system Actuator(s)
Fuel filter Engine Control Module (ECM)
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Air filter and induction hoses
Boost air circuit and intercooler
Exhaust system including oxidation catalyst and particulate filter
Primary turbocharger vane control linkage
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Symptom Chart
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined, area and arrange "No Smoking/Fuel Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel injection system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can
be as high as 2000 bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Highly flammable vapours are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling fuel, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential
that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always fit blanking plugs to any open orifices or
lines.
Always carry out the cleaning process before carrying out any repairs to the fuel injection system components. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
Do not disconnect an injector wiring connector when the engine is running. The fuel injectors are operated by piezo
elements controlled by an electrical signal, they can latch open if disconnected when the engine is running. Failure to observe
this caution may result in severe engine damage.
The low pressure fuel system bleeding procedure must be carried out before this procedure is carried out, or the engine is
attempted to be started, following removal or replacement of any low pressure fuel system component. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the fuel injection pump.
NOTE: If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.

Engine does not Refer to the owner literature and ensure that the correct start up procedure
crank Battery is being adhered to. Refer to the battery care manual, ensure the vehicle
discharged/charging fault battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition. Check battery cables
Starting system are correctly connected. Check high current power distribution fusible links
fault/power distribution are in serviceable condition. Check for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
fault index. Check that the security system/immobilizer is disarmed. Check
Security transmission shift controls and pedal switches to ensure starter operation
system/immobilizer is not being inhibited. Check the engine is not seized or hydraulically
engaged locked.
Engine Control Module
(ECM) relay
Transmission Shift Control
module
Pedal switch fault
Engine
seized/hydraulically locked
Engine cranks, Check the 5 volt sensor power is present at both crankshaft position sensor
but does not The common 5 volt sensor and camshaft position sensor. Refer to the battery care manual and the
start power to both crankshaft workshop manual, check that the battery is fully charged and serviceable.
position sensor and Check that the cranking speed is within specification. Investigate and
camshaft position sensor repair start and charge faults as required. Check that the fuel level is
is missing sufficient and that the fuel is not contaminated. Check the fuel pump
Battery discharged, module operation, check the fuel system low pressure circuit for
starter circuit or motor leaks/damage/air ingress. Check the fuel filter for water, blockage. Check
fault the Fuel Volume Control Valve and Fuel Pressure Control Valve. Check the
Low/contaminated fuel fuel injection high pressure pump. Check the integrity of the air intake
Air leakage system and boost air circuit for correct installation. Check the crankshaft
Fuel system low pressure position sensor and circuits. In cold conditions with no indications of
circuit fault combustion when cranking, check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the new
Fuel pump module fault module/component installation note at the top of the Symptom Chart if an
Blocked fuel filter Engine Control Module (ECM) is suspect.
Fuel Volume Control Valve
(FVCV)
Fuel Pressure Control
Valve (FPCV)
Fuel injection pump failure
Crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor
Engine Control Module
(ECM) fault
Engine stops, Check the 5 volt sensor power is present at both crankshaft position sensor
will crank, but The common 5 volt sensor and camshaft position sensor.
will not start, no power to both crankshaft
DTCs logged in position sensor and
Engine Control camshaft position sensor
Module (ECM) is missing
Difficult to start If the fault is related to cold starts only check the glow plugs and
Glow plug system fault associated circuits first. Check the fuel level/possibility of contamination.
(cold engine start) Check the integrity of the air intake system and for correct installation.
Low/contaminated fuel Check the fuel pump module operation, check the fuel system low pressure
Air leakage circuit for leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, Fuel Volume Control Valve
Fuel pump module fault (FVCV) and Fuel Pressure Control Valve FPCV). Check the Exhaust Gas
Fuel system low pressure Recirculation (EGR) system valves/actuators.
circuit fault
Blocked fuel filter
(FVCV)
Valve (FPCV)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) valve(s) fault
Rough idle If the rough idle is from cold, and improves as the engine warms up, check
Glow plug system fault the glow plug system is operating correctly on all cylinders. Check the fuel
(cold engine start) level/condition. Check the fuel system low pressure circuit for
Low/contaminated fuel leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, Fuel Volume Control Valve and Fuel
Air ingress into fuel Pressure Control Valve. Check the integrity of the air intake system and for
system low pressure correct installation. Check the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
circuit valves/actuators.
Fuel system low pressure
circuit delivery fault
Blocked fuel filter
(FVCV)
Valve (FPCV)
(EGR) electric throttle
valve fault
Lack of power Check the fuel system for level/contamination/drain water from filter.
when Low fuel level (in torque Validate fuel level sender reading against actual tank contents. Check fuel
accelerating derate mode) filter for blockage. Check the fuel pressure. Check the integrity of the air
Fuel level sender fault intake system and for correct installation. Check for a blocked Diesel
Blocked fuel filter Particulate Filter or catalytic converter, Check the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Low fuel pressure (EGR) system. Check the turbochargers for operation including all
Blocked air filter valves/actuators used to control mono-turbo and bi-turbo mode transitions.
Air intake system fault
Boost air circuit leak or
blockage
Restricted exhaust system
Diesel particulate filter
(DPF) blocked/restricted
valve fault
Secondary Variable
Geometry Turbocharger
(VGT) fault
Primary Fixed Geometry
Turbocharger fault
Turbine shut off valve
fault
Compressor recirculation
valve fault
Compressor shut off valve
fault
Engine Check the fuel level/condition/drain water from filter. Validate fuel level
stops/stalls Fuel level low (in run dry sender reading against actual tank contents. Check the fuel system low
mode) pressure circuit for leaks/damage. Check for fuel system leaks, Fuel Volume
Fuel level sender fault Control Valve and Fuel Pressure Control Valve. Check the Exhaust Gas
Contaminated fuel Recirculation (EGR) system.
Air ingress into fuel
system
circuit fault
(FVCV)
Valve (FPCV)
valve fault
Engine judders Check the fuel level/condition/drain water from filter and check for
Low fuel level (in torque blockage. Validate fuel level sender reading against actual tank contents.
derate mode) Check the fuel system low pressure circuit for leaks/damage. Check for fuel
Fuel level sender fault system leaks, Fuel Volume Control Valve and Fuel Pressure Control Valve.
Contaminated fuel Check the fuel injection high pressure pump. Check fuel injector(s).
Fuel filter blocked
Air ingress into fuel
system
circuit fault
(FVCV)
Valve (FPCV)
Fuel injection pump fault
Injector fault
Excessive fuel Check and adjust tire pressures. Check brakes are releasing correctly and
consumption Tire pressures are do not cause excessive drag. Check the fuel system for obvious
incorrect leaks/damage. Check the Fuel Volume Control Valve and Fuel Pressure
Vehicle brakes are Control Valve. Check for injector DTCs. Check for restricted induction
binding/not releasing system and air filter. Check the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
Fuel system leak including electric throttle plate. Check boost air circuit and intercooler for
Fuel system low pressure ineffective cooling or partial blockage. Check for restricted exhaust flow
circuit fault including catalytic converter and diesel particulate filter.
(FVCV)
Valve (FPCV)
leak
Injector(s) failure
valve fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Engine Control Module 3.0L Tdv6 (PCM) (100-00 General Information,
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor
Removal

4.
5. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any
components, make sure the area around joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug any open connections to prevent
contamination.
6. NOTES:

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
The CMP sensor tip must rest on one of the three

webs on the back of the camshaft pulley. Incorrect
installation may result in the CMP sensor being damaged.
NOTES:
Only turn the engine in the normal direction of

rotation.
www.JagDocs.com
Timing belt left hand cover shown removed for clarity.
Turn the engine until one of the three webs on the back of
the camshaft pulley is visible through the CMP sensor
housing.
Torque: 10 Nm

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
3. Torque: 133 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 35 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8.
9.
connections are clean. Plug any open connections to
NOTES:
The CKP sensor retaining bolt should not be removed

from the CKP sensor.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Install the CKP sensor correctly into the housing. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the CKP sensor.
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign material and
lubricant.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor Ring
Special Tool(s)
303-1130
Installer - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring
Removal
3. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01, Removal and Installation).

NOTE: The CKP sensor retaining bolt should not be

removed from the CKP sensor.
5.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the CKP sensor ring is

aligned correctly with the special tool pip and that both
mating surfaces are fully seated.

3.
4.

6. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.
Install the CKP sensor correctly into the housing.

the CKP sensor.
Torque: 5 Nm
7. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01, Removal and Installation).
8. Connect the battery ground cable.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Differential Pressure Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3.
4.
5.
Installation
2. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new

component.
Using the diagnostic tool, clear diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)

from the engine control module (ECM).
Using the data logger, check the engine oil temperature.
Make sure the selector lever is in the 'P' position.
Start and run the engine.
Make sure that the engine oil is at a minimum temperature of 50
degrees C.
Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
Make sure that the engine cooling fan is not running.
Turn off the ignition.
Wait for 30 seconds.
Repeat steps 4 to 9, a further 5 times.
Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Removal
3. CAUTIONS:
The seal is to be reused unless damaged.
foreign material.
NOTE: Release the locking tang to remove the ECT

sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
2. Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level mark of the
expansion tank.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Control Module (ECM)
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Torque: 7 Nm


5. Torque: 7 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Level Sensor
Removal
3. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any

Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP)
Sensor
Removal

Torque: 14 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Gas Temperature
Sensor RH
Removal
Installation).

prior to removal.
4.
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the catalyst
monitor sensor tip.
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new sensor.
Make sure that the wiring harness is not twisted or damaged on

installation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the sensor.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S)
Removal
Installation).

prior to removal.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not twisted
more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
Do not clean the internals of the sensor or electrical connector.
Do not apply any products to the internals of the sensor or

electrical connector.


Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor
Removal
2.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal
2.
Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. The oil temperature sensor is an integrated part of the engine oil level
sensor.
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls -
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Post Catalytic Converter
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Post DPF Exhaust Gas
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).

prior to removal.
4. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Pre Catalytic Converter
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).

prior to removal.

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Pre DPF Exhaust Gas
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).

prior to removal.

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


Automatic Transmission/Transaxle -
CAUTION: CAUTION: Use only Shell M1375.4 Automatic transmission fluid. Use of any other fluids may result in a
transmission malfunction or failure.
Description Intervals
Normal maintenance Filled for life.
Severe duty maintenance Change the fluid at 48,000 km (30,000 miles) intervals.
NOTE: Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Transmission fluid Shell M1375.4
Sealant WSS-M4G323-A6
Metal surface cleaner WSW-M5B392-A
High temperature grease Molecote FB180
NOTE: General Specifications
Refill capacity approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Check the level at
normal operating temperature. DO NOT OVERFILL. If it is necessary to add or change
Approximate fluid, use only fluid which has been certified by the supplier as meeting the Jaguar Cars
Vehicle Engine Liters Ltd specification shown. U.S. Quarts
XJ All 10.0 10.57
vehicles
NOTE: Torque Specifications

Transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -
Transmission mount retaining bolts 51 38 -
Transmission fluid fill plug A A A
Transmission control module (TCM) and main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 53
Output shaft flange retaining nut 60 44 -
Torque converter retaining bolts 62 46 -
Transmission fluid cooler tube retaining bolt 22 16 -
Transmission fluid drain plug 8 - 53
Transmission fluid pan, gasket and filter retaining bolts 8 - 53
A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Description - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Description - Overview
OVERVIEW
The ZF 6HP28 transmission is an electronically controlled, hydraulically operated, six speed automatic unit. The hydraulic and
electronic control elements of the transmission, including the TCM (transmission control module), are incorporated in a single
unit located inside the transmission and is known as 'Mechatronic'.
5.0L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models use an uprated derivative of the ZF 6HP28 transmission used in the 5.0L
naturally aspirated models.
The ZF 6HP28 transmission has the following features:
Designed to be maintenance free

Transmission fluid is 'fill for life'
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated control of lock-up, creating a smooth
transition to the fully locked condition
Shift programs controlled by the TCM
Electronic park lock, controlled by the TCM, with a mechanical emergency release
ASIS (adaptive shift strategy), to provide continuous adaptation of shift changes to suit the driving style of the driver,
which can vary from sporting to economical.
Connected to the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for communications
Default mode if major faults occur
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The transmission selections are made using the rotary JaguarDrive selector in the floor console and two paddle switches on the
steering wheel. Refer to: External Controls (307-05, Description and Operation).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Description - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K bus; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect
network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (250 A megafuse for EJB supply; 50 A megafuse for CJB supply)
6 Diagnostic socket
7 ABS module
11 Clockspring
12 Steering wheel RH switchpack
14 Upshift paddle switch
15 Downshift paddle switch
System Operation
POWER FLOWS
Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module), which electrically activates various
solenoids to control the transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information
in the TCM memory and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and
JaguarDrive selector position.
Item Description
1 Torque input from engine
2 Torque converter lock-up clutch
3 Single web planetary gear carrier
4 Single web planetary gears
5 Single web sunwheel 1
6 Double web sunwheel 2
7 Double web planetary gears - long
8 Double web planetary gear carrier
9 Double web planetary gears - short
10 Double web sunwheel 3
11 Torque output from transmission
A Multiplate clutch
B Multiplate clutch
C Multiplate brake
D Multiplate brake
E Multiplate clutch
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of clutches to the 2 planetary gear trains. Both gear trains
are controlled by reactionary inputs from brake clutches to produce the 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The ratios are as
www.JagDocs.com
follows:
Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Reverse

Ration 4.171 2.340 1.521 1.143 0.867 0.691 3.403
Shift Elements
Item Description
1 Turbine shaft
2 Stator shaft
3 Single web planetary gear train
4 Ring gear 1
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake clutch C
9 Fixed connection to transmission housing
10 Shaft key
11 Brake clutch D
12 Double web planetary gear train
13 Planetary gears - long
14 Ring gear 2
15 Sunwheel 2
16 Sunwheel 3
17 Double web planetary gear carrier
18 Planetary gears - short
19 Single web planetary gear carrier
20 Sunwheel 1
The shift elements are three rotating multiplate clutches (A, B and E) and two fixed multiplate brakes (C and D). All shifts
from 1st to 6th gears are power-on overlapping shifts. Overlapping shifts can be described as one of the clutches continuing to
transmit drive at a lower main pressure until the next required clutch is able to accept the input torque.
The shift elements, clutches and brakes are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or
brake, pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift elements
is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.
Power Flow 1st Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector valve spool are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
converter turbine shaft to the ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears which rotate around sunwheel 1. This drives the planetary gear carrier 1 and also the
outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of clutch 'B'.
When clutch 'A' is engaged, sunwheel 3 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the short planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear train is locked against the transmission housing by brake 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 (output
shaft) to be driven in the same direction as the engine via the long planetary gears.
NOTE: Refer to 'Shift Elements' illustration for key

Power Flow 2nd Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'C'. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the
short planetary gears, roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to the double web planetary gear train carrier and
ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 3rd Gear
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is driven via clutch 'B' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary
gears, cannot roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and therefore transmit drive to the locked double web planetary gear train
carrier in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 4th Gear
converter turbine shaft to ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is driven via clutch 'E' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also
meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier, drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine
rotation.
Power Flow 5th Gear
gears.
The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier,
drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 6th Gear
Clutches 'A' and 'B' are released, removing the effect of the single web planetary gear train.
Clutch brake 'C' is applied which locks sunwheel 2 to the transmission housing.
Clutch 'E' is engaged and drives the double web planetary gear carrier. This causes the long planetary gears to rotate around
the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to ring gear 2 which is driven in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow Reverse Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'R' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears of the single web planetary gear train which rotate around the fixed sunwheel 1. This
transmits the drive to the single web planetary gear carrier, the outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of
clutch 'B'.
With clutch 'B' applied, sunwheel 2 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the long planetary gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 to be
driven in the opposite direction to engine rotation by the long planetary gears.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster in Standard Mode
Item Description
1 Information display
2 Tachometer/Message center
3 Transmission status display
4 MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. Transmission status is transmitted by the TCM
and displayed to the driver in the instrument cluster.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Transmission related faults that effect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp). The
MIL is illuminated by the ECM (engine control module) on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high speed
CAN. The nature of the fault can be diagnosed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system, which reads the fault codes stored
in the TCM memory.
Transmission Status Display
The transmission status display is located in the tachometer. The display shows the JaguarDrive selector position. When the
transmission is in the Jaguar sequential shift mode the current gear is displayed in the information window.
Message Center
The right side of the instrument cluster, which normally shows the tachometer, changes to a message center to display
warnings and temporary alerts. If a transmission fault occurs, the message center will display the message 'GEARBOX FAULT'.
Instrument Cluster in Dynamic Mode
Gearshift Points
When the transmission is in the Jaguar sequential shift mode, the appearance of the instrument cluster changes to the
dynamic mode and the current gear is displayed in the information window.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM outputs signals to control the shift control solenoid valve and the EPRS (electronic pressure regulating solenoid) to
control the hydraulic operation of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, the ECM and other vehicle systems. From
the received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting
and optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
The ECM supplies the engine management data over the high speed CAN bus. The TCM requires engine data to efficiently
control the transmission operation, for example; flywheel torque, engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine temperature.
The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the high speed CAN
bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering and/or the ABS module is
controlling braking or traction control.
Using the signal inputs and the memorized data, the TCM control program computes the correct gear and torque converter
lock-up clutch setting and the optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control. Special output-side modules
(power output stages, current regulator circuits), allow the TCM to control the solenoid valves and pressure regulators and
consequently precisely control the hydraulics of the automatic transmission. In addition, the amount and duration of engine
interventions are supplied to the engine management by way of the CAN bus.
The transmission has a fully electronic JaguarDrive selector with no Bowden cable connection to the transmission. The
transmission selections are made using a rotary JaguarDrive selector which rises from the floor console once the engine is
running. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The 'S' (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the
transmission using the semi-automatic 'Jaguar Sequential Shift'.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'D', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is temporary and will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled
by pressing and holding the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'S', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is permanent and can only be cancelled by pressing and holding
the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds or by moving the JaguarDrive selector to the 'D' position.
The TCM can be reprogrammed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system using a flash code. The TCM processor has a 440 kb
internal flash memory. Of this capacity, approximately 370 kb are used by the basic transmission program. The remainder,
approximately 70 kb is used to store vehicle-specific application data.
Engine Stall
If the vehicle stalls it will coast down in gear, with the transmission providing drive to the engine. A restart can be attempted
at this point and the engine may start and the driver can continue.
If the coast down speed reduces such that the speed of the engine is less than 600 rev/min, the transmission will go to
neutral, D illumination will flash in the instrument cluster. The driver needs to select neutral or park and then press the brake
pedal to restart the engine.
If the start/stop button is pressed when driving, the message ENGINE STOP BUTTON PRESSED is displayed in the message
center but there will be no change to the ignition state. If the driver requires to switch off the engine, the start/stop button
must be pressed for a second time. The engine will be stopped and will be back driven by the transmission as the vehicle
coasts down. When the engine speed is less than 600 rev/min the transmission engages neutral (flashing D illumination in the
instrument cluster). When vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph) Park is engaged. The JaguarDrive selector automatically
rotates back to its lowered P position and the vehicle ignition is switched off.
The park engagement is prevented in a stall case as the ignition power is on and D was the last selected gear. The park
engagement speed at ignition off is from the least value of the wheel speeds (CAN signal) and transmission output speed
(internal signal).
TRANSMISSION
The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The main casing also
incorporates an integral bell housing.
A fluid pan is attached to the lower face of the main casing and is secured with bolts. The fluid pan is sealed to the main
casing with a gasket. Removal of the fluid pan allows access to the Mechatronic valve block. The fluid pan has a magnet
located around the drain plug which collects any metallic particles present in the transmission fluid.
A fluid filter is located inside the fluid pan. If the transmission fluid becomes contaminated or after any service work, the fluid
pan with integral filter must be replaced.
The integral bell housing provides protection for the torque converter assembly and also provides the attachment for the
gearbox to the engine cylinder block. The torque converter is a non-serviceable assembly which also contains the lock-up clutch
mechanism. The torque converter drives a crescent type pump via drive tangs. The fluid pump is located in the main casing,
behind the torque converter.
The main casing contains the following major components:
Input shaft
Output shaft
Mechatronic valve block which contains the solenoids, speed sensors and the TCM
Three rotating multiplate drive clutches
Two fixed multiplate brake clutches
A single planetary gear train and a double planetary gear train.
Item Description
1 Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 Torque converter
3 Fluid pump
4 Single planetary gearset
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake C
9 Brake D
10 Double planetary gearset
11 Park lock gear
12 Output shaft
13 Park lock pawl
14 Drain plug
15 Magnet
16 Pressure regulator
17 Mechatronic valve block
18 Fluid filter
19 Fluid pan
20 Input shaft
21 Bell housing
TORQUE CONVERTER
Item Description
1 Impeller
2 Turbine
3 Stator
4 Freewheel clutch
5 Torque converter hub
6 Stator shaft
7 Turbine shaft
8 Drive plate
9 Journal - Drive plate/crankshaft location
10 Torque converter cover
11 Lock-up clutch piston
12 Lock-up clutch plate
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the bell housing, on
the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically and mechanically
through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a drive plate attached to
the rear of the crankshaft.
The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed, fluid
filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine crankshaft
speed.
The converter housing cover has four threaded bosses, which provide for attachment of the engine drive plate. The threaded
bosses also provide for location of special tools which are required to remove the torque converter from the bell housing.
Impeller
Fluid Flow
Item Description
1 Turbine
2 Stator
3 Impeller
When the engine is running the rotating impeller acts as a centrifugal pump, picking up fluid at its center and discharging it at
high velocity through the blades on its outer rim. The design and shape of the blades and the curve of the impeller body cause
the fluid to rotate in a clockwise direction as it leaves the impeller. This rotation improves the efficiency of the fluid as it
contacts the outer row of blades on the turbine.
The centrifugal force of the fluid leaving the blades of the impeller is passed to the curved inner surface of the turbine via the
tip of the blades. The velocity and clockwise rotation of the fluid causes the turbine to rotate.
Turbine
The turbine is similar in design to the impeller with a continuous row of blades. Fluid from the impeller enters the turbine
through the tip of the blades and is directed around the curved body of the turbine to the root of the blades. The curved
surface redirects the fluid back in the opposite direction to which it entered the turbine, effectively increasing the turning force
applied to the turbine from the impeller. This principle is known as torque multiplication.
When engine speed increases, turbine speed also increases. The fluid leaving the inner row of the turbine blades is rotated in
a counter-clockwise direction due to the curve of the turbine and the shape of the blades. The fluid is now flowing in the
opposite direction to the engine rotation and therefore the impeller. If the fluid was allowed to hit the impeller in this
condition, it would have the effect of applying a brake to the impeller, eliminating the torque multiplication effect. To prevent
this, the stator is located between the impeller and the turbine.
Stator
The stator is located on the splined transmission input shaft via a freewheel clutch. The stator comprises a number of blades
which are aligned in an opposite direction to those of the impeller and turbine. The main function of the stator is to redirect
the returning fluid from the turbine, changing its direction to that of the impeller.
The redirected fluid from the stator is directed at the inner row of blades of the impeller, assisting the engine in turning the
impeller. This sequence increases the force of the fluid emitted from the impeller and thereby increases the torque
multiplication effect of the torque converter.
Stator Functions
Item Description
1 Blades
2 Stator held – fluid flow redirected
3 Stator rotates freely
4 Roller
5 Converter at coupling speed
6 Fluid flow from turbine
7 Converter multiplying
8 Fluid flow from impeller
9 Drive from engine
10 Impeller
11 Stator
12 Turbine
13 Output to transmission
Fluid emitted from the impeller acts on the turbine. If the turbine is rotating at a slower speed than the fluid from the impeller,
the fluid will be deflected by the turbine blades in the path 'A'. The fluid is directed at and deflected by the stator blades from
path 'B' to path 'C'. This ensures that the fluid is directed back to the pump in the optimum direction. In this condition the
sprag clutch is engaged and the force of the fluid on the stator blades assists the engine in rotating the impeller.
As the rotational speed of the engine and therefore the turbine increases, the direction of the fluid leaving the turbine changes
to path 'D'. The fluid is now directed from the turbine to the opposite side of the stator blades, rotating the stator in the
opposite direction. To prevent the stator from resisting the smooth flow of the fluid from the turbine, the sprag clutch releases,
allowing the stator to rotate freely on its shaft.
When the stator becomes inactive, the torque converter no longer multiplies the engine torque. When the torque converter
reaches this operational condition it ceases to multiply the engine torque and acts solely as a fluid coupling, with the impeller
and the turbine rotating at approximately the same speed.
The stator uses a sprag type, one way, freewheel clutch. When the stator is rotated in a clockwise direction the sprags twist
and are wedged between the inner and outer races. In this condition the sprags transfer the rotation of the outer race to the
inner race which rotates at the same speed.
One Way Free Wheel Clutch – Typical
Item Description
1 Sprags
2 Inner race
3 Outer race
4 Sprag and cage assembly
5 Sprag outer race
6 Sprag inner race
7 Retaining ring
The free wheel clutch can perform three functions; hold the stator stationary, drive the stator and free wheel allowing the
stator to rotate without a drive output. The free wheel clutch used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission is of the sprag type and
comprises an inner and outer race and a sprag and cage assembly. The inner and outer races are pressed into their related
components with which they rotate. The sprag and cage assembly is located between the inner and outer races.
The sprags are located in a cage which is a spring which holds the sprags in the 'wedge' direction and maintains them in
contact with the inner and outer races.
Referring to the illustration, the sprags are designed so that the dimension 'B' is larger than the distance between the inner
and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and the edges across
the dimension 'B' wedge between the races, providing a positive drive through each sprag to the inner race. The dimension 'A'
is smaller than the distance between the inner and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in an
anti-clockwise direction, the dimension 'A' is too small to allow the sprags to wedge between the races, allowing the outer
race to rotate freely.
On the illustration shown, when the outer race is rotated in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and are 'wedged' between
the inner and outer races. The sprags then transfer the rotation of the outer race to the inner race, which rotates at the same
speed.
Lock-Up Clutch Mechanism
The TCC (torque converter clutch) is hydraulically controlled by an EPRS, which is controlled by the TCM. This allows the torque
converter to have three states of operation as follows:
• Fully engaged
• Controlled slip variable engagement
• Fully disengaged.
The TCC is controlled by two hydraulic spool valves located in the valve block. These valves are actuated by pilot pressure
supplied via a solenoid valve which is also located in the valve block. The solenoid valve is operated by PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals from the TCM to give full, partial or no lock-up of the torque converter.
Item Description
A Unlocked condition
B Locked condition
1 Clutch plate
2 Clutch piston
3 Torque converter body
4 Turbine
5 Impeller
6 Stator
7 Piston chamber
8 Turbine chamber
The lock-up clutch is a hydro-mechanical device which eliminates torque converter slip, improving fuel consumption. The
engagement and disengagement is controlled by the TCM to allow a certain amount of controlled 'slip'. This allows a small
difference in the rotational speeds of the impeller and the turbine which results in improved shift quality. The lock-up clutch
comprises a piston and a clutch friction plate.
In the unlocked condition, the oil pressure supplied to the piston chamber and the turbine chamber is equal. Pressurized fluid
flows through a drilling in the turbine shaft and through the piston chamber to the turbine chamber. In this condition the clutch
plate is held away from the torque converter body and torque converter slip is permitted.
In the locked condition, the TCC spool valves are actuated by the EPRS. The fluid flow in the unlocked condition is reversed
and the piston chamber is vented. Pressurized fluid is directed into the turbine chamber and is applied to the clutch piston.
The piston moves with the pressure and pushes the clutch plate against the torque converter body. As the pressure increases,
the friction between the clutch plate and the body increases, finally resulting in full lock-up of the clutch plate with the body.
In this condition there is direct mechanical drive from the engine crankshaft to the transmission planetary gear train.
FLUID PUMP
The fluid pump is an integral part of the transmission. The fluid pump is used to supply hydraulic pressure for the operation of
the control valves and clutches, to pass the fluid through the transmission cooler and to lubricate the gears and shafts.
The ZF 6HP28 fluid pump is a crescent type pump and is located between the intermediate plate and the torque converter. The
pump has a delivery rate of 16 cm3 per revolution.
Item Description
1 Securing ring
2 Shaft oil seal
3 O-ring seal
4 Pump housing
5 Ring gear
6 Crescent spacer
7 Roller bearing
8 Impeller
9 Centering pin
10 Spring washer
11 Outlet port (high pressure)
12 Inlet port (low pressure)
The pump comprises a housing, a crescent spacer, an impeller and a ring gear. The housing has inlet and outlet ports to direct
flow and is located in the intermediate plate by a centering pin. The pump action is achieved by the impeller, ring gear and
crescent spacer.
The crescent spacer is fixed in its position by a pin and is located between the ring gear and the impeller. The impeller is
driven by drive from the torque converter hub which is located on a needle roller bearing in the pump housing. The impeller
teeth mesh with those of the ring gear. When the impeller is rotated, the motion is transferred to the ring gear which rotates
in the same direction.
The rotational motion of the ring gear and the impeller collects fluid from the intake port in the spaces between the teeth.
When the teeth reach the crescent spacer, the oil is trapped in the spaces between the teeth and is carried with the rotation
of the gears. The spacer tapers near the outlet port. This reduces the space between the gear teeth causing a build up of fluid
pressure as the oil reaches the outlet port. When the teeth pass the end of the spacer the pressurized fluid is released into
the outlet port.
The fluid emerging from the outlet port is passed through the fluid pressure control valve. At high operating speeds the
pressure control valve maintains the output pressure to the gearbox at a predetermined maximum level. Excess fluid is
relieved from the pressure control valve and is directed, via the main pressure valve in the valve block, back to the pump inlet
port. This provides a pressurized feed to the pump inlet which prevents cavitation and reduces pump noise.
MECHATRONIC VALVE BLOCK
The Mechatronic valve block is located in the bottom of the transmission and is covered by the fluid pan. The valve block
houses the TCM, electrical actuators, speed sensors and control valves which provide all electro-hydraulic control for all
transmission functions. The Mechatronic valve block comprises the following components:
TCM
Pressure regulator solenoids
Shift control solenoid
Damper
Hydraulic spool valves
Selector valve
Temperature sensor
Turbine speed sensor
Output shaft speed sensor.
Sensors
Speed Sensors
The turbine speed sensor and the output shaft speed sensor are Hall effect type sensors located in the Mechatronic valve block
and are not serviceable items. The TCM monitors the signals from each sensor to determine the input (turbine) speed and the
output shaft speed.
The turbine speed is monitored by the TCM to calculate the slip of the torque converter clutch and internal clutch slip. This
signal allows the TCM to accurately control the slip timing during shifts and adjust clutch application or release pressure for
overlap shift control.
The output shaft speed is monitored by the TCM and compared to engine speed signals received on the CAN bus from the ECM.
Using a comparison of the two signals the TCM calculates the transmission slip ratio for plausibility and maintains adaptive
pressure control.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is also located in the Mechatronic valve block. The TCM uses the temperature sensor signals to
determine the temperature of the transmission fluid. These signals are used by the TCM to control the transmission operation
to promote faster warm-up in cold conditions or to assist with fluid cooling by controlling the transmission operation when high
fluid temperatures are experienced. If the sensor fails, the TCM will use a default value and a fault code will be stored in the
TCM.
Damper
There is one damper located in the valve housing. The damper is used to regulate and dampen the regulated pressure supplied
via EPRS. The damper is load dependent through modulation of the damper against return spring pressure.
The damper comprises a piston, a housing bore and a spring. The piston is subject to the pressure applied by the spring. The
bore has a connecting port to the function to which it applies. Fluid pressure applied to the applicable component (i.e. a
clutch) is also subjected to the full area of the piston, which moves against the opposing force applied by the spring. The
movement of the piston creates an action similar to a shock absorber, momentarily delaying the build up of pressure in the
circuit. This results in a more gradual application of clutches improving shift quality.
Spool Valves
The valve block spool valves control various functions of the transmission. The spool valves are of conventional design and are
operated by fluid pressure.
Each spool valve is located in its spool bore and held in a default (unpressurized) position by a spring. The spool bore has a
number of ports which allow fluid to flow to other valves and clutches to enable transmission operation. Each spool has a
piston which is waisted to allow fluid to be diverted into the applicable ports when the valve is operated.
When fluid pressure moves a spool, one or more ports in the spool bore are covered or uncovered. Fluid is prevented from
flowing or is allowed to flow around the applicable waisted area of the spool and into another uncovered port. The fluid is
either passed through galleries to actuate another spool, operate a clutch or is returned to the fluid pan.
DRIVE CLUTCHES
Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical
Item Description
1 Input shaft
2 Main pressure supply port
3 Piston
4 Cylinder – external plate carrier
5 Clutch plate assembly
6 Baffle plate
7 Diaphragm spring
8 Output shaft
9 Bearing
10 Dynamic pressure equalization chamber
11 Piston chamber
12 Lubrication channel
There are three drive clutches and two brake clutches used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission. Each clutch comprises one or more
friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch consists of a number of steel outer plates and inner plates
with friction material bonded to each face.
On 5.0L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models, the uprated transmission includes additional clutch plates to enable the
transmission to manage the additional power output from these engines.
The clutch plates are held apart mechanically by a diaphragm spring and hydraulically by dynamic pressure. The pressure is
derived from a lubrication channel which supplies fluid to the bearings etc. The fluid is passed via a drilling in the output shaft
into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application due to pressure build up
produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure in the piston
chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly.
When clutch application is required, main pressure from the fluid pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply port.
This main pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber. The piston moves,
against the pressure applied by the diaphragm spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the main pressure
falls, the diaphragm spring pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.
PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

The planetary gear trains used on the ZF 6HP28 transmission comprise a single web planetary gear train and a double web
planetary gear train. These gear trains are known as Lepelletier type gear trains and together produce the six forward gears
and the one reverse gear.
Single Web Planetary Gear Train
The single web planetary gear train comprises:
Sunwheel
Three (naturally aspirated versions) or four (5.0L SC and 3.0L diesel versions) planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier (spider)
Ring gear or annulus.
Item Description
1 Cylinder
2 Baffle plate
3 Ring gear
4 Sun gear
5 Planetary gear spider
6 Torque converter input shaft
Torque Converter Input Shaft
Item Description
1 Planetary gear spider
2 Planetary gears (short)
3 Ring gear
4 Output shaft
5 Planetary gear carrier
6 Sunwheel
7 Double planetary gears (long)
8 Sunwheel
The double planetary gear train comprises:
Two sunwheels
Three short planetary gears
Three long planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier
Ring gear or annulus
ELECTRONIC PARK LOCK

The park lock is electronically actuated by solenoid valve located in the valve block. The park lock is engaged by a mechanical
spring system comprising a parking disc and a lock cylinder controlled by a solenoid valve.
The park lock is engaged when the TCM receives a park request from the JaguarDrive selector. When the park lock is released,
a solenoid valve in the valve housing directs hydraulic pressure to the lock cylinder, which moves the piston within the cylinder
and releases the park lock pawl at the rear of the transmission by means of a connecting rod. The solenoid on the lock cylinder
is energized and locks the cylinder piston in the unlocked position. Additional locking of the piston is achieved with ball
catches within the lock cylinder.
When park is selected, the solenoid on the lock cylinder is de-energized, the ball catches are released and the piston is free to
move in the lock cylinder. The solenoid in the valve housing is also de-energized. The spring loaded parking disc pulls the
cylinder piston in the park direction which allows the park disc to move on its mounting. This movement is transferred via the
connecting rod to parking pawl, which is engaged in the park lock gear.
If an electrical failure occurs, the park lock can be manually released by means of an emergency park release lever located in
the floor console. The lever is connected to the parking disc by a cable and allows the park lock to be released manually. Refer
to: External Controls (307-05, Description and Operation).
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM is an integral part of the Mechatronic valve block which is located at the bottom of the transmission, within the fluid
pan. The TCM is the main controlling component of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Diagnostic Strategy
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission/transaxle and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to:
Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Description and Operation),

Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Fluid Level and Condition Check
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must not be allowed to exceed 50°C (122°F) whilst checking level. Should the
temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool to below 30°C (86°F).
This vehicle is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission operation and could
result in transmission damage. To correctly check and add fluid to the transmission.
High Fluid Level
A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts.
This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission damage. If an
overfill condition is identified, with the engine at idle ensure the fluid temperature is within the specified range and allow the
excess fluid to drain until a small thread of fluid runs from the filler/level plug hole.
Low Fluid Level
A low fluid level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of
the transmission seals or gaskets.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid other than that specified can result in transmission damage.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.50 litre increments through the fill hole Opening. Do not overfill the fluid. For fluid
type, refer to the General Specification chart in this section.
Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the fluid level.
2. Observe the colour and the odour of the fluid. The colour under normal circumstances should be Honey.
3. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
NOTE: In the event of a transmission unit replacement for internal failure, the oil cooler and pipes must also be replaced.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical Hydraulic
Damaged/stuck shift mechanism Blown fuse(s) Fluid level too high/low

Damaged automatic transmission casing Damaged, loose or corroded connectors Poor condition of fluid
Wiring harness Fluid leak
the next step.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Shift Module (GSM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
Check
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.
The following steps must be observed before starting the
transmission fluid level check.
The vehicle must be on a horizontal ramp.
The parking brake must be applied.
The engine must be running for 2 minutes with the transmission
control switch (TCS) in the "P" position.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the transmission fluid temperature is

below 30 degrees before starting the fluid level check.
Connect the diagnostic tool to the vehicle.
3.
Start the engine.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Move the selector lever from 'P' through all gear positions,
pausing in each gear position for 2-3 seconds and return to the
'P' position.
Installation).
6. Place a suitable container under the transmission fluid fill plug.

7. CAUTIONS:
The transmission fluid level must only be checked

when the temperature of the fluid is between 30 degrees
and 50 degrees. The fluid level obtained will be incorrect if
the reading is outside this temperature range.
Discard the seal.

Clean the area around the transmission fluid level
plug.
Adjustment
WARNINGS:
1. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid fill plug hole the transmission fluid level
is insufficient. If this is the case add the transmission fluid
in 0.5 liter units into the transmission fluid fill plug hole
until fluid comes out.
2. NOTE: Make sure the transmission fluid temperature
does not exceed 50 °C (122 °F). If the transmission fluid
temperature does exceed 50 °C (122 °F) stop the
transmission fluid level check and allow the transmission
fluid to cool until the temperature is below 30 °C (86 °F).
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission

fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
3. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Using the special tool, install the new transmission fluid fill
plug.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.

6. Remove the container.
Installation).
9. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
WARNINGS:
Installation).
3. Place a container under the transmission.

5.
Allow the fluid to drain.
6. Torque: 8 Nm
7. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
Refill the transmission with fluid.

8. Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission
fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
9. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Loosely install the transmission fluid fill plug.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.
11. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).
Installation).

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Input Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
307-613
Holding Pins, Torque Converter
308-246
Installer, Front Seal
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
All vehicles


Transmission/Transaxle, Removal).
4. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27 (307-01, Removal).
Vehicles with 5.0L NA or 5.0L SC engine
5. Refer to: Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal).
All vehicles
7. CAUTIONS:

component.
Discard the seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375

Installation
All vehicles
2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visable

through the inspection hole as illustrated.

3. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is fully
located into the oil pump drive.
Vehicles with 5.0L NA or 5.0L SC engine
4. Refer to: Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Installation).
5. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27 (307-01, Installation).

All vehicles
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Extension Housing Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
All vehicles
3. Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

6. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).
All vehicles
7. CAUTION: Discard the nut.
8. Special Tool(s): 303-D121

Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Install a new seal.
Torque: 60 Nm
3. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

5. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Installation).
All vehicles
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Control Module (TCM) and
Main Control Valve Body
Removal
NOTE: The transmission control module (TCM) is part of the main control valve body and cannot be serviced separately.
3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
NOTE: Note the position of the manual park brake

release.
8.
9.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
Install a new seal block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the manual park release is
correctly engaged.
Torque: 8 Nm

installed.
5.
6.
7. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
9. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and
Filter
Removal
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

4.

6. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Support Insulator TDV6
3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3.
4. CAUTION: During this procedure the transmission
crossmember is removed, make sure the transmission is
correctly supported to avoid damaging associated
components.
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 70 Nm
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler
and Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
Left-Hand Rear Engine Lifting Bracket
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1.
2.
5. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

8.
9.
10. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 -
TdV6, Removal and Installation).
11.
13.
14. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.

15. Remove the rubber access cover.
16.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through

the inspection hole on removal of the last torque
converter bolt.
18.

driveshaft.
21. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured

with suitable retaining straps.
Align the powertrain assembly jack to the transmission.

22.
23. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque converter

remains in the transmission.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
24.
25.
26. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
NOTE: Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.

30.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 5 Nm
3.
4.
5.
6. Torque: 5 Nm
7.
8. Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the

inspection hole on installation of the first torque converter
bolt.

Raise the powertrain assembly jack and transmission

assembly.
11. Torque: 48 Nm
12. Torque: 48 Nm
13. Remove the transmission jack.


driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 63 Nm
18.
19.
Torque: 10 Nm
21. Torque: 23 Nm
22. Torque: 48 Nm
23. Torque: 30 Nm
25.
26.
28.
Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
www.JagDocs.com
29.
Remove the special tools from the engine.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497
32.
33.
34. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
35. Set the heater controls to HOT.
36. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature warning light. If the

warning light is displayed, switch off immediately and allow to cool.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM until the
engine cooling fan operates.
38. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant temperature
to go cold.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
40. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant

expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or

coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to carrying
out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL RANGE"
lower level mark.
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be

approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the expansion tank
with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.
41. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission and Transmission Fluid
Cooler TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1.
2.
5. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

8.
9.
11.
13.

16.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through

the inspection hole on removal of the last torque
converter bolt.
18.

driveshaft.


22.


technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
24.
25.
26. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.

Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2.
3.
4.
5. Torque: 5 Nm
6.
7. Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the

bolt.


assembly.
10. Torque: 48 Nm
11. Torque: 48 Nm


driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 63 Nm
17.
18.
Torque: 10 Nm
20. Torque: 23 Nm
21. Torque: 48 Nm
22. Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
24.
25.
27.
28.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497
31.
32.
33. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
34. Set the heater controls to HOT.

Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM until the
engine cooling fan operates.
37. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant temperature
to go cold.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
39. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant

expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or

coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to carrying
out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL RANGE"
lower level mark.
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be

approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the expansion tank
with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.
40. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
1.
2.
5. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

Torque: 22 Nm

8.

10.

12.

Make sure that the alignment mark is visable

through the inspection hole on removal of the last
torque converter bolt.
16.

driveshaft.
20.
Lower the transmission jack.

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
1. Make sure that the alignment mark is visable through the

bolt.


assembly.
4. Torque: 48 Nm
5. Torque: 48 Nm


driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 63 Nm
11.
Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 23 Nm
14. Torque: 48 Nm
15. Torque: 30 Nm
17.
19.
20.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497
23.
24.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling -
Item Specification
Transmission fluid ATF Shell M 1375.4
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 23 17 -
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining bolt 23 17 -
Transmission fluid cooler retaining bolt 5 - 44
Vehicles with 5.0L and 3.0L S/C petrol engine
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining nut 11 8 -
Vehicles with 3.0L N/A petrol engine
Description Nm lb-ft
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 22 16
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining nut 8 6
Transmission fluid cooler tube to cooler unions 20 15
Vehicles with 2.0L petrol engine
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining nut 11 8 -
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling - Component
Location
NOTE: Installation for 5.0L engines shown; installation for 3.0L diesel similar.
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Latch-plate
2 Feed hose and pipe (from transmission)
4 Engine coolant hose connections
5 Return hose and pipe (to transmission)
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
Transmission cooling is provided by a transmission fluid cooler, which transfers heat from the transmission to the engine
cooling system. The transmission fluid cooler is attached to a mounting bracket on the front subframe, in the front left corner
of the engine compartment.
Two hose and pipe assemblies connect the transmission fluid cooler to the automatic transmission. Two engine coolant hose
connections are incorporated into the top of the transmission fluid cooler for the supply and return of coolant from the engine
cooling system. For additional information, refer to:
Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling - System Operation
System Operation
Fluid from the pump in the automatic transmission flows through the feed hose and pipe to the transmission fluid cooler. The
fluid then flows through the transmission fluid cooler, and the return hose and pipe, to the sump of the automatic
transmission.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling)
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),

Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Feed and return tubes

Connections to the automatic transmission and the automatic transmission fluid cooler
Automatic transmission fluid level
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Causes Action

Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
automatic transmission fluid cooler automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
transmission install a new transmission fluid cooler.
Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes with new
automatic transmission fluid tubes automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful install
transmission new automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Loss of automatic Connections to the automatic Check the integrity of the tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid transmission and the automatic torque of the tube fixings.
transmission fluid cooler
Loss of automatic Leak at oil cooler Check the integrity of tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid torque of the tube fixings.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00 General Information,
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Fluid Cooler TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

5.
6. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
Removal


5.
6. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
7. Torque: 23 Nm
8. WARNING: Be prepared to catch escaping fluid.
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Torque: 23 Nm
9. Torque: 5 Nm

Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls -
Uppshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Downshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Transmission control switch (TCS) to floor console bracket retaining bolts 4 - 35
Emergency park position release lever cable bracket to transmission housing retaining bolts 11 8 -
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - External Controls -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Upshift (+) paddle switch
2 Downshift (-) paddle switch
4 Emergency park release
Overview
OVERVIEW
The external controls for the transmission consist of a JaguarDrive selector, two paddle switches and an emergency park
release.
The JaguarDrive selector transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module). The paddle
switches can be used to inititiate gear changes, with the JaguarDrive selector in either the D or S position, causing a change of
operating mode from automatic gear selection to manual gear selection. The emergency park release ensures the transmission
is kept in neutral during vehicle recovery operations.
Four additional switches adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector control the JaguarDrive control functions. Refer to: Ride and
Handling Optimization (204-06, Description and Operation).
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (250 A megafuse)
6 Upshift paddle switch
7 Downshift paddle switch
8 Steering wheel RH switchpack
11 Clockspring
System Operation
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM (transmission control module) via the
high speed CAN bus. A LIN bus connection is also provided, but is only used in the event of a CAN bus failure as a back-up.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The JaguarDrive selector is a magnetic system using Hall effect
sensors to determine the position of the selector.
The S (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission using the semi-automatic Jaguar sequential shift.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster to display the gear selection information in the message center.
The paddles can also be used on a temporary basis when the JaguarDrive selector is in the D (drive) position to override the
automatic gear selection if required.
PARK INTERLOCK AND NEUTRAL LOCK

Neutral lock is a requirement for the JaguarDrive selector. The selector is always locked at ignition on when the engine is not
running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in P (park) or N (neutral).
If, when driving with the JaguarDrive selector in S, D or R (reverse) at a speed of more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the driver selects
P or N:
Without the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to
below 5 km/h (3 mph).
With the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will remain unlocked for as long as the brake pedal remains
pressed, regardless of vehicle speed.
The transmission will only engage park once the vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1 mph).
If the driver selects N and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the JaguarDrive selector
will be locked 2 seconds after N is selected. The selector will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal again.
To ensure that a driver request to change from a non-driving range (N for example) to a driving range (D for example), the park
interlock and neutral lock features are used in conjunction with the intermediate position.
If the transmission receives a range change request without the brake pedal pressed, the TCM initiates a soft lock function.
The transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the starting position.
If a transmission position letter is flashing in the message center and the vehicle has no drive, the driver must:
Press the brake pedal.

Reselect N or P on the JaguarDrive selector.
Select the required driving range, ensuring that the brake pedal is pressed.
Rocking Function
The rocking function compliments the neutral lock function. For all changes from a non-driving range to a driving range, it is
necessary to press the brake pedal (to release either the park interlock or neutral lock).
In situations where the driver will require to change the gear selection from R to D, or from D to R, without brake pedal input
(car park maneuvering, 3 point turns or 'rocking' the vehicle from a slippery surface for example), the rocking function gives a 2
second lock delay when N is selected on the JaguarDrive selector and the brake pedal is not pressed.
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
The Jaguardrive selector is a rotary selector installed in the top of the JaguarDrive selector module. The JaguarDrive selector
module is located in the floor console and controls the vehicle optimization functions on the vehicle. Refer to: Ride and
Handling Optimization (204-06, Description and Operation).
By selecting P, R, N, D or S on the JaguarDrive selector, the transmission functions as any conventional automatic unit.
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector allows the selection of P, R, N and D. By depressing the JaguarDrive selector and rotating
clockwise from the D position, S mode can be selected. The JaguarDrive selector is fully electronic rotary transmission selector
with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
The JaguarDrive selector rises from the JaguarDrive selector module once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped
with the JaguarDrive selector in any position other than N, it retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module again. If the
selector is in position N when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive
through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the selector automatically retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module. The
selector also retracts if P is selected within the 10 minute period, or the vehicle is locked.
If the JaguarDrive selector does not rise from the console when the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the
selector, the retracted selector can still be rotated to make selections. If electrical power to the JaguarDrive selector is lost,
the selector will not rise from the console when the engine is started and the retracted selector will not rotate.
The JaguarDrive selector contains an internal interlock solenoid to prevent the selector from being rotated when the engine is
not running.
The engine can be stopped with the JaguarDrive selector in any position. Once the engine is stopped the selector will
automatically reset to the P position and the transmission park lock will be engaged, except if the selector is moved to the N
position when the engine is stopped.
PADDLE SWITCHES
Two gear change 'paddle' switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the transmission
as a semi-automatic manual gearbox using the Jaguar sequential shift feature.
Each paddle switch has three connections; ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch
signal. The paddle switches are hardwired to the steering wheel RH (right-hand) switch assembly. Operation of the paddle
switch completes a ground path to the switch assembly. The switch assembly converts the completed ground signal into a LIN
bus signal which is passed via the clockspring to the CJB (central junction box). The CJB converts the signal into a high speed
CAN bus signal to the TCM.
Pulling the LH (left-hand) downshift - paddle provides down changes and pulling the RH upshift (+) paddle provides up
changes. The first operation of either paddle, after sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent manual
Jaguar sequential shift mode. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector back to the D position, returns the transmission to
conventional automatic operation.
Temporary operation of manual Jaguar sequential shift mode can also be operated with the JaguarDrive selector in the D
position. Operation of either the upshift or downshift paddles activates the manual mode operation. If the JaguarDrive selector
is in D, Jaguar sequential shift will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the + paddle for
approximately 1.2 seconds.
EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE
Item Description
1 Latch
2 Strap
3 Locking cylinder
4 Operating lever
5 Upper cable
6 Cable joint
7 Lower cable
8 Cable bracket
9 Park interlock lever
If a vehicle requires recovery/transportation, the emergency park release mechanism is used to manually disengage the park
lock and engage the transmission in neutral.
The emergency park release mechanism consists of an operating lever that is connected to a park interlock lever on the
transmission by an upper and lower cable assembly.
The operating lever is installed in the floor console, under a trim panel in the cubby box. The park interlock lever is attached to
the transmission selector shaft.
One end of the operating lever is attached to a base by a hinge pin. A locking cylinder is installed in the other end of the
operating lever, to secure the operating lever to the base. The operating lever is raised by pulling on a strap.
When operated, the emergency park release mechanism turns the transmission selector shaft.
To disengage the park lock:
Open the cubby box lid.

Remove the trim panel from left side of the cubby box.
Rotate the locking cylinder of the emergency park release lever 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Apply the footbrake, pull the operating lever upwards and ensure it locks in the vertical position.
Raising the operating lever causes the emergency park release cable to rotate the park interlock lever on the transmission,
which disengages the parking pawl and engages neutral. This allows the vehicle to freewheel.
To re-engage the park lock:
Hold the strap on the operating lever, release the latch and lower the operating lever to the horizontal position.
Lock the operating lever by turning the locking cylinder 90 degrees clockwise.
Install the trim panel.
Close the cubby box lid.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - External Controls
For a detailed description of the transmission external controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (307-05)
External Controls (Description and Operation),

External Controls (Description and Operation),
External Controls (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Check for stuck/jammed switches and buttons Fuse(s)

Visibly damaged or worn components Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Loose or missing fasteners Transmission control module
Transmission control switch
the next step.
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00, Description and Operation)
/
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Transmission Control
Switch (TCS)
Removal

the component.
2. Torque: 2 Nm
3.
the component.
5. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) Knob
Removal
NOTES:
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not start the engine.

component.

the component.
Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Emergency Park
Position Release Lever
Removal
All vehicles

2. Refer to: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6
3.
Remove the 2 rivets.
All vehicles
4. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Torque: 11 Nm
5.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
Apply the parking brake, chock the wheels and ensure

that all personnel are clear of the vehicle before carrying
out the following procedure.
Torque: 2.5 Nm

Installation


Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Upshift Paddle Switch
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTES:
Make sure that the harness is routed to the position

noted on removal.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Downshift Paddle
Switch
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTE: Make sure that the harness is routed to the

position noted on removal.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Description Nm lb-ft lb -in

Turbocharger to catalytic converter retaining studs 15 11 -
Turbocharger to catalytic converter retaining nuts 25 18 -
Catalytic converter bracket 25 18 -
Catalytic converter securing strap bolts 9 - 80
Catalytic converter to Diesel particulate filter (DPF) securing strap bolts 11 8 -
DPF support insulator bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
DPF support insulator to bracket nuts 6 - 53
DPF to front muffler securing strap nuts 55 41 -
Rear muffler support bracket 25 18 -
Catalytic converter temperature sensors 35 26 -
DPF temperature sensor 35 26 -
DPF differential pressure sensor bracket bolt 7 5 -
DPF differential pressure sensor pipe clamp bolt 2 - 18
DPF differential pressure sensor pipe union nuts 17 13 -
DPF heat shield retaining bolts 6 - 53
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - 3.0L DIESEL FROM 2010MY
Item Description
1 Manifold flange (2 off)
3 Differential pressure sensor (located above transmission)
5 Rear silencer (2 off)
6 Exhaust trim (2 off)
7 Mounting rubber (6 off)
8 Flexible intermediate resonator assembly
10 Pre DPF temperature sensor
11 Mass damper
12 Post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor (hidden)
13 Catalytic converter
15 Pre catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System - System Operation and
System Operation
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The engine management system provides accurately metered quantities of fuel to the combustion chambers to ensure the
most efficient use of fuel and to minimise the exhaust emissions. To further reduce the carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons
content of the exhaust gases, a catalytic converter is integrated into each front pipe of the exhaust system. In the catalytic
converter the exhaust gases are passed through honeycombed ceramic elements coated with a special surface treatment called
'washcoat'. The washcoat increases the surface area of the ceramic elements by a factor of approximately 7000. On top of the
washcoat is a coating containing platinum and palladium, which are the active constituents for converting harmful emissions
into inert by-products. The platinum and palladium add oxygen to the carbon monoxide and the hydrocarbons in the exhaust
gases, to convert them into carbon dioxide and water respectively.
FRONT SECTION
The front section comprises two pipes which connect to each cylinder bank. The two pipes then both connect into the Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF).
The LH (left-hand) front section is connected to the LH bank turbocharger with 3 studs in a flange on the exhaust system The
studs are secured to a mating flange on the turbocharger with 3 flange nuts. From the flange, a pipe which is bent through 90
degrees connects to a catalytic converter. A short welded outlet section from the catalytic converter connects to the connecting
pipe to the Diesel Particulate filter (DPF). The connection between the 2 pipes is a compressed cone and clamp joint.
The RH (right-hand) front section is connected to the RH bank turbocharger with 2 studs in a flange on the exhaust system.
The studs are secured to the mating flange on the turbocharger with 2 flange nuts. From the flange, a pipe with a bend
downwards connects to the connecting pipe with the DPF. This pipe also includes a de-coupler assembly to absorb vibrations
from the engine. The joint with the connecting pipe with the DPF is a compressed cone and clamp joint.
From each cone and clamp joint for each cylinder bank, the 2 pipes have a straight section and then a curve inwards to a
welded connection with the DPF front inlet cone which forms part of the DPF body. These 2 pipes have an inner pipe which is
secured to the outer pipe by 2 crimped indentations. The DPF inlet cone has 2 bosses which provide for the connection of a
DPF temperature sensor and the high pressure pipe for the differential pressure sensor. The DPF is oval in shape and is closed
at the rear by an outlet cone with 2 welded short pipes. The LH pipe has a boss which allows for the attachment of the low
pressure pipe for the differential pressure sensor. The 2 pipes are held together by welded hanger brackets which support the
front section of the exhaust system on 2 mounting rubbers.
REAR SECTION
The 2 pipes from the DPF connect into 2 pipes which are welded to 2 flexible intermediate assemblies. The joints are secured
with 'Torca' type clamps. Exhaust gasses exit each flexible intermediate section via an outlet pipe. Each outlet pipe is braced
together with a bracket and also each have a welded hanger bracket which allow the rear section to be supported on mounting
rubbers.
The 2 rear silencers each have a welded inlet pipe which mate with the 2 outlet pipes from the center flexible intermediate
sections and are each secured with a clamp. The fabricated rear silencers have 3 perforated tubes which are supported on 2
baffle plates. The exhaust gasses are expelled from the rear silencer via a single outlet pipe. The outlet pipe from each
silencer has a welded hanger bar which support the rear silencer on mounting rubbers. The outlet pipe is welded to the silencer
and covered with a polished stainless steel finisher which is secured to the outlet pipe with a 'Torca' clamp.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The oxidizing catalytic converter is fitted in the LH front section of the exhaust system, after the pre-catalyst exhaust gas
temperature sensor. A HO2S (heated oxygen sensor) is fitted adjacent to the pre-catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor and
is used by the engine management system to ensure the most efficient use of fuel and to minimise the exhaust emissions.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
Item Description
3 High pressure pipe
4 Low pressure pipe
6 DPF
7 Pre DPF temperature sensor
8 Post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
9 Catalytic converter
10 Pre-catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
COMPONENT LOCATION - DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
Item Description
1 High pressure connection
2 Low pressure connection
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter - System
System Operation
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
Two processes are used to regenerate the DPF; passive and active.
Passive Regeneration
Passive regeneration requires no special engine management intervention and occurs during normal engine operation. The
passive regeneration involves a slow conversion of the particulate matter deposited in the DPF into carbon dioxide. This
process occurs when the DPF temperature exceeds 250°C (482°F) and is a continuous process when the vehicle is being driven
at higher engine loads and speeds.
During passive regeneration, only a portion of the particulate matter is converted into carbon dioxide. This is because the
chemical reaction, which utilises nitrogen dioxide, is slower than the rate of engine production of particulate matter and is
effective from 250°C (482°F).
Above 580°C the conversion efficiency of the particulates into carbon dioxide rapidly increases. These temperatures are
generally only be achieved using the active regeneration process.
Active Regeneration
Active regeneration starts when the particulate loading of the DPF reaches a threshold as monitored or determined by the DPF
control software. The threshold calculation is based on driving style, distance travelled and back pressure signals from the
differential pressure sensor.
Active regeneration generally occurs every 250 miles (400 km) although this is dependant on how the vehicle is driven. For
example, if the vehicle is driven at low loads in urban traffic regularly, active regeneration will occur more often. This is due to
the rapid build-up of particulates in the DPF than if the vehicle is driven at high speeds when passive regeneration will have
occurred.
The DPF software incorporates a mileage trigger which is used as back-up for active regeneration. If active regeneration has
not been initiated by a back pressure signal from the differential pressure sensor, regeneration is requested based on distance
travelled.
Active regeneration of the DPF is commenced when the temperature of the DPF is increased to the combustion temperature of
the particles. The DPF temperature is raised by increasing the exhaust gas temperature. This is achieved by introducing
post-injection of fuel after the pilot and main fuel injections have occurred.
It is determined by the DPF software monitoring the signals from the two DPF temperature sensors to establish the
temperature of the DPF. Depending on the DPF temperature, the DPF software requests the ECM (engine control module) to
perform either one or two post-injections of fuel:
The first post-injection of fuel retards combustion inside the cylinder which increases the temperature of the exhaust
gas.
The second post-injection of fuel is injected late in the power stroke cycle. The fuel partly combusts in the cylinder, but
some unburnt fuel also passes into the exhaust where it creates an exothermic event within the catalytic converter,
further increasing the temperature of the DPF.
The active regeneration process takes up to 20 minutes to complete. The first phase increases the DPF temperature to 500°C
(932°F). The second phase further increases the DPF temperature to 600°C (1112°F) which is the optimum temperature for
particle combustion. This temperature is then maintained for 15-20 minutes to ensure complete oxidation of the particles
within the DPF. The oxidation process converts the carbon particles to carbon dioxide.
The active regeneration temperature of the DPF is closely monitored by the DPF software to maintain a target temperature of
600°C (1112°F) at the DPF inlet. The temperature control ensures that the temperatures do not exceed the operational limits
of the turbocharger and the catalytic converter. The turbocharger inlet temperature must not exceed 830°C (1526°F) and the
catalytic converter brick temperature must not exceed 800°C (1472°F) and the exit temperature must remain below 875°C
(1382°F).
During the active regeneration process the following ECM controlled events occur:
The turbocharger is maintained in the fully open position. This minimizes heat transmission from the exhaust gas to
the turbocharger and reduces the rate of exhaust gas flow allowing optimum heating of the DPF. If the driver demands
an increase in engine torque, the turbocharger will respond by closing the vanes as necessary.
The throttle is closed as this assists in increasing the exhaust gas temperature and reduces the rate of exhaust gas
flow which has the effect of reducing the time for the DPF to reach the optimum temperature.
The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve is closed. The use of EGR decreases the exhaust gas temperature and
therefore prevents the optimum DPF temperature being achieved.
If, due to vehicle usage and/or driving style, the active regeneration process cannot take place or is unable to regenerate the
DPF, the dealer can force regenerate the DPF. This is achieved by either driving the vehicle until the engine is at its normal
operating temperature and then driving for a further 20 minutes at speeds of not less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
DPF Control
The DPF requires constant monitoring to ensure that it is operating at its optimum efficiency and does not become blocked.
The ECM contains DPF software which controls the monitoring and operation of the DPF system and also monitors other vehicle
data to determine regeneration periods and service intervals.
The DPF software can be divided into three separate control software modules; a DPF supervisor module, a DPF fuel
management module and a DPF air management module.
These three modules are controlled by a fourth software module known as the DPF co-ordinator module. The co-ordinator
module manages the operation of the other modules when an active regeneration is requested.
DPF Fuel Management Module
The DPF fuel management module controls the following functions:
Timing and quantity of the four split injections per stroke (pilot, main and two post injections).
Injection pressure and the transition between the three different calibration levels of injection.
The above functions are dependant on the condition of the catalytic converter and the DPF.
The controlled injection determines the required injection level in addition to measuring the activity of the catalytic converter
and the DPF. The fuel management calculates the quantity and timing for the four split injections, for each of the three
calibration levels for injection pressure, and also manages the transition between the levels.
The two post injections are required to separate the functionality of increasing in-cylinder gas temperatures and the production
of hydrocarbons. The first post injection is used to generate the higher in-cylinder gas temperature while simultaneously
retaining the same engine torque output produced during normal (non-regeneration) engine operation. The second post
injection is used to generate hydrocarbons by allowing unburnt fuel into the catalytic converter without producing increased
engine torque.
DPF Air Management Module
The DPF air management module controls the following functions:
EGR control
Turbocharger boost pressure control
Intake air temperature and pressure control.
During active regeneration, the EGR operation is disabled -except for overrun conditions - and the closed-loop activation of the
turbocharger boost controller is calculated. The air management module controls the air in the intake manifold to a
predetermined level of pressure and temperature. This control is required to achieve the correct in-cylinder conditions for
stable and robust combustion of the post injected fuel.
The module controls the intake air temperature by actuating the EGR throttle and by adjustment of the turbocharger boost
pressure control.
DPF Co-ordinator Module
The DPF co-ordinator module reacts to a regeneration request from the supervisor module by initiating and co-ordinating the
following DPF regeneration requests:
EGR cut-off - except for overrun condition

Turbocharger boost pressure control
Engine load increase
Control of air pressure and temperature in the intake manifold
Fuel injection control.
When the supervisor module issues a regeneration request, the co-ordinator module requests EGR cut-off and a regeneration
specific turbocharger boost pressure control. It then waits for a feedback signal from the EGR system confirming that the EGR
valve is closed.
When the EGR valve is closed, the co-ordinator module initiates requests to increase engine load by controlling the intake air
temperature and pressure.
Once confirmation is received that intake conditions are controlled or a calibration time has expired, the co-ordinator module
then changes to a state awaiting an accelerator pedal release manoeuvre from the driver. If this occurs or a calibration time
has expired, the co-ordinator module generates a request to control fuel injections to increase exhaust gas temperature.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR

As the amount of particulates trapped by the DPF increases, the pressure at the inlet side of the DPF increases in comparison
to the DPF outlet. The DPF software uses this comparison, in conjunction with other data, to calculate the accumulated amount
of trapped particulates.
By measuring the pressure difference between the DPF inlet and outlet and the DPF temperature, the DPF software can
determine if the DPF is becoming blocked and requires regeneration.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
The DPF system reduces diesel particulate emissions to negligible levels to meet current European stage 5 emission
standards.
The particulate emissions are the black fumes emitted from the diesel engine under certain load conditions. The emissions are
a complex mixture of solid and liquid components with the majority of the particulates being carbon microspheres on which
hydrocarbons from the engine's fuel and lubricant condense.
The DPF system comprises the following components:
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

DPF control software incorporated in the ECM
Differential pressure sensor.
The DPF is located in the exhaust system, downstream of the catalytic converter. Its function is to trap particulate matter in
the exhaust gases leaving the engine. A major feature of the DPF is its ability for regeneration. Regeneration is the burning of
particulates trapped by the filter to prevent obstruction to the free flow of exhaust gasses. The regeneration process takes
place at calculated intervals and is not noticeable by the driver of the vehicle.
Regeneration is most important, since an overfilled filter can damage the engine through excessive exhaust back pressure and
can itself be damaged or destroyed. The material trapped in the filter is in the most part carbon particles with some absorbed
hydrocarbons.
The DPF uses a filter technology based on a filter with a catalytic coating. The DPF is made from silicon carbide housed in a
steel container and has excellent thermal shock resistance and thermal conductivity properties. The DPF is designed for the
engine's operating requirements to maintain the optimum back pressure requirements.
The porous surface of the filter consists of thousands of small parallel channels positioned in the longitudinal direction of the
exhaust system. Adjacent channels in the filter are alternately plugged at the end. This design forces the exhaust gasses to
flow through the porous filter walls, which act as the filter medium. Particulate matter which are too big to pass through the
porous surface are collected and stored in the channels.
The collected particulate matter, if not removed, can create an obstruction to exhaust gas flow. The stored particles are
removed by a regeneration process which incinerates the particles.
Diesel Particulate Filter Temperature Sensors
The sensors measure the temperature of exhaust gas exiting the turbocharger and before it passes through the DPF and
provides the information needed to calculate the DPF temperature.
The information is used, in conjunction with other data, to estimate the amount of accumulated particulates and to control the
DPF temperature.
Instrument Cluster (IC) Indications
For drivers who make regular short journeys at low speeds, it may not be possible to efficiently regenerate the DPF. In this
case, the DPF software will detect a blockage of the DPF from signals from the differential pressure sensor and will alert the
driver as follows:
The driver will be alerted to this condition by a message 'EXHAUST FILTER NEARLY FULL'. See 'HANDBOOK'. As detailed in the
Owners Handbook, the driver should drive the vehicle until the engine is at its normal operating temperature and then drive for
a further 20 minutes at speeds of not less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Successful regeneration of the DPF is indicated to the driver
by the 'EXHAUST FILTER NEARLY FULL' message no longer being displayed. If the DPF software detects that the DPF is still
blocked, the message will continue to be displayed or an additional message 'EXHAUST FILTER FULL VISIT DEALER' will be
displayed. The driver should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the DPF force regenerated using an approved
diagnostic system.
Diesel Particulate Filter Side Effects
The following section details some side effects caused by the active regeneration process.
Engine Oil Dilution
Engine oil dilution can occur due to small amounts of fuel entering the engine crankcase during the post-injection phases. This
has made it necessary to introduce a calculation based on driving style to reduce oil service intervals if necessary. The driver is
alerted to the oil service by a message in the instrument cluster.
The DPF software monitors the driving style and the frequency of the active regeneration and duration. Using this information a
calculation can be made on the engine oil dilution. When the DPF software calculates the engine oil dilution has reached a
predetermined threshold (fuel being 7% of engine oil volume) a service message is displayed in the IC.
Depending on driving style, some vehicles may require an oil service before the designated interval. If a service message is
displayed, the vehicle will be required have a full service and the service interval counter will be reset.
Fuel consumption
During the active regeneration process of the DPF, there will be an increase in fuel consumption.
However, because active regeneration occurs infrequently, the overall effect on fuel consumption is approximately 2%. The
additional fuel used during the active regeneration process is accounted for in the instantaneous and average fuel consumption
displays in the instrument cluster.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
The differential pressure sensor is used by the DPF software to monitor the condition of the DPF. Two pipe connections on the
sensor are connected by pipes to the inlet and outlet ends of the DPF. The pipes allow the sensor to measure the inlet and
outlet pressures of the DPF.
Aftermarket DPF cleaning fluids
Recent years have seen the introduction of 'DPF cleaning fluids' to (non JLR approved) aftermarket sales. These products claim
to reduce the temperature that the soot reaction takes place. It should be stressed that, during the vehicle development
activity, every effort is made to generate DPF regeneration temperatures whilst maintaining safe levels for all other vehicle
components. Unauthorized use of the aftermarket fluids produces a significant risk to soot burn rates and DPF peak
temperatures real world driving conditions. These fluids are not authorised for JLR use.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter
For a detailed description of the exhaust system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual.
REFER to: Diesel Particulate Filter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation) /
Diesel Particulate Filter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Visual Inspection
Diesel particulate filter Differential pressure sensor

Differential pressure sensor hoses Differential pressure sensor connector
Differential pressure sensor metal pipes and unions Differential pressure sensor wiring harness
Differential pressure sensor mounting position integrity Electrical connector(s)
Metal fatigue Sensor(s)
Joints Engine control module (ECM)
Mountings
Clearance around components
Damaged diesel particulate filter
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for DTCs
and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

Amber warning message If DTC is P2459-65 or AMBER DPF FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK
on instrument cluster - Blocked regeneration message is displayed with no other reported messages. No repair is
DPF FULL REFER TO Customer driving routine required, if the vehicle is driven on a highway AS DIRECTED IN THE
HANDBOOK - does not allow the HANDBOOK then the light will be extinguished and the system self
system to clean the healed, nothing more than this is required
particulate filter
Lack of power Check the air intake system. Check for a blocked catalytic converter
Air intake system fault or muffler, install new components as necessary. Check the fuel
Restricted exhaust pressure. For EGR and turbocharger tests, refer to the relevant
system section of the workshop manual
Low fuel pressure
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Turbocharger fault
Diesel particulate filter
fault
DTC Index
NOTES:
manufacturer approved diagnostic system)
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

P0030-11 HO2S Heater Control
Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
1) - Circuit short to Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
ground Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
sensor heater circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust
control circuit short Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
to ground for short to ground. This circuit runs from the Engine
Universal Heated Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
Exhaust Gas Oxygen the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
sensor internal fault due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear
DTC and retest system
Suspect sensor internal fault if DTC resets. Heater circuit
resistance measured at the component connector at
approximately 20ºC ambient temperature should be 2.4 -
4.0 Ohms. Refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index

1) - Circuit short to Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
battery Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit short Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
to power for short to power. This circuit runs from the Engine
Universal Heated Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
Exhaust Gas Oxygen the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
sensor internal fault due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear

1) - Circuit open Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit open Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
Universal Heated for open circuit. This circuit runs from the Engine Control
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to the
sensor internal fault exhaust system. Check for external harness damage due
to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear DTC
and retest system
P0030-4B HO2S Heater Control

1) - Over temperature Heated Oxygen datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
Sensor heater Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit short circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust
to power Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
Heated Oxygen for short to power. This circuit runs from the Engine
Sensor internal fault Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear
P0130-00 O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - No sub Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
type information Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen circuits for open
Exhaust Gas Oxygen circuits on the Nernst Voltage and Pumping Current signal
sensor circuits open lines. Check harness for signs of damage due to chaffing
circuit or heat. Check the other Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits and open circuits
Exhaust Gas Oxygen If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
sensor internal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
component fault module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Sensor 1) - Circuit The Engine Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short to ground Module (ECM) has Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
detected a ground short to ground. Repair wiring harness as required, clear
measurement for a DTC and retest system
period longer than If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
expected or has Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
detected a ground module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
measurement when Index
another value was
expected
Harness fault -
Universal Heated
Exhaust Gas Oxygen
sensor circuit short
to ground
Universal Heated
Exhaust Gas Oxygen
sensor internal
component fault

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short to battery Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
Exhaust Gas Oxygen short to power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear
sensor circuit short DTC and retest system
to power If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Universal Heated Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
Exhaust Gas Oxygen module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
sensor internal Index
component fault

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
Exhaust Gas Oxygen open circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
sensor circuit open and retest system
circuit If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Universal Heated Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
Exhaust Gas Oxygen module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
sensor internal Index
component fault
P0130-1A O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - This DTC is set when the Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Resistance Below Universal Heated Oxygen sensor internal trim resistance value is less than
Threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen that expected by the Engine Control Module. Refer to the
sensor circuit fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated
Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits.
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
sensor internal system
component fault If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0130-1B O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - This DTC is set when the oxygen sensor internal trim
Resistance Above Universal Heated resistance value is greater than that expected by the
Threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen Engine Control Module. Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor circuit fault diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits, open circuits.
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
sensor internal system
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. refer to
the DTC Index

Sensor 1) - Signal Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak between cylinder
Rate Of Change Below Fuel control system head and catalytic converter. Check Universal Heated
Threshold fault Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor is correctly installed in
Universal Heated exhaust manifold
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Check fuel control system for related DTCs and refer to
sensor to Engine the relevant DTC Index
Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Universal
(ECM) circuit short Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor to Engine Control
to ground, short to Module (ECM) circuit for short to ground, short to power,
power, high high resistance, open circuit
resistance Check and install a new Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor as required
Exhaust Gas Oxygen
sensor failure
P0133-00 O2 Circuit Slow

Response (Bank 1, Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak between cylinder
Sensor 1) - No sub Fuel control system head and catalytic converter. Check Universal Heated
type information fault Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor is correctly installed in
Universal Heated exhaust manifold
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Check fuel control system for related DTCs and refer to
sensor to Engine the relevant DTC Index
Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Universal
(ECM) wiring shield Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor to Engine Control
high resistance Module (ECM) wiring shield for high resistance
Universal Heated Check and install a new Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Oxygen sensor as required
sensor failure
P0135-16 O2 Heater Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Harness fault - This DTC is set when the voltage on the Universal Heated
Circuit Voltage Below Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor heater circuit is less than that
threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen expected by the Engine Control Module. Refer to the
sensor circuit fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated
Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor heater supply and heater
Exhaust Gas Oxygen ground circuits for short circuits, open circuits. Repair
sensor internal wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest system
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. refer to
the DTC Index
P0435-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Sensor Circuit 1) - No temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
sub type information bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
Catalyst temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short to
temperature sensor ground. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
bank 2, sensor 1 retest system
circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
power temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short to
Catalyst power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
temperature sensor retest system
bank 2, sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
circuit high temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
resistance resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Catalyst and retest system
temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
bank 2, sensor 1 temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
circuit open circuit circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
Catalyst retest system
bank 2, sensor 1 temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for
circuit disconnected disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
temperature sensor Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
bank 2, sensor 1 bank 2, sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Sensor Circuit Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Range/Performance temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
1) - No sub type circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
information ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
Index

Sensor Circuit Low Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
1) - No sub type bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
resistance temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
Catalyst resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
temperature sensor and retest system
circuit open circuit temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
Catalyst circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
circuit disconnected temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for
Catalyst disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
bank 2, sensor 1 Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
failure bank 2, sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Sensor Circuit High Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
1) - No sub type bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7). Refer to the electrical circuit
power diagrams and check catalyst temperature sensor bank 2,
Catalyst sensor 1 circuit for short to power. Repair wiring harness
temperature sensor as required, clear DTC and retest system
Index.
P043A-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Sensor Circuit 2) - No temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
sub type information bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
Index
P043B-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Range/Performance temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
2) - No sub type circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
information ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
Index
P043C-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit Low Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
2) - No sub type bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
resistance temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for high
Catalyst resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
circuit open circuit temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for open
Catalyst circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
circuit disconnected temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for
Catalyst disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Index
P043D-00 Catalyst Temperature
Sensor Circuit High Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
2) - No sub type bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
temperature sensor power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
failure Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
bank 2, sensor 2 as required. Refer to the new
Index
P0544-00 Exhaust Gas

Temperature Sensor Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
1 - No sub type bank 1 sensor 1 to ground
information circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
ground gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Exhaust gas to power
temperature sensor, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
bank 1 sensor 1 gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
circuit short to resistance
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Exhaust gas gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
temperature sensor, circuit
bank 1 sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
circuit high gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
resistance disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Exhaust gas and retest system
temperature sensor, Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1 bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
circuit open circuit module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
circuit disconnected
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
failure

Circuit Low - Bank 1 temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Sensor 1 - No sub bank 1 sensor 1 to ground
type information circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
ground gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
Exhaust gas resistance
temperature sensor, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
bank 1 sensor 1 gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
circuit high circuit
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Exhaust gas gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
temperature sensor, disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
bank 1 sensor 1 and retest system
circuit open circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
Exhaust gas bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
temperature sensor, module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
bank 1 sensor 1
circuit disconnected
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
failure

Circuit High - Bank 1 temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Sensor 1 - No sub bank 1 sensor 1 to power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
type information circuit short to retest system
power Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
Exhaust gas bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
temperature sensor, module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
bank 1 sensor 1
failure
P2002-68 Diesel Particulate
Filter Efficiency Below Diesel particulate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Threshold (Bank 1) - filter regeneration for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry
event information disabled by other out a diesel particulate filter regeneration
DTCs logged

Temperature Sensor Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Circuit Bank 1 Sensor Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
2 - No sub type inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
information temperature sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor
inlet exhaust gas fails a plausibility check at cold start. Refer to the
temperature sensor workshop manual and check the particulate filter inlet
internal fault exhaust gas temperature sensor and wiring harness for
obvious signs of mechanical damage due to chaffing or
heat. The particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature
sensor is a thermistor located in the inlet to the
particulate filter housing with a signal and ground
connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground, high resistance. Check the
ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance, short circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness as required
If there are no wiring faults, refer to the workshop manual
and check the sensor resistance value. Replace the sensor
if required, refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index

Circuit Low Bank 1 Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 2 - No sub inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
type information temperature sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5). This DTC is set if the
inlet exhaust gas fails a diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor less than the expected value. Refer to the workshop
internal fault manual and check the particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor and wiring harness for obvious signs
of mechanical damage due to chaffing or heat. The
particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor is a
thermistor located in the inlet to the particulate filter
housing with a signal and ground connection. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the signal circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance. Check the ground circuit for open circuit,
high resistance, short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
harness as required

Circuit High Bank 1 Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 2 - No sub inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
type information temperature sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5). This DTC is set if the
inlet exhaust gas fails a diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor greater than the expected value. Refer to the workshop
internal fault manual and check the particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor and wiring harness for obvious signs
of mechanical damage due to chaffing or heat. The
particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor is a
thermistor located in the inlet to the particulate filter
housing with a signal and ground connection. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the signal circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance. Check the ground circuit for open circuit,
high resistance, short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
harness as required
Temperature Sensor Harness fault - This DTC is set when there is a plausibility error on the
Circuit Secondary turbo signal from the secondary turbo outlet temperature
Range/Performance outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
Bank 1 Sensor 1 - No sensor secondary turbo outlet temperature sensor and wiring
sub type information Secondary turbo harness for obvious signs of mechanical damage due to
outlet temperature chaffing or heat. The secondary turbo outlet temperature
sensor internal fault sensor is a thermistor with a signal and ground
connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to

Temperature Sensor Harness fault - close This DTC is set when there is a plausibility error on the
Circuit coupled catalyst signal from the close coupled catalyst outlet temperature
Range/Performance outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the workshop manual and check the close
Bank 1 Sensor 2 - No sensor coupled catalyst outlet temperature sensor and wiring
sub type information Close coupled harness for obvious signs of mechanical damage due to
catalyst outlet chaffing or heat. The close coupled catalyst outlet
temperature sensor temperature sensor is a thermistor with a signal and
internal fault ground connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
P2226-62 Barometric Pressure

Sensor A Circuit - The Engine Control Check the Engine Control Module (ECM) is clean and dry.
Signal compare failure Module (ECM) has Check the Engine Control Module (ECM) is not sealed by
been submersed in any non approved covering.
water or mud If the DTC does not clear install a new Engine Control
The Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the new
Module (ECM) has module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
been sealed in a
non approved
covering
P2245-00 O2 Sensor Reference

Voltage Circuit Low - Harness fault - This DTC is set if the Engine Control Module (ECM) detects
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - No oxygen sensor the bank 1, oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage (LPV_A) is
sub type information circuit lower than expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Oxygen sensor diagrams and check the oxygen sensor harness for signs
internal fault of damage caused by chaffing or heat. Check the oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high resistance, short to
ground. Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
If there are no wiring faults suspect the oxygen sensor.
Refer to the new module/component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
P2246-00 O2 Sensor Reference

Voltage Circuit High - Harness fault - This DTC is set if the Engine Control Module (ECM) detects
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - No oxygen sensor the bank 1, oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage (LPV_A) is
sub type information circuit greater than expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Oxygen sensor diagrams and check the oxygen sensor harness for signs
internal fault of damage caused by chaffing or heat. Check the oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high resistance, short to
power. Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
If there are no wiring faults suspect the oxygen sensor.
Refer to the new module/component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
P242A-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit Bank 1 Sensor particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
3 - No sub type outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
information sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor fails a cold
outlet temperature start diagnostic check by the Engine Control Module. Refer
sensor internal fault to the workshop manual and check the particulate filter
and sensor for obvious signs of damage. Check the sensor
harness for chaffing or heat damage. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor signal circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to other circuits. Check the sensor
ground circuit for open circuit, short to power, high
resistance. Repair wiring as required
If there are no wiring faults suspect the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the new
Index
P242B-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Range/Performance outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Bank 1 Sensor 3 - No sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
sub type information Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor fails a
outlet temperature plausibility check by the Engine Control Module. Refer to
sensor internal fault the workshop manual and check the particulate filter and
sensor for obvious signs of damage. Check the sensor
harness for chaffing or heat damage. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor signal circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to other circuits. Check the sensor
ground circuit for open circuit, short to power, high
resistance. Repair wiring as required
Index
P242C-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit Low Bank 1 particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 3 - No sub outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
type information sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal voltage
outlet temperature is less than the Engine Control Module (ECM) was
sensor internal fault expecting. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
particulate filter and sensor for obvious signs of damage.
Check the sensor harness for chaffing or heat damage.
particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal circuit
for open circuit, short to ground, short to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for open circuit, short to
power, high resistance. Repair wiring as required
Index
P242D-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit High Bank 1 particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 3 - No sub outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
type information sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal voltage
outlet temperature is greater than the Engine Control Module (ECM) was
sensor internal fault expecting. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
particulate filter and sensor for obvious signs of damage.
Check the sensor harness for chaffing or heat damage.
particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal circuit
for open circuit, short to ground, short to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for open circuit, short to
power, high resistance. Repair wiring as required
Index.
P242F-00 Diesel Particulate

Filter Restriction - Ash Maximum ash load
NOTE: The setting value of this DTC is inhibited
Accumulation (Bank 1)
- No sub type Contact dealer technical support
information
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : DTC P244A-96 IS STORED
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR OTHER DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check if any of the following DTCs are stored
P2456-00
P2226-62
P2452-95
P2453-00
Are any of the additional DTCs stored?

Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC Index and carry out the relevant repair procedure. Only after the repair, using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest
No
Proceed to next step
A2: EXHAUST PIPE AND JOINTS
1 Check all exhaust pipes and joints for leaks
2 Check for external damage to the diesel particulate filter metalwork
Are any of the exhaust pipes leaking, or is there external damage to the diesel particulate filter metalwork?
Yes
Repair leaking exhaust joints as required
Check and install a new diesel particulate filter as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
No
A3: DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER PRESSURE SENSOR PIPES
1 Check differential pressure sensor pipes for cracks, mis-routing or hoses crossed
Are any of the differential pressure sensor pipes cracked, mis-routed or hoses crossed?
Yes
Repair as required, clear DTC and retest
No
A4: HARNESS DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check wiring harness to the differential pressure sensor, include any inline connectors
Was the wiring harness to the differential pressure sensor damaged?
Yes
Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
No
A5: CONNECTOR INTEGRITY DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check differential pressure sensor connector for damage and terminal corrosion
Was the differential pressure sensor connector damaged or terminal corrosion present?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check connections are secure and wiring integrity. Repair as
No
A6: FUNCTIONAL CHECK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
NOTES:
The Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor measured voltage with the ignition on checks the sensor
output with no variation/pressure in the exhaust system, checking the Particulate Filter Differential Pressure
Sensor adaption is working. The measured voltages at engine idle and 4000 RPM will be considerably different
depending on the diesel particulate filter soot loading. The idle value tells us that the Particulate Filter
Differential Pressure Sensor is working if it goes up from the ignition on value. The 4000 RPM value tells us how
much soot is in the diesel particulate filter. A diesel particulate filter which is recoverable measures less than
1.5volts / 300mbar at 4000 RPM
If a new differential pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed, incorrectly routed, or any
differential pressure sensor circuit repairs carried out, the Engine Control Module must learn and store the new
differential pressure sensor offset value. The following conditions must be met to allow the differential
pressure sensor offset value to be learnt and stored: Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
DTCs from Engine Control Module, then monitor the datalogger signal 'sump oil temperature - measured'
ensuring a minimum of 50 degrees C is achieved. Start engine, run above 500RPM for 2 minutes, then a further
30 seconds at idle. Ensure the engine cooling fan is not running. Set vehicle in park and set ignition status to
off. Wait 30 seconds for the Engine Control Module to power down, learn and store differential pressure sensor
offset value. This process must be carried out six times, to allow a large negative offset value to adapt back to
0 Hpa
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) under the conditions described below. Allow the voltage to
stabilize before recording the value for approximately 7 seconds
Ignition is ON and engine speed is 0 RPM
Engine idle speed
Engine speed is 4000 RPM
Was datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value
approximately 0.75 Volts when ignition ON and engine speed is 0 RPM?Was datalogger signal - Particulate
Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value less than 1 Volt when engine speed at
idle?Was datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value
less than 1.5 Volt when engine speed at 4000 RPM?
(1volt = 100mbar, 1.5 volts = 300mbar at 4000RPM)
Yes
No
Check and install a new differential pressure sensor as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/componentUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest
NOTE: If a new differential pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed, incorrectly routed, or any
differential pressure sensor circuit repairs carried out, the Engine Control Module must learn and store the
new differential pressure sensor offset value. The following conditions must be met to allow the
differential pressure sensor offset value to be learnt and stored: Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear DTCs from Engine Control Module, then monitor the datalogger signal 'sump oil
temperature - measured' ensuring a minimum of 50 degrees C is achieved. Start engine, run above 500RPM
for 2 minutes, then a further 30 seconds at idle. Ensure the engine cooling fan is not running. Set vehicle
in park and set ignition status to off. Wait 30 seconds for the Engine Control Module to power down, learn
and store differential pressure sensor offset value. This process must be carried out six times, to allow a
large negative offset value to adapt back to 0 Hpa
A7: ACCELERATION SMOKE TEST
NOTE: Ensure the engine is at normal operating temperature
1 Increase the engine speed momentarily to 4000RPM and allow the engine to settle back to idle
2 Carry out above step 3 times
3 Carry out visual check for excessive black smoke leaving the tailpipe during each of the 3 tests
Is excessive black smoke visible leaving the tailpipe during each of the 3 tests?
Yes
Note: Only install a new diesel particulate filter if black smoke is visible leaving the tailpipe
Check and install a new diesel particulate filter as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/componentUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest. Return
vehicle to the customer
No
Check and install a new differential pressure sensor as requiredCarry out differential pressure sensor
adaption process
PINPOINT TEST B : RED WARNING MESSAGE DPF FULL VISIT DEALER IS DISPLAYED AND DTC P2463-00
IS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: VIN INFORMATION
1 Record the full vehicle identification number for the vehicle under test, as this information may later be
required by dealer technical support
Has the vehicle identification number been recorded?
Yes
Proceed to the next step
No
Record the vehicle identification number and proceed to the next step
B2: VEHICLE MILEAGE
1 Record the full mileage for the vehicle under test, as this information may later be required by dealer
technical support
Has the mileage been recorded?
Yes
No
Record the mileage and proceed to the next step
B3: VEHICLE SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
NOTE: Known software issue on PD software level where Lambda sensor adaption is not complete and the
assumed value of O2 in air is 0%, PE software level corrected to 21% This can lead to non recognition of good
regenerations of the diesel particulate filter
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, record the software part number for the Engine
Control Module (ECM)
Has the software part number been recorded? Is the software installed to the vehicle to the latest relevant
level?
Yes
No
Record the software part number and proceed to the next step
B4: RECORD ALL ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check Engine Control Module (ECM), for related DTCs
Are other DTCs logged?
Yes
No
Proceed to step 7
B5: DTC P2459-65 IS LOGGED
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, the logged mileage for DTCs can be seen by viewing
the snapshot data
Was DTC P2459-65 logged at a mileage up to 625 miles (1000KM) before the diagnostic trouble P2463-00 was
logged?
Yes
Suspect the customer has ignored the AMBER DPF FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK message. The customer
should be advised of this and the repair may become chargeable
Proceed to step 7
No
B6: OTHER RELATED ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) DTCS
1 Related Engine Control Module (ECM) DTCs other than P2459-65 and P2463-00 are logged
Are related Engine Control Module (ECM) DTCs other than P2459-65 and P2463-00 logged?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC Index. Repair as required. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
clear the DTCs and retest
No
Proceed to step 7
B7: DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER REGENERATION CYCLE
NOTE: Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system begin to perform a service regeneration cycle,
DO NOT drive the cleaning cycle. Record the grams of soot only
1 With the engine at running temperature check the pre catalyst oxygen sensor operation as follows:-
2 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signals - Oxygen Sensor Voltage -
(0xF424)
Idle vehicle and record, should be (0.9 ~ 1 volt)

Idle to 100% pedal, during acceleration record, should be 0 volts
Accelerate to 4500RPM (stationary) and close throttle, should read 1.2 ~ 1.3 volts
Does the pre catalyst oxygen sensor meets this criteria?

Yes
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor is operating correctlyNote: DO NOT carry out the adaption process on the pre
catalyst oxygen sensor, as this resets the adaption to 0Proceed to step 8
No
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor adaption cycle is required
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor adaption cycle is NOT possible while DTCs are loggedUsing the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, carry out FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS only and clear the
DTCsAfter completing FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS continue with pre catalyst oxygen sensor
adaption cycle as follows:-1. Idle vehicle for 10 minutes2. Set car in command shift 3rd gear3. Accelerate
to 3800RPM (where achievable) and overrun / coastdown without braking until revs drop below 1500 RPM4.
Repeat step 3 a further 3 times5. Check for any DTCs, if adaption failed a DTC will be evident and the
sensor will require replacement6. Check oxygen sensor adaption is now complete by returning to B7 item
27. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest. Return vehicle to the
customer
B8: SOOT ESTIMATOR IS ACCURATE AND THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR READING IS WORKING CORRECTLY
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB)
Record value with ignition ON

Idle engine record value
Hold engine speed at 4000RPM and record value
Note: 1volt = 100mbar, 1.5 volts = 300mbar at 4000RPM
Have the values been recorded for each of the conditions?
Yes
Proceed to step 9
No
Record values for each of the conditions and proceed to step 9
B9: EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURES
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signals
Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x03F5)

2 Hold engine speed at 2000RPM for 5 minutes and record values

(By doing this w e are trying to establish if the system can recognize heat in the exhaust during regeneration)
Are all of the exhaust gas temperature sensors showing reasonable values between 120°C and 400°C?
Yes
Proceed to step 10
No
Check and install new exhaust gas temperature sensors as required. Refer to the new module/component
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTCs and retest
B10: COMPARISON OF SOOT MASS IN DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER AND PARTICULATE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SENSOR VOLTAGE
NOTE: Using the results from steps 7 and 8 establish if the Soot Mass estimator and the differential pressure sensor are
aligned, in terms of their assessment of soot in the filter. If the soot mass is less than 54 grams the diesel particulate filter is
recoverable.
1 Using the results from step 7 check soot mass is less than 54 grams
2 Using the results from step 8 check particulate filter differential pressure sensor voltage at 4000RPM is
less than 1.5 volts (300mbar)
Is diesel particulate filter soot mass value less than 54 grams and particulate filter differential pressure sensor
voltage at 4000RPM less than 1.5 volts (300mbar)?
Yes
If the diesel particulate filter soot mass value is greater than 50 grams and the differential pressure
sensor voltage is between 0.5Volts and 1.1Volts then the diesel particulate filter is low on soot but has
not been driven to allow pressure correction of the diesel particulate filter, if other issue from the tests
performed are evident. Proceed to next step
No
If the diesel particulate filter soot mass value is greater than 50 grams and the differential pressure
sensor voltage greater than 1.5 volts then the diesel particulate filter has a high soot contentIf no other
issue from the tests performed are evident then the vehicle has a soot generated fault not detected by
DTCs. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and check for boost pressure leakage using
the manufacturer approved leak check toolContact dealer technical support for further advice
B11: SOOT MASS REDUCTION
1 With the vehicle fully up to temperature and in Park maintain 2500RPM for 10 minutes
2 Return to step 7, check diesel particulate filter soot mass value
Has the diesel particulate filter soot mass reduced from the original recorded value?
Yes
No
Proceed to step 13
B12: DRIVE VEHICLE
CAUTION: At all times during this procedure you should observe all relevant speed limits, laws, and
regulations
1 Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. The engine should NOT be left
idling to achieve working temperature. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty minutes, keeping the vehicle
at a constant speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and 120 km/h (75 mph). Keeping a constant speed
enables the diesel particulate filter to regenerate more efficiently. It is therefore recommended that cruise
control is used to achieve this, if possible
(Do NOT carry out diesel particulate filter service regeneration)
Is the diesel particulate filter soot mass less than 20 grams?

Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest. Return vehicle to the
customer
No
Contact dealer technical support with all of the recorded values from the above tests
B13: CARRY OUT FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS
WARNING: DO NOT carry out this process on any other occasion without first installing a new diesel
particulate filter
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ~ POWERTRAIN ~
1 carry out FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS
2 Carry out diesel particulate filter service regeneration. Record grams of soot following diesel particulate
filter service regeneration
Is the diesel particulate filter soot mass less than 20 grams?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and retest. Return vehicle to the
customer
No
Contact dealer technical support with all of the recorded values from the above tests
Diesel particulate filter regeneration procedure

If DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK appears in the message center, carry out the following procedure
CAUTIONS:
The regeneration procedure produces high temperatures in the diesel particulate filter. Heat can be felt radiating from
beneath the vehicle, which is normal and not a cause for concern. However, the vehicle should not be parked over combustible
material, particularly during dry weather. The heat generated could be sufficient to start a fire when in close proximity to
combustible material such as long dry grass, paper etc
At all times during this procedure you should observe all relevant speed limits, laws, and regulations
NOTES:
The ideal speed and conditions for regeneration are 100 km/h (62 mph ) ~ 120 km/h (75 mph), in Drive. Keeping a
constant speed enables the diesel particulate filter to regenerate more efficiently. It is therefore recommended that cruise
control is used to achieve this, if possible
When driving off-road during the regeneration process, greater accelerator pedal use may be required
1. Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. The engine should NOT be left idling to
achieve working temperature
2. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty minutes, keeping the vehicle at a constant speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and
120 km/h (75 mph)
3. If regeneration is successful the warning message will be extinguished, once the message is extinguished please keep
driving for 10 minutes to ensure that the diesel particulate filter is completely clean
4. If the message remains repeat the process
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation).
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System
For a detailed description of the Exhaust System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Visual Inspection
Leaks Fuses
Metal fatigue Wiring harnesses and connectors
Pipes Engine control module (ECM)
Catalytic converter Sensor(s)
Muffler(s) Actuator(s)
Joints
Mountings
Clearance around components
the next step
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

Noisy or leaking
exhaust Exhaust system/components Install new components as necessary. Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual
Lack of power
Air intake system fault Check the air intake system
Restricted exhaust system Check for a blocked catalytic converter or muffler, install new
Low fuel pressure components as necessary
Exhaust gas recirculation Check the fuel pressure
valve(s) fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and test
Turbocharger fault the exhaust gas recirculation valve(s)
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and test
the turbocharger(s)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Catalytic Converter
Removal
1. WARNINGS:
Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Installation).
3.

Torque: 11 Nm
Torque: 22 Nm
Torque: 15 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
8. Torque: 25 Nm
9. NOTES:

Discard the gasket.

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust system is supported with

suitable retaining straps.
Installation).
3.
4. CAUTION: Make a note of the connection orientation

of the high and low pressure hoses to the sensor ports.
Make sure the hoses are located to the correct sensor port
when installed. Failure to follow these instructions may
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7. CAUTION: Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Torque: 55 Nm
8. Torque: 55 Nm
NOTE: Apply lubricant to the exhaust mount to aid

installation.
Torque: 9 Nm
10. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation

2. If a new unit is installed, configure using the approved diagnostic tool.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System
General Equipment
Transmission jack
Removal
1. WARNINGS:
Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Make a note of the connection orientation

of the high and low pressure hoses to the sensor ports.
Make sure the hoses are located to the correct sensor port
when installed. Failure to follow these instructions may
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harness does not

catch.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7. Torque: 55 Nm

NOTES:
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Apply lubricant to the exhaust mount to aid

installation.
9. NOTE: Apply lubricant to the exhaust mount to aid
installation.
Torque: 9 Nm


technician.
With assistance, remove the exhaust system.
General Equipment: Transmission jack

Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Front Muffler
Removal
2. Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,

NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Rear Muffler
Removal

Torque: 55 Nm

NOTES:
Apply lubricant to the exhaust mount to aid

installation.
Installation

Fuel System - General Information -
Item Specification
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 5.0L 80 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 3.0L diesel 77 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 5.0L 74 liters
Fuel tank capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 3.0L diesel 68 liters
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - all vehicles 4 liters
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel Tank Draining TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
310-154
Adapter, Fuel drain
Draining
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).
2.
3.
4.
5. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this
Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
6. NOTE: A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to

the special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Using the special tool, drain the right-hand side of the fuel
tank.

8. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port

sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this
NOTE: An audible click can be heard when the fuel

tank draining port sealing cap is correctly installed.
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this
Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
10. NOTE: A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to

the special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Using the special tool, drain the left-hand side of the fuel
tank.

12. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port
sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this
NOTE: An audible click can be heard when the fuel

tank draining port sealing cap is correctly installed.

Fuel System - General Information - Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding TDV6
3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential
that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices
or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
This procedure must be carried out before the engine is attempted to be started, following removal or replacement of any
fuel system component involving fuel line intrusion. Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to the fuel injection
pump.
NOTE: This procedure is necessary if any low-pressure fuel system components are removed or replaced. These include
the fuel filter, fuel lines, fuel tank or fuel cooler.
1. NOTE: If the ignition is switched on for more than 10 seconds

without the engine starting the fuel pump will switch off to protect
itself.
Switch ignition on for 10 seconds. The fuel pump in the fuel tank will be
audible.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. NOTES:
Do not start the vehicle.

Allow 15 seconds between each ignition cycle (between each
ignition ON and ignition OFF) to allow the fuel tank pump to pump fuel
to the fuel injection pump correctly.
Switch the ignition on and off four times.
4. NOTE: The engine must be allowed to idle for two minutes to allow
a full system bleed.
Crank the engine until it starts and allow to idle.

Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Item Specification
Fuel system Mechanical - returnless
Fuel tank Multi layer plastic
High pressure fuel pump Located at rear of engine between the cylinder heads, belt driven from the camshafts
Low pressure fuel pump Located in the fuel tank
Fuel filter Located on the suspension top mount assembly
Fuel tank sender units Two - active and passive - passive sender unit is attached to the frame of the fuel pick up
tube and the active sender unt is attached to the fuel pump swirl pot
High pressure fuel pump 1650 bar - 23931.2 lbf/in²
maximum operating pressure
Low pressure fuel pump 0.5 bar - 7.25 lbf/in²
operating pressure
Capacities
Item Liters
Fuel tank capacity 77 (usable)
Fuel tank capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty 68
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty 4
Wheel and tire retaining nut 128 94 -
Fuel tank filler pipe retaining bolt 9 - 80
Fuel tank strap retaining bolt 35 26 -
Rear underbody air deflector retaining nut 7 - 70
Fuel cooler retaining nut 12 9 -
Fuel filter retaining bolt 3 - 27
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - Component
Location
3.0L V6 DIESEL COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Fuel return connection
2 Fuel delivery connection
3 Fuel damperVent pipe connection to fuel vent valve
4 Fuel filter
6 Fuel delivery pipe
7 Tank shield
8 Fuel pump module assembly
9 Fuel tank
10 Filler cap and lanyard
11 Fuel filler pipe
12 Spider trap
13 Vent pipe
14 Fuel return pipe
15 Fuel cooler
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - Overview
OVERVIEW
The major components of the 3.0L V6 diesel fuel system comprise a fuel tank, a fuel pump module, a fuel filter, a fuel cooler, a
fuel filler pipe and cap assembly and two fuel level sensors. The fuel system is a high pressure common rail system which uses
an engine mounted and driven high pressure pump to deliver a uniform level of pressure to the common fuel rails which supply
all 6 fuel injectors.
The fuel tank houses an internal fuel lift pump, located in the fuel pump module. The lift pump is employed to provide a
low-pressure supply to the common rail high pressure fuel system.
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. The sensors are a MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gauge.
A fuel cooler is located in the low pressure side of the system in the fuel return line and is a fuel to air type cooler.
The fuel tank breather system consists of a fuel vent valve and a fuel tank breather. No Roll Over Valves (ROV's) are fitted.
The fuel filter is a disposable canister type and is located at the rear of the left hand front inner wing turret.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Battery Junction Box (BJB) (Megafuse (250A))
4 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
7 Left Hand (LH) fuel tank level sensor
8 Right Hand (RH) fuel tank level sensor
9 Fuel lift pump
10 Restraints Control Module (RCM)
System Operation
Diesel fuel is drawn from the tank by the internal electric lift pump. The fuel pressure regulator located in the fuel pump
module assembly regulates the delivery pressure at approximately 0.5 bar to the transfer pump housed in the High Pressure
(HP) pump. A Volume Control Valve (VCV) governs the amount of fuel supplied to the HP pump.
The transfer and high pressure pump are driven directly by the engine. Due to the storage volume of the common rail, the
injection pressure will remain practically constant over the complete duration of the injection process.
The HP pump has a return pipe circuit which is separate from the injector return pipes.
Fuel Delivery Schematic Diagram

Item Description
1 Left Hand (LH) common rail
3 Right Hand (RH) common rail
4 Fuel rail and injector leak-off return line
5 High Pressure (HP) fuel pump
6 Thermostatic diverter valve
7 Fuel filter assembly
8 Fuel return/air bleed pipe
9 Low Pressure (LP) delivery pipe
10 Fuel cooler
11 Jet pump
12 Pressure regulator
13 Fuel pump module
14 Right Hand (RH) fuel level sensor
15 Left Hand (LH) fuel level sensor
FUEL TANK
Item Description
1 Fuel filler pipe connection and spit back flap
2 Vent pipe spider trap
3 Vent valve
4 Fuel return pipe
5 Fuel supply pipe
6 LH level sensor float
7 Suction pipe
8 LH level sensor
9 Fuel supply pipe connection
10 RH level sensor float
11 RH level sensor
12 Fuel pump module
13 Fuel return pipe connection
14 Fuel filler hose
The fuel tank is a saddle type tank, blow moulded from High Density PolyEthylene (HDPE). The tank is located forward of the
rear suspension and is mounted is mounted in a shield and secured to the vehicle using two metal straps. The tank is a sealed
unit with the only internal access being through the fuel pump module aperture on the top of the tank. The tank has a usable
capacity of 77 liters (16.9 gallons) (due to run-dry).
The fuel pump module flange has six pin internal and external connectors for the fuel pump and both fuel level sensors. A
quick release connector provides for the connection of the fuel feed and return pipes.
The flange is fitted with a locking ring and seal. The seal locates in a groove on the tank. The locking ring locates and clamps
on the encapsulated ring that is moulded into the fuel tank. The flange has a tag which locates in the top of the tank to
ensure correct orientation.
The fuel pump module is mounted on a bayonet lock ring which is welded inside the fuel tank. A carrier within the tank
provides for the mounting of the fuel suction port, vent valve and liquid vapor separator (LVS), a level sensor and a passive
drain.
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Item Description
1 Fuel supply connection
2 Fuel return/air bleed connection
4 Swirl pot
5 Fuel level sensor float
6 Fuel suction pipe connection from fuel suction port
7 Three way connection
8 Pressure regulating valve
The low pressure fuel lift pump is located in the fuel pump module. The lift pump is employed to provide a low pressure supply
at approximately 0.5 bar, to the common-rail high pressure fuel system and maintain an equal fuel level in both compartments
of the saddle tank.
The lift pump operation is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM), via the fuel pump relay located in the Rear Junction
Box (RJB). When the ignition is switched on, the fuel pump operates for 25 seconds to build up fuel pressure. As engine
cranking commences the fuel pump stops running until the engine starts. This function is employed to decrease load on the
battery.
A three way connection is located on the top of the module. Two outlets supply the jet pumps, the other outlet is the pressure
feed through the pressure regulating valve to the fuel delivery line. The module incorporates a jet pump which draws fuel from
the Left Hand (LH) side of the tank to the Right Hand (RH) side to be collected by the fuel pump module.
FUEL LEVEL SENSORS
Item Description
1 Fuel level sensor
2 Float arm
3 Float
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. One is mounted on the fuel pump module, the other is
mounted in a central position on the internal carrier within the tank. The sensors are a MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gauge. The sensor is sealed from the fuel
preventing contamination of the contacts, increasing reliability. The fuel level sensors are connected to an electrical connector
on the underside of the fuel pump module flange.
The sensor comprises a series of 51 film resistors mounted in an arc on a ceramic surface. The resistors are wired in series
with individual contacts. A soft magnetic foil with 51 flexible contacts is mounted a small distance above the film resistors. A
magnet, located below the ceramic surface, is attached to the sender unit float arm. As the float arm moves, the magnet
follows the same arc as the film resistors. The magnet pulls the flexible contacts onto the opposite film resistor contacts
forming an electrical circuit.
Item Description
1 Magnetic foil
2 Spacer
3 Ceramic surface
4 Magnet
5 Resistance film
The film resistors are arranged in a linear arc with resistance ranging from 51.2 to 992.11 Ohms. The electrical output signal is
proportional to the amount of fuel in the tank and the position of the float arm. The measured resistance is processed by the
instrument cluster to implement an anti-slosh function. This monitors the signal and updates the fuel gauge pointer position
at regular intervals, preventing constant pointer movement caused by fuel movement in the tank due to cornering or braking.
A warning lamp is incorporated in the instrument cluster and illuminates when the fuel level is low.
The fuel level sender signal is converted into a Controller Area Network (CAN) message by the Central Junction Box (CJB) as a
direct interpretation of the fuel tank contents in liters and is used by the ECM and the instrument cluster.
In the event that fuel is allowed to run too low, signals transmitted from the fuel level sensors initiate the fuel run-dry
strategy. The driver will be notified before the tank is run critically low on fuel. Although this is a simulated run-dry procedure,
it provides the symptoms of the vehicle running out of fuel and the driver will perceive it as such. The engine will stop when
there is approximately 4 liters (0.87 gallons) of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
JET PUMP
The fuel system incorporates twin jet pumps which are integral with the fuel pump module. One jet pump collects fuel from the
RH side of the tank, and the other draws additional fuel from the LH side of the tank through a suction line that is mounted on
the carrier. The jet pump operates on a venturi effect created by the fuel at pump output pressure passing through the jet
pump.
The prime function of the jet pump is to collect fuel from the LH side of the tank and transfer it into the fuel pump module
swirl pot on the RH side of the tank. The jet pump feature ensures that fuel is drained from the LH side of the tank before fuel
run-out on the RH side of the tank.
FUEL LEVEL VENT VALVE

The fuel level vent valve is located in the upper half of the tank and is connected into a separator that vents via the tank
breather. The main purpose of the fuel level vent valve is to control the fill volume of the tank. During filling air, trapped inside
the tank and a small amount of vapor is passed via the fuel level vent valve to the tank breather. The air and vapor mix then
vents to atmosphere through the breather. During filling, when the tank reaches its full level, the fuel level vent valve closes
and prevents air/vapor passing through to the tank breather. The resulting back pressure causes refueling to stop
automatically.
The fuel level vent valve is always open when the fuel tank is below full, providing an unrestricted air/vapor outlet to the tank
breather.
FUEL FILTER
Item Description
1 Fuel return from engine
2 Fuel feed to HP common-rail fuel pump
3 Fuel damper
4 Fuel supply connection
5 Fuel return connection
6 Water in fuel sensor (hidden)
7 Air bleed/fuel return to fuel tank
8 Fuel return to under vehicle cooler
9 Fuel supply from fuel tank and under vehicle cooler
10 Fuel diverter connection
11 Air bleed/fuel return to fuel tank connection
The fuel filter is a disposable canister type.
To prevent diesel waxing in cold conditions and to aid warm-up, a temperature sensitive regulating valve incorporated in the
fuel filter housing, diverts a portion of the warm fuel returning from the engine into the fuel filter.
The regulating valve commences closing at 30° C (86° F) and fully closes at 50° C (122° F). When the valve is closed the
returning fuel is diverted to the fuel filter via the under vehicle fuel cooler to maintain an optimum fuel temperature.
The filter has an air bleed return to the fuel tank which returns excess air and fuel to the tank.
The filter canister incorporates a chamber for collecting moisture. The moisture contained in the diesel fuel collects on the
internal filter element and forms droplets, which fall into the moisture chamber. The filter is fitted with a water in fuel sensor
to raise a warning that the maximum recommended level of water in the filter has been reached.
FUEL COOLER
Item Description
1 Fuel return from engine
2 Fuel feed outlet
3 Fuel cooler (low pressure side – under vehicle)
The low-pressure-side fuel cooler is situated under the vehicle floorpan, below the LH front seat.
The cooler is fuel to air cooled. Fuel flow through the underfloor cooler is controlled by the fuel filter.
FUEL FILLER PIPE
Item Description
1 Wide bore filler neck
2 Fuel cap
3 Fuel cap lanyard
4 Fuel filler pipe
5 Hose clamp
6 Fuel filler hose
7 Hose connection with fuel tank inlet check valve
The stainless steel filler neck has a wide bore neck specially designed to reduce diesel frothing while the fuel tank is being
replenished. The filler pipe is connected at its lower end by a hose which is secured to the pipe with a worm drive clamp. The
opposite end of the hose is connected to the fuel tank inlet check valve and secured with another worm drive clamp.
The filler head incorporates the Fuel Guard system to prevent accidental filling of the tank with petrol (gasoline).
Fuel Guard System
Item Description
1 Filler head
2 Flap
3 Reset slots
4 Spigots
5 Reset tool
6 Spring
The fuel guard comprises a mechanically operated flap which is triggered when the smaller diameter filler nozzle tube, used on
petrol (gasoline) pumps, is inserted in the filler neck. The flap is actuated and blocks the sensor port on the fuel pump nozzle,
causing it to automatically switch off. The flap is locked in this position by a latch mechanism.
A reset tool is provided and stored in the luggage compartment. The tool is used to reset the fuel guard device if triggered and
release the latch. Two spigots on the tool locate in slots in the filler neck which release a latch and the flap is opened by its
own spring. The tool is located in the filler neck and once the two spigots on the tool are located in the slots it can be pulled
outwards, releasing a latch and allowing the flap to be opened by its own spring pressure. The tool is stored on the battery
mounting clamp.
The flap is colored yellow so that it is clearly visible when activated and has a 'Handbook' symbol on it.
A diesel fuel pump nozzle will not activate the fuel guard because the nozzle stops against two molded lugs. However, if an
unleaded gasoline pump nozzle is inserted into the housing, its smaller diameter allows it to pass the two molded lugs. The
nozzle strikes two pins on the inside of the filler housing which move forward. This movement rotates the shut-off flap which is
then held in place when the nozzle is removed by the latch mechanism.
NOTE: Russian markets do not use the fuel guard system and are fitted with a conventional filler neck.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines
For a detailed description of the fuel tank and lines and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),

Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
Do NOT carry out any work on the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as
high as 2000 bar (29,008 lb/in²). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Eye protection must be worn at all times when working on or near any fuel related components. Failure to follow this
precautions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. This should be done after the engine has
been run, but with the engine switched OFF. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow this instruction may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention. Failure to follow
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical
attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting any part of the system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around
components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
The fuel pipes between the injectors and the rail must be discarded after each use, and new pipes installed. Failure to
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs
to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and dust-free as possible. Areas in
which work on clutches, brakes or where welding or machining are carried out are not suitable in view of the risk of
contamination to the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material. Failure to follow this
Make sure that any protective gloves worn are new and are of the non-powdered latex type. Failure to follow this
Make sure that clean, non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose it's bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid prior to starting work on the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a steel-topped work bench and cover it with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
When measuring fuel sender resistance values with a multimeter, it is critical to use the correct multimeter setting. The
multimeter should not be on the 'Auto' setting and must be set to 'Manual'. This will help prevent incorrect diagnosis and
unnecessary replacement of fuel senders. If the multimeter range is set at 'Auto' then, during a sweep of the sender from 50
Ohms to 998 Ohms, the multimeter has to change its measurement range. For approximately 1 second, during the range switch
over point, the multimeter display indicates an open circuit. This can lead to a mis-diagnosis of a fuel sender fault.
Visual Inspection
Low/contaminated fuel Fuses

Fuel supply/return line(s) Links
Fuel tank and filler pipe Relays
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel filler cap Sensor(s)
Fuel filter Engine control module (ECM)
Push connect fittings Central Junction Box (CJB)
Fuel pump Restraints Control Module (RCM)
the next step
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but
does not start Low/contaminated Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1L (2.11
fuel pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Air leakage there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
Fuel pump module the fuel
fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Low pressure fuel Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for
system fault leaks/damage
Blocked fuel filter Check the fuel filter
Crankshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CKP sensor circuit
(CKP) sensor for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Difficult to start
Glow plug system Check the glow plug circuits
fault (very cold Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1L (2.11
conditions) pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Low/contaminated there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
fuel the fuel
Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation, check the low pressure fuel
fault system for leaks/damage
Low pressure fuel Check the intake air system for leaks
system fault Check the fuel filter
Air leakage Check the EGR valves
Blocked fuel filter
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve fault
Fuel Gauge, Resistance, Voltage And Fuel Tank Level Comparison Chart
Use the chart to determine fuel tank fuel volume versus fuel gauge reading to determine the fuel level symptom and fault.
NOTES:
The vehicle must be parked on a level surface to obtain an accurate fuel level gauge reading.
The actual values may vary, according to the quantity of fuel in the left and right sides of the fuel tank.
Volume, Resistance and Voltage Values

Fuel Level Sensor "pump/active/A" (0xD908) Fuel Level Sensor "eject/passive/B"
Gauge Fill Volume - Right side (0xD907) - Left side
Reading (L) Resistance (Ω) Voltage (V) Resistance (Ω) Voltage (V)
0 51.90 0.37 51.40 0.37
1 51.90 0.37 51.40 0.37
2 51.90 0.37 51.40 0.37
3 76.30 0.53 51.40 0.37
4 84.90 0.58 51.40 0.37
Engine stop 5 102.70 0.68 51.40 0.37
6 111.90 0.74 51.40 0.37
7 121.70 0.79 51.40 0.37
8 140.60 0.89 51.40 0.37
Empty 9 150.90 0.94 51.40 0.37
10 161.60 1.00 51.40 0.37
12 194.40 1.15 51.40 0.37
14 217.90 1.26 51.40 0.37
16 242.50 1.36 51.40 0.37
18 269.00 1.47 51.40 0.37
20 298.80 1.58 51.40 0.37
21 312.70 1.63 51.40 0.37
22 342.60 1.73 51.40 0.37
23 344.50 1.73 51.40 0.37
24 374.80 1.83 51.40 0.37
25 391.60 1.88 51.40 0.37
26 409.10 1.93 51.40 0.37
¼ 28 446.30 2.04 51.40 0.37
30 485.40 2.14 51.40 0.37
32 551.40 2.30 51.40 0.37
34 653.90 2.51 51.40 0.37
36 803.80 2.77 51.40 0.37
38 992.90 3.02 51.40 0.37
40 992.90 3.02 51.40 0.37
42 992.90 3.02 51.40 0.37
44 992.90 3.02 59.60 0.42
½ 46 992.90 3.02 85.10 0.58
48 992.90 3.02 120.60 0.78
50 992.90 3.02 141.20 0.89
52 992.90 3.02 171.40 1.05
54 992.90 3.02 193.90 1.15
56 992.90 3.02 229.40 1.31
58 992.90 3.02 255.00 1.41
60 992.90 3.02 295.50 1.57
62 992.90 3.02 325.80 1.67
63 992.90 3.02 341.10 1.72
¾ 64 992.90 3.02 357.30 1.78
66 992.90 3.02 391.10 1.88
68 992.90 3.02 427.40 1.99
70 992.90 3.02 465.30 2.09
72 992.90 3.02 527.40 2.24
74 992.90 3.02 573.70 2.35
Full 76 992.90 3.02 651.20 2.50
78 992.90 3.02 737.30 2.66
80 992.90 3.02 836.80 2.82
82 992.90 3.02 990.90 3.02
83 992.90 3.02 990.90 3.02
DTC Index
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Cooler
Removal
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent

cloth or a container to collect the fluid.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Torque: 12 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
2. Refer to: Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-00
Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Filter
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the fuel filter is correctly

aligned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage
to the vehicle.
NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Level Sender
Removal
2. Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines -
3.
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Special Tool(s)
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
Removal
3.
4.
5.
contamination.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
8. NOTE: Note the position of the locating tang.

10. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during
this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are
taken to prevent fire and explosion.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank

level sensor float and arm.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank level sensor float and
arm.
Make sure that the fuel pump and sender unit are correctly
installed on to the retaining bayonet bracket in the fuel tank.
Make sure the fuel tank level sensor arm moves from the full, to
the empty position freely and all the pipes are clear of it's path.
NOTES:
Make sure the locating tang is installed in the correct position.

Remove and discard all blanking caps.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank
Special Tool(s)
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
Removal
5.
6.
7.

contamination.
10.
11. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during
this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are
taken to prevent fire and explosion.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
12. NOTES:
With assistance remove the component.

Torque: 35 Nm

14.

17. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank
level sensor float and arm.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank level sensor float and
arm.
Make sure that the fuel pump and sender unit are correctly
installed on to the retaining bayonet bracket in the fuel tank.
Make sure the fuel tank level sensor arm moves from the full, to
the empty position freely and all the pipes are clear of it's path.
NOTES:
Make sure the locating tang is installed in the correct position.
Remove and discard all blanking caps.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Removal
4. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-00 Fuel System -
5. Torque: 128 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 3 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
9. Torque: 9 Nm
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
Installation

Speed Control -
Item Specification
Speed control sensor vertical alignment 90° ± 0.5°

Speed control module retaining nuts 5 - 44
Speed control sensor alignment bolt lock nut 5 - 44
Speed control sensor bracket reataining bolts 9 - 79
Speed control sensor retaning bolts 5 - 44
Speed Control - Speed Control TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Component Location
Item Description
3 Clock spring
4 Speed control switches
7 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
9 Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
10 Anti-lock Brake system (ABS) module
Speed Control - Speed Control TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Overview
OVERVIEW
There are two variants of speed control available, a standard system and an adaptive system. The standard system maintains
a set speed selected by the driver until operation is suspended or cancelled by a further input from the driver and is controlled
by the ECM (engine control module). The adaptive system includes the same functionality as the standard system, but also
has the ability to:
Reduce vehicle speed, to less than the set speed, in order to maintain a selected distance behind a slower moving
vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle back to the set speed, once the way ahead is clear, after reducing the set speed because of a
slower moving vehicle
Alert the driver when the vehicle comes within a given distance of a slower moving vehicle.
Speed Control
The standard speed control system has the following components:
A SET + switch
A - switch
A RESUME switch
A CANCEL switch
The speed control system also uses:
The ECM
The brake switch
The APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
Adaptive Speed Control
The adaptive speed control (also known as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan
the road ahead, looking for objects that are moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed
control system will monitor the time gap between the host and the target vehicles. When that gap falls below a set driver
selected level, the speed control system will intervene, slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/or applying the
brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The driver can chose between four gap settings. The chosen setting is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
Vehicles in the oncoming lane

Stationary vehicles
Pedestrians
Vehicles not in the same lane.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving at a minimum speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) and a maximum speed
of 112 mph (180 km/h). Adaptive speed control only functions when a set speed is entered in standard cruise control mode.
The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it detects a target vehicle, and then only if the
minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The adaptive speed control system incorporates the following components in addition to those listed for standard speed
control:
An adaptive speed control radar sensor

Steering wheel gap increase and decrease control switches
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) control module.
Speed Control - Speed Control TDV6 3.0L Diesel - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus; U =
Private CAN bus
Item Description
4 Speed control switches
5 Clock spring
7 Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
9 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
10 Diagnostic socket
12 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
System Operation
SPEED CONTROL
The speed control system is integrated with the engine management system and uses fueling intervention to automatically
maintain a set vehicle speed. Once engaged, the system can also be used to accelerate the vehicle without using the
accelerator pedal. The speed control system comprises the following components:
'+' and '-' (set/accelerate and decelerate) steering wheel switches

Resume switch
Cancel switch
Clock spring
Speed control warning indicator.
The speed control system also uses inputs from the brake pedal switch, the APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor, the ECM
(engine control module) and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.
The speed control is operated by the driver using only the steering wheel switches. When speed control is active, the ECM
regulates the PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the fuel injectors to adjust the fuel supply as required to maintain the
set speed.
During speed control operation, the ECM controls vehicle speed by adjusting fuel injection duration and timing. When the
accelerator pedal is pressed with speed control active, the ECM outputs a calculated throttle angle signal in place of the actual
throttle angle signals produced by the APP sensor. The calculated throttle angle is derived from fuel demand based on the
torque required to overcome the rolling resistance (vehicle motion drag).
The minimum set speed for speed control is 20 mph (32 (km/h). Speed control is automatically suspended if the following
conditions apply:
Vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h).

The brake pedal is pressed.
The cancel button is pressed.
Neutral, park or reverse gear is selected.
The difference between actual speed and the set speed is too great.
If the accelerator pedal is used to accelerate beyond the set speed for too long (more than 5 minutes).
Stability control system intervention
System error causes shut-off.
There are 4 standard speed control switches:
Set speed + accelerate switch

Decelerate - switch
Cancel switch
Resume switch.
The standard speed control switches are located on the RH (right-hand) side of the steering wheel. The switches are resistive
ladder type switches which vary the resistance of a voltage signal sent to them. The resistive ladder is wired to a control
module within the switch assembly, the control module is a LIN node which transmits the data to the CJB (central junction
box) which passes the data onto the high speed CAN bus. In the event of the ECMlogging a cruise switch fault DTC (diagnostic
trouble code), fault finding should start at the switch assembly and clockspring. The ECM diagnostic detects that the switch
assembly control module hasn't provided an updated live counter.
Engage Speed Control
Speed control is engaged by pressing the set speed accelerate + switch. Once engaged the speed can be increased by one of 3
methods:
Press and hold the set speed accelerate + switch which will cause the vehicle to accelerate. When the switch is
released the attained speed will be set as the cruise speed.
Repeatedly pressing the set speed accelerate + switch. Each press increases the vehicle speed by 1 mph (2 km/h).
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. Once the required speed is reached, a single press of the set
speed accelerate + switch will set the cruise speed.
When the target speed has been set, a green marker will appear on the outer circumference of the speedometer in the
instrument cluster, adjacent to the set speed. If the set speed is changed the marker will move accordingly. If the speed
control is cancelled the marker changes to a gray color until the resume switch is pressed to re-engage speed control, when it
changes back to a green color.
Reduce Cruising Speed
The set speed can be reduced by pressing and holding the decelerate - switch until the required speed is reached. When the
switch is released the speed is reset at that value. The set speed can be reduced incrementally by pressing and releasing the
decelerate - switch. Each press will reduce the speed by 1 mph (2 km/h). Adaptive speed control braking can be induced by
using the SET – switch to decelerate the vehicle.
Set Speed Adjustment
Speed control adjustment is limited around the current vehicle speed. This means speed adjustment won't occur when
resuming or if the vehicle speed is noticeably different to set speed. This is noticeable when resuming speed control and a
large difference exists between the set speed and the current speed. The driver can set a new speed, but can't adjust the old
speed.
Suspend Speed control
Suspending speed control means speed control has been deactivated without loss of the memory speed. In all suspend events
the memory speed is maintained. Speed control can be suspended in a number of ways, as described in the general
description.
A single press of the RESUME switch will resume speed control at the previously set speed.
NOTE: In the event that a memory speed has been lost during a driving cycle, confirm with the customer if the "Cruise
Not Available" message was observed. Loss of memory speed implies a fault has occurred. The massage 'Cruise Not Available'
may only be displayed on demand for some errors, so speed control needs to be requested via the SET + switch to drive the
message.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL

The adaptive speed control system utilises the following components:
Adaptive speed control sensor

Adaptive speed control module
Steering wheel control switches
ECM
Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
ABS module and pump
Adaptive speed control warning indicator (in the instrument cluster)
Forward alert warning indicator.
The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system will
intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The
driver can chose between four gap settings, 1, 1.4, 1.8 and 2.2 seconds.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
Vehicles in the oncoming lane

Stationary vehicles
Pedestrians
Vehicles not in the same lane
Motorcycles.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving. Adaptive speed control only functions when a set speed is
entered via the operation of the SET + switch. The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it
detects a target vehicle, and then only if the minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The ECM, electric throttle and throttle control are unchanged from those used for non adaptive speed control variants.
With the ignition switched ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until
the vehicle is in motion.
Radar Sensing
The adaptive speed control system is based on the use of a front mounted radar sensor. The sensor transmits a 1.5° wide
beam forward of the vehicle and detects the returning signals reflected off other vehicles and objects ahead.
The 1.5° wide radar beam is mechanically scanned at a rate of 10 sweeps/second across a total arc of 15° centered on the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The radar operates at millimetric wavelengths (76 - 77 GHz) and transmits a frequency
modulated continuous wave signal at a relatively low power level (no high power pulses).
With the ignition switched ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until
the vehicle is in motion.
The radar sensor detects three primary parameters of objects within the scanned arc. These are:
Range
Relative velocity
Angle.
Range
The radar sensor detects the presence and ranges of different vehicles and objects within the scanned arc up to a distance of
approximately 130 meters (426.5 feet). The transmitted signal frequency changes continuously in a cyclic pattern (modulation).
This means that, in the time taken for the signal wave front, to travel to and from a target vehicle (or other object), the
transmission frequency will have changed. The difference between the received signal frequency and the new transmission
frequency is proportional to the distance between the transmitting vehicle and the target vehicle.
Relative Velocity
When the signal is reflected off a vehicle moving at a different speed (opening or closing the gap) an effect known as the
'Doppler Shift' causes an extra frequency modulation to be imposed on the signal. This doppler frequency varies with the
relative speed of the vehicle being followed, enabling the system to differentiate between vehicles traveling at different
speeds and also between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
Angle
Using a narrow angle beam to scan horizontally enables the system to distinguish between vehicles in different lanes and
between vehicles and roadside objects.
Follow Mode
In follow mode a set speed is selected in the normal speed control manner and this speed is maintained until a slower vehicle
is encountered in the lane ahead. When the vehicle ahead comes within the effective range of the radar sensor, the system
identifies it as a target vehicle and an icon is illuminated on the instrument cluster to indicate that the system is in "follow
mode". When the distance between the two vehicles closes to a set time gap, the adaptive speed control system closes the
throttle and if necessary applies the brakes to maintain the set time gap. Follow mode is effectively a closed loop system. If
several vehicles are ahead, the closest vehicle is chosen as the target to follow. If the target vehicle moves out of radar range,
or if either vehicle changes lane or drops below the minimum operating speed, the system exits follow mode and the follow
mode icon is extinguished. The adaptive speed control system will only raise its speed to the originally set speed, it will not
accelerate past this speed to maintain a time gap.
Driver operation of the foot brake or control switches will immediately cancel adaptive speed control. A 'cruise cancelled'
message will be displayed to the driver in the message center.
When the vehicle is in follow mode, the follow mode warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster. The gap setting
will be displayed at the time of the set event, NOT on the detection of every target, this is to prevent overwriting the
tachometer in the instrument cluster everytime a target is detected.
Follow Mode Warning Indicator
Forward Alert
Limited detection and warning of vehicles ahead is provided during adaptive cruise control operation by the forward alert
warning. The enhanced forward alert warning provides additional warnings when the adaptive cruise control is not engaged. If
a vehicle is detected close ahead, a warning tone will be emitted and a 'Forward Alert' message will be displayed. Throttle and
braking intervention is NOT applied
The forward alert system is active when the warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated. Forward alert does not
initiate any action, the driver must take the appropriate action when the message is displayed. The system monitors driver
intervention and may not issue the warning if the driver has taken the appropriate action (braking, steering or indicating) early
enough.
Forward Alert Warning Indicator
The forward alert system uses the adaptive speed control system components. Forward alert is turned on and off
independently of adaptive speed control, via the instrument cluster menu. Forward alert will notify the driver by means of a
chime, and warning indicator in the instrument cluster and indication in the message center, when a target vehicle comes into
range. The system will NOT use throttle or brake intervention to slow the vehicle.
When forward alert is selected on or off, the instrument cluster sends the forward alert information to the adaptive speed
control module on the CAN bus. When a forward alert sensitivity adjustment is made using the time gap increase/decrease
switches on the RH side of the steering wheel. The switches are connected via fly leads to the clockspring and pass a signal a
LIN bus signal, via the clockspring to the CJB. The CJB routes the selected sensitivity adjustment signals to the ECM on the
high speed CAN bus.
NOTE: This system is intended as a driver aid and should be used as such. The system is NOT a collision warning or
avoidance device.
The system sensitivity can be adjusted in the same manner as the Adaptive Speed Control, via the steering wheel mounted
switches. Each adjustment is accompanied by a message in the message center.
SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS
The adaptive speed control system is only intended to provide enhanced speed control as described above in certain restricted
conditions. The following points should be noted:
Automatic braking is limited to approximately 30% of full pressure (0.3G deceleration) and is intended to provide a
smooth, gradual deceleration in follow mode conditions. Harsh braking by the target vehicle or following the target
vehicle down to very low speeds or to a halt will require the driver to intervene and override the brakes. A 'driver
intervene' message will be displayed in the message center accompanied with an audible chime.
While the radar sensor detects moving and stationary targets for assessment of the environment ahead, the system
does not react to or provide any control in situations other than follow mode conditions. Stationary or slow moving
vehicles (below 10 km/h), pedestrians, objects on the road and oncoming vehicles in the same lane are not recognized.
WARNING: It must be emphasized that the adaptive speed control system is not a collision warning or avoidance system
and that, other than the limited conditions of follow mode, driver intervention will be necessary to control the vehicle speed.
The following illustration shows circumstances where the adaptive cruise control system may brake late or unexpectedly. The
driver is required to intervene in these situations.
Item Description
1 Driving on a different line to the vehicle in front.
2 Vehicles that merge into the same lane are only detected once they have moved fully into the lane.
3 On bends in the road there can be issues with detection of the vehicle in front when going into and coming out of a
bend.
In follow mode, some situations may cause target ambiguities for the detection system. These situations include:
The nearby presence of a third vehicle when driving on a line slightly offset to the target vehicle.
Vehicles edging into the lane ahead which are not detected by the system until they have moved into the radar beam.
On the approach to, or exit from a bend, a target vehicle may be lost or a new target acquired as vehicles ahead change their
angular position with respect to the radar sensor. On a straight road, if the sensing vehicle is in follow mode below its selected
set speed, losing the target vehicle will cause the sensing vehicle to accelerate to this set speed. This acceleration is
undesirable either on, or entering a bend when the target is suddenly lost, and in this situation the system inhibits the
resumption of the set speed.
The speed control system compares vehicle speed data from the ABS system with the relative speed of an external object as
detected by the radar sensor to ascertain whether the object is stationary or not.
NOTE: If tires are fitted which are different in diameter from those specified for the vehicle, the vehicle speed calculated
by the ABS will not be the true road speed. This situation may cause stationary objects to be falsely identified as moving
vehicles and result in automatic deceleration on a clear road.
BRAKE SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
Electronic Brake Prefill
Electronic brake prefill senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure build-up of approximately 3
to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with adaptive speed control.
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (signal received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it controls the
ABSHCU (hydraulic control unit) to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Emergency Brake Assist
EBA (emergency brake assist) assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied
braking effort. The ABS module activates EBA when:
The brake pedal is rapidly pressed

The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure exceeds the predetermined
limit, the ABS module activates emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist
Advanced EBA uses adaptive speed control technology to provide pre-emptive control when sudden braking is required. The
system is an enhancement of electronic brake prefill and emergency brake assist. The system can sense the possibility of a
collision before the driver reacts through the brake pedal and can prepare the braking process even before the driver reacts and
moves to the brake pedal, thus when the driver takes action, the braking system can respond to emergency braking more
promptly, potentially avoiding a collision entirely, or mitigating the effects if a collision is inevitable. The system activates if
the risk of collision increases after the forward alert warning is issued.
After a forward alert warning is displayed, the brakes are automatically applied gently in preparation for rapid braking and the
EBA activation threshold is lowered. If the brake pedal is then pressed quickly then braking is fully implemented by the
emergency brake assist system, even if the pressure on the brake pedal is light.
The system operates using signals from the adaptive speed control module, based on proximity to and closing speed to the
vehicle in front by monitoring forward traffic and obstructions with the radar sensor used by adaptive speed control. Through
the positive brake-line pressure available from the HCU, it will apply a pre-charge of brake pressure even before the driver
reacts. Thresholds for the entry to EBA are reduced so that the system functions earlier than it would without the data from
the radar sensor.
Advanced EBA is available at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h) and will function even when forward alert and adaptive speed
control are switched off.
Principle of Operation - Advanced Emergency Brake Assist
The radar sensor detects vehicles ahead that are moving in the same direction as the host vehicle. In the event of a collision
risk, and 'Forward Alert' is on, the driver is initially alerted by a visual and audible warning signal. If the risk of collision
increases after the warning, advanced EBA maybe activated. The advanced EBA prepares the brake system for rapid braking
with the brakes being applied gently. If the brake pedal is depressed quickly then braking is implemented with full brake
function, even if the force on the pedal is light.
The forward alert and Advanced EBA system response to an imminent rear-end collision with another moving vehicle reacts in
the following order:
Forward alert
- Collision warning - audible and visual (driver can turn this function off)
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist
- 1st stage precharge - If a collision is judged to be credible and the driver takes no action then Advanced EBA
will prepare the brake system by requesting a fixed precharge brake pressure (approximately 3 bar). Reduction of
EBA activation threshold provides a faster entry to the full EBA function.
- 2nd stage precharge - If a collision is judged to be imminent and the driver shows an intent to respond to the
threat, for example; quick release of the throttle, Advanced EBA will request that the brake system applies a
fixed brake pressure (approximately10 bar).
NOTE: If the throttle is already released, precharge 1 and 2 occurs simultaneously (the system moves directly to
precharge level 2).
Item Description
A Host vehicle
B Target vehicle
1 Forward alert warning: Visual and audible warning
2 Brake support: 1st stage pre-charge (stop lamps on) Advanced EBA
3 Brake support: 2nd stage pre-charge (throttle release) Advanced EBA
EBA is designed to detect an emergency braking situation giving an automatic increase in vehicle deceleration, up to ABS
levels. This quick, increase, in braking deceleration assists the 'average' driver to achieve a reduced stopping distance.
Advanced EBA enhances the performance of EBA. When a critical approach to forward vehicles is detected Advanced EBA
requests a pre-charge pressure to the brake system and increases the sensitivity for activation of EBA.
The graph below shows a comparison of 'normal' braking, EBA and Advanced EBA brake pressure profiles.
Item Description
A Percent total brake force
B Time
1 Conventional brake system without EBA
2 Conventional brake system with EBA (higher activation threshold based on low level of threat, or normal brake assist
sensitivity)
3 Advanced EBA (lower activation threshold based on high level of threat and higher brake assist sensitivity)
NOTES:
The system:
Only operates at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h)

Responds only to vehicles moving in the same direction as the host vehicle
Is designed to help reduce the crash speed and damage in certain rear-end collisions only
Is not a collision avoidance system and is not a substitute for safe and attentive driving
Effectiveness depends on many factors, such as speed, driver input, and road conditions
DOES NOT WARN FOR STATIONARY OR SLOW MOVING VEHICLES
The driver should always keep a safe following distance.
The stop lamps will always be activated on application of the service brakes including all electronic braking interventions
(pre-charge, brake assist etc.).
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist - Malfunction Warnings
If the Advanced EBA system is in a fault condition for five consecutive ignition cycles the 'Forward Alert Not Available' fault
message will be permanently displayed.
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES
Item Description
1 Set speed + switch (Engage speed control/increase speed)
2 Resume (RES) (Resume previous set speed)
3 Set speed - switch (Decrease speed)
4 Time gap decrease switch (Vehicles with adaptive speed control only)
5 Cancel (CAN) (Disengage speed control)
6 Time gap increase switch (Vehicles with adaptive speed control only)
The speed control switches are located on the RH side of the steering wheel. The switches are connected via fly leads to the
clock spring. The speed control switches are resistive ladder type switches which vary the resistance of a 5 volt signal sent to
them. The signal is returned along a LIN bus, via the clockspring to the CJB. The CJB routes the control signals to the ECM on
the high speed CAN bus.
Speed control is engaged by pressing the set speed switch (+). Once engaged the speed can be varied by the set speed
adjustment switches (+ or -). Each press of the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the set speed in steps of 1
mph (2 kph).
Gap Setting Display Options
Item Description
1 Gap setting = 1 second
2 Gap setting = 1.4 seconds
The gap settings are changed using the time gap increase and decrease switches which are located on the RH side of the
steering wheel. The switches are connected via fly leads to the clock spring. The gap switches are resistive ladder type
switches which vary the resistance of a 5 volt signal sent to them. The signal is returned along a LIN bus, via the clockspring
to the CJB. The CJB routes the selected gap setting signals to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
The time gap will return to the default gap (the third setting) each time the ignition is cycled.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL MODULE
The adaptive speed control module is located on the drivers side at the bottom of the A pillar. The control module is connected
to the other vehicle systems via the high speed CAN bus. Signals from the adaptive speed control forward looking radar sensor
are received on a dedicated CAN bus between the two modules.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL RADAR SENSOR
The adaptive speed control radar sensor is located in the front bumper, on the RH side above the radiator grill behind the
bumper cover. The sensor is connected to the adaptive speed control module via a private CAN bus. If the unit is replaced in
service the unit must be re-aligned vertically. Horizontal alignment is achieved by putting the sensor in service mode using an
approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
The vehicle is then driven for a short period while the sensor calibrates itself. Calibration is complete when the 'follow' icon in
the instrument cluster stops flashing.
Service Alignment Process
The service alignment process measures the path of stationary targets such as streetlights, railings, road signs, parked
vehicles etc., and uses this data to correct for radar misalignment. Alignment will complete more quickly if more suitable
targets are seen. The following recommendations should be followed:
Vehicle speed must be above 30mph (48kph)

Attempt to keep the vehicle speed about the same. The process will take longer to complete if the speed varies too
much.
Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like lamp posts, railings, street signs or parked vehicles. Use an inside
or outside lane
Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary targets from the radar, a time gap of at least 2 seconds is
recommended
A straighter road will produce a quicker and better result, although the process will still operate on a curved road
The time the module takes to align will vary, depending on the route, speed, number of targets, and the individual
module
SPEED CONTROL WARNING INDICATORS
Item Description
1 Adaptive speed control/follow mode active (Amber)
2 Speed control active (Green)
3 Forward Alert warning indicator (Green)
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL - MALFUNCTION WARNINGS

If a malfunction occurs during operation of the system in adaptive speed control or follow modes, the adaptive speed control
system will switch off and cannot be used until the fault is cleared. The message 'Driver Intervene' appears briefly and is then
replaced by the message 'Cruise Not Available'. If a malfunction of the adaptive speed control, or any related system occurs at
any other time, the message 'Cruise Not Available' will be displayed. It will not be possible to activate the adaptive speed
control system in any mode.
Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the radar sensor or cover may inhibit adaptive speed control operation. Fitting of a
vehicle front protector or metallised badges may also affect adaptive speed control operation. The adaptive speed control
system relies on its radar to detect objects and constantly scans ahead. If the radar detects no vehicles ahead in adaptive
speed control or follow mode, then the adaptive speed control will be deactivated, the audible alarm sounds and the message
'Driver Intervene' displays briefly. The message 'ACC Sensor Blocked' follows the previous message. The same messages may
also be displayed while driving on open roads with few objects for the radar to detect. Clearing the obstruction allows the
system to return to normal operation. If the obstruction is present when adaptive speed control is inactive (e.g. on initial
starting or with the system switched off), the message 'ACC Sensor Blocked' will be displayed.
Speed Control - Speed Control TDV6 3.0L Diesel
For a detailed description of the speed control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
the Workshop Manual. REFER to:
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-03, Description and Operation),

Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-03 Speed Control, Description and Operation),
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-03, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Adaptive speed control module Fuses

Speed control module (non-adaptive systems) Wiring harness
Ensure the speed control sensor is free from obstructions Electrical connector(s)
Steering wheel switches
Brake switch
Speed control sensor
Adaptive speed control module
Speed control module (non-adaptive systems)
Engine control module (ECM)
the next step
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
Speed Control Sensor (vehicles with adaptive system installed)

An incorrectly aligned speed control sensor can cause incorrect system operation. Before starting any repair work on the speed
control system, on vehicles with the adaptive system installed, check the adjustment of the speed control sensor
The correct function of the system depends on the operation of the speed control sensor, this requires correct alignment and
an unobstructed field of view
Customer complaints of poor system performance, late vehicle detection, late system braking, heavier than expected braking
when gaining on the vehicle in front or system is detecting vehicles in adjacent lanes, may be due to the sensor pointing up or
down (it should be set to level)
Check that there are no obstructions to the sensor
Check for signs of damage to the front bumper/sensor mounting area that could indicate that the sensor has been disturbed
Symptom Chart

Speed control inhibited or
disabled Default mode Check for network related DTCs that could be caused by power
enabled failure to the module or sensor and refer to DTC index
Supply voltage to Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control switches.
speed control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check speed control
Supply voltage to switch circuits for short, open circuit
speed control sensor Check for engine throttle position sensor DTCs and refer to
Steering wheel speed the relevant DTC index
control switch(s) Check for correct installation and adjustment of brake switch.
Steering wheel speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check brake switch
control switch circuit circuits for short, open circuit
Throttle sensors Check ABS system for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Brake switch DTC index
ABS fault
Unable to regulate/adjust
vehicle speed Steering wheel switch Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control switches.
malfunction Carry out steering wheel speed control switch and circuit
tests. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Unable to cancel speed

control from steering wheel Steering wheel switch Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control switches.
malfunction Carry out steering wheel speed control switch and circuit
tests. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Unable to cancel speed

control from brake pedal Brake switch Check for correct installation and adjustment of brake switch.
malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check brake switch
circuits for short, open circuit
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM) (100-00, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Speed Control - Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
501-F007
Inclinometer
NOTES:
This procedure details how to adjust the speed control sensor vertically. There is no horizontal adjustment required.
2. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
Set the air suspension ride height to the STANDARD setting.

4. NOTES:
Using the special tool, check the speed sensor is level,

(+/- 0.5 degree).
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level

surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007
5. NOTES:
Do not release the securing nut.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level

surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007

Installation).
7.
This procedure is required if:
A new ACC radar and, or ACC module are installed.
The ACC radar needed to be removed or is misaligned in its
position due to another repair operation.
8.
From the diagnostic tool menu, select: Service Alignment Mode.
The follow indicator will now be flashing, this indicates that the
vehicle is in "service alignment" and now requires driving.
The vehicle speed must be above 30 mph (48 kph).
Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like street
lights, road signs, or barriers. Use an inside or outside lane.
Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary targets
from the radar, a time gap of 2 seconds is recommended.
A straight road will produce a quicker and better result, although
the process will still operate on a curved road.
The time that the ACC module takes to align will vary, depending
on the route, speed, number of targets, and individual module.
When the flashing follow indicator light extinguishes, the ACC
system is now functional, and a required vehicle speed can now
be set by the driver and the ACC system will operate as normal.
Speed Control - Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake pedal remains in
the rest position during this procedure.


Installation

Speed Control - Speed Control Module
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed Control,

4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) have been removed after the road test.
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Speed Control - Speed Control Sensor
Removal

Installation).
3. Torque: 9 Nm

Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed Control,

Speed Control - Speed Control Switch
Removal
1. Make the SRS system safe.
Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety

Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

4. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
Torque: 2 Nm
6.
7. Carefully release the clips.
Torque: 2 Nm
8. Carefully release the clips.
Installation

Climate Control System - General Information -
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant HFC 134a
A/C compressor oil ND-OIL8 or Sanden SP10
Capacities
Description Grammes
A/C refrigerant - all vehicles 700
Refrigerant Oil Adding Capacities
NOTE: Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
Item Milliliters
A/C condenser core Add 33
A/C evaporator Add 46
A/C compressor 1. Drain old A/C compressor. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to
remove A/C compressor oil and measure the amount of oil captured. 2. Drain new A/C
compressor into a clean vessel. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to
remove oil. Then add back a quantity of the new oil that is identical to the quantity of oil
removed from the old A/C compressor. However, if this quantity is less than 30ml, then make it
up to 30ml.
A/C lines - if air conditioning Add 10 per A/C line
has been operational.
A/C system after flushing - Add 110
with compressor included
A/C system after flushing - Add 110
without a new compressor
installed - remaining A/C
compressor oil is to be
drained
A/C system after flushing - -
with a new compressor
installed - A/C compressor
supplied with 110ml
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control System
For a detailed description of the Climate Control System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (412-01 Climate Control)
Heating and Ventilation (Description and Operation),

Air Conditioning (Description and Operation),
Control Components (Description and Operation),
Control Components (Description and Operation),
Control Components (Description and Operation).
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familiar with both vehicle system and the charging and testing
equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
Visual Inspection
Coolant level Fuse(s)

Hose(s) Wiring harness
Coolant pump Electrical connectors
Control flap(s) Blower
Duct(s) Air conditioning compressor
Vent(s) Electric cooling fan
Cabin air filter Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM)
Drive belt Refrigerant pressure sensor
Air conditioning compressor
Thermostatic expansion valve
Evaporator
Receiver drier
Air conditioning condenser
Refrigerant pipes
Auxiliary drive belt
Fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pump
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pipes
the next step
Symptom Chart

Air conditioning performance poor or
inoperative Refrigerant undercharged GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Refrigerant overcharged
Thermostatic expansion valve
faulty
Receiver drier restricted
Water in refrigerant
Air conditioning operates briefly and

then switches off Electric cooling fan inoperative Test the operation of the electric cooling
Air conditioning condenser fan
airflow obstructed Check the air conditioning condenser for
external obstructions
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

A1: PRELIMINARY TEST 1
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine not running.
Normal pressure for a correctly charged and switched off system is approximately 4.5 bar on both gauges (system
equalised).
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Check the pressure values
Is a pressure registered on both gauges?
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST B : FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

B1: FUNCTIONALITY TEST 1
NOTES:
Normal pressures for a correctly charged and working system are 1.0 bar to 2.0 bar (low) and 11.0 bar to 15.0 bar (high).
Normal temperature (measured at the center air vent) for a correctly charged and working system is -7°C to -2°C when
ambient temperature is 20°C.
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Open all doors and the tailgate
4 Start the engine
5 Set the temperature to the lowest setting (all zones)
6 Set the fan speed to maximum
7 Set the recirculate switch to off
8 Insert a temperature probe into the centre air vent
9 Raise engine speed to 1500rpm and maintain this speed for 5 minutes
10 Check the temperature value
Are the pressure readings stable and in the green 'normal' region of the gauge?
Yes
Air conditioning system operating normally
No
Air conditioning system fault present. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
PINPOINT TEST C : GAUGE TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: GAUGE TEST 1
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Did the gauges register a change in pressure when the air conditioning was switched on?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
C2: GAUGE TEST 2
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings fluctuating?
Yes
Moisture present in the air conditioning system. Recover the refrigerant. Install a new receiver drier.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning
system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C3.
C3: GAUGE TEST 3
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings too low?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
GO to C6.
C4: GAUGE TEST 4
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.
1 Stop the engine

2 Using the manufacturer approved refrigerant leak detector, check for a refrigerant leak
Was a refrigerant leak detected?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant. Repair as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C5.
C5: GAUGE TEST 5
1 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant less than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and
recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C6: GAUGE TEST 6
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings too high?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Test inconclusive. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C7: GAUGE TEST 7
1 Stop the engine

2 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant more than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new thermal expansion valve. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST D : NITROGEN LEAK TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: NITROGEN LEAK TEST
CAUTION: When charging the system with nitrogen, the pressure should be regulated to 7.0 bar.
1 Charge the air conditioning system with nitrogen

2 Isolate the nitrogen supply
3 Monitor the pressure gauge and check for leaks
Has the source of the leak been identified?
Yes
Rectify the leak as necessary. Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familiar with

both vehicle system and the charging and testing equipment. All
operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open
flame and heat sources.
Refrigerant recovery.
2. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
4. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-use to

ensure that the purity of the refrigerant is high enough for safe use in
the air conditioning system. Recycling should always be carried out with
equipment which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for
compliance with SAE J1991. Other equipment may not recycle refrigerant
to the required level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling
Recharging station must not be used with any other type of refrigerant.
Refrigerant R134a from domestic and commercial sources must not be
used in motor vehicles air conditioning systems.
Following the manufacturer's instructions, recover the refrigerant from

the A/C system.
5. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered from the
system.
6. Evacuation.
7. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
8. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
9. Following the manufacturer's instructions, evacuate the A/C system.
10. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediately before

recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and recharging is not
permitted.
Recharging
11. Ensure the correct amount of oil is added to the A/C system before or
during recharging.
12. Recharge the A/C system to the correct specification.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information, Specifications).
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Flushing
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety
goggles and non-penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air
conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may
result in system damage or personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that performed the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated
A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack.

Depending on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to
be removed prior to flushing. For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System -
2. Remove the desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to: Desiccant Bag (412-01 Climate
Control, Removal and Installation).
3. Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions.
4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5. Install a new desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to: Desiccant Bag (412-01 Climate
Control, Removal and Installation).
6. Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the
repair procedure.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information, Specifications).
7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System
8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.

For additional information, refer to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
(412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.

Climate Control System - General Information - Contaminated Refrigerant
Handling
General Procedures
1. If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the refrigerant

into your R-134a OR R-12 recovery/recycling equipment. Take the follow
actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system and any
additional cost to repair the system. The customer may wish to
return to the repair facility performing the last A/C repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery only
equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated
refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover
contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles.
As an alternative, contact an A/C repair facility in your area with
the proper equipment to perform the repair.
4. On completion of the recovery of the contaminated refrigerant, it
will be necessary to carry out the A/C system flushing procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC) System
Flushing in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Electronic Leak Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where A/C

leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated
with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time.
Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake
cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan,
even in a well ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved

recovery/recycling device such as an R-134a A/C refrigerant center (which
meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions.
Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
(75°F) with the engine off.
If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air conditioning
(A/C) system recovery, evacuation and charging procedure.
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
2. Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to leak test

the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to the
3. If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system recovery
procedure.
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Fluorescent Dye Leak
Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Eye protection glasses supplied with the ultraviolet

(UV) lamp should be used to protect eyesight from harm.
NOTE: The air conditioning (A/C) system has an R-134a leak trace
dye wafer incorporated into the desiccant bag. The exact location of
leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow/green glow of the tracer
dye. Since more than one leak may exist, always inspect each
component. If it is necessary to add dye (due to a severe leakage for
example) use proprietary tracer dye injection equipment.
Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) lamp.
2. Check all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system.
3. Carry out the repair. For additional information, refer to Section 412-03
Air Conditioning.
4. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak trace dye with a
general purpose oil solvent.
5. Check the A/C system for correct operation.
6. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting
with the (UV) lamp.
Climate Control System - General Information - Inspection and Assembly
Requirements
General Procedures
1. Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) Lamp.

For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in
this section.
2. NOTES:
Any time a hose or component connection leak is observed, the

component and fitting must be separated, cleaned and a new O-ring
fitted and lubricated with air conditioning compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
When separating A/C joints, cap the open connections

immediately. Do not leave open to atmosphere.
O-ring seal surfaces must be free of dirt, lint, burrs and scratches. The
O-ring and connector should be lubricated with air conditioning
compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Manifold Gauge Set
Connection
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment

instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury and system damage.
Install the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
2. Carry out the repair.
3. Remove the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
4. Carry out flourescent dye leak detection test.

For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in
this section.
5. Check air conditioning (A/C) system for correct operation.

Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant System Tests
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that carried out the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated
A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturers
procedures and instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
NOTE: Jaguar Land Rover Limited supports the efficient usage,

recovery and recycling of the refrigerant used in passenger car air
conditioners. Jaguar Land Rover Limited recommends the use of
UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a A/C refrigerant
center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991) during any A/C system repair
and recharge procedure which requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the A/C
system.
Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and instructions
for use of equipment.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Commissioning
General Procedures
Activation
CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
1. Set the ignition to the on position, make sure the air conditioning (A/C)
is in the off position.
2. Start the engine and allow to run for a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Set the heater controls to 22°C, with the fan speed set to 75%.
4. Switch on the A/C system.
5. Open all air vents in the dashboard.
6. Run the A/C system for a minimum of 5 minutes, while the engine is still
at idle speed.
7. Once this is achieved the compressor is stabilized, with the oil being
distributed evenly throughout the system.
Climate Control -

In-vehicle temperature sensor bolts 2.5 - 22
Blower motor control module bolts 1.5 - 13
Climate control assembly to cross car beam bolts 9 - 80
Climate control module bolts 1.5 - 13
Defrost vent/register blend door actuator bolts 1.5 - 13
Footwell vent/duct blend door actuator bolts 1.5 - 13
Evaporator housing bolts 1.5 - 13
Evaporator core pipes mounting bracket bolts 1.5 - 13
Thermostatic expansion valve to evaporator core bolts 3.5 - 31
Evaporator core pipes to thermostatic expansion valve bolt 5 - 44
Desiccant bag plug 12 9 -
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) ventilation outlet
2 LH (left-hand) ventilation outlet
3 Air inlet duct
4 Heater assembly
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Overview
OVERVIEW
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the passenger compartment. The
system is either a dual zone or four zone system, depending on vehicle specification.
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery
5 TSD (touch screen display)
6 Rear climate control panel
7 Integrated control panel
8 ATC (automatic temperature control) module
9 Fresh air / recirculation servo
10 RH (right-hand) front face stepper motor
11 RH rear temperature blend stepper motor
12 RH front foot stepper motor
13 RH front temperature blend stepper motor
14 RH rear face stepper motor
15 RH rear foot stepper motor
16 Defrost stepper motor
17 To seat heating
18 To electric booster heater (where fitted) and seat heating
19 LH (left-hand) rear foot stepper motor
20 LH rear face stepper motor
21 LH front face stepper motor
22 LH rear temperature blend stepper motor
23 LH front foot stepper motor
24 LH front temperature blend stepper motor
25 Blower control module
26 Blower
System Operation
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module.
Refer to: Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The system can be operated in automatic or manual mode, with temperature settings selected using the switches on the
integrated control panel and, on four zone systems, the rear climate control panel.
When the engine is running, coolant is constantly circulated through the heater core by the engine coolant pump.
The blower is supplied with power from the blower relay on the RJB and connected to ground via the blower control module.
The blower control module regulates the voltage across the blower motor to control blower speed. The voltage set by the
blower control module is controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ATC module. The ATC module uses a
feedback signal from the blower control module to monitor blower speed.
HEATER ASSEMBLY
Item Description
1 Defrost outlets
2 Front face outlets
3 LH front face stepper motor
4 LH rear face stepper motor
5 LH rear foot outlet
6 LH rear foot stepper motor
7 LH rear temperature blend stepper motor
8 Electric booster heater
9 LH front foot outlet
10 LH front temperature blend stepper motor
11 Air inlet
12 Evaporator high pressure line
13 Evaporator low pressure line
14 LH front foot stepper motor
15 RH front foot outlet
16 Defrost stepper motor
17 RH front foot stepper motor
18 Heater core return pipe
19 Heater core feed pipe
20 RH front temperature blend stepper motor
21 Evaporator drain pan
22 RH rear foot stepper motor
23 RH rear face stepper motor
24 LH rear foot outlet
25 Rear face outlets
26 RH rear temperature blend stepper motor
27 RH front face stepper motor
The heater assembly controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the air distribution ducts. The heater assembly is
mounted on the vehicle centerline, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead. The heater assemblies on two and
four zones systems are the same.
The heater assembly consists of a casing that contains an A/C (air conditioning) evaporator, a heater core, distribution control
doors and temperature control doors. On 3.0L diesel vehicles, the heater assembly also contains a PTC (positive temperature
coefficient) electric booster heater.
Mounted on the heater casing are 13 stepper motors. Each of the stepper motors is connected to either a distribution control
door or a temperature control door.
NOTE: The stepper motors are particularly susceptible to low voltage and a range of stepper motor DTC (diagnostic
trouble code)'s are likely due to low voltage at engine crank. Only take note of these if it is a permanent fault that recurs
persistently.
The evaporator is part of the A/C system.

Refer to: Air Conditioning (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air supplied to the passenger compartment. The heater core is an
aluminum two pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminum tubes
attached to the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system.
AIR INLET DUCT
Item Description
1 Air inlet door (in fresh air position)
2 Air inlet
3 Pollen filter
4 Air outlet
5 Fresh air/recirculation servo motor
6 Blower control module
7 Blower
8 Pollen filter cover
9 ATC module
The air inlet duct connects the fresh air inlet in the engine bulkhead to the heater assembly. The air inlet duct is installed
behind the instrument panel on the passenger side.
The air inlet duct consists of a casing that contains a pollen filter, an air inlet door, a blower and a blower control module. A
recirculation air inlet is incorporated into the casing. A servo motor mounted on the casing is connected to the air inlet door, to
allow selection between fresh and recirculated air.
The pollen filter is installed in the fresh air inlet of the air inlet duct. A cover on the underside of the air inlet duct allows
access for replacement of the pollen filter.
The blower regulates the volume of air flowing through the air inlet duct to the heater assembly. The blower consists of an
open hub, centrifugal fan and an electric motor.
The blower control module regulates the power supply to the blower motor. The blower control module is installed in the air
inlet duct downstream of the blower, where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
VENTILATION OUTLETS
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in the LH and
RH rear quarter panels, behind the rear bumper. Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flaps, and
is effectively a non-return valve. The flaps open and close automatically depending on the pressure differential between the air
inside and outside the vehicle.
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION RHD (right-hand drive) 3.0L diesel installation shown, other installations similar.
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 Low pressure line
4 Receiver drier
5 Condenser
7 Low pressure servicing connection
8 High pressure servicing connection
9 High pressure line
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Overview
OVERVIEW
A/C (air conditioning) system transfers heat from the passenger compartment to the outside atmosphere to provide the heater
assembly with dehumidified cold air. The A/C system is a sealed, closed loop system filled with a charge weight of refrigerant
as the heat transfer medium. Depending on market, the refrigerant is either R1234yf or R134a. Oil is added to the refrigerant
to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor. The system consists of:
An A/C compressor
A condenser
A receiver drier
A thermostatic expansion valve
An evaporator
Low and high pressure refrigerant lines.
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired.
PETROL VEHICLES (up to 2013 MY)
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (50 A midifuse)
PETROL VEHICLES (2013 MY ONWARDS), AND 3.0L DIESEL VEHICLES
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (50 A midifuse to CJB; 250 A megafuse to EJB (engine junction box))
3 CJB
4 ATC module
5 A/C compressor
6 EJB (ignition relay)
System Operation
To accomplish the transfer of heat, refrigerant is circulated around a sealed system, where it passes through two
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state, during which process maximum heat
absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor. The
refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve, then changes state from a liquid to a
vapor in the evaporator to absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier assembly to the
thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the compressor, then
releases heat and changes state from a vapor to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the ATC module.

Refer to: Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
A/C System Flow Diagram
Item Description
A Refrigerant liquid
B Refrigerant vapor
C Air flow
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 High pressure servicing connection
4 Refrigerant pressure sensor
5 Engine cooling fan
6 Condenser
7 Receiver drier
8 A/C compressor
9 Low pressure servicing connection
10 Blower
COMPRESSOR
A
Item Description
A Compressor - petrol vehicles (up to 2013 MY)
B Compressor - petrol vehicles (2103 MY onwards)
C Compressor - 3.0L diesel vehicles
1 Solenoid valve electrical connector
2 Inlet port
3 Outlet port
4 Pressure relief valve
5 Solenoid valve
6 Pulley
7 Clutch electrical connector
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapor from the
evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapor to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a variable displacement unit driven by the engine accessory drive belt.
Up to 2013 MY: petrol vehicles, the A/C compressor is driven directly from the pulley.
2013 MY Onwards: petrol vehicles, the A/C compressor is driven via an electro-magnetic clutch.
On 3.0L diesel vehicles theA/C compressor is driven via an electro-magnetic clutch.
While the ignition is on, the clutch is permanently engaged by a power feed from the ignition relay in the EJB
To protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor. The
pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
The solenoid valve enables the flow of refrigerant through the A/C compressor to be adjusted to match the cooling load.
Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the ATC module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By
controlling the flow of refrigerant through the compressor, the solenoid valve controls the A/C system pressure and the
evaporator operating temperature.
CONDENSER
Item Description
A Condenser - petrol vehicles
B Condenser - 3.0L diesel vehicles
1 Condenser core
2 LH (left-hand) end tank
3 High pressure compressor discharge line connector block
4 Mounting bracket
5 High pressure liquid outlet line connector block
6 Receiver drier outlet pipe
7 Receiver drier inlet pipe
8 Receiver drier
9 RH (right-hand) end tank
10 Desicant access plug
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapor from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end tank attach
the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed between
two end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a four pass upper (condenser) section and a two
pass lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the high pressure liquid line
to the evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
RECEIVER DRIER
The receiver drier is connected to the RH end tank of the condenser. It removes solid impurities and moisture from the
refrigerant, and provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator. The receiver
drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow with the
heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet and
outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminum housing containing inlet and outlet
passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet
passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom end of the
temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the diaphragm is controlled by the
evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses
evaporator outlet pressure.
Item Description
1 Metering valve
2 Housing
3 Diaphragm
4 Temperature sensor
5 Outlet passage from evaporator
6 Inlet passage to evaporator
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve reduces the
pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine spray, to
improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air flowing through
the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporize and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and temperature sensitive tube,
which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through the evaporator. The warmer
the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater volume of
refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
EVAPORATOR
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the exterior
or recirculated air.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the vehicle by passing
through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
REFRIGERANT LINES
The refrigerant lines consist of a combination of rigid pipes and flexible hoses that connect the thermostatic expansion valve
on the evaporator to the A/C compressor and the condenser. To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the
diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the two pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in
the low pressure/temperature regime and smaller diameter pipes are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure servicing connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing.
Petrol engine vehicles (NAS market from 14 MY)
An internal heat exchanger is installed which increases the efficiency of the evaporator and ensures any residual liquid in the
low pressure line is evaporated before it reaches the compressor. Refer to the Component Location graphic titled: Petrol engine
vehicles (NAS market from 14 MY).
NOTE: The internal heat exchanger is incorporated primarily because of the introduction of refrigerant R1234yf which
replaces refrigerant R134a.
Climate Control - Control Components - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) installation shown, RHD (right-hand drive) installation similar.
Item Description
1 Pollution sensor (where fitted)
2 Front sunload sensor
3 Rear sunload sensor (where fitted)
4 Ambient air temperature sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Evaporator temperature sensor
3 ICP (integrated control panel)
5 Humidity and temperature sensor
Climate Control - Control Components - Overview
OVERVIEW
The climate control system is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module. It controls the heating and
ventilation system and the A/C (air conditioning) system to regulate the temperature, volume and distribution of air into the
passenger compartment. The system is either a dual zone or four zone system, depending on vehicle specification, which is
fully automatic and capable of supplying individual temperature levels to each zone of the passenger compartment, up to a
maximum differential of approximately 3 ºC (5.4 ºF). Manual overrides for the system include inlet air source, blower speed
and air distribution. These selections can be made on the TSD (touch screen display), the ICP (integrated control panel) and,
on four zone systems, the rear climate control panel.
The two and four zone climate control systems contain the same hardware. Different software in their respective ATC modules
produces the different functionality required by the two systems.
Climate Control - Control Components - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTES:
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
See Heating and Ventilation, and Air Conditioning for control system outputs.
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (50 A midi fuse)
4 Evaporator temperature sensor
5 Humidity and temperature sensor
7 Front sunload sensor
8 Pollution sensor (where fitted)
10 Ambient air temperature sensor
12 ICP (integrated control panel)
13 Rear climate control panel (where fitted)
15 Rear sunload sensor (where fitted)
System Operation
AIR INLET CONTROL

The source of inlet air is automatically controlled by the ATC module, unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation switch
on the ICP (integrated control panel) to give timed or latched recirculation. A brief press of the switch illuminates the switch
indicator and activates timed recirculation. Pressing and holding the switch causes the switch indicator to flash and then
illuminate constantly, indicating that the air inlet is in latched recirculation and the switch can be released. A second press of
the switch cancels recirculation and the ATC module returns the recirculation door to the fresh air position. Timed recirculation
is automatically cancelled after a set time, which varies with ambient air temperature.
During automatic control, the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its 'comfort' algorithm
and, if fitted, the pollution sensor. If it detects pollution, the ATC module sets the air source to recirculation for 10 minutes,
then to fresh air for 20 seconds to renew the air in the vehicle. The ATC module repeats this cycle until the pollution is no
longer present.
The sensitivity of the pollution sensor can be adjusted on the TSD (touch screen display) using the Settings button on the
FRONT CLIMATE menu. The pollution sensing function can also be switched off by adjusting sensitivity to the minimum setting.
If there is a fault with the pollution sensor, the ATC module disables automatic operation of the recirculation door.
AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The temperature blend doors adjust the proportion of cool air from the evaporator that passes through the heater core to
produce the required output air temperature.
The temperature blend doors for each zone are operated independently to enable individual temperature settings for the
different zones. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC module using
LIN (local interconnect network) bus messages.
The ATC module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor positions required to achieve the selected temperature and
compares it against the current position. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper motors to adopt the
new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is selected. When maximum
heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC module adopts an appropriate strategy for air distribution,
blower speed, and air source.
Temperature control in one zone can be compromised by another zone being set to a high level of heating or cooling. True
maximum heating or cooling (displayed as HI or LO on the TSD) can only be selected for the driver's zone. If HI or LO is
selected for the driver's zone, the temperature for the other zone(s) is automatically set to match the driver's zone.
If A/C (air conditioning) is selected off in the automatic mode, no cooling of the inlet air will take place. The minimum output
air temperature from the system will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in the air inlet path.
If the Sync climate button on the TSD is pressed, the ATC module synchronizes the temperature of the other zone(s) with the
driver's zone.
BLOWER CONTROL
When the system is in the automatic mode, the ATC module determines the blower speed required from a comfort algorithm.
When the system is in the manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at the speed selected using the rotary control
switch on the ICP. The ATC module also adjusts blower speed to compensate for the ram effect on inlet air produced by forward
movement of the vehicle. As vehicle speed and ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced, and vice versa.
On vehicles fitted with the four zone system, the system cannot be turned on using the rotary blower control on the rear
climate control panel. This is to encourage the use of the AUTO mode. Provided the rear climate control panel is unlocked,
pressing a rear AUTO button on the rear climate control panel will reactivate the system if previously off.
AIR DISTRIBUTION CONTROL

Air distribution doors direct the air to the individual vents and registers in the passenger compartment. The doors are operated
by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC module using LIN bus messages.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution into the passenger
compartment in line with its 'comfort' algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the buttons on the TSD, or switches
on the ICP or rear climate control panel, are selected. Air distribution remains as selected until one of the AUTO switches is
pressed or a different manual selection is made.
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL

When A/C is selected the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the passenger
compartment cooling requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC module raises the evaporator
operating temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor. The ATC module closely controls the
rate of temperature increase to avoid introducing moisture into the passenger compartment.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC module lowers the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the flow
of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
When A/C is off, the compressor current signal supplied by the ATC module holds the A/C compressor solenoid valve in the
minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. If the system approaches the high
pressure limit, the compressor current signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. If the system falls
below the low pressure limit, the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the A/C compressor is
maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the lubricant from the A/C compressor.
A/C COMPRESSOR TORQUE

The ATC module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C compressor current values to the ECM over the medium speed then high
speed CAN bus, using the CJB as a gateway. The ECM uses these values to calculate the torque being used to drive the A/C
compressor. The ECM compares the calculated value with its allowable value and, if necessary, forces the ATC module to inhibit
the A/C compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN message. This forces the ATC module to reduce the drive current
to the A/C compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This in turn reduces the torque required to drive the A/C
compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C compressor torque, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to maintain
vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
COOLING FAN CONTROL

The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
on the medium speed CAN bus. The ECM then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan.
PROGRAMMED DEFROST
The programmed defrost DEF switch is located on the ICP. When the switch is pressed, the ATC module instigates the
programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC module configures the system as follows:
Automatic mode off.

A/C on.
Selected temperature unchanged.
Air inlet set to fresh air.
Air distribution set to windshield.
Blower speed set to level 6.
The ATC module also sends a medium speed CAN message to the CJB to activate the windshield heater (where fitted) and rear
window heater.
On vehicles fitted with the four zone system, the rear climate control panel shows a defrost symbol to indicate that the
system is in defrost and no air flow will be available to the rear vents.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
A second press of the DEF switch.

Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD.
Pressing the driver side AUTO switch on the ICP.
Switching the ignition OFF.
The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function. If the blower speed has been
adjusted and then the DEF switch is pressed again, the system will go back to the DEFROST default settings. Another press of
the DEF switch, or pressing the driver AUTO switch, will exit the DEFROST mode but leave the heated screen(s) on.
ATC MODULE
The ATC module is mounted on the outboard end of the air inlet duct, behind the front passenger side of the instrument panel.
The ATC module processes inputs from the system sensors, the TSD, the ICP and, on four zone systems, the rear climate
control panel. In response to these inputs, the ATC module outputs control signals to the A/C system and the heating and
ventilation system.
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC module and the vehicle wiring.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant
system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic
expansion valve.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor that provides the ATC module with a
temperature signal from the downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted directly onto
the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor and thus the
operating temperature of the evaporator.
HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The humidity and temperature sensor is behind a grill in the instrument panel, on the inboard side of the steering column. The
sensor incorporates:
A NTC thermistor to measure temperature.

A capacitive sensor element to measure humidity.
A motor driven fan to draw air through the sensor and over the sensing elements.
Humidity within the passenger compartment is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An increase in
evaporator temperature increases the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment. Lowering the
evaporator temperature reduces the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides theATC module with an input of external air
temperature. The sensor is hard wired to the ECM, which transmits the temperature to the CJB on the high speed CAN bus. The
CJB acts as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature on the medium speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The sensor is installed in the LH (left-hand) door mirror, and is accessed by removing the mirror glass, cap and actuator.
SUNLOAD SENSOR
All vehicles have a sunload sensor installed in the center of the defrost grill of the instrument panel. Vehicles with a four zone
systems have a second, identical, sunload sensor installed in the center of the parcel shelf.
The sunload sensor consists of two photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity; one as
sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar
heating effect on the vehicle, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature and distribution to improve
comfort in the individual zones.
POLLUTION SENSOR (WHERE FITTED)
The pollution sensor is attached to the center of the upper front crossmember and provides the ATC module with separate
signals of hydrocarbon levels and oxidized gas levels.
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidized gases such
as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide, which controls the air inlet source to reduce the amount of
contaminants entering the passenger compartment.
Climate Control - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor
Removal

Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor Control Module
Removal

Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Center Registers
Special Tool(s)
JLR-412-147
Remover, Register
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
Before inserting the special tool, make sure that the

register is fully open.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the internal

components of the center registers.
Repeat for the other centre register secured to the

instrument panel.
To install the register, align the securing clips and

push the register into the housing until firmly secured in it's
seated position.
During removal, care must be taken not to damage

the instrument panel covering with the register clips.
Installation

Climate Control - Climate Control Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol
(303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
4. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine
Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).

Procedures).
6. Refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
7. Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
8. Refer to: Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument

Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
All vehicles

Torque: 9 Nm
13. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly
located on the locating dowels.

14.
15.
Repeat for both sides.
16.
17.
18.
19. Torque: 1.5 Nm
20. Torque: 1.5 Nm

21. Torque: 9 Nm
22.
23. Torque: 9 Nm

Torque: 3 Nm
25. Torque: 9 Nm
26. Torque: 9 Nm
27. Torque: 9 Nm

component.
www.JagDocs.com
29.

Torque: 9 Nm
31.
32. Torque: 9 Nm
33.
34. Torque: 9 Nm
35. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Climate Control Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Climate Control Assembly (412-01 Climate Control, Removal

and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips or screw

threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the climate control assembly.
Make sure that the component is correctly located on

the locating dowels.
NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator LHD RWD
Removal
3. Refer to: Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator - LHD RWD (412-01
Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator RHD RWD
Removal
3. Refer to: Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator - RHD RWD (412-01
Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Desiccant Bag
Removal

Procedures).
and Installation).
4.
5. Torque: 12 Nm
6.
Installation

Climate Control - Driver Side Register
Special Tool(s)
JLR-412-147
Remover, Register
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:



seated position.


Installation

Climate Control - Evaporator
Removal
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips or screw threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
All vehicles
3. Refer to: Thermostatic Expansion Valve (412-01 Climate Control,

4. Torque: 1.5 Nm
5. Torque: 1.5 Nm
6.
7.
8. Torque: 1.5 Nm
All vehicles
9. NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.



16.
17.
All vehicles
Torque: 1.5 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
20. Torque: 1.5 Nm

All vehicles

Torque: 1.5 Nm

23. WARNING: Only use moderate force when installing
the sensor.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor harness

does not become trapped.
Make sure that the sensor is correctly installed.

Installation

Climate Control - Floor Console Register
Removal
1.
2. Torque: 2 Nm
3. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator LHD RWD
Removal
3. Refer to: Heater Core (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator RHD RWD
Removal

and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Heater Core
Removal
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips or screw threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
All vehicles

and Installation).
4. Torque: 1.5 Nm
5. Torque: 1.5 Nm
6.
7.
8. Torque: 1.5 Nm
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. Torque: 1.5 Nm
16. Torque: 9 Nm
17. Torque: 1.5 Nm
18.
19.
Installation

Climate Control - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
1. Torque: 2 Nm
2.
the component.
4. Torque: 4 Nm
5.

the component.
Torque: 2.5 Nm

9. Torque: 2.5 Nm
10. Torque: 2.5 Nm

11.
12. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Passenger Side Register
Special Tool(s)
JLR-412-147
Remover, Register
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:



seated position.


Installation

Climate Control - Pollen Filter
Removal

Installation

Climate Control - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Upper Section (501-12 Instrument Panel and
3.
4. Torque: 1.5 Nm
5.
Installation

Climate Control - Sunload Sensor
Removal
3.
Installation

Climate Control - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles

and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips or

screw threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the climate control assembly.
Torque: 1.5 Nm

Torque: 1.5 Nm
All vehicles
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during

installation.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 5 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:

installation.
Torque: 3.5 Nm
Installation

Auxiliary Climate Control -

Electric booster heater retaining screws 1.3 - 11
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
3. Refer to: Thermostatic Expansion Valve (412-01 Climate Control,





11.
12.
Torque: 1.5 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
All vehicles


Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning -
Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
A/C compressor drain plug 15 11 -
A/C discharge line to compressor nut 18 13 -
A/C suction line to compressor nut 18 13 -
A/C discharge line to compressor bolt 9 - 80
A/C condenser to radiator bolts 7 - 62
A/C discharge line to condenser nut 8 - 71
A/C liquid line to condenser nut 8 - 71
A/C pressure cutoff switch 8 - 71
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning

REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

Procedures).
5. Refer to: Specifications (412-00 Climate Control System - General


7.
8. Torque: 23 Nm
9.
10.
11. Torque: 8 Nm
12.
13.
14.
15. Torque: 9 Nm
16. CAUTIONS:

installation.
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent

ingress of dirt and moisture.

blanking caps.
Torque: 18 Nm
17. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

Procedures).
and Installation).
4.
5. Torque: 8 Nm
6. NOTE: Always protect the cooling pack elements to

prevent accidental damage.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Air Conditioning - Pressure Cutoff Switch
Removal
2. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System

3. For additional information, refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front
End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Make sure the air conditioning (A/C) hose

does not turn when removing the low pressure switch.
TORQUE: 8 Nm
Installation

Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Component Location
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Right Hand (RH) steering wheel mounted switch assembly
2 Ventilation duct to Touch Screen Display (TSD)
4 Cooling fan
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Overview
OVERVIEW
The instrument cluster is a high definition Thin Film Transistor (TFT) display.
The cluster is designed to look similar to a conventional instrument cluster for the main display. The display can be continually
reconfigured to prioritise and refine the information presented to the driver. All displays are 'virtual' gauges with the
speedometer and the tachometer being the dominant features of the new display. Only 2 hardwired warning indicators remain;
the airbag warning indicator and the security warning indicator. Both of these indicators are LED (light emitting diode)'s.
Two ambient light sensors; one on either side of the pack, (to ensure the brightest lighting conditions are detected) are used
to adjust cluster illumination in response to prevailing lighting conditions.
The instrument cluster features a number of warning indicators. The warning indicators illuminate in one of four colors which
indicate the level of importance of the warning as follows:
Red = Warning
Amber = Caution
Green = System operative
Blue = Headlamp high beam operative.
A feature and driver preference menu is available to allow the driver to select certain features and functions of the instrument
cluster and change them to their personal preference. A menu control 'joy pad' is located on the RH (right-hand) side of the
steering wheel and allows selection of the displayed functions and navigation of the menus. When selected, the menu is
displayed in the RH side of the TFT screen which allows access to a number of vehicle functions.
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST; AE = LVDS signal
Item Description
1 Connection to MOST ring
3 Right Hand (RH) steering wheel mounted switch assembly
4 Instrument cluster cooling fan
6 Connection to medium speed CAN bus
7 Connection to high speed CAN bus
8 Connection to MOST ring
10 Connection to medium speed CAN bus
System Operation
OPERATION
Vehicle Interface
Then instrument cluster receives a permanent power supply from the vehicle battery via a 50A midi-fuse located in the BJB
(battery junction box) and then CJB (central junction box). The cluster also has a connection with the CJB for the security LED
(light emitting diode) operation.
The instrument cluster communicates with other vehicle systems via the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, the
high speed CAN bus and the Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) ring. The cluster is not a gateway for these interfaces;
this task is performed by the CJB.
The instrument cluster is connected to the Touch Screen Display (TSD) by a Low Voltage Differential Signalling (LVDS) digital
video screened cable. This connection is to support the detailed satellite navigation maps displayed in the instrument cluster.
A single wire from the instrument cluster to the electric steering column lock provides a ground for the lock operation. Power
supply and control for the steering column lock is provided by the CJB via hardwired connection and a high speed CAN bus
connection.
Cooling Fan
The cooling fan operation is controlled by the instrument cluster. The cooling fan receives a power supply via a 10A mini fuse in
the CJB. Three additional wires connect the fan to the instrument cluster; one for a fan PWM (pulse width modulation) for fan
speed, one for a monitor signal and a ground.
The instrument cluster monitors its internal temperature and also receives temperature information from the TSD. If one or
both of these temperatures exceeds a predetermined value, the instrument cluster operates the cooling fan.
The instrument cluster can control the speed of the fan motor and hence the air flow to both the cluster and the TSD, via air
ducting, by varying the PWM signal to the motor.
At temperatures of up to 40°C (104°F) the cluster operates the fan motor speed at a duty cycle of 30%. as the temperature
increases, the duty cycle is increase linearly up to a 100% duty cycle at temperatures of 60°C (140°F).
The monitor connection between the fan and the instrument cluster is used by the cluster to detect fan faults (for example a
blockage). Any faults are recorded as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) in the instrument cluster.
When the TSD requires cooling a request is sent from the TSD on the medium speed CAN bus to the instrument cluster. The
instrument cluster uses the information from the TSD to operate the fan at the required speed using PWM.
If the TSD or the instrument cluster are individually requesting cooling fan operation, the fan request is granted for that
components requirements. If both the TSD and the instrument cluster both request fan operation, the fan duty cycle is set to
operate to the greater of the two requests.
Right Hand (RH) steering wheel mounted switch assembly
A LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection from the clockspring to the instrument cluster receives signals from the RH
(right-hand) steering mounted switch assembly.
The switch assembly contains a control module. The module outputs a reference voltage to the joy pad in the RH steering
wheel switch assembly. The switches in the switch assembly are connected through several resistors in series to a ground
point. The control module monitors the resistance in the switch circuit to determine the selected switch function.
When a switch is operated (switch contact momentarily closed), the control module senses the change in resistance and
determines the requested function by the measured resistance value. The control module converts this information into a LIN
bus message which passed via the clockspring to the instrument cluster in the LIN bus.
NOTE: The control module in the RH steering wheel switch assembly also passes information from the speed control
switches to the speed control module in the same way, but these are not related to instrument cluster operation and control.
DESCRIPTION
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster comprises a 12.3 inch Thin Film Transistor (TFT) with a multilayered virtual display. The cluster has a
high level of graphic presentation and interactive functionality. These features give the driver advanced levels of control and
set-up using interactive graphic menu features.
The instrument cluster combines a virtual representation of virtual analogue instruments, graphic information, digital
information and warning signals. The cluster is linked via a LVDS cable, the MOST ring and the medium speed CAN bus to the
TSD which provides selected information directly in the driver's view in addition to the instrument panel mounted TSD.
The TFT screen uses a specific type of field-effect transmitter made by depositing thin films of a semi-conductor active layer,
as well as the dielectric layer and metallic contacts, over a supporting substrate. The display comprises an active matrix of a
large number of individual light emitting picture elements (pixels). Each pixel incorporates its own transistor switch and is
controlled by the application of positive and negative voltages across rows and columns. The transistors are made from a thin
film of silicon deposited on a glass panel (hence TFT) and each transistor takes up only a small fraction of the area of its pixel.
The remaining part of the silicone film is etched away to allow light from the pixel to pass through forming the display.
The instrument cluster screen displays at a resolution of 1280 X 480 pixels, at a cycle time of 30 frames per second and an
aspect ratio of 8:3 (image width divided by the height), so it has clear definition and no visible delay in changing information.
The instrument cluster presents the information in 3 zones, but the information displayed in each zone can vary with the
chosen mode and the required information to be displayed.
Standard Mode Display
In standard mode the:
LH (left-hand) Dial includes the following displays:
Fuel gage
Digital clock, ambient temperature or frost warning icon
Information center with sub-displays for entertainment, phone and navigation
Trip computer with sub-display for vehicle odometer, journey distance, average speed, average fuel consumption,
instantaneous fuel consumption and distance to empty
Engine temperature gage
Warning indicators.
Center Dial includes the following displays:
Speedometer
Warning indicators.
RH Dial includes the following displays:
Normally the tachometer

Message center to display warnings and temporary alerts
system control menus, selected using the joy pad on the RH steering wheel switch.
The 3 zones can display warning indicators at dedicated locations as shown the following illustration.
Warning Indicators
Item Description
1 Airbag warning (amber)
2 Low fuel warning (amber)
3 Frost warning (amber)
4 LH turn signal indicator (green)
5 Brake System warning (red) - USA only
6 Brake system warning (red) - ROW
7 Emergency brake assist warning (amber) - USA only
8 Emergency brake assist warning (amber) - ROW
9 High beam warning (blue)
10 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) active warning (amber)
11 Forward alert active (green)
12 Rear fog lamps active (amber)
13 Side lamps active (green)
14 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning (amber) - USA only
15 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning (amber) - ROW
16 RH turn signal indicator (green)
17 General warning indicator (amber)
18 General warning indicator (red)
19 Glow plugs active warning (amber) (Diesel models only)
20 Oil pressure warning (red) (Diesel models only)
21 Charge indicator warning (red)
22 Speed control active (green)
23 Park brake system warning (red) - USA only
24 Park brake system warning (red) - ROW
25 Adaptive speed control active (amber)
26 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) active warning (amber)
27 Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) warning (amber)
28 Automatic high beam active warning (amber)
29 Check engine MIL warning (amber)
30 Coolant temperature warning (red)
31 Seat belt warning (red)
32 Tire pressure monitoring warning (amber)
33 DSC off warning (amber)
The general warning indicators (amber and red) are illuminated to alert the driver to a message in the message center. They
are illuminated when a warning is required to be displayed, even if it is not currently being displayed due to being cycled with
other messages. All warning messages are associated with a warning indicator colour according to their status. Some
messages are associated with a no-color warning which means the message is displayed without one of the general warning
lamps being illuminated.
When the ignition is off the instrument cluster TFT screen is blank. When the vehicle is unlocked, the instrument cluster, along
with the TSD, begin a start-up routine which is not visible to the driver. The start-up routine includes acquiring data from
vehicle systems. The display is configured once the start burton is pressed to either switch on the ignition or start the engine.
The instrument cluster displays the Jaguar 'leaper' badge before the main instrument graphics begin to be displayed and the
instrument cluster performs a series of 'pre-drive' checks. The instrument cluster displays the standard 3 dial display of
speedometer, tachometer and fuel/temperature gage. The dials, although entirely 'virtual' give a 3-dimensional impression of
being physical dials with shadows and highlights added by the TFT screen.
The needles on the dials are also virtual and sweep around the speedometer and tachometer dials in the same manner as a
'conventional' mechanical needle. As the needle approaches a number on the dial, that number and the number preceding and
following it become more prominent by brightening the display in that area of the TFT. This feature can be selected on or off
using the display settings menu.
The instrument cluster can determine what information to display, when to display it and where on the display it will be
shown. This is governed by preset display properties. The system versatility allows the instrument cluster to display
information or hide it from view when its is not required.
Dynamic Mode Display
A dynamic mode is available by pressing the dynamic mode button in the floor console. When selected, this mode modifies the
instrument cluster display only the components required for performance driving. A chequered flag icon is displayed in the
tachometer to signify that dynamic mode is active and the display is illuminated in a red color.
If winter mode is selected by pressing the appropriate button on the floor console a message is displayed in the tachometer
area, with a combined car and snow flake image with the words 'Winter Mode Confirmed' displayed. The change to this mode is
confirmed by the instrument cluster being illuminated in a blue highlighting color and a winter mode icon is displayed in the
tachometer area.
The instrument cluster can be easily changed by the driver to display either imperial (miles) or metric (km) units for the trip
computer, speedometer and ambient temperature. This is configured during vehicle production to meet legislative and market
requirements, but the driver can change certain unit displays using the instrument cluster menus.
Instrument Cluster Menu
The driver can use the 'joy pad' on the RH steering wheel switch assembly to navigate through a series of menu-driven
features. The menu's are displayed in the RH side of the instrument cluster and override the tachometer display. If another
function of higher priority is required to be displayed, then the menu display will also be overridden. The menu will be
displayed until the driver closes the menu display.
When the driver uses the joy pad on the RH steering wheel switch assembly the menu appears as vertical stack of 6 rows of
menu selections as follows:
Main Menu
Show Warnings (OK)
Vehicle Set-up
Trip Computer
Display Settings
Service Menu.
Most menu levels are contained on one page, however, for lists with more than 6 sub-items additional up/down arrows are
positioned adjacent to the menu to signify there are additional menu items to display. The menu items and sun-menu items
will not obscure any active warnings in the instrument cluster.
Dependent on vehicle specification, if a feature is not present on the vehicle, it will not be shown in any of the menus.
To exit the menu navigate the cursor to the 'back' arrow on the LH side of the Main Menu line. The menu will be removed and
replaced with the tachometer or the message center, dependant on priority.
The Service Menu allows access to the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Oil level display (not dynamic)
Auto High Beam (AHB) sensitivity.
The AHB sensitivity is only available for NAS markets as a test option.
Additional Instrument Cluster Features
A speaker is mounted on the top of the instrument cluster casing. The speaker generates audible warnings and is controlled by
a sound generator within the instrument cluster. The speaker cannot be replaced separately.
Item Description
1 Instrument cluster speaker
On each side of the TFT screen are 4 small apertures, 2 each side. The upper apertures on each side are ambient light sensors.
The sensors are used to adjust the cluster illumination in response to the prevailing ambient light conditions. The instrument
cluster also has high output LED backlighting and a smoked glass screen which helps prevent washout by reducing the amount
of sunlight that can reach the screen directly. The TFT screen also incorporates an anti-glare coating.
The lower apertures contain LED status warning indicators. The LHLED is the primary SRS (supplemental restraint system)
warning indicator. A secondary SRS warning indicator is located within the TFT screen and is only used in case of failure of the
primary warning indicator for legislation requirements.
The instrument cluster is integrated into the vehicle start authorization process as it includes encoded data exchange
information as part of the distributed start authorization strategy. The cluster also controls the ground switching of the electric
steering column lock.
Cooling Fan
Item Description
2 Cooling fan
3 Air inlet
4 Ducting
5 Air outlet to TSD
An electric cooling fan is located outboard of the steering column, behind the instrument panel. The fan is attached to a
bracket which in turn is attached to the instrument panel structure.
The fan has a filtered air intake and draws air from below the instrument panel. Plastic ducting is routed from the fan to the
rear of the instrument cluster. A rectangular port in the instrument cluster distributes the cooling air around the rear of the TFT
screen. The ducting from the instrument cluster is also routed to the rear of the TSD to provide cooling for the TSD in high
ambient temperatures.
NOTE: Vehicles fitted with a dual-view TSD have an integral fan within the TSD, in addition to the cooling fan for the
cluster. Single view TSD units have no integral fan and rely solely on the cooling from the cluster fan.
Right Hand (RH) steering wheel mounted switch assembly
The instrument cluster menus are navigated and items selected using the joypad control. The joy pad control is a 2-axis switch
with a central button (OK).
Pressing any of the joypad controls activates the menu display in the instrument cluster.
The up and down arrows can be used to navigate through the menu list, with the selected menu being highlighted. If the
selected menu has a sub-list, the right arrow is used to display and view the sub-list. Pressing the left arrow will close the
sub-list and return to the main menu. To select an menu, press the OK button and the selected menu will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
If the menu is activated and no further selections are made using the joy pad within 10 seconds, the menu will time-out and
the menu will be removed from the instrument cluster display. Once the joy pad has been used to select a menu, the time-out
period is extended to 30 seconds.
To exit the menu's, select the top menu 'Main Menu' and press OK to close the menu display.
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-01 Instrument Cluster)
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),

Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation).
Car Configuration File (CCF)
CAUTION: If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, the instrument cluster renewal procedure must be carried out
using the approved diagnostic system. This will ensure that the CCF data is correctly transferred from the central junction box
to the replacement cluster. The CCF will also need to be updated using the approved diagnostic system if the vehicle is
modified in service from its original factory specification. This can include the fitting of non-standard wheels and/or tires and
optional accessory dealer install components with an electrical interface, such as park assist control
The CCF contains all relevant data about the specification and market condition of the applicable vehicle, immobilization codes
and driver personal settings. This information is retained in the central junction box, the engine control module and the
instrument cluster enabling each system module to detect which systems and components are installed to the vehicle. The
information is continuously transferred between these three system modules to ensure that the data is constantly backed-up
between the modules
2. Confirm which, if any, warning lights and/or messages were displayed on the instrument cluster. For a list of messages:
REFER to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation) /
Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation) /
Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
3. Visually inspect for obvious electrical faults
Visual inspection
Electrical
Battery
Fuses
- Central and battery junction boxes
- Megafuses
Wiring harness
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
CAN circuits
Instrument cluster
Central junction box
Engine control module
the next step
5. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any DTCs before moving onto the DTC index
Make sure that all DTCs are cleared following rectification
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
Removal
1. CAUTION: If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, the Jaguar

approved diagnostic equipment must be connected prior to removal, the
data must then be downloaded from it. Failure to follow this instruction,
could result in permanent damage to the instrument cluster.
Fully extend and lower the steering column for access.
3. Torque: 2 Nm
4.
5. NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both

sides.
6. Torque: 1.5 Nm
7. Torque: 1.5 Nm
8.
Installation
2. Configure the instrument cluster and ignition keys using the diagnostic
tool.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Component Location
INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER - COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Time display
2 Ambient temperature/Frost warning symbol
3 Message Center
4 Trip computer information display
5 Audio, telephone displays
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Overview
OVERVIEW
Designed to look similar to a conventional instrument cluster for the main display, the TFT display can be continually
reconfigured to prioritise and refine the information presented to the driver. All displays are 'virtual' gauges with the
speedometer and the tachometer being the dominant features of the new display.
Telephone and navigation information is shown in the LH (left-hand) side of the display. Time, temperature, navigation and trip
computer information is also displayed in this area. Messages are shown in the RH (right-hand) side of the display and
override the tachometer when message display is required.
The instrument cluster information areas display the following information to the driver:
Odometer - Displays the total vehicle distance traveled

Trip meter - There are 3 trip meters available; A and B which display the total vehicle distance traveled since the last
reset and a 'Trip Auto' meter which resets after every ignition cycle.
Ambient temperature - Displays the external ambient temperature in °C or °F
Message center - Displays system information to the driver.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center - System
System Operation
OPERATION
The information and messages which can be displayed in the instrument cluster are mainly generated from other system
control modules. When a system control module detects a change or a fault which is tagged to generate a message, an
electronic signal is sent via the medium or high speed CAN (controller area network) buses to the instrument cluster, which
displays the message. If more than one message is requested the instrument cluster displays them in order of priority.
DESCRIPTION
Odometer and Trip Meter
The trip computer memory stores data for a journey or series of journeys until it is reset to zero.
The odometer is located in the LH (left-hand) side of the TFT screen. In addition to displaying the total distance the vehicle
has travelled, this area of the display can also show the following information:
Odometer
Trip distance
Trip average speed
Trip average fuel consumption
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Range available on remaining fuel.
The above selections are shown in the order in which they appear. The selections can be made by pressing the trip button on
the end of the LH steering column multifunction switch repeatedly until the option required is reached.
There are 3 independent trip recordings available to view; A, B and automatic. The instrument cluster menu is used to select
which trip recording is displayed. The A and B memories can be set independently, while the Auto trip will reset after every
ignition cycle as the vehicle moves.
The automatic trip is always available and is reset each time the engine is started and the vehicle moves. Previous trips can
be added to form a continuous trip recording by pressing and releasing the trip button on the end of the LH steering column
multifunction switch when the automatic trip information is displayed. The message center will confirm that the previous
journey information has been added and pressing and holding the trip button for 3 seconds will add the data. The previous trip
information can also be deleted by pressing and releasing the trip button when the automatic trip information is displayed. The
message center will confirm deletion of the previous journey data and pressing and holding the trip button for 3 seconds will
delete the previous trip information.
Trip A and B can be reset by the driver at any time. When the required trip information is displayed, pressing and holding the
trip button for 3 seconds will erase the previous trip information stored. Resetting trip A or B will not affect the other trip
information, for example, if trip A is reset, trip B will retain its information until it is reset.
Ambient Temperature
The ambient temperature is displayed in the LH side of the TFT screen. The temperature can be displayed in degrees F or C
and this is selectable by the driver using the instrument cluster menu.
If the external temperature falls to 4°C (39°F) or below, the external temperature display is accompanied by an orange
snowflake symbol.
Navigation Information
The navigation system can display information in the LH side of the instrument cluster. When navigation information is
displayed, the fuel and engine temperature gages are removed and the Time, ambient temperature, trip, telephone or audio
information is removed while the navigation information is displayed.
Message Center
The message center is located in the RH (right-hand) side of the TFT screen. Other information displayed in this area may be
temporarily removed to allow for the message to be displayed.
The majority of messages are generated by the cluster which monitors system status via the bus systems and displays system
information messages as requested by the controlling module. Other system control modules are also capable of generating
messages to display system status. Some messages are accompanied by a chime, which is requested by the control module
generating the message and generated by the instrument cluster via the sounder, which is located on the top of the cluster.
The driver can view system status messages which are current in the instrument cluster by using the instrument cluster menu
and selecting the 'Show Warnings' menu selection.
The messages are displayed in a language applicable to the vehicle market configuration and can be changed using the
Gear Position Display
The gear position is displayed in the tachometer display on the RH side of the TFT screen. It shows the current selector
position P, R, N, D or S. When the transmission is in manual Dynamic Mode, the display will show the currently selected gear
ratio 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 in the LH side of the TFT screen, replacing the audio, telephone or navigation displays.
The gear position display is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module). The gear position is illuminated in response
to CAN bus messages from the TCM.
Service Interval Indicator
The Service Interval Indicator is displayed in the message center. The indicator displays information calculated by the ECM
(engine control module) to calculate the remaining distance to the next service based on the amount of fuel used since the
last service interval reset.
The ECM counts down the distance to engine service and the instrument cluster rounds this down to the nearest 50 miles (KM).
The fuel used based count down starts from 3200 miles (km) displaying the required figure in the trip computer message
center, for example 'Service Required in 1950 miles (km)'. When the ECM has calculated the distance to service is 0 miles (km),
the will request the instrument cluster to display 'Service Required' in the message center.
The ECM also monitors and calculates when the time to the next oil service is required and when an oil service is required,
'Service Required' is displayed in the message center. This message takes priority over the distance to service calculation.
The service information is displayed in the message center for 4 seconds at each ignition cycle. There is no minus figure if the
service distance is exceeded, 'Service Required' is displayed, via a CAN bus message from the instrument cluster, until the ECM
service counter is reset using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system .
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center
For a detailed description of the information and message centre system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-08 Information and Message Center)
Information and Message Center (Description and Operation),

Information and Message Center (Description and Operation),
Information and Message Center (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Rear seat entertainment remote control Fuses

Touch screen Wiring harness
Battery condition, state of charge
Rear seat entertainment remote control
Touch screen
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC index
DTC Index
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen (TS) (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Component Location
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) door mirror
2 RH (right-hand) blind spot monitoring module
3 LH (left-hand) blind spot monitoring module
4 LH (left-hand) door mirror
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Overview
Overview
Eliminating blind spots is a major element in vehicle body design, but because of the structural requirements of B, C and D
pillars, blind spots cannot be entirely eliminated. Statistics show that some accidents are directly attributable to drivers
moving across into the path of overtaking vehicles that have not been seen in conventional mirrors. New mirror designs have
improved the situation, however the introduction of a radar-based blind spot monitoring system helps to further reduce the
risk.
The blind spot monitoring system comprises:
LH (left-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor

RH (right-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor
LH (left-hand) door mirror
RH (right-hand) door mirror
The system uses two radar modules operating at a frequency of 24 GHz and each combining the radar and electronic module in
a single unit. The modules are located behind the rear bumper surface, symmetrically, one on each side of the car behind the
rear wheels. They are side facing and inclined rearwards at an angle of 16 degrees, which is dictated by the shape at the rear
of the vehicle. Each module is calibrated to detect a vehicle in the driver’s blind spot. Once a valid target is detected the
module illuminates an amber warning ‘alert icon’ LED (light emitting diode) in the relevant exterior door mirror. If there is a
fault or blockage with the blind spot monitoring system an amber warning indicator dot LED (light emitting diode) is displayed
in the exterior mirror and the message ‘blind spot monitoring not available’ or ‘blind spot sensor blocked’ is displayed in the
instrument cluster message center.
When the system initiates, it performs a self-check, during which the warning icons in the mirrors illuminate alternately for a
short period of time. Each module does a left/right determination check when the ignition is switched on. Each mirror has a
different circuit configuration so that the modules can determine which mirror they are connected to. If a module detects the
wrong mirror it will go into a fault condition.
The blind spot monitoring modules receive vehicle speed on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) and are inactive
until the vehicle reaches 16kph (10mph).
Each Blind Spot Monitor module emits a radar field greater than the blind spot area. The actual blind spot area is calibrated
into the module during its manufacture.
CAUTION: The blind spot monitoring system is designed as a driver aid not a safety device. The driver should always
exercise due care and attention whilst driving.
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired: D = High speed CAN bus: N = Medium speed CAN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
2 RH (right-hand) blind spot monitoring module
3 RH (right-hand) door mirror
4 LH (left-hand) door mirror
5 LH (left-hand) blind spot monitoring module
System Operation
Blind spot monitoring system detects overtaking vehicles relative to the radar modules, on either side of the vehicle, at a
distance of up to 2.5 meters laterally and in an area from the door mirror up to 6.0 meters behind the module. These criteria
identify an overtaking vehicle within the blind-spot area and within a typical carriageway lane width, while eliminating other
objects that are not relevant, either because of their position, they are stationary, traveling in the opposite direction. A vehicle
is classed as a heavy goods vehicle, car or motorcycle. A motorcycle is defined as a minimum size of 2.0m long, 0.8m wide
(widest point) and 1.1m high. The system is not affected by the mass of the overtaking vehicle providing all identification
criteria, including relative velocity of (16km/h - 10mph) or above, is met.
The system emits radar pulses and analyses the reflections, identifying objects of interest that move into the blind spot zone.
Having detected another vehicle in the defined blind spot zone it alerts the driver by illuminating the amber alert icon located
in the appropriate exterior mirror.
NOTE: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the warning alert icons in both
mirrors will illuminate.
The blind spot monitoring system lenses are shaped so as to minimize the visibility to other drivers. The LED (light emitting
diode)’s are located towards the outside extremity of the mirror face, within the peripheral view of the driver but not in any
area of the mirror where they could obscure or distract from the image.
Item Description
1 Warning alert icon
2 System status warning indicator
The LED (light emitting diode) lighting sequence is as follows;
Amber alert LED (light emitting diode) icon permanently lit - system operational, vehicle detected in blind spot area
No LED (light emitting diode) ’s lit – system active no vehicle detected in blind spot area
Amber status LED (light emitting diode) permanently lit - system not active or faulty
The system has operating limitations and is automatically turned off under certain operating conditions. During these
operating conditions the amber status LED (light emitting diode) is permanently lit.
The system operating limitations are as follows;
The area surrounding the radar face of the module must be clear of metallic items
The system is inactive until vehicle speed is greater than 16km/h - 10mph (amber status LED (light emitting diode)
permanently lit)
The system is inactive if an approved trailer is connected to the vehicle (amber status LED (light emitting diode)
permanently lit)
The system is inactive when reverse gear or park is selected (amber status LED (light emitting diode) permanently lit)
If either of the radar signals are blocked or distorted, for example by water, the radar face of the module is covered in mud,
sleet or snow the system may detect this and be disabled with the amber status LED (light emitting diode) permanently lit
together with a ‘blind spot monitoring blocked’ message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is
disabled until the blockage is cleared.
If there is a fault in the system the amber status LED (light emitting diode) is permanently lit and a ‘blind spot monitoring not
available’ message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is disabled until the fault is rectified.
System fault and blockage warnings are as follows;
The system is disabled when the radar module signal is blocked (amber status LED (light emitting diode) permanently
lit and instrument cluster message)
The system is disabled by a fault (amber status LED (light emitting diode) permanently lit and instrument cluster
message)
If there is a failure in the communication network and the warning LED (light emitting diode) ’s cannot be displayed in the
mirror, a failure message will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
When any faults are present in the system DTC (diagnostic trouble code) 's are stored in both blind spot monitoring modules
appropriate to each module. Replacement of modules requires the right hand module to be configured using the Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. Due to the fact that all modules are supplied as left hand modules the replacement left hand
modules do not require configuring.
Calibration of the modules using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
technology becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
Warning Devices - Warning Devices
For a detailed description of the Blindspot Monitoring system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-09 Warning Devices)
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),

Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Particular attention should be paid to the following items where DTCs may not be logged:
Check for contamination (e.g. dirt, grime, frosting, ice) around the blindspot monitoring sensors and clear.
Visual Inspection
Exterior rear view mirror glass Fuse(s)

Mud or sleet contamination around rear bumper area Relay(s)
Blindspot Monitoring Modules Wiring Harness
Blindspot Monitoring Modules
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left driver display
The instrument cluster Left driver alert LED circuit for short to power.
displays 'BSM System display alert
Fault' LED circuit -
DTC B11C915 is logged short to power
within the left hand Blind
Spot Monitoring module
The Left Alert icon is
constantly illuminated
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left mirror
The instrument cluster Left mirror ground circuit for open circuit.
displays 'BSM System ground circuit -
Fault' open circuit
DTC B11C915 is logged
within the left hand Blind
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right mirror
The instrument cluster Right mirror ground circuit for open circuit.
displays 'BSM System ground circuit -
Fault' open circuit
DTC B11C915 is logged
within the right hand Blind
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
The instrument cluster Left driver status LED circuit for short to ground. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
displays 'BSM System display status remains suspect the left hand Blindspot Monitoring module. Check
Fault' LED circuit - and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring module only, refer to
DTC U023200 is logged short to ground the new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
within the right hand Blind Suspect left Index.
Spot Monitoring module hand module
The left driver display failure
status LED does not
illuminate when the
vehicle is stationary, in
Park and the ignition is on
The instrument cluster Left driver alert LED circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Clear DTC and
displays 'BSM System display alert re-test. If DTC remains suspect the left hand Blindspot Monitoring
Fault' LED - short to module. Check and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring
DTC U023200 is logged ground, open module only, refer to the new module/component installation note at
within the right hand Blind circuit the top of the DTC Index.
Spot Monitoring module Suspect left
When the system is hand module
powered up the left driver failure
display alert LED does not
illuminate during the bulb
self-checks
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right driver display
The instrument cluster Right driver status LED circuit for short to power. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
displays 'BSM System display status remains suspect the right hand Blindspot Monitoring module. Check
Fault' LED - short to and install a new right hand Blindspot Monitoring module only, refer
DTC U023300 is logged power to the new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
within the left hand Blind Suspect right Index.
The right driver display failure
status LED is constantly
illuminated
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right driver display
The instrument cluster Right driver status LED circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
displays 'BSM System display status remains suspect the right hand Blindspot Monitoring module. Check
Fault' LED - open and install a new right hand Blindspot Monitoring module only, refer
DTC U023300 is logged circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
within the left hand Blind Suspect right Index.
When the system is failure
powered up the right
driver display status LED
does not illuminate during
the bulb self-checks
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right mirror
The instrument cluster Right mirror ground circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
displays 'BSM System ground circuit - suspect the left hand Blindspot Monitoring module. Check and install
Fault' open circuit a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC U023300 is logged Suspect right module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
within the left hand Blind hand module
Spot Monitoring module failure
When the system is
powered up both the right
driver display LEDs do not
illuminate during the bulb
self-checks
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR) (100-00 General
Warning Devices - Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Switch
Removal
NOTES:
2. Remove the RH fender splash shield.
Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
3.
Installation

Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring Sensor LH
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).

located on the locating pegs.
Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation


Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Component Location
Item Description
1 De-coupling ring
2 Front parking aid sensors
3 Parking aid switch
4 Rear parking aid sensors
Parking aid module
Component Location - Rear View Camera
Item Description
2 Rear view camera
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Overview
OVERVIEW
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle during a
forward (if front sensors are fitted) or reversing manoeuver. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver when parking or
maneuvering in a restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by
the driver
All vehicles are fitted with rear parking aid sensors. Higher specification vehicles may also be fitted with front parking aid
sensors.
A roof console mounted parking aid switch allows the driver to deactivate the parking aid system if operation is not required.
NOTE: The switch is only fitted to vehicles with front parking aid sensors.
A parking aid camera is a standard fitment on some variants and optional on others. The parking aid camera supplements the
information provided by the parking aid system by providing the driver with a visual display of the area directly behind the
vehicle.
Published: 01-Mar-2013
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired: O = LIN bus: D = High speed CAN bus: N = Medium speed CAN bus: P = MOST (media orientated
system transport) ring: I = CVBS signal
Item Description
1 Battery
6 IAM (integrated audio module)
7 Audi amplifier
8 Speakers
9 RH (right-hand) outer rear sensor
10 RH (right-hand) inner rear sensor
11 LH (left-hand) inner rear sensor
12 LH (left-hand) outer rear sensor
13 RH (right-hand) outer front sensor
14 RH (right-hand) inner front sensor
15 LH (left-hand) inner front sensor
16 LH (left-hand) outer front sensor
17 Parking aid switch
18 Parking aid module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PARKING AID CAMERA
Item Description
3 To MOST ring
4 Rear view camera
6 Parking aid module
8 Jaguar Drive control
System Operation
PARKING AID
The parking aid module receives and ignition power mode 6 supply from the RJB (rear junction box).
The parking aid module is connected to the entertainment system control module by the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus and the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST). The entertainment system is used by the parking aid system
to provide the driver with an audible warning. If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system
speakers will sound. If an obstacle is sensed by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front audio system speakers will
sound.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo from this
output is received by the sensors and used by the parking aid module to calculate the distance from an object.
When the parking aid module activates the system, the switch LED (light emitting diode) is illuminated to indicate that the
system is operating. The parking aid module then processes signals received from the sensors to determine if there is an
object with the detection range of the sensors. A parking aid screen is automatically displayed in the Touch Screen Display. If
the vehicle has a parking aid camera fitted, the camera display is automatically displayed in the TSD in preference to the
parking aid alert display. To view the parking aid sensor display, a single touch of the TSD screen will remove the camera
image display and show the parking aid alert display.
Parking Aid Alert Display

Item Description
A Camera image
B PDC (park distance control) image
C Original Touch-screen image
1 User selects reverse
2 User touches screen
3 ‘Rear camera’ soft key selected
4 (a)‘Display off’ soft key selected (b) User selects ‘Park’ c) Vehicle exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph)
5 User selects reverse
Item Description
A Solid line: The projected wheel trajectory
B Dotted line: The safe working width of the vehicle (including exterior mirrors)
C Luggage compartment access guideline: Do not reverse beyond this point if luggage compartment access is required
D Bumper inclusion
E
Parking sensor activation: A colored area appears, to indicate which rear sensors have been activated
In the combined mode, the sensors emit a series of ultrasonic impulses and then switch to receiver mode to receive the echo
reflected by an obstacle within the detection range. The received echo signals are amplified and converted from an analogue
signal to a digital signal by the sensor. The digital signal is passed to the parking aid module and compared with
pre-programmed data stored in an EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) within the module. The
module receives this data via the signal line from the sensor and calculates the distance from the object using the elapsed
time between the transmitted and received impulse. The duration of the impulse duration is determined by the module, with
the sensor controlling the frequency of the impulse output.
In receiver mode, the sensor receives impulses that were emitted by adjacent sensors. The module uses this information to
precisely determine the position and distance of the object.
If no objects are detected there are no further warning tones. If an object is detected, repeated audible tones are emitted
from either the front or rear audio speakers as appropriate. The time delay between the tones decreases as the distance
between the object and the vehicle decreases, until at approximately 300 mm (12 inches), the audible tone becomes
continuous.
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central sensors, the
time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner sensors only, the
audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner
sensor.
When approaching several objects within detection range, the control module recognises the distance from the vehicle to the
nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the corresponding audio
outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest detected object will take
priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front and rear
speakers.
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid sensors
will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid sensors will remain
operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the PDC control switch is pressed.
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated by
pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
The volume output of the parking aid audible tones can be adjusted by selecting the 'Vehicle Settings' menu and selecting
'Parking' from the menu on the TSD. The volume can be adjusted using the + or - selections on the TSD.
Distance Calculation
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone Continuous Audio Tone
1 Rear/Front Outer Approximately 600 mm (24 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
2 Rear Inner Approximately 1800 mm (71 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
3 Front Inner Approximately 800 mm (31 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
PARKING AID CAMERA

The parking aid camera receives an ignition power mode 6 power supply from the RJB. It also has a LIN (local interconnect
network) bus connection from the RJB which is not used at the moment but installed for a later enhancement of the parking
aid camera.
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) is used for the video image
transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the RJB
transmits a reverse selected signal on the medium speed CAN bus message to the entertainment system control module. This
message is transferred on the MOST to the TSD which displays the parking aid camera video input from the camera in
preference to the parking aid alert screen.
If the driver does not require the camera image in the TSD, a single touch on the screen will revert the display to the parking
aid alert screen. The camera view can be reselected by pressing the 'Rear Camera' softkey on the TSD.
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 10 seconds after the transmission has been put
into drive 'D'. This is to prevent the TSD switching between screens if the vehicle is being manoeuvred into a parking space. If
the vehicle forward speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) within the 10 second period, the camera image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD display is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected. When
reverse gear is deselected and the 10 second period has expired, the TSD will revert back to its switched off state.
Camera Viewing Angles

PARKING AID
Parking Aid Module
The parking aid module is located on the LH (left-hand) 'A' pillar.
The parking aid module has three connectors which provide for power, ground and CAN bus connections, front parking aid
sensors and rear parking aid sensors. The medium speed CAN bus connections provide for the receipt of the following
information from other systems:
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module - Road speed signal

TCM (transmission control module) - Reverse gear engaged signal
The module also outputs messages on the medium speed CAN bus which are received by the TSD. The TSD processes these
messages and converts them into Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) signals which are passed to the audio system
power amplifier. These signals are then used by the power amplifier to emit the applicable warning tones from the front or rear
audio speakers when an object is detected by the front or rear parking aid sensors. A warning tone can also be emitted to alert
the driver to a fault in the parking aid system.
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module constantly
monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone through the rear audio
system speakers when the ignition is switched on. If front parking aid sensors are fitted, the control switch LED will also flash
6 times.
Parking Aid Sensors
Four ultrasonic sensors are located in the front (if fitted) and rear bumpers.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which mates with a bumper harness, which in turn is connected to the main body
harness. Three pins provide for power supply, ground and signal lines to and from the parking aid module.
The parking aid module controls the operation of each sensor using a digital output on the signal line. The module controls the
sensor in one of two modes; combined transmitter and receiver mode or receiver mode only.
Parking Aid Switch
The parking aid switch is located in the instrument panel switch pack, above the touch screen. The switch is the LH switch with
an integral LED.
The switch is a non-latching push switch which allows the driver to select the parking aid system on or off. When pressed, the
switch momentarily connects a ground to the parking aid module.
The LED indicates when the parking aid system is active. The LED is controlled by the parking aid module.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required or not
required.
PARKING AID CAMERA

The parking aid camera is located on a bracket which is attached to the luggage compartment lid finisher.
The camera is connected to the vehicle harness by one 3 pin connector for the power, ground and LIN bus and a second
connector for the video co-axial cable.
the camera produces color images to an analogue NTSC format, with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels and an aspect ratio of
4:3.
The image captured by the camera is mirrored to give the driver a true representation of the rear view on the TSD.
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, characteristics and limitations refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-13 Parking Aid)
Parking Aid (Description and Operation),

Parking Aid (Description and Operation),
Parking Aid (Description and Operation).
Parking Aid System On-Board Self-Test

As part of the strategy of the system if any DTC’s are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will sound and the
parking aid switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 6 times at ignition on.
If a fault is present when the parking aid system is activated then the parking aid switch (where fitted) status LED will
flash 6 times indicating an issue with front or rear parking aid sensors, wiring switch, parking aid control module or hard
wired sounders.
The rear parking aid sounder/rear audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a fault is
detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN) bus error.
(Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front parking aid and a hard wired rear parking aid sounder). If there is a fault
with the rear parking aid sounder the error tone will come from the front parking aid sounder unit (integral with the
instrument cluster).
Audible and Visual Warnings when Parking Aid System is in Error State
Rear Parking Aid
System Fitted and
No Parking Aid
System Switch Rear Parking Aid System Fitted and Parking Aid Front and Rear Parking Aid System Fitted with
Fitted System Switch Fitted Parking Aid System Switch Fitted
A long high-pitched
error tone will A long high-pitched error tone will sound at A long high-pitched error tone will sound at
sound at Ignition ignition on for approx 3 seconds and the ignition on for approximately 3 seconds and
On for approx 3 parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6 the parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6
seconds times at ignition on. Every time the parking times at ignition on. Every time the parking aid
aid system is activated within the same system is activated within the same ignition
ignition cycle, parking aid switch indicator cycle the parking aid switch indicator LED will
LED will flash 6 times flash 6 times

CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is not acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins.
NOTES:
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads
into account.
concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
3. Ensure that the parking aid sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor.
Visual Inspection
Parking aid sensor condition/damaged Battery

Parking aid sensor installation and holder Fuse(s)
Parking aid sensor alignment Relays
Parking aid sensor contamination Wiring harness
Bumper cover(s) Electrical connector(s)
Vehicle ride height Front parking aid sensor(s)
Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted Rear parking aid sensor(s)
Parking aid switch and LED
Parking aid control module
Parking aid sounder
Audio system
the next step.
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins.
NOTES:
Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker, ensure the in car
infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
Parking aid sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Front or rear parking aid Clean front or rear parking aid sensors
NOTE:
sensors dirty Check the front or parking aid rear sensor position
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Front or rear parking aid Check the front or rear parking aid sensor are
Parking aid system not sensor position incorrect correctly installed
functioning correctly. (No Front or rear parking aid Check front or rear parking aid sensor coupling
DTCs displayed) sensor incorrectly installed rings are installed/installed correctly
Front or rear parking aid Ensure all parking aid system connectors are
sensor coupling rings not correctly latched
installed/incorrectly installed Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
Parking aid control module or painted parking aid sensor is installed
parking aid sensor connector - Parking aid sensors that are painted
not fully latched incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
Parking aid sensors painted standards, will not be considered in any
without being removed from warranty claim
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
Parking aid sensors incorrectly Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder and
NOTE:
mounted locked. Ensure the sensors are central in the holder
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Incorrect vehicle ride height and bumper and at the correct angle
Parking aid system not Dirty parking aid sensor face. Ensure vehicle ride height is within the specified
functioning correctly. (No Ice/snow covered sensor. limits. Rectify as required
DTCs displayed). System Debris trapped between Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the
characteristics or parking aid sensor and sensor and dry as required. Clear any debris from
environmental effects parking aid sensor body. the sensor and holder as required. Water flowing
Heavy rain or water splash over the sensor is a system limitation. (no action
from the ground required)
Non standard, bumper, Check for non standard, bumper, exhausts/tailpipe,
exhausts/tailpipes, tow bar or tow bar or external spare wheel mounting that may
external spare wheel be being detected by the parking aid system.
mounting Rectify as required
Area around vehicle is not Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of any
clear of obstacles such as obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable area
channels, gutters or other before continuing diagnosis
items on the ground Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds are in
Exhaust gas and warm air the area around the parking aid sensor detection
clouds creating ghost echoes range
Vehicle not on level ground or Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and clear of
next to a gradient any ramps, potholes or speed bumps, move the
Parking aid sensors painted vehicle to a suitable area before continuing
without being removed from diagnosis
the bumper assembly or not Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
painted to the manufacturer painted parking aid sensor is installed
specification - Parking aid sensors that are painted
incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Parking aid sensors are being Possible issue with sensor connectors
returned with no faults found not latched correctly When either no/intermittent operation has been
or signs of water reported the following action should be taken
ingress/corrosion Using Datalogger identify the position of the
suspect parking aid sensor within the bumper
1. Visually locate the position of the suspect
parking aid sensor. Inspect and provide details in
claim if the sensor has any sign of physical
damage
2. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring at
the main harness connector. Inspect the main
harness connectors and terminals for signs of
damage, backed out pins, corrosion and water
ingress, or damage to the seals. Provide details in
claim if any of the above symptom's are present
3. Attempt to remove the harness connector from
the suspect parking aid sensor without using the
connector latch i.e. lightly pull back on ALL wires
together, ensuring the harness is held close to the
back of the connector, not elsewhere on the wiring
harness. DO NOT apply excessive force. If the
connector can be removed without using the latch,
provide details in claim if connector is loose. If the
connector is fully latched, disconnect it from the
sensor
4. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect sensor harness connector has any sign of
water ingress/corrosion
5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect parking aid sensor harness connector
shows any sign that the terminals have backed-out
of the connector or for any damage to the terminal
seals. Replace/repair the harness as required and
proceed
6. Remove the suspect parking aid sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the parking aid sensor connector
for signs of water ingress/corrosion. Provide details
in claim if corrosion/water ingress is present
7. Exchange the suspect parking aid sensor with
another parking aid sensor within the bumper that
is performing correctly. Reconnect all sensors and
reconnect the bumper main harness connector.
Repeat step 1. Confirm if the original fault now
appears at the new position of the suspect parking
aid sensor, if so, proceed to step
8. If not, carry out the appropriate open circuit and
short circuit checks between the original suspect
parking aid sensor harness connector and the
parking aid control module
9. Refit the parking aid sensors to their original
position in the bumper
10. Reconnect the parking aid sensor to the
bumper harness connector. Reconnect main harness
connector and refit the bumper
11. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present, replace
only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1 When the parking aid system is activated, there is a vibration on the parking aid sensor membrane. This
can be verified by touching the parking aid sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen, small
screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted surface.
Are the parking aid sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face.
Parking aid system functioning correctly?
Yes
No further action required.
No
GO to A3.
1 Check parking aid sensors correctly mounted. Parking aid sensor holder correctly mounted. Parking aid
sensor decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. Parking aid sensor positioning correct. Parking aid sensor
painted without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer specification.
Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A4.
1 Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired parking aid speakers. Check the
parking aid speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new parking aid
speaker as required. Vehicles with audio parking aid. Confirm audio system is functioning correctly. Refer
to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Parking aid system functioning correctly.
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Isolate the fault to front or rear parking aid sensors
Are all rear parking aid sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A7.
1 Check the correct parking aid control module is installed to the vehicle.
Yes
No
GO to A8.
1 If all 4 front parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A9.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A11.
1 If all 4 rear parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power supply.
Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: PARKING AID SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face. Check for any damage to the parking aid sensor face. Rectify as
required. Snow, water or ice on sensor face. Parking aid sensor face has been repainted to the incorrect
thickness. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B2.
1 Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B3.
1 Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit, modified
exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder.
Yes
No
GO to B4.
1 Limitations or characteristics of the parking aid system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
vapour, signal reflection.
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation) /
Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation) /
Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Parking Aid Module (PAM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Parking Aid - Proximity Camera
For a detailed description of the rear view camera system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Visual Inspection
Touch screen Fuses

Rear view camera Wiring harnesses and connectors
Touch screen
Rear view camera
the next step
Symptom Chart

Rear view camera
image slow to react System operation within
NOTE: After selecting reverse, it may take up to 20 seconds for the
specification
image to be displayed.
No further action necessary
Blank screen
Rear view camera not GO to Pinpoint Test A.
functioning
Blue screen
Video in signal absent GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No tracking lines
Missing/invalid reverse Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
gear signal central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
LIN fault DTC index
Frozen tracking lines
LIN data gateway fault GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blank screen is the default display when the rear view camera is not transmitting an image.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground connections to the rear view
1
camera
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Repair power or ground circuit as necessary
A2: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 2
CAUTION: Do not probe the coaxial cable connectors as they are prone to damage.
NOTE: A DC resistance measurement is not a reliable test method as the system operates at low voltage and high
frequency.
1 Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors)
2 Check the coaxial cable for excessive bending, clamping and insulation damage
Is the rear view camera coaxial cable disconnected or damaged?
Yes
Reconnect or install a new coaxial cable as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST B : BLUE SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUE SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blue screen is the default display when the video in signal is absent.
1 Select reverse gear and observe the touch screen

Is the touch screen blue?
Yes
Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors), and retest
No
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST C : ABSENT TRACKING LINES TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: ABSENT TRACKING LINES TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear view camera LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is a LIN bus circuit fault present?
Yes
Repair the LIN bus circuit as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST D : FROZEN TRACKING LINES TESTS

D1: FROZEN TRACKING LINES TEST 1
NOTE: The vehicle may take 30 seconds (or 100m) to learn the steering centre position after starting the engine. This is
normal.
1 Start the engine

2 Wait at least 30 seconds
3 Select reverse gear
4 Turn the steering wheel and observe the touch screen
Do the tracking lines react to steering input?
Yes
No fault present
No
Potential LIN data gateway fault
DTC Index
Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
3.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the area

illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or unpainted

bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
3.
Installation


Parking Aid - Parking Aid Camera
Removal

Installation).

component.
5.
Installation

Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation


Parking Aid - Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
2. Torque: 5 Nm
3. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid damage.
Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid damage.
Installation


www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Rear Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
2. CAUTIONS:
Installation


Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care
Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document defines the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries, and the standard of battery care at dealers and
retailers for new vehicles.
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are conventional
flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM – also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)) technology and also
applies to both Primary, Secondary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved resistance to cycling as seen in stop
start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this document
must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode programmed into the
vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode disabled (where applicable) using an
approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before the customer takes delivery.
The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
- Self Discharge: - A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal chemical processes
whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
- Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw charge from the
battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These processes and
the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to discharge over a number of weeks /
months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when the transit relay
has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will discharge more rapidly.
For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m (16 ft) away from the vehicle when the vehicle is
parked or stored.
AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a responsibility
to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE
2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a JLR approved showroom conditioner capable
of delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities
Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-flash activities,
SDD work or ignition on (power mode 6) related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such activities MUST have
a JLR approved power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework
For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be disconnected or a JLR
approved power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to discharge by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.
However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a discharged battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one prior to delivery
to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery became discharged.
Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the recommended
earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries
AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under these
conditions the generator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the electronic
components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN GASES. IT IS
THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential form of
ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
Do not smoke when working near batteries.

Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or the vehicle,
the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific gravity, removal, refitting or
carrying batteries:
Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable gloves.
If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed with clean
water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a neutralizer.
In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the eyes, bathe
the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent medical attention.
If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with clean water.
Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a desired specific
gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small amounts of acid while
stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception of lead or lead-lined containers,
always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in excessively warm locations or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped, ensure it is
disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on
disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE

Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the battery test
process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
NOTE: The Midtronics code from the tester must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6)
of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage,
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE

If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to handover to
customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED from the battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
document.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER

Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to be confirmed.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE

All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and controlled on a ‘First
In First Out’ basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct sunlight or
under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be fitted to any vehicle. Any
batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved
tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE

Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be
re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS

It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery charged to
avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface charge must be
removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed.
Turn on the ignition (power mode 6) but do not start the vehicle
Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative terminal.
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document (JLR 000015).
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the appropriate
hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery Type Battery Tester Battery Tester

Jaguar Land Rover
AGM & Flooded Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080 Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result repeats after
CELL BATTERY surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone chargers that
the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch is selected the result would
be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the manufacturers operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any test. It is
recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
Charge the battery using a JLR approved charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.
NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging and analysis,
the charger may display ‘Top-Off Charging’, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the current falls to 5A or less,
otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging, a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the
Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
document.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop manual for
instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS control module must be reset following the
installation of a new battery. The BMS control module reset procedure must be performed using an approved diagnostic
system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK OR TOP UP
THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs visible on the
top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection of the
maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery separators.
On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is level with the
indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this type of battery.
If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain
VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in the approved
Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of time, it is
recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital Multi-Meter
(DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the Diagnosis and Testing
section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for example vehicle alarm fully armed), all
doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as to appear closed from an electrical point of view).
The test should take place after the vehicle has entered shutdown mode. The time taken for this to occur after the ignition is
switched off varies according to model (Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a pulsation in the
measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital Multi- Meter (DVOM) with an
averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter
Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for example XK 2006
onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is capable of handling.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

1. Switch ignition to ‘on’ or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to ‘off’ (do not crank)
2. Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
3. Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
4. Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric alarm arming)
5. Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
6. Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for details. Note all
cars from 10MY onwards and XK from 07MY and XF from 08MY should be less than 30mA after 30 minutes
7. Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe around individual
junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in preference to the old method of
removing fuses for the following reasons:
The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing to normal
levels
The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to ‘reset’ and the drain will
be lost and go un-diagnosed
QUIESCENT DRAIN - TYPICAL VALUES
NOTE: The quiescent drain after the initial shutdown period should not exceed the value shown in the table.
Jaguar Quiescent Drain Values

MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJS 3.2 60 <30
Sovereign 3.2 60 <37.3
XJ6 4.0 60 <38.6
XJS 60 <43.9
XJ6 (X300) (1995MY) 60 <43
XJ8 (X300) 60 <30
XK8 (X100) 60 <30
S-Type (X200) 60 <30
X-Type (X400) 30 <30
XJ6 (X350) 40 <30
XJ8 (X350) 40 <30
XK (X150) - From 2006MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2008MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
XF SportBrake (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
<20 (unlocked) <25
XJ (X351) - From 2010MY - 2012MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
30 (unlocked) <20
XJ (X351) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
F - Type (X152) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer module, etc.)
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is approximately 15
minutes.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging System
For a detailed description of the charging system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information)
Battery Care Requirements (Description and Operation),

Quiescent Drain (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Drive belt Battery
Drive belt tensioner Battery connections
Generator pulley Starter motor
Check the security of the generator fittings Harnesses and connectors
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
the next step
Symptom Chart

Charge warning Check the warning lamp function with the ignition on and the engine off.
lamp does not come Bulb/circuit fault Replace bulbs or repair the circuit(s) as necessary. Check for DTCs
on Generator fault indicating a generator, CAN or engine control module fault
CAN circuit fault
fault
Charge warning Check the battery and generator cables. Refer to the electrical guides.
lamp stays Accessory drive belt Check for DTCs indicating a generator fault. Check the accessory drive belt
on/battery broken condition and tension. Check that the pulley does not rotate independently
discharges Generator pulley of the generator. Check for DTCs indicating a CAN or engine control module
slipping on shaft fault
Generator fault
Battery cable fault
CAN circuit fault
fault
Battery discharged Carry out automated diagnostic routine using manufacturer approved
Charging/monitoring diagnostic system
circuit fault
Battery monitoring
system failure
Generator failure
Battery failure
Quiescent current high
Generator not Carry out automated diagnostic routine using manufacturer approved
charging Charging/monitoring diagnostic system
circuit fault
Generator failure
Pulley loose/failure
Noise (mechanical) Check the accessory drive belt condition and tension. Disconnect the
Accessory drive belt accessory drive belt and check that the generator rotates freely
slipping
Generator fault
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
(100-00)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code Index: Gateway Module (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Module Name: Engine Control Module
(Description and Operation).
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
Battery Specifications
Engine Amp hour (Ah) Cold cranking amps (CCA)
3.0L diesel 90 950
5.0L petrol without block heater 90 800
5.0L petrol with block heater 90 950
Battery positive cable to rear junction box retaining nut 12 9 -
Battery monitoring system retaining nut to battery positive terminal 6 - 53
Battery ground cable to body retaining bolt 25 18 -
Battery cable terminals 6 - 53
Battery clamp bolts 13 10 -
Battery tray retaining bolt 10 7 -
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
4 Battery
5 Electric booster heater megafuse
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Overview
OVERVIEW
Mounted on the battery negative terminal is a battery monitoring system module. The battery monitoring system module is
integral with the battery negative cable and is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the battery monitoring system module, always use a suitable body ground point rather than
the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply to the vehicle.
If a new battery is fitted to the vehicle, the battery monitoring system module will require re-calibrating using the Jaguar
Fitted on the battery positive terminal is a transit relay. The transit relay must be removed from the vehicle during the
Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI). For additional information, refer to the PDI Manual.
The vehicle battery provides power to the BJB (battery junction box). The BJB contains 3 megafuses, delivering power to the
RJB (rear junction box), the CJB (central junction box) and the EJB (engine junction box). In addition to containing fuses and
relays, the RJB and RJB contain software to control a number of vehicle systems. These functions are covered in the
appropriate sections of this manual.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
Item Description
1 Battery monitoring system module
3 Generator/regulator
7 Battery
System Operation
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
Periodically the battery monitoring system module will instigate a self-calibration routine. To self calibrate, the battery
monitoring system first charges the battery to its full condition.
NOTE: If the vehicle is only driven for short periods the charging process could take a number of days to complete.
Once the battery is fully charged, the battery monitoring system will discharge the battery to approximately 75% of its full
state of charge, but never lower than 12.2 V. The time taken to complete this part of the routine is dependent on the electrical
load on the vehicle.
When the second part of the routine has been successfully completed, the battery monitoring system will return the battery to
its optimum level of charge. The optimum level of charge will be between 12.6 V and 15 V, depending on battery condition,
temperature and loading.
The battery monitoring system module also monitors the battery condition with the engine switched off. If a low voltage
condition is detected the module can request the infotainment system is switched off to protect battery voltage. Once the
infotainment system has been switched off, the vehicle must be run for at least 5 minutes to charge the battery before the
infotainment system can be operated with the engine switched off.
BATTERY
The battery is located under the floor in the RH (right-hand) side of the luggage compartment.
On new vehicles the battery positive terminal is fitted with a transit relay. The transit relay must removed using the correct
process detailed in the PDI manual.
The battery negative terminal is fitted with a battery monitoring system module. The module is integral with the battery
negative cable and communicates with the CJB via a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. The battery condition
information is passed to the ECM which controls the generator output accordingly.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the battery monitoring system module, always use a suitable body ground point rather
than the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply. The recommended ground point is the spare wheel
securing bracket in the luggage compartment.
Failure to use the recommended ground point will lead to the setting of a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). Incorrect information
of battery condition will be retained by the battery monitoring system module due to the unmonitored current flow into the
battery. The system will however, recognize and compensate for the change in battery status after a period of time.
If a new battery is fitted, the battery monitoring system module will require re-calibration using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system. Replacement of the battery monitoring system module requires no action as the module will re-calibrate automatically.
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
Battery Monitoring System Module
The battery monitoring system module measures battery current and voltage, which it communicates to the CJB over a LIN bus
connection. The CJB transmits the battery information to the instrument cluster over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network)bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway between the medium and high speed CAN bus networks, and transmits
the battery condition information to the ECM over the high speed CAN bus. Based on the information received from the battery
monitoring system module, the ECM will control the output from the generator and request the switching off of electrical loads
if necessary.
CAUTION: Due to the self-calibration routine, it is recommended that all power supply diagnostic testing is carried out
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system rather than a digital multimeter
The battery monitoring system module is able to generate DTC's to help diagnose battery or generator power supply issues.
These DTC's can be read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system can also be
used to implement a battery and generator self test routine. For additional information, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing
If a fault is detected, the ECM will override the battery monitoring system module.
The battery monitoring system module DTC's can be used to help diagnose battery or generator power supply faults. The DTC's
are stored in both the CJB and the ECM. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system has a process for an automated power supply
diagnostic procedure. The procedure provides a menu driven process to locate a fault in a logical sequence. The procedure uses
the capability of the battery monitoring system and generator LIN bus controlled functions to provide current flow information
and will detect if the battery monitoring system or generator are functioning correctly.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
NOTES:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the scan
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional information
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
into account.
Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Drive belt Battery
Drive belt tensioner Battery connections
Generator pulley Starter motor
Check the security of the generator fixings Harnesses and connectors
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Battery power to vehicle High resistance between battery terminals and GO to Pinpoint Test
interrupted clamps A.
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide

Carry out the following: -
Surface Voltage Removal Process
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed
1. Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle
2. Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
3. Switch off the headlamps
4. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) Air conditioning
(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery negative terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery negative
clamp, clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test
GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) Air conditioning
(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery positive terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery power clamp,
clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test GO to
A2.
Reference Description
1 LCD screen with main menu
2 Control panel (key board and power button)
3 Positive and negative fly leads
4 Fly leads connection
5 Temperature sensor
6 Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
7 Amp hour
8 Battery rating (CCA)
9 Rating units
10 Battery type
NOTE: Flooded batteries does not have AGM on the label
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test procedure
Checks Action
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or damage
to the battery casing NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do not
return battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks evident

Battery vent pipe routing Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps Clean or replace as required
EXP-1080 fly lead connection Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries including
Primary and Secondary batteries
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
- Black lead to negative terminal
- Red lead to positive terminal
- Confirm the connections are secure
3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN

4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT
NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION
5. Battery Location
Select Next
6. VIN. When IN VEHICLE selected, enter the last six of the VIN using the key pad
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)
NOTE: ALL AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label) Flooded batteries have no reference to being Flooded.
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE
8. Battery Units. Select the correct battery rating from the battery label in brackets (number 9). Scroll using the arrow
on the Midtronics panel and select Next
NOTE: UNITS
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating (For CCA refer
to battery label)
Select Next
NOTES:
TEMPERATURE
Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause damage not be
covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service center
10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
Select Next
NOTE: TESTING
11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when test has
completed
NOTES:
SURFACE CHARGE
If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
11a. Surface Charge. This next step is an additional surface charge test required if the voltage is above 12.4v with a
low CCA measured. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-1080 shows Turn
off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTES:
BATTERY CHARGE
If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger for the
recommended time shown on the results screen
Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for the recommended time shown on the
results screen
NOTE: For a warranty claim you must supply both before and after test codes in the technical comments box when
submitting the claim
NOTE: DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY
This may not pop up on the screen and is automated program within the unit
NOTE: This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has completed
Number Description
1 Battery test result
2 CCA (Measured capacity rating)
3 Voltage
4 CCA (Manually entered)
5 Temperature
6 State Of Charge (SOC)
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result Action

GOOD BATTERY Test complete no action required
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging complete.
Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
REPLACE BATTERY / BAD Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
NOTES:
TEST CODE
Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
12b. If test result equals "Charge and Re-test" scroll down using the arrow keys to Time To Charge screen and follow
the 50AMP charge time for all vehicles apart from Defender which can be charged with a 25Amp charger
Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same specification
(cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless formally
instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM battery of the
same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery, unless formally instructed by
Jaguar/Land Rover
DTC Index
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Disconnect and Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. Refer to: Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
3. Raise and secure the luggage compartment floor covering.
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harness.
5.
Connect
1. Torque: 6 Nm
2.
3. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.
4. Lower the luggage compartment floor covering.

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system.
6. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
7. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
8. Reset the clock to the correct time.
9. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
10. Switch the engine off.

Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
2. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
3. Raise and secure the luggage compartment floor covering.

harness.
Torque: 6 Nm
5.
harness.
Torque: 6 Nm
7.
8. Torque: 13 Nm

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system .
3. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
4. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
5. Reset the clock to the correct time.
6. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
7. Switch the engine off.

Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
Engine mount lower nut 100 74 -
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator
For a additional information.

REFER to: Charging System (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Published: 21-Jan-2014
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator
Removal

Installation).

6.
8. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque: 47 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 63 Nm
11. Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the

engine.
12.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability - DVD/USB

Vehicle Pre - 10MY 10 MY 11 MY 12MY 13MY 14MY
XK DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
F-Type - - - - - USB
XF DVD DVD DVD USB USB USB
XJ - USB USB USB USB USB
Freelander DVD DVD DVD DVD USB USB
Discovery 3 DVD - - - -
Discovery 4 - External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Evoque - - - USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L320) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L494) - - - - - USB
Range Rover (L322) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool - -
Range Rover (L405) - - - - USB USB
NOTE: For vehicles using SD card navigation updates refer to SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation) below.
Mapping Regions
Region Mapping Area
1 North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
2 Western and Eastern Europe
3 Japan
4 Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
5 South Africa
6 South America (Brazil and Argentina)
7 Russia
8 Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
9 South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into and left in
the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the customer.
External HD Service Tool Map Updates
Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated into the touch
screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map update DVD's which are loaded
onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map data is then loaded from the diagnostic
equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to the touch s screen from the navigation tool hard
drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary when a new
map update DVD is released.
Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
Select Setup on th navigation update tool.

Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the USB cable and
press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to proceed.
When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved
diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.

Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment and press
Continue proceed
The navigation update tool will then read the map data
Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
Map data upload is now complete.

Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.
Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.
Select Map Change using the touch screen.

Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the relevant
region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.

Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
Select OK using the touch screen.
The map update will begin.
When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue using the touch
screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
Start the engine.

Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.
Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in the background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that navigation is
unavailable.
Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu screen.
When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.
The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately

Turn off the engine.
Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the
DVD.
SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation)

The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly
from the SD card.
NOTE: The following countries use SD card navigation updates.
Country
ANGOLA
ARGENTINA
AZERBAIJAN
BAHAMAS
BARBADOS
BENIN
BOTSWANA
BRAZIL
BRUNEI
BURUNDI
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
EGYPT
FIJI
GHANA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
ISRAEL
JAMAICA
KENYA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
MALAWI
MALI
MAURITIUS
MONGOLIA
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
NAMIBIA
NIGER
Country
NIGERIA
PERU
PHILIPPINES
RWANDA
SENEGAL
SOUTH AFRICA
SRI LANKA
SAINT LUCIA
SWAZILAND
TAIWAN
TANZANIA
THAILAND
TOGO
TUNISIA
UGANDA
URUGUAY
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Information
and Entertainment System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (415-01A Information and Entertainment System)
Audio System (Description and Operation),

Audio System (Description and Operation),
Audio System (Description and Operation).
NOTES:
account.
Visual Inspection
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) Fuses

Audio Amplifier Module (AAM) Wiring harnesses and connectors
Touch Screen (TS) Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM) Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM) Touch Screen (TS)
TV Control Module (TVCM) Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM) Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
Speakers TV Control Module (TVCM)
Scratched/dirty compact discs Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
Water ingress Antennae
Speakers
the next step
Symptom Chart

Audio/video system
inoperative at start up Last used audio/video source GO to Pinpoint Test A.
inoperative
MOST network fault
Audio/video soft key greyed
out on touch screen Last used audio/video source GO to Pinpoint Test A.
inoperative
MOST network fault
Soft key response different to

soft key touched Touch screen calibration Perform touch screen calibration. GO to Pinpoint
incorrect Test C.
Shortcut soft keys missing

from home screen on the Shortcut soft keys set to off Set the shortcut soft keys to on by navigating to
touch screen after operating the Clear all the home screen and operating the following soft
soft key on the 'Home menu keys: Setup, System, Home menu shortcuts,
shortcuts' screen Default. The default shortcut soft keys will now be
available on the home screen. The shortcut soft
keys can be customised as necessary
Poor audio quality (all

sources) MOST harness connections Check MOST harness connectors for security
loose Check MOST harness connectors for contamination
MOST harness connections Check the routing of the MOST harness
contaminated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
MOST harness misrouted - system, check the audio amplifier module for
Too many bends or bend related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
radius less than 25mm
Audio amplifier system fault
One or more speakers

inoperative Audio amplifier system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the audio amplifier module for
Radio inoperative
AM/FM antenna fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Integrated audio module system, check the integrated audio module for
internal failure related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Digital radio inoperative

Digital radio antenna fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Digital radio control module system, check the digital radio control module for
Digital radio no signal

reception - New digital radio Initial tuning not completed
NOTE: Some functions are inhibited when the vehicle
control module is moving.
Operate the Auto-tune soft key
Digital radio poor signal

reception Tuning not refreshed
Link DAB set to off
is moving.
L-band antenna set to off in a
L-band antenna region Operate the Auto-tune soft key
Band 3 antenna set to off in Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the
a band 3 antenna region Options soft key and set Link DAB to on
L-band antenna or link Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the L
harness damaged band and Band 3 soft key
Band 3 antenna or link Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the L
harness damaged band and Band 3 soft key
Software issue Check the L-band antenna and link harness for
damage
Check the band 3 antenna and link harness for
damage
system, re-configure the digital radio control
module with the latest level software
Digital radio channel list not

displayed Tuning not refreshed
L-band antenna set to off in a
is moving.
L-band antenna region
Band 3 antenna set to off in Operate the Auto-tune soft key
a band 3 antenna region Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the L
band and Band 3 soft key
Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the L
band and Band 3 soft key
Digital radio interrupted by
announcements Announcements set to on
is moving.
Operate the Settings soft key, followed by the

Announcements soft key, and set all
Announcements to off
Unable to store preset

channels in digital radio Preset # soft key not Operate the Preset # soft key for at least 2
operated for sufficient seconds to store the current station
duration
Digital radio will not select

preset station when Preset No station stored to relevant Store a station to the relevant Preset # soft key
# soft key operated Preset # soft key and retest
Satellite radio antenna fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

NOTE: Satellite Digital
Satellite radio control module system, check the satellite radio control module for
Audio Radio Service (SDARS)
applies to NAS market
vehicles only.
Satellite radio inoperative
Vehicle not in USA No fault to rectify

Poor signal reception The vehicle must have clear line of sight to a
Satellite Digital Audio Radio satellite, which means being outside and having no
Service (SDARS) system fault blockages between the vehicle and the satellite
vehicles only.
No Satellite Digital Audio system, check the Satellite Radio Control Module
Radio Service (SDARS) (SRCM) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
channels available - 'No DTC index
signal' or 'Acquiring signal'
message
Channel 184 is available No fault to rectify. Subscribe to Satellite Digital

without subscription for a Audio Radio Service (SDARS) to resume service
limited period (6 months)
vehicles only.
Only one Satellite Digital

channel available (channel
184) - 'Unsubscribed'
message
Channel 184 is available No fault to rectify. Subscribe to Satellite Digital

without subscription for a Audio Radio Service (SDARS) to resume service
limited period (6 months)
vehicles only.
No Satellite Digital Audio

Radio Service (SDARS)
channels available after 6
months without subscribing -
'Unsubscribed' message
Adult channels blocked by No fault to rectify. Subscribe to Satellite Digital

subscription type (family Audio Radio Service (SDARS) full package to receive
package) adult channels
vehicles only.
Some Satellite Digital Audio

Radio Service (SDARS)
unavailable - 'Unsubscribed'
message
Payment not made No fault to rectify

vehicles only.
Satellite Digital Audio Radio

Service (SDARS) pay channels
unavailable - 'Unsubscribed'
message
Compact disc player
inoperative Incompatible/damaged Insert a known good disc and retest
compact disc Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Unable to upload files to the

hard drive Incompatible/damaged Insert a known good disc and retest
compact disc Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Auxiliary audio inoperative

Incompatible/faulty auxiliary Connect a known good auxiliary device to the
device auxiliary socket and retest
Auxiliary device link cable Connect a known good auxiliary device to the
fault auxiliary socket using a known good link cable and
Integrated audio module retest
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the integrated audio module for
USB audio/video inoperative

Incompatible/faulty USB Connect a known good USB device to the auxiliary
device socket and retest
Integrated audio module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure system, check the integrated audio module for
USB audio/video inoperative -

Apple devices Incompatible/faulty Apple Check Apple device compatibility table below.
device Connect a known good Apple device to the auxiliary
Bluetooth® and USB socket and retest
connections made in the Audio streaming is supported via the USB cable but
incorrect order this must be connected after the cellular phone
Integrated audio module connects via Bluetooth® - Best practice is to start
internal failure the engine (causing the Bluetooth® connection to
be made) before connecting the USB cable
Television inoperative
TV antenna fault
TV control module internal
is moving.
failure
system, check the TV control module for related
Television video signal NOTES:

poor/inoperative at the touch CVBS signal circuit short
screen (television audio circuit to ground, short circuit
normal) - Vehicles without to power, open circuit, high
rear seat entertainment resistance Some functions are inhibited when the vehicle is
moving.
The television audio signal is transmitted on the

MOST network.

system, check the television control module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
the CVBS signal circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Television video signal NOTES:

poor/inoperative at the touch Antenna damaged
screen (television audio Antenna circuit short circuit
normal) - Vehicles with rear to ground, short circuit to
seat entertainment power, open circuit, high Some functions are inhibited when the vehicle is
resistance moving.
LVDS signal circuit short
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high The television audio signal is transmitted on the
resistance MOST network.
CVBS signal circuit short
circuit to ground, short circuit Check the antenna for damage
to power, open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance the antenna circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Non-genuine electronic circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
accessories Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the rear seat entertainment control
DTC index. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the LVDS signal circuit for short circuit to
resistance
system, check the rear seat entertainment control
DTC index. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the CVBS signal circuit for short circuit to
resistance
Disconnect/remove non-genuine electronic
accessories and retest
Television video signal

poor/inoperative at the touch Antenna damaged
NOTE: The television audio signal is transmitted on
screen AND the rear seat Antenna circuit short circuit
the MOST network.
entertainment screens to ground, short circuit to
(television audio normal) - power, open circuit, high Check the antenna for damage
Vehicles with rear seat resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
entertainment LVDS signal circuit short the antenna circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
to power, open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
resistance system, check the rear seat entertainment control
TV control module fault module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Non-genuine electronic DTC index. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
accessories and check the LVDS signal circuit for short circuit to
resistance
Disconnect/remove non-genuine electronic
accessories and retest
Television channel list absent

Incorrect country setting
Software fault
is moving.
Check country setting and reset as necessary

Set the country setting to Ukraine and wait 60
seconds. If the channel list is now present, reset to
the correct country and using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
television control module with the latest level
software
Unable to store television

preset channels Preset # soft key not Operate the Preset # soft key for at least 2
operated for sufficient seconds to store the current channel
duration
Television will not select

preset channel when Preset No television channel stored
# soft key operated to relevant Preset # soft key
is moving.
Store a channel to the relevant Preset # soft key

and retest
DVD player inoperative

Incompatible/damaged
compact disc
is moving.
Incorrect region set
Integrated audio module Insert a known good disc and retest
internal failure Change region setting
Unable to pair mobile phone

to vehicle via Bluetooth® Incompatible mobile phone
NOTE: Installing new components will not improve
connectivity with an incompatible mobile phone.
Check mobile phone compatibility by referring to:

www.landrover.com/Owners/Bluetooth and following
the instructions on the page
Echo when using a mobile

phone via Bluetooth® Noise cancelling set to On in Set noise cancelling to Off in mobile phone
mobile phone and vehicle
Navigation system
inoperative (integrated Navigation antenna fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
navigation system) Integrated audio module system, check the integrated audio module for
Navigation system
inoperative (with navigation Navigation antenna fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module) Navigation control module system, check the navigation control module for
Traffic message channel

inoperative FM/TMC antenna fault
NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication
VICS antenna fault
System (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system
Integrated audio module
used in the Japan market only.
internal failure
Rear seat entertainment

system inoperative Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module internal system, check the rear seat entertainment control
failure module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
USB/CD Data Disk Audio File Compatibility
NOTE: Before attempting a repair to the in-vehicle infotainment system following concerns regarding no playback of audio
files stored either on a USB data storage device or on a CD data disc, check below to ensure that the audio files in question
are encoded in a compatible format
There are a number of variables that can be set (either automatically or by the user) at the point of creating the audio file that
may contribute to an audio file being encoded in an incompatible format. These include:
The type of audio file created (MP3/WMA/AAC)

The specification of Variable Bit Rate (VBR) or Constant Bit Rate (CBR) encoding
If CBR encoding is being used, then a particular bit rate value (measured in kilobits per second - kbps) may be selected
The rate of sampling frequency, measured in kilohertz (kHz), may also be selected
Diagnostic Procedures For Audio Files
Identify File Type: if a customer reports issues with audio file playback, first confirm that the data source is operating
normally and is not locked or corrupted. This may be achieved by reading the USB storage device or data disk via a PC and
confirming that the audio files can be seen/accessed as expected. If the storage device/data disk appears to be operating
normally, the next step is to ascertain the file type of those files that will not play through the infotainment system. There are
three types of compatible audio file, either MP3 (which must have a file extension of .mp3); or WMA (which must have a file
extension of .wma); or AAC (which must have a file extension of either .aac or .m4a). If the affected audio files are not of
these types, then successful playback via the infotainment system may not be possible.
Further information about the audio file may be accessed via the file properties tab either when viewing the file in Windows
Explorer or when playing the file via a digital media player programme. In such a way, it should be possible to ascertain some
or all of the required information concerning the file's specified encoding type/bit rate/sampling frequency. Once this
information has been obtained, use the tables detailed below to check if the suspect audio file is compatible with the vehicle
infotainment system.
Playback Of Audio Files Stored On A USB Storage Device
USB MP3 Files (only if file extension is '.mp3'): Playback of MP3 audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate (VBR) format is
supported at bit rates between 8-320 kbps. For Constant Bit Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible sampling rates
and bit rates.
File Format/Encoding
Format Sampling Rate Bit Rates Notes
MP3 (MPEG 2.5*) All available are 8-160 kbps playback *For MPEG 2.5 format audio files, playback cannot be
supported supported guaranteed but an attempt will be made to play
MP3 (MPEG 2) All available are 8-160 kbps playback -
supported supported
MP3 (MPEG 1) All available are 32-128 kbps; 160-320 kbps Playback of MPEG 1 audio files with a bit rate of 144
supported playback supported kbps is not supported
USB WMA Files (only if file extension is '.wma'): Playback of WMA audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate (VBR) format and
created using Windows Media Player Version 8.0 and/or Version 9.0 is supported at bit rates between 5-384 kbps. For Constant
Bit Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible sampling rates and bit rates. Note that WMA CBR files created using
Windows Media Player Versions 7.0, 8.0 and 9.0 can be supported, while playback will be attempted but cannot be guaranteed
for files created using Windows Media Player Versions 4.0, 4.1, 9 Beta and 9.1.
File
Format/Encoding
WMA - Constant Bit At sampling rates 5-8 kbps (mono); 12 kbps (stereo) 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
Rate (CBR) of 8 KHz playback playback supported. 31 kbps (mono) created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at playback cannot be guaranteed but cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates an attempt will be made to play Management) protected files cannot be supported
At sampling rates 8-10 kbps (mono) playback 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 11.03 KHz supported created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
playback supported cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
only at specified Management) protected files cannot be supported
bit rates
At sampling rates 10-12 kbps and 16 kbps (mono); 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 16 KHz playback 16-20 kbps (stereo) playback created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at supported cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates Management) protected files cannot be supported
At sampling rates 16-20 kbps (mono); 20, 22 and 36 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 22.05 KHz kbps (stereo) playback supported created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
playback supported cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
only at specified Management) protected files cannot be supported
bit rates
At sampling rates 20 kbps (mono); 32, 40, 48 kbps 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 32 KHz playback (stereo) playback supported. 32 created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at kbps (mono); 22, 36, 44, 64, 384 cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates kbps (stereo) playback cannot be Management) protected files cannot be supported
guaranteed but an attempt will be
made to play
At sampling rates 20, 32 and 48 kbps (mono); 32, 48, 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 44.1 KHz 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256 and created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
playback supported 320 kbps (stereo) playback cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
only at specified supported. 15 kbps (mono) playback Management) protected files cannot be supported
bit rates cannot be guaranteed but an
attempt will be made to play
At sampling rates 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 and 256* kbps 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
of 48 KHz playback (stereo) playback supported. 32 created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at kbps (mono) & 48, 63, 95, 127, 191 cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates and 320 kbps (stereo) playback Management) protected files cannot be
cannot be guaranteed but an supported. *All available versions can be
attempt will be made to play supported at a bit rate of 256 kbps for this
sampling rate only
USB AAC Files (only if file extension is '.aac' or '.m4a'): Playback of AAC audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
format is supported at bit rates between 8-320 kbps. For Constant Bit Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible
sampling rates and bit rates.
File
Format/Encoding
AAC - Constant Bit At sampling rates of between 8-32 KHz, 8-320 kbps playback cannot -
Rate (CBR) playback cannot be not guaranteed but be not guaranteed, but may
may be possible at some bit rates be possible in some cases
At sampling rates of between 44.1 - 48 48-80 kbps; 96-128 kbps; Playback at other bit rates
KHz, playback supported at specified 160-256 kbps; 320 kbps between 44.1-576 kbps may be
bit rates playback supported possible, but cannot be verified
At sampling rates of between 64-96 96-768 kbps playback cannot Playback at other bit rates
KHz, playback cannot be not be not guaranteed but an between 64-1152 kbps cannot be
guaranteed but an attempt will be attempt will be made to play not guaranteed but an attempt will
made to play at some bit rates be made to play
Playback Of Audio Files Stored On A CD Data Disk
CD Data Disk MP3 Files (only if file extension is '.mp3'): Playback of MP3 audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
format is supported at bit rates between 8-320 kbps. For Constant Bit Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible
MP3 (MPEG 2.5*) All available are 8-160 kbps playback *For MPEG 2.5 format audio files, playback cannot be
supported supported guaranteed but an attempt will be made to play
MP3 (MPEG 2) All available are 8-160 kbps playback -
supported supported
MP3 (MPEG 1) All available are 32-128 kbps; 160-320 kbps Playback of MPEG 1 audio files with a bit rate of 144
supported playback supported kbps is not supported
CD Data Disk WMA Files (only if file extension is '.wma'): Playback of WMA audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
format and created using Windows Media Player Version 9.0 is supported at bit rates between 32-192 kbps. For Constant Bit
Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible sampling rates and bit rates. Note that WMA CBR files created using Windows
Media Player Version 9.0 can be supported, while playback will be attempted but cannot be guaranteed for files created using
Windows Media Player Versions 4.0, 4.1, 7.0, 8.0, 9 Beta and 9.1.
File
Format/Encoding
WMA - Constant Bit At sampling rates of 32 kbps (stereo) playback 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
Rate (CBR) 22.05 KHz playback supported created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates Management) protected files cannot be supported
At sampling rates of 32 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 kbps 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
KHz playback supported (stereo) playback supported created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
only at specified bit cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
rates Management) protected files cannot be supported
At sampling rates of 32 and 48 kbps (mono); 32, 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
44.1 KHz playback 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160 & created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
supported only at 192 kbps (stereo) playback cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
specified bit rates supported Management) protected files cannot be supported
At sampling rates of 48 64, 96, 128, 160 & 192 kbps 'Lossless', 'Professional' or 'Voice' format files
KHz playback supported (stereo) playback supported created in Windows Media Player Version 9.0
only at specified bit cannot be supported. DRM (Digital Rights
rates Management) protected files cannot be supported
CD Data Disk AAC Files (only if file extension is '.aac' or '.m4a'): Playback of AAC audio files encoded in Variable Bit Rate
(VBR) format is supported at bit rates between 8-320 kbps. For Constant Bit Rate (CBR) files, see table below for compatible
AAC - Constant Bit At sampling rates of between 32-40 kbps; 48-80 kbps; *112 & 128 kbps bit rate playback not
Rate (CBR) 8-24 KHz playback supported at 96-128* kbps playback supported for audio files with a
specified bit rates supported sampling rate of 8 KHz
At sampling rates of between 160-256* kbps playback *224 & 256 kbps bit rate playback not
16-32 KHz playback supported at supported supported for audio files with a
specified bit rates sampling rate of 16 KHz
At sampling rates of between 48-80 kbps; 96-128 kbps; -
32-48 KHz playback supported at 160-256 kbps; 320 kbps
specified bit rates playback supported
Portable Audio Interface Panel/USB Power Supply

If DTC B1252-19 (USB Port General Electrical Failures - Circuit current above threshold) has been logged, the IAM has detected
a current draw from the Portable Audio Interface Panel in excess of 1.7 Amps. In these circumstances, the power supply to the
Portable Audio Interface Panel will be cut for an ignition cycle. To reset the system and restore power, the vehicle needs to be
locked (with ignition off) and armed for at least 5 minutes.
The USB port on the Portable Audio Interface Panel is able to supply current to a maximum of 500mA. It should be noted that
any portable devices connected via the USB port that required more power may not charge or power up correctly and that this
may affect the operation of this device with the infotainment system.
Apple Device Compatibility

The following table lists some Apple devices and their compatibility with the information and entertainment system using a
USB cable.
Fully Supported Partially Supported Not Supported
iPod® Classic - 6th/7th generation iPod® Classic - 4th/5th iPod® Classic - 1st/2nd/3rd
iPod® Nano - 3rd/4th/5th/6th generation generation
generation iPod® Nano - 1st/2nd iPod® Shuffle - 1st/2nd/3rd/4th
iPod® Touch - 2nd/3rd/4th generation generation generation
iPhone™ 3/3S iPod® Touch - 1st generation
iPhone™ 4/4S iPhone™
iPad™ - 1st generation (with iOS 4.0
or later)
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : SOURCE TESTS

A1: SOURCE TEST 1
NOTE: Soft key confirmation tones will not be audible if this preference is set to off (Set-up / System / Button feedback)
1 Operate the available soft keys

Was there an audible confirmation tone to indicate that the soft key input was detected?
Yes
Audio amplifier module and MOST network functioning. GO to A2.
No
Audio amplifier module fault or MOST ring break. GO to A2.
A2: SOURCE TEST 2
NOTES:
Operating the steering wheel mode switch briefly will cycle through the audio/video sources as follows: Radio -
DAB/SDARS - My Music - My Video
Operating the steering wheel mode switch for >2 seconds will cycle through the minor sources as follows: (Radio) FM1 -
FM2 - FM3 - AM1 - AM2, and (My Music) DVD/CD - iPod® - BT - Stored CDs - USB - AUX
Depending on vehicle specification, various audio/video sources may be installed and are contained in the control
modules as follows:
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - including radio, CD, iPod®, USB, my music, my video, phone and navigation
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
Television Control Module (TVCM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
1 Cycle through the audio/video sources by operating the steering wheel mode switch
Did the audio/video soft key return to normal and/or the selected source function normally?
Yes
MOST network functioning. GO to A3.
No
Possible MOST ring break. GO to A3.
A3: SOURCE TEST 3
1 Operate the Navigation soft key (or switch)
Did the navigation system start up and display a map?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
GO to A4.
A4: SOURCE TEST 4
1 Operate the Phone soft key (or switch)
Is the phone menu displayed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : FUSE PULL TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: FUSE PULL TEST 1
1 Remove the fuse from the missing audio/video source control module circuit
2 Inspect the fuse
Has the fuse blown?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair as
necessary. Install a new fuse. GO to B2.
No
Wait at least 30 seconds and re-install the fuse. GO to B2.
NOTE: Depending on vehicle specification, various audio/video sources may be installed and are contained in the control
modules as follows:
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - including radio, CD, iPod®, USB, my music, my video, phone and navigation
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
Television Control Module (TVCM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
1 Set the ignition to off

2 Set the ignition to on
3 Check the operation of the touch screen and all audio/video sources
Has full audio/video functionality been restored?
Yes
If the missing source was part of the integrated audio module, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, re-configure the integrated audio module with the latest level software. Tests
complete
No
GO to B3.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the next control module connected to the MOST
network
Is there another control module that has not been reset?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
MOST ring break present.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
1 Remove the fuse from the next control module circuit
2 Inspect the fuse
Has the fuse blown?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair as
necessary. Install a new fuse. GO to B2.
No
Wait at least 30 seconds and re-install the fuse. GO to B2.
PINPOINT TEST C : TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
CONDITIONS
C1: TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
NOTE: A suitable stylus (for example the stylus supplied with a Panasonic CF-19) will be required for this procedure.
1 Navigate to the touch screen Jaguar Leaper screen

2 Touch the Jaguar Leaper until the engineering mode screen is displayed (approximately 20 seconds)
3 Scroll down and select Touch Calibration
4 Select OK
5 Tap the touch screen to proceed
6 Using a suitable stylus, tap the touch screen at the points indicated until a pass/fail result is
displayed
Was the touch screen calibration successful?
Yes
Calibration complete
No
Calibration failed. GO to C1.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Audio Module (ACM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Entertainment Module (REM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM) (100-00 General Information,
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Cellular
Phone
For a detailed description of the cellular phone system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the workshop
manual.
Visual Inspection
Microphone Electrical connectors

Bluetooth® antenna Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
Fuses
the next step
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC index
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair
Not Automatically Connecting

No Audio to 3rd Party

No Audio from 3rd Party

No Audio
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR
CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is included on
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth function is activated
and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH® DEVICE SEARCH
1 Carry out Bluetooth® device search using customer handset.
Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth® device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth® device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds
between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth® device list, set ignition status to OFF, wait
approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth® device search, to a
maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in
Bluetooth® device list, contact your local in market support for further assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
1 Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth® device
list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
1 Check for successful PIN entry.
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Jaguar' device identified in the Bluetooth®
device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault. Carry out Pinpoint
test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUETOOTH® MODULE PAIRED DEVICE LIST
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth and auto connect
functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if the customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth® module paired
device list.
Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth® module paired device list?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Pair device as decribed in Pinpoint Test A
B2: CUSTOMER HANDSET PAIRED DEVICE LIST
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth® Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired
device list.
Is the Bluetooth® Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.Pair device as decribed in Pinpoint Test A
B3: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth® Module
paired device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in position 1
in Bluetooth® Module paired device list.
B4: CHECK FOR DTC B1A56-13
1 Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in market
support for assistance.
No
GO to B5.
B5: BLUETOOTH® CONNECTION
1 Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth® connection icon is shown on customer Bluetooth® telephone
screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
Is Bluetooth® connection icon shown on the customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted' displayed on vehicle
screen?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
GO to B6.
B6: 'JAGUAR' AUTHORISATION
NOTE: Some handsets may require operator intervention to manually authorise connection.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'Jaguar' is authorised in the customer Bluetooth® telephone device list
menu.
Is 'Jaguar' authorised in the customer Bluetooth® telephone device list menu?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Advise customer that 'Jaguar' needs to be authorised in the customer Bluetooth® telephone device list
menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
B7: SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
No
GO to B8.
B8: CYCLE IGNITION AND CHECK SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
No
B9: PAIRED DEVICE
1 Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
connected to.
Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not Automatically
Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and delete from
paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition status to ON. If Not
Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for assistance.
PINPOINT TEST C : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

C1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the telephone is placed within the
vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1 Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone DTCs in
Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY

D1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO

E1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.
E2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
Is there Audio to the Third Party?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.
E3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
1 Establish from customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
E4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
1 Establish from customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER
to: (100-00 General Information)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Audio Module (ACM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM) (Description and Operation).
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System
For a detailed description of the navigation system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (415-01)
Navigation System (Description and Operation),

Navigation System (Description and Operation),
Navigation System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Navigation control module Fuses

Audio amplifier module Loose or corroded connector(s)
Integrated audio module Navigation control module
Digital radio control module Audio amplifier module
Integrated control panel Integrated audio module
Touch screen Digital radio control module
Satellite radio control module Integrated control panel
TV control module Touch screen
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Satellite radio control module
Scratched/dirty compact discs TV control module
Loudspeakers Loudspeakers
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble codes
index
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Navigation Control Module (NCM) (100-00, Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen (TS) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Information and Entertainment System -

Audio unit antenna amplifier to "D" pillar retaining bolts 10 - 89
Audio unit amplifier retaining nuts 10 - 89
Information and entertainment display retaining bolts 4 - 26
Instrument panel speaker retaining screws 2.5 - 18
Steering wheel audio control switch retaining screws 2 - 35
Subwoofer speaker retaining bolts 5 - 44
Audio unit retaining bolts 2.5 - 22
Audio and climate control assembly 1.7 - 15
Digital audio module 10 - 89
Satellite radio tuner 10 - 89
Navigation system antenna 10 - 89
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Component Location
Item Description
1 Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
3 Instrument Cluster
4 Right Hand (RH) front door bass speaker
5 RH front door tweeter speaker
6 RH front door mid-range speaker
7 WhiteFire® digital wireless headphones transmitter (if fitted)
8 RH rear door co-axial speaker
9 Sigma pod module (GPS+SDARS/ GPS+DAB L-Band/ GPS)
10 AM / FM1 / TV1 / TV2 Amplifier
11 Radio antenna positive wavetrap (isolator)
12 RH rear door bass speaker
13 Parcel shelf co-axial speaker
14 FM2 / DAB_3 / TV3 / TV4 Amplifier
15 Parcel shelf subwoofer assembly
16 Parcel shelf co-axial speaker
17 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) control module (if fitted)
18 TV module
19 Audio amplifier
20 DAB (SDARS - NAS only) radio module
21 Radio antenna negative wavetrap (isolator)
22 Rear auxiliary panel
23 Rear seat entertainment remote control (if fitted)
24 Left Hand (LH) rear door bass speaker
25 LH rear door co-axial speaker
26 Front auxiliary panel
27 LH front door bass speaker
28 LH front door mid-range speaker
29 LH front door tweeter speaker
30 Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The audio system is available in three versions:
Jaguar 400W Base Audio

Jaguar 600W High Line Sound System
Bowers & Wilkins 1200W Premium Sound System
A range of audio systems are available combining radio and CD/DVD functions, Sirius Satellite Radio or DAB Digital Audio
Broadcasting receiver, MP3 disc compatibility, RDS, PTY and TA functions. The Integrated Audio Module (IAM) is a combined
radio tuner, CD/DVD player and incorporates a 40GB hard drive for use by the audio for storing music and also stores the
operating system and files for the navigation system.
Front and rear auxiliary panels (rear panel only fitted if rear entertainment system is present) allow for the connection of a
range of portable audio devices to the car’s audio system. The front and rear auxiliary panels are controlled through the
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) and the rear seat entertainment module respectively, with play back through the car’s speaker
system. This system allows the user to import their personal portable media player to interface with the car, including iPod and
other MP3 players, or USB mass storage devices such as memory sticks. MP3 players can also be controlled through the Touch-
screen if they are configured as mass storage devices.
The chosen audio device can be plugged into the car using the auxiliary panels. The interface includes a 3.5mm auxiliary
jack-plug socket, a 12-volt power supply, a dedicated iPod connector with charging function, plus a USB2 connector which
allows connectivity for a wide variety of USB devices. The USB port also provides a charging function although it does not
support a USB hub. The maximum charging current supplied is 500mA. The user can connect an iPod and USB device at the
same time, changing the source via the Touch-screen. The non selected source will still charge.
The Jaguar 400W base audio system is the basic audio system which comprises of an IAM with an 8 channel audio amplifier
and 12 speakers.
The Jaguar 600W Hi Line Sound System contains a 12-channel Class-D, Digital Signal Processor (DSP) amplifier featuring
Audyssey MultiEQ® audio equalisation and Dynamic Volume Control (DVC) and a 14 speaker system, which includes 2 parcel
shelf mounted sub-woofers.
The Bowers & Wilkins 1200W Surround Sound System additions include a 15-channel Class-D, DSP amplifier featuring Audyssey
MultiEQ® audio equalisation and Dynamic Volume Control with user selectable Dolby® Pro Logic® IIx and DTS™ Neo:6,
together with a 20 speaker Surround Sound Speaker System, which also includes 2 parcel shelf mounted sub-woofers.
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) is available for most European markets and gives access to digital radio channels for better
sound quality and enhanced functionality depending on local service availability. The DAB module is located in the luggage
compartment. The system receives reception signals from the following sources to ensure optimum signal strength:
DAB L-band antenna located in the Sigma pod antenna module

DAB band III antenna located in the heated rear window.
For NAS vehicles the digital format adopted is satellite radio which specifically links to the Sirius network. The system operates
in the S-band frequency range, and as a result of the use of satellite transmission, has the ability to provide CD (compact disc)
quality audio broadcasts over very large areas (typically continents). The satellite radio receiver is located in the luggage
compartment. The system receives reception signals from the satellite radio antenna incorporated in the Sigma Pod Module,
which is located in the upper centre of the rear screen.
Primary user control of the audio system is via the ICP and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) which are located in the center of
the instrument panel.
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; I = CVBS; O = LIN; P = MOST; T = Co-axial; AE = LVDS; AG = Infrared
Control Diagram - Audio System
Item Description
1 Front auxiliary panel
2 AM /FM /TV / DAB-3 Amplifiers
3 WhiteFire® digital wireless headphones
4 WhiteFire® digital wireless headphones transmitter
5 Audio amplifier
6 Vehicle speakers
7 DAB / SDARS radio module
8 FM2 / TV3 / TV4 / DAB-3 Amplifier
9 Sigma pod module (GPS/DAB L-Band)
10 TV module (reference only)
11 Rear seat entertainment remote control (if fitted)
12 Rear seat entertainment module (if fitted)
13 Rear auxiliary panel (if fitted)
14 Steering wheel audio switches
16 MOST diagnostic socket
System Operation
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
MEDIA ORIENTATED SYSTEMS TRANSPORT (MOST)
The components of the audio/infotainment system are all connected on the Media Orientated Systems Transport ( MOST) ring.
The MOST ring is a fibre optic communications bus for multimedia applications. Audio and control information is passed around
the MOST ring and can be picked up by any of the systems units. For example, radio station tuning/selection input by the
vehicle user into the Touch Screen Display (TSD) is sent along the MOST ring and collected by the Integrated Audio Module
(IAM) which then selects the requested radio station.
MOST technology uses a plastic optical fibre which forms a network connecting the audio and multimedia system components.
Each component in the ring is connected to the plastic optical fibre through a device known as a Fiber Optical Transceiver
(FOT). Each FOT has two optical connections; one connection is sensitive to light and is the input, the second connection
forms the light source and is the output. The system operates by connecting the output from one FOT to the input of another
FOT.
The light signals are sent in one direction only and are formed in the following way:
Electrical signals are converted into an electrical current

The current then drives an LED (light emitting diode) in the FOT to produce a high intensity red light
The LED transmits the light through a fiber optic cable
A photo diode in the FOT at the opposite end of the fiber optic cable detects the light.
The following components may be connected to the MOST ring dependant on the vehicle equipment level:
Touch Screen Display (TSD) (MOST timing master)

Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) module (if fitted)
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio receiver (if fitted)
Satellite Digital Audio Radio Service (SDARS) (NAS only - if fitted)
Power audio amplifier
Instrument cluster
Telephone control module (if fitted)
Navigation computer (if fitted)
Televison (TV) tuner (if fitted).
MOST Ring Components (RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle shown)
Item Description
3 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) module (if fitted)
4 DAB module / SDARS module (NAS only)
5 Television tuner
6 Power audio amplifier
8 MOST diagnostic connector
MOST is a synchronized network. A timing master supplies the clock information and all other devices on the network
synchronize their operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST network on this vehicle is the Touch Screen Display
(TSD). This unit also controls and manages the MOST ring and the system components.
An Optical Bus tester is used in conjunction with the approved Jaguar diagnostic system to diagnose the MOST system. The
Optical Bus tester emits a visible, high intensity red light which can be connected into the ring at any point to test the ring
integrity. Disconnecting a MOST connector will reveal if the high intensity red light is visible.
If a break occurs in the MOST ring, fault codes are stored in the TSD which can be retrieved using an approved Jaguar
diagnostic system.
AUDIO SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The IAM is located in central position in the instrument panel, behind the Integrated Control Panel (ICP).
The IAM is a multi functional unit which has the following systems and features:
Radio tuner
Compact Disc (CD) player (single slot)
Hybrid Digital (HD)
Bluetooth® receiver (telephone and audio streaming) Radio (where fitted)
40 GB Hard drive (Navigation and audio ripping)
USB controller (front)
Audio AUX
DVD player (audio and video).
The IAM is connected on the MOST ring to the other audio system components. The driver can control audio functions by using
soft keys on the Touch Screen Display (TSD), steering wheel mounted audio control switches or by voice commands.
The 40 GB hard drive is used for storing the information for satellite navigation and music files. A 10GB partition is provided
for storing music files. Up to 10 CD's can be loaded individually via the CD slot and the music data copied onto the hard drive.
The IAM has an integral tuner for AM/FM reception. Each audio system features auto-store, with a press and hold function to
store selected channels as pre-sets. The standard search facility finds the nine strongest channels currently available, while
search and manual tuning also allow channels to be stored. The IAM does not have an integral audio power amplifier, so all
variants of the audio systems use a separate audio power amplifier located in the luggage compartment.
Hard Disc Drive
The integral hard drive for the navigation system removes the requirement of a separate navigation computer usually found in
the rear luggage compartment. The IAM stores the navigation map data locally within the 40GB hard drive (30GB partition
reserved for navigation). By storing the information in this way and processing it within the IAM, navigation display, route
calculation speeds and accuracy are vastly improved. Map upgrades and software now have to be loaded directly into the IAM.
The map images are transmitted from the IAM to the TSD via a Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS). Turn by turn
instructions are also available, these are displayed in the instrument cluster via a second LVDS link between the instrument
cluster and TSD.
The IAM has the ability to load audio files and ‘rip’ the music onto the internal hard drive, a 10GB partition is reserved to store
music. It is possible to store up to 10 uncompressed albums onto the hard drive. Only CDDA files can be loaded into the
virtual changer.
File compatibility for the single slot CD mechanism includes:
CD audio
mp3 – (MPEG Layer III)
WMA – (Microsoft Windows Media Audio)
WAV – (waveform)
AAC – (Advanced Audio Coding. Apple iTunes - only through iPod interface)
NOTES:
The CD player may take a longer time to load an MP3 disc, if there are more tracks than on a normal CD. To minimise
loading time, a rigid folder structure is recommended.
In the event of customer complaints relating to audio quality, file compression should be taken into consideration during
diagnosis.
The IAM communicates on the MOST ring with the rest of the audio system. If the IAM is replaced it must be configured as a
new module using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system
Calibration of the IAM using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
Audio Controls
Item Description
1 On/Off and volume control
3 CD load and eject slot
4 CD eject button
5 Seek up: Short press to auto seek up the frequency to the next radio station, next TV channel on the channel list, or
next track on selected audio source. Long press to activate manual seek mode - further short presses change the
frequency in single increments. A further long press will scan forwards through the current waveband, a track or to select the
next preset TV channel until the button is released.
6 Seek down: Short press to select the previous radio preset, previous TV channel on the channel list, or previous track
on selected audio source. Long press to scan backwards through a track or to select the previous preset TV channel.
7 Settings button: Press to display audio Settings menu.
8 MODE button: Press repeatedly to scroll through all audio/video sources. Long press will cycle through each source
sub-selection (for example FM1, FM2, FM3, AM1, AM2 etc.)
9 + button: Press to increase button
10 MODE button: Press repeatedly to scroll through all audio/video sources. Long press will cycle through each source
sub-selection (for example FM1, FM2, FM3, AM1, AM2 etc.)
11 Seek down: Short press to auto seek down the frequency to the next radio station, next TV channel on the channel list,
or next track on selected audio source. Long press to activate manual seek mode - further short presses change the
frequency in single increments. A further long press will scan backwards through the current waveband, a track or to select
the next preset TV channel until the button is released.
12 - button: Press to decrease volume
13 Seek down: Short press to select the previous radio preset, previous TV channel on the channel list, or previous track
on selected audio source. Long press to scan backwards through a track or to select the previous preset TV channel.
There are several ways to control the audio system:
Steering wheel audio switches

Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
Touch Screen Display (TSD)
Voice control.
The steering wheel audio switches allow selection of audio/video source, volume control, selection of radio or TV preset, scan
for radio or TV channel, scan backwards or forwards through a music track.
The ICP switches provide the same functions as the steering wheel audio switches.
The TSD provides the greatest selection of controls for the audio/visual systems. On screen soft keys allow navigation through
the audio menus and selections and preferences can be programmed into the system.
Voice control is activated by pressing the steering wheel mounted voice control switch. Once activated, a command list is
displayed in the instrument cluster which allows the driver to select from a number of systems for voice control as follows:
Telephone
Navigation system
USB
CD
Radio.
A long press on the voice control switch de-activates the voice control system.
On vehicles fitted with the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, a remote control touch screen is available for rear seat
passengers to select their preferences for the audio/visual systems. The remote touch screen is located in a docking station in
the center arm rest and can be operated located in the arm rest or removed for remote operation. On screen menu's, similar to
those used in the instrument panel mounted TSD are used to navigate through the selected source functions.
Radio Antennas
Hybrid Digital (HD) and AM/FM
Item Description
2 Rear screen
HD radio does not require a dedicated antenna. It uses the existing AM/FM antennas located in the rear screen.
NOTE: HD radio transmission depends very much on the broadcaster, not all stations will provide the HD element of the
broadcast.
Digital radio transmission does not always necessarily produce a higher resolution sound. This is very much dependant on the
compression rate the provider is transmitting the signal.
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) Band III and DAB L-Band
Item Description
2 Rear screen
4 Sigma pod
The DAB L-band antenna is located in the sigma pod and is shared with the navigation system Global Positioning Satellite
(GPS) antenna where fitted. The sigma pod is located internally in a central position towards the top of the rear window.
The antennas fitted to these modules MUST be 2mm from the glass when they are fixed/slotted into the Sigma pod carrier
which is bonded onto the rear screen. Both the air gap and fixed position in the carrier are extremely critical to the
functionality, operation and efficiency of all the sigma module antennae.
Item Description
Sigma
DAB Control Module
pod
(GPS,
DAB
L-band
and
SDARS
antennas)
Item Description
1 Power supply and ground connection
2 MOST bus connector
3 L-band and Band III antenna connection
The DAB receiver is located in the LH (left-hand) side of the luggage compartment.
The DAB receiver is a dedicated tuner which is controlled by the IAM on the MOST ring. The receiver processes the signals from
the DAB antennas. Digital information is transmitted on the MOST ring and processed by the IAM. The processed information is
sent out to the audio amplifier converted to analogue then broadcast through the speaker system.
NOTE: DAB audio resolution is not always better than FM. This is dependant on the compression rate being transmitted
by the provider.
DAB radio is a relatively new and therefore coverage of the digital network is constantly evolving. The United Kingdom for
example currently has a DAB coverage of more than 85%, although other countries may have less coverage. DAB reception
coverage areas can be checked using the internet.
Before taking any diagnostic action in the event of a customer reception complaint consider that DAB reception depends on
local channels/stations and their signal strength and reception is affected by tunnels, hills, tall buildings or densely tree-lined
roads.
During periods of signal strength deterioration, the Jaguar DAB system is designed to notify the customer that the signal is
weak. As an alternative to muting the sound, possibly replicating a fault symptom to a customer, the over-laying of a
‘bubbling’ sound is deliberately produced during the transmission. This sound should also not be perceived as a fault, no
further diagnosis is required in this instance.
Front and Rear (if fitted) Auxiliary Panels
NOTE: A = Front AUX panelB = Rear AUX panel
Item Description
1 3.5mm AUX jack socket
2 USB socket
3 USB socket
4 USB socket
5 Video Input
6 Right channel audio input
7 Left channel audio input
All models have an auxiliary 3.5mm mini-jack input socket and 2 USB ports in the centre cubby box. On vehicles fitted with the
Rear Entertainment System (RSE) and additional auxiliary panel is fitted which has a USB port, a video input and 2 audio
inputs.
Front Auxiliary Panel
The USB connectivity allows a convenient method of playing music from a range of compatible portable devices through the
vehicle audio system. The front auxiliary panel is controlled through the TSD and the steering wheel switches. On vehicles with
the RSE system, the rear auxiliary panel can be controlled via the RSE remote touch screen panel, in addition to the TSD and
the steering wheel switches. Both systems use the vehicles audio and speaker system.
If front and rear auxiliary panels are fitted, 3 different USB devices can be connected at the same time and each can be
controlled independently through the TSD, RSE remote touch screen and the steering wheel controls.
NOTE: Due to a large variety of USB devices available and continual development in this sector it is impossible to
guarantee compatibility with all devices.
WhiteFire® Digital Wireless Headphones and Transmitter
Item Description
1 WhiteFire® digital wireless headphones
2 WhiteFire® digital infrared transmitter
In addition to the cabin audio speaker output, if the high line audio or premium audio system is fitted, these systems feature
3 additional audio channels which can be accessed through the digital wireless headphones.
The premium headphone system includes Dolby® headphone surround when listening to the DVD source. It is possible to
install the vehicle with up to 3 sets of headphones. Each headset contains 2 AAA batteries.
NOTE: There is no docking station to store the headsets, therefore charging of the batteries is not supported via the
vehicles electrical system.
The controls located on the earpiece include the power switch, volume control and channel browse button. To select a different
channel press the browse button, conformation via an audible beep can then be heard followed by the audio transmission on
that channel.
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Component
Location
NAVIGATION SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
3 Microphone
4 Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
5 Sigma pod (GPS/L Band DAB / SDARS) antenna
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the route using minor or major roads or highways with the option of three
routes. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available.
The navigation system is integrated with the audio/video system and shares a number of components common to all systems.
Map information is stored on a hard disk drive located in the Integrated Audio Module (IAM).
The system is new to the 2010MY Jaguar XJ model and uses a hard disk drive to store the navigation data, removing the
requirement of a luggage compartment mounted navigation computer used on previous Jaguar models.
The navigation system uses the following components:

Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
Dual-view Touch Screen Display (TSD)
Sigma pod for GPS antenna
Instrument cluster.
The dual-view TSD allows the front seat passenger to view television and video images when the car is being driven. The
dual-view screen allows the driver to see the navigation or other system screens but not the TV or video when the vehicle is
moving. The screen can be switch between single and dual view using a switch on the ICP.
NOTE: Due to legislation, the NAS markets do not receive this dual-view option.
Japanese market vehicles have a modified system from other markets. The Japanese specification vehicles have a navigation
computer and a navigation module located in the luggage compartment. This is in addition to the Vehicle Information and
Communication System (VICS) beacon antenna located on the top of the instrument panel on Japanese specification vehicles.
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired I = CVBS N = MS CAN O = LIN P = MOST T = Coaxial AB = Bluetooth® AE = LVDS
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Sigma pod (GPS antenna)
5 Microphone
7 Audio Amplifier
8 Vehicle speakers
9 DAB / SDARS radio module (reference only)
10 TV module (reference only)
11 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) module (reference only)
13 Steering wheel switches
14 MOST diagnostic socket
System Operation
TRAFFIC MESSAGE CHANNEL (TMC)
The TMC is a specific application of the FM (frequency modulation) Radio Data System (RDS) used for broadcasting real-time
traffic and weather information. Data messages are received and decoded by the IAM. The IAM processes the received
information and alerts the driver and offers alternative route guidance to avoid the incident.
Each traffic incident is sent as a TMC message. One message consists of an event code and a location code in addition to time
details. The message is coded and can be translated by the IAM into the market language. Location code tables assign
numbers to locations on the road network. Those location tables are integrated in the maps stored on the IAM hard disk drive.
The source of traffic information is typically police, traffic cameras and local network stations.
The TMC system uses the existing FM antenna integral with the rear windshield and audio system antenna amplifiers to pass
the signals to the IAM.
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (VICS) - JAPAN ONLY

The VICS is a similar system to the TMC used outside of Japan. VICS is a unique to Japan and give countrywide coverage and
broadcasts of real-time traffic and weather information. The VICS has two methods of transmitting the traffic data to the
vehicle's navigation system. In certain areas the information is transmitted as an infra-red signal which is received by a VICS
beacon antenna located on the instrument panel. The same information is also transmitted on a FM wavelength and is received
by the FM antenna integral with the rear windshield and uses the audio system antenna amplifiers to pass the signals to the
navigation hard disk drive, via the IAM.
INTEGRATED AUDIO MODULE (IAM)
The IAM is located in central position in the instrument panel, behind the Integrated Control Panel (ICP).
The IAM is a multi functional unit which has the following systems and features:
Radio tuner
Compact Disc (CD) player (single slot)
Hybrid Digital (HD)
Bluetooth® receiver (telephone and audio streaming) Radio (where fitted)
40 GB Hard drive (Navigation and audio)
USB controller (front)
Audio AUX
DVD player (audio and video).
The IAM is connected on the MOST ring to the other audio system components. The driver can control navigation functions by
using soft keys on the Touch Screen Display (TSD) or steering wheel mounted control switches.
The 40 GB hard drive is used for storing the information for satellite navigation and music files. A 10GB partition is provided
for storing music files, the remaining 30GB is used for map data storage.
Hard Disc Drive
The integral hard drive for the navigation system removes the requirement of a separate navigation computer usually found in
the rear luggage compartment. The IAM stores the navigation map data locally within the 30GB hard drive partition. By storing
the information in this way and processing it within the IAM, navigation display, route calculation speeds and accuracy are
vastly improved. Map upgrades and software now have to be loaded directly into the IAM from a CD (compact disc).
The map images are transmitted from the IAM to the TSD via a Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) link cable. Turn by turn
instructions are also available, these are displayed in the instrument cluster via a second LVDS link between the instrument
cluster and TSD.
The IAM communicates on the MOST ring with the rest of the audio system. If the IAM is replaced it must be configured as a
new module using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system
Calibration of the IAM using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
DUAL-VIEW TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY (TSD)

The TSD is mounted centrally in the instrument panel. The dual-view TSD enables the passenger and driver to view completely
different images from their respective seating positions. This technology has provided a solution for the legal issues attached
to viewing moving images whilst the vehicle is in motion. It is not possible for the driver to view moving images with an active
speed signal but the passenger can.
NOTE: Due to legislation the NAS markets will not receive this option. A single view display is available in these markets.
The dual-view TSD uses Parallax Barrier Shutter Technology to alternately hide and reveal columns of pixels to the left and
right hand views of the screen. The display comes with a specially designed agar coating to help prevent sunlight bleaching.
Item Description
1 Dual-view button
To access a TV or video image when the vehicle is in motion and single view is selected, the dual view button should be
pressed by either the driver or the passenger. This will then switch the TSD to dual-view mode allowing the passenger to view
TV or video, but not the driver. A second press of the button will change the TSD back to single view.
Before and after dual view key activation
Item Description
A Passenger view before dual-view button pressed
B Driver's view before dual-view button pressed
C Passenger view after dual-view button pressed
D Driver's view after dual-view button pressed
Once dual-view has been selected, the driver can change the current screen without affecting the passengers view by pressing
any of the keys on the TSD.
The audio system can only broadcast one audio source. Therefore, the TV / video source that is current for the passenger will
also be the audio the driver can hear. If headphones have been specified as an option, then the passenger's can choose to
listen to the sound source accompanying the TV / video. This allows the driver to listen to a different audio source or
navigation commands via the vehicle speaker system.
The driver’s view is also event driven, i.e. if reverse gear were to be selected the rear view camera will be displayed
automatically, overriding the displayed navigation or other information. The passenger can choose to see the camera image by
pressing the dual-view button to change the TSD display to single view.
SIGMA POD
Item Description
1 Sigma pod (GPS / L-Band DAB / SDARS antennas)
The navigation system GPS (global positioning system) antenna is located in the sigma pod and is shared with the audio DAB
L-band antenna where fitted. The sigma pod is located internally in a central position towards the top of the rear window.
The antennas fitted to the Sigma pod MUST be 2mm from the glass when they are fixed/slotted into the Sigma pod carrier
which is bonded onto the rear screen. Both the air gap and fixed position in the carrier are extremely critical to the
functionality, operation and efficiency of all the sigma module antennae.
JAPANESE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The VICS navigation is fitted in Japan at PDI (pre-delivery inspection). The system comprises a separate Alpine 30GB hard disk
drive navigation module, vehicle to navigation unit gateway module, an alternative FM radio receiver and the VICS beacon.
Refer to installation guide supplied at PDI for details and fault finding information.
The navigation module is connected using an Ai-Net network to the gateway module. The gateway module converts the Ai-Net
network signals to a medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus connection to the TSD.
Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit
Removal
1. Refer to: Audio and Climate Control Assembly (415-01A Information and
Entertainment System, Removal and Installation).

Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit Amplifier
Removal
NOTES:

2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio and Climate Control
Assembly
Removal
1.
2. Torque: 1.7 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Digital Audio Module
Removal
NOTES:

2. Torque: 10 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
Information and Entertainment System - Front Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Information and Entertainment
Display
Removal
1. Refer to: Audio and Climate Control Assembly (415-01A Information and
Entertainment System, Removal and Installation).
2. Torque: 4 Nm
3.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Information and Entertainment
System Antenna Base
Removal
2.
3.
Installation
1.
2. Remove the foam padding (if equipped) from the information and
entertainment system antenna base cover.
3. NOTE: Do not engage the clips at this stage.
1. Align the rear clips first, then the front clips of the
information and entertainment system antenna base
cover.
2. Make sure that the information and entertainment
system antenna base cover moves forwards and
backwards (approximately 2-3mm). This will indicate
that the component is correctly located.
4. NOTE: An audible click is heard when the clips are fully latched.
Engage the information and entertainment system antenna base cover

front and rear integral clips at the same time.
5. To make sure that the information and entertainment system antenna

base cover is installed correctly and will not cause any noise, make sure
it can move forwards and backwards (approximately 2-3mm).
Information and Entertainment System - Instrument Panel Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker Grille (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Rear Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Removal
NOTES:
The steering wheel is shown removed for clarity.

3. Torque: 2 Nm

sides.
5. Torque: 2 Nm

the component.
7.
8.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Subwoofer Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the noise vibration harshness (NVH)

material is correctly located.

Information and Entertainment System - Video Display
Removal
NOTES:
Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - DTC: Audio Input Control Module -
Audio Input Control Module
This section of the manual concerns diagnostic procedures for the Dension audio input control module. For a detailed
description of the information and entertainment system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the
workshop manual
Visual Inspection
Audio input control module Fuses

Audio amplifier module Loose or corroded connector(s)
Integrated audio module Audio amplifier module
Integrated control panel Integrated audio module
Touch screen display Integrated control panel
Loudspeakers Touch screen display
Loudspeakers
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble codes
index
Audio Input Control Module Diagnostics
NOTE: If problems are reported with the audio input control module, prior to further diagnostic checks or replacement of
components, first perform a hardware reset by depressing the reset button for a minimum of two seconds. If problems persist,
refer to the symptom charts below
Performing A Hardware Reset
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With iPOD® Playback

Intermittent fault
with iPOD® The connected iPOD® unit has See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A1
playback crashed or frozen "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
The connected iPOD® unit's See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A2
battery is not holding charge and "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
requires replacement
The iPOD® dock cable is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A3
securely installed "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To The
The iPOD® dock cable is faulty Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With Playback From USB Device

Intermittent fault
with USB The USB memory stick Check for correct operation by connecting another working USB
playback is damaged or faulty memory stick loaded with a compatible test file (files may be
The USB memory stick downloaded from Dension website). If fault clears, then the original
is incompatible with USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a fault with
the audio input control the USB extension cable
module
The USB extension See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B3 "Check The
cable is not securely USB Extension Cable Is Operational And Securely Installed" below GO
installed to Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension
cable is faulty
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power harness
module power harness are correctly secured
is not securely installed If problem persists, check and install a new audio input control
The audio input control module power harness
module power harness
is faulty
Not all sound

files on the USB Sound files may be Check that affected sound file is encoded in a compatible file format
are played saved in an - Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 (up to
incompatible file format 320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up to 320 kbit/s); WAV -
uncompressed files; OGG (up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except
DRM protected files (up to 320 kbit/s)
Sound files may be Check integrity of affected files and remove any damaged files from
corrupted the memory stick
Symptom Chart - No Response From CDC Button

No response
when the CDC USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD® operates
button is pressed faulty normally but USB playback is faulty, then follow diagnostic
procedures as specified in pinpoint test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates normally,
then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A
The auxiliary input may be See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A5:
switched to bypass mode "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary Input Unit Is
Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power
module power harness is not harness are correctly secured
securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint tests C1:
The audio input control "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From Vehicle" and C2:
module power "Check The Integrity And Operation Of The Audio Input Control
supply/harness is faulty Module Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Optical cables/connectors (if Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to avoid
fitted) are not securely pinching the cable and with no excessive bends or kinks. Ensure
installed all connectors of the optical cables are correctly secured. Replace
Optical cables/connectors (if any damaged or faulty optical cables and/or connectors as
fitted) are faulty required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical cables are
configured in a closed loop so that the optical circuit is intact
Symptom Chart - iPOD® Related Faults
iPOD® inoperative
iPOD® configured or If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
connected incorrectly normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
specified in pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® does not operate and

in-car display shows "99" on The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
the screen unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test

unit's battery is flat and A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint
requires charging Test A.
The connected iPOD®
unit's battery is not
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
input control module Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® playback drops out and

system reverts to radio input USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as

unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® unit will not charge

when connected to the audio The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
input control module compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.
iPOD® unit keeps cutting out

and rebooting The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.

holding charge and
Unable to select specific

content on the iPOD® (ie: an Content/sound files Check if files/content can be accessed by iPOD® when
individual artist, album or corrupted or incompatible it is disconnected from the audio input control module.
song) with the iPOD® If fault persists, advise customer to renew or replace
the affected files
iPOD® not recognised when

connected The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
iPOD® connector pins are

misaligned The iPOD® dock cable is Replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum
faulty compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used
iPOD® not working at all. If

reset, the system will work for Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
6 songs then cuts out again. (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
CDC button inoperative and installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
CD sometimes cuts off for 2-3 Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
seconds (if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows no magazine The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows menu for CD6 and has Audio input control Download and install the latest system software.
to load all the tracks module software requires Software releases are available on the Dension
updating website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Symptom Chart - USB Memory Stick/Storage Device Related Faults

No playback from memory
stick/storage device Memory stick/storage If iPOD® operates normally but USB playback is faulty,
device configured or then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
connected incorrectly test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Symptom Chart - System Faults
System defaults to Audio/CD
Changer The auxiliary input unit See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
may be switched to test A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
bypass mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

faulty test A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input
Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The memory stick/storage See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

device is not correctly test B1 "Check For Correct Formatting" below GO to
formatted Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension cable See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

is not securely installed test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is
The USB extension cable Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
is faulty Pinpoint Test B.
The USB memory stick is Check for correct operation by connecting another
damaged or faulty working USB memory stick loaded with a compatible
The USB memory stick is test file (files may be downloaded from Dension
incompatible with the website). If fault clears, then the original USB stick
audio input control should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a
module fault with the USB extension cable
The storage capacity of See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

the memory stick/storage test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
device is close to or Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
exceeds 8 Gigabytes
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit's battery is flat and test A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to
requires charging Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

compatible with the audio test A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The
input control module Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit has crashed or frozen test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below
No sound from speakers The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control
(either front/rear or module power harness is module power harness are correctly secured
left/right) during not securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
playback from The audio input control tests C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From
iPOD®/memory stick module power Vehicle" and C2: "Check The Integrity And Operation
Audio system loses supply/harness is faulty Of The Audio Input Control Module Power Harness"
connection to below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
iPOD®/memory stick
during playback
iPOD® and radio Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
playback skips after unit (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
has been operating for 4 installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
minutes Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
(if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

not securely installed test A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When
The iPOD® dock cable is Connected To The Audio Input Control Module" below
faulty GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : IPOD® INOPERATIVE
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE IPOD®
1 Check if the iPOD® has crashed or frozen (it is unresponsive to any control commands)
Has the iPOD® crashed or frozen?
Yes
Reset the iPOD® or refer to Apple service procedures
No
GO to A2.
A2: CHECK THE IPOD® BATTERY
1 Check the charge state of the iPOD® battery
Is the iPOD® battery flat?
Yes
Charge the iPOD® battery for at least 10 minutes either by connecting to the charger supplied with the
iPOD® or by connecting to the audio input control module. If iPOD® will not charge when connected to
the audio input control module and with the ignition on thenGO to A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK THE IPOD® IS CHARGING WHEN CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
iPOD® Dock Connector - Pin Configuration
1 Check that the iPOD® is charging when connected to the audio input control module
2 Ignition switch in position II.
3 Ensure the iPOD® dock cable is securely connected
Does the iPOD® charge up while connected to the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connections. Disconnect the iPOD® and check the
voltage readings of the iPOD® dock cable using a multimeter (Pin B8: 5 volts/Pin B15: GND). If a fault is
noted, replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used. If iPOD® will not charge after replacement, then GO to
A4.
A4: CHECK THE IPOD® IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
NOTES:
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com
1 Determine whether the iPOD® model being used is compatible with the audio input control module
installed in the vehicle
2 Ensure the latest firmware updates are installed and an appropriate iPOD® dock cable is securely
connected
3 For advice, check details on the Dension website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
www.JagDocs.com
Is the iPOD® compatible with the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Advise customer that an alternative device is required
A5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait two
minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the complete
the switching process
A6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Install a new auxiliary input unit
Is the iPOD® now working?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connectionsGO to A3.
PINPOINT TEST B : USB/STORAGE DEVICE DOES NOT POWER UP WHEN CONNECTED
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR CORRECT FORMATTING
NOTE: The storage device needs to be configured to FAT16 or FAT32 format
1 Check if the memory stick/storage device is correctly formatted

Is the storage device/memory stick configured to the FAT16 or FAT32 format?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Reformat the storage device as required
B2: CHECK FOR FAULTY OR INCOMPATIBLE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: Test files may be downloaded from Dension website
1Check the operation of the USB port on the auxiliary input unit by connecting another working USB
memory stick/storage device loaded with a compatible test file
Does the system operate normally when another USB memory stick/storage device is connected?
Yes
Replace the original USB memory stick/storage device
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE USB EXTENSION CABLE IS OPERATIONAL AND SECURELY INSTALLED
1 Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connections
Is the USB extension cable securely pushed into the USB connection port on the audio input control module
Yes
Replace the USB extension cable
No
Secure connections and retest
B4: CHECK THE CAPACITY OF THE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: The higher the capacity of the memory stick is the longer it takes to register with the audio input control module
and power up. The maximum permitted capacity is 8 Gigabytes
1 Check the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device does not exceed 8 Gigabytes
Is the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device 8 Gigabytes or less?
Yes
High capacity devices may require longer to register and should be allowed up to two minutes to power up
following connection to the USB port. If memory stick fails to power up after two minutes, suspect a
faulty memory stick GO to B2. or USB extension cable GO to B3.
No
The memory stick/storage device exceeds the maximum permitted capacity. Replace with a device with a
capacity of 8 Gigabytes or less
B5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait
two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the
complete the switching process
B6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Replace auxiliary input unit
Is the USB memory stick/storage device now powering up?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connectionsGO to B3.
PINPOINT TEST C : POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/POWER HARNESS CHECKS
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
1 Remove the retrofitted audio input control module power harness
2 Reconnect the original power harness
Are the standard infotainment components on the vehicle operating normally?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Check power and ground connections to the affected modules. Check for related power or lost
communications DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check fuses and battery charging system.
Rectify as necessary
C2: CHECK THE INTEGRITY AND OPERATION OF THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE POWER HARNESS
1 SELECT APPROPRIATE HARNESS TYPE BASED ON CONFIGURATION OF MICROFIT CONNECTOR
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x11 Microfit Connector
2 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

3 Check the voltages of the 2x11 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Blue wire: switched 12 volts
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x2 Microfit Connector
4 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

5 Check the voltages of the 2x2 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Purple wire: switched 12 volts
Are the voltage readings correct?

Yes
No further action
No
Replace the audio input control module power harness
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to the relevant DTC index
Exterior Lighting -
Item Specification
Headlamp bulb D35 HID Bi-function
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Auto High Beam control module (inside mirror body)
2 Rain/light sensor
4 Lighting control switch - LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
5 Side repeater lamp (2 off)
6 Hazard warning lamp switch
7 High mounted stop lamp
8 License plate lamp (2 off)
9 Rear fog lamp LED's
10 Reverse lamp LED's
11 Rear turn signal indicator LED's
12 Side marker LED's
13 Stop/side Lamps LED's
14 Rear fog lamp switch
15 Front turn signal indicator lamp LED's
16 Side lamp LED's
17 Side marker lamp LED's (NAS only)
18 Cornering/static bending lamp (where fitted)
19 Xenon headlamp projector module
20 Headlamp control module
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
The exterior lighting systems are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) which contains fuses, relays and microprocessors
to control the power supply and functionality of the lighting systems.
The CJB controls the following vehicle functions:
Control and monitoring of exterior lamps including turn signal indicators and hazard warning functionality
Illumination dimmer control of instrument cluster and all interior switch illumination
Monitoring and evaluation of check control inputs from other system control modules and output of applicable messages
in the instrument cluster message center.
Driver lighting selections using the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch or the auxiliary lighting switch are
passed directly to the CJB.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB on receipt of signals from the rain/light sensor
located at the top of the windscreen. The exterior lights are turned on or off in response to ambient light signals from the
rain/light sensor on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection to the CJB. The auto lights can also be activated when
the windshield wipers are activated by signals from the rain sensor, which is located at the top of the windshield or when the
driver activates the wipers in the continuous wipe position for more than 10 seconds.
Two levels of headlamp specification are available; xenon or Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). AFS headlamps feature a
cornering lamp or a static bending lamp which illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for
example. North American Specification (NAS) vehicles have a side marker lamp installed in the headlamp assembly.
The tail lamp comprises the turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps, fog and reverse lamps. A side marker lamp is fitted to
the rear fender tail lamp assembly and is fitted in all markets.
An Auto High Beam system can also be fitted which automatically controls the high beam headlamps.
The exterior lighting system comprises the following exterior lamps:
Front and rear side lamps (LED (light emitting diode)'s)

License plate lamps
Side marker lamps (if fitted) (LED's)
Front and rear turn signal indicator lamps (LED's)
Turn signal indicator side repeater lamps
Stop lamps and high mounted stop lamp (LED's)
Reversing lamps (LED's)
Rear fog lamps (LED's)
Static bending/cornering lamps (if fitted - AFS headlamp except NAS) (LED's)
Bi-xenon headlamps
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if fitted).
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
EXTERIOR LIGHTING - CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item Description
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
1 Battery
3 Hazard warning lamp switch
4 Auto High Beam (AHB) Module
5 Left Hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch
6 Brake switch
8 LH tail lamp
9 Right Hand (RH) tail lamp
10 License plate lamp (2 off)
12 Passenger door module
13 Driver's door module
14 RH turn signal indicator side repeater lamp
15 LH turn signal indicator side repeater lamp
16 RH headlamp assembly
17 LH headlamp assembly
18 Headlamp control module (AFS headlamps only)
19 High mounted stop lamp
20 Rain/light sensor
AUTO HIGH BEAM CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item Description
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN; N = Medium Speed CAN; O = LIN Bus
1 LH steering column multifunction switch
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
3 Wheel speed sensor
4 Auto high beam control module and image sensor
6 Auto high beam warning indicator
7 High beam warning indicator
8 LH headlamp assembly
9 RH headlamp assembly
10 Rain/light sensor
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)
The CJB (central junction box) is located behind the rear seat center armrest and is connected to the vehicle wiring harness
with 8 multiplugs.
The CJB receives 2 permanent battery power supplies via the BJB (battery junction box).
The lighting circuits are not all protected by conventional fuses as some are protected by Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field
Effect Transistors (MOSFETs). The control circuitry within the CJB for each individual circuit can detect and isolate a problem
circuit.
Failure of a lamp is not notified to the driver. If a turn signal indicator fails the turn signal warning indicator in the instrument
cluster will flash at double speed.
Input Signals for Lamp Control
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches:
Lighting control switch for side lamps, headlamps and auto headlamps
Momentary push switch for the rear fog lamps
Left hand steering column multifunction switch for turn signal indicators and high beam/headlamp flash and Auto High
Beam system
Brake pedal switch
Momentary push switch for hazard warning.
The switches are supplied with a 10mA supply from the CJB and switch to ground when operated. The CJB detects that a
switch has been operated (ON) when its closing resistance is less than 100 Ohm and is detected as OFF when its resistance is
more than 10K Ohm.
The lighting control switch uses a resistive ladder, the output voltage of which is detected by the CJB which in turn determines
the selected position.
The CJB also receives ignition status via hard wired connections from the stop/start switch.
A reverse gear engaged signal is also received on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus from the TCM
(transmission control module) to enable the CJB to activate the reverse lamps.
The CJB can receive a hazard warning indicator activation message from the RCM (restraints control module), via the high
speed CAN bus, in the event of a crash. The CJB can also activate the hazard warning indicators to signify vehicle locking to
the driver.
On vehicles with Auto High Beam, the auto high beam control module outputs signals on the medium speed CAN bus to the
CJB to control the high beam headlamps.
Circuit Protection
Operation of the lamps is performed using overload proof Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs). The
MOSFETs can detect overload, load interruption with the lamps switched on and short circuit to positive with the lamps
switched off.
The MOSFETs are protected against short circuits, removing the requirement for the lamps circuits to be protected by fuses.
The MOSFETs respond to heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit. Normally this would cause the fuse
to blow. The MOSFETs react to the heat increase and cut the supply to the affected circuit. Once the fault has been rectified or
the MOSFET has cooled, the MOSFET will automatically reset and operate the circuit normally.
If an overload occurs, the current flow is dependant on the temperature of the related MOSFET and can be up to 20 times the
rated current of the lamp. The MOSFET heats up and deactivates the load applied to the circuit. When the MOSFET cools the
circuit is once again reactivated. This thermal cycling occurs continuously in the event of an overload occurring.
A number of lamps are controlled by relays and these circuits are protected by conventional fuses.
Bulb/LED Monitoring
Bulb/LED (light emitting diode) failure monitoring is performed by the CJB processor. The lamps are cold and warm monitored
by the MOSFETs in order to detect bulb failure.
NOTE: Relay controlled lamps have no diagnostic monitoring.
The CJB processor provides outputs to each MOSFET. The output switches the MOSFET to supply the required output to power
the applicable lighting circuit. The microprocessor evaluates the circuits by detecting the returned signals from the controlling
MOSFET.
When the bulb or LED is functioning normally, the output signal voltage from the controlling MOSFET is 0V. If a bulb or LED in
the circuit fails, an open circuit occurs and the MOSFET outputs a signal of 5V to the processor. The signal is interpreted as a
bulb or LED failure and generates a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) which can be retrieved using an approved Jaguar diagnostic
system.
Warm monitoring is performed continuously when the lights are switched on by evaluating the diagnostic output of the MOSFET
switches. Cold monitoring is performed at 32 second intervals when the lights are switched off. The MOSFETs briefly switch on
the lights for approximately 1 millisecond (this is insufficient to illuminate the bulb or LED) and checks the bulb or LED as per
warm monitoring.
Cold monitoring is not possible for the low/high beam headlamps of vehicles using xenon bulbs. On these vehicles the cold
monitoring of the low/high beam headlamps is switched off in the CJB. The CJB detects a failed xenon bulb via a reduction in
current flow to the affected headlamp's xenon control module.
When a xenon bulb fails, the control module's current consumption falls to 60mA, which the CJB detects as unsuccessful bulb
illumination.
Alarm Indications
The CJB can also display alarm visual indications for alarm arm, disarm and triggered conditions.
If the hazard warning lamps are active when a lock or unlock request is made, the hazard warning cycle is interrupted to allow
the visual indication of the requested lock cycle. When visual indication is completed, the hazard warning operation will
continue.
If the vehicle is involved in crash of a severity for the RCM to initiate deployment of the airbags, the control module outputs a
hazard warning lamps on request on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The hazard warning lamps will be activated and
will continue until the RCM outputs a message to deactivate the hazard warning lamps.
Redundant Data Storage
The CJB stores data relating to the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), total mileage and service interval indicator. This data
is received by the CJB from the instrument cluster and used as a back-up in the event of instrument cluster replacement.
If the CJB is to be replaced, an approved Jaguar diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the CJB replacement
procedure followed to ensure that the stored data is transferred to the new unit.
Low Voltage Operation
If the battery voltage falls below 11.2V, the CJB operates the minimum lighting to preserve the remaining battery charge.
Crash Signal Activation
In the event of an accident of a severity to activate and deploy the airbags, the RCM requests various electrical operations to
assist with the crash situation. The RCM requests via the bus systems to the CJB to activate the hazard warning lamps.
Security Signal Activation
In the event of the security system being triggered, the CJB requests activation of the hazard warning lamps.
Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimming
The CJB controls the instrument cluster backlighting illumination and also illumination of all instrument panel switches.
The CJB supplies a power output to all switch illumination bulbs at a voltage determined by the position of the manual dimmer
rheostat. The switch illumination is activated when the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or headlamp position.

The CJB outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the lighting function of
the switch and the second feed being supplied to the auto headlamp exit delay function. The switch position is determined by
CJB by the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors in series depending on the selection
made.
Lighting functions
OFF - When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which determines that no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to
the auto headlamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that auto
headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
SIDE LAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the side lamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the
resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the side lamps. The reference voltage to the
autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that auto headlamp or
exit delay has not been selected.
HEADLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the
resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the headlamps. The reference voltage to the auto
headlamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that auto headlamp or
exit delay has not been selected.
AUTOLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the auto headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the
resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the autolamp function. The reference voltage to
the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is detected by the CJB which determines that auto
headlamp has been selected.
High Beam
The CJB outputs a reference voltage to the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch for operation of the high
beam/flash function.
When the switch is in the central off position the reference voltage is passed through 3 resistors. The return voltage is
detected by the CJB which determines that no selection has been made.
When the switch is moved forwards to the high beam position, the reference voltage is passed through 2 resistors. The return
voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the high beam function of the bi-xenon headlamps.
When the switch is moved rearwards to the high beam flash position, the reference voltage is passed through 1 resistor. The
return voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the high beam function of the bi-xenon headlamps for as long as the
switch is operated.
Headlamp Delay Functions
EXIT DELAY 1 (30 seconds) - When the lighting control switch is moved to the exit 1 position, the reference voltage from the
CJB flows through 3 resistors. The returned signal is detected by the CJB which activates the 30 second headlamp delay timer.
CJB flows through 2 resistors. The returned signal is detected by the CJB which activates the 60 second headlamp delay timer.
CJB flows through 1 resistor. The returned signal is detected by the CJB which activates the 120 second headlamp delay timer.
Turn Signal Indicators
The CJB outputs a reference voltage to the LH steering column multifunction switch for operation of the LH and RH (right-hand)
turn signal indicators.
When the switch is in the central off position the reference voltage is passed through 3 resistors. The return voltage is
detected by the CJB which determines that no selection has been made.
When the switch is moved to the LH position, the reference voltage is passed through 1 resistor. The return voltage is
detected by the CJB which activates the LH turn signal indicators for as long as the switch is activated or for 3 flashes if the
switch was operated for the lane change function.
When the switch is moved to the RH position, the reference voltage is passed through 2 resistors. The return voltage is
detected by the CJB which activates the RH turn signal indicators for as long as the switch is activated or for 3 flashes if the
switch was operated for the lane change function.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH

Rear Fog Lamp Switch
The CJB supplies a reference voltage and return to the rear fog lamp switch. The fog lamp switch is a non-latching, momentary
switch.
When the fog lamp switch is off the reference voltage is passed through a 1Kohm resistor. The voltage through the resistor is
returned to the CJB which determines that no request for fog lamp operation has been made.
When the driver presses the fog lamp switch, the reference voltage is passed momentarily through a 330 ohm resistor. The
change in return voltage is sensed by the CJB which determines fog lamp operation has been requested. The CJB provides a
power supply to the 3 LED's in each rear fog lamp. A fog lamp warning lamp in the instrument cluster will also be illuminated
when the fog lamps are operating.
The CJB will only activate the rear fog lamps if the headlamps are selected ON or are active with auto headlamp activation.
When the headlamps are turned off the fog lamps are also turned off. If the driver presses the fog lamp switch for a second
time the rear fog lamps are also switched off. When the headlamps are next switched on, the fog lamps will not be activated
until the driver requests fog lamp operation.
NOTE: The rear fog lamps do not operate when DRL (daytime running lamps) are active.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMPS
Auto Headlamps
When the lighting control switch is in the auto headlamp position, a reference voltage from the CJB flows through 4 resistors
in the lighting control switch. The returned signal voltage is detected by the CJB which activates the autolamp function. The
reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is also routed through 4 resistors of the same rating which is detected by
the CJB which determines that auto headlamp has been selected.
The rain/light sensor receives a battery voltage output from the ignition relay in the CJB. The rain/light sensor continually
outputs a LIN (local interconnect network) bus message to the CJB with information regarding the ambient light levels. When
the ambient light level reaches a predetermined value, the CJB activates the auto headlamp feature. The CJB can also activate
the auto headlamps when it receives information regarding rain fall from the rain/light sensor which subsequently activates the
auto wipers function.
Auto High Beam (AHB)
The Auto High Beam (AHB) system is controlled by a AHB control module which is located in the interior rear view mirror body
and by the CJB. The module and the CJB are connected via the medium speed CAN bus.
The AHB control module receives a power supply from the CJB when the ignition is in power mode 6 (ignition on). The rear view
mirror also includes a low resolution camera (image) sensor which detects headlamps and tail lamps of preceding vehicles. The
sensor is connected to the control module which evaluates the image data, checking for light intensity and location.
If conditions are correct, the control module will activate the AHB by sending a high or low beam request message to the CJB
via the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then controls the shutter in the Bi-Xenon projector module.
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification.
NOTE: The tail lamps, side marker lamps, stop lamps, high mounted stop lamp and rear fog lamps are illuminated by
LED's and are non-serviceable components.
Bulb Type Rating

Xenon headlamp bulb D3S 35W
Licence plate lamps - All markets W5W 5W

Item Description
1 Off position
2 Side lamp position
3 High beam position
4 RH turn signal indicator
5 Headlamp flash/high beam off position
6 LH turn signal indicator
7 Headlamp position
8 AUTO headlamp position
9 Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10 Headlamp timer 60 second delay position
11 Headlamp timer 30 second timer delay position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH steering column multifunction switch. The lighting control switch is a rotary
control with positions for the following lighting functions:
Off
Side lamps
Headlamps
AUTO headlamps
Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The LH steering column multifunction switch also provides for the following functions:
Low beam headlamps

High beam headlamps
Headlamp flash
LH and RH turn signal indicators
Trip computer function button.
The switch has a turn signal indicator lane change function which is configurable by the dealer. If the switch is gently pushed
to either turn signal indicator position and then released, the applicable turn signal indicators will flash 3 times and then will
be automatically cancelled. If a turn signal indicator fails, the green turn signal warning indicator in the instrument cluster will
flash at twice the normal rate and the audible ticking from the instrument cluster sounder will also be at twice the normal rate.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) switch shown
Item Description
1 Luggage compartment lid release switch
2 Instrument panel illumination dimmer thumbwheel
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The switch has a rear fog
lamp switch and a rotary thumbwheel dimmer to adjust instrument panel illumination. The auxiliary lighting switch also has a
luggage compartment release switch.
The rear fog lamp switch is a non-latching switch which provides a momentary signal to the instrument cluster. The fog lamps
can only be activated if the ignition is in power mode 6 and the headlamps or auto headlamps are selected on. If the fog lamp
switch is pressed when the fog lamps are operating, they will be switched off. If the lighting control switch is moved to the
side lamp or off position or if the auto headlamps turns off the headlamps the rear fog lamps will be extinguished. If the
headlamps are subsequently turned on the rear fog lamp operation will not be active and the rear fog lamp switch must be
pressed to activate the lamps.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; xenon without Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) or xenon with AFS. The headlamp is
secured in the front of the vehicle with three bolts; 1 inboard bolt is screwed into the front upper cross member and 2 bolts
located at the rear of the headlamp assembly and secure the headlamp to a fender support brackets which in turn is connected
to the upper cross-member. Xenon bulb replacement requires the removal of the 3 bolts and the headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp has an access panel which is secured with four screws. The panel allows access to the xenon bulb for
replacement. A smaller rubber pull-off cover on the panel can be removed to access the tourist lever. Access to the panel and
the pull-off cover is by partial removal of the wheel arch splash shield.
The headlamps have 2 adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and horizontal
alignment.
On NAS vehicles, the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws must be turned equal
amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair
Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of the headlamp
assembly.
Item Description
1 Turn signal indicator LED's
2 Projector module -Low/High beam headlamp
3 Cornering/static bending lamp LED's (if fitted)
4 Side marker lamp LED (NAS only)
5 Side lamp LED's
6 Headlamp mounting screw locations (3 off)
7 Headlamp beam adjuster
8 Headlamp breather vent (3 off)
10 Headlamp beam adjuster
11 Xenon control module
12 Tourist lever access cover
13 Access panel
14 Access panel attachment screw (4 off)
15 Xenon bulb igniter
16 Tourist lever
17 Xenon ignitor electrical connector
Bi-Xenon Headlamp
The bi-xenon headlamp uses a projector module. The projector module comprises an ellipsoidal lens and a reflector. The
projector reflector collects the light produced by the xenon bulb and projects the light into a focal plane containing a shield.
The contour of the shield is projected onto the road by the lens.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves a flap to blank off
a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking
decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by partial removal of the wheel arch splash shield and removing the access
cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector.
NOTE: The tourist lever is not fitted to NAS vehicles.
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 30000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality. Make sure
that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be adhered to when working on the xenon low beam headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
Handling of the D3S xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment; for example gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
Only operate the bulb in a mounted condition in the projector module installed in the headlamp.
The xenon headlamp is known as 'bi-xenon' because it operates as both a low and high beam headlamp unit. The xenon lamp,
or High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes referred to, comprises an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid
controlled shutter to change the beam output from low to high beam.
The xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The control
modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the bulbs through their start-up phases of
operation.
The xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector, the lens, a
shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which together form an assembly known as the projector module. The reflector is curved
and provides the mounting point for the xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure the correct alignment in the
reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an integral component of the igniter and is electrically
connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is used to change the beam
projection from low beam to high beam and vice versa.
The xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes within the bulb. The xenon
gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the heat generated by the current flow to produce the
characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output for continuous operation
is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to establish the arc. This is
produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The xenon control module regulates the supply
to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly and the
environment within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the warm-up phase is
complete, the xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and the operating
power required for continual operation is reduced to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is completed in a very
short time.
The xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched
on. The modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have integral coils
which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the xenon bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a closed
circuit for the regulated power supply from the control modules.
Static Bending/Cornering Lamps
The static bending/cornering lamps, which are a standard feature on AFS headlamps, are designed to illuminate the direction
of travel when cornering at low speeds. The static bending/cornering lamp functionality, which is controlled by the CJB, is
unique to vehicles with AFS headlamps and operates using inputs from the steering angle sensor.
The static bending/cornering lamp LED's are incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The design of the lens
projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis.
The static bending/cornering lamp uses 2 high power LED's located in the headlamp housing. The LED's are not serviceable
components.
Cornering Lamp Functionality
The cornering lamps are designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The design of the lens
projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LHsteering column multifunction switch with the lighting control switch in the
headlamp position and the ignition switch in power mode 6 (ignition on). The cornering lamps are supplied power with power
mode 6 (ignition on) to ensure that they do not function with the headlamp delay feature. The cornering lamps are deactivated
if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) at which point the static bending lamp functionality is activated.
Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the LH turn signal indicators are selected on, the left hand
cornering lamp will be illuminated and visa versa, providing the vehicle speed and lighting control switch positions are correct.
Static Bending Lamp Functionality
NOTE: Static bending lamps only operate when the transmission is in DRIVE or in SPORT.
The static bending lamps operate with a steering angle sensor CAN signal and vehicle speed signal which is received by the
AFS control module and the CJB. The AFS control module sends a static bending lamp on request to the CJB which activates
the static bending lamp LED's
When the operation parameters of the lamp are reached, the CJB illuminates the static bending lamp LED's on using a full
power PWM (pulse width modulation) voltage. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the LED's off by decreasing the
PWM voltage in a linear manner.
Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicator lamp is located in-board of the headlamp projector module. The indicator lamp comprises 8 amber
LED's arranged in a circular pattern.
When active, the turn signal indicator lamps will flash at a frequency cycle of 400ms on and 400ms off. If a bulb fails, the
remaining turn signal lamps bulbs continue to flash at normal speed.
Side Lamps
The side lamp is located in a row along the bottom of the headlamp. The side lamp comprises 8 LED's.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are functional
at all times and are dependant on a particular ignition mode status. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting
control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the rain/light sensor.
Side Marker Lamps (NAS only)
The side marker lamp is located at the outboard end of the side lamps and is illuminated by a single amber LED. An amber
reflex reflector continues from the end of the side marker lamp and forms a triangle around the static bending/corning lamp
(where fitted).
The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side lamps are active.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) HEADLAMPS

The AFS headlamp is similar in its construction to the xenon headlamp. The projector module is constructed and operates as
described for the xenon headlamp with the addition of the AFS system which allows the projector module to be moved
vertically and horizontally by stepper motors. The following description covers the additional differences to the xenon
headlamp with AFS.
The AFS is a system to improve driver visibility under differing driving conditions. AFS provides a larger visible area which is
illuminated when cornering by adjusting the position of the beam distribution on the road. Horizontal adjustment is made
automatically to the most suitable orientation for the driving conditions using steering angle and information from other
vehicle sensors.
AFS includes the dynamic headlamp leveling system described in the 'Headlamp Leveling' section of this document. The
bi-xenon™ module within the headlamp is controlled by actuator motors which rotate the projector module on its vertical and
horizontal axes to adjust the beam output to suit the cornering conditions and vehicle inclination. Only the adaptive bi-xenon™
lamp projector module swivels, all other lamps remain static.
The AFS is controlled by an AFS control module which is located on the instrument panel frame, behind the glove compartment.
The module is connected to and controls an AFS power module located inside the headlamp housing. Signals from the AFS
control module are processed by the AFS power module which powers stepper motors to adjust the vertical and horizontal
alignment of the projector module. The AFS power module also controls and regulates the operation of the static bending lamp
(if fitted) which is requested by the AFS control module but controlled by the CJB.
Item Description
A Conventional headlamp beam distribution
B AFS headlamp beam distribution
The AFS xenon headlamp construction is similar to the non-AFS xenon headlamp assembly. The AFS headlamp has a xenon
control module located on the underside of the lamp assembly. An additional AFS power module is located inside the headlamp
housing. The AFS power modules supply the correct voltage to the stepper motors which control the positioning and movement
of the AFS projector module.
The AFS assembly contains an additional carrier frame which provides the location for the AFS actuators. The remaining lamps
are as described previously for the xenon headlamp. The AFS headlamp also incorporates a static bending/cornering lamp
(except on NAS market vehicles).
The carrier frame is attached to the AFS vertical actuator. The projector module has a central pivot point which allows the
module to move horizontally in response to operation of the AFS horizontal actuator.
The AFS actuators are bi-polar (2 phase) dc stepper motors which are driven by a power output from the AFS power module.
Each stepper motor receives its position information from the AFS control module via the applicable AFS power module. When
the actuators are powered to their requested positions, a holding current is applied to maintain the actuator position.
The actuators do not supply a positional feedback signal to the AFS control module. Each stepper motor requires referencing
each time the AFS system becomes active. When the AFS system is active, each vertical actuator is driven in the low beam
position and each horizontal actuator is driven to an inboard position until a mechanical stop in the actuator is reached. Once
the stop is reached a step counter in the AFS control module is set to zero and the actuator is then powered to the operating
position as determined by the AFS control module software.
The AFS control module receives front and rear suspension height data and vehicle speed signals from the ABS module to
adjust the projector module vertically to increase the beam range as the vehicle speed increases.
AFS Control Module
The AFS control module is located on the bulkhead in the passenger compartment, behind the glove compartment.
The AFS control module is a dual functionality unit which also incorporates software to control the dynamic headlamp leveling.
The AFS control module is connected to the high speed CAN bus and receives inputs from other vehicle systems on the status
of the following parameters:
• Steering angle
• Vehicle speed
• Headlamp status
• Engine running
• Reverse gear selected
• Automatic lighting on.
The AFS will only operate when the AFS control module receives an engine running signal on the CAN bus. When the engine
running signal is received the AFS control module performs an initialization routine.
The AFS will also function when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and the AFS control module receives a lights
on signal from the rain/light sensor and an engine running signal.
The AFS control module then monitors the inputs from the other vehicle systems to control the AFS functionality according to
cornering (steering) angles and vehicle speed.
The AFS control module is connected to each AFS power module on a private LIN bus. The power modules read operating
values supplied from the AFS control module and control the output drivers for the stepper motor actuators inside the
headlamp assembly.
AFS Operation
The AFS controls the swiveling angle of each projector module using speed and steering angle signals. The angles of each
projector module differ to give the correct spread of light, e.g. when turning left, the left hand projector module will have a
greater swiveling angle than the right hand projector module.
Initialization Procedure
When the AFS control module receives an ignition on signal, the control module performs the initialization procedure which
ensures that the headlamps are correctly aligned on both their vertical and horizontal axes.
The AFS swivel initialization starts less than 1 second after the headlamp leveling initialization is activated to ensure that the
headlamps are at or below the 0 degree position in the vertical axis, thus preventing glare to oncoming vehicles. The AFS
swivel initialization is completed in less than 2.5 seconds. The LH and RH AFS actuator motors are powered from the 0 degree
position to a small movement to the inboard position, then another small movement to the outboard position and then back to
the 0 degree position.
Failure Mode
In the event of a failure of the AFS system, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated to warn the driver. The
AFS warning indicator illuminates when the ignition is in power mode 6 (ignition on) and will flash continuously until the fault
is rectified. The AFS warning indicator will also be illuminated if a failure of the steering angle sensor or the vehicle speed
signal is detected.
Illumination of the AFS warning indicator does not necessarily mean that there is a fault with the AFS system. The fault may
be caused by a failure of another system preventing the AFS system operating correctly.
The AFS control module performs a diagnostic routine every time AFS is requested. If any fault is found, the AFS control
module will suspend the operation of the AFS function.
If the AFS leveling system has failed with the xenon projector module in a position other than the correct straight ahead
position, the AFS control module will attempt to drive the projector module to a position a small amount lower than the
standard position. If the swivel function has failed, the AFS control module will lower the projector module using the leveling
actuator motors to a position much lower than standard to prevent excess glare to oncoming vehicles.
The AFS control module software can detect an internal failure of the control module control circuits. The control module will
power the projector modules to the zero position and prevent further operation.
Faults can be investigated by interrogating the AFS control module using the Land Rover recommended diagnostic tool to check
for fault codes.
HEADLAMP DELAY
The CJB controls a headlamp delay function which illuminates the driveway after leaving the vehicle. The headlamp delay will
operate on low beam headlamps only regardless of the position of the LH steering column multifunction switch.
The headlamp delay is activated when the lighting control switch is in one of the 3 exit delay positions and the engine is
switched off. The message center displays a 'HEADLIGHT DELAY' message and the low beam headlamps will be activated for a
period of approximately 30, 60 or 120 seconds. After the delay period, the CJB automatically switches off the delay function,
extinguishing the headlamps.
The headlamp delay feature can also be switched on when approaching the vehicle or switched off by pressing the headlamp
button on the smart key.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION

The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by selection of
side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp
system uses a light sensor and the CJB, which are connected via a LIN bus to control the headlamp functionality. The light
sensor is incorporated in the rain/light sensor located on the inside of the windshield, below the rear view mirror. The wiper
system also uses the rain/light sensor for automatic wiper operation.
The light sensor measures the ambient light around the vehicle in a vertical direction and also the angular light level from the
front of the vehicle. The rain/light sensor uses vehicle speed signals, wiper switch position and the park position of the front
wipers to control the system. The automatic headlamp operation uses ambient light levels which are monitored by photodiode
incorporated in the rain/light sensor. The rain/light sensor sends a lights on/off request to the CJB on the LIN bus, which
responds by switching on the low beam headlamps, front side lamps and rear tail lamps. The automatic headlamps are
activated under the following conditions:
Twilight
Darkness
Rain
Snow
Tunnels
Underground or multistoried car parks.
Operation of the automatic headlamps requires the ignition to be in ignition mode 6, the lighting control switch to be in the
'AUTO' position and a lights on request signal from the light sensor. If the rain sensor signal activates the fast speed wipers,
the low beam headlamps are activated, providing the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position.
If the automatic headlamp function has been selected and the ambient light falls below a pre-defined level then the rear fog
lamps can be manually activated. If the ambient light rises above that level then the fog lamps will be deactivated along with
the rest of the lamps. If the ambient light then falls below this level again the lamps will be automatically activated, but the
rear fog lamps, which were previously manually selected, will not.
AUTO HIGH BEAM (AHB)

The automatic headlamp system has an additional feature called Auto High Beam (AHB). AHB is an automatic driving aid that
relieves the driver of having to switch the high beam lighting on and off.
The AHB functions by employing a light sensor and a camera (image) sensor which together monitor ambient light levels,
oncoming vehicle headlamps and preceding vehicle tail lamps. The rain/light sensor (integrated unit) and the camera (image)
sensor are located in the interior mirror mounting behind an aperture and looking forwards through the windscreen. If required
the system can be overridden.
CAUTION: The high beam assist system is designed as a driving aid only. Should the road conditions require, it is the
driver’s responsibility to consider other road users and operate the high beam headlamps in a safe manner. In certain
circumstances the driver will be required to intervene.
The AHB system is controlled by an AHB control module, which is located in the interior rear view mirror body, and by CJB. The
module and the CJB are connected via the medium speed CAN bus.
Auto High Beam Interior Mirror
Item Description
1 Rear view mirror calibration bracket
2 Ambient light sensor (HBA)
3 Rain/light sensor (Auto headlamps)
4 Image sensor
5 AHB control module (inside mirror body)
High Beam Assist Warning Indicator
The warning indicator for the AHB system is green and illuminates if the high beam is activated by the AHB system. The blue
high beam warning indicator will also illuminate.
NOTE: The function of the normal 'blue' high beam warning indicator remains unchanged and it always reflects the actual
status of the high beam lamps
Auto High Beam Operation
The AHB operates as part of the automatic headlight system. When driving at night with the lighting control switch in the
automatic position and the LH steering column multifunction switch in the central position, with sufficient darkness
(approximately 1 lux or less) and a suitable road speed, the AHB will automatically operate the high beam lighting when
necessary. A warning symbol in the instrument cluster confirms to the driver when the AHB system is selected and enabled.
NOTE: The exterior lighting 'on' threshold for the auto headlamps system is approximately 100 lux which is measured by
the rain/light sensor. At light levels below this value the low beam headlamps and exterior lights will be switched on. The AHB
will not function until the light level has reached approximately 1 lux. At light levels above 1 lux high beam is not required and
therefore is not activated.
Activation (System Ready)
AHB will only activate and illuminate the warning indicator to show system is ready or 'primed' for high beam control, when the
following conditions are met:
AHB has been first 'enabled' via the instrument cluster menu
Lighting control switch is in the 'Auto' position
LH steering column multifunction switch in the central position
The ambient light level is below 100 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
The system has not been overridden or cancelled – refer to 'Override' section that follows
The camera (image) sensor view is not blocked.
High Beam Control
When activated, AHB will switch the headlamps to high beam when all the following conditions occur:
No relevant oncoming traffic

No relevant preceding traffic
In non-urban environment, i.e. with no street lighting
Ambient light level is below 1 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
Road speed is suitable – refer to 'Road Speed' section that follows.
Low Beam Control
When activated, AHB will switch the headlamps to low beam when any of the following conditions occur:
Relevant Oncoming traffic is present

Relevant Preceding traffic is present
In urban environment, i.e. with street lighting
Ambient light level is above 1 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
Road speed is not suitable – refer to 'Road Speed' section that follows
Unrecognisable reflective inputs from road signs or markings – refer to 'System Limitations' section that follows.
Light Levels
The exterior lighting 'on' threshold for the normal 'auto headlamps' feature is approximately 100 lux and is measured by the
windscreen mounted 'rain/light' sensor. When the light level falls to this value the low beam headlamps and exterior lights will
be switched on together with the AHB warning indicator.
This warns the driver that the system is activated and ready to automatically switch on the high beam headlamps when the
light level falls a little further to approximately 1 lux, as measured by the 'ambient light sensor' located in the mirror body.
High beam is generally not required with light levels above 1 lux.
Road Speed
A road speed signal is received by the CJB from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module via the high speed CAN bus. When
the other activation conditions are correct, the CJB will switch the headlamps to high beam when the road speed has increased
above 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the road speed falls to below 24 km/h (15mph), the CJB will switch the headlamps to low beam. The 10 mph (15 km/h)
difference between the on and off road speed thresholds prevents the system continually switching between high and low
beam at low speeds.
Override
The driver can manually override the AHB system at any time. When the AHB system is activated, pulling the LH steering
column multifunction switch to the high beam 'flash' position or pushing it forward to the high beam position will de-activate
the system and the AHB warning indicator in the instrument cluster will extinguish.
When the multifunction switch is returned to the central position, from a forward high beam position, the system is
re-activated and the AHB warning indicator will illuminate again.
Correct Performance
In addition, AHB will only exhibit best performance if all of the following conditions are met:
No false inputs are received by the camera (image) sensor, such as reflected light from certain static signs – refer to
'System Limitations' section that follows
Headlamps are correctly aligned
The AHB system has been set for correct 'hand of traffic' via the driver menu settings – refer to 'Setting Hand of Traffic'
section that follows
Headlamps have been set for correct 'hand of traffic' via the mechanical tourist lever in headlamp casing – refer to
'Setting Hand of Traffic' section that follows
Camera (image) sensor has been through a self learning 'auto aim' calibration procedure if any components have been
replaced – refer to 'Calibration' section that follows
There are no large reflective items, white papers, etc., sitting on top of the dash board in near view of the camera
(image) sensor, or stickers placed directly in front of the camera (image) sensor
Driver Menu Features
The AHB feature must first be enabled using the configuration menu available in the instrument cluster. However if required,
the AHB system can be permanently disabled leaving the basic 'Auto Lamps' system still operative.
Within this menu the system can also be configured for driving on the alternate side of the road (Hand of Traffic). This enables
the system to be used in different regions and it's setting is important for correct operation.
Setting 'Hand of Traffic' and Auto High Beam 'Enable'
To set the AHB options the following steps must be sequenced:
With the ignition in power mode 6 (ignition on), and the engine not running, use the joypad controls on the steering
wheel to select on the instrument cluster menu:
- Menu > Vehicle Set-up > Auto High Beam
Configure the 'Hand of Traffic' setting by selecting the appropriate 'Drive on Left' (of road) or 'Drive on Right' (of road)
to the applicable Market condition
Enable the feature by setting 'Activate Auto high Beam' if not already selected.
NOTES:
Enabling or disabling high beam assist will not affect the ‘Hand of Traffic’ settings once set.
The headlamps still require manual adjustment using the tourist lever for driving abroad in countries where the alternate
side of the road is used.
The instrument cluster menu also includes a 'Auto High Beam Sensitivity' selection. This is a requirement option for NAS
market vehicles only but it is not recommended for normal use and has been superseded.
NOTE: In other markets the 'Sensitivity' selection is greyed out and cannot be selected.
System Limitations
The AHB system can occasionally have difficulty distinguishing between light from other vehicles or reflected light from static
highly reflective road signs.
These situations may cause the AHB system to undesirably operate the high beam headlamps or take no action at all.
Examples of these situations are as follows:
Dips, hollows or crests in the road

Highly reflective static Road signs
Tight bends
Poorly illuminated vehicles e.g. cyclists or small mopeds
Motorway central barriers
Extreme weather conditions e.g. Fog, heavy snow
Exterior domestic or industrial lighting
Reflective Static Signs
Item Description
1 Red reflective signs could be detected as rear tail lamps
2 Large reflective signs could affect the system
There are typical examples when a driver is able to judge if a manual high beam deactivation is necessary before the system
operates automatically, for example over the crest of a small bridge. Lights from an oncoming vehicle can be seen on the
horizon prior to the camera (image) sensor receiving an input. Although the other road user is approaching the high beam light
source, it is not yet affecting the occupants in this situation. Manual override in this instance would be possible although not
necessary as the AHB will turn off the high beam lamps upon receiving the input to the camera (image) sensor.
Manual Deactivation
Item Description
1 Vehicle equipped with auto high beam
2 Oncoming lighting can be seen prior to auto high beam image sensor receiving an input
There are situations when a driver is able to judge if a high beam deactivation is desirable before the AHB system actually
operates, for example over a crest of a hill. Headlamps from an oncoming vehicle can sometimes be seen on the horizon prior
to the detection sensor receiving an input. It is the driver's preference to determine if early intervention is desired in this and
similar situations.
System Diagnosis
NOTE: Windshield stickers, stone chips, dirt and general road film will affect the successful operation of the image sensor
if sufficient blocking is present. Avoid placing reflective objects on the instrument panel, for example white paper which can
affect the image sensor.
Auto high beam has a self diagnosis capability by comparing data from the ambient light sensor input (located in the rear view
mirror) to light levels detected by the image sensor. If a deviation is detected it is assumed that the ambient light available to
the image sensor is being restricted by dirt or other blockage and the system will be deactivated. DTC's are stored in the AHB
control module's memory and can be accessed using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system. Within the diagnostic system is a
procedure to test the basic operation of the camera function.
In the event of a fault, the warning strategy to the driver is as follows:
Image sensor internal fault - green icon will extinguish with no additional message to driver
CJB has lost all communication with image sensor - green icon will extinguish with no additional message to driver
Image sensor blocked - green icon will extinguish with an additional "Camera Blocked" message within the message
centre
System Calibration
To achieve effective operation of the AHB system, a calibration routine is performed on vehicle build and system tolerances are
set to an accuracy of +/- 0.2 degrees.
This initial calibration is a 'one time only' procedure. Should the AHB components or the windshield require replacement at the
dealership, an automatic calibration routine will be performed. This 'auto aim' calibration procedure is a continual process that
takes place during a normal drive cycle at night and could take between 10 - 30 minutes dependant on the following driving
conditions:
If sufficient road markings (lane markings) are visible to the image sensor - approximately 10 minutes
If insufficient road markings are visible, the system uses the tail lights of preceding vehicles - approximately 30
minutes.
NOTES:
Until this calibration is complete the system may not react correctly during operation. This should be made clear to the
customer before vehicle handover. During any calibration or rectification work the headlamps should be checked for correct
alignment.
Due to mechanical calibration tolerance the correct mirror assembly must be used for the vehicle model types in question
and it is not exchangeable with other vehicle model types.
After any rectification work and before any calibration drives, the headlamps should be checked for correct alignment.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)

Refer to DRL section for details.
Refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and Operation).
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

The rear lamp assembly is located in the rear quarter panel. The rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body
and is secured with 3 studs on the lamp body which are secured to the vehicle body with 3 flanged nuts.
All rear lamps use lamps use LED's with light guides which use internal refraction within the light guide to distribute the light.
Item Description
1 Side marker LED
2 Direction indicator LED's
3 Reverse lamp LED's
4 Rear fog lamp LED's
5 Reflector
6 Stop/side lamp LED's
7 Attachment studs (3 off)
Rear Stop and Side Lamp
The side lamps and stop lamps use 36 LED's. The 36 LED's are illuminated at a higher intensity than the side lamp when the
stop lamp switch is operated by pressing the brake pedal.
A side marker lamp is fitted to the outer rear lamp assembly and is fitted in all markets. The side marker lamp also uses 4
LED's and are active at all times when the side lamps are selected on.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the adaptive speed control module
is sent via the high speed CAN bus to the CJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
Turn Signal Indicator
The turn signal indicator lamp uses 12 amber LED's which illuminate through a clear lens.
Reverse Lamp
The reverse lamp uses 2 LED's which illuminate through a clear lens.
The reverse lamps are activated on receipt of a reverse selected message sent on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB.
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamps each use 3 high intensity LED's. The rear fog lamp is activated using a button located on the auxiliary
lighting switch in the instrument panel.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS

Two licence plate lamps are located in the rear bumper. Each lamp can be removed by inserting a wide, flat screwdriver blade
or similar tool in a slot between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from the surround. The 5W bulb is
a push fit in a holder which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

The high mounted stop lamp is located at the bottom of the rear windshield. The lamp is secured to a bezel in the parcel shelf
with 2 screws.
The high mounted stop lamp uses 12, red colored LED's which illuminate through a clear lens. The high mounted stop lamp
functionality is the same as that described for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR SIDE REPEATER LAMPS

The turn signal indicator side repeaters are located in each door mirror. The lamp uses a 5W orange bulb. The lamp unit is
secured to the mirror bezel with 2 screws and is connected to the mirror wiring harness with a 2 pin connector.
The side repeaters have the same functionality and operate in conjunction with the front and rear turn signal indicators and
the hazard warning flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are activated by a non-latching switch located in the switch pack located in the center of the instrument
panel. The hazard flashers operate at all times when selected and operate independent of the ignition mode.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to the CJB which activates the
front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of the switch is sensed by the CJB and the hazard
flasher are deactivated. When the hazard flashers are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the RCM.
Refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps
For a detailed description of the headlamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNING: The xenon headlamp system generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off
before working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the xenon headlamp system:
1. DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
2. Handling of the xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and goggles. The glass
part of the bulb must not be touched.
3. Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
4. Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for xenon headlamp system repairs in the manual, refer to
section 100-00 - General Information, Standard Workshop Procedures of the workshop manual.

Note that intermittent fault reports may be due to the cycling operation of the Field Effect Transistors (FETs)
2. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical or electrical faults.
Visual Inspection
Headlamp(s) condition and installation Fuses

Bulb(s) and installation Relays
Bulb holder(s) and installation Wiring harness
Lighting control switch and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Left-hand steering column multifunction switch and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) module
Headlamp power modules
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
Air Suspension Control module
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuits
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the headlamp circuits. Check
inoperative Bulb failure the lighting control switch function. Check the left-hand steering column
High beam lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown multifunction switch operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for
inoperative Circuit fault DTCs indicating a headlamp or related circuit fault.
Lighting control switch
fault
Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the tourist lever is set
dim Incorrect bulb rating correctly. Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch
Tourist lever set in the function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
wrong position function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
High beam lamp(s)
fault
dim
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function.
stuck on Circuit fault Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation.
Lighting control switch Check the headlamp timer function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
fault for DTCs indicating a headlamp circuit fault.
Left-hand steering
High beam lamp(s) column multifunction
stuck on switch fault
Headlamp timer
function fault
Headlamp low/high Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column
beam switching Circuit fault multifunction switch operation. Check the xenon lamp shutter mechanism
function inoperative Left-hand steering operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a
column multifunction headlamp circuit fault.
switch fault
Xenon lamp shutter
mechanism fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s). Check the lighting control switch function. Check the
inoperative Fuse(s) blown left-hand steering column multifunction switch function. Check the
Lighting control switch warning lamp circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
fault indicating an instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
Left-hand steering
switch inoperative
Circuit fault
Instrument cluster fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCMB) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Autolamps
For a detailed description of the autolamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of

Visual Inspection
Lighting control switch and installation Fuses

Rain/Light sensor condition and installation Relays
Wiper control switch and installation Wiring harness
Loose or corroded connector(s)
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Rain/Light sensor control module
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Side and headlamp(s) inoperative Check the fuse(s). Check the lighting and wiper control switch
when the automatic headlamp Fuse(s) blown functions. Check the automatic headlamp circuit. Refer to the
switch option is selected Lighting control electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a rain/light sensor or
switch fault LIN system fault.
Wiper control
switch fault
Circuit fault
Rain/Light
sensor fault
LIN circuit fault
Automatic headlamp switch Check the fuse(s). Check the lighting control switch function. Check
illumination inoperative Fuse(s) blown the automatic headlamp relay circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
Lighting control Check for DTCs indicating an automatic headlamp fault.
switch fault
Circuit fault
Automatic
headlamp relay
fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCMB) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Stoplamps
For a detailed description of the stoplamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of

NOTE: The stoplamps will be activated automatically under certain conditions when the ride and handling optimization
function is used.
Visual Inspection
Stoplamp condition and installation Fuses

Bulbs and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holders and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Stoplamp switch condition and installation Hill descent relay
Anti-lock Braking Control module (ABS)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Stoplamp(s) Check the bulb, LED lamp and fuse condition. Check the stoplamp circuits. Check the
inoperative Bulb failure stoplamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a
LED lamp failure stoplamp circuit fault.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Stoplamp switch
fault
Stoplamp(s) dim Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the stoplamp circuits. Refer to the
Incorrect bulb electrical guides.
rating
Circuit fault
Stoplamp(s) Check the stoplamp switch function. Check the stoplamp circuits. Refer to the
stuck on Stoplamp switch electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a stoplamp circuit fault.
fault
Circuit fault
Hill descent relay
circuit fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps
For a detailed description of the turn signal and hazard lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)


Note that intermittent fault reports may be due to the cycling operation of the field effect transistors (FETs)
Visual Inspection
Turn signal lamp(s) condition and installation Fuse(s)

Lighting control switch and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Left-hand steering column multifunction switch and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Hazard lamp switch condition and installation Steering angle sensor
Anti-lock Braking Control Module (ABS)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Turn signal/hazard Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the turn signal/hazard lamp
lamp(s) Bulb failure circuits. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch function.
inoperative Fuse(s) blown Check the hazard lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
Circuit fault for DTCs indicating a turn signal/hazard lamp circuit fault.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Turn signal/hazard Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the turn signal/hazard lamp
lamp(s) dim Incorrect bulb rating circuits. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch function.
Circuit fault Check the hazard lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Turn signal/hazard Check the turn signal/hazard lamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering
lamp(s) stuck on Left-hand steering column multifunction switch function. Check the hazard lamp switch
column multifunction function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a turn
switch fault signal/hazard lamp circuit fault.
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Circuit fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s). Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
inoperative Fuse(s) blown function. Check the hazard lamp switch function. Check the warning lamp
Left-hand steering circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an
column multifunction instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
switch inoperative
Hazard lamp switch
inoperative
Circuit fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps
For a detailed description of the turn signal, cornering and hazard lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)

NOTE: When diagnosing cornering/static bending lamp faults note that the operating principle differs slightly when the
headlamp system is installed with the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS).

Note that intermittent fault reports may be due to the cycling operation of the field effect transistors (FETs)
Visual Inspection
Turn signal lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses

Cornering lamp(s) condition and installation Wiring harness
Bulbs and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Bulb holders and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Lighting control switch and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Left-hand steering column multifunction switch and installation Steering angle sensor
hazard lamp switch condition and installation Anti-lock Braking Control Module (ABS)
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) module
Restraints control module
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Turn signal/hazard Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the turn signal/hazard lamp
lamp(s) Bulb failure circuits. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch function.
inoperative Fuse(s) blown Check the hazard lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
Circuit fault for DTCs indicating a turn signal/hazard lamp circuit fault.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Turn signal/hazard Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the turn signal/hazard lamp
lamp(s) dim Incorrect bulb rating circuits. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch function.
Circuit fault Check the hazard lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Turn signal/hazard Check the turn signal/hazard lamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering
lamp(s) stuck on Left-hand steering column multifunction switch function. Check the hazard lamp switch
column multifunction function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a turn
switch fault signal/hazard lamp circuit fault.
Hazard lamp switch
fault
Circuit fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check the left-hand steering
inoperative Fuse(s) blown column multifunction switch function. Check the hazard lamp switch
Left-hand steering function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
column multifunction Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
switch inoperative
Hazard lamp switch
inoperative
Circuit fault
Cornering lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check cornering lamp circuits. Check the
inoperative Bulb failure lighting control switch function. Check the left-hand steering column
Fuse(s) blown multifunction switch function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
Circuit fault indicating a cornering lamp circuit fault.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
fault
Cornering lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the cornering lamp circuits.
dim Incorrect bulb rating Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch function. Check
Circuit fault the lighting control switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Left-hand steering
switch fault
fault
Cornering lamp(s) Check the cornering lamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column
stuck on Left-hand steering multifunction switch function. Check the lighting control switch function.
column multifunction Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a cornering lamp
switch fault circuit fault.
fault
Circuit fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
For a detailed description of the parking, rear and license plate lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)

Visual Inspection
Rear lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses

License lamp(s) condition and installation Relays
Lighting control switch and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Rain/Light sensor condition and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Rain/Light sensor control module
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Rear/License lamp(s) inoperative Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the rear/license lamp
Bulb failure circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Refer to the
Fuse(s) blown electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a rear/license lamp
Circuit fault circuit fault.
Lighting
control switch
fault
Rear/License lamp(s) dim Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the rear/license lamp
Incorrect bulb circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Refer to the
rating electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Lighting
control switch
fault
Rear/License lamp(s) stuck on Check the rear/license lamp circuits. Check the lighting control
Circuit fault switch function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
Lighting indicating a rear/license lamp circuit fault.
control switch
fault
Rear/License lamp(s) inoperative Check the fuse(s). Check the lighting control switch function. Check
when the automatic headlamp Fuse(s) blown the automatic headlamp circuit. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
switch option is selected Lighting for DTCs indicating a rain/light sensor or LIN system fault.
control switch
fault
Circuit fault
Rain/Light
sensor fault
LIN circuit fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Fog Lamps
For a detailed description of the fog lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)

Visual Inspection
Rear fog lamp condition and installation Fuses

Bulb holder and installation Wiring harness
Bulb and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Fog lamp switch condition and installation Fog lamp relay
Fog lamp warning indicator
Fog lamp switch
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Fog lamp Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the fog lamp circuits. Check the
inoperative Bulb failure switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch
inoperative
Fog lamp dim Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the fog lamp circuits. Check the switch
Incorrect bulb function. Refer to the electrical guides.
rating
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Warning lamp Check the fuse(s). Check the switch function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer
inoperative Fuse(s) blown to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster fault.
Switch
inoperative
Circuit fault
Instrument
cluster fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Driving Lamps
For a detailed description of the driving lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of

Visual Inspection
Front driving lamp condition and installation Fuses

Bulb and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holder and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Adjuster screw Driving lamp relay
Driving lamp switch condition and installation Driving lamp warning indicator
Driving lamp switch
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Driving lamp Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the driving lamp circuits.
inoperative Bulb failure Check the switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch inoperative
Driving lamp dim Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the driving lamp circuits. Check
Incorrect bulb rating the switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Driving lamp lighting Check and adjust driving lamp alignment.

coverage poor Driving lamp
alignment incorrect
Warning lamp Check the fuse(s). Check the switch function. Check the warning lamp
inoperative Fuse(s) blown circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an
Switch inoperative instrument cluster fault.
Circuit fault
Instrument panel
cluster fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Reversing Lamps
For a detailed description of the reversing lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)

Visual Inspection
Reversing lamp condition and installation Fuses

Bulb and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holder and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Reversing lamp relay
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Reversing lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the reversing lamp circuits. Refer to
inoperative Bulb failure the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a reversing lamp circuit fault.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Missing reversing
switch signal
Reversing lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the reversing lamp circuits. Refer to
dim Incorrect bulb the electrical guides.
rating
Circuit fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Trailer Lamps
For a detailed description of the trailer lamps system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of

NOTES:
Prior to carrying out fault diagnosis of the trailer lamp system, verify the operation of the towing vehicle lighting system
with the trailer lighting plug(s) disconnected from the vehicle socket(s).
Intermittent fault reports may be due to the cycling operation of the Field Effect Transistors (FETs).
Visual Inspection
Trailer lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses

Bulbs and installation Relays
Bulb holders and installation Stop lamp switch
Trailer socket(s), plug(s) and installation Wiring harness
Loose or corroded connector(s)
Trailer socket(s) ground circuit(s)
Trailer fuse box
Trailer relay box
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Trailer brake lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer brake lamp circuit.
inoperative Bulb failure Check the brake lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Brake lamp switch
fault
Trailer brake lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the trailer brake lamp
dim Incorrect bulb rating circuit. Check the brake lamp switch function. Refer to the electrical
Circuit fault guides.
Brake lamp switch
fault
Trailer brake lamp(s) Check the trailer brake lamp circuits. Check the brake lamp switch
stuck on Circuit fault function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Brake lamp switch
fault
Trailer fog lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer fog lamp circuit.
inoperative Bulb failure Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Trailer fog lamp(s) dim Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the trailer fog lamp circuit.
Incorrect bulb rating Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer fog lamp(s) stuck Check the trailer fog lamp circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
on Circuit fault
Trailer tail and number Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer tail and number
plate lamp(s) Bulb failure plate lamp circuit. Check the trailer tail and number plate lamp relay
inoperative Fuse(s) blown function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer side lamp relay
fault
Trailer tail and number Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the trailer tail and number
plate lamp(s) dim Incorrect bulb rating plate lamp circuit. Check the trailer side lamp relay function. Refer to
Circuit fault the electrical guides.
Trailer side lamp relay
fault
Trailer tail and number Check the trailer tail and number plate lamp circuit. Check the trailer
plate lamp(s) stuck on Circuit fault tail and number plate lamp relay function. Refer to the electrical
Trailer tail and number guides.
plate lamp relay fault
Trailer turn signal Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer turn signal lamp
lamp(s) inoperative Bulb failure circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Trailer turn signal Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the trailer turn signal lamp
lamp(s) dim Incorrect bulb rating circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer turn signal Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer turn signal lamp
lamp(s) stuck on Circuit fault circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
Trailer reverse lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition. Check the trailer reverse lamp
inoperative Bulb failure circuit. Check the trailer reverse lamp relay function. Refer to the
Fuse(s) blown electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer reverse lamp
relay fault
Trailer reverse lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the trailer reverse lamp
dim Circuit fault circuit. Check the trailer reverse lamp relay function. Refer to the
Trailer reverse lamp electrical guides.
relay fault
Trailer reverse lamp(s) Check the trailer reverse lamp circuit. Check the trailer reverse lamp
stuck on Circuit fault relay function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Trailer reverse lamp
relay fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s). Check the warning lamp circuit. Refer to the
inoperative Fuse(s) blown electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or
Circuit fault CAN system fault.
Instrument cluster
fault
Trailer socket battery Check the fuse condition. Check the trailer battery feed circuit. Refer to
feed missing Fuse(s) blown the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer socket ignition Check the fuse condition. Check the trailer ignition feed circuit. Check
feed missing Fuse(s) blown the trailer ignition feed relay operation. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Trailer socket relay
faulty
DTC Index
and Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling
For a detailed description of the headlamp leveling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)

Visual Inspection
Headlamp leveling motor(s) and linkage(s) condition and Fuses

installation Wiring harness
Lighting control switch and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Left-hand steering column multifunction switch and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
module
Headlamp power modules
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control
module
Air suspension control module
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Headlamp leveling Check the fuse(s) condition. Check the headlamp leveling motor and linkage
system inoperative Fuse(s) blown condition. Check the headlamp leveling circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
Leveling Check for DTCs indicating headlamp leveling circuit and air suspension system
motor/linkage fault(s).
fault
Headlamp Headlamp leveling
alignment incorrect circuit fault
Air suspension
system fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCMB) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment
General Procedures
General Equipment
Headlamp beam setter
Check
CAUTION: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
1.
Make sure to check and adjust the tyre pressures to the correct
level.
Park the vehicle on a horizontally level surface.
2.
Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.
General Equipment: Headlamp beam setter
3. NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1 % below horizontal and parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.
Adjustment
1. Open the hood.
2.
Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.
3.
To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Masking
General Procedures
Adjustment
NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both sides.
Torque:
Fender Splash Shield 1.5 Nm
Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 2.5 Nm
6. Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

2. NOTES:
Make sure the headlamp is pressed into and up to the

finishing edge of the front fender.
The gap between the front lamp and the front fender
must not exceed 1mm +/- 0.5
Torque:
1 6.2 Nm
2 6.2 Nm
3 9 Nm

Installation).
5. Refer to: Headlamp Adjustment (417-01 Exterior Lighting, General

Procedures).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Bulb
Removal
NOTES:
3. Refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and

Installation).
Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Module
Removal
NOTES:
2. CAUTIONS:
Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure, damage

will occur if any force is used.

component.
Take extra care not to damage the component.
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: New units must be configured using the Programmable

Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
2. If equipped release the adhesive bond for the subwoofer

speaker seals.
NOTES:
Note the fitted position of the component/s prior to

removal.
Make sure that any trim that is accidentally displaced,

is installed to it's noted removal position.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips.

Installation
1.
Apply a suitable amount of adhesive to one of the
mating faces.
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly
Removal

2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTIONS:

component.
Installation
1.
2. NOTES:
Using the 3 adjustment torx studs, make sure that

the rear lamp fits flush with all the surrounding bodywork.
The gap between the rear lamp and the bodywork

must not exceed 1 mm.
Torque: 3 Nm

Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation

Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Right Hand (RH) front footwell lamp
2 RH front door puddle lamp
3 RH door mirror approach lamp
4 RH front door handle ambient lighting Light Emitting Diode (LED)
5 RH front door pocket ambient lighting LED
6 RH rear door puddle lamp
7 RH rear door handle ambient lighting LED
8 Front vanity mirror (2 off)
9 RH rear door pocket ambient lighting LED
10 RH rear Vanity mirror
11 Rear overhead console
12 Left Hand (LH) rear vanity mirror
13 Luggage compartment lamp
14 Rear footwell lamp (2 off)
15 LH rear door pocket ambient lighting LED
16 LH rear door handle ambient lighting LED
17 LH rear door puddle lamp
18 Rear air vent ambient illumination LED - where fitted (2 off)
19 LH front door pocket ambient lighting LED
20 LH front door handle ambient lighting LED
21 LH front door puddle lamp
22 LH door mirror approach lamp
23 Glovebox lamp switch
24 Glovebox illumination LED
25 LH front footwell lamp
26 Front overhead console
27 Front air vent ambient illumination LED - where fitted (4 off)
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
Interior lighting is provided to enable the safe entry and departure from the vehicle for the driver and passengers in low
ambient light conditions, without any manual switching of the lights.
NOTE: The term interior lamps also includes the door mirror approach lamps.
The interior lamps are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) and have 2 modes of operation: manual and automatic. The
front interior lamps in the front overhead console are operated using the 'JaguarSense' system. The system uses capacitive
proximity sensor technology for the switch operation which is integral with the overhead console. The rear overhead console
interior lamps have conventional switches.
The interior lighting has 2 modes of operation; automatic and manual.
In automatic mode, the courtesy lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB and reacts to the vehicle being locked or unlocked
and opening the vehicle doors.
In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off with the JaguarSense system and will not illuminate
automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened.
The driver's and passenger door approach lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the passenger door module
respectively and operate with the automatic mode.
The interior illumination also includes 'ambience' lighting. When the side or headlamps are switched on, phosphor blue LED
(light emitting diode)'s illuminate the instrument panel center switch surround, the JaguarDrive rotary control and also
illuminate the door handles and door pockets. On high specification vehicles the instrument panel air vents are also
illuminated. Two LED's in each of the front and rear overhead consoles provide 'waterfall' lighting to illuminate the interior of
the vehicle.
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM - INTERIOR LIGHTING
Item Description
A = Hardwired
N = Medium Speed CAN Bus
1 Battery
4 Left Hand (LH) front footwell lamp
5 Right Hand (RH) front footwell lamp
6 LH rear footwell lamp
7 RH rear footwell lamp
8 Luggage compartment lamp
9 LH Door module
10 LH door mirror approach lamp
11 RH door mirror approach lamp
12 RH door module
13 LH front puddle lamp
14 LH rear puddle lamp
15 RH front puddle lamp
16 RH rear puddle lamp
18 LH rear vanity mirror lamp
19 RH rear vanity mirror lamp
20 LH front vanity mirror lamp
21 RH front vanity mirror lamp
22 Glovebox lamp switch
23 Glovebox lamp
CONTROL DIAGRAM - AMBIENCE LIGHTING
Item Description
A = Hardwired
1 Battery
4 LH rear air vent illumination
5 RH rear air vent illumination
6 LH front outer air vent illumination
7 LH front center air vent illumination
8 RH front center air vent illumination
9 RH front outer air vent illumination
10 LH front door pocket LED (light emitting diode)
11 LH front door handle LED
12 RH front door pocket LED
13 RH front door handle LED
14 LH rear door pocket LED
15 LH rear door handle LED
16 RH rear door pocket LED
17 RH rear door handle LED
18 Rear overhead console waterfall LED's
19 Front overhead console waterfall LED's
System Operation
OPERATION
The CJB (central junction box) provides the power supplies to the interior lamps. The CJB controls the power supply to provide
a fade on and off of the lamps. The lamps have 2 modes of operation; automatic and manual.
In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB. The interior lighting is operated automatically
by unlocking the vehicle or opening a door and the illumination period is subject to a timer controlled by the CJB. When all
doors are closed the interior lighting can be operated using the JaguarSense system on the front overhead console. Positioning
your hand adjacent to the center lamp in the front roof console will switch all interior lamps on or off. The map reading lamps
in the front overhead console can also be operated in the same way. The rear interior lamps in the rear overhead console can
be operated using the conventional switches in the console.
Manual mode allows the interior lamps to be disabled from automatic operation. Positioning your hand on or near the center
interior lamp in the front overhead console for more than 3 seconds will disable the automatic mode and confirmation will be
displayed by a 'Manual Lighting' message in the instrument cluster. In manual mode the interior lamps can be still be operated
manually but will not operate with unlocking of the vehicle or opening doors. To return to the automatic mode, position your
hand on or near the center interior lamp in the front overhead console for more than 3 seconds. Automatic mode will be
re-instated and confirmation will be given by a 'Automatic Lighting' message in the instrument cluster.
The driver's and passenger door approach lamps are controlled by the CJB and the driver's door and the passenger door
modules respectively on receipt of medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus messages from the CJB.
The CJB monitors the operation of the interior lamps and uses a power management strategy to turn off lamps, if a door is left
open for example. If a door is left open or the doors are closed and the interior lamps are switched on, the interior lamps are
turned off within 30 minutes by the power saver relay which is located in the CJB. If the interior lamps are left on and the
vehicle is locked, the interior lamps will be switched off within 20 seconds of the lock request.
The glovebox lamp operates independently of the interior lamps and is operated by a switch which activates the lamp when
the glovebox lid is opened. The glovebox lamp is subject to the power management strategy and will be extinguished after 30
minutes by the battery saver relay if the lid is left open.
DESCRIPTION
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
Ignition status
Door latch switches
Luggage compartment lid latch switch
Glovebox lamp switch
Unlock signal
Front roof console interior lamp - 'JaguarSense'
Front roof console map reading lamps - 'JaguarSense'
Rear roof console map reading lamps
Delayed power off relay
Vanity mirror lamp switches
Side and headlamp status (ambience lighting only).
The interior lamps fade on when any door is opened and fade off slowly after 20 seconds after the last door is closed.
The interior lamps can be disabled completely by holding your hand near the front center lamp of the 'JaguarSense' system for
3 seconds. The interior lamps are re-enabled by placing your hand near the front center lamp of the 'JaguarSense' for a further
3 seconds.
The interior lamps, in addition to exterior lamps, are switched on in the event of an accident. If an accident is detected by the
RCM (restraints control module) , a high speed CAN bus message is sent to the CJB to switch on the interior lamps. In this
case, the interior lamps cannot be switched off using the interior lamps switches or 'JaguarSense' feature and require
diagnostics to reset the lamp functionality.
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Main interior lamp condition and installation Bulbs

Map reading lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
Vanity mirror lamp(s) condition and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Glove compartment lamp condition and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Footwell lamp(s) condition and installation Battery saver relay
Ignition switch glow ring condition and installation Wiring harness
Door mirror approach lamp(s) condition and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Puddle lamp(s) condition and installation Main interior lamp switch
Luggage compartment lamp condition and installation Map reading lamp switches
Vanity mirror lamp switches
Glove compartment lamp switch
Waterfall lighting LED
Luggage compartment lamp switch
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Main interior lamp Check the bulb(s) condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits.
inoperative Bulb(s) failure Check the switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Waterfall lighting LED Check the LED condition. Check the LED connector. Check the fuse(s).
inoperative LED failure Check the lamp circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Map reading lamp(s) Check the bulb(s) condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits.
inoperative Bulb(s) failure Check the switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Vanity mirror lamp(s) Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Glove compartment lamp Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch fault
Footwell lamp inoperative Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits. Refer
Bulb failure to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Ignition switch glow ring Check the bulb/glow ring condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp
inoperative Bulb/Glow ring circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
failure
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Door mirror approach Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits. Refer
lamp(s) inoperative Bulb failure to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Puddle lamp(s) inoperative Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits. Refer
Bulb failure to the electrical guides.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Luggage compartment lamp Check the bulb condition. Check the fuse(s). Check the lamp circuits.
Fuse(s) blown
Circuit fault
Switch fault
DTC Index
and Operation).
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - System
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)
DRL (daytime running lamps) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the vehicle is
being driven. Two DRL systems are available depending on market requirements.
The CJB (central junction box) controls the operation of the DRL. The DRL are activated once the CJB detects an ignition on
power mode 6 signal.
The CJB also monitors the lighting control switch and the auto lamps feature and overrides the DRL if required.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - CANADA
The DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps will
be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
PARK is not selected on the electronic transmission selector

EPB (electronic parking brake) is off
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB
The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTES:
If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will operate
normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated. When the transmission
is in PARK, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate
conditions. When the electronic transmission selector is moved from the PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND

POLAND
DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but instrument
cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB

The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMPS
On vehicles fitted with the automatic headlamps feature, DRL are overridden if the lighting control switch is in the 'Auto'
position and the CJB receives a signal from the rain/light sensor to activate the exterior lights.
When the CJB receives a signal to de-activate the automatic headlamps feature the DRL function is restored providing the
parameters for DRL activation are met.
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.

CAUTIONS:
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuses (refer to electrical guide)

Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
Routing of fibre optic harnesses
Correct engagement of optical connectors
Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

MOST network fault - Touch Screen (TS) soft
keys greyed out and inoperative MOST ring broken GO to Pinpoint
Control module on MOST network power or ground Test B.
circuit open circuit, high resistance
Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST network fault - Touch Screen (TS) blank

Touch Screen (TS) power or ground circuit open GO to Pinpoint
circuit, high resistance Test G.
Wake up signal not received by the Touch Screen
(TS)
Touch Screen (TS) internal failure
Controller Area Network (CAN)

Control Module Connections to the CAN Harness
Control modules are connected to the CAN harness either in a 'loop' or 'spur' configuration. In the 'loop' type configuration the
CAN harness loops into the module (via two connector pins) and then loops out of the module (via another two connector
pins). In the 'spur' type configuration, a harness spur is spliced into the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness and the module is
connected to the harness spur via two connector pins.
CAN Harness Architecture
For a detailed description of the CAN Networks and architecture, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
Workshop Manual.
CAN Network Integrity Tests
If a control module is suspected of non-communication, the Network Integrity test application available on the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system can be used to confirm if communication is possible between the control modules on the vehicle
and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system (via the J1962 diagnostic connector ). The results from the test can be used
to determine if either a single module or multiple modules are failing to communicate.
CAN Terminating Modules
If the Network Integrity test indicates that one or more module on one of the CAN networks (HS or MS) are failing to
communicate, there are several checks that can be made. The first step is to identify if both of the CAN terminating modules
on each individual CAN Bus are communicating. If both CAN terminating modules for each individual CAN Bus are
communicating (identified via the Network Integrity test), then it can be confirmed that the main 'backbone' of the CAN
harness is complete. The main 'backbone' of the CAN harness consists of all the modules connected to the CAN harness via a
'loop' configuration and also includes the two terminating modules.
Communication with both CAN terminating modules via the Network Integrity test confirms the physical integrity of the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness (and the harness spur to the J1962 diagnostic connector). This means that there is no
requirement to check the resistance of the CAN Network. This is because the standard check for 60 ohms across the CAN High
and CAN Low lines will not provide any additional information regarding the physical condition of the CAN harness, beyond
what has already been determined from the Network Integrity test.
Non-Communication of a Terminating Module
If a Network Integrity test reveals a terminating module is failing to communicate it can indicate a break in the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness. The first checks should always be to confirm the power and ground supplies to the
non-communicating module are correct. Providing these are correct, the resistance between the CAN High and CAN Low lines at
the J1962 connector can be checked to determine the integrity of the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. After disconnecting
the battery a reading of 120 ohms would indicate an open circuit in the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. Alternatively, a
reading of 60 ohms would indicate that there is no open circuit fault with the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness.
It is worth noting that even if one of the terminating modules is disconnected from the CAN harness, communications between
the modules still connected may still be possible. Therefore communication between the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system and the connected modules may also be possible.
Locating CAN Harness Open Circuits
In the case where multiple modules, including a terminating module, are failing to communicate, having first confirmed the
power and ground supplies are correct, the approximate location of the open circuit can be identified from analysis of the
Network Integrity test results and reference to the relevant CAN network circuit diagrams. For example, if an open circuit
existed in a certain position on the CAN harness, any module positioned on the Network between the J1962 connector and the
open circuit should return a response during the Network Integrity test. No responses would be returned from any modules
past the open circuit fault in the Network.
CAN Harness 'Spur' Type Configuration Circuits
If, after the initial checks (Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and power and ground
supplies to the module have been checked and confirmed as correct), a module that is connected to the CAN harness via a
'spur' type configuration is suspected of not communicating, then the physical integrity of the CAN harness 'spur' can be
checked.
This is most easily undertaken by individually checking the continuity of the CAN High and CAN Low lines between the
non-communicating module connector (with the module disconnected) and the J1962 diagnostic connector.
'Lost Communications' DTCs
As well as the methods described so far in this document, which can be used to determine the location of an open circuit in
the CAN harness, 'Lost Communications' DTCs can also be used for this purpose. Lost communication DTCs mean that a
module is not receiving CAN information from another module.
For example, if a global DTC read were to be carried out, only DTCs stored in the modules that the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system could communicate with would be displayed. If there was an open circuit fault in a certain position on the
CAN harness, the modules that could display DTCs would all be prior to the open circuit on the Network, and these modules
should display 'Lost Communications' DTCs with all the modules located on the Network past the open circuit fault.
'Bus off' DTCs
The references to bus and its condition refer to the network concerned and the modules on that network.
If a module logs a 'Bus Off' DTC, it means that the module has detected CAN transmission errors and has disabled it's own
CAN transmissions and disconnected itself from the network in an attempt to allow the rest of the network to function. At this
point the 'Bus Off' DTC is set. A common cause of 'Bus Off' DTCs can be a short circuit in the CAN network.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
NOTE: Items 1, 2, 3, 8 and 9 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item Description
1 Touch Screen (TS)
3 Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
4 Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
5 TV Control Module (TVCM)
6 Navigation Control Module (NCM) - Japan
7 Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
8 Instrument Cluster (IC)
9 MOST diagnostic connector
Overview
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic cables,
but additional precautions include:
Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools
There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt of any
existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to validate the
operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism. The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing signal
onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a ring break as a
good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass light in either direction so
will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the MOST tester is the preferred tool and
should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by the Touch Screen (TS) soft keys being greyed out and inoperative. Possible
causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom chart
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS

A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
1 Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
Is the power LED illuminated?
Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does not
indicate a fault.

2 Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
3 Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
5 Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Connect the prism to the adapter harness
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector
switch to match the socket in use
1 Switch on the audio/video system

2 Remove the cover from the MOST diagnostic connector
4 Connect the MOST tester to the MOST diagnostic connector
5 Check the Touch Screen (TS) for indication of a MOST network fault
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is causing the MOST network fault. GO to B2.
No
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is not causing the MOST network fault. GO to B3.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester
2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
No
Install a new MOST diagnostic connector cover
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint
Test E.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester. Disconnect
the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module. GO to
Pinpoint Test C.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST network
Is this control module the Touch Screen (TS)?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No
GO to C2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
2 Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Is red light present?
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to C3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the MOST
harness connector to the control module. GO to C1.
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector
switch to match the socket in use
1 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester

Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module. Install a
new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST D : CONTROL MODULE TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
NOTES:
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to D2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the relevant control module power and ground circuits
for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST E : MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
NOTES:
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester from the MOST diagnostic connector

2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
3 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the Touch Screen (TS)
4 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
Yes
GO to E2.
No
The fault is in the harness between the MOST diagnostic connector and the Touch Screen (TS). Install a
new MOST harness as necessary
E2: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 2
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester
2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the Touch Screen (TS)
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS

PINPOINT TEST G : TOUCH SCREEN (TS) TESTS
CONDITIONS
G1: TOUCH SCREEN (TS) TEST 1
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the Touch Screen (TS) for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the Touch Screen (TS)?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to G2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the Touch Screen (TS) power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to G3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new Touch Screen (TS)
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Module Communications Network - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
4.
5. Torque:
M8 nut (4) 12 Nm
M6 (4) 10 Nm
6. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Module Communications Network - Central Junction Box (CJB)
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
7.
8.
Installation

Module Communications Network - Engine Junction Box (EJB)
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Module Communications Network - Rear Junction Box (RJB)
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation
1. Torque: 10 Nm
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness
Introduction
CAUTION: Do not use any other heat shrink sleeve other than the approved glue lined heat shrink sleeve mentioned in
the repair procedure.
The purpose of this document is to promote quick and efficient minor repair to harness connectors or cables using approved
methods. Repairs may only be made to cables and connectors which have been mechanically, not electrically damaged. It also
applies where the whole extent of the damage can be clearly identified and rectified.
Care and neatness are essential requirements in making a perfect repair.
Caution:
This harness repair guide, does not approve repairs to any of the following circuits:
1. Any media orientated system transport network harnesses.

2. Supplement restraint system (SRS) firing circuits (Air bags).
3. Link lead assembles, which are unique to safety critical circuits such as anti-lock brake system (ABS) and thermocouple
circuits. An example of this is the ABS wheel speed sensors with moulded connectors.
4. 4. Screened cables, leads and wiring harness(s).
If any harness(s) with defective electrical connector terminals or wires from the above circuits are a concern, new
components must be installed.
Repair Components
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
The wiring harness repair components comprises:
Pre-terminated wiring harness(s) of different sizes and types

Three sizes of butt splice connectors
A selection of colored cable identification sleeves
Two sizes of glue lined heat shrink sleeves
A suitable heat source, for shrinking heat shrink sleeves will be required.
The pre-insulated diamond grip range of electrical connector terminals and in-line, butt splice connectors are the only
acceptable product for the repairs of wiring harnesses. The butt connectors not only grip the wire but also the insulation,
making a very secure joint.
If an electrical connector terminal is not available approval for the repair is NOT given and in these circumstances a new wiring
harness must be installed.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) and Butt Splice Connectors
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are supplied with the insulation in one of three colors, red, blue or yellow. The colors do
not apply to any particular circuit but to the harness wire size. See the Relationship Table in the Repair Method section.
Butt splice connectors are also supplied with red, blue or yellow coverings, which must be matched to the pre-terminated
wiring harness insulation color.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)
The illustration shows:
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) which are available via Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
The part number of the pre-terminated wiring harness
The letter showing the extractor tip which must be used to remove this type of electrical connector terminal
Those electrical connector terminals which are gold
Some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) have seals installed to the insulation for sealed connector applications. It is
essential for prevention of moisture ingress that a sealed pre-terminated wiring harness must be used where a sealed terminal
was removed.
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Two sizes of heat shrink sleeving are available. Each heat shrink sleeve contains a sealant glue. These must be used when
connecting wiring harness(s) or electrical connector terminal(s) at all times. The smaller diameter heat shrink sleeve is to be
used with the red and blue butt splice connectors and the larger diameter sleeve with the yellow butt splice connectors.
For ease and speed, some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) may already have the insulation partly stripped at the splice
end. If the repair requires insulation to be stripped from the cable, refer to the Relationship Table for the correct length of
insulation to be stripped.
The Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) illustration shows the electrical connector terminal type, the part number of the
pre-terminated wiring harness and the letter of the extractor tip which must be used to extract the electrical connector
terminal from the connector housing. Additionally, those electrical connector terminal(s) which are gold are identified, all
others are therefore, tinned and not gold.
Wiring Harness Cable Identification Sleeves
A selection of colored sleeves are available for maintaining the wiring harness cable identification on the pre-terminated wiring
harness. Place the correct colored sleeve(s) over the pre-terminated wiring harness insulation as near to the electrical
connector as possible with the main wiring harness cable color nearest to the electrical connector.
For example, if the original wiring harness cable color is pink with a black trace put the pink wiring harness cable identification
sleeve on the pre-terminated wiring harness first followed by a black sleeve, and slide both along the wiring harness cable to
the electrical connector terminal.
List of Parts
Description Part Number Quantity

Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) 418-066 to 418-103 10 each
inclusive
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – small diameter 418-104 25 per pack
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – larger diameter 418-105 10 per pack
Case Assembly Comprising – carry case, lid, inner lid, base, insert, trays foam 418-106 1
spacers
Butt Splice Connector – Red 418-107 50 per pack
Butt Splice Connector – Blue 418-108 50 per pack
Butt Splice Connector – Yellow 418-109 20 per pack
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Red insulation 418-112 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Blue insulation 418-113 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Yellow insulation 418-114 500
Harness repair components can be ordered from Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
Repair Tools
The wiring harness repair tools comprises:
Crimping pliers
A wire cutter and insulation stripper
An electrical connector terminal extraction handle and tips
Extraction Handle and Tips
The extraction handle, in conjunction with the correct tip, is used to remove a terminal from an electrical connector. Each tip is
marked with an identification letter, A to K inclusive. Each tip has been specially designed to extract a particular type of
electrical connector terminal. The use of any other tool is not recommended and is liable to cause damage to the electrical
connector. The tip is fastened to the handle by a screw which holds the tip firmly yet allows it to be easily replaced.
Extraction Handle and Tips
Insulation Stripper
The moving jaw has an adjuster wheel which has a series of holes in it. Turning the wheel and placing the cable in the
matching size hole will automatically adjust the jaw to the correct pressure. Note that some wiring harness(s) may have a
harder insulation and slight adjustment of the wheel may be needed to make a clean strip but exercise care not to damage the
wire.
Insulation Stripper
By pressing the outer edges of the wiring harness cable length stop together the adjuster can be slid up or down the jaw. This
decreases or increases the length by which the wiring harness cable insulation will be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring
harness or wiring harness wire. The adjuster has a position indicator to align with a graduated scale and this sets the correct
length in millimetres, of insulation to be stripped. The amount of insulation to be stripped is shown in the Relationship Table.
The illustration shows the insulation stripper tool and a wiring harness correctly gripped in the jaws. A wire cutter is provided
on the outer side of the fixed jaw.
Cable Correctly Gripped in Stripper Blades

Crimping Pliers
Crimping Pliers
The crimping pliers have a moving jaw and a stationary jaw, with three different sized crimping enclosures. Each of the
enclosures is identified by a red, blue or yellow coloured dot which corresponds to the three colours of the pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and butt splice connector colors.
Description Part Number Quantity

Extraction Tool Handle 418-110 1
Extraction Tip Pack consists of 2 spare screws plus 418-S111 1
Tip A 418-118 1
Tip B 418-119 1
Tip C 418-120 1
Tip D 418-121 1
Tip E 418-122 1
Tip F 418-123 1
Tip G 418-124 1
Tip H 418-125 1
Tip I 418-126 1
Tip J 418-127 1
Tip K 418-128 1
Crimping Pliers YRW500010 1
Wire Stripping Tool 418-117 1
Harness repair tools can be ordered from:
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions
Ironstone Way
Brixworth Industrial Estate
Brixworth
Northants
NN6 9UD
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1327 303400

Fax: +44 (0) 1327 303499
Email: css.uk@bosch-automotive.com
Repair Methods
CAUTION: Several different types and sizes of terminal may be found in a single electrical connector housing.
It is necessary to identify:
The conductor (wire) size of the affected wiring harness

The electrical connector range from which the damaged wiring harness is to be removed
The terminal type
Use of the approved diagnostic tool will greatly assist in the quick identification of electrical connectors and faulty pin
terminal(s).
Reference can also be made to the vehicle Electrical Guides, held by Dealers, to identify wiring harness(s) and electrical
connector(s).
By using the Relationship Table, the wiring harness conductor (wire) size can be related to a suitable pre-terminated wiring
harness by the color of the insulation. Also, the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the wiring harness lead is
identified.
Relationship Table
CABLE RANGE SPLICE STRIP LENGTH

0.35 mm² to 1.50 mm² RED 6.00 to 7.00 mm
1.00 mm² to 2.50 mm² BLUE 6.00 to 7.00 mm
4.00 mm² to 6.00 mm² YELLOW 9.00 to 9.50 mm
Electrical Connector Terminal Extraction
It must be noted that some electrical connector(s) have anti-backout devices which prevent the terminals from being removed
from the electrical connector. Some examples of these are shown in following illustrations. The anti-backout device must be
released before attempting to remove the terminal from the electrical connector. Some anti-backout devices require a special
tip to release the device. Most can be released by carefully using a suitable small screwdriver.
Various types of electrical connector have seals installed internally or externally to prevent moisture ingress. These normally
do not have to be removed but make sure that they are installed when the electrical connectors are connected.
The illustrations show examples of each tip used on different types of electrical connector(s). There are a large number of
different types of electrical connector used on vehicles therefore only one example using each tip is shown. Technicians
experience and judgement will dictate which type of tip should be used for those electrical connector(s) which are not shown.
Care should be exercised to avoid further damage when removing the terminals from the electrical connector.
NOTE: Examples of the extraction tips and anti-backout tips.

NOTE: The chart shows the electrical connector types, terminal pins/sockets, extractor tip and anti-backout tip.
Electrical connector terminal type Pin or socket Extractor tip Anti-backout tip
Mulitlock 040 series D A
Mulitlock 040 series B A
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Mulitlock 040 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III J2 D B
Econoseal III 250 series B F
Micro-timer II 1.5mm D C
Micro-timer II 1.5mm B C
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Std power timer 5.8 flat B D
Std power timer 2.8 flat D D
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Ford 2.8 flat D E H
Mulitlock 070 series D B
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
Sumitomo TS90 connector B B H
Modu IV gold plated D B
Mulitlock 040 series gold plated D A
Micro qualock D I
EECV D B
EECV D B
Kostal dia 1.50 series D J
AMP 6.3 flat D B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
2.8 series D B I
Sumitomo TS90 connector D B H
Ducon 0.60 gold plated D K
AMP 6.3 flat D D
Repair Procedure
CAUTIONS:
Do not use crimping pliers, insulation strippers, butt splice connectors, heat shrink sleeves or pre-terminated wiring
harness(s) that are not supplied with by authourised Jaguar/Land Rover parts. Each part has been designed to be used only
with the other parts available from Jaguar/Land Rover parts.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat to the
glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat shrink
sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
It is not correct to make more than five repair joints on the wiring harness to any electrical connector and if more damage is
found at the same electrical connector then a new wiring harness must be installed.
1. Remove the faulty terminal from the electrical connector using the extractor tool and correct tip. Make sure that any
anti-backout device is released before trying to remove the terminal.
2. CAUTION: A number of electrical connector terminals are gold plated or gold flashed. When defective, they must
be installed with a gold pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is not always easy to identify the female as gold but the
male pins are visually easier, therefore always check both male and female terminals to identify those which are gold.
Under no circumstances are gold and tin terminals to be mixed as this will lead to early failure of the electrical contact.
NOTE: Never use a harness lead with a smaller diameter than the original harness lead.
Select the correct size and type of pre-terminated wiring harness and butt splice connector.
3. Using the wire cutter on the stripping tool, cut the pre-terminated wiring harness and the harness cable to the required
length.
4. NOTE: See illustration: Stripping Insulation
From the Relationship Table, find the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring harness
and set the adjustable cable length stop to the correct length. Place the pre-terminated wiring harness in the wire
stripper and remove the insulation.
5. Put the cable identification sleeve(s) on to the wiring harness with the main cable colour nearest to the terminal.
6. During this next step do not over tighten. Place the selected butt splice connector in the crimping tool, matching the
aperture and the butt connector colours. Make sure that the window indentation in the butt connector is resting over
the guide bar on the lower jaw. Partially close the grip until the butt connector is securely held in the aperture. This will
give support to the butt connector while the pre-terminated wiring harness is inserted into it.
7. NOTE: See illustration: Splice Correctly Located
Insert the pre-terminated wiring harness into the butt connector and make sure that the wire is against the wire stop.
Close the grip firmly, crimping the lead to the butt connector. When the handles have been completely closed the butt
connector will be freed from the tool as the handles are released. If the handles have not been completely closed then
the jaws will hold the butt connector and it cannot be removed from the tool until the crimp is fully made by closing the
handles completely.
8. Make sure that the harness cable has been squarely cut and the correct length of insulation removed. If more than one
splice is needed the butt connectors must be not be crimped to the wiring harness at the same distance from the
connector. The splices must be staggered to prevent a bulk of splices in the same area of the wiring harness.
9. It is preferable to cover the butt splice joint with heat shrink sleeve. This is desirable not essential, except where the
electrical connector is a sealed electrical connector. Use the smaller diameter sleeve for red and blue pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and the large diameter sleeve for the yellow pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is advisable to place
the heat shrink over the completed joint but in some instances the sleeve will not pass over the terminal. Check, and if
required, place the correct size sleeve onto the harness cable or pre-terminated wiring harness before crimping the butt
splice to the wiring harness.
10. Place the harness cable into the butt splice with the splice window over the guide bar. Make sure that the cable harness
wire is against the stop in the butt splice, crimp the butt splice connector to the wiring harness.
11. Gently pull the harness cables each side of the butt splice to make sure that a secure joint has been made.
12. WARNING: Do not use a naked flame in areas where fuel or oil have been spilt. Clean the area of residual oil and
fuel and wait until the fuel spill has fully evaporated.
CAUTIONS:
When using a heat source make sure that it is localised and causes no damage to surrounding materials.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat
to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined
heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Using a suitable heat source, shrink the sleeve over the butt splice.
13. If further pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are to be installed to the same electrical connector, make sure that the lead
is cut at a different length to the previous joint. This makes sure that the splices will, where possible, be staggered on
the wiring harness and prevent a bulk of splices in one area.
14. When all of the splices have been made, fit the terminal(s) to the electrical connector, taking care that the terminals
are correctly orientated.
15. Install the wiring harness cover and secure with adhesive electrical tape. Do not cover the wiring harness right to the
electrical connector as the terminals must have a little movement and not be firmly bound to the electrical connector or
wiring harness. Make sure that the cable identification sleeve(s) are showing at the wiring harness electrical connector.
Stripping Insulation
Splice Correctly Located

Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness Repair
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to: Wiring Harness (418-02 Wiring

Harnesses, Description and Operation).
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 Bonnet switch
2 Horns
4 RH (right-hand) front door module
5 RH front door latch mechanism
6 RH rear door module
7 RH rear door latch mechanism
8 Luggage compartment latch mechanism
9 LH (left-hand) rear door latch mechanism
10 LH rear door module
11 LH front door latch mechanism
12 LH front door module
13 Battery backed sounder (if fitted)
14 Passive sounder (if fitted)
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - Overview
Overview
The active anti-theft system is available with three different levels of vehicle protection depending on market specification:
Hinged panel sensing

Hinged panel and intrusion sensing
Hinged panel, intrusion and inclination sensing.
The CJB (central junction box) automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when it functions the central
locking system or if the Smart Key is removed from the vehicle for 60 seconds or more the alarm and immobilizer will arm but
the vehicle will remain unlocked.
Refer to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Description and
Operation).
Depending on market specification two modes of protection are used: perimeter mode and volumetric mode.
Perimeter mode
Perimeter mode, monitors the security of the hinged panels, which include:
all doors,
luggage compartment lid,
engine compartment lid.
When perimeter mode is active, the CJB monitors the panel ajar switches in the latch mechanisms of the hinged panels.
Volumetric mode
In volumetric mode the CJB monitors the interior of the vehicle for movement using an ultrasonic sound wave sensor.
The battery backed sounder incorporates an inclination sensor which monitors the vehicle for unauthorised tilting; for example
towing or jacking.
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; O = LIN bus
Item Description
1 Battery
3 Bonnet switch
4 Door latch mechanism - LH (left-hand) rear
5 Door module - LH rear
6 Door module - RH (right-hand) rear
7 Door latch mechanism - RH rear
8 Door module - LH front
9 Door latch mechanism - LH front
10 Door module - RH front
11 Door latch mechanism - RH front
12 Luggage compartment lid - latch mechanism
14 Volumetric sensor
15 Battery backed sounder/tilt sensor (if fitted)
16 Horns
19 Passive sounder (if fitted)
System Operation
Anti-Theft - Active
The active anti-theft system is available with three different levels of vehicle protection depending on market specification:
Hinged panel sensing

Hinged panel and intrusion sensing
Hinged panel, intrusion and inclination sensing.
The system is controlled by software in the CJB and RJB (rear junction box) and indicates a trigger condition:
Visually, using the direction indicators,

Audibly, using the vehicle horn and either a passive or active sounder to indicate a trigger condition.
The passive sounder takes the form of an anti-theft disc horn located at the rear of the engine compartment on the LH side.
The active sounder takes the form of a battery backed sounder located in the same position.
The battery backed sounder is fitted with an inclination sensor. The battery backed sounder is a intelligent unit, and
communicate to the CJB over a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection.
Monitoring of the hinged panels is carried out using switches located in each door latch assembly, the engine-compartment-lid
latch assembly, and the luggage-compartment-lid latch assembly. The condition of the switches is monitored by the CJB.
Monitoring of front door lock status is carried out using switches located in the door latch mechanisms. The condition of the
switches is monitored by the front door modules and transmitted to the CJB over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus.
Monitoring of the cabin interior is carried out using an intrusion detection module mounted behind the roof console. The
intrusion detection module comprises an ultrasonic sound wave sensor to determine if there is movement within the cabin.
Information from the intrusion detection module is communicated to the CJB over a LIN bus connection.
CAUTIONS:
The intrusion detection module electrical connections, particularly those to the sensors mounted in the roof console, are
very delicate and must be handled with care.
The intrusion detection module is an electro-statically sensitive part and should only be handled in an electro-statically
controlled environment.
When armed, the active anti-theft system can be triggered in one of the following ways:
A door ajar switch indicates a door has been opened.

The engine compartment lid or luggage compartment lid ajar switches indicate that either has been opened.
Either front door latch mechanism indicates a door has been unlocked.
The emergency key blade is used to open the LH front door.
The CJB or RJB are disconnected (this may result in only a partial trigger).
An attempt is made to start the engine without a valid signal from the Smart Key.
The battery backed sounder is disconnected (partial trigger only).
The vehicle battery is disconnected on a vehicle fitted with a battery backed sounder (partial trigger only).
The inclination sensor detects a change in vehicle attitude.
The intrusion detection module detects movement within the cabin.
Panic alarm from the Smart Key.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch-motors, the door latch-switches and the CJB. The door modules
provide door switch status information and enable the door latch-motors on request from the CJB or the keyless vehicle
module.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module interfaces with the Central locking, Radio Frequency (RF) receiver and collects RF signal information
which is transmitted from the Smart Key. This information is translated into commands which are passed on the medium speed
CAN bus to the:
CJB,
RJB,
door modules, and
instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors:
4 interior antennae,
1 luggage compartment antenna,
a rear bumper antenna, and
4 door handle antennae if the passive entry system is fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle module and the locking
status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a LED (light emitting diode) located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is off the indicator gives
a visual indication of the active anti-theft system to show if the alarm system is active or not active.
Passive Anti-Theft Horn

The passive anti-theft horn is hardwired to the CJB which activates when the alarm is triggered.
Battery Backed Sounder

Operation of the battery backed sounder is controlled by the CJB on the LIN bus. The sounder is also connected with a
permanent battery supply via the CJB. An integral, rechargeable battery powers the sounder if the battery power supply from
the CJB is interrupted.
An inclination sensor is incorporated into the battery backed sounder, to monitor vehicle altitude, see Inclination Sensor.
Inclination Sensor
The CJB monitors the inclination sensor and will activate the alarm system if the vehicle is being raised.
Intrusion Detection Module

The intrusion detection module comprises an ultrasonic sound wave sensor which monitors the vehicle's interior.
The intrusion detection module is activated with volumetric mode which in turn is enabled when the vehicle is double locked.
The vehicle can be locked and alarmed with the module de-activated if a pet is to be left in the vehicle for example by single-
locking the active anti-theft system. The intrusion detection modules can also be de-activated via the 'Alarm Sensors on/off'
option in the instrument cluster menu.
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster method of de-activation of the intrusion detection module is only for one arm cycle, it will
revert to active when the vehicle is next unlocked.
When the volumetric mode is active and the vehicle battery voltage falls below 9 volts, the CJB will ignore any inputs from the
intrusion detection module to prevent false alarm activation.
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
For a detailed description of the anti-theft - active operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active)
Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation),

Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation),
Anti-Theft - Active (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Start/stop button Fuses

Electric steering Electrical harnesses
column lock Harness connectors
Vehicle key Vehicle key battery
Central junction box (controls +12Volt supply to electric steering column lock and software
logic for electric steering column lock control)
Instrument cluster (provides electrical ground circuit to electric steering column lock)
CAN circuits
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
DTC Index
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC) (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft Alarm Horn
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator

LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation).

3. TORQUE: 7 Nm
Installation

Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - Component Location
Passive Entry Component Location
Item Description
1 Steering coloum lock
2 Keyless vehicle module (KVM)
4 RH front door antenna ( integral to the handle)
5 RF receiver
7 RH rear door antenna (integral to the handle)
8 LH (left-hand) rear door antenna (integral to the handle)
10 Smart Key
12 LH front door antenna ( integral to the handle)
Passive Start Component Location
Item Description
1 Stop/Start Button
2 Keyless vehicle module (KVM)
3 RF receiver
4 Interior antenna - luggage compartment
5 Interior antenna LH - luggage compartment
6 Interior antenna - rear compartment
7 Interior antenna - centre compartment
8 Interior antenna - front compartment
9 IAU (immobilizer antenna Unit)
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - Overview
Overview
The PATS (passive anti-theft system) prevents the vehicle's engine from being started by unauthorized persons.
Engine starting is prevented by inhibiting the fuel, engine (spark, injectors and crank) and ignition systems from operating.
This is achieved by using a uniquely coded Smart Key and an encoded data exchange between multiple control modules.
The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver.
The engine start system is initiated when the encoded data between the Smart Key and vehicle control modules is verified.
The engine can then be started when the drive selector is in the 'Park' position, and the start/stop switch and the brake pedal
are pressed simultaneously.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN; N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus
Passive Entry
Item Description
1 Smart Key
2 Battery
4 Steering column lock
6 Door module
7 Door module
8 Door module
9 Door module
10 RF receiver
11 KVM (keyless vehicle module)
12 Door handle antenna
Passive Starting
Item Description
1 Battery
2 RF receiver
3 Smart Key
4 IAU (immobilizer antenna Unit)
5 Stop/Start button
7 Interior antenna
8 Interior antenna
9 Interior antenna
10 Interior antenna
11 Interior antenna
13 Steering column lock
15 ECM (engine control module) module
16 CJB
System Operation
Passive Start System
Upon receiving the 'start button pressed' hardwired signal, the CJB sends a message via the medium speed CAN (controller
area network) bus to the KVM initiating the vehicle starting process.
The KVM then energizes the low frequency antennas within the vehicle cabin which transmit a 125KHz signal to the Jaguar
Smart Key, upon receipt of the LF signal the Jaguar Smart Key transmits either a 433 MHz or a 315 MHz RF signal containing
the authorisation code to the RF receiver.
The RF receiver relays the code, via a serial communication line, to the KVM which then checks and approves the code as valid.
The KVM will only respond to a valid Jaguar Smart Key.
The KVM continues the passive start process by communicating a 'Jaguar Smart Key valid’ signal to the CJB via the medium
speed CAN bus, Once the CJB receives the Jaguar Smart Key authorisation it confirms the response matches with an internal
calculation.
Before the CJB sends a mobilisation signal to the ECM, via the high speed CAN bus, it will exchange encrypted data with
following components:
The instrument cluster via the high speed CAN bus,

The steering column lock via the high speed CAN bus, to authorise unlocking the steering column. The steering column
unlocking function is powered by the CJB and grounded via the instrument cluster
When the CJB receives a hardwired Park/Neutral signal from the JaguarDrive Selector, a high speed CANbus message from the
ABS module and a simultaneous start/stop switch signal it interprets this as an engine crank request. Before the engine crank
request is processed, the CJB verifies the brake pressure signal received from the ABS module. If the signal is greater than the
stored threshold value, a crank request signal is sent to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
NOTE: If the KVM fails to locate the Smart Key, a message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND REFER TO HANDBOOK' will appear in
the instrument cluster message center and the keyless start back-up process will have to be used to mobilize and start the
vehicle.
To ensure optimum long term reliability of the smart key the battery must be replaced with a brand new, unused battery. If a
used battery is installed the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message may not be cleared. To avoid contamination of the contacts
the battery should be removed from its packaging and installed into the smart key while wearing gloves. To confirm that the
replacement battery is working correctly press the unlock button twice while holding the smart key outside the vehicle, then
enter the vehicle with the smart key, press the start button and confirm that the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message is not
displayed.
Keyless Start Back-up
If the vehicle has been unlocked using the emergency key blade or the Smart Key is not detected by the vehicle, it will be
necessary to use the keyless start back-up system to disarm the alarm and start the engine. The following process must be
followed in this event:
Position the Smart Key against the underside of the instrument panel, on the outboard side of the steering column,
with the buttons facing downwards. This is the location of the IAU.
Holding the Smart Key in position and with the brake pedal depressed, press the start/stop button to start the engine.
This process bypasses the data exchange between the KVM and the CJB. A transponder within the Smart Key is detected by
the IAU. The IAU confirms the code output from the transponder and communicates this code confirmation with the CJB via a
LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. The CJB then initiates the vehicle start process in the normal manner.
Immobilizer Antenna Unit (IAU)
Item Description
1 IAU
The IAU is located on the driver's side behind the instrument panel just below the auxiliary lighting switch. The IAU cannot be
seen as it is located behind the trim panel. The IAU is used if the KVM is unable to authorize the Smart Key. The driver will be
alerted to this by a chime and a message in the instrument cluster message center 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND REFER TO
HANDBOOK'.
If the KVM is unable to identify the Smart Key, for example if the Smart Key battery voltage is low or there is local RF
interference, the transponder within the Smart Key can be read by holding the smart key against then instrument panel.
www.JagDocs.com
Low Frequency Antenna
Item Description
3 Interior antenna - rear compartment
4 Interior antenna LH (left-hand) - luggage compartment
5 Interior antenna - center compartment
Five Low Frequency (LF) antennae for the passive start system are positioned in specific locations within the vehicle.
The KVM transmits an LF signal via the antennas which is received by the Smart Key. The Smart Key then responds by
transmitting a RF signal which is received by the RF receiver and passed to the KVM for authorization.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module controls signal transmissions to and from the Smart Key and provides authorization to allow the
vehicle to be started. The module has a medium speed CAN connection to the CJB for authorizing vehicle starting.
Radio Frequency Receiver

The Radio Frequency (RF) receiver transmission is received from the Smart Key to enable key identification.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive
For a detailed description of the anti-theft - passive system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive)
Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation),

Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation),
Anti-Theft - Passive (Description and Operation).

The best method to confirm the correct operation of the passive anti-theft system (PATS) is to check the LED (located in the
centre of the instrument panel). The LED should illuminate solid for 3 seconds, when the ignition status is set to ON, and then
extinguish. This validates all PATS functions (i.e. the key transponder matches a stored key code, the challenge/response
sequence between the respective modules was successful resulting in the EMS being enabled).
Ignition fails to operate
Check that the smart key is located within the vehicle interior, and that it is the correct one for the vehicle.
Insert the smart key into the start control unit, this is an alternative method to allow Ignition On/Engine Start.
Check that the start button circuit to the central junction box is not open circuit or short circuit to power.
Check that the medium speed CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. open circuit or short circuit. This would mean that the
remote keyless entry module, central junction box and instrument cluster would be unable to communicate.
Engine fails to crank
If a PATS fault is detected, the LED will flash for 60 seconds at 4Hz with a 50% duty cycle. At the end of this period, the LED
will flash a 2 digit code; this code is repeated 10 times. The meaning of these fault codes along with the frequency of flashing
is given in the accompanying table. As a general rule a fault code of 16 or less will cause the vehicle not to crank. Additionally,
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system should be used to check the instrument cluster, central junction box & engine
control module for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
One potential occurrence for failing to crank could be due to the P & N start switch (input to the engine control module).
Check the Crank Request output from the central junction box to engine control module is not short circuit to ground or open
circuit.
Check the Starter Relay circuit.
NOTE: On petrol engine variants, due to Smart Start, both sides of relay coil are switched directly from engine control
module (If conditions correct). On diesel engine variants the low side only is switched directly from the engine control module
Check that the electric steering column lock correctly operates and the steering wheel can turn freely.
Check that the high speed CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. the CAN circuit is open or short circuit. This would mean
that the instrument cluster and engine control module would be unable to communicate resulting in no Challenge being
performed to enable the engine control module. This would be supported by LED Flash Code 24.
Also check the CAN network between the ABS module and the central junction box. The central junction box uses the
CAN_BrakePressureTMC signal to determine if the brake pedal has been pressed in order to allow an engine crank. The central
junction box uses a value of 0x05, if the central junction box sees a value less than this, it will not enable the crank request
output.
Engine cranks but will not start
If the engine is cranking it means that the engine control module has passed the authorisation required with the instrument
cluster. If this authorisation failed, the engine control module would not engage the starter relay. This could be confirmed by
verifying the PATS LED prove out (illuminated solid for 3 seconds) or by reading DTCs from the instrument cluster and engine
control module.
In this case, the fuel pump circuit should be verified. The fuel pump delivery module (FPDM), which is supplied via the rear
junction box (authentication required with the instrument cluster) and controlled by the engine control module, supplies the
fuel pump.
In all cases of suspected non-start issues, the most logical failure modes should be eliminated first. i.e.
1. Check all relevant supplies and grounds to the relevant modules listed herein.
2. Note any unusual behaviour from other systems/functionality.
3. Note any functions that are not operating as expected.
If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index.
DTC Index
Operation) /
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - GTDi 2.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and Operation)
/
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V6 S/C 3.0L Petrol , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00, Description and
Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00,
Multifunction Electronic Modules -
Rear door module retaining bolts 1.5 1.5 13.3
Front door module retaining bolts 1.5 1.5 13.3
Passenger door module retaining bolts 1.5 1.5 13.3
Driver seat module 3 2.2 26.6
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)

For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant description and operation
sections in the workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Check for stuck/jammed switches and buttons Fuse(s)

Visibly damaged or worn components Electrical connector(s)
Loose or missing fasteners Wiring harness
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the diagnostic trouble codes
index
Manual Sunblind Initialization Routine

Where a sunblind module has been replaced, there is an initialization routine available on the diagnostic tool. This requires a
new module to be initially installed in the fully down position and running of the "Initialize Specified Function/Feature"
diagnostic routine on the manufacturer approved diagnostic tool. Alternatively, the sunblind may be initialized manually by
following the procedures described below:
1. Raise the sunblind to top (fully retracted) position
2. Press and hold the window 'down' switch for 15 seconds (the sunblind will go down and will then be in initialization
mode)
3. Release window switch and press window 'down' switch again to drive blind fully into lower block
4. Activate window switch 'up' until the sunblind reaches the top (fully retracted) position and release switch
5. The sunblind is now initialized and should have 'one-touch' functionality
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver Door Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00 General
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)
Removal
3.
Installation

diagnostic tool.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least one
minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental
restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module. Failure to
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with the
bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches which
have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover and air
bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument panel. Install a
new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety

2.
3. Torque: 47 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 47 Nm
6. Reposition the front seat to the central position.
7.
8. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Removal
3.
Installation

diagnostic tool.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Rear Door Module (RDM)
Removal
2. Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels -

Air deflector retaining nuts 7 - 62
Air deflector retaining bolts 7 - 62
Hood hinge retaining nuts 17 13 -
Hood striker(s) retaining bolts 11 8 -
Hood latch(s) retaining bolts 9 - 80
Radiator splash shield retaining bolts 7 - 62
Fuel Filter lower retaining bolt - vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine 10 7 -
Secondary bulkhead left-hand panel retaining bolts 7 - 62
Coolant pipe bracket to coolant manifold retaining bolt 12 9 -
Engine brace retaining bolts 40 30 -
Pedestrian protection hood actuator retaining bolts 8 - 71
Engine control module (ECM) cover retaining nuts 7 - 62
Electrical connector retaining bolt 8 - 71
Coolant hose bracket to front side member & suspension top mount assembly retaining bolt 7 - 62
Front End Body Panels - Air Deflector
Removal
2. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the washers.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Cowl Vent Screen
Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
1. For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
2.
3. CAUTIONS:
Detach the rubber end caps from the leafscreen by

releasing the velcro.
Make sure that distortion to the end caps is kept to a

minimum.
4.

access only.
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Fender Splash Shield
Removal
Installation).
3.
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Hood
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTES:
The hood is manufactured from aluminium.
The hood is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
2. WARNING: The hood and its associated components form part of

the pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any repair or
replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the system.
Refer to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection

System, Description and Operation).
3. Refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,

Refer to: Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information,
Refer to: Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body Repairs - Corrosion
Protection, Description and Operation).
4. CAUTION: Make sure to protect the paintwork.

technician.

7.
All vehicles
9.
Installation
1. NOTES:
If the hood hinges are deformed as a result of the

pedestrian protection system deployment, they will need to
be replaced.
Offer up the panel and loosely install the hood hinge

retaining nuts.
2. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and

recheck before proceeding.

technician.
Torque: 17 Nm
4. Loosely install both hood strikers.
5. Gently close the hood so that the strikers are aligned to the latches.
6. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and

7. Torque: 11 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
Front End Body Panels - Radiator Splash Shield
Removal
2. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
All vehicles
Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05
Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05
Refer to: Engine Cover - GTDi 2.0L Petrol (501-05, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
4.
All vehicles
5. Torque: 55 Nm

6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. Refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH (501-20C Pedestrian

Protection System, Removal and Installation).
8. Torque: 7 Nm
9. Torque: 8 Nm
All vehicles
10. Torque: 7 Nm

Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the clip is correctly located.

Front End Body Panels - Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
All vehicles
3.
4.
5. Torque: 12 Nm
All vehicles
6. Torque: 55 Nm
7.

8. Torque: 8 Nm
9. Torque: 7 Nm
10. Torque: 8 Nm
All vehicles
11. Torque: 7 Nm
12.

Installation

Body Closures - Body Closures - Component Location
Luggage Compartment Lid - Component Location
Item Description
1 Powered strut
2 Powered cinch motor
3 Child entrapment lever
4 Striker and latch assembly
5 Luggage compartment lid module
6 Counter balance strut
Body Closures - Body Closures - Overview
Luggage Compartment Lid
Overview
The luggage compartment lid is manufactured from aluminum and comprises a powered open and close mechanism. Swan-neck
hinges support the luggage compartment lid and provide the optimum hinge geometry for the powered system.
Powered movement of the luggage compartment lid is provided by an electrically driven spindle housed in the right-hand strut.
The counterbalancing strut on the other side of the luggage compartment lid is not powered.
The opening and closing time of the luggage compartment lid is 5 ± 2 seconds with the closing mechanism of the lid being an
electronic latch with the addition of a soft-close power cinching unit. The cinching unit pulls the latch closed for the last 6 mm
of travel. The latch and power-cinch unit are both located in the luggage compartment lid.
A child entrapment release handle is built into the latch assembly.

Body Closures - Body Closures - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium Speed CAN
Item Description
1 Open button – vehicle exterior
3 Powered strut
4 Powered cinch motor
5 Luggage compartment lid module
6 Latch assembly
7 Close button – luggage lid closing panel
8 Open button - Smart Key
9 Radio frequency receiver
11 Open button – vehicle interior
System Operation
The opening and closing functions are controlled by the luggage compartment lid module. The module receives a permanent
battery power supply from the RJB. To initiate the luggage compartment lid opening sequence a 'luggage compartment lid
release-request' is received by the CJB from one of the following:
KVM (keyless vehicle module) - signal originates from the Jaguar Smart Key
Auxiliary lighting panel - interior luggage compartment lid button
Rear bumper mounted - exterior luggage compartment lid button
The CJB responds with the following simultaneous actions:
A hardwire power release to the latch actuator mechanism

An opening signal transmitted to the power luggage compartment lid module via the medium speed CAN bus.
The processing of the opening signal by the CJB is influenced by a number of factors:
Source of 'opening signal'

Vehicle status: locked or unlocked
Vehicle equipped with or without passive entry.
Once the latch is released the luggage compartment lid module actuates the motor located in the powered strut to raise the
luggage compartment lid to its fully open or pre-set position. When the luggage compartment lid is in its opening cycle the
automatic stop-position of the lid is functioned by a hall sensor located in the motor. The hall sensor signal transmitted to the
luggage compartment lid module is synchronized with the pre-set memory indicating the stop position of the luggage
compartment lid.
To close the luggage compartment lid a hardwired signal is transmitted directly to the luggage compartment lid module when
the button, located on lid’s closing edge is pressed. The module operates the spindle motor in the opposite direction to close
the luggage compartment lid to the latch position.
When the latch engages with the striker plate a signal transmitted from the latch actuator mechanism to the luggage
compartment lid module confirms the latch is engaged. The module de-activates the spindle drive and activates the power
cinch motor to pull the latch closed through the last 6 mm of travel. A mechanical cable connection between the motor and
latch assembly is used to complete the closing process.
If the battery is disconnected when the luggage compartment lid is closed, the stored and calibrated lid opening heights will
remain stored when the battery is reconnected. However if power supply to the luggage compartment lid module is
disconnected when the luggage compartment lid is open the system will not recognize the lid’s position and subsequently will
not function to any switch commands when power is reinstated. To re-calibrate the system, the luggage compartment lid must
be moved manually to the closed position where it will perform a soft close and reset the hall sensor counters to zero.
NOTE: If required the luggage compartment lid can be opened and closed manually.
CAUTION: DO NOT CLOSE THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID IF THE VEHICLE BATTERY IS DISCONNECTED. It is advisable
to close the latch claw when working on a vehicle with the battery disconnected to prevent accidental closure.
Powered Strut
Powered strut components
Item Description
1 Inner tube
2 Outer tube
3 Ball joint
4 Outer tube spindle nut
5 Spindle
6 Springs
7 Gear
8 Motor
9 Ball joint
The powered strut operates the swan-neck hinge on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Ball-joints positioned at each end of
the strut allow it to articulate between a fixed mount on the vehicle and the moveable hinge. The powered strut opens and
closes the luggage compartment lid using an electrically driven spindle located in the struts internal electric motor; the lid
opening operation is also aided by spring assistance.
The spindle drive comprises an inner and outer tube where the motor and gears in the inner tube drive a threaded spindle
which runs on a threaded nut fixed to the inside of the outer tube.
The spindle drive incorporates an object detection function controlled by the luggage compartment lid module. The function is
similar to the anti-trap function of a closing electric window but operates in both directions. If the object detection feature is
activated while the luggage compartment lid is either opening or closing, the spindle motor is reversed for a preset period.
A hall sensor, located in the spindle motor, monitors the speed of the motor. If the speed decreases below a set threshold,
indicating an obstruction and increasing the motor current draw, the power feed to the motor is reversed causing the luggage
compartment lid to move in the opposite direction of travel.
The amount of travel in the opposite direction, before stopping, is determined by the hall sensor count. An exception to the
object detection reverse travel function occurs when the luggage compartment lid is opening through its first few degrees of
travel from the latched position. In these circumstances if an obstacle is detected the luggage compartment lid stops in the
position of the obstruction and no travel in the opposite direction occurs.
Luggage compartment lid release when the vehicle has a discharged battery
If the battery becomes discharged when the luggage compartment lid is shut, it will be necessary to supply power to the
release circuit in order to open it.
Auxiliary power release diagram
Item Description
1 Attach the positive booster cable clamp to the rearward end of the 100A Midi fuse.
2 Attach the negative booster cable clamp to the earth post at the front of the right-hand chassis leg.
3 Press the luggage compartment release button on the remote control.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to start the vehicle with power supplied in this way.
Luggage compartment lid release when the vehicle has a system fault
In the event of the luggage compartment lid failing to open due to a system fault there is an emergency electrical release
connector situated behind the rear seat squab next to the CJB. The connector is linked to the luggage compartment lid latch
actuator.
A +12 volt feed applied to the connector will power the luggage compartment lid latch actuator to an un-latched state.
Electrical release connector access location
The luggage compartment can be opened using the appropriate button on the Smart Key, or via passive entry. It can also be
opened using the exterior release at the rear of the vehicle, provided the doors are unlocked and the gear selector is in Park
(P).
Provided the vehicle is not locked or alarmed, the luggage compartment can also be opened using the interior release button.
Luggage compartment lid – open buttons
Item Description
1 Vehicle exterior - open button
2 Vehicle interior - open button
3 Smart Key - open button
To close the luggage compartment, press the button on the closing edge of the luggage compartment lid.
Luggage compartment lid – close button
Item Description
1 Close button
The luggage compartment lid can be stopped at any time during the open or close cycle by a single press on any of the control
buttons. Pressing a control button once again will authorize the luggage compartment lid to continue its original cycle, or if
required opposite cycle; see chart below.
The luggage compartment lid has a 'Garage Position' setting, where it is possible to set the maximum height to which the
luggage compartment lid will open.
To set the required height:
Open the luggage compartment lid to the position of the required height.
Press and hold, for 10 seconds, the luggage compartment lid close button.
Close the luggage compartment lid, then open again to check that it opens to the programmed height.
The maximum opening height is now set. To reset the maximum opening height to full, repeat the process, but fully open the
luggage compartment lid before pressing and holding the close button.
The opening and closing control strategies are listed in the following chart:
Start from stopped position Start from stopped Garage position -

Strategy Opening Closing Stop after opening position after closing set/reset
Jaguar Smart Key One No One One push for opening One push for opening X
push function push
Interior boot lid One No One One push for opening One push for opening X
release push function push
Exterior boot lid One No One One push for opening One push for opening X
release push function push
Closing-edge X One push One One push for closing One push for closing One push for 10
button push seconds
If any object is detected, that would interfere with the closing of the luggage compartment lid; lid movement will stop and
reverse a short distance. Any obstructions must be removed before pressing the close button again.
If the Jaguar Smart Key is inadvertently left inside the luggage compartment and the vehicle is locked and the alarm set, an
audible warning will sound and the luggage compartment will re-open after three seconds.
NOTE: If the Jaguar Smart Key is inside a metal box, it will not be detected by the vehicle security system.
Body Closures - Front Door
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTE: The front door is manufactured from aluminium, it contains

a side impact reinforcement manufactured from boron steel.
The front door is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.

3. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal

injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may
For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,
4. For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions

5. For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs
- General Information, Description and Operation).
6. For additional information, refer to: Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body

Repairs - Corrosion Protection, Description and Operation).
7. TORQUE: 10 Nm
harnesses.
NOTE: Front door shown removed for clarity.

TORQUE: 30 Nm
11. For additional information, refer to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
12. For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and
Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
13. For additional information, refer to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View
Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
harnesses.
15. CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result

in damage to the component.
TORQUE: 10 Nm
16. TORQUE: 30 Nm
17.
18.
19.
20. TORQUE: 5 Nm
21.
22.
Installation

Body Closures - Fuel Filler Door
Removal
CAUTION: Do not align the bowl using the hinge arm.
1.
2. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

retaining clip.

Body Closures - Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Removal
2. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety
4. Torque: 128 Nm
5.

7.
8.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
damage.

damage.

Installation

Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid
Removal
NOTES:
The luggage compartment lid is manufactured from

aluminium.
The luggage compartment lid is serviced as a separate

bolt-on panel, less its hinges.


5. For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26 Body
Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks, Description
and Operation).

7. For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Latch

Actuator (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal
and Installation).
8.
9. NOTE: The step must be carried out on both sides.
10. WARNING: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.
TORQUE: 23 Nm

damage.

Installation

Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid Hinge
Removal
1. The luggage compartment lid hinge is a category B repair.
2. NOTE: The luggage compartment lid hinge is

manufactured from steel.
The luggage compartment lid hinge is serviced as a

separate bolt-on panel.
3. The luggage compartment lid hinge is replaced in conjunction with:

Luggage compartment lid
4. For additional information relating to this repair procedure please see

the following:
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation) /
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information, Description
and Operation) /
Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection,
Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and
Tolerance Checks, Description and Operation).
5. Disconnect the battery.

6. Remove the luggage compartment lid.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid (501-03
Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the parcel shelf.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the back panel inner trim.
9. Remove the loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation) /
Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
10. Remove the retaining nuts to the luggage compartment lid
hinge mounting.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the gasket is installed between the luggage

compartment lid and the luggage compartment lid hinge.
Offer up the luggage compartment lid hinge. Check alignment, if correct,

proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
2. Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge retaining nuts.
NOTE: Bolts are pre-coated to inhibit galvanic corrosion and

can be reused only if the coating is not damaged.
Tighten to 17 Nm.
3. The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of

removal procedure.
Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid Strut
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the luggage compartment lid is in fully open position.
All vehicles
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
Vehicles with split rear seat backrest
NOTE: If equipped.
2. Fully recline the rear seat backrest, then adjust it slightly back up to aid
access.
All vehicles
3.
4.
5.
NOTE: If equipped.
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
All vehicles
8.
Vehicles with rear passenger entertainment system
9.
All vehicles
10. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to aid installation.
11.
12.
13. CAUTION: Using a suitable tool, release and detach the strut joints.
14. Torque: 9 Nm
15.
CAUTION:
Using a
suitable
tool,
release and
detach the
strut joints.
NOTE:
Do not
disassemble
further if
the
component
is removed
for access
only.
Installation

2. NOTE: Make sure that all the clips are correctly installed.
Body Closures - Rear Door
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTE: The rear door is manufactured from aluminium, it contains a

side impact reinforcement manufactured from aluminium.
The rear door is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.


For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,


7. TORQUE: 25 Nm

harnesses.
NOTE: Rear door shown removed for clarity.

TORQUE: 30 Nm
11. For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
12. For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and
Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
harnesses.
14. CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result

TORQUE: 10 Nm

TORQUE: 30 Nm
16.
17.
18. TORQUE: 5 Nm
19.
20.
21.
22. TORQUE: 4
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation -

Safety belt lower retaining bolt 40 30 -
A-pillar trim panel screw 6 4
B-pillar upper trim panel screw 6 4
C-pillar lower trim panel screw 6 4
Front door trim panel lower screws 6 4
Front door trim panel upper screw 3 2
Front interior door handle screw 3 2
Rear door trim panel lower screws 6 4
Rear door trim panel upper screw 3 2
Rear interior door handle screw 3 2
Headlining screws 2 1
Rear parcel shelf bolts 6 4
Sun visor screws 6 4
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Glass Roof Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
General Procedures
Check
1. Refer to: Glass Roof Panel Blind (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Remove the retaining clip.
Adjustment
1. CAUTIONS:
Rotating the shaft clockwise will result in permanent

damage to the tension spring.
Make sure that the tension is retained on the shaft

until the clip is installed.
NOTES:
On vehicles with long wheel base, rotate the roof

opening panel blind 12 full rotations.
On vehicles with short wheel base, rotate the roof

opening panel blind 11 full rotations.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the shaft counter clockwise.
2. Align the holes between the shaft and the blind.

3. Install the retaining clip.
4. Refer to: Glass Roof Panel Blind (501-05 Interior Trim and
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
Torque: 6 Nm
4. NOTES:


Note the fitted position of the component/s prior to

removal.
5.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Refer to: Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

5. CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are correctly
located.

Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
Removal

2. Torque: 40 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 6 Nm
the noted removal position.

Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
All vehicles
1. Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
NOTE: If equipped.
2. Fully recline the rear seat backrest, then adjust it slightly

back up to aid access.
All vehicles
3.
4.
5.
NOTE: If equipped.
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
All vehicles
8.
9.
All vehicles
10. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
11.

13. Torque: 40 Nm
14. Torque: 6 Nm
15.
16.
Installation
2. NOTE: Make sure that all the clips are correctly

installed.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Cowl Side Trim Panel
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
1. CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can

be obtained by tightening the cap until an audible click is
heard.
2.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. Remove the front door trim panel.

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal


Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Instrument Panel Speaker Grille
Removal

the component.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Glass Roof Panel Blind
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Interior Rear View Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal
and Installation).

4. NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both sides.
Refer to: Sun Visor (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Refer to: C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).

9. Torque: 2 Nm
10.
11.
13. NOTES:
Make sure that the component is installed to the

Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
The procedure must be carried out on both sides.
Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
15.

technician.
technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.



prior to removal.
NOTES:

21. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
NOTE: Lower and reposition the headliner to aid

access.
Install the retaining clip.
23. CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are correctly located.
NOTE: Follow the animation to make sure the roof opening panel
blind is removed and installed correctly from and to the guides.
25. If the glass roof panel blind tension has been released, the glass roof
panel blind rewind procedure must be followed.
Installation
1. Make sure that the glass roof panel blind tension is correct prior to
installation. If the tension has been released refer to the glass roof
panel blind rewind procedure.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Glass Roof Panel Blind Motor
Removal
CAUTIONS:
The roof opening panel blind motors are handed and will only install in their respective side.
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Motor Synchronization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General

Procedures).
and Installation).

and Installation).

10. Torque: 2 Nm
11.
12.
14. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
15. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
16.

technician.
technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.



prior to removal.
NOTES:


damage.

access.
NOTES:
When installing the side air curtain module, make

sure that the component is tucked under the bracket.
If the side air curtain module has deployed, new

retaining brackets must be installed.
Torque: 9 Nm
24. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Headliner
Removal
All vehicles
and Installation).

and Installation).
8. Refer to: Windshield Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,

9.
10. Torque: 2 Nm
11.
12.
14. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
15. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
16.
technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.



technician.
21. NOTES:
Make sure the front and rear passenger assist handles

and headliner retaining clips are installed to the headliner
prior to installation.
prior to removal.
NOTES:

Long wheelbase
23. NOTES:


Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel
Removal
1.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2. Refer to: Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel RH
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2. Refer to: Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Removal
1.
2.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the tailgate release

switch.
4.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Parcel Shelf
Removal
All vehicles
1. Refer to: C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Vehicles with electric rear blind
2.
Vehicles without electric rear blind
3.
All vehicles
4.

7.
8.
9.
10.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the noise vibration

harshness (NVH) material is correctly located.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harness does not
catch when installing the parcel shelf.
3. Torque: 40 Nm
4.
5.
Torque: 6 Nm
Apply gentle pressure.
6.
Torque: 6 Nm
Apply gentle pressure.
7.
Vehicles with electric rear blind
8.
Vehicles without electric rear blind
9.
All vehicles
10.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Door Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2. Torque: 6 Nm
3. Torque: 6 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6.
component.
NOTE: For vehicles with electric rear door blind.
8.
9.
10.
12. Torque: 3 Nm
13.
14. Torque: 3 Nm
15. Torque: 3 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 5 Nm
19.
20.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal

located.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor
Removal
NOTES:

the component.
2. TORQUE: 6 Nm
3.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
General Equipment
Interior trim remover
Removal
1. Using a suitable tool, release the retaining clips and

remove the sun visor vanity mirror from the sun visor.
General Equipment: Interior trim remover
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to install the

component.
Press firmly against the areas indicated until an audible

click is heard.
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation -

Front Grille retaining screws 1.5 1.1 13.3
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Radiator Grille
Removal

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Torque: 2.5 Nm
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Allow adhesive to cure for 2 hours before proceeding

to fit bumper.


Installation

Rear View Mirrors -
Exterior mirror retaining nuts 8 5.90 70.81
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - Component Location
Item Description
1 Interior mirror
2 RH (right-hand) door mirror Passenger door control module
3 RH door control module
4 LH (left-hand) door control module
5 Mirror control switch
6 LH door mirror
www.JagDocs.com
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - Overview
Overview
The exterior mirrors incorporate the following:
Blind spot monitoring indicator

Auto dimming function
Approach lamps
Exterior temperature sensor
Heated mirror function
Reverse dipping function
Movement of the door mirrors is controlled from a switch pack located on the drivers door. The switch pack contains 2
non-latching mirror select buttons labeled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way mirror movement switch. Door mirror movement commands
are transmitted to the driver's door module over the LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The drivers door module transmits
any mirror movement commands to the passenger door module over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Movement of the door mirrors is carried out by the respective door module. The door modules provide supply and ground paths
to the mirror motors and monitor mirror position via potentiometers located in the mirror housings.
Both exterior door mirrors and the interior mirror feature an auto dimming function. The interior rear view mirror contains one
forward and one reward facing light sensor. The light sensors control the auto dimming feature of the interior mirror to reduce
glare from the headlights of following vehicles.
When auto-dimming of the interior mirror is required, a supply is provided by the interior mirror to both door mirrors to initiate
the door mirror auto-dimming sequence.
Blind spot monitoring function alerts the driver to a vehicle located in the vehicle blind spot. A warning indicator is located in
each exterior mirror towards the outer edge.
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired, N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item Description
2 RH (right-hand) door module
3 RH door mirror
4 LH (left-hand)side door mirror
5 Interior mirror
6 Battery
9 Exterior mirror control switches
LH door module
System Operation
The rear view mirrors comprise an interior mirror mounted to the windshield, and an exterior mirror mounted on each front door
cheater. The types of mirrors and associated operating functions installed depend on the specification and trim level of the
vehicle.
Interior Mirrors
The interior rear view mirror is provided as a electrically operated automatic dimming type.
The automatic dimming mirror comprises an electro-chromatic glass housed within a surrounding case that is attached with a
ball joint connector to the mirror stem. The mirror stem incorporates an 8-pin electrical connector that is connected to the roof
panel wiring harness.
Light sensors are mounted on the front and rear of the mirror surround case. The sensors control the automatic dimming
feature to reduce glare from the headlights of following vehicles.
The automatic dimming function is permanently active when the ignition is in power mode 4 (Accessory) and power mode 6
(Ignition). The forward facing light sensor monitors the ambient light level at the front of the vehicle; the rearward facing light
sensor monitors the light level coming from the rear of the vehicle. When light from the rear of the vehicle exceeds the
ambient light level from the front of the vehicle, the automatic dimming circuit darkens the interior mirror surface.
Automatic dimming is inhibited when reverse gear is selected to provide the driver with maximum vision. On vehicles with
automatic transmission, the reverse gear signal is provided by the TCM (transmission control module) via the high speed CAN
bus to the CJB. The CJB then provides a power feed to the mirror.
Exterior Mirrors
Electrically operated and heated exterior mirrors are installed as standard. Depending on the specification and trim level of the
vehicle, the following options are available:
Power fold (switch pack operated feature) and auto fold (remote handset operated feature)
Memory recall
Reverse gear mirror dip
The power fold/auto fold feature is available only when power fold mirrors are installed to the vehicle.
The auto fold and reverse gear mirror dip functions are not customer configurable, but may be enabled or disabled by the
dealer using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The LH door mirror incorporates an ambient air temperature sensor that is hardwired to the ECM (engine control module). The
ECM is connected to the CJB and other control modules via the high speed CAN bus. The sensor provides information to the
ECM that is then transmitted on the medium speed CAN bus for use by other control modules.
The exterior mirror lamps are controlled by the interior lighting function.
The door mirrors are controlled using a switch pack located on the driver's door. The switch pack contains 2 non-latching mirror
select switches labeled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way directional joystick. The switch pack is connected to the driver door control
module via the LIN bus. The driver and front passenger door control modules are connected via the medium speed CAN bus. A
hardwired connection between each door control module and the corresponding door mirror, provides the supply and ground
paths for the mirror motors.
Each exterior door mirror incorporates 2 motors to control horizontal (left/right) and vertical (up/down) adjustments.
On vehicles installed with a driver's power operated memory seat and memory exterior mirrors, a potentiometer is incorporated
within each mirror motor and is used to provide information regarding the actual motor positions. The current position and
memory positions of each door mirror motor are maintained and stored within the corresponding door control module.
The memory exterior mirror positions are also monitored and stored within door control module memory when the reverse gear
mirror dip function is used.
When reverse gear is selected, the door control module stores the current mirror position and will then dip passenger mirror
glass to a default dip position. While reverse gear is selected it is possible to store a preferred dipped mirror position by
adjusting the passenger mirror glass to the desired position via the mirror switch pack. When the desired position is achieved
using the switch, the new dip position will be automatically stored by the door control module when reverse gear is
de-selected. Therefore when reverse gear is re-selected, the dip position recalled by the door control module will be the new
reverse gear mirror dip stored position. When reverse gear is deselected the mirror glass will automatically move to the
previous stored position prior to reverse gear selection.
Reverse gear mirror dip is only available when memory mirrors are installed, and reverse gear mirror dip is enabled within the
instrument cluster.
If the driver selects a memory recall function using the memory seat switch pack, the driver's memory seat and exterior
memory mirrors are moved to a stored memory position.
Exterior mirrors with the power fold/auto fold feature incorporate a motor located in the hinge of each exterior mirror arm.
Operation of the power fold feature is achieved using the exterior mirror switch pack. Operation of the auto fold feature is
achieved using the remote handset.
The power fold function is active when the ignition is in power mode 6 (Ignition).
Both exterior mirrors will power fold when the mirror switch pack 'L' and 'R' switches are pressed together. Pressing the
switches again will unfold the mirrors.
When the instrument cluster is configured for the auto fold feature, the mirrors will fold in when the remote handset lock
button is pressed. The mirrors will unfold when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote handset unlock button.
NOTE: If the mirrors are folded in using the mirror switch pack (power fold) and the vehicle is then locked, subsequent
unlocking of the vehicle will not unfold the mirrors.
When the remote handset unlock button is operated, the CJB recognizes the remote handset for that vehicle and acknowledges
the request.
When the vehicle is locked the door control modules reverse the polarity of the mirror fold motor, power and ground
connections to operate the mirrors in the opposite direction.
Exterior mirror heating is provided with heater elements bonded to the back of the mirror glass. Power supply for the mirror
heating elements is provided by the corresponding driver or passenger door control module.
Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver. Exterior mirror heater operation is
determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status.
The mirror heating is controlled in two phases, the initial heating phase and a second PWM (pulse width modulation) controlled
phase. In the first phase the heater elements in the mirrors are permanently powered for a pre-determined length of time. This
length of time varies with the ambient temperature. During the second PWM phase, the heater elements are turned on and off
every 30 seconds. The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are
switched on. This ensures the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors
For a detailed description of the rear view mirrors system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation),

Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation),
Rear View Mirrors (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Door mirror switch condition and installation Battery condition and state of charge
Door mirror condition and installation Fuses
Harnesses and connectors
Washer jet and mirror heater relay
Memory control module(s)
Door mirror switch(s)
Door mirror motor(s)
Ignition switch
Automatic Temperature Control (ATCM) module
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuit
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Mirrors do not Check the fuses. Check the operation of the washer jet and mirror heater
defrost/washer jets Fuse fault relay. Check the washer jet and mirror heater circuits. Refer to the
freeze Washer jet and mirror electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
heater relay fault module is suspect.
Circuit fault: high
resistance
Circuit fault: short
circuit to ground
Automatic temperature
control module fault
Mirrors inoperative Operate the mirror switch and listen for the motor(s). If the motor(s) can
in one or more Mechanical fault be heard, check the mechanical condition of the mirror and linkages.
directions Switch fault Rectify as necessary. Check for DTCs indicating a switch, motor or circuit
Motor fault fault.
Circuit fault: high
resistance
Circuit fault: short
circuit to ground
Memorized mirror Before condemning a memory component, check the function from the
position is not Battery voltage below switch and refer to the symptoms above. Make sure the battery voltage is
resumed 10.5 volts adequate. Make sure that the desired position is correctly stored. Make
Position not stored sure that the memory store/recall procedure is being followed. Refer to the
Switch operated during relevant section of the workshop manual.
"one-touch" memory
recall
EEPROM fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver Door Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00 General
Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror
Removal
NOTES:
1.
harnesses.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the locating tangs are aligned. Failure to

Take extra care not to damage the seal.

NOTE: Make sure that the harness is routed to the

Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Cover
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
2. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the locating pegs.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Glass
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the locating pegs.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal
NOTES:
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Interior Rear View Mirror
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
3.
Installation
1.
2.
NOTE: For vehicles with Auto high beam assist (AHBA)

the Interior mirror cover caps are designed for one fit only,
therefore should be replaced.
Seating -
Front seat safety belt anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Front seat retaining bolts 47 35 -
Front seat backrest frame to seat base bolts 35 26 -
Front safety belt buckle retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front seat track to cushion frame bolts 20 15 -
Front seat track to cushion frame mechanism bolts 28 21 -
Front seat height adjustment motor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Front seat height adjustment motor arm bolt 28 21 -
Front seat track motor bolts 10 7 -
Front seat tilt motor bolt, M8 22 16 -
Front seat tilt motor bolts, M6 10 7 -
Front seat cushion extension motor bolt, M8 22 16 -
Front seat cushion extension motor bolt, M6 10 7 -
Passenger seat away switch bracket nuts 7 - 62
Front seat backrest frame support panel bolts 9 - 80
Front seat wiring shield bolts 10 7 -
Front seat folding tray cover bolts 3 - 27
Rear seat armrest nuts - Vehicles with split rear seat backrest 25 18 -
Rear seat armrest nuts - Vehicles without split rear seat backrest 8 - 71
Rear seat backrest ground cable - Vehicles with split rear seat backrest 10 7 -
Side air bag module retaining nuts 7 - 62
Seating - Seats - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - ADJUSTMENT
Item Description
1 Memory switch pack
2 Head restraint motor
3 Pump, lumbar support, squab bolster supports and back massage cells
4 Pump, lumbar support and squab bolster supports
5 Pump and lumbar support (4-way support shown, 2-way similar)
6 Seat slide motor
7 Squab recline motor
8 Cushion tilt motor
9 Cushion extension motor
10 Seat control module
11 Seat height motor
12 Seat switch pack (16 and 18 way)
13 Seat switch pack (8,10 and 12 way)
COMPONENT LOCATION - HEATED SEATS
Item Description
1 Rear seat cushion heater element
2 Rear seat squab heater element
3 Rear RH (right-hand) seat heater module
4 Rear LH (left-hand) seat heater module
5 Front passenger seat heater module
6 Driver seat heater module
7 Front seat cushion heater element
8 Front seat squab heater element
COMPONENT LOCATION - CLIMATE SEATS
Item Description
1 Rear seats climate control module
2 Rear seat squab climate module
3 Rear seat squab pad assembly
4 Rear seat cushion pad assembly
5 Rear seat cushion climate module
6 Front seats climate control module
7 Front seat cushion climate module
8 Front seat cushion pad assembly
9 Front seat squab pad assembly
10 Front seat squab climate module
Seating - Seats - Overview
OVERVIEW
Leather Seat Covers
Leather is a natural product, therefore it bears natural characteristics, such as grain variations, growth & bush marks. These
non-weakening marks show the true nature of the hide and are the hallmarks of Leather. In order to maintain the beauty of the
vehicles natural Leather upholstery it requires regular cleaning, which if neglected, may cause deterioration. Where dust and
dirt are allowed to accumulate and become ingrained in the surface of the Leather, the upholstery may become permanently
damaged.
Light coloured upholstery can be particularly susceptible to soiling and staining and care should be taken to ensure that where
there is evidence of any soiling or staining on the upholstery then this should be cleaned immediately using the Jaguar/Land
Rover approved products, failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent, this applies to all leather upholstery
and is not colour specific.
Leather trimmed seats will naturally exhibit areas of creasing and wrinkling over a period of time and is a normal characteristic
as the Leather ages.
Particular care should be taken where there is evidence of soiling or staining on the leather, this should be cleaned
immediately. Failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent.
Particular care should be taken to prevent damage from studs, zips and buckles.
NOTES:
Please refer to Leather care label attached to seats for more information.
Creasing and wrinkling does not represent a manufacturing defect.
Damage from studs, zips and buckles do not represent manufacturing defects.
Use only Jaguar/Land Rover approved products in accordance with the instructions for use.
Front Seats
Various options are available for the front seats with regard to temperature control and electrical adjustment. Seats are
non-heated, heated or heated and cooled (climate), with the following adjustment options:
10-way adjustment on the driver seat and 8-way adjustment on the passenger seat.
16-way adjustment on the driver seat and 12-way adjustment on the passenger seat.
18-way adjustment on the driver and passenger seats.
8-way adjustments consist of seat slide, seat height, squab recline and 2-way lumbar adjustment. 10-way adjustment adds
cushion tilt. 12-way adjustment adds head restraint. 16-way adjustment adds cushion extension and replaces 2-way lumbar
adjustment with 4-way. 18-way adjustment adds squab bolster adjustment. The controls for seat adjustment are installed in
the outboard side shield of the related seat cushion.
The driver seat on all options has a 3-channel memory for easy recall of stored position settings for the seat, steering column
and door mirrors. Passenger seats with 18-way adjustment also have a 3-channel memory. The controls for memory operation
are in the related front door casing. Lumbar and squab bolster settings are not included in the memory function.
Some climate seats with 18-way adjustment also incorporat a massage function. The massage function is produced using
additional lumbar cells. Operation of the massage function is controlled from the Climate / Front Climate / Front Seats menu of
the TSD (touch screen display).
Operation of the temperature settings for heated and climate seats is controlled from the Climate / Front Climate / Front Seats
menu of the TSD.
Both front seats incorporate an AWS (anti-whiplash system) consisting of active, energy absorbent backrest mechanisms.
Together with correctly positioned headrests, the AWS helps reduce the likelihood of neck and spinal injury in the event of a
rear impact. In a low speed rear impact, AWS automatically moves and reclines the backrest by a small amount, to change the
posture of the seat occupant and reduce the relative front to rear motion between body and head.
A map pocket is installed on the rear of each front seat squab. Depending on trim level, some vehicles also have a folding tray
attached to the rear of the squabs.
Rear Seats
The following options are available for the two outer rear seats with regard to temperature control:
Non-heated seats.
Heated seats.
Climate seats.
Operation of the temperature settings for heated and climate seats is controlled from the rear climate control panel and the
Climate / Rear Climate / Rear Seats menu of the TSD.
Seating - Seats - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
ADJUSTMENT - NON-MEMORY FRONT SEAT
Item Description
1 Battery
4 2-way lumbar adjustment
6 Seat slide motor
8 Seat height motor
9 Seat switch pack
ADJUSTMENT - MEMORY FRONT SEAT
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB
4 Seat memory switches
8 Seat height motor
9 Lumbar adjustment solenoids
10 Air pump
11 Squab bolster adjustment solenoids
12 Seat slide motor
13 Cushion extension motor
14 Seat switch pack
15 Driver seat module
16 RJB
17 LH (left-hand) door module
18 RH (right-hand) door module
HEATED SEATS
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB
4 Rear RH seat heater module
5 Rear RH cushion heater
6 Rear RH squab heater
7 Rear LH seat heater module
8 Rear LH cushion heater
9 Rear LH squab heater
10 Front LH squab heater
11 Front RH squab heater
12 Front RH cushion heater
13 Front LH seat heater module
14 Front LH cushion heater
16 Front RH seat heater module
17 RJB
www.JagDocs.com
CLIMATE SEATS
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 Front RH seat squab climate module
4 Front RH seat cushion climate module
5 CJB
6 Front seat climate control module
7 Front LH seat cushion climate module
8 Front LH seat squab climate module
11 Rear RH seat squab climate module
12 Rear RH seat cushion climate module
13 Rear seat climate control module
14 Rear LH seat cushion climate module
15 Rear LH seat squab climate module
SEAT MASSAGE
Item Description
1 RJB
2 Master massage solenoid
3 Air pump
4 Slave massage and adjustable bolster solenoid
5 Lumbar solenoid
6 Seat switch pack
7 Touch-screen
8 Seat module
System Operation
FRONT SEATS
Adjustment - Non-memory Seats
On non-memory front seats, each seat switch pack receives three permanent power supplies; two from the CJB and one from
the RJB. The power supplies from the CJB are used to operate the adjustment motors. The power supply from the RJB is used
to operate the air pump and associated solenoid valves.
For the adjustment motors, when a switch is operated power is connected to the applicable side of the related motor and a
ground is connected to the opposite side of the motor, which then runs in the required direction. To move the motor in the
opposite direction the polarity is reversed.
When the lumbar inflate switch is pressed, power is connected to the air pump to inflate the support. When the deflate switch
is pressed, power is connected to the deflate solenoid valve, which opens to deflate the support.
Adjustment - Memory Seats
On memory front seats, the seat module receives three permanent power supplies; two from the CJB and one from the RJB.
The power supplies from the CJB are used to operate the adjustment motors. The power supply from the RJB is used to
operate the seat module.
Permanent power supplies are also connected from the CJB to the memory switch pack and from the RJB to the seat switch
pack.
The seat switch pack is connected to the seat module by a LIN bus for the seat adjustment switches. Any selection for seat
adjustment generates a message which is passed via the LIN bus to the seat module. The seat module processes the request
and operates the applicable seat motor as required using the power supplies from the CJB.
The seat module on the driver seat is also connected to the medium speed CAN bus. This allows the driver seat module to
monitor the position of the door mirrors and the steering column, using signals from the door modules and CJB respectively,
when storing and recalling memory settings.
The memory switch pack has two hardwired connections with the related seat switch pack. One is for the three channel
switches and one is for the memory switch. Operation of the any of the memory switches is relayed from the seat switch pack
to the seat module on the LIN bus.
Memory settings are stored in the seat module by pressing the memory switch and then, within 5 seconds, one of the channel
switches. When the memory switch is pressed the LED (light emitting diode) in the switch comes on. After the channel switch
is pressed, the LED goes off and a chime sounds to confirm that the settings have been memorized. If the ignition is on, the
message center will display a confirmation message. Any previously stored settings on the selected channel will be
over-written.
Memory settings are recalled by pressing the applicable channel switch. If the ignition is on, the message center will display a
confirmation message.
On seats with 2-way lumbar adjustment, when the inflate switch is pressed power is connected to the air pump to inflate the
support. When the deflate switch is pressed, power is connected to the deflate solenoid valve, which opens to deflate the
support.
On seats with 4-way lumbar adjustment and bolster adjustment, when an inflate switch is pressed, power is simultaneously
connected to the air pump and the related inflate solenoid valve. When a deflate switch is pressed, power is connected to the
related deflate solenoid valve, which opens to deflate the support. On vehicles with massage seats, power is connected to the
inflate and deflate solenoid valves in the same way, but when an inflate selection is made the air pump is activated by a LIN
bus message to the master solenoid valve, which then operates the air pump.
Stall Detection
A seat adjustment motor is deemed to have stalled if there is no change in the input from the feedback sensor of the motor
for 200 ms. If a stall condition is detected then the drive to that motor is cancelled for the remainder of the memory recall
operation or until the switch is re-selected (manual movement). The motor may be activated again, to move past the stall
position, by pressing the appropriate switch for more than 2 seconds. If sensor feedback is detected, then the motor will
continue to be driven until the switch is released. If sensor feedback is not detected, then the motor is only driven for 0.5
second and then stops until the switch is released and pressed again, when a further 0.5 second of activation is permitted.
This is known as inch mode, which allows seat adjustment to be maintained if sensor feedback is lost.
Initialization
When a replacement seat module is fitted, it should be calibrated using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment so that the
module can learn the positions of the adjustment motors.
Battery Monitor
If the battery voltage drops below 10.5 V, then the driver seat module ignores all requests for a memory recall until the
battery voltage has reached 11.5 V. This will conserve as much power in the vehicle battery as possible to enable engine
cranking.
Massage Seats
Seat massage requests from the START / STOP buttons on the TSD are sent via the medium speed CAN bus to the appropriate
seat module. The seat module processes the requests and transmits them to the master massage solenoid on the LIN bus
connection.
When a START button is pressed, the master massage solenoid operates the relevant master and slave solenoid valves and
activates the pump. The massage function operates in 10 minute cycles. After a 10 minute cycle is complete the user must
re-select the function if a further 10 minute cycle is required.
When a STOP button is pressed, the 10 minute cycle is completed, or the ignition is switched off, the solenoid valves are
opened to deflate the massage cells and the air pump turned off.
During operation the bottom cell pair inflate and then deflate. As the first cell pair are deflating the second cell pair start to
inflate. This sequence is repeated for all five cell pairs, from cell pair one at the bottom to cell pair five at the top. Cell
inflation time, which varies between cell pairs, is as follows:
Cell pair one - 3 seconds.

Cell pair two - 2.6 seconds.
Cell pair three - 2.8 seconds.
Cell pair four - 2.2 seconds.
Cell pair five - 1.6 seconds.
Anti-whiplash System
Depending on the weight of the occupant and the severity of the collision, the mechanisms begin to operate at a relative
impact speed of between approximately 8.7 and 11.2 mph (13.9 and 17.9 km/h). At the point of a rear impact, the forward
energy of the impact and the inertia of the occupant combine to push the backrest against the occupant's back. That causes
the AWS mechanism to begin a controlled sequence of movements. First, while remaining in an upright position, the backrest
moves rearwards by approximately 50 mm. Next, the backrest reclines through an angle dependant upon the direction and
relative speed of the collision, up to a maximum of approximately 15 degrees.
The combined effect of these movements is to absorb some of the energy of the impact and reduce the relative acceleration of
head and body, thereby helping to reduce the possibility of whiplash injury.
HEATED SEATS
The heater elements only operate when the engine is running. Power for the heater elements is supplied to the seat heater
modules from the heated seat relay in the RJB, which is controlled by a hardwired ignition signal from the CJB.
Seat heating selections made on the TSD and the rear climate control panel are transmitted to the ATC module.
Refer to: Heating and Ventilation (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
When the ATC module receives a seat heating request, it sends a LIN bus message to the appropriate seat heater module to
energize the heater elements in the cushion and the squab. The seat heater module relays the temperature signal, from the
thermal sensor in the cushion heater element, back to the ATC module. The ATC module uses the temperature signal to
regulate the heater elements at the selected heat setting.
CLIMATE SEATS
The heating/cooling of the climate seats only operates when the engine is running. Power for the climate modules is supplied
to the climate seat control modules by two permanent power supplies from the CJB. The climate seat control modules also
receive a power supply from the ignition relay in the CJB.
Heating/Cooling selections on the TSD and the rear climate control panel are transmitted to the appropriate climate seat
control module on the medium speed CAN bus. The climate seat control module then energizes the Peltier cell and the blower
of the climate module(s) in the appropriate seat. The climate seat control module uses the signals from the temperature
sensors in the squab and the cushion climate modules to regulate the seat at the selected temperature. If full seat
heating/cooling is selected, both the squab and the cushion climate modules are activated. If partial seat heating/cooling is
selected, only the squab climate module is activated.
FRONT SEATS ADJUSTMENT
Electric motors are used to provide adjustment of seat slide, seat height, squab recline and, where fitted, cushion tilt, head
restraint and cushion extension. An air pump and inflatable cushions are used to provide adjustment of the lumbar support and
the squab bolster supports (where fitted).
All of the seat adjustments are controlled from the seat switch pack on the outside of the seat cushion. On non memory seats,
the control switches are connected directly to the adjustment motors. On memory seats, the switches are connected to the
adjustment motors via a seat control module. Memory seats also have a memory switch pack in the related door panel.
Adjustment Switches
Item Description
1 Cushion extension
2A Bolster inflate
2B Bolster deflate
3 Lumbar support (4-way shown; 2-way uses only fore/aft positions for inflate/deflate)
4 Squab recline
5 Head restraint
6 Seat height
7 Seat slide
8 Cushion tilt
Memory Switch Pack
Item Description
1 Channel switches
2 Memory switch
Seat Motors
Each adjustment motor contains a Hall position sensor. The sensors provide position feedback signals which, on seats with a
memory function, are used for memory store and recall operation.
The seat slide motor is an integral component of the cushion frame. The motor drives a gear on a worm drive lead screw, which
is integral with the floor rail. The lead screw has a stop at each end to limit the fore and aft seat movement.
The seat height motor is located below the seat. The motor drives a gear on a lead screw. The lead screw moves a lever
mechanism, which raises or lowers the seat cushion.
The squab recline motor is located in the squab frame. The recline motor rotates a shaft connected to the squab frame, which
changes the angle of the squab.
The tilt motor is located below the seat. The tilt motor drives a gear on a lead screw to raise the front of the seat cushion.
The head restraint motor is located in the upper section of the squab frame and is accessible by removal of the seat back. The
motor moves a cradle by a rack and pinion arrangement. The cradle has two head restraint stems, which raise and lower the
head restraint as the motor moves the cradle.
The cushion extend motor is located below the seat. The motor drives a gear on a lead screw, which extends or retracts the
front of the seat cushion.
Lumbar Adjustment
Lumbar adjustment is provided by a lumbar support and air pump installed in the squab. The lumbar support consists of an
inflatable cushion with either a single air cell (2-way lumbar support) or dual air cells (4-way lumbar support), depending on
vehicle specification. On vehicles with massage seats, the dual cell lumbar support is operated by the air pump of the
massage system.
2-way Lumbar Support
Item Description
1 Lumbar support
2 Air pump
4-way Lumbar Support
Item Description
1 Lumbar support
2 Solenoid valves
3 Air pump
Squab Bolster Adjustment
Squab bolster adjustment is provided by inflatable cushions on the inside faces of the squab bolsters. The inflatable cushions
are operated simultaneously by a solenoid valve block and the air pump of the lumbar support or the massage seat system. On
vehicles with massage seats, the squab bolster solenoid valves are incorporated into the valve block containing the slave
massage solenoid valves.
Squab and Lumbar Support
Item Description
1 RH squab bolster support
2 LH squab bolster support
3 4-way lumbar support
4 Air pump
5 Lumbar support solenoid valves
6 Squab support solenoid valves
MASSAGE SEATS
Where fitted, the massage system in each seat consists of an air pump, air cell pads, master and slave solenoid valve blocks.
The air pump is also used for adjustment of the lumbar and squab bolster supports. The slave solenoid block also incorporates
the solenoid valves used to control the squab bolster supports.
Operation of the massage system is controlled with START and STOP buttons on the climate menu of the TSD and is
independent of the lumbar and squab bolster adjustments.
Air Pump
Item Description
1 Air pump
The air pump is located underneath the seat at the rear of the squab. The pump is housed inside a NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) casing to cut down the pump operation sound level. Operation of the air pump is controlled by the master solenoid
valve block.
The maximum pump pressure is controlled by a pressure relief valve in the lumbar solenoid valve block. The maximum pressure
range is 310.5 to 379.5 mbar (4.5 to 5.5 lbf/in2.).
A thermal protection device in the air pump stops pump operation if the temperature increases to 72±4 °C (162±7 °F). The
pump will not re-start until 10 minutes after the temperature decreases below the cut-off temperature.
Solenoid Valves
Item Description
1 Master massage solenoid valves
2 Lumbar solenoid valves
3 Slave massage and adjustable bolster solenoid valves
The master and slave solenoid valve blocks control the air supply to the massage air cells. During air cell deflation excess air
is exhausted to atmosphere through the relevant solenoid valve block exhaust port.
Air Cell Pads
Item Description
1 Squab bolster cells (2 off)
2 Lower massage cells (3 pairs)
3 Upper massage cells (2 pairs)
4 Lumber cells (2 off)
The massage air cells are located in two pads in the front of the seat squab. The lower pad contains three separate pairs of
cells, the upper pad contains two separate pairs of cells.
During operation the pressure of the air cells is approximately 207 to 379 mbar (3 to 5.5 lbf/in2.). This variation is due to the
inflate time given to each air cell, the flow rate of the pump and the maximum pressure of the system.
HEATED SEATS
Heated seats incorporate heater elements in the cushion and the squab of the seat. Power to the heater elements of the front
seats is controlled by two seat heater modules attached to a bracket on the cabin floor, under the carpet at the front left
corner of the LH front seat. Power to the heater elements of the two outside rear seats is controlled by two seat heater
modules attached to a bracket on the back of the rear seat squab.
Each cushion heater element has a thermal sensor, which supplies a feedback temperature signal to the related seat heater
module. The squab heater elements do not have a thermal sensor, and are regulated at the same temperature as the cushion
heater elements.
Seat heating for the front and rear seats can be selected on the climate menu of the TSD. Seat heating for the rear seats can
also be selected on the rear climate control panel. Three levels of heating are available. Heating can also be selected for
either the cushion and the squab or just the squab.
CLIMATE SEATS
Climate seats incorporate climate modules in the cushion and the squab of the seat. Operation of the climate modules of the
front seats is controlled by a climate seat control module attached to a bracket on the cabin floor, under the carpet at the front
left corner of the LH front seat. Operation of the climate modules of the two outside rear seats is controlled by a climate seat
control module attached to the body, behind the of the rear seat squab.
The climate modules contain Peltier cells, which heat up or cool down depending on the voltage provided by the climate seat
control module. Each climate module also contains a blower, which blows air over the Peltier cell to distribute the heated or
cooled air through liners in the related cushion or squab. The blower is also controlled by the climate seat control module.
Seat heating and cooling for the front and rear seats can be selected on the climate menu of the TSD. Seat heating and
cooling for the rear seats can also be selected on the rear climate control panel. Three levels of heating and three levels of
cooling are available. Heating and cooling can also be selected for either the cushion and the squab, or just the squab.
Touch Screen Display
Item Description
1 Temperature control buttons
2 Zone control button
3 Massage control buttons
Rear Climate Control Panel
Item Description
1 Temperature control switch
2 Zone control switch
Seating - Seats
For a detailed description of the seats and seat operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10 Seating)
Seats (Description and Operation),

Seats (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, ensure the vehicle battery is in a good serviceable condition, refer to the
battery care manual.
Visual Inspection
Security, condition and correct installation of seat components and fixings Fuses
Harnesses for damage/corrosion
Electrical connectors
Damaged/corroded pins
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart

No seat movement from switch pack Set ignition ON. Re-check seat function from switch pack.
(including no memory recall) Seat module has Check for DTC B1A9887 and refer to DTC Index. Check for
gone into sleep DTC B1A9888 and refer to DTC Index
mode
Seat switch pack
LIN, power or
ground circuit -
open circuit
Seat switch pack
LIN circuit - short
to power, ground
No seat movement or lumbar movement Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
from switch pack (including no memory NOTE: Seat module switch pack power and ground supply circuits for open
recall) does not control the seat circuit
lumbar function
Seat switch pack

power or ground
supply circuits -
open circuit
Seat movement and lumbar movement

from switch pack is ok, however, no recall Seat switch pack to
NOTE: Memory switch pack is separate switch
from memory switch pack memory switch
hardwired to seat adjust switch
pack circuits -
short, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
switch pack to memory switch pack circuits for short,
open circuit
Seat movement and memory recall works Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check seat
correctly however seat lumbar is not NOTE: Seat module movement switch to lumbar circuits for short, open
working correctly does not control the seat circuit
lumbar function
Seat movement
switch to lumbar
circuits - short,
open circuit
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for DTCs, B1B8731, B1B9131, B1B8931, B1B9331,
in delayed inch mode (seat axis moves Motor Hall sensor B106331, B106431. If present then check Hall sensor
short distance when switch pressed for on affected axis is feedback circuits between seat motor and seat module
longer than 2 seconds and then stops). not connected or and also check Hall sensor ground circuits for affected
This behaviour could occur on any seat not receiving axis. These DTCs are only logged if the axis is
axis (slide, height, squab, tilt, headrest expected signals attempted to be moved in both directions. When hall
or cushion) when requested sensor connection issue fixed press switch on affected
axis for longer than 2 seconds. By keeping the switch
pressed the axis movement should now operate for the
duration of switch-press. Re-calibrate affected seat
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Carry out CAN network integrity test using manufacturer
in inch mode. When seat axis movement MS CAN fault approved diagnostic system
is requested from the seat switch pack
the requested seat axis moves a short
distance then stops (does not include
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL
seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt
headrest and cushion) when requested.
MS CAN communication not possible
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for Instrument Cluster DTC U020800 'Lost
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Seat module is Communication With Seat Module'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack disconnected from present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short the CAN Bus seat module power and ground supplies for short, open
distance then stops (does not include circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using the
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Check for seat module DTC U015500 'Lost
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Instrument cluster Communication With Instrument Cluster'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack is disconnected present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short from the CAN Bus instrument cluster power and ground supplies for short,
distance then stops (does not include open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Driver Door Module Communication With Driver Door Module'. If this DTC is
is requested from the seat switch pack is disconnected present, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the requested seat axis moves a short from the CAN Bus driver door module power and ground supplies for short,
distance then stops (does not include open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Rear Junction Box Communication With RJB'. If this DTC is present, refer to
is requested from the seat switch pack (RJB) is the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and
the requested seat axis moves a short disconnected from ground supplies for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN
distance then stops (does not include the CAN Bus network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL diagnostic system
Seat movement from switch pack occurs Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB
in inch mode. When seat axis movement Central Junction power and ground supplies for short, open circuit. Carry
is requested from the seat switch pack Box (CJB) is out CAN network integrity tests using the manufacturer
the requested seat axis moves a short disconnected from approved diagnostic system
distance then stops (does not include the CAN Bus
lumbar). This behaviour will occur on ALL
Seat module is in
NOTE: Electric passenger seat can NOTE: A new module is NOT required to be
manufacturing
always be activated – there is no installed, only the module replacement routine needs to
mode
passenger seat module installed to this be performed. This will set the PID required to disable
vehicle manufacturing mode
Seat module does not go to sleep. Seat Seat module needs to be configured for customer mode.
movement is always active from driver Check for DTC U1A4C68 'Build/End of Line mode Active'.
seat switch pack If this DTC is present then configure for customer mode
by running 'New Seat Module Replacement' application
for the affected seat using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Front seat fore/aft movement not GO to Pinpoint Test A.
functioning Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat excessive fore/aft free play GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat fore/aft movement noisy GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or seat GO to Pinpoint Test D.

extension motor movement not Carry out the
functioning pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or extension GO to Pinpoint Test E.

movement noisy Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
DTC Index
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Controlled Seat Module - Front/Rear (SCME/SCMF) (Description and
Operation).
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : FRONT SEAT FORE/AFT MOVEMENT NOT FUNCTIONING
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR OPERATION
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For
additional information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
Set ignition status to ' ON'.

1
From the switch pack, operate the front seat forward-rearward seat motor switch and listen for evidence
2
of the motor operating.
Does the motor operate?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Re-check for correct front seat forward-rearward movement. Remove seat to allow for further investigation
if required.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
A3: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR
WARNING: When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed
accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to 'OFF'.

2 Disconnect front seat forward-rearward seat motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may be felt
from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin connections and
the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to forward-rearward
seat motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal

forward-rearward seat motor pin 1 forward-rearward seat motor pin 2
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
front seat forward-rearward seat motor circuits.
No
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST B : FRONT SEAT EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FRONT SEAT FOR EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
1 Check all accessible front seat frame fixings are installed and to the correct torque.
Are all accessible front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Install and tighten all accessible front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for excessive
free play.
B2: COMPARE THE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY AGAINST A SIMILAR SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward free play against a similar seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward free play excessive when compared to a similar seat?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
The front seat frame is operating correctly. Submit Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR) with any
further query.
B3: CHECK REMAINING FRONT SEAT FRAME FIXINGS
1 Remove front seat and/or any seat covers/trim to allow access to check remaining front seat frame
fixings are all installed and to the correct torque.
Are all remaining front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
Replace front seat frame. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
No
Install and tighten all remaining front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for excessive
free play.
PINPOINT TEST C : FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISY
CONDITIONS
C1: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to other front seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other vehicle?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
further query.
C3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy forward-rearward seat movement.
No
GO to C4.
C4: RE-ALIGN FRONT SEAT FRAME
1 Loosen front seat frame fixings.
2 Set ignition status to 'ON'.
3 Using the front seat switch pack drive the front seat fully forward then fully rearward.
4 Tighten front seat frame fixings to the correct torque.
5 Re-check for noisy seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement still noisy?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
The front seat frame is now operating correctly.
C5: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition.
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
PINPOINT TEST D : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR SEAT EXTENSION MOTOR MOVEMENT NOT
FUNCTIONING
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOTOR
WARNINGS:
Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional information, refer to
Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to ' OFF'.

2 Disconnect front seat height, tilt or extension motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may be felt
from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin connections and
the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to relevant motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal

motor pin 1 motor pin 2
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
relevant motor circuits.
No
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST E : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISY
CONDITIONS
E1: COMPARE THE HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE WITH THE OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat movement noise to other front seat.

Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
GO to E3.
E2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other
vehicle?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
further query.
E3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy height, tilt or extension seat movement.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK FOR HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT MECHANISM LUBRICATION
1 Check and apply manufacturer approved lubrication to seat height, tilt or extension movement
mechanism and re-test for noise.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension noise still apparent?
Yes
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
The front seat height, tilt or extension motor is operating correctly.
Seating - Heater Mats
Heated seats incorporate heater elements in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Each cushion heater element has a
thermal sensor, which supplies a feedback temperature signal to the related seat heater module. The backrest heater elements
do not have a thermal sensor, and are regulated at the same temperature as the cushion heater elements.
For a detailed description of the seat heater mat, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (501-10)



Visual inspection
Seat heater switches condition and installation Fuses
Seat heater module
Seat heater switches
Seat heater mat
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTES:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the scan
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional information
read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
into account.
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Seat Module (Driver/Passenger/Rear Left/Rear Right) (100-00,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Seat Climate Control Module (SCCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Seat Heater Mat Application Chart
NOTE: To ensure an accurate resistance reading, calibrated test equipment must be used
Minimum Maximum
Left Hand Drive Right Hand Drive Resistance Resistance
Passenger Passenger
Heater Mat Side Driver Side Side Driver Side
Vehicle / Cushion / / NTC Connector / Connector / Connector / Connector / Ohms At Ohms At
Year Backrest Resistor Pin Pin Pin Pin 20°C ±10°C 20°C ±10°C
XK 2010 Cushion Heater mat PS002/1 and DS002/1 and PS002/1 and DS002/1 and 1,2 1,6
PS002/4 DS002/4 PS002/4 DS002/4
NTC resistor PS002/2 and DS002/2 and PS002/2 and DS002/2 and 4 000 10 000
PS002/3 DS002/3 PS002/3 DS002/3
Backrest Heater mat PS003/1 and DS003/1 and PS003/1 and DS003/1 and 0,35 0,47
PS003/2 DS003/2 PS003/2 DS003/2
XF Cushion Heater mat C3HS07A/1 and C3HS02A/1 C3HS07A/1 and C3HS02A/1 1,23 1,64
C3HS07A/4 and C3HS07A/4 and
C3HS02A/4 C3HS02A/4
NTC resistor C3HS07A/2 and C3HS02A/2 C3HS07A/2 and C3HS02A/2 4 000 10 000
C3HS02A/3 C3HS02A/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS06A/1 and C3HS01A/1 C3HS06A/1 and C3HS01A/1 0,82 1,09
C3HS01A/2 C3HS01A/2
XJ 2008 Cushion Heater mat SP14-1 and SD14-1 and SP14-1 and SD14-1 and 1,28 1,71
SP14-4 SD14-4 SP14-4 SD14-4
NTC resistor SP14-2 and SD14-2 and SP14-2 and SD14-2 and 4 000 10 000
SP14-3 SD14-3 SP14-3 SD14-3
Backrest Heater mat SP15-1 and SD15-1 and SP15-1 and SD15-1 and 0,88 1,17
SP15-2 SD15-2 SP15-2 SD15-2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater mat C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and 0,99 1,32
onwards - C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4 C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4
Front NTC resistor C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and 4 000 10 000
C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3 C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and 0,67 0,90
C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2 C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater mat C3HS78/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS78/1 and 0,99 1,32
onwards - C3HS78/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS78/4
Rear NTC resistor C3HS78/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS78/2 and 4 000 10 000
C3HS78/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS78/3
Backrest Heater mat C3HS79/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS79/1 and 1,0 1,3
C3HS79/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS79/4
PINPOINT TEST A : SEAT HEATER MAT
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR DTC'S
1 Where possible use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to review any logged seat heater mat
DTC's
Were any seat heater mat DTC's logged?
Yes
Carry out the help text action for any logged DTC's. Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC's return follow the
tests listed below GO to A2.
No
GO to A2.
A2: MANUAL CHECK
NOTES:
The manual check should be carried out by someone familiar with correct seat heat operation
On full power the seat should be hot to touch
If required operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient
1
temperature
2 Operate the seat heater on full power
Does the seat heater operate correctly?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If seat heater operation is correct no further action required
No
GO to A3.
A3: SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to identify
the connector
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat heater circuit and the NTC
resistor circuit for short circuit to ground
Are either of the circuits short circuit to ground?
Yes
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
No
GO to A4.
A4: CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) for circuit
continuity
Does the seat heater mat heater circuit pass the continuity test?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
A5: POWER CONSUMPTION
NOTE: The seat heater power supply cycles on and off dependant on the seat and cabin temperature and may only
switch on for 5 seconds in 30 seconds
Reconnect the connector

1
Operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient temperature
2
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) using a current
3
clamp
4 Operate the seat heater on full power
5 Use the chart above to calculate typical value (V/R=I) (Volts divided by Resistance equals Current in
Amps)
6 Examples (12 volts / 0.5 ohms =24 amps) (12 volts / 1 ohms = 12 amps) (12 volts / 2 ohms = 6 amps)
Does the seat heater mat consume the correct level of current?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If operation correct, no further action required
No
GO to A6.
A6: RESISTANCE CHECK
NOTES:
Ensure the multimeter used is calibrated and a resistance reading of 0 ohms is shown when the test leads are connected
together, alternately subtract any resistance shown from the result
The seat heater mat circuits should be checked at the seat heater module connector
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and to confirm the total resistance of the circuit the cushion and backrest are
connected in series
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to identify
the terminals
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Using a multimeter, carry out a resistance check of the seat heater mat heater circuit and the NTC
resistor circuit. Record the results
4 Compare the results to the chart (see above)
Are the results within specification at the given ambient temperature? (tolerance +/- 0.5 Ohms)
Yes
Reconnect the connector. Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If customer concern or DTC's return refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and investigate the power and ground supply circuits
No
Replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
Seating - Seats Vehicles With: Climate Controlled Seats
For a detailed description of the seating systems and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10 Seating)

NOTES:
warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
The DTC index containing an actions list is for guidance only any reference to “check and install new blower unit” should
only be carried out following failure confirmation using the pin out diagnostics and/or the over temperature and fluid/air leak
diagnostics contained below. The recording of a DTC does NOT signify a permanently failed unit
The climate system functions in a manner that means any detected error state either intermittent or permanent will shut
down the complete seat climate system until the next ignition cycle, this does not mean that both climate units within the one
seat have failed. This shut down is design intent to protect the system to ensure that the fault detected does not damage the
units, it is possible that both units are functioning correctly and that the fault lies elsewhere within the system. The following
process can be carried out without removing either the seats or the climate units from the vehicle and should correctly identify
any failed units, this should ensure that only failed units are changed under warranty. Any units exhibiting the correct reading
as per process below, should NOT be changed under warranty. If all units have a correct reading then re-confirm customer
symptom, if customer symptom is still present then carry out further system checks
Visual Inspection
Seat heater switch condition and installation Battery condition and state of charge
Fuses
Seat heater switch(es)
Seat heater elements
Seat module(s)
Ignition switch
Battery junction box
Central junction box
LIN circuit
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, carry out normal dealer warranty process, perform on-demand self test, check for
5. Allow 30 mins since the last seat/cooled operation prior to carrying out pin testing detailed below in the section
"Connector and Pin Information"
6. Locate climate seat module, (refer to Electrical Information - Electrical Reference Library, contained in TOPIx) for
guidance on how to gain access to the connector(s)
7. Locate and disconnect relevant connector prior to pin test
8. Using ohm-meter to probe each heat/cooled unit pins (at rear of connector), reading should achieve no greater than 10
ohms after 1 minute (initial fluctuations in readings may occur using ohm-meter, post 1 minute readings will have
stabilized)
Connector and Pin Information
X351 (All Model Years)

Terminal ID A B C D G H J K
Climate Seat Right Right Cushion Right Right Left Cushion Left Cushion Left Left Backrest
Unit Location Cushion Backrest Backrest Backrest
Wiring Colour - GY-BU - BU - Blue BU-BN - WH - White YE-BU - BU-OG - GY-VT - WH-VT -
Left Hand Grey/Blue Blue/Brown Yellow/Blue Blue/Orange Grey/Violet White/Violet
Drive Vehicles
Wiring Colour - YE-BU - BU-OG - GY-VT - WH-VT - GY-BU - BU - Blue BU-BN - WH - White
Right Hand Yellow/Blue Blue/Orange Grey/Violet White/Violet Grey/Blue Blue/Brown
Drive Vehicles
1. If any unit reads greater than 10 ohms, replace only that defective unit
2. If all units read less than 10 ohms but faults are still suspected, do not replace any units. Refer to step 4 below
3. As a final check, when a faulty unit has been identified strip the seat to access unit connector, REFER to: Seats
(501-10, Removal & Installation) and re-check ohm reading to confirm greater than 10 ohms prior to removing unit
4. In cases where the above diagnostic routine does NOT identify a failed unit, please refer to "Over Temperature and
Fluid/Air Leak Diagnostics" below. Also check for any live technical service bulletins referring to the seat climate system
Seat Climate Control Module/Seat Climate Assembly - Further Diagnostics

In the event of suspected climate seat faults use the pinpoint tests detailed below
Connector Checks
First, check the integrity of the three seat climate control module harness connectors:
1. Disconnect each connector
2. Inspect each connector for cracks and breaks, replace as required
3. Check the integrity of connector terminals for bent terminals, backed-out or badly crimped wires. Rectify as required
4. Reconnect all connectors and retest. If seat climate functions are still faulty, note any DTCs that have been logged by
the seat climate control module(s) and refer to the table and pinpoint tests below:
Pinpoint Test
DTC Logged Required
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test A.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings below to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
tests for these DTCs
B10B9-13 Blower Control - Circuit open

B10B9-4B Blower Control - Over temperature
B1157-13 Blower Control B - Circuit open
B1157-4B Blower Control B - Over temperature
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B122A-11 Right Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122A-12 Right Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122B-11 Right Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122B-12 Right Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122C-11 Left Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122C-12 Left Seat Cushion Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
B122D-11 Left Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to ground
B122D-12 Left Seat Back Blower Speed Sensor - Circuit short to battery
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test B.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings below to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open

Pinpoint Test
DTC Logged Required
B120E-19 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B1224-19 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1225-13 Right Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1229-13 Left Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
GO to Pinpoint
B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion - Component or system over temperature Test C.
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion - Component or system over temperature
B122F-98 Right Seat Back - Component or system over temperature
B1230-98 Left Seat Back - Component or system over temperature
B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid leak or seal failure
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid leak or seal failure
GO to Pinpoint
NOTE: Where DTCs are marked in bold, this means that there are two possible diagnostic processes that Test D.
may be applied to resolve these faults. Check the listings above to reference an alternative set of pinpoint
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature

B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B120E-19 Right Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Over temperature
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit open
B1224-19 Left Thermal Electric Device Control - Circuit current above threshold
B1225-13 Right Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1229-13 Left Seat Back Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor - Circuit open
PINPOINT TEST A : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
A1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE
CONNECTOR
1 Uncouple seat harness connector from the seat climate control module (Front seats connector
C3HS03C/Rear seats connector C3HS41C (static seats)or rear seats connector C3HS41F (moveable seats)
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower speed control circuits at the connector
For right-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 3 and 7
For right-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 4 and 7
For left-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 11 and 15
For left-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 12 and 15
Is the resistance between 290 and 420 kilo-ohms?

Yes
No circuit faults present. No further action
No
GO to A2.
A2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER POWER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Locate the appropriate seat backrest/seat cushion climate assembly connector
2 Disconnect connector
3 Check the integrity of connector terminals for bent terminals, backed-out or badly crimped wires. Rectify
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower power circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
2 and 4
Yes
GO to A3.
No
Replace the seat climate assembly
A3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE
ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
1 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower control circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
4 and 7
Yes
No internal circuit faults present. Check for circuit faults in wiring harness between seat climate control
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - THERMAL ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED) DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
B1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE CONNECTOR
C3HS03B/Rear seats connector C3HS41B (static seats)or rear seats connector C3HS41E (moveable seats)
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the connector
For right-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 2 and 3
For right-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 4 and 5
For left-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 7 and 8
For left-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 9 and 10
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 1.1 kilo-ohms? (Note: these values are based on an ambient temperature
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
No
GO to B2.
B2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 5
and 8 (Green and Green wires)
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
GO to B3.
No
B3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the TED supply circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 1 and 3 (Blue and Yellow wires)
for open circuit faults
Is an open-circuit fault present?
Yes
No
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required
PINPOINT TEST C : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AND DUCTING DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
C1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE
CONNECTOR
C3HS03C/Rear seats connector C3HS41C (static seats)or rear seats connector C3HS41F (moveable seats)
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower speed control circuits at the connector
For right-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 3 and 7
For right-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 4 and 7
For left-side seat cushion blower, check resistance at pins 11 and 15
For left-side seat backrest blower, check resistance at pins 12 and 15

Yes
No
GO to C2.
C2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 2 and 4
(Violet and Black wires)
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the resistance of the climate seats blower control circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins
4 and 7 (Black and Purple wires)
Yes
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required. If no harness faults are found, GO to C4.
No
C4: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER DUCTING INSPECTION
1 Check that the ducting is securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device
2 Check the ducting for holes, cuts or tears
Is the ducting undamaged and securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - EXHAUST AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the thermal electric device exhaust vent
Are blockages or restrictions present?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
GO to C6.
C6: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the blower air intake
2 Check that the blower fan movement is not restricted
Are there any air intake blockages or restrictions to the blower fan movement?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
No further action
PINPOINT TEST D : CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - THERMAL ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED) AND DUCTING
DIAGNOSTICS
CONDITIONS
D1: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT TO VEHICLE CONNECTOR
C3HS03B/Rear seats connector C3HS41B (static seats)or rear seats connector C3HS41E (moveable seats)
2 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the connector
For right-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 2 and 3
For right-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 4 and 5
For left-side seat cushion TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 7 and 8
For left-side seat backrest TED sensor circuits, check resistance at pins 9 and 10
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
No
GO to D2.
D2: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SENSOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
3Check the integrity of connector terminals for bent terminals, backed-out or badly crimped wires. Rectify
as required
4 Check the resistance of the climate seats TED sensor circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 5
and 8 (Green and Green wires)
of 22°C/72°F)
Yes
GO to D3.
No
D3: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT CHECKS AT SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
1 Check the TED supply circuits at the climate assembly connector, pins 1 and 3 (Blue and Yellow wires)
for open circuit faults
Is an open-circuit fault present?
Yes
No
module and climate seat assembly and replace as required. If no harness faults are found, GO to D4.
D4: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - TED DUCTING INSPECTION
1 Check that the ducting is securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device
2 Check the ducting for holes, cuts or tears
Is the ducting undamaged and securely attached to the blower and thermal electric device?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
D5: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - EXHAUST AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the thermal electric device exhaust vent
Are blockages or restrictions present?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
GO to D6.
D6: CLIMATE SEATS ASSEMBLY - BLOWER AIRFLOW CHECKS
1 Check for blockages or restrictions at the blower air intake
2 Check that the blower fan movement is not restricted
Are there any air intake blockages or restrictions to the blower fan movement?
Yes
Rectify as required
No
No further action
Over Temperature and Fluid/Air Leak Diagnostics
Check For Air Flow Diagnostic Guidance Notes

Specific DTCs
B120F-98 Once the diagnostic process detailed above has been carried out and it has been identified that
B122E-98 there has not been a failure of any of the climate units, then refer back to the relevant climate
B122F-98 system DTC codes that have been recorded
B1230-98 DTC codes listed that end in 7A or 98 indicate a possible air leak or air flow restriction within the
B1231-7A system
B1232-7A In these circumstances, starting with the seat base check all ducting connections for correct
engagement and inspect ducting for signs of damage which could result in an air leak (for
connection issues re-connect and test system). Only in the event of finding damage to the ducting
of one of the units should the unit be replaced. Note that only the specific unit should be replaced
Due to the design function of the system, both climate units in any one seat operate integrally.
Therefore, if an issue is detected in one of the units then both units are shut down to protect the
system until next ignition cycle. Under these circumstances, only replace the damaged unit and
DO NOT replace both units
DTC Index
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Controlled Seat Module - Front/Rear (SCME/SCMF) (Description and
Operation).
Seating - Seat Smoothing
General Procedures
Check
WARNINGS:
Make sure that the steamer is in the OFF position before connecting or disconnecting from the electrical outlet.
Do not use another high wattage device on the same electrical circuit.
If the use of an extension cord is absolutely necessary, the cord must be rated at a minimum of 10 amps.
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, check the condition of the power cord and the steamer before use.
Make sure that the steamer is disconnected from the electrical outlet before filling or emptying the water reservoir.
The steamer must only be used and placed on its stand on a stable surface.
To prevent injury such as burns, take care whilst using the steamer. Avoid coming into contact with the hot surface of the
steamer and do not direct steam toward any persons.
The steamer must ALWAYS be switched off when not in use or left unattended.
Do not allow the power cord to come into contact with the hot surface of the steamer.
CAUTIONS:
Protect the paintwork during this operation.
Do not use any additives in the steamer. Damage to the steamer or the seat cover can result if used.
1. CAUTIONS:
Steam the leather cushions evenly and progressively. Do not use

excessive force.
Take care not to damage the leather whilst steaming into the
corners.
Do not hold the steamer in one place for longer than 10 seconds,
as this will burn the leather and damage the covers.
Seating - Driver Seat Cushion
Removal
All vehicles
1. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Front Seat Control Switch (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the clips are installed in the

Vehicles with heated front seats

All vehicles
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. NOTES:
Make sure that new hog rings are installed.

13.
14.
15.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings. Do not use
any other tool. The hog rings must be closed to overlap as
illustrated.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the hogrings are installed in the sequence
shown.
Seating - Driver Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
Installation).
3.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. NOTE: Make sure that new hog rings are installed.
13.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
Seating - Front Seat
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup power supply energy,
disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

2.
3.
4. Torque: 40 Nm
5. Torque: 47 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 47 Nm

9.
10. CAUTIONS:

technician.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
All vehicles

2. Refer to: Front Seat Head Restraint (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3.
If equipped.
4.
5.
6. WARNING: The SRS electrical connectors are unique.
DO NOT force, or attempt to connect electrical connectors
to the wrong sockets.

prior to removal.
Torque: 7 Nm
8. WARNING: Make sure that the air bag is correctly

installed in to the fabric chute. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in incorrect operation of the air bag.
CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
aid installation.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
All vehicles
18.
19.

21.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cushion
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
All vehicles

Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
3.
If equipped.
4.
5.
7. Torque: 7 Nm


prior to removal.
aid installation.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
All vehicles
18.


21.
22.
23.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
1. Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.

Installation).
3.
If equipped.
4.
5.
7. Torque: 7 Nm


prior to removal.
aid installation.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

17.
18.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

Seating - Front Seat Bolster Pump
Removal
2.
3. Torque: 47 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 47 Nm

7.
8.
9.
10.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Control Switch
Removal

Torque: 9 Nm
2.
Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
All vehicles
Installation).
3.

NAS vehicles

All vehicles

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the component is aligned as
shown.


Seating - Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
All vehicles

Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Non NAS vehicles
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is aligned

and attached as shown.
NAS vehicles
9.
10.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
component.
Torque: 35 Nm
13. Torque: 28 Nm
14. NOTES:
Use a suitable tool to remove the circlips from the

seat cushion frame bolts.
Note the orientation of the components.
Repeat the procedure for the other side.
15. NOTES:
Torque: 20 Nm
16.
17. NOTES:
Note the orientation of the components.

18.
19. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Recliner Motor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:

2. Refer to: Massaging Lumbar Assembly (501-10 Seating, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Lumbar Assembly (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7.
8. Torque: 9 Nm
9.
10. NOTES:

11.
12. Torque: 35 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Track Motor
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least two
minutes after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental
personal injury.
NOTES:


3.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. NOTE: Install the rear reatining bolt first.
Torque: 28 Nm
7. NOTE: Note the orientation of the electrical connetor
and wiring harness.
8. NOTE: Make a note of the orientation of the front seat

track motor drive pin bar.
Torque: 10 Nm
9. NOTE: Make a note of the orientation of the electrical
connector.
Torque: 1.7 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the front seat track motor is correctly

installed to the front seat track.


Seating - Front Seat Head Restraint
Removal
1.

4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: Support the head restraint motor assembly

while pushing down on the head restraint, you should hear
two audible clicks to secure the head restraint to the motor
assembly. Failure to do follow this instruction may result in
failure of the component.
11.
12. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the wiring harnesses.
14.
15.
16.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Head Restraint Motor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:

2. Refer to: Side Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
3.

aid installation.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Tilt Motor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
1.


5.
6. NOTE: Front seat track shown removed for clarity.
Torque:
Bolt 22 Nm
Screws 10 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Removal

3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10.
aid installation.
12.
13.
14.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Removal
All vehicles
1.


Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
NAS vehicles
11.
All vehicles
12.
13.
14.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Extension Motor
Removal
All vehicles
1.


Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
NAS vehicles
10.
All vehicles
11.
12.
13. Torque: 22 Nm
14. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Folding Tray
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4. Torque: 3 Nm
5.
6.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Folding Tray Hinge
Removal

3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10. Torque: 3 Nm
11.
12.
13.
Installation

Seating - Lumbar Assembly
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cushion (501-10, Removal and

Installation).
3.
4.
Installation

Seating - Massaging Lumbar Assembly
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:

2. Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cushion (501-10, Removal and

Installation).
3.
4. NOTES:

5. NOTES:
6.
7.
Installation

Seating - Memory Seat Position Switch
Removal
2.
3. NOTES:
Install the screws finger tight.
Tighten the upper retaining screw first and then the

lower retaining screw to align the component correctly.
4. NOTE: Make sure that the gap around the component

is even.
Installation

Seating - Passenger Seat Cushion
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).


All vehicles

6.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. NOTES:

14.
15.
16.
All vehicles
17.
Installation

shown.
2. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

shown.


Seating - Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
Installation).
3.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

shown.


Seating - Passenger Seat Cushion
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
The front passenger seat occupant classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No attempt should be made to
replace individual components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Check for correct operation of the front seat after completion of the procedure to make sure that the wiring harness has
not become trapped or stretched.
NOTES:
Note the routing of the seat harness.
All vehicles


Installation).

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

aid installation.
16.


18.
All vehicles
19.
If equipped.
20.
21.
All vehicles

24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
39.
40.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The front passenger seat occupant

classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No
attempt should be made to replace individual components.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
2. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
5. NOTE: Make sure that the front seats are empty during this
process.
If a new service kit is installed configure the occupant

classification sensor using the approved Jaguar diagnostic tool
and clear any DTCs.
If a repair has been carried out reset the occupant classification
sensor using the approved Jaguar diagnostic tool and clear any
DTCs.
Seating - Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
The front passenger seat occupant classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No attempt should be made to
replace individual components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Check for correct operation of the front seat after completion of the procedure to make sure that the wiring harness has
not become trapped or stretched.
NOTES:
Note the routing of the seat harness.

Installation).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
aid installation.
15.
17.
18.
If equipped.
19.
20.

23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
31.
32.
33.
34.
36.
37.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The front passenger seat occupant

classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No
attempt should be made to replace individual components.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
2. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
5. NOTE: Make sure that the front seats are empty during this
process.
If a new service kit is installed configure the occupant

classification sensor using the approved Jaguar diagnostic tool
and clear any DTCs.
If a repair has been carried out reset the occupant classification
sensor using the approved Jaguar diagnostic tool and clear any
DTCs.
Seating - Rear Seat Armrest
Removal
All vehicles
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All vehicles
6.
7.
8. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest
Removal
All vehicles
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All vehicles

aid installation.
7.
8.
9.
10. NOTE: Repeat the procedure for the other side.

11.
12.
13.
14. Torque: 8 Nm
15.
16.
17.
18.
Vehicles with heated rear seat
19.
All vehicles

Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
2. NOTES:
Make sure that the hogrings are installed in the sequence shown.


installed.

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Installation

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Cover
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All vehicles

aid installation.
7.
8.
9.

11.
12.
13.
14. Torque: 8 Nm
15.
16.
17.
18.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTES:


installed.

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Removal
All vehicles
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All vehicles

aid installation.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
2. NOTES:

installed.

Seating - Rear Seat Control Switch
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Vehicles with heated rear seat
9. NOTES:

Installation 1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.
Seating - Rear Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4. NOTES:

5.

Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

Seating - Rear Seat Massaging Lumbar Assembly
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation

installed.

Seating - Rear Seat Recliner Motor
Removal

2.
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Installation
1. NOTES:
illustrated.
installed.

Seating - Seat Base
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:
All vehicles

2. Refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal
and Installation).
Installation).
5.
6.
7.

Non NAS vehicles
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is aligned

and attached as shown.
NAS vehicles
10.
All vehicles
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
NAS vehicles
20.
All vehicles
21.
22. Torque: 10 Nm
component.
Torque: 35 Nm
25.
26.
27.
28.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms -
Front door window glass regulator retaining screws to body 7 5 62
Front door window glass regulator motor retaining screw to panel 1.1 1 18
Front door weather shield retaining screws to body 2.2 1.5 19.5
Front door outer waist seal retaining screw 3 2.2 26.6
Rear door window glass regulator retaining screws to body 7 5 62
Rear door window glass regulator motor retaining screw to panel 1.1 1 18
Rear door weather shield retaining screws to body 2.2 1.5 19.5
Rear door outer waist seal retaining screws 3 2.2 26.6
Rear door glass run retaining nuts 4 3 35
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
For a detailed description of the glass, frames and mechanisms systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-11)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation),

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation),
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Window control switches condition and installation Fuses

Window motors/regulators Harnesses and connectors
Window channels/runners Window lift relay
Window cables Window control switches
Window seals Window motors
the next step.
Manual Sunblind Initialization Routine

Where a sunblind module has been replaced, there is an initialization routine available on the diagnostic tool. This requires a
new module to be initially installed in the fully down position and running of the "Initialize Specified Function/Feature"
diagnostic routine on the manufacturer approved diagnostic tool. Alternatively, the sunblind may be initialized manually by
following the procedures described below:
1. Raise the sunblind to top (fully retracted) position
2. Press and hold the window 'down' switch for 15 seconds (the sunblind will go down and will then be in initialization
mode)
3. Release window switch and press window 'down' switch again to drive blind fully into lower block
4. Activate window switch 'up' until the sunblind reaches the top (fully retracted) position and release switch
5. The sunblind is now initialized and should have 'one-touch' functionality
Symptom Chart

Window(s) Check the fuses. Check the suspect window operation from the individual door
inoperative Fuse(s) switch and from the driver door master switch (it is unlikely that both switches
Switch fault would fail at the same time, so if the window is inoperative from either switch,
Front switch suspect a fault other than a switch). If the inoperative window is a rear unit,
isolator fault check the function of the isolator at the master switch.
Motor/Regulator
fault
Channel/Runner
fault
Cable fault
Harness fault
Window(s) If the battery has been disconnected, carry out the initialization procedure. Refer
'one-shot' Window motor to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check the switch function after
function initialization initialization.
inoperative required
Switch fault
Window Regulator Diagnostic
This diagnostic procedure is to be carried out if the window glass, - Closes to the top, then reopens Bounce back - Does not
fully close to the top of the door frame - The One touch function is disabled
PINPOINT TEST A : DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
CONDITIONS
A1: DOOR WINDOW GLASS - SEAL CONDITION / FOREIGN MATERIAL
NOTE: To check that the door window glass seal is free from foreign material and has no sign of damage and is not worn
in the door channels
1 Carry out visual inspection for:
Foreign material
Obstruction
Signs of damage or wear to door window glass seal
Is the door window glass seal free from foreign material, damage and wear?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Remove any foreign material or were necessary install new door window glass seal. Test the system for
correct operation
A2: DOOR WINDOW GLASS - SEAL INSTALLATION
NOTE: To check that the door window glass seal is installed correctly
Check that the door window glass seal is installed correctly, ensure that it is fully installed into the
1
corner areas
Is the door window glass seal installed correctly?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
Correctly install the door window glass seal. Test the system for correct operation
A3: DOOR WINDOW GLASS - SECURITY
NOTE: To check the door window glass is secure
1 Check if the door glass installed correctly and secured to the door window regulator
Is the door window glass correctly installed and secure?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Adjust the door window glass referring to the door glass installation process REFER to: (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms)
Front Door Window Glass (Removal and Installation),
Rear Door Window Glass (Removal and Installation).
Test the system for correct operation
A4: DOOR WINDOW GLASS - RESET PROCEDURE
1 Disconnect vehicle battery, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then reconnect the battery
2 For vehicles between VIN V03480 and V18030, the latest version of the diagnostic software must be
loaded. SDD must be loaded with SDD DVD126_V6.03 and Calibration File 77 (or later)
3 With the vehicle engine running, initialize the window motors,
REFER to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
Procedures).
4 Cycle the glass 20 times, using the ‘one–touch’ function to open and close the window
5 NOTE: The window regulator motor may thermally cut out after too many operations, if this occurs wait
30 seconds before continuing
Is window closing correctly and the One-touch function operational?
Yes
No further action requires
No
Replace the front door window regulator
REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
, or rear door window regulator
REFER to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
Test the system for correct operation
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00 General Information,
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Fixed Window Glass
For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
Refer to Section 100-00 General Information for window glass health and safety precautions.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Physical damage to the windshield
the next step
Warranty Repairs
NOTES:
The warranty period for the windshield is twelve months with the exception of delamination and electrical faults.
Warranty repairs should be completed using genuine parts, in accordance with the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Manual.
1. Draw a line around the windshield damage using a marker pen.
2. Photograph the entire windshield. If the damage extends behind any trim, remove the trim and take further
photographs.
3. Photograph the trademark logo and code to validate the windshield as factory fitment.
Symptom Chart

Scratches
Debris trapped under a wiper blade GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Foreign object damage
Fouling by trim
Chips
Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Cracks
Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Impact damage during assembly
Delamination
Manufacturing defect GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : SCRATCH TESTS

A1: SCRATCH TEST 1
NOTE: A scratch will usually be regular in shape, following the line of the object that caused it.
1 Probe using the tip of a pencil to identify a groove in the windshield surface.
Is there a groove?
Yes
Windshield scratched. GO to A2.
No
Defect not valid.
A2: SCRATCH TEST 2
1 Check for trim, body panels, or foreign objects that may have caused the scratch.
Was the scratch caused by a foreign object?
Yes
The damage is not due to a defect or an assembly error.
No
Rectify as appropriate.
PINPOINT TEST B : CHIP TESTS

B1: CHIP TEST 1
NOTE: Impact damage may cause a crack to form.
1 Assess the damage by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the damaged area rough (indicating a breach of the windshield surface)?
Yes
Damage caused by the impact of a foreign object. Not a manufacturing defect.
No
Install a new windshield.
PINPOINT TEST C : CRACK TESTS

C1: CRACK TEST 1
NOTE: A crack will be detectable as a step in the glass.
1 Confirm the presence of a crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the windshield cracked?
Yes
Windshield cracked. GO to C2.
No
Windshield not cracked. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
C2: CRACK TEST 2
NOTE: Multiple cracks will radiate out from the source.
1 Assess the source of the crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is there evidence of impact damage being the source of the crack?
Yes
No

PINPOINT TEST D : DELAMINATION TESTS

D1: DELAMINATION TEST 1
1 Visually assess the windshield for delamination.
Have the glass laminates separated?

Yes
No
No further action.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Motor Initialization
General Procedures
NOTES:
Make sure that the vehicle battery is fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
After the battery has been disconnected or a new window regulator and motor or door module has been installed, it is
necessary to initialize each door window motor separately to operate the one-touch and anti-trap function.
In addition to this manual procedure, the approved diagnostic tool can also be used to initialize the door window motor.
1. Start the engine.
2. Operate the window control switch until the door window glass is in the
fully closed position, continue to operate the window control switch for a
further two seconds.
3. Release the window control switch.
4. Operate the window control switch in the closed position and continue to
operate the window control switch for a further two seconds.
5. Operate the window control switch until the door window glass is in the
fully open position (one-touch down).
6. NOTES:
If the door window motor initialization has been completed

correctly, when the window control switch is operated, the door window
glass should move to the fully closed position (one-touch up)
automatically.
If the door window glass does not fully close automatically

(one-touch up), repeat the complete procedure.
Operate the window control switch once to the close position.

If multiple attempts have failed to initialize the door window
motor, refer the diagnosis and testing procedure.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms (501-11, Diagnosis and Testing).
7. Repeat the door window motor initialization for each door window motor.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Glass Roof Panel Lubrication
General Procedures
Check
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the vehicle is clean and dry prior to commencing this procedure.
Make sure that the vehicle is kept in a dry environment and is not washed within 24 hours of completing this
procedure, failure to follow this instruction will prevent the slip coat from curing correctly.
NOTE: The lubricant used in this procedure (LIP AC612/21) is part of the Squeaks & Rattles Kit. For more
information on the Squeaks & Rattles Kit, safety data sheets and details of how to order the kit or parts thereof, please
visit (www.squeaksandrattles.info).
1. Open the roof opening panel glass to the full tilt position.
2. Insert a suitable applicator card in to the position shown at

the left hand front corner of the rear glass roof panel.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the two areas that are
cleaned with the applicator card overlap at the centre of the
vehicle.
Starting at position 1 in the left hand front corner of

the rear glass roof panel, carefully slide the
applicator card around the rear glass roof panel
through position 2 and past the centre point of the
vehicle.
Remove and clean the applicator card.
Starting at position 3 in the right hand front corner
of the rear glass roof panel, carefully slide the
applicator card around the rear glass roof panel
through position 4 and past the centre point of the
vehicle.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the bottle is well shaken

before applying the fluid to the applicator card.
Insert a suitable applicator card in to the position

shown at the left hand front corner of the rear glass
roof panel.
Spray a sufficient amount of LIP AC612/21 fluid on
to the applicator card until the fluid runs between
the rear glass fixed panel and the seal.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the applicator card does not
slip from under the rear glass roof panel as the card is
rotated around the corners.
Carefully slide the applicator card along the edge of

the rear fixed glass panel to position 2.
Slide the applicator card backwards and forwards
from position 1 to 2 to make sure that a sufficient
amount of fluid is applied to the rear fixed glass
panel.
If required, apply more fluid to the applicator card
and repeat the above step.

At the position 2, spray a sufficient amount of LIP

AC612/21 fluid on to the applicator card until the
fluid runs between the rear glass fixed panel and
the seal.
Rotate the applicator card backwards and forwards 5
times at the corner of the rear fixed glass panel.
Carefully slide the applicator card along the edge of

the rear fixed glass panel from position 2 past the
centre of the vehicle.
If required, apply more fluid to the applicator card
and repeat the above step.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the other side of the vehicle.
9. Wipe away any excess fluid.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Driver Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Glass
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Glass Roof Panel
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect the interior components when removing body glass.
Measure all gaps between the glass roof panels before prior to removal to help aid installation.
NOTE: The cutting blades used in this procedure are from the standard BTB glass removal kit.
2. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,
3.
Prepare the PU adhesive in accordance with the instructions
included with the PU adhesive kit.
4. CAUTION: Use suitable tape to protect the roof

opening panel weather strip.
5. CAUTION: A metal strip should be installed between
the bottom of the blade and the taped-down components.
This will reduce friction and allow the blade to cut easier.
Use a WK24ZS blade, cutting with the flat side

against the body.

Use a WK2S blade, cutting with the flat side against

the body. Use a WK11DW5 controller arm, set to
75mm to control the cutting depth.

the body. Use a WK11DW5 controller arm, the depth
of the cut will vary from 75mm to 160mm as the
glass widens towards the centre.
8.
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove the tape.

2. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Correct preparation of body apertures “post painting”

to ensure satisfactory glass adhesion, must be carried out
in line with industry practise.
Prepare the window glass, window glass flange and

trimmed PU adhesive in accordance with the
instructions included with the PU adhesive kit.
3. CAUTION: Touching the adhesive surface will impair

rebonding.
NOTE: Install new spacers.
4.
Make sure the component is aligned with the
measurements taken prior to removal. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the
glass panels during operation of the roof opening
panel.
Use suitable weights or straps, apply a downward
pressure to the glass to achieve the correct
curvature.
Allow up to 1 hour, depending on temperature and
humidity, to allow the adhesive to set before
continuing with the procedure.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that no excess sealant residue is
evident.
If water is used as a means for the leak check, then

allow sealant to dry before testing.
Spray water around the windshield glass, mark any
area that leaks. Dry the windshield glass and
sealant before applying additional sealant.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Special Tool(s)
501-114
Release Lever, Door Glass
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3. Torque: 1.1 Nm
4. Torque: 2.2 Nm
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6.
7. WARNING: Do not allow the glass to drop.

8. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass Roof Panel Blind Drive Assembly
Removal
1. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Blind (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal
and Installation).

located.
NOTES:
Follow the animation to make sure the roof opening

panel blind is removed and installed correctly from and to
the guides.
Roof opening panel blind shown, glass roof panel blind

similar.
Release the glass roof panel blind

3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the roof opening panel blind is not

lowered by more than 50 mm at one end whilst the other
end is still located in to the drive mechanism.
Make sure that a firm pressure is applied to the roof

opening panel blind so that tension is maintained until the
retaining clip is correctly located.
NOTE: Roof opening panel blind shown, glass roof

panel blind similar.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the clip is correctly located.
If the correct clip is not available, make sure that a

suitable hardened pin is used such as a drill bit, do not use
a paperclip.

released from the drive mechanism until the clip has been
correctly located.


5. CAUTION: Note the installed position of the
component prior to removal.
NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on the front

and rear blind feet.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. NOTES:
Long wheel base shown, short wheel base similar.
Long wheel base vehicle shown with 2 fixings, some

long wheel base vehicles will have 1 fixing.
Short wheelbase
13. CAUTION: Note the orientation of the washers prior to

removal.
NOTE: Remove and discard the washers.
Long wheelbase

removal.
NOTES:

long wheel base vehicles will have 4 fixings.
Remove and discard the washers.

All vehicles
15.
16. NOTE: Note the installed position of the blind drive

mechanism cables during removal.
17. NOTE: Note the orientation of the blind drive

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the blind drive mechanism

cables are in the correct orientation before installing the
rear guide.
Torque: 4 Nm

rear guide.

cables are correctly aligned to the installed position.
4. Slide the washer in from the centre of the vehicle until it is
aligned with the threaded hole.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the thread is free from foreign material

and debris
Do not fully tighten the Torx bolt at this stage.

Long wheelbase
6. NOTE: Make sure that an adhesive pad is installed

above the front fixing hole.
If not already installed, install an adhesive pad above the

front fixing hole.
All vehicles
7. CAUTION: Do not install the front Torx bolt on long

wheel base vehicles.
NOTE: Long wheel base shown, short wheel base

similar.
Slide the washer in from the centre of the vehicle until it is

8. CAUTIONS:

and debris

similar.
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the roof rail is correctly

aligned.
NOTE: Short wheel base shown, long wheel base

similar.
Torque: 4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11.
12. CAUTION: Do not directly force the blind feet in to the
installed position. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
13. NOTES:
An audible click can be heard when the component is

correctly located.
The procedure must be carried out on the front and

rear blind feet.
1. Hold the blind foot at an angle and slide it along the

rail until contact is made with the drive mechanism.
2. Rotate the blind foot in to the installed position.
14. CAUTION: Make sure that the blind feet for each blind
are positioned at an equal distance from the center of the
vehicle.

Slide the blind foot along the guide until it is level with the
foot on the other side of the vehicle.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that a firm pressure is applied to the glass

roof panel blind so that tension is maintained until the
glass roof opening blind is correctly located.
Make sure that the glass roof panel blind is not


Remove the retaining clip.

20. CAUTIONS:




located.
NOTES:

the guides.

similar.
Secure the glass roof panel blind
and Installation).
This section contains no data
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Passenger Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Glass
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
2. Torque: 5 Nm
3.
4.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Removal
NOTES:
2.
3. Torque: 1.1 Nm
4. Torque: 2.2 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7.
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Glass Roof Panel
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTE: The cutting blades used in this procedure are from the standard BTB glass removal kit.
and Installation).

and Installation).

9. Torque: 2 Nm
10.
11.
12.

prior to removal.
NOTES:
Torque: 2 Nm
prior to removal.
NOTES:
Torque: 2 Nm
15.

technician.
technician.

prior to removal.
www.JagDocs.com

prior to removal.
NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.

damage.

access.
23.
24.

26. CAUTION: Using suitable tape, protect the roof
opening panel bilnd motor wiring harness.


the body.

the body, a WK1X blade may be needed for long
wheelbase vehicles.
29. CAUTION: Using cheese wire to carry out this

operation will potentially cause damage to the glass plastic
lamination. A new component must be installed if the glass
plastic lamination is damaged.
30.
Installation

2. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.



rebonding.

4.
panel.
curvature of the glass.
Allow up to 1 hour, depending on temperature and
humidity, to allow the adhesive to set before
continuing with the procedure.

6.

evident.


damage.
10. NOTES:



technician.
CAUTION: Make sure that these components are

technician.
15.
16. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
17. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
18.
19.
20.
21. Torque: 2 Nm

and Installation).
and Installation).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window Glass
Removal
2.

4.
5. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding components.

6.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.


rebonding.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that equal pressure is applied to

the full length of the component.
NOTE: Align to the orientation noted on removal.
Install the rear quarter window glass.

If the ambient temperature falls below 10 degrees
C, apply warm air (25 degrees C) continuously for 15
minutes.
evident.

5.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Window Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently develop into
cracks.
NOTES:
The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Windshield replacement kit l
Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:

technician.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.



rebonding.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

Make sure that equal pressure is applied to the full

length of the component.
With assistance, install and align the windshield

glass.
minutes.

evident.

5.
6.
7.
8.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently develop into
cracks.
NOTES:
The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Windshield replacement kit l
Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
Installation).
3. Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

technician.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.



rebonding.
Modify the nozzle to achieve a bead section in the shape of

a right angle triangle with a base of 8 mm and a vertical
height of 12 mm.
technician.
CAUTIONS:

Make sure that equal pressure is applied to the full

length of the component.
With assistance, install and align the windshield

glass.
minutes.
4.

evident.

6.
7.
8. Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
Instrument Panel and Console -
Instrument panel upper section retaining bolts 9 7 80
Instrument panel upper section retaining screws 4 - 35
Instrument panel center reinforcement section retaining bolts 9 7 80
Instrument panel lower cover retaining bolts 9 7 80
Instrument panel lower cover retaining screws 2.5 - 22
Floor console retaining nuts 5 - 44
Floor console retaining screws 5 - 44
Floor console side trim panel retaining screws 2.5 - 22
Floor console double cup holder retaining screws 4 - 35
Transmission shift control module retaining screws 4 - 35
Audio and climate control assembly retaining screws 4 - 35
Glove compartment retaining bolts 9 7 80
Glove compartment retaining screws 2.5 - 22
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console
Removal
2.
3. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
4. Torque: 4 Nm
5.
6. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of the
component.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
8. Torque: 4 Nm
9. Torque: 4 Nm
10.
11.

13.
14.
15. CAUTIONS:
Apply the parking brake, chock the wheels and ensure that all
personnel are clear of the vehicle before carrying out the following
procedure.
Torque: 1 Nm
16.
17.
Torque: 5 Nm
19. Torque: 5 Nm
20. NOTE:
Do not
disassemble
further if
the
component
is removed
for access
only.
21. Torque: 5 Nm
22. Torque: 1 Nm
23.
24.
25.
26. Torque: 1 Nm
27. Torque: 1 Nm
28. Torque: 1 Nm
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Double Cup Holder
Removal

the component.
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3.
the component.

Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Side Trim Panel
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:

component.
Protect the surrounding trim from damage when

changing the component.
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3.
the component.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
6.
7. NOTES:

Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Stowage Compartment Lid
Latch
Removal

the component.
3. Torque: 4 Nm
4.
the component.
6.
7.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Glove Compartment
Removal
1.
the component.
3.
4.

the component.
6. Torque: 2 Nm
7.
9.
10. CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Torque: 2.5 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 2.5 Nm

13.
14. NOTES:



Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement
Removal
2. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Lower Section
Removal
1. Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and

clarity.
Torque: 2 Nm

clarity.
4. Torque: 2.5 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 2.5 Nm
7.
8. Torque: 9 Nm
10. Torque: 2 Nm
11.
Installation
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Upper Section
Special Tool(s)
JLR-412-147
Remover, Register
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least one minute after
disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any
component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module. Failure to follow this
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the supplemental restraint
system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with the bag and trim
cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches which have been
ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component. Failure to follow this
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover and air bags. Do not
for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument panel. Install a new component. Failure to
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
2. Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Glove Compartment (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
5. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Removal and Installation).
6. Refer to: Instrument Panel Lower Section (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,
7. Fully extend the steering column for access.

10.
11. Torque: 2.5 Nm
12. Torque: 2.5 Nm

13. CAUTIONS:
Before inserting the special tool, make sure that the register is fully
open.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the internal components of

the center registers.
Repeat for the other centre register secured to the instrument panel.
To install the register, align the securing clips and push the register
into the housing until firmly secured in it's seated position.
During removal, care must be taken not to damage the instrument

panel covering with the register clips.
14.
15. Torque: 2.5 Nm
16. Torque: 2.5 Nm
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Torque: 9 Nm
23. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
25. Torque: 9 Nm
26. Torque: 4 Nm
27. Torque: 4 Nm
28. Torque: 9 Nm
29. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the
Torque: 4 Nm
30.
31. Torque: 2.5 Nm

32. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior to
removal.
33. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the
Torque: 9 Nm
34.
35.
36. CAUTIONS:
Note
the fitted
position of
the
component
prior to
removal.
Take
extra care
not to
damage
the edges
of the
component.
NOTES:
This
step
requires
the aid of
another
technician.
LHD
illustration
shown,
RHD is
similar.

access only.
38. Torque: 2.5 Nm
39.
40. Torque: 2.5 Nm

41. Torque: 2.5 Nm
42.
43. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior to

removal.
44.
45. CAUTIONS:
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the seal register and running
surface.
Repeat for each of the registers secured to the instrument panel.
Before inserting the special tool, make sure that the register is fully
open.
To install the register, align the securing clips and push the register
into the housing until firmly secured in it's seated position.
During removal, care must be taken not to damage the instrument

panel covering with the register clips.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the


46. Torque: 2.5 Nm
47. Torque: 4.5 Nm
Torque: 2.5 Nm
49. Torque: 2.5 Nm

50. Torque: 2.5 Nm
51. Torque: 2.5 Nm
52.
53.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Overhead Console
Removal
NOTES:

the component.
2.

harnesses.
Take precautions to avoid any electrostatic charging,

which could damage this comopnent.
5.

harnesses.
7.
8.
Installation

harnesses.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems -
Front and rear door latch retaining screw 7 5 62
Front and rear exterior door handle / door lock captive retaining screw 4 3 36
Front and rear exterior door handle seperate retaining screw 3 2.2 28
Front and rear door striker retaining screw 25 18 221
Interior door handle retaining screw 1.3 - 11.5
Hood latch reataining screw 10 8 88
Hood striker retaining screw 22 17 195
Trunk latch retaining screw 20 15 177
Trunk striker retaining screw 22 17 195
Trunk latch actuator retaining screws 7 5 28
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems - Component Location
Locks and Latches – Component Location
Item Description
1 RH front door - closing motor
2 RH front door handles, latch and motor
3 RH rear door - closing motor
4 RH rear door handles, latch and motor
5 Fuel filler door and motor
6 Luggage compartment lid – closing motor
7 Luggage compartment lid – striker and latch assembly
8 LH rear door handles, latch and motor
9 LH rear door - closing motor
10 Emergency key barrel – LH front door only
11 LH front door handles, latch and motor
12 LH front door – closing motor
13 Engine compartment lid – release lever and cable
14 Engine compartment lid - striker
15 Engine compartment lid – safety hook and guide
Central Locking – Component Location
Item Description
2 RH front door handles, latch, motor and closing motor
4 RH rear door handles, latch, motor and closing motor
7 LH (left-hand) rear door handles, latch, motor and closing motor
10 LH front door handles, latch, motor and closing motor
11 KVM (Keyless Vehicle Module)
Passive Entry – Component Location
Item Description
1 Antenna – located in center console (front)
3 RH front antenna – integral to handle
4 RH rear antenna – integral to handle
6 Antenna – located below rear parcel shelf
www.JagDocs.com
7 Antenna – located behind rear bumper cover
8 CJB
9 LH rear antenna – integral to handle
10 LH front antenna – integral to handle
11 Antenna – located in center console (rear)
Entry Systems - Overview
Overview
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated central locking system controls the locking and
unlocking of the door and luggage compartment latches. A radio frequency Smart Key allows the vehicle to be locked and
unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset buttons. Two levels of central locking system are available:
remote central locking, and an

optional passive entry system.
The remote central locking system provides locking and unlocking of the vehicle from inside and outside of the vehicle. The
system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key, which transmits radio frequency signals to the central locking, radio
frequency receiver.
The closing mechanism of the doors is by an electronic latch with the addition of a soft-closing motor. The closing motor pulls
the latch closed for the last 6 mm of travel.
On vehicles fitted with the optional passive entry system, the vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key or pressing
buttons on the Smart Key. The passive entry system functions when the Smart Key is within a particular distance of the
vehicle.
Entry Systems - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN; O = LIN Bus
Central Locking Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
3 Fuel filler door and motor
4 Door module – driver door
5 Door module – passenger front door
6 Closing motor – driver door
7 Door latch – driver door
8 Door ajar switch – driver door
9 Door module – passenger rear door
10 Door latch - passenger rear door
11 Door ajar switch – passenger rear door
12 Closing motor – passenger rear door
13 Door latch – passenger rear door
15 Door module - passenger rear door
19 Door latch – passenger rear door
Passive Entry Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB
6 Antenna – located in center console - front
7 Antenna – located in center console - rear
8 Antenna – located below rear parcel shelf
9 Antenna – located behind rear bumper cover
10 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - RH front
11 Door latch and fast latch - RH front
12 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - RH rear
13 Door latch and fast latch - RH rear
14 Door latch and fast latch - LH rear
15 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - LH rear
16 Door latch and fast latch - LH front
17 Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna - LH front
System Operation
System Operation
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated central locking system controls the locking and
unlocking of the door and luggage compartment latches. A radio frequency Smart Key allows the vehicle to be locked and
unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset buttons. Two levels of central locking system are available: remote central
locking and an optional passive entry system.
The passive entry and associated passive start system allows the driver to unlock and start the vehicle without using a vehicle
key in a door-lock or ignition switch. The passive entry system is an optional fitment while the passive start system is a
standard fitment on all vehicles. The passive start system is combined with the passive anti-theft immobilization system.
Emergency access to the vehicle is provided by a concealed key barrel located in the front left-hand door handle. The key barrel
is concealed by a plastic cover which can be removed by inserting the blade of the emergency key into a slot in the cover. The
removable emergency key blade is located in the Smart Key. There is no emergency unlocking key aperture in the luggage
compartment lid.
Operation of the key barrel unlocks the vehicle but does not disarm the alarm system. Locking and unlocking conditions using
the emergency key in the door key barrel are:
If the alarm is not armed the vehicle can be centrally unlocked.

If the alarm is armed the door only can be opened and the alarm will be triggered.
The vehicle cannot be double locked or the alarm system armed using the emergency key.
The vehicle can be centrally locked and unlocked from inside using the interior handle release levers on the front doors only.
The driver can select locking options, single point entry or drive away locking for example, from a menu available on the touch
screen.
Central Locking – Radio Frequency Remote System

The radio frequency central locking system provides locking and unlocking from inside the vehicle and outside within a 20
meter range. The system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key, which transmits radio frequency signals to the radio
frequency receiver.
Additional buttons on the Smart Key provide for the convenience operation of the headlamp delay, panic alarm and luggage
compartment lid release.
Refer to: Body Closures (501-03 Body Closures, Description and Operation).
Depending on vehicle market functions offered by the Jaguar Smart Key include:
Double locking the doors from outside the vehicle if the lock button on the Smart Key is pressed twice within 3 seconds.
Drive-away locking - switched on or off by the customer using the vehicle security settings menu available on the touch
screen.
Single or two stage unlocking - single-stage unlocking unlocks all doors with a single press; two-stage unlocking
unlocks the driver's door only with a single press and all other doors with a second press.
Changing the unlocking mode between single stage and two stage also affects the unlocking mode for passive entry (see
below). The single or two-stage unlocking function can be switched on or off, as can remote global open or close for the
electric windows using the vehicle security settings menu available on the touch screen.
Actuated from the front door levers only, the doors can be locked from inside the vehicle by pressing the interior door release
levers inwards and unlocked by pulling the levers. The Touch-screen incorporates a valet mode feature which inhibits access to
the boot and the glove box while also limiting the use of the Touch-screen.
On leaving the vehicle with passive entry the user must press an external button on the door handle once to centrally lock the
vehicle or twice within 3 seconds to double lock. The user has a further 3 seconds to pull the door handle to check the vehicle
is locked without the Jaguar Smart Key proximity function unlocking the door again. Pulling the handle after the 3 seconds has
lapsed will unlock the door as normal.
If any aperture is not fully closed when the locking process is initiated, either passively or by Jaguar Smart Key transmitter, the
locking function will be inhibited and an audible error indication will be given. If the ignition is left on an audible warning will
be given if the user exits the vehicle, if the user attempts to lock the vehicle (ignition on), another audible indication will be
given, and the locking function will be inhibited.
If the door is closed without locking and no key left in the car the ignition will be switched off immediately. If the ignition is
left on at any time without starting the vehicle it will switch off automatically after 60 minutes.
If the door is opened by the mechanical key, the full alarm system will sound until the user enters the vehicle and presses
either the start/stop button, remote unlock button, or places the Jaguar Smart Key next to the IAU (immobilizer antenna unit)
whilst pressing the start/stop button.
The fuel filler flap is locked by the global locking function. It is not locked by drive-away locking, or if doors are locked from
inside the vehicle using the handles.
Passive Entry
On vehicles fitted with the optional passive entry system, the vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key blade or
pressing buttons on the Smart Key. The Smart Key operates the passive entry system in addition to the passive start system.
The passive entry system is controlled by the keyless vehicle module and low frequency antennas strategically situated within
the vehicle; including one in each door handle. When in the vehicle the antennas ensure the Jaguar Smart Key is always within
the active transmission zone of the antennas, wherever the key is placed inside the vehicle. For this reason the orientation
and positioning of the antennas is critical to the correct functioning of the system.
When a vehicle door handle is pulled to the first five-percent of its travel and the Smart Key is within one meter of the handle;
the Smart Key receives the low-frequency signal transmitted from the keyless vehicle module.
The Smart Key responds with a radio frequency transmission of its authorization code. The radio frequency signal is received by
the radio-frequency receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module which checks and approves the code as valid.
Once the handle is pulled to eighty percent of its travel the keyless vehicle module then drives the fast latch directly to allow
the door to be opened. The keyless vehicle module also transmits an unlock request to the CJB (central junction box). The CJB
then passes an unlock request to the door modules.
Locking of the vehicle is performed by pressing one of the buttons located on each exterior door handle, with the Smart Key
within a one meter range of the vehicle. When the door handle button is pressed, the keyless vehicle module transmits a
low-frequency signal via the low-frequency handle antenna to the Smart Key. The Smart Key transmits a radio frequency signal
which is verified by the keyless vehicle module and allows the doors to be locked or double locked and the alarm system to be
armed.
To double lock the vehicle, the button on the exterior door handle must be pressed twice within three seconds, with the Smart
Key within one meter range of the vehicle. If a door, engine-compartment lid or the luggage compartment lid is ajar when an
attempt to lock the vehicle is made, an error tone is emitted and no locking action will occur.
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
When unlocking the vehicle using passive entry with single stage unlocking selected and a valid Jaguar Smart key present,
pulling the door handle will centrally unlock the vehicle. When the vehicle is configured for two stage unlocking and the drivers
door handle is pulled with a valid smart key present only the drivers door will unlock, however if a passenger door handle is
pulled with a valid smart key present the vehicle will centrally unlock. If the boot is unlocked and opened with a valid smart
key present all the doors remain locked.
Provided the key is within range of the desired point of entry, approximately one meter from vehicle door or luggage
compartment lid, it need only be on the driver's person, for example in a pocket, handbag, or briefcase to provide access to the
vehicle. The driver has to pull the door handle, or press the luggage compartment lid release button and the vehicle then
unlocks according to the current security setting; either single-stage or two-stage entry.
NOTE: Passive unlocking of the luggage compartment lid does not unlock the rest of the vehicle.
Engine Compartment Lid Latches
Two engine-compartment lid latches are located on the front crossmember. An engine-compartment lid release lever is located
below the instrument panel on the left-hand 'A' pillar and is connected with a cable to the latches. An engine-compartment lid
ajar switch is integrated in the engine-compartment lid latch.
Door Latches
The door latches are located at the rear of each door and engage with a striker on the adjacent pillar. Each door latch motor
assembly contains micro-switches for lock, unlock and door ajar. Motors provide for the central door locking and the double
locking feature. The electrical control for the door latch components is provided by the CJB via the driver's and passenger door
modules.
When the latch engages with the striker plate a signal transmitted from the latch actuator mechanism to the door module
confirms the latch is engaged. The module activates the closing motor to pull the latch closed through the last 6 mm of travel.
A mechanical cable connection between the motor and latch assembly is used to complete the closing process.
The interior door handles are connected by a cable to the latch release mechanisms. The interior door handles also incorporate
a locking facility to allow the doors to be locked from inside the vehicle when all the doors are closed. If a door is ajar the
locking feature is inhibited.
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch

Luggage compartment lid; refer to:
Refer to: Body Closures (501-03 Body Closures, Description and Operation).
(501-03 Body Closures, Luggage Compartment Lid, Description and Operation).
Fuel Filler Door

The fuel filler door is electrically locked by a motor located on the fuel door housing. The filler flap will only be locked closed
when the vehicle is centrally locked.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems
For a detailed description of the locks, latches and entry systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14, Description and
Operation).
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern, to be sure the correct issue is investigated
Visual Inspection
Incorrectly aligned door(s), hood or tailgate Fuses

Fuel filler door lock actuator Wiring harness
Hood release handle Wiring connector(s)
Hood release cables Door lock actuator(s)
Hood latch(es) Remote transmitter (key-fob or smart key)
Exterior door handle(s) Central locking switches
Interior door handle(s) Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Cable(s) Radio frequency (RF) receiver
Tailgate release switch Central junction box (CJB)
Rear window release switch Loose or corroded connections
the next step
Symptom Chart
NOTE: Complete the diagnostic steps below to confirm any concern prior to replacing any component

The message center indicates that the
hood, the luggage compartment is Incorrect striker Check/adjust the strikers as
open when it appears to be closed alignment/adjustment necessary
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to Check for DTCs indicating an ajar
Vehicle indicates a miss-lock when the ground switch fault. Refer to the DTC index
hood, luggage compartment appear to Ajar switch failure
be closed
Fuel flap does not lock/unlock
Fuel flap cable detached from body Check the condition and installation
Fuel flap actuator detached from of the fuel flap cable
mounting bracket Check the security of the fuel flap
Fuel flap actuator disconnected actuator and bracket
Fuel flap actuator failure Check the security of the actuator
electrical connector
Check for DTCs indicating a fuel flap
actuator fault. Refer to the DTC
index
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using outside door handle Exterior door handle Check the exterior door handle
condition/installation condition and installation
Exterior release cable disconnected Check the condition and security of
from exterior door handle or door the exterior release cable
latch Single door will not open from the
outside (but opens from the
inside) GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using inside door handle Child lock(s) engaged Check that the child locks are
Interior door handle disengaged
condition/installation Check the interior door handle
Interior release cable disconnected condition and installation
from interior door handle or door Check the condition and security of
latch the interior release cable
Single Door Will Not Open From
The Inside (but opens from the
outside) GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Door(s) will not lock/unlock from key

fob, key or internal lock switch Wiring harness/connectors Check for relevant stored DTCs
Central junction box (CJB) Once any DTC related faults have
Door lock switch been rectified continue with the
Cable fault diagnostic steps below
No lock / unlock function from
key-fob GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Door ajar or miss lock signal at

message centre when door(s) are Wiring harness Latch Mounted Door Ajar Switch
closed or alarm triggering Instrument cluster Test GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Incorrect striker
alignment/adjustment
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to
ground
Ajar switch failure
DTC Index
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - DTC: With (501-14, Diagnosis and Testing).
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE OUTSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE INSIDE)

A1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
1 Remove the door trim panel as necessary
2 Confirm the exterior door release cable is correctly installed to

the exterior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Connect the door release cable correctly. If the cable is
damaged, install a new door release cable. Test the system
for normal operation
A2: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the exterior door handle release connection to the door
latch is installed correctly
Is the exterior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE INSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE OUTSIDE)

B1: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
1 Make sure the child lock is disengaged (rear door only)

Confirm the interior door release cable is correctly installed to

3
the interior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
B2: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the interior door handle release connection to the door
latch is installed correctly
Is the interior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DOOR LATCHING AND LOCKING FUNCTION TEST

C1: HARNESS CONNECTION
NOTE: Test as a single component to ensure that the door latch is not replaced unnecessarily, when another component
may be at fault

2 Disconnect harness from latch, check for corrosion or damage to
both connectors at socket points and pins. Re-connect harness
ensuring robust assembly when all parts confirmed to be in
good order. If harness or latch connectors are damaged, install
new harness/latch as necessary. Test the system for normal
operation
Check for normal operation, does latch function correctly?

Yes
Re-assemble door trim and test for normal operation
No
GO to C2.
C2: LOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Close all vehicle doors apart from door being investigated,
please note which door, left side or right side is under
investigation
Disconnect harness from latch to enable access to socket

2
points to carry-out conductivity testing as detailed
3 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when locking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key between terminals 5 and 7
left side or 5 and 7 right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between
terminals 5 and 7 left side or 5 and 7 right side when locking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is locking correctly, providing the
signal to the latch GO to C3.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate why
vehicle electrical system is not providing signals to the latch.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for
logged DTCs to localize the fault
C3: UNLOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when unlocking the
vehicle via the key-fob or smart key between terminals 5 and 7
left side or 5 and 7 right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between
terminals 5 and 7 left side and 5 and 7 right side when unlocking
the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key?
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is unlocking correctly, providing
the signal to the latch GO to C4.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate why
vehicle electrical system is not providing signals to the latch.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for
logged DTCs to localize the fault
C4: PHYSICAL TEST 1
1 Remove latch module from door
2 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
3 With the latch in hand, connect the electrical connector(s) to
connect door latch to door harness
NOTE: THE LATCH IS NOW READY TO TEST
4 Close all vehicle doors except the door being investigated

NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
Test will not work if latch is only in first safety latch position
5 Rotate latch claw (using a small screw driver or similar), to the

fully latched position (figure 3)
NOTE: Unlocked position shown
6 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the unlocked

position as shown
NOTE: Locked position shown
7 Press the lock button on the key-fob or smart key
Does the latch interior release lever move from the unlocked
position to the locked position?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test section
has been completed and confirmed that vehicle is working
correctly, then replace the door latch. If replacing latch as part
of a warranty claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in
the technician comments section of the warranty claim
C5: PHYSICAL TEST 2
1 With the latch in the locked state (i.e. the latch interior release
lever is in the locked position), press the key-fob or smart key
unlock button
Does the latch interior release lever move from the locked position
to the unlocked position?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test section
has been completed and confirmed that vehicle is working
correctly, then replace the door latch. If replacing latch as part
of a warranty claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in
the technician comments section of the warranty claim
C6: PHYSICAL TEST 3
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 With the latch in its unlocked state, push the latch exterior
release lever against its return spring, whilst simultaneously
applying a light pressure to release the latch claw using a
small screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
GO to C7.
No
Repeat tests C5 and C6 to confirm the fault GO to C5. If the
repeat test has confirmed that the exterior release lever will
not release the claw on an unlocked latch replace the door
latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code EXTINOP in the technician comments
section of the warranty claim
C7: PHYSICAL TEST 4
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw to the

second fully latched position
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
2 If testing a rear door latch, ensure that the child lock is turned
to the off position
3 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the unlocked

position as shown
4 Whilst the latch is still in its unlocked state, push the latch
interior release lever against its return spring, whilst
simultaneously applying a light pressure to release the latch
claw using a small screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
Latch has passed all tests to confirm its correct function. DO
NOT REPLACE LATCH as part of any attempts to resolve any
locking functionality issues
No
Repeat test GO to C7. If repeat test has confirmed that the
interior release lever will not release the claw when the latch is
in the unlocked state, then replace the latch. If replacing latch
as part of a warranty claim, please quote reference code
INTINOP in the technician comments section of the warranty
claim
PINPOINT TEST D : LATCH MOUNTED DOOR AJAR SWITCH TEST

D1: TEST 4 DOOR LATCH
NOTES:
If a customer is complaining of issues relating to a door ajar signal e.g. door latch won’t lock, or alarm system triggering
(indicated via DTC’s), there may be several components that generate the fault, including
Body wiring harness / connectors
Door wiring harness / connectors
Alarm control module
Central junction box (CJB)
Door Latch ajar switch
To investigate the functioning of the door ajar switch contained within the door latch, to prove or eliminate the door
latch mounted door ajar switch as the root cause, follow the process below. This will prevent the unnecessary replacement of
a correctly functioning door latch
1 Remove door trim from door

2 Disconnect door harness from latch for access to connector pins
for latch electrical testing
3 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
Test will not work if latch is only in first safety latch position
4 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw to the

second fully latched position (figure 3)
5 Carry out continuity test between terminals 1 and 4 (left side)

or 8 and 4 (right side) with claw closed
Does the continuity test pass?

Yes
The latch ajar switch is working correctly. Do not replace latch.
Investigate for fault elsewhere in vehicle system
No
Release latch claw and repeat test from step 4 to confirm
result. If this is a repeat test and you are sure that the ajar
switch does not provide continuity when fully latched. Replace
the latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code AJARINOP in the technician comments
section of the warranty claim
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to release

the component.
Torque: 4 Nm
2.
harnesses.
NOTE: Secure the connection in the service position.
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly located.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Luggage Compartment
Lid Release Switch
Removal

Installation).
2.
3. Torque: 1.5 Nm
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal
1. NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to release

the component.
Torque: 4 Nm

harnesses.
NOTE: Secure the connection in the service position.
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly located.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Latch
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
2. Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
Torque: 3 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm

8. NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harness.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Interior Front Door Handle
Removal
2.
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid
Latch
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2.
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid Latch
Actuator
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Rear Door Latch
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames
2. Refer to: Exterior Rear Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
3. Torque: 3 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6.
7. CAUTION: Note of the routing of the wiring harnesses.

9.
10.
11.
Drill out the rivet.
Release the clip.
12. CAUTION: Note the routing of the wiring harness.
13.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are correctly

located.

This section contains no data
Wipers and Washers -
Wiper arm retaining nuts 22 16.2 194.7
Wiper linkage bolts / screws 11 8.1 97.4
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers
For a detailed description of the wipers and washers system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
Visual Inspection
Windshield for damage or contamination e.g. road film or general Battery condition and state of charge
residue deposits Fusible links
Wiper blades, arms and linkage for wear, security, damage and freedom Fuses
of movement Relays
Windshield/Headlamp washer fluid level Electrical connections
Washer pipes and jets for leaks, restrictions and damage Front wiper motors
Wiper switch
Washer pumps
Rain/light sensor
Heated front washer jets
Ignition switch
Light switch
Ambient air temperature sensor
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) module
Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM)
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) module
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Wiper blade(s) Clean the windshield. Check for the correct installation and tension of the
drag/judder across Contamination of the wiper arm(s). Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Rectify
the windshield windshield as necessary.
Incorrectly installed
wiper arm(s)
Wiper arm(s)
incorrectly aligned to
the screen
Wiper arm(s) spring
tension inadequate
Very slow operation Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the wiper linkage
of the wiper(s) across Low battery voltage for fouling. Disconnect the motor from the linkage. Refer to the relevant
the windshield Front wiper linkage section of the workshop manual. Check the linkage operation. Check for
seized or fouling DTCs indicating a wiper circuit fault. Rectify as necessary.
Wiper circuit fault
Wiper switch fault,
Wiper(s) inoperative high resistance
Noisy operation of Lift the wiper arm(s) from the windshield/rear window and recheck the
wiper(s) Wiper motor/linkage noise level during the wiper sweep operation.
fault
Noisy operation of Listen for washer motor operation. Check and top up washer fluid level.
washers Washer motor(s) Check and rectify blocked washer circuit. Check the wiper/washer circuit for
faulty DTCs indicating a fault. Rectify as necessary.
Washer system
blocked or partially
blocked
Washers do not
operate Fluid level low
Washer circuit
blocked
Washer circuit faulty
DTC Index
and Operation).
Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Jet
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation

Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Pump
Removal
NOTES:
2. Remove the RH rear wheel and tire.
Installation).
and Installation).
Installation

Wipers and Washers - Rain Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is secured in the

retainer.
Make sure that the clips are correctly located.

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Reservoir
Removal
WARNING: If the fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTES:
3. Remove the RH front wheel and tire.
Installation).
Remove the front RH fender splash shield.
Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:
6. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 4.1 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over fill the reservoir.
Only use new fluid from a sealed container.

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor LHD RWD
Removal
NOTES:
Torque: 11 Nm
4.
5.
6. NOTES:
Component shown removed for clarity.
RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
Disconnect the link arm from the pivot to assist removal of

the wiper motor assembly.
7. CAUTIONS:


Installation

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor RHD RWD
Removal
NOTES:
Torque: 11 Nm
4.
5.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the area around the component

is clean and free of foreign material.
NOTE: Component shown removed for clarity.
Disconnect the link arm from the ball joint to assist removal
of the wiper motor assembly.
7. CAUTIONS:


Installation

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
1.

Installation
1. Install the wiper blade.
2. CAUTION: Align the wiper blades onto the centre of

the windshield circle mark.
NOTE: After the wiper pivot arm nuts have been

tightened to the correct torque value, lift the wiper pivot
arm from the windshield and return to the windshield. Make
sure that wiper blades are not positioned below any point
of the windshield circle mark.
3.
Torque: 22 Nm
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Pump
Removal
NOTES:
2. Remove the RH rear wheel and tire.
Installation).
and Installation).
Installation

Roof Opening Panel -
Roof opening panel frame retaining bolts 8 6 71
Roof opening panel motor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Roof opening panel glass retaining screws 7 5 62
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - Component Location
Roof Opening Panel Components 1
Roof Opening Panel components

Item Description
1 Front overhead console - switches
2 Sliding glass panel - motor and module
3 Roof opening panel assembly
4 Roller blind motor
5 Rear overhead console – switch
8 ABS module - vehicle speed signal
Roof Opening Panel Components 2
Roof Opening Panel Components

Item Description
1 Glass panel - front
2 Wind deflector
3 Sliding glass panel
4 Glass panel - rear
5 Perimeter frame
6 Trim ring
7 Roller blind guide rails and drive assembly
8 Roller blinds - front and rear
9 Drive motor and harness for sliding glass panel
10 Sight shield
11 Drive cables for sliding glass panel
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - Overview
Overview
The roof opening panel assembly is built into a steel perimeter frame and incorporates the:
fixed glass panels

sliding glass panel
roller blinds
electric operating motors and mechanisms
wiring harness, and
wind deflector.
The motor located at the front of the assembly powers the sliding glass panel. The motors operating the roller blinds are in
the side rails. The steel frame is bonded into an aperture extending the full width of the roof, between the cant rails of the
vehicle’s aluminum body.
The sliding glass panel and roller blinds are controlled by the switch pack in the front overhead console. The rear roller blind
can also be controlled by a button in the rear overhead console. The rear overhead switch function can be isolated by isolating
the rear electric windows on the drivers window switch pack.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; O = LIN Bus
Roof Opening Panel - Control Diagram
Item Description
2 Sliding glass panel - motor and module
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
Roof Opening Panel Operation
The sliding glass panel and roller blinds are controlled by the switch pack in the front overhead console. The rear roller blind
can also be controlled by a button in the rear overhead console. The rear overhead switch function can be isolated by isolating
the rear electric windows on the drivers window switch pack.
Roof Opening Panel
Item Description
1 Window switch pack - driver door
2 Isolator switch - rear windows and roof panel rear-blind
3 Switch - roof sliding glass panel
4 Switch - roof panel rear-blind
5 Switch - roof panel front-blind
6 Switch - roof panel rear-blind
A rocker switch in the front overhead console controls the opening and closing of the sliding glass panel with a one-touch
function in the direction required:
Press (3) once to tilt the panel.

Once tilted, press (3) again to open the panel.
Press (3) to close the panel from tilt.
From the fully open position, press (3) once to close to the tilt position, then press again to close fully.
Sliding glass panel movement can be halted at any time by pressing the button (3) again.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the roof panel encounters resistance when closing it will stop, and then open a set distance in the opposite direction. This is
to prevent serious injury or damage to the mechanism. The anti-trap mechanism can be overridden to allow the roof to be
closed when movement is restricted by dirt. To override the anti-trap mechanism, press and hold the front of the switch until
the roof reaches the closed position.
Roof Blinds
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the roof blind mechanism the blinds must not be operated manually.
Front blind
One push of the button (5) will fully open or close the blind. The blind is either fully open or closed and cannot be halted part
way.
The front blind opens automatically as the roof panel is opened, preventing wind affecting the blind. The blind cannot be
closed when the roof is open.
Rear blind
One push of the buttons (4) or (6) will fully open or close the blind. The blind is either fully open or closed and cannot be
halted part way.
Pressing the dual purpose isolator switch (2) in the driver’s door switch pack (1) will inhibit the rear passenger’s operating the
rear windows and roof panel rear-blind.
NOTE: Global open/close functionality is not enabled on the roof module.
The front half of the roof opening panel components are common for both long and short wheelbase vehicles, although the
frames are unique to each type of vehicle. The steel frame forms a structural contribution to the vehicle body, helping maintain
the rigidity of the shell even with the majority of the aluminum roof removed.
Glass Panels
Glass panels
Item Description
1 Fixed front glass panel
2 Sliding glass panel
3 Fixed rear glass panel
The glass section of the roof begins at the top edge of the windscreen and extends back to a line mid-way between the 'B' and
'C' pillars. The external surface of the roof opening panel comprises the following three glass elements:
Fixed front glass panel (5mm thick)

Sliding glass panel (4mm thick)
Fixed rear glass panel (4mm thick)
All three panels are manufactured in a tinted toughened glass with a Protec safety film bonded onto the lower surface to
prevent shards of glass entering the vehicle cabin in the event of a breakage.
The tinted glass provides a high degree of solar protection allowing only 8.2 percent heat transmission into the vehicle. The
fixed front panel fills the space between the windscreen and the sliding center panel. The fixed rear panel above the rear
passenger compartment sits between the rear of the sliding panel and the rear section of the aluminum roof.
A wider rear glass panel accommodates the 125mm difference in roof length between standard and long wheelbase vehicles.
The sliding glass panel features an electrically powered tilt and slide mechanism. On opening, the rear of the panel tilts
upwards before moving rearwards above the fixed glass panel. As the sliding panel opens a wind deflector rises automatically
across the leading edge of the aperture. The deflector manufactured from a mesh type material is used to reduce wind-noise.
Roof Opening Panel Components - Interior View
Roof Components - Interior View

Item Description
1 Perimeter frame
3 Roller blind guide rails and drive assembly
4 Rear blind
6 Front blind
7 Sliding glass panel motor and control module
The roof opening panel assembly features electrically powered front and rear roller blinds that can be independently operated.
Guided by side rails, each blind rolls to-and-from the center of the roof opening panel with the:
front blind closing forwards, and the

rear blind closing rearwards.
Control Module and Motor

The opening and closing function of the sliding glass panel and roller-blinds are controlled by the roof module which is integral
with the sliding glass panel motor. The module receives a permanent battery power supply from the RJB.
To open or close the sliding glass panel and blinds the module receives hardwired 'open/close' inputs from the switches located
in the front and rear overhead console panels.
The control module has a non-volatile memory, if battery power to the module is lost the sliding roof panel and blind positions
are retained and the one-touch feature does not require re-initializing. However due to the software condition if the battery
power to the control module is interrupted when the ignition is switched on, the one-touch feature must be re-initialized.
Once the power supply is restored, reset the roof mechanism as follows:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Fully close the roof.
3. Press the front of the roof switch, and hold for 45 seconds.
4. NOTE: The roof blinds do not close on completion of the one touch setup sequence.
After 45 seconds the roof will begin to move. Keep the front of the switch pressed until the roof and the roof blinds
have fully opened, then the roof panel is fully closed.
5. Once the open/close cycle has completed and the roof has stopped moving, release the switch.
6. The roof can now be operated as normal.
The motor that operates the sliding glass panel uses a drive gear which engages and drives two cables within a sleeved tube.
Each cable is linked to the sliding glass panel’s open and close mechanism located either side of the panel. The rotation of the
motor drives the cables in the required direction. Signals from a Hall effect sensor located in the motor enables the control
module to calculate the exact position and operating speed of the glass sliding panel.
The Hall effect sensor is also an operational component of the anti-trap function. The control module uses the operating speed
of the sliding glass panel and the current draw of the motor to detect an obstruction. If the sliding glass panel closing speed
decreases below a set threshold and the current draw from the motor increases the power feed to the motor is reversed. This
will then open the sliding glass panel a set distance in the opposite direction of travel. In an emergency the anti-trap function
can be overridden by holding the operating switch in the close position.
Depending on vehicle speed the closing threshold of the anti-trap function is adjusted to counteract the force of air pressure
acting upon the sliding roof panel. Vehicle speed signal is transmitted from the ABS module via the high-speed CAN bus to the
CJB where the signal is processed and transmitted over a LIN bus connection to the roof module. As vehicle speed increases,
air pressure forces acting upon the sliding panel simultaneously increase, affecting the anti-trap functionality. The vehicle
speed signal is used by the control module to re-calibrate the anti-trap algorithm, accounting for the extra force acting on the
sliding panel. This function adapts the sliding panel closing speed threshold of the anti-trap function, dependant on vehicle
speed.
Both the sliding glass panel and front blind motors have a thermal protection device built into the control module software to
protect them from overheating. The operating parameters are as follows:
If the motor temperature is between 60 and 77 degrees C the roof operation is restricted to a close only function.
If the motor temperature exceeds 77 degrees C during the closing function the movement will not be interrupted.
If the motor temperature exceeds 77 degrees C when the roof is closed movement will be inhibited.
If the anti-trap function is operational when closing, the reverse movement of the motor will complete its movement
regardless of motor temperature.
Thermal protection for the sliding glass panel motor and front blind motor are functioned in unison, therefore if one motor
exceeds 60 or 77 degrees C the same restrictions, as defined above, will apply to both motors. For example if the front blind
cannot be opened due to thermal protection the sliding glass panel will also ignore the opening command.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel
For a detailed description of the roof opening panel system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation),

Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation),
Roof Opening Panel (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Glass panel assembly Fuses

Glass panel seal Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Frame assembly Central Junction Box (CJB)
Roller blind(s) Wiring harness
Deflector Loose or corroded connector(s)
Access panel Roof opening panel motor and control module
Roof opening panel cables Roof opening panel switch
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Roof opening panel
inoperative Roof opening panel calibration Calibrate the roof opening panel
lost REFER to: Motor Synchronization (501-17 Roof
Fuse(s) blown Opening Panel, General Procedures).
Control circuit fault Check the fuse(s)
Supply circuit fault Check the roof opening panel circuits
Motor fault Carry out hard battery reset
Check the switch and motor function
Roof opening panel creak

Contact between sunroof frame GO to Pinpoint Test F.
seal and vehicle body
Sunroof frame twist
Moving panel contact to sunroof
frame
Ice formation between the body
and sunroof
Roof opening panel

sticking or juddering Debris in the channels/guides Check for general debris
Cable(s) sticking/damaged Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and
Roof opening panel incorrectly guides
aligned Check the roof opening panel alignment.
Switch fault REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17
Motor fault Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
Check the switch and motor function
Water ingress from roof

opening panel Debris in the channels/guides Check for general debris
Damage to the glass panel seal Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and
aligned Check the glass panel seal
Failed bond of sunroof frame to Check the roof opening panel alignment
body REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17
Failed bond of fixed glass panels Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
to sunroof frame
Roof opening panel blind

- gap to headliner Miss-alignment of blind closing GO to Pinpoint Test A.
position
Broken / incorrectly installed
headliner clips
Roof opening panel blind

noise Broken / incorrectly installed blind GO to Pinpoint Test B.
feet
Warped blind drive mechanism
casting
Blind spring rattle
Wind noise
Damage to the glass panel seal Check the glass panel seals
Cable(s) sticking/damaged Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and
aligned Check the roof opening panel alignment
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17
Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
DTC Index
and Operation).
PINPOINT TEST A : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND GAP

A1: BLIND OPERATION
1 Operate the roof opening panel blind from open to closed
twice, using the console mounted switch
Does the roof opening panel blind operate correctly?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
A2: BLIND TO HEADLINER GAP
1 Carry out a visual inspection of the condition of the closed
blind to the headliner
Is there an excessive or abnormal gap between the blind and
headliner?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
A3: GAP ORIENTATION
Is the gap from the leading edge of the blind to the edge of the
headliner in the X-direction (fore/aft)?
Yes
Calibrate the roof opening panel
REFER to: Motor Synchronization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,
Then GO to A4.
No
Check headliner is correctly retained. Re-secure as required. If
customer concern is still evident follow the procedure
REFER to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
Replace the headliner clips. Then GO to A5.
A4: BLIND - FEET
Is the customer concern still evident?
Yes
Carry out visual inspection of the blind feet for correct
installation and damage, re-install or replace as required
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Feet (501-17 Roof Opening
Panel, Removal and Installation).
Then GO to A5.
No
A5: CLEARANCE APERTURE - VISUAL CHECK
Yes
If customer concern is still evident contact dealer technical
support
No
PINPOINT TEST B : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND - MOTOR – NOISE OR INOPERATIVE
CONDITIONS
B1: MOTOR OPERATION
1 Operate the roof opening panel blind using the console mounted switch
2 Listen for noise that would indicate that the motor is operating
Is there a noise generated when the blind switch is pressed?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
B2: HIGH LEVEL NOISE
Does the blind make a loud ratcheting noise when the switch is pressed?
Yes
Replace the glass panel blind drive assembly (Front)
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Drive Assembly (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and
Installation).
(Rear)
REFER to: Glass Roof Panel Blind Drive Assembly (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).
No
Carry out visual inspection of the blind feet for correct installation and damage, replace as required
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Feet (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
Then GO to B3.
B3: HIGH LEVEL NOISE - CHECK
Yes
If customer concern is still evident contact dealer technical support
No
PINPOINT TEST C : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND – NOISE
CONDITIONS
C1: BLIND - FEET
Is the noise only present during operation of the blind
Yes
Carry out visual inspection of the blind feet for correct installation and damage, replace as required,
as per procedure
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Feet (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
Then GO to C2.
No
C2: BLIND - RETENSION
Yes
Re-tension the blind
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Then GO to C3.
No
C3: REPLACEMENT
Yes
Replace the blind assembly
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
Then GO to C4.
No
C4: AUDIBLE NOISE - CHECK
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND – NOISE / RATTLE

D1: RATTLE - VEHICLE IN MOTION
1 Verify the customer concern by performing a road test (Observe the road test safety guidelines)
2 Check if the concern is evident with the blind in open and closed positions
Is the noise present when the blind is closed?
Yes
No
GO to D2.
D2: RATTLE - VEHICLE IN MOTION
1 Confirm the vehicle identification number
Is the VIN number below V17000
Yes
Replace the blind assembly
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ROOF BLIND OPERATION
CONDITIONS
E1: OPERATION
1 Operate the opening panel using the roof mounted switch
Does the opening panel operate correctly?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams. Check the fused links to the roof opening panel, roof blinds
module and the front overhead console. Replace as required. If the fused link is intact refer to (roof
opening panel inoperative) in the symptom chart above
E2: VOLTAGE TO BLIND MOTORS
NOTE: Blind motor + (red wire) should be at battery voltage during opening movement, blind motor – (black wire) should
be at battery voltage during closing movement
1 Lower the headliner

REFER to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2 Front blind failure. Operate to roof blind switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams check for voltage
between connector - C9PR153A/5 - and - C9PR153A/1 -
3 Rear blind failure. Operate to roof blind switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams check for voltage
between connector - C9PR155A/1 - and - C9PR155A/5 -
Does the supply circuit operate as expected?
Yes
Suspect blind motor internal failure. Replace the glass panel blind drive assembly (Front)
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Drive Assembly (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and
Installation).
(Rear)
REFER to: Glass Roof Panel Blind Drive Assembly (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
GO to E6.
No
GO to E3.
E3: SENSOR AND SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECKS
1 Front blind failure. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams check the circuit for continuity and for short to
power, ground or open circuit between connectors - C9PR32A - and - C9PR153A -
2 Rear blind failure. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams check the circuit for continuity and for short to
power, ground or open circuit between connectors - C9PR32A - and - C9PR155A -
Did the circuit pass the tests?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
Repair or replace the blind harness. Then GO to E6.
E4: SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams check the circuit for continuity and for short to power, ground or
open circuit between connectors - C9PR32A - and - C9LN28 -
Did the circuit pass the tests?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
Repair or replace the switch circuit harness. Then GO to E6.
E5: SWITCH PACK
NOTE: Blind circuit operation (one touch), a ground is supplied while the switch is pressed
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and monitor voltage on the blind open / close circuits as the
switch is pressed
Did the switch circuits pass the tests?
Yes
GO to E6.
No
If the blind operation is the only fault suspect the front overhead console switch replace as required.
Then GO to E6.
E6: CORRECT OPERATION
1 Operate the moving panel using the roof mounted switch
Does the moving panel operate correctly?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST F : ROOF OPENING PANEL - FRAME CREAK
CONDITIONS
F1: NOISE - WHEN PANEL IN VENT POSITION
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the sunroof based creak noises
1 Verify the customer concern by performing a road test (Observe the road test safety guidelines)
2 Determine if the issue is present:
When the opening panel is in the vent position
When the opening panel is in the closed position
On flat roads
When the car is under torsion (e.g. driving slowly up a curb, or turning onto an inclined drive-way)
Is the noise present when the sunroof panel is in the vent position?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
F2: NOISE - WHEN VEHICLE UNDER TORSION
1 Using the results obtained
Is the noise present on flat roads as well as when the vehicle is under torsion?
Yes
GO to F5.
No
GO to F3.
F3: VIN RANGE
1 Check the vehicle VIN (vehicle identity number).
Is vehicle VIN below V25000?
Yes
GO to F4.
No
F4: FRAME WASHERS - CHECK
1 Operate the roof opening panel using the roof mounted switch to the fully open position
2 Carry out visual inspection of the front corners fixings to confirm the presence of the frame washers
Are the frame washers present?
Yes
No
Install frame washers REFER to: (501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Front (Removal and Installation),
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Centre (Removal and Installation),
Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Rear (Removal and Installation).
If the customer concern is still evident contact dealer technical support
F5: REAR PANEL SEAL LUBRICATION
1 Lubricate the rear fixed panel seal
REFER to: Rear Glass Roof Panel Lubrication (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
Procedures).
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST G : ROOF OPENING PANEL - GLASS PANEL CREAK

G1: GLASS PANEL PROFILE
1 With the glass panel in the closed position. Check the roof
opening panel alignment.
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening
Panel, General Procedures).
Is the profile correct?
Yes
GO to G2.
No
Check the roof opening panel alignment
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening
Panel, General Procedures).
If the concern persists, GO to G2.
G2: MECHANISM - CLEARANCE TO FRAME
1 Remove the side covers from the glass panel
2 With the glass panel in the tilt position carry out a visual
inspection of the mechanism clearance to the frame on both
left and right side of the vehicle
Does the mechanism contact the frame?

Yes
No
GO to G3.
G3: MECHANISM ARM CREAK
1 Remove the moving glass panel
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening
Panel, Removal and Installation).
2 Close the mechanism and gently flex the rear end of the
mechanism arm inboard – both left side and right side arms
Does this produce a creaking noise?
Yes
support
No
GO to G4.
G4: DEBRIS IN WIND NOISE SEAL
1 Compress the side wind noise seals along their length to check
for any debris contaminating the section area
Is there any debris?
Yes
Remove any debris from the section area by sliding a suitable
tool inside the seal GO to G5.
No
GO to G5.
G5: MOVING PANEL SEAL LUBRICATION
1 Clean all moving panel seals using a damp cloth
2 Apply AC602/2 lubricant to the all moving panel seals using a
suitable clean cloth
Yes
support
No
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Alignment
General Procedures
Check
1. NOTE: With the sunroof closed, check the alignment

of the glass to the roof panel. The glass should be central
in its aperture. Profile of sunroof to body: front edge, set
flush or up to 1.0 mm (0.040 inch) low; rear edge, set flush
or up to 1.0 mm (0.040 inch) high.
Adjustment
1. Open the roof opening panel blind.
2. CAUTION: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.
NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both

sides.
Remove the inner cover.

to removal.

sides.
Remove the outer cover.

sides.
Loosen but do not remove the 3 roof opening panel Torx

bolts.
5. Align the roof opening panel.
6. NOTES:
With the sunroof closed, check the alignment of the

glass to the roof panel. The glass should be central in its
aperture. Profile of sunroof to body: front edge, set flush or
up to 1.0 mm (0.040 inch) low; rear edge, set flush or up to
1.0 mm (0.040 inch) high.
Make sure that the alignment of the roof is equal on

both sides of the vehicle.
Torque: 7 Nm
7. NOTES:
Make sure that the cover is positioned as far forward

as possible.
Install the outer cover.
8. Fully open the roof opening panel glass.

sides.
Carefully secure the clips whilst sliding the inner cover

rearwards.
sides.
Secure the clips and slide the inner cover rearward until it is
2mm from the roof opening panel blind drive spindle .
11. Close the roof opening panel glass.
12. Close the roof opening panel blind.

Roof Opening Panel - Motor Synchronization
General Procedures
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the ambient temperature is above 5°C and below
40°C before carrying out this procedure.
Make sure that the gear selector is in the P position.
Set the ignition to the ON position.

Start the engine.
Press and hold the front of the switch, hold down until the roof
opening panel is fully closed.
2. Press and hold the front of the roof opening panel switch.
After approximately 45 seconds the roof opening panel will begin
to move. Keep the front of the switch pressed until the roof
opening panel and the roof blinds have fully opened, then closed.
3. Once the open/close cycle has completed and the roof opening
panel has stopped moving, release the switch.
The roof opening panel is now synchronized.
The roof opening panel can now be operated as normal.
4. Turn off the engine.

Set the ignition to the OFF position.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
General Procedures
Activation
and Installation).
2. Remove the retaining clip.
3. CAUTIONS:
Rotating the shaft clockwise will result in permanent

damage to the tension spring.
Make sure that the tension is retained on the shaft

until the clip is installed.
NOTE: Make sure that any residual tension is released

by gently pressing inwards on the shaft 2-3 times.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the shaft 10 full rotations

counter clockwise.
4. Align the holes between the shaft and the blind.

5. Install the retaining clip.
and Installation).
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
5.
6.
8. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
sides.
Torque: 6 Nm

sides.
11. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm

technician.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.


prior to removal.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to


damage.

access.
located.
NOTE: Follow the animation to make sure the roof

opening panel blind is removed and installed correctly from
and to the guides.
19. CAUTIONS:


20. CAUTIONS:

a paperclip.

correctly located.
Installation
1. Make sure that the roof opening panel blind tension is correct prior to
installation. If the tension has been released refer to the roof opening
panel blind rewind procedure.
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure (501-17 Roof
Opening Panel, General Procedures).

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind Drive Assembly
Removal
and Installation).

located.
NOTES:

the guides.

similar.
Release the glass roof panel blind

3. CAUTIONS:



4. CAUTIONS:

a paperclip.

correctly located.


5. CAUTION: Note the installed position of the
component prior to removal.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. NOTES:
Right hand shown, left hand similar.
Long wheel base shown, short wheel base similar.

long wheel base vehicles will have 1 fixing.
Short wheelbase

removal.
NOTE: Remove and discard the washers.
Long wheelbase

removal.
NOTES:

long wheel base vehicles will have 4 fixings.
Remove and discard the washers.

All vehicles
15.
16. NOTE: Note the installed position of the blind drive

17. NOTE: Note the orientation of the blind drive

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

rear guide.
Torque: 4 Nm

rear guide.

cables are correctly aligned to the installed position.
4. Slide the washer in from the centre of the vehicle until it is
5. CAUTIONS:

and debris

Long wheelbase


front fixing hole.
All vehicles
7. CAUTION: Do not install the front Torx bolt on long

wheel base vehicles.

similar.

8. CAUTIONS:

and debris

similar.
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the roof rail is correctly

aligned.
NOTE: Short wheel base shown, long wheel base

similar.
Torque: 4 Nm
10.
11.
installed position. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
13. NOTES:

correctly located.
The procedure must be carried out on the front and

rear blind feet.

2. Rotate the blind foot in to the installed position.
14. CAUTION: Make sure that the blind feet for each blind
are positioned at an equal distance from the center of the
vehicle.

Slide the blind foot along the guide until it is level with the
foot on the other side of the vehicle.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19. CAUTIONS:



Remove the retaining clip.

20. CAUTIONS:




located.
NOTES:

the guides.

similar.
Secure the glass roof panel blind
and Installation).
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind Feet
Removal
NOTES:
1. Open the roof opening panel glass to the full tilt position.
2. CAUTION: Carefully release the 3 clips on the

headliner. Do not use excessive force
located.
NOTES:

the guides.
Carefully allow the roof opening panel blind to retract

in to the aperture above the headliner.

to removal.

sides.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The roof opening panel blind feet are

handed. Make sure that the feet labelled 1 are installed to
the left hand side of the roof opening panel blind and to
the right hand side of the glass roof panel blind. Make sure
that the feet labelled 2 are installed to the right hand side
of the roof opening panel blind and to the left hand side of
the glass roof panel blind.

fitted position. Failure to follow this instruction may result
3. NOTES:

correctly located.

2. Rotate the blind foot in to the fitted position.

located.
NOTE: Follow the animation to make sure the roof

opening panel blind is removed and installed correctly from
and to the guides.
5.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Frame
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTES:
The cutting blades used in this procedure are from the standard BTB glass removal kit.
In addition to the standard BTB glass removal kit, cutting blades WK29L and WK30L will be required.
and Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
5.
6.
7.

prior to removal.
NOTES:
Torque: 2 Nm
sides.
Torque: 6 Nm

sides.
prior to removal.
NOTES:
Torque: 2 Nm

technician.

technician.

prior to removal.

prior to removal.
NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.

damage.

access.
19. Prepare the PU adhesive in accordance with the instructions included

with the PU adhesive kit.
sides.

Use a WK24ZS blade, cutting with the flat side

against the body.

Use either a left facing WK29L blade or a right facing

WK30L blade, cutting with the flat side against the body.
Use a WK11DW5 controller arm, set to 75 mm to control
the cutting depth.
Use a WK2S blade, cutting with the flat side against the
body. Use a WK11DW5 controller arm, the depth of the cut
will vary from 75 mm to 160 mm as the glass widens
towards the centre.
25.

27.

29. CAUTIONS:
Use suitable tape to protect the roof opening panel

blind motor wiring harness.
Use suitable tape to protect the bodywork around the

roof aperture.

Use a WK2S blade, cutting with the flat side against the
body.
Use either a left facing WK29L blade or a right facing

32. Use either a left facing WK29L blade or a right facing

33.
35.
harnesses.


technician.
40.
Prepare the glass roof cassette flange and trim the PU

adhesive in accordance with the instructions included with
the PU adhesive kit.
Installation
1. Fit the cassette frame edge seal back corners first, then fit
the front corners, as the sequence depicts in the graphic.

NOTES:
Install new spacers.
Make sure that the cassette frame edge seal is in contact

with the cant rail evenly across both sides of the vehicle. It
is critical that the cassette is central.
3. With the 4 installation pins correctly located into the holes
in the cant rail assemblies, push the cassette fully forward
towards the front of the vehicle.
4. CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight at this

stage.
Install the 2 new nuts to the rear of the cassette frame to

ensure correct alignment to the body.

rebonding.
Prepare the PU adhesive in accordance with the

Using the mechanical adjuster on the roof opening
panel motor, wind the motor until the glass is
slightly raised from the cassette frame edge seal, to
aid the installation of the rear glass panel.
7. NOTES:

glass to the roof panel. The glass should be central in its
aperture. Profile of sunroof to body: front edge, set flush or
up to 1.0 mm (0.040 inch) low; rear edge, set flush or up to
1.0 mm (0.040 inch) high.

rear glass roof panel to the sunroof glass panel. The glass
should be central in its aperture. Profile of rear glass roof
panel to body: front edge, set flush or up to 1.0 mm (0.040
inch) low; rear edge, set flush or up to 1.0 mm (0.040 inch)
high.
Using the mechanical adjuster on the roof opening

panel motor, wind the motor until the glass is sitting
flush against the cassette frame edge seal.
panel.
8. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,
9.
Apply tape to the rear corners of the glass roof to
create alignment markings to aid installation.
technician.

rebonding.
12. CAUTION: The component must be aligned with the

installation markings.

technician.

13. Torque: 9 Nm

rebonding.

15.
panel.
16.
17.

evident.

Spray water around the roof area and mark any area
that leaks. Dry the roof glass and sealant before
applying additional sealant.
20.

damage.
22. NOTES:



technician.
CAUTION: Make sure that these components are

technician.
27. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
sides.

sides.
Torque: 6 Nm
30. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
31.
32.
33.
35. Torque: 2 Nm
and Installation).
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Centre
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that no more than one fixing is removed from the roof assembly at any one time.
NOTES:
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the front washers are replaced prior to
replacing the centre washers.
NOTE: Do not secure the headlining until the centre and rear
washers have been replaced.
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Front (501-17 Roof
Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the thread is free from

foreign material and debris
NOTE: If installed, remove and discard the washers.
Remove and discard the Torx bolt.

Remove any traces of locking adhesive from the
thread.
Installation

to removal.


Torque: 4 Nm
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear washers are installed prior to
the securing the headliner
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Rear (501-17 Roof
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Front
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
5.
6.
8. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
sides.
Torque: 6 Nm

sides.
11. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm

technician.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.


prior to removal.


damage.

access.

prior to removal.
NOTES:


19. NOTES:


NOTE: Apply gentle pressure to the trim to aid access

to the Torx bolt.
Remove and discard the Torx bolt.

thread.
21. NOTES:
If installed, remove and discard the 3 washers.
Note the required locations of the washers within the

roof assembly.
22. NOTE: If installed, remove and discard the Torx bolt
and nut.
23. NOTE: If installed, remove and discard the Torx bolt

and nut.
Installation
1. Torque: 6 Nm
2. Torque: 6 Nm
3. CAUTION: Apply gentle pressure downwards to create
a gap for the washer.
Slide the washer in from the front of the vehicle until it is

4. CAUTION: Apply gentle pressure downwards to create

a gap for the washer.
Slide the washer in from the front of the vehicle until it is

5. CAUTION: Make sure that the 3 washers are correctly
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the Torx bolt is not cross threaded

during installation.
Fixings must be tightened by hand to prevent damage

to threads.

and debris
NOTE: Apply gentle pressure to the trim to aid access

to the Torx bolt.
Torque: 4 Nm
If the upper washer is free to rotate after the Torx
bolt is tightened, progressively tighten the Torx bolt
until the washer is fully clamped.
Torque: 90°
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the centre and rear washers are installed
prior to the securing the headliner
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Centre (501-17 Roof
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Rear (501-17 Roof

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Rear
Removal
NOTES:
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the front and centre washers are
replaced prior to replacing the rear washers.
NOTE: Do not secure the headlining until the front, centre and rear
washers have been replaced.
Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame Washers - Centre (501-17 Roof
2.

NOTES:
If installed, remove and discard the washers.
LWB shown, SWB similar.
LWB may have one or two Torx bolts installed, SWB

has one Torx bolt installed
Remove and discard the Torx bolt(s)

thread.
Installation
Long wheelbase


front fixing hole.
All vehicles
2. CAUTION: Do not install the front Torx bolt on LWB

vehicles.

3. CAUTIONS:

and debris
Make sure that the roof rail is correctly aligned.
Torque: 4 Nm

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Glass
Removal
1. Refer to: Motor Synchronization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General

Procedures).
2. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,

sides.

sides.
Torque: 7 Nm

technician.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap between the glass panels is as
illustrated.

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal
NOTES:
and Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
8. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
sides.
Torque: 6 Nm

sides.
11. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm

technician.

technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.


prior to removal.


damage.

access.
18. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Regulator
Removal
NOTES:
1. Open the roof opening panel to 15 cm from the front glass roof panel.
3.
4.

to removal.
Installation

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Weatherstrip
Removal
2. NOTES:
Make sure that all traces of the old sealant are

removed from the mating faces.
The new adhesive seal must be installed between the

alignment lines marked on the frame.
Installation

Bumpers -

Radiator splash shield outer retaining bolts 3.2 2.3 28.3
Radiator splash shield inner retaining bolts (M6) 7 5.2 62
Radiator splash shield inner retaining screws 3.2 2.3 28.3
Side bracket, wheel arch liners, and lower bumper wing retaining screws 1.5 1.1 13.3
Front bumper cover upper retaining bolts 1.9 1.4 16.8
Rear bumper bracket retaining bolts 3.2 2.3 28.3
Front bumper armature retaining bolts 55 40.5 468.8
Rear bumper armature retaining bolts 30 22.1 265.5
Bumpers - Front Bumper
Removal

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Use a drill stop. Do not drill deeper than 5 mm.

sides.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
7. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding components.
Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover
Removal
NOTES:
3. Remove both the front wheels and tires.
Installation).
4. Torque:
1 7 Nm
2 3.2 Nm
5. NOTES:
Torque: 1.5 Nm
6.
7.
8. NOTES:
Torque: 3.2 Nm
9. Torque: 1.9 Nm
10.

located.

Torque: 7 Nm
12. NOTES:
Torque: 3.2 Nm
13. NOTES:
14. NOTES:
15. NOTES:
Torque: 1.5 Nm
16. CAUTIONS:
Torque: 1.5 Nm
17.
18. NOTES:
Torque: 1.5 Nm

21. NOTES:
22. CAUTION: Make sure the locating dowels are installed

correctly.
NOTES:

23. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed
correctly.
24.
Installation

Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover Insert
Removal
and Installation).
Torque: 1.5 Nm
3. NOTES:

Installation

Bumpers - Rear Bumper Cover
Removal
Refer to: Rear Lamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and
Installation).
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
harnesses.

damage.
NOTES:
Torque: 1.5 Nm
damage.
NOTES:
Torque: 1.5 Nm

damage.
NOTES:

10. Torque: 3.2 Nm

harnesses.
harnesses.
13. Torque: 3.2 Nm


harnesses.
NOTES:

16. Torque: 1.5 Nm

17.

component.
Torque: 1.5 Nm
19.
20. Torque: 1.5 Nm

NOTES:

sides.
Installation

Bumpers - Rear Bumper
Removal

Installation).
4. NOTES:
Torque: 25 Nm
NOTES:
Torque: 25 Nm
6. NOTES:

7. NOTES:
Torque: 30 Nm
8.
Installation

Safety Belt System -
Front safety belt retractor to seat track retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt retractor retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt D loop retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt buckle retaining bolt 40 30 -
Front safety belt shoulder height adjuster retaining bolts 25 18 -
Rear centre safety belt retractor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear safety belt long end retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear safety belt D loop retaining bolt 40 30 -
Rear safety belt long end retaining bolt 40 30 -
Rear safety belt buckle retaining bolts 40 30 -
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Belt tension sensor (NAS Vehicles Only)
2 RH (right-hand) front safety belt retractor and pretensioner (if fitted)
3 RH front safety belt
4 RH child seat mounting bracket
5 RH rear safety belt
6 RH rear safety belt retractor
7 Parcel tray child seat anchor (3 off)
8 Center rear safety belt retractor
9 LH (left-hand) rear safety belt retractor
10 LH child seat mounting bracket
11 LH and center rear safety belt buckles
12 RH rear safety belt buckle
13 LH front safety belt
14 LH front safety belt retractor and pretensioner
15 LH front safety belt buckle and pretensioner
16 RH front safety belt buckle and pretensioner
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - Overview
OVERVIEW
A three point safety belt is installed at each seat position. The front safety belts have height adjusters installed on the B/C
pillars.
As part of the SRS (supplemental restraint system) system, a pyrotechnic pretensioner is integrated into each front safety belt
buckle and each front safety belt retractor. A tension sensor is installed on the anchor point of the front passenger safety belt
for NAS only vehicles.
NOTE: Prior MY11 NAS vehicles only, you will find a pretensioner on the safety belt buckle and safety belt retractor on the
driver’s side only and a pretensioner on the safety buckle on passenger side.
A safety belt reminder and a belt minder system warn the driver if the safety belt of an occupied front seat is not fastened, or
if a front or rear safety belt is unfastened during the journey.
ISOFIX anchor points are provided for the installation of rear child seats. Three anchor points are attached to the parcel tray
and two mounting brackets are incorporated into the rear seat hinge brackets.
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
SAFETY BELT REMINDER/BELTMINDER SYSTEM
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (40 A midi fuse (2 off))
3 Occupant detection sensor (where fitted)
4 Pressure sensor (where fitted)
5 Occupant classification module (where fitted)
7 RCM (restraints control module)
8 LH (left-hand) front buckle switch
9 RH (right-hand) front buckle switch
10 RH rear buckle switch
11 Center rear buckle switch
12 LH rear buckle switch
System Operation
SAFETY BELT REMINDER
The safety belt warning indicator comes on if the driver safety belt, or the safety belt of an occupied front passenger seat, is
not fastened. The indicator goes off when the offending safety belt is fastened.
The CJB controls the operation of the safety belt warning indicator with a high speed CAN bus message to the instrument
cluster. The status of the front safety belts is provided by a high speed CAN bus message from the RCM. Front passenger seat
occupancy status is provide by a hardwired input from the occupant detection sensor (all except NAS), or a high speed CAN bus
message from the classification module (NAS only).
Safety Belt Warning Indicator
BELTMINDER SYSTEM
The beltminder system augments the safety belt reminder. At vehicle speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), if the safety belt of the
driver seat or an occupied front passenger seat has not been fastened, or if a front or rear safety belt is unfastened, the
beltminder system activates an intermittent warning tone, flashes the safety belt warning indicator and displays a warning
message indicating which safety belt triggered the warning.
The CJB controls the operation of the beltminder system with a high speed CAN bus message to the instrument cluster. The
status of the safety belts is provided by hardwired inputs from each of the rear safety belt buckles, and a high speed CAN bus
message from the RCM. Front passenger seat occupancy status is provide by a hardwired input from the occupant detection
sensor (all except NAS), or a high speed CAN bus message from the classification module (NAS only).
Message Center Beltminder Graphic
A vehicle graphic in the message center shows the status of the safety belts. Each seating position is represented by a
passenger icon, the color of which indicates the safety belt status:
No color - safety belt not fastened.

Green - safety belt fastened.
Red - safety belt status changed from fastened to unfastened.
A beltminder warning triggered by one of the rear safety belts can be cancelled by pressing the information button on the
steering wheel.
Although not advisable, it is possible to disable the beltminder system using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
NOTE: If a heavy object is placed on the front passenger seat, it may trigger a beltminder warning.
GENERAL
Each safety belt retractor incorporates a pretensioner, a load limiting function and a dual locking function. The safety belt
pretensioner are used to tighten the seatbelt during a collision to ensure the occupants are securely held in their seats. The
load limiting function progressively releases a small amount of webbing when the belt tension exceeds a certain level, to
reduce the loads on an occupant's chest during an impact. The dual locking function locks the retractor if the webbing is pulled
out of the retractor too quickly, or the vehicle is subject to unusually high acceleration or tilts beyond a given angle.
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System
For a detailed description of the seatbelt system and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation section of the
workshop manual REFER to: (501-20A Safety Belt System)
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),

Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on the SRS system
or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS module. It is possible for the power from the multimeter battery to trigger the
activation of the module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTE: Do not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the SRS system or
components
Power supply depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1. Remove the ignition key
2. Disconnect the battery leads, ground first
3. Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs, refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines including pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the seatbelt
Visual Inspection
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories which may affect or Fuses
obstruct the function of the seatbelt system Wiring harness fault
Frayed or damaged webbing Correct engagement of electrical
Missing or damaged button stop connectors
Pretensioner(s) Buckles/Stalks Loose or corroded connections
Warning lamp bulb(s)
Impact sensor(s)
Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Belt tension sensor(s)
Restraints control module
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, carry out the test methods described below, alternatively check for diagnostic
trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble code index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Symptom Chart for Seatbelt Rows 1, 2

Seatbelt jammed -
Webbing tight Backlock effect in action (webbing retracted GO to Pinpoint Test A.
quickly and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly See the automatic locking retractor
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking description below
– during retraction only)
Seatbelt jammed -
Webbing loose Seatbelt webbing trapped in seat GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Twist in webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Interference in webbing routing GO to Pinpoint Test E.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test G.
Seatbelt - Intermittent
jamming Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt - Slow retraction

Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not retracting

Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not extracting

Backlock effect-in action (webbing retracted GO to Pinpoint Test A.
quickly and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test G.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Foreign object/debris See the automatic locking retractor
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking description below
– during retraction only)
Seatbelt - Noisy during

operation Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking– GO to Pinpoint Test B.
during retraction only) GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Interference in webbing routing (rubbing)
Seatbelt buckle - Not

latching / jammed Foreign object/debris
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or
tools into the buckle head
GO to Pinpoint Test H.
Inertia Reel Seatbelts

The vehicle is equipped with (two row one) and (three row two) inertia reel seatbelts
These seatbelts are "dual sensitive" which means that they have:
Car sense system - A vehicle motion sensor, which locks the seatbelt webbing under braking, cornering, on steep
hills and in adverse camber conditions, when parked on a steep incline or driveway or two wheels on a high curb
Web sense system - A webbing motion sensor, which locks when the seatbelt webbing is extracted suddenly
The seatbelts in the following positions are equipped with an automatic locking retractor function:
Carline Market Seat position Automatic Locking Retractor Installed From Model Year
XK (X150) All Driver No 2007
Carline Market Seat position Automatic Locking Retractor Installed From Model Year
XK (X150) ROW Passenger No 2007
XK (X150) US Passenger Yes 2007
XK (X150) ROW Row 2 Yes 2007
XK (X150) US Row 2 Yes 2007
XF (X250) All Driver No 2009
XF (X250) ROW Passenger No 2009
XF (X250) US Passenger Yes 2009
XF (X250) ROW Row 2 No 2009
XF (X250) US Row 2 Yes 2009
XJ (X351) All Driver No 2010
XJ (X351) ROW Passenger No 2010
XJ (X351) US Passenger Yes 2010
XJ (X351) ROW Row 2 No 2010
XJ (X351) US Row 2 Yes 2010
The automatic locking retractor function is a feature to secure a child seat or heavy load to the seat
Activation Deactivation
Automatic locking retractor is deactivated by
NOTE: When automatic locking retractor is activated, no further webbing allowing the webbing to retract until the
can be drawn from the seatbelt retractor, prior to disengagement of the clicking stops (close to park position)
automatic locking. This can be mistaken as a jammed seatbelt retractor
Activated by total extraction of the webbing

When activated the automatic locking retractor is identified by a clicking noise When deactivated the automatic locking
during webbing retraction retractor seatbelt changes state, from a static
seatbelt to an automatic seatbelt
Seatbelt Locking Test

With the vehicle stationary and on level ground take firm hold of the seatbelt webbing (on the tongue side of the upper
seatbelt anchor) and withdraw sharply, the retractor should lock. Preventing further webbing release (repeat this test 3
times). Any seatbelt retractor which fails to lock must not be used and a new seatbelt must be installed.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00 or for removal and
installation/description and operation see Section 501-20.
Diagnostic Guide Inertia Reel Seatbelts
PINPOINT TEST A : BACKLOCK
CONDITIONS
A1: BACKLOCK
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Draw a maximum of 20mm of the webbing from the seatbelt retractor with moderate force. Then
release the webbing
3 Check for correct operation twice
Does the webbing move freely then retract correctly?
Yes
No
For first row seatbelt GO to Pinpoint Test C. For second and third row seatbelts GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT
CONDITIONS
B1: WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Lift the seat base or release the seat backrest as required
3 Free the trapped webbing, allow the webbing to retract Note: If the automatic locking retractor is
activated, allow the webbing to retract until the clicking stops
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : SEATBELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
CONDITIONS
C1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
1 Refer to 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim panels
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and seatbelt retractor
2 Check the webbing is not trapped or twisted and is centrally located on the seatbelt retractor spindle
3 Attempt to withdraw the webbing from the seatbelt retractor NOTE: If the seatbelt webbing is
jammed, the automatic locking retractor could be engaged
4 To release the automatic locking retractor, manually wind the webbing onto the spindle until the
automatic locking retractor deactivates (clicking stops)
5 Fully extract webbing
6 Confirm webbing guide location is correct , Confirm the fixing lugs are correctly located in the retractor
frame
7 Allow webbing to retract
Yes
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, reinstall any trim panels,
ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub. No further action required
No
PINPOINT TEST D : TWIST IN WEBBING
CONDITIONS
D1: TWIST IN WEBBING
1 Refer to section 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Twist the webbing back the correct way in the loop
3 Pass the twist through the pillar loop or escutcheon as required
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING
CONDITIONS
E1: INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING
1 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim panels
required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Remove obstructions and foreign objects ensure the webbing does not catch or rub
3 Confirm the seatbelt does not contact the wiring harness
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
PINPOINT TEST F : SEATBELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS
F1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, correctly reinstall the
seatbelt retractor ensure that the locating "T bar" and "anti rotation pins" are correctly located
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST G : D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
CONDITIONS
G1: D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub, the D loop (anchor point)
rotates correctly and if installed the confirm the height adjuster operates correctly
Yes
No
Replace as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
PINPOINT TEST H : SEATBELT BUCKLE – NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CONDITIONS
H1: SEATBELT BUCKLE – NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or tools into the buckle head
1 Visually inspect the buckle head for evidence of damage. If damaged replace as required
2 Depress the buckle release (red button) and (Using a torch) carry out visual inspection for any
evidence of debris/material or foreign objects in the buckle head
3 If required remove the pretensioner from the vehicle. Remove the seat. Remove the pretensioner from
the seat frame
4 Do not insert any objects or tools buckle head With the buckle removed invert and attempt to shake
out any debris
5 Attempt to latch the tongue in the buckle
Does the seat belt buckle operate correctly
Yes
Reinstall any components, no further action required
No
Replace the pretensioner, REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation),
Rear Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Buckle
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:


3. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation

Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
2. Torque: 9 Nm
3. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Fixings must be started by hand to avoid damaging

threads.

Safety Belt System - Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
and Installation).
2. CAUTIONS:
Discard the nut.
Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Torque: 40 Nm
3. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation

Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation

Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
NOTES:
CAUTION: Discard the nut.
Torque: 40 Nm
3. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation

Safety Belt System - Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
Removal
2. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Torque: 40 Nm
3. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System -
Passenger air bag module bolts 4.5 - 40
Restraints control module (RCM) nuts 10.5 - 93
Side air curtain module tether straps bolts 9 - 80
Side air bag module nuts 7 - 62
Occupant classification sensor control module bolts 4 - 35
C-pillar side impact sensor bolt 10.5 - 93
Front crash sensor bolt 10.5 - 93
Clock spring bolts 6 - 53
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) installations shown; RHD (right-hand drive) installations similar.
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) side air curtain
2 Passenger air bag
3 RH (right-hand) side air curtain
4 Passenger pretensioner
5 Passenger side airbag
6 RH safety belt retractor pretensioner (if fitted)
8 Driver pretensioner
9 LH safety belt retractor pretensioner
10 Driver side air bag
11 Driver air bag
Item Description
1 Bladder and pressure sensor (NAS only)
2 Safety belt tension sensor (NAS only)
3 Occupant detection sensor (all except NAS)
4 Control module (NAS only)
5 RH pressure sensor
6 RH rear impact sensor
7 LH rear impact sensor
8 LH pressure sensor
9 Driver seat position sensor
10 Front impact sensor (2 off)
11 PAD (passenger air bag deactivation) switch (where fitted)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Overview
OVERVIEW
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read all
information contained within the Service Information section of this manual. Refer to: General Service Information (100-00,
The SRS (supplemental restraint system) provides additional protection for vehicle occupants in certain impact conditions by
selective activation of twin stage driver and passenger air bags, side air bags, side air curtains and front safety belt
pretensioners. Operation of the system is controlled by a RCM (restraints control module).
The RCM receives inputs from various sensors around the vehicle to determine which devices, if any, should be activated during
an accident. The inputs include those from an occupant monitoring system for the front passenger seat, front and side impact
sensors and side pressure sensors.
In all markets except NAS, a PAD (passenger air bag deactivation) switch is a dealer fit option that allows the passenger air
bag to be disabled.
The activation status of the passenger air bag is given by an indicator on the overhead console. The status of the SRS is given
by an air bag warning indicator in the instrument cluster.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
SHEET 1 OF 2
Item Description
1 Battery
3 CJB (central junction box) (restraints relay)
4 Occupant classification system control module (NAS only)
5 Safety belt tension sensor (NAS only)
6 Occupant classification system pressure sensor (NAS only)
7 Occupant detection sensor (all except NAS)
8 Driver seat position sensor
9 Passenger safety belt buckle switch
10 Driver safety belt buckle switch
11 LH (left-hand) front impact sensor
12 RH (right-hand) front impact sensor
13 RH side pressure sensor
14 RH side impact sensor
15 LH side pressure sensor
16 LH side impact sensor
17 PAD (passenger air bag deactivation) switch (where fitted)
SHEET 2 OF 2
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB (restraints relay)
6 Passenger air bag
7 Clockspring
8 Driver air bag
9 PAD indicator
10 Passenger pretensioner
11 Driver pretensioner
12 LH side air curtain
13 Driver side air bag
14 Passenger side air bag
15 LH safety belt retractor pretensioner
16 RH safety belt retractor pretensioner (if fitted)
17 RH side air curtain
18 RCM
System Operation
In a collision, the sudden deceleration or acceleration is measured by the impact sensors and the accelerometers in the RCM.
The RCM evaluates the readings to determine the impact point on the vehicle and whether the deceleration/acceleration
readings exceed the limits for firing any of the air bags and pretensioners. During a collision, the RCM only fires the air bags
and pretensioners if the safing function confirms that the data from the impact sensor(s) indicates an impact limit has been
exceeded.
The RCM incorporates the following impact thresholds to cater for different accident scenarios:
Front impact, pretensioners.

Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 1, belt unfastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 1, belt fastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 2, belt unfastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 2, belt fastened.
Rear impact.
Driver side impact.
Passenger side impact.
Firing Strategies
The safety belt pretensioners are fired when the pretensioner impact limit is exceeded. The RCM only fires the pretensioners if
the related safety belt is fastened.
The driver and passenger air bags are only fired in a frontal impact. If an impact exceeds a stage 1 limit, but is less than the
corresponding stage 2 limit, only one inflator in each air bag is fired (stage 2 is still fired for disposal after a delay of 100 ms).
If an impact exceeds the stage 2 limit, the two inflators in each air bag are fired simultaneously.
The passenger air bag is disabled unless the front passenger seat is occupied by a large person (NAS only), or the passenger
air bag deactivation switch is on (all except NAS and Australia).
The stage 2 inflator of the driver air bag is disabled if the driver seat is forward of the switching point of the seat position
sensor.
If there is a fault with a safety belt buckle switch, the RCM assumes the related safety belt is fastened for the pretensioner
firing strategy and unfastened for the driver and passenger air bag firing strategies. If there is a fault with the occupant
classification sensor, the RCM disables the passenger air bag. If there is a fault with the passenger air bag deactivation
switch, the RCM disables the passenger air bag.
If a side impact limit is exceeded, the RCM fires the side air bag and the side head air bag on that side of the vehicle. If the
side impact limit on the front passenger side of the vehicle is exceeded, the RCM also evaluates the input from the occupant
classification sensor, and fires the side air bag only if the front passenger seat is occupied by a large person (NAS only).
If multiple impacts occur during a crash event, after responding to the primary impact the RCM will output the appropriate fire
signals in response to any further impacts if unfired units are available.
Front and Rear Impact Firing Strategy (All Except NAS)

Safety Belt Status Strategy
Front
Driver Passenger Applicable Pretensioner Driver Air Bag Passenger Air Bag
Fastened - Fired at pretensioner Fired at belt fastened threshold -
threshold
Unfastened - Not fired Fired at belt unfastened -
threshold
- Fastened Fired at pretensioner - Fired at belt fastened threshold
threshold
- Unfastened Not fired - Fired at belt unfastened
threshold
Front and Rear Impact Firing Strategy (NAS)
Safety Belt Status Passenger Seat Strategy
Driver Passenger Status Applicable Pretensioner Driver Air Bag Passenger Air Bag
Fastened - - Fired at pretensioner Fired at belt fastened -
threshold threshold
Unfastened - - Not fired Fired at belt unfastened -
threshold
- Fastened Occupied allow Fired at pretensioner - Fired at belt fastened
threshold threshold
- Fastened Unoccupied Fired at pretensioner - Not fired
inhibit/empty threshold
Safety Belt Status Passenger Seat Strategy
Driver Passenger Status Applicable Pretensioner Driver Air Bag Passenger Air Bag
- Unfastened Occupied allow Not fired - Fired at belt unfastened
threshold
- Unfastened Unoccupied Not fired - Not fired
inhibit/empty
Crash Signal
When the RCM outputs any of the fire signals it also outputs a crash signal to the CJB and the ECM on the high speed CAN.
The crash signal is also hardwired to the ECM and the CJB. On receipt of the crash signal, the ECM cuts the power supply to
the fuel pump relay and the CJB goes into crash mode. In the crash mode, the CJB:
Activates all of the unlock signals of the vehicle locking system, even if the vehicle is already unlocked.
Ignores all locking/superlocking inputs until it receives an unlock input, when it returns the locking system to normal
operation.
Activates the interior lamps. The interior lamps remain on permanently until they are manually switched off at the lamp
unit, or the CJB crash mode is switched off and they return to normal operation.
Disables the rear window child lock input until the crash mode is switched off.
Activates the hazard flashers. The hazard flashers remain on until cancelled by the hazard warning switch or the crash
mode is switched off.
The CJB crash mode is switched off by a valid locking and unlocking cycle of the locking system.
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE
The RCM is installed on the top of the transmission tunnel, in line with the B/C pillars, and controls operation of the SRS
(supplemental restraint system). The main functions of the RCM include:
Crash detection and recording.

Air bag and pretensioner firing.
Self test and system monitoring, with status indication via the air bag warning indicator and non volatile storage of
fault information.
The RCM determines which elements of the SRS are to be deployed by using two internal areas:
Crash severity evaluation.

Deployment handler.
Crash severity evaluation uses data from the RCM internal accelerometer, the front crash sensor and the safety belt buckle
switch. Based on this data, the RCM decides which level of air bag module deployment is required and forwards the information
to the second area, the deployment handler.
The deployment handler evaluates the status of the seat track position sensor and safety belt buckle sensors before a decision
is made about which restraints should finally be deployed.
Data from the side crash sensors is used by the RCM in conjunction with acceleration data from the RCM internal accelerometer
to make a deployment decision. The RCM processes the acceleration data and, subject to an impact being of high enough
severity, decides whether the side air bag module and air curtain should be deployed.
On board testing of the air bag modules, front safety belt pretensioner firing circuits, warning indicator circuits and module
status is performed by the RCM together with the storing of fault codes. The impact and pressure sensors perform basic
self-tests.
The RCM drives the air bag warning indicator via a high speed CAN signal. If the warning indicator fails, a fault code is
recorded and a warning tone is sounded in place of the indicator if a further fault occurs. The RCM also provides a temporary
back-up power supply to operate the air bag modules in the event that in crash conditions, the battery supply is lost. In the
event of a crash, it records certain data which can be accessed via the diagnostic connector.
A safing sensor in the RCM provides confirmation of an impact to verify if air bag and pretensioner activation is necessary. A
roll-over sensor monitors the lateral attitude of the vehicle. Various firing strategies are employed by the RCM to ensure that
during an accident only the appropriate air bags and pretensioners are fired. The firing strategy used also depends on the
inputs from the safety belt buckle switches and the occupant monitoring system.
An energy reserve in the RCM ensures there is always a minimum of 150 milliseconds of stored energy available if the power
supply from the ignition switch is disrupted during a crash. The stored energy is sufficient to produce firing signals for the
driver air bag, the passenger air bag and the safety belt pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on the RCM performs a self test and then performs cyclical monitoring of the system. If a fault is
detected the RCM stores a related fault code and illuminates the air bag warning indicator. The faults can be retrieved by
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment over the CAN bus. If a fault that could cause a false fire signal is detected, the RCM
disables the respective firing circuit, and keeps it disabled during a crash event.
CLOCKSPRING
The clockspring is installed on the steering column to provide the electrical interface between the fixed wiring harness of the
steering column and the components that rotate with the steering wheel.
The clockspring consists of a plastic cassette which incorporates an outer cover fixed to the steering column and an inner rotor
which turns with the steering wheel. Four securing lugs attach the cover to the multifunction switch on the steering column.
The rotor is keyed to the steering wheel. A lug on the underside of the rotor operates the self-cancelling feature of the turn
signal indicator switch. A ribbon lead, threaded on rollers in the rotor, links a connector on the cover to two connectors on the
rotor. Link leads for the driver air bag are installed in one of the connectors on the rotor.
To prevent damage to the ribbon lead, both the steering and the clockspring must be centralized when removing and installing
the clockspring or the steering wheel.
Replacement clocksprings are fitted with a rotor lock, which locks the cover to the rotor, in the central position. The rotor lock
must be removed when the replacement clockspring is installed.
DRIVER AIR BAG
The driver air bag is controlled by the RCM, which chooses between single or dual stage deployment, depending on the
occupant position and the crash severity. To reduce the risk of an air bag induced injury to a driver who is positioned close to
the steering wheel, the 690 mm diameter air bag deploys radially. The volume of the driver air bag is 57 liters.
The driver air bag has a non-azide propellant that reduces particulates and effluents. It consists of a two stage inflator with
separate chambers for the two inflation stages, each being independently activated by the RCM. It has two electrical
connectors that are color coded and mechanically keyed to the respective connector on the inflator.
PASSENGER AIR BAG
The passenger air bag is controlled by the RCM, which chooses between single or dual stage deployment, depending on the
occupant status and the crash severity. It consists of a two stage inflator with two air bag electrical connectors to
accommodate the two stage inflation. The volume of the passenger air bag is 110 - 120 liters.
The heated gas inflator consists of a high-pressure mix of clean air and hydrogen gas, triggered by two separate ignition
squibs. It produces a controlled generation of clean gas to rapidly fill the air bag. It is classified as a stored flammable gas
(not as an explosive) and as such, has less restrictive storage and transportation requirements. It produces a very clean burn
and almost no particulates and is almost free of any toxins, making disposal or recycling much easier.
SIDE AIR CURTAIN
The side air curtains have a capacity of approximately 29 liters and are fitted along both sides of the car. They deploy from
behind the headliner above the doors, and are anchored at their front and rear extremities to maintain tension across the
lower edge of the curtain. Their deployment area extends between the A and C pillar trims, passing over the upper B pillar
trim. The inflated portion of the curtain provides head protection for outer occupants in both the front and rear of the car, and
a significant level of protection against objects such as poles and trees.
The side air curtains have a rapid fill time of less than 25 ms and, when fully inflated, are approximately 150 mm thick. The
curtains are internally divided into separate chambers and, when an area of the inflated air bag is impacted, gases transfer
through internal vents to chambers further away from the impact, absorbing energy.
The side air curtains use standard hybrid inflators, which inflate the curtains with gas produced from a combination of
pyrotechnic charge and compressed gas.
SIDE AIR BAG

The side air bags are mounted in the outer sides of the front seats where they provide thorax, rib and pelvis protection. Each
side air bag consists of a folded air bag and a pyrotechnic inflator contained in a nylon fabric cover.
Side air bags inflate in less than 15 ms, and absorb the energy of an impact by venting the inflation gas through a vent in the
fabric material of the air bag. The venting used is able to discriminate between small and large sized occupants, and adjust
the cushion stiffness to suit.
IMPACT SENSORS
Impact sensors are installed in the front and both sides of the vehicle. A front impact sensor is attached to each headlamp
surround panel, below the headlamp. A side impact sensor is attached to the base of each D pillar.
The impact sensors are accelerometers that allow the RCM to detect the sudden acceleration that occurs during an impact.
IMPACT PRESSURE SENSOR
An impact pressure sensor is installed in each front door, attached to the closure panels. The pressure sensors allow the RCM
to detect the sudden pressure pulse that occurs in the front door during a side impact.
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
The seat position sensor allows the RCM to detect when the driver seat is forward of a given point on the seat track. The seat
position sensor consists of a Hall effect sensor attached to the driver seat frame. While the ignition is on, the RCM supplies
the sensor with power, and monitors the return current. When the seat frame moves forwards, the sensor moves over the edge
of the seat track, which changes the reluctance of the sensor. The change of current is detected by the RCM and used as a
switching point. The switching point is when the center of the sensor is 3 ± 4 mm from the leading edge of the seat track.
When the driver seat is forward of the switching point, the RCM increases the time delay between firing the two stages of the
inflator in the driver air bag. When the driver seat is rearward of the switching point, the RCM uses the normal time delay
between firing the two stages.
PRETENSIONERS
The pretensioners are used to tighten the front safety belts during a collision to ensure the occupants are securely held in
their seats. A pretensioner is integrated into each front safety belt buckle and attached to a bracket on the inboard side of the
seat.
RETRACTOR PRETENSIONERS
A pretensioner is incorporated into each of the safety belt retractors. They are pyrotechnic devices that are controlled by the
RCM (restraints control module) in the SRS (supplement restraint system). When deployed both the safety belt retractor
pretensioner and safety belt buckle pretensioner fire in conjunction with each other and tighten the seatbelt during a collision
to ensure the occupants are securely held in their seats.
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCHES

The buckle of each front safety belt incorporates a switch that provides a safety belt status signal to the RCM. The RCM
broadcasts the status on the high speed CAN bus for use by the safety belt reminder and beltminder systems in the
instrument cluster.
In the event of a front impact, the RCM will deploy the pretensioners provided the safety belt buckles are fastened. The
pretensioners have a lower deployment threshold than the air bags. Hence it is possible during a minor collision, which
exceeds the deployment threshold, that only the pretensioners will deploy.
www.JagDocs.com
AIR BAG WARNING INDICATOR
The air bag warning indicator consists of a red LED (light emitting diode) behind a SRS graphic in the instrument cluster.
Operation of the air bag warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the RCM to the instrument
cluster. The RCM sends the signal to illuminate the air bag warning indicator if a fault is detected, and for approximately 6
seconds during the bulb check at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
OCCUPANT MONITORING
There are two types of occupant monitoring:
In all markets except NAS and Australia, vehicles have an occupant detection system.
In NAS markets, vehicles have an occupant classification system.
Occupant Detection Sensor

For markets which have an occupant detection sensor, this has no interface with the restraints system and only provides the
belt reminder function.
Occupant Classification System
Pressure Pad and Sensor
Safety Belt Tension Sensor

Occupant Classification Module
For markets that have an occupant classification system, this provides the RCM with the occupancy status of the front
passenger seat. The restraints control module uses this and the seat buckle status in the evaluation of the firing strategy for
the passenger air bag, the passenger side air bag and the front passenger safety belt pretensioner.
The occupant classification system can determine if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, occupied by a small person, or
occupied by a large person. The occupant classification system consists of:
A pressure pad, installed under the cushion of the front passenger seat, which is connected to a pressure sensor.
A safety belt tension sensor, integrated into the anchor point of the front passenger safety belt.
An occupant classification module, installed under the front passenger seat.
The pressure pad is a silicone filled bladder. Any load on the pressure pad is detected by the pressure sensor.
The safety belt tension sensor is a strain gauge that measures the load applied by the safety belt anchor to the anchor bolt.
The sensor is located in the lower safety belt anchor point.
The occupant classification module supplies a reference voltage to the pressure sensor and the safety belt tension sensor and,
from the returned signals, measures the loads acting on the pressure pad and the safety belt tension sensor. The load
measurement from the safety belt tension sensor is used to produce a correction factor for the load measurement from the
pressure pad. The tightness of the safety belt affects the load acting on the pressure pad, so without the correction factor the
occupant classification module cannot derive an accurate occupancy status.
The occupant classification module translates the load readings into a seat occupancy status and transmits the result to the
RCM, on a dedicated high speed CAN bus link. The occupant classification module incorporates two load limits for the seat
cushion: When the load exceeds the lower limit, but is less than the upper limit, the occupant is classified as small; when the
upper limit is exceeded, the occupant is classified as large.
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION INDICATOR
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is installed on the center switch pack of the instrument panel. When appropriate,
the indicator illuminates to advise front seat occupants that the passenger air bag is disabled. Operation of the indicator is
controlled by the RCM. The RCM illuminates the indicator when:
There is a fault with the passenger air bag firing circuit(s).

The passenger air bag is deactivated with the PAD switch (where fitted) and the front passenger seat is occupied.
Required by passenger seat occupant classification (where fitted).
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION SWITCH (ALL EXCEPT NAS)
Where fitted, the PAD switch provides a method of manually disabling the passenger air bag. The switch is installed in the
front passenger end of the instrument panel and operated by the emergency key.
When the PAD switch is operated, it changes a ground connection between two pins in the connectors of the RCM. When the
PAD switch is selected to OFF, the RCM disables the passenger air bag and, if the front passenger seat is occupied, illuminates
the PAD indicator in the overhead console.
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
For a detailed description of the Supplemental Restraints system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System)
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation),
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation),
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (Description and Operation).
Given the potential for damage/injury, the preferred method of diagnosis is the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and
even when using this, the following safety information should be followed at all times:
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on the SRS system
or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS module. It is possible for the power from the metre battery to trigger the
activation of the module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the SRS system
or components.
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
Power Supply Depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Disconnect the battery leads, ground first.
3. Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge.
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs in the manual. Refer to the relevant

Confirm the function of the warning lamp (if the warning lamp is inoperative, system faults will be signalled by
an audible chime)
Visual Inspection
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories which Fuses

may affect or obstruct the function of the SRS system Wiring harness
Check the condition of trim, etc at the SRS system components Make sure all electrical connector(s) are
Sensor(s) engaged correctly on the air bag circuits
Pretensioner(s) Make sure the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Air bag module(s) is correctly installed
Occupant detection/classification sensors Warning lamp bulb(s)
Seat position sensor Impact sensor(s)
Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Air bag module(s)
Air bag deactivation switch
Air bag deactivation warning lamp
Occupant detection/classification sensors
Seat position sensor
Clockspring
the next step.
Faults in SRS harnesses would normally mean replacement of the relevant harness. SRS harness repairs are not
recommended
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General Information,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Occupant Classification System (OCS) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Disposal
General Procedures
Deployed Air Bag
1. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air
bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
Deployed air bag modules are to be disposed of as special waste and

must comply with local environmental requirements, if in doubt, contact
Authority for disposal requirements.
2. NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal, and/or recycling of air

bag module components must be carried out in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited
to, those governing building and fire codes, environmental protection,
occupational health and safety, and transportation.
Modules removed and deployed by Jaguar service are to be returned to

the importer for disposal.
Undeployed Air Bag — Inoperative
1. WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim
cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce
the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to
NOTE: All inoperative air bag modules have been placed on the
Mandatory Return List. All discolored or damaged air bag modules must
be treated the same as any inoperative live air bag being returned.
Remove the inoperative driver air bag module or passenger air bag
module. For additional information
For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
or
For additional information, refer to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20B
in this section.
Undeployed Air Bag — Scrapped Vehicle

Remote Deployment
1. WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental

restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or
deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk
of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this
Remote deployment is to be carried out outdoors with all personnel

at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the
loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection
is required. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim
cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air
bag can cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. Failure to follow
Equipment required: Universal deployment tool-Part N° 418-135 and 12V

Battery.
2. The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors away from

other personnel.
3. Remove any loose debris from around air bag. Make sure that no
flammable liquids are present.
4. Disconnect the battery ground and positive cables.
5. Disconnect the relevant air bag module electrical connector.
6. Connect the appropriate adaptor lead to the restraint device.
7. Connect the deployment lead to the adaptor lead. Pass wire of the
deployment tool through window, close all doors, leave window with lead
for deployment tool open.
8. WARNING: Before proceeding, make sure precautions have been

taken to warn personnel of a possible loud noise upon activation. Do not
allow anybody to approach closer to restraint device than six meters.
Move as far from restraint device as possible and connect the tool clips
to a 12V vehicle battery.
9. WARNING: Do not handle the deployed device immediately after

activation - it may be hot. Allow the unit to cool for at least 20 minutes.
Cooling modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not create a fire with spilled liquids or other debris. Failure to
Deploy the module by depressing both switches on the tool. If activation

does not occur, disconnect battery from tool and seek advise from Jaguar
Engineering and wait for further instructions.
10. Repeat procedure for all air bags in vehicle.
11. The vehicle is now to be scrapped in the normal manner with modules
installed.
Disposal of live air bag modules for all air bags, using tyres
1. Equipment required: Deployment tool 418-S135, Battery (12V), Safety

goggles to BS2092 grade 2, Rubber gloves to PrEN 374 class 2, Ear
protectors that have been measured to BS.EN 24869, Particulate
respirator to EN 149 grade FFP2S
2. The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors, away from

other personnel.
3. Stack four scrap tyres, securing together with heavy gauge wire or cable.
while disconnected from any electrical power source, connect deployment
harness and place air bag adaptor portion under tyre stack, ready for
connection to air bag.
4. WARNING: Power must not be connected during this step. Failure

CAUTION: Make sure the connector is not in contact with the

inflator or it will be damaged during the test.
Connect air bag to air bag connector, make sure the locking sleeve is
fully engaged. position the air bag with the cover facing upwards.
5. Make sure battery connections of deployment harness are ten meters

away from the tyre stack
6. Remove any loose from around the air bag . Make sure that no
flammable liquids are present.
7. WARNING: Before proceeding, make sure precautions have been

taken to warn personnel of a possible loud noise upon activation. Do not
allow anybody to approach closer to restraint device than six meters.
Move as far from restraint device as possible and connect the tool clips
to a 12V vehicle battery.
8. WARNING: Do not handle the deployed device immediately after

activation - it may be hot. Allow the unit to cool for at least 20 minutes.
Cooling modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not create a fire with spilled liquids or other debris. Failure to
Deploy the module by depressing both switches on the tool. If activation

does not occur, disconnect battery from tool and seek advise from Jaguar
Engineering and wait for further instructions.
9. Allow the air bag to cool for at least 20 minutes. Cooling modules should
be continuously monitored to make sure heat generated a fire with
spilled liquids or other debris.
10. Remove the air bag from the tyre stack and seal in a plastic bag, ready
for disposal.
11. In the event of any problems or queries arising from this procedure,
contact Jaguar Engineering.
Supplemental Restraint System - Clockspring
Special Tool(s)
211-326
Locking Tool, Clockspring
Removal
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an
air bag module.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury
in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant
combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction
Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result in
personal injury. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be replaced, not repainted.
Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. If
damaged, replace the sensor whether or not the air bag is deployed.
disconnect the battery ground cable and wait for two minutes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTES:
1. Make the SRS system safe.

2. CAUTION: Make sure that special tool 211-326 is installed to the
clockspring.
Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6. Torque: 6 Nm
7.
9. Remove the special tool from the clockspring.
10.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is installed to the

clockspring.
Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is centered

and pointing vertically (make sure that the steering wheel
has remained in the 12 o'clock position and that it has
not been turned by +/- 360 degrees) prior to the
steering wheel installation. On removal of the special tool,
keep the clockspring cables taught to prevent the cassette
moving from the set position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the component.

ahead position, failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.

Supplemental Restraint System - C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
All vehicles


replacing any air bag supplementary restraints system (SRS)
components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the
battery ground cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this
3. Refer to: Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
NOTE: If equipped.
All vehicles
5.
6.
7.
NOTE: If equipped.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
All vehicles
10.
11.
All vehicles

aid installation.
13.
Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

installed.

Supplemental Restraint System - Crash Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.


Torque: 10.5 Nm
Installation
1. Install is the reverse of removal.

Supplemental Restraint System - Driver Air Bag Module
Special Tool(s)
JLR-501-168
Remover, Driver Airbag Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at least two minutes after
disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any
component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module. Failure to follow this
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the supplemental restraint
system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with the bag and trim
cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches which have been ground
bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component. Failure to follow this
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover and air bags. Do not
for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument panel. Install a new component. Failure to
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
2.
3. NOTES:
An
audible
click can be
heard when
the airbag
module has
been
released
from each
side of the
steering
wheel.
Gently
pull on the
side of the
airbag
module
which has
been
released
until it has
been
withdrawn
sufficiently
to clear the
spring clip.
Special
Tool(s):
JLR-501-168

5.
6. NOTES:
Gently pull on the side of the airbag module which has been released
until it has been withdrawn sufficiently to clear the spring clip.
An audible click can be heard when the airbag module has been
released from each side of the steering wheel.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness is installed to its original

position.
9. WARNING: Driver air bag module installation can be confirmed by
hearing 2 audible clicks, 1 for each clip.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are correctly routed.

Supplemental Restraint System - Front Door Side Impact Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.


4.
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Passenger Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3. Torque: 4.5 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNINGS:
air bag module.
personal injury.
disconnect the battery ground cable and wait two minutes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in


3.
4.
5. Torque: 10.5 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Seat Position Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.


3.
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the sensor is correctly installed.

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
NOTES:

2. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10, Removal and Installation).

4.
5.
6.
8. Torque: 5 Nm
9.


prior to removal.
Torque: 7 Nm

prior to removal.
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Curtain Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
air bag module.
Take extra care when handling supplemental restraint system (SRS) components.
air bag module.
personal injury.
NOTES:
and Installation).

and Installation).
9. Torque: 2 Nm
10.
11.
13. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
14. NOTES:

Torque: 2 Nm
15.

technician.
technician.
CAUTIONS:

removal.



prior to removal.
NOTES:


damage.

access.
NOTES:


Torque: 9 Nm

NOTES:


Torque: 9 Nm
24. Torque: 9 Nm
25. Torque: 9 Nm
26. Torque: 9 Nm
27. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the component.

removal.
Do not allow the side air curtain module to twist.

the component.

28. NOTE: If the side air curtain module has deployed,

new retaining brackets must be installed.
Torque: 9 Nm
NOTES:
Make sure the locating tang is installed in the correct

position.

Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Supplemental Restraint System - Occupant Detection Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Front Seat Control Switch (501-10, Removal and Installation).
3.

All vehicles

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
15.
16.
All vehicles
17.
Installation

shown.
2. NOTES:
illustrated.
shown.

shown.


Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) hood actuator
3 LH (left-hand) hood actuator
4 LH pedestrian impact sensor
5 RH pedestrian impact sensor
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - Overview
OVERVIEW
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read all
information contained within the Service Information section of this manual. Refer to: General Service Information (100-00,
The pedestrian protection system is designed to mitigate injuries in a pedestrian collision with the vehicle. It does this by
utilizing a pair of pyrotechnic actuators to lift the hood away from the engine, creating a cushioned impact between the
pedestrian and the vehicle.
The pedestrian protection system is controlled by the RCM (restraints control module), but operates independently of the SRS
(supplemental restraint system).
Pedestrian protection is also provided by passive protection integrated into the bumper system and the structure of the hood.
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System - System
Control Diagram
Item Description
1 Battery
4 LH (left-hand) hood actuator
5 RH (right-hand) hood actuator
6 RH pedestrian impact sensor
7 LH pedestrian impact sensor
System Operation
The pedestrian protection system is operational when the vehicle is traveling at speeds between approximately 20 and 45
km/h (12.4 and 28 mph). A vehicle speed signal is received by the RCM over the high speed CAN bus.
The system is able to determine if contact is made with a pedestrian or another object, such as a traffic cone, using signals
from the pedestrian impact sensors. When the system determines contact is made with a pedestrian, it fires the hood
actuators to lift the rear of the hood approximately 130 mm (5.2 in.) within 35 ms of the 'fire' signal.
When an impact condition is registered, the RCM outputs an impact signal on the high speed CAN bus. This signal is used by
the CJB to initiate the hazard warning lamps. If this occurs, the hazard warning lamp switch is disabled for the remainder of
the current ignition cycle.
If the RCM detects a fault with the system, it outputs a message on the high speed CAN bus to the instrument cluster
message center. On receipt of this, the message center will display the message Check Pedestrian System.
When the vehicle is delivered from the factory the pedestrian protection system is in a safe 'plant' mode. Normal operating
mode must be activated using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment during the PDI (pre-delivery inspection) prior to delivery
to the customer.
Failure Mode Detection
In service, if any fault is detected, the message center displays the warning Check Pedestrian System.
The hood deployment actuators are non-serviceable components. If they are replaced their bar code labels must be read and
recorded in the service database against the VIN (vehicle identification number) for security purposes.
After deployment of the pedestrian protection system, the vehicle must be stopped as soon as it is safe to do so. The hazard
warning lamps will be activated and can only be switched off by pressing the engine START/STOP button to turn the engine off
and on again. A warning message Check Pedestrian System will appear in the message center and the vehicle should be
transported to the nearest dealer/authorised repairer. The vehicle must not be driven when the hood has been deployed.
HOOD ACTUATORS
The hood actuators are pyrotechnic air bags installed on mounting brackets next to the hood hinges. When the hood actuators
are deployed, interface plates on the actuators contact reinforced areas on the hood, and raise the rear of the hood.
PEDESTRIAN IMPACT SENSORS
The pedestrian impact sensors are accelerometers mounted on the rear of the front bumper. The RCM uses the sensor inputs to
monitor for low level impacts typical of pedestrian accidents.
HOOD
The two-piece hood is fabricated from aluminum. The inner panel has a hexagonal structure, which allows the energy from an
impact to be absorbed effectively across the full area of the hood. The hood also has sufficient strength in the rear cross-beam
to accept the forces from the actuators and maintain a stable condition.
When deployed, the front hood latches act as the pivot points and the rear hinges allow a controlled degree of upward
movement before retaining the hood at the end of its deployment, thus limiting its total upward travel and stabilizing its
position.
Hood Hinges
Item Description
A Non-deployed hinge
B Deployed hinge
1 Firing pin
2 Stabilizing link
3 hood leaf
4 Intermediate leaf
5 Body leaf
The hood hinges incorporate a number of leaves. This includes a leaf attached to the body, an intermediate leaf and a leaf
attached to the hood. During normal operation the hinge opens and closes using the hood and intermediate leaves. These are
attached together by a firing pin. When the actuators are fired the firing pins fail. This allows the hood and intermediate
leaves to separate and deploy the hood upwards.
The hinges deform during the deployment process and will need to be replaced.
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System
For a detailed description of the Pedestrian Protection System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation) /
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation) /
Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED
BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT TWO MINUTES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS
INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Do not use a multimeter to probe the pedestrian protection system actuators. It is possible for the power from the
multimeter battery to trigger the activation of the actuator. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:
account.
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the pedestrian
protection system or components
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to pedestrian protection system circuits are
not acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
After 5 hood deployment events, a new Restraints Control Module (RCM) and wiring harness must be installed.
Visual Inspection
Hood Fuses
Hood hinges Wiring harnesses and connectors
Hood deployment controls Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Impact sensors
Hood deployment controls
the next step
Symptom Chart
Symptom Message Possible Causes Action

Hood CHECK
deployed PEDESTRIAN Low speed collision WARNING: The vehicle must not be driven if the hood has been
SYSTEM with pedestrian or deployed.
other object
NOTE: Repairs due to a collision are not warrantable.
Check the vehicle for collision damage. Repair as necessary
Hood not CHECK

deployed PEDESTRIAN Restraints system
NOTE: The vehicle may be driven if a pedestrian protection
SYSTEM fault
system fault is present but the hood has not been deployed.
Check the vehicle for collision damage. Repair as necessary.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
the restraints control module for related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
4. WARNING: Allow a period of 10 minutes to elapse

after disconnecting the battery before undertaking any work
on the SRS.
Torque: 3.2 Nm
Installation

Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.

Installation).
4. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH
Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.

Installation).
Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Body Repairs - General Information - Body Repairs
General Information
Introduction
The body plays a significant role in the increasing trend of ever more rapidly changing model variants. The different customer
groups are strongly influenced by the design and shape of the body. At the same time the stability of the body plays the most
important part in ensuring passenger and driver safety. Lightweight construction, alternative materials, composite materials,
plastics and appropriate joining processes are all design features that characterise modern Jaguar vehicle bodies.
In terms of manufacturing technology, modern safety cell bodies can be produced almost without any problems. Jaguar
guarantee high quality standards by ensuring that mechanical strength properties are tried and tested in numerous computer
simulations, crash tests, by testing materials and by employing sophisticated manufacturing technologies. In the event of
repairs it is vital that the production quality standards are upheld. This requires a well-equipped workshop, and places
particular emphasis on the qualifications of the workshop technicians. Up-to-date knowledge of current manufacturing
technologies and continuous training on new repair methods and techniques are vital for high-quality body repairs. The model-
specific repair manuals and the general repair techniques provide valuable support when undertaking body repairs.
Always follow the repair instructions published in this manual. Failure to observe this instruction can result in serious
impairment of vehicle safety. All specified safety requirements must be met after the work has been carried out.
Contents
This document includes technical data and information for the all new Jaguar XJ aluminium range. The information contained
within is valid at the time of production and incorporates:
Who should use this information?
Category A and B definition
Accident damage and diagnosis
Impact effects on the body
Planning a repair
Estimating
Identifying the correct Jaguar Approved Body Repair Facilities
Obtaining spare parts
Equipment
Aluminium information
Galvanic corrosion and housekeeping
Panel replacement times
Fixings
Bonding
Materials
Aluminium Welding
Tolerances and gap specification
Body alignment
The methods described for panel replacement operations have been obtained from a study of physical repair operations.
In line with Jaguars continuous improvement programme, information and data contained will be updated periodically.
All activities described within are based on the use of genuine Jaguar Parts, tools and approved materials.
Who should use this information?
The information and repair methods listed are designed as an aid for Jaguar Approved Body Repair Facilities achieving the
Jaguar approved Bodyshop Operating Standards. The relevant section should be read completely before commencing any
repairs. Only technicians who have successfully completed the approved XJ aluminium range training programme should work
on the model. Jaguar Approved Bodyshop Operating Standards require that the skills of technicians be regularly assessed and
that any training needs identified are addressed within a reasonable time. This information complements the Jaguar training
programme.
The authorised repair network is divided into category A and B. The following describes the process required to identify
category A or B damage.
Definition of category A and B
Category A
NOTE: Specific equipment and facilities are required to carry out Category A repairs, see the equipment section of this
manual.
Damage that requires panel(s) to be replaced with any one or combination of the following procedures:
Welded panel
Bonded panel
Panel secured with fixings
The following list identifies Category A procedures:
Category A procedures
Fender apron closing panel front section

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Closing Panel Front Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Fender apron panel

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Fender apron panel closing panel

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Fender apron panel front section

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Front side member

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Front side member and suspension top mount assembly

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member and Suspension Top Mount Assembly (501-27 Front End Sheet
Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Front side member closing panel

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Closing Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Front side member closing panel section

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Closing Panel Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front side member section

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Front side member to deformation element bracket

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member To Deformation Element Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Suspension top mount

For additional information, refer to: Suspension Top Mount (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Roof panel
For additional information, refer to: Roof Panel (501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
A-pillar outer panel

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
A-pillar reinforcement
For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rocker panel rear section

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel Rear Section (501-29, Removal and Installation).
Back panel
For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Quarter panel
For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Quarter panel lower extension

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel Lower Extension (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rear floor side extension

For additional information, refer to: Rear Floor Side Extension (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rear side member closing panel section

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Rear side member section

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Section (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rear wheelhouse outer

For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheelhouse Outer (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Spare wheel well

For additional information, refer to: Spare Wheel Well (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Category B
Damage associated to bolt on panel(s) that are replaced, or light surface damage to exterior cosmetic panels.
The following list identifies Category B procedures:
Category B procedures
Front bumper cover

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Front bumper
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Side member deformation element

For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation Element (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Hood
For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
Hood hinge
For additional information, refer to: Hood Hinge (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Hood latch panel

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Hood latch panel mounting panel

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Front fender
For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Front door
For additional information, refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Rear door
For additional information, refer to: Rear Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Luggage compartment lid hinge

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Hinge (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Rear bumper cover

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Rear bumper
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Accident damage and diagnosis
General notes:
Exact diagnosis of the extent of the damage enables proper repair planning
All body repairs must be carried out in accordance with the guidelines in this Body Repair Manual
The stability and strength properties of the body must be taken into account during body repairs. The body has exact
defined deformation patterns that must not be affected by any repair work
For instance, the crumple zones absorb the bulk of the impact energy. If any unprofessional repair techniques or
methods are used in these areas then this can pose a fundamental threat to vehicle safety
Hidden damage:
As well as looking at external indicators like flaked off paint, it is vital to check for hidden body damage or deformation
that is not visible from the outside. Large attached parts like bumpers and inner fenders often need to be removed to
allow accurate assessment of damage to underlying body parts
Gap dimensions offer another alternative for diagnosis by visual inspection. If any changes or misaligned edges are
apparent, then this usually indicates that the dimensions of the affected part are incorrect
Impact effects on the body
It is possible to deduce the overall extent of damage from the direction and magnitude of the impact forces. This does
however require extensive body-specific knowledge.
If, for instance, an impact occurs at the front left-hand side member, then the right-hand side member is usually also affected
as a result of the rigid body-shell design (crossmember). Often the length of this side member will not have changed, but
because of the rigid body-shell design it may have moved from its original position (often only by a very small amount). If any
deviations are present this can usually be detected by checking the gap dimensions between door and fender or by checking for
changes in dimension.
In the case of more severe impacts, the front part of the body cannot absorb all of the impact energy, and the passenger cell
is also deformed. Here the impact energy is transferred via the side member to the A-pillar. This results in deformations in the
area of the roof and the door rocker panel.
Planning a repair
The following decisions have to be made before the repairs are started
Does the vehicle need to be put on a body repair jig?
Does the body need to be measured?
Do aggregates like engine or axles need to be removed?
Which body parts need to be renewed?
Which body parts can be repaired?
Estimating
The authorised repair network is divided into category A and B. This section describes the process required to identify category
A or B damage. Should damage be identified as category A the vehicle should be referred to the nearest category A facility.
In line with the Jaguar continuous improvement programme, information and data contained in this manual will be updated
through Jaguar technical bulletins.
The estimating process
Step 1:
Visual inspection, assess overall vehicle condition. Has damage travelled, distorting internal structural panels?
This is a visual check of the complete vehicle.
Possible indicators:
Panel misalignment
Panel gaps no longer uniform
Hinged panels catch on locks
Exterior cosmetic panels show signs of stress distortion
Customer describes unusual driving characteristics post incident
If structural distortion is visible, vehicle body alignment should be checked/corrected on a body repair jig, refer to category A
facility.
If no visual indications of damage transfer, go to Step 2.

Step 2:
If no visual signs indicate distortion to internal structural panels, but the customer is concerned with unusual driving
characteristics post incident, and there is no damage to the suspension. Vehicle body alignment should be checked using
four-wheel alignment geometry equipment.
If structural distortion is identified refer to category A facility.
Step 3:
If there is no sign or concern regarding vehicle body alignment, focus on the local area of damage.
Do any of the panels require replacement?
If no, go to Step 4.
If yes, are any of the panels secured with:
Bonding adhesive?
Fixings?
Weld?
If yes, refer to category A facility.
Step 4
Do any of the panels require welding i.e. ripped or torn aluminium panel?
If no, go to Step 5.
If yes, refer to category A facility.
Step 5
Can the damage be repaired by hand using serrated spoon, dolly, file and/or hot air?
If no, refer to category A facility.
Identifying the correct Jaguar Approved Body Repair Facilities
Through extensive research, Jaguar has identified the most appropriate method to rectify aftermarket damage. It is key to
safety and vehicle integrity that only the approved methods, materials and equipment are used.
Issues that could arise from the use of non approved methods, materials and equipment include:
Warranty invalidation
Safety
Galvanic corrosion
Therefore category A damage should always be referred to a category A Jaguar Approved Body Repair Facility.
Obtaining spare parts
The availability of spare parts often determines how easily the body repairs can be carried out. The following procedure is
recommended:
Obtain all the data for the vehicle, including type, vehicle identification number, trim code, engine identification letters,
initial registration etc
Establish all of the metal parts that need to be renewed
Establish all of the attached parts that need to be renewed, including small parts like rivets, clips etc
Equipment
All Jaguar approved body repair facilities are expected to be equipped in line with Jaguar Body and Paint Centre of Excellence
Operating Standards.
The approved body equipment for the all new XJ aluminium range is listed as either:
Category A
Category B
All approved equipment is available on a Worldwide basis from:

Country Phone Fax
Austria +800-291714 +800-291694
Belgium (flemish) 00800-36733731 00800-36733292
Belgium (french) 0800-36733732 0800-36733292
Denmark +800-36733732 +800-36733292
Finland +800-36733732 +800-36733292
France 0800-904986 0800-901329
Germany 0800-3673373 0800-3673329
Greece 00800-49129046 00800-49129057
Hungary +800-36733732 +800-36733292
Ireland 1800-409574 1800-409580
Italy 0800-790959 0800-780959
Netherlands 00800-36733732 00800-36733292
Norway +800-36733732 +800-36733292
Poland 00800-4911241 00800-4911240
Portugal +800-36733732 +800-36733292
Spain 900-998303 900-998304
Sweden +800-36733732 +800-36733292
Swiss french 00800-36733732 00800-36733292
Swiss German 00800-36733731 00800-36733291
Turkey 00800-44910087 00800-44910096
UK 0800-214390 0800-281705
All other markets +49 2203 106199 +49 2203 106241
A copy of the approved equipment standards for category 'A' and 'B' repair facilities is available on request from:
Jaguar Equipment Programme (JEP)
Unit 6
Wollaston Crescent
Burnt Mills Industrial Estate
Basildon
Essex
SS13 1QD
0800 214390
Alternatively, you can access the programme via the website: www.eqseurope.com
Aluminium information
The design of the modern motor vehicle attempts to overcome two conflicting needs:
Fuel economy - lighter, aerodynamic and fuel sensitive technology

High levels of comfort - this often equates to higher specifications and more accessories
Aluminium alloy is the ideal material to meet these demands; it provides a lighter vehicle body with improved rigidity.
aluminium is different from traditional steel, with the correct knowledge and suitable tools it is easily repaired.
There are two aluminium alloys discussed in this manual, the attributes detailed in the following table should be considered
when deciding to repair or replace:
6111 5754
Material 6000 Series is a Magnesium/Silicon/Copper 5000 Series is an aluminium alloy with Magnesium content
Description aluminium alloy
Location on This alloy is used mainly in the outer body Internal structural panels Thickness: 1.0 - 3.0mm
Vehicle panels. Thickness: 0.9 - 2.0mm
Attributes High dent resistance Strength and durability
Repairability Yes - Light damage only
NOTE: All repairs to 5754 are restricted to Category A
Jaguar approved Body Repair Facilities only.
Yes - Light damage only. Limited straightening is acceptable

Heat During Yes - caution material sensitive to heat. Range: Yes - must be heated to maintain original alloy properties.
Repair 140 - 160°C Ideal panel temperature: 150°C Ideal panel temperature: 250°C
Notes Equipment: Hot air gun. Use panel temperature Equipment: Heat inducer. Use panel temperature indicator
indicator strips strips. Heat must be applied and maintained during the
straightening process
Other materials are used in the construction of the all new XJ aluminium range, however, repair of these materials is not
covered as they fall outside the scope of this manual.
Steel, (including Bake Hardened (BH) and High Strength Low Alloy (HSLA): Used in seat belt anchorages, hinge
reinforcements and various small brackets and mountings.
Magnesium Die Cast Alloy (AM60B): Used in the hood latch panel.
Plastics: Used in the front fender support bracket and for reinforcements in the B-pillar and rear side member.
The following illustrations identify the aluminium alloys and other materials used in body construction.
Item Description
1 Bodyshell
Body closures - front door
Item Material code Material description

1 6060-T4 6000 Series aluminium alloy
2 5754NG 5000 Series aluminium alloy
3 HPDC High Pressure Die Cast Aluminium
6 5182 5000 Series aluminium alloy
7 Boron Boron Steel
9 MS1-3 Maraging steel
11 Steel Steel
12 Steel Steel
13 Steel Steel
Body closures - rear door

14 Steel Steel
15 Steel Steel
16 Steel Steel
Roof panels

Front end panels

4 5754-NG 5000 Series aluminium alloy
11 Steel Steel
Front end panels - continued

2 HSLA340 High Strength Low Alloy Steel - 340MPa

7 PA66-GF35 Plastic/Glass fibre
11 AM60B Magnesium die cast alloy
13 6014-T6/7 6000 Series aluminium alloy
14 GDC Gravity Die-Cast Aluminium

Side panels

www.JagDocs.com
Side panels - continued

10 Plastic Plastic
14 BH220 Bake Hardened Steel - 220MPa
Rear end panels

5 Steel Steel
Rear end panels - continued
3 Steel Steel
6 Steel Steel
10 Steel Steel
12 Steel Steel
15 Plastic
20 Steel Steel
21 Steel Steel
22 Steel Steel
Floor panels - rear

2 Steel Steel
4 Steel Steel
6 Steel Steel
7 Steel Steel
10 GDC Gravity Die-Cast Aluminium
11 Steel Steel
12 Steel Steel
14 Steel Steel
16 Steel Steel
18 Plastic
23 Steel Steel
25 Steel Steel
Floor panels - centre

5 Steel Steel
6 Steel Steel
17 Steel Steel
24 Steel Steel
25 Steel Steel
Galvanic corrosion and housekeeping
Galvanic corrosion is the cross-contamination of dissimilar metals, in this case aluminium and steel. Avoidance of galvanic
corrosion is an important issue to be considered in the repair of aluminium bodied vehicles. Precautions to prevent the
contamination of exposed bare aluminium surfaces should be taken. Good housekeeping and cleanliness should be adopted
throughout repairs and especially prior to welding, pre-treatment and adhesive bonding. The repair environment requires
control and protection from dust and debris from conventional steel body repairs. All equipment must be clearly identified and
used solely on aluminium. Tools should be kept clean and in good order. Steel fastenings are coated to prevent galvanic
corrosion. Fastenings should be examined during repairs and where damaged or suspect must be renewed. The use of graphite,
penetrating oil, or copper based anti-seize compounds upon the steel fixings is not recommended.
Panel replacement times
Panel replacement times are available for the following:
Front end sheet metal.

For additional information, refer to: Front End Sheet Metal (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
Operation).
Side panel sheet metal.

For additional information, refer to: Side Panel Sheet Metal (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
Operation).
Rear end sheet metal.

For additional information, refer to: Rear End Sheet Metal (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
Operation).
Roof sheet metal.

For additional information, refer to: Roof (501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and Operation).
Fixings
There are five groups of fixings used on the all new XJ aluminium range, other than conventional nuts and bolts. It is
important that the correct procedures are followed for the removal and replacement of these fixings and, where applicable, the
correct tools are used.
Self-Piercing Rivet (SPR)
Hemlok (rivet)
Monobolt (rivet)
Countersunk Monobolt (rivet)
Torx Screw and Rivnut

Self-Piercing Rivet (SPR)
Self-Piercing Rivets are available in various sizes dependant on the size of the stack of panels to which they are fitted. A stack
refers to the combined gauge of the panels being Rivetted. The following table identifies the sizes and part numbers available:
NOTE: It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing by referencing this table prior to installation.
Size Stack Jaguar Service Number

4.8mm x 5.0mm 3.0mm C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm 4.0mm C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm 5.0mm C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm 5.5mm C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm 6.0mm C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm 6.5mm C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm 8.0mm C2C 20595
Removal
The ESN50 is the approved removal tool for Self Piercing Fixings. The ESN50 can be used with an optional, larger, 200mm C
frame for improved access. Where tool access is impossible, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Remove all
debris.
Installation
The ESN50 is the approved installation tool for Self Piercing Fixings. Where the original panel is being refitted, the new fixings
should be placed adjacent to the original. Only where the ESN50 cannot be used, or there is insufficient space on the panel,
should the fixings be replaced with Hemloks, unless the repair method dictates otherwise.
Using the ESN50
Make sure there is access for the ESN50 on both sides of the fixing to be removed/installed, including the optional C frame if
required.
Removal: Align the plunger and anvil over the fixing and depress the trigger. Depressing the trigger will allow the plunger to
act on the fixing and remove it from the panel.
NOTE: Prior to replacing a self piercing fixing, a test, using identical materials from waste panels, should be performed,
to make sure that all settings are correct and an acceptable joint has been achieved.
Installation: Load new fixing into ESN50. Align the ESN50 over the fixing position and depress the trigger. As the trigger is
depressed the ESN50 will clamp itself onto the work piece and install the fixing.
Hemlok (rivet)
NOTE: It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing by referencing the following table prior to installation.
Hemloks are available in various sizes dependant on the size of the stack of panels to which they are fitted. A stack refers to
the combined gauge of the panels being Rivetted. The following table identifies the sizes and part numbers available:
Size Stack Jaguar Service Number

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2C-45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C-36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C-36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C-36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm tbc
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mm C2C-36008
Removal
Hemloks are not used in production, however, if a previous repair has been carried out they may be present. Remove the centre
of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre using a hardened centre punch.
Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Remove all debris.
Installation
The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Hemloks. Prior to replacement make sure the fixing hole has been drilled
to 6.5mm, using a Cryobit drill bit and all debris has been removed.
Using the Genesis G4
Make sure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed. Check that you have the correct size
Hemlok for replacement and insert it into the Genesis G4. Use the weight of the Genesis G4 to apply light pressure as the
Hemlok is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will tighten the Hemlok in the hole, the wasted stud will be ejected
into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined pressure is reached.
Monobolt (rivet)
Removal
Remove the centre of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre using a
hardened centre punch. Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Remove all
debris.
Installation
The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Monobolts. Prior to replacement make sure the fixing hole has been drilled
to 6.5mm, using Cryobit drill bit and all debris has been removed.
Make sure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed. Insert a new Monobolt into the Genesis
G4, (there is only one size of Monobolt used on the all new XJ aluminium Range). Use the weight of the Genesis G4 to apply
light pressure as the Monobolt is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will tighten the Monobolt in the hole, the
wasted stud will be ejected into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined pressure is reached.
Countersunk Monobolt (rivet)
Countersunk Monobolts are used in replacement where a Self-Piercing Rivet, (SPR), cannot be replicated and where a Hemlok
cannot be used because a flush surface is required.
Removal
Countersunk Monobolts are not used in production, however, if a previous repair has been carried out they may be present.
Remove the centre of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre using a
hardened centre punch. Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Remove all
debris.
Installation
The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Countersunk Monobolts. Prior to replacement make sure the fixing hole has
been drilled to 6.5mm, using Cryobit drill bit, the hole has been countersunk, using a countersink drill bit and all debris has
been removed.
Make sure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed. Insert a new Countersunk Monobolt into
the Genesis G4, (there is only one size of Countersunk Monobolt used on the all new XJ aluminium Range). Use the weight of
the Genesis G4 to apply light pressure as the Countersunk Monobolt is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will
tighten the Countersunk Monobolt in the hole, the wasted stud will be ejected into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined
pressure is reached.
Torx Screw and Rivnut
A Torx Screw and Rivnut are used where the fitment of a Hemlok would give a poor cosmetic appearance. There are also
occasions where the Torx Screw and Rivnut replaces a Monobolt, where there is no access for the Genesis G4. The Rivnut acts
as the thread.
Description Jaguar Service Number

Rivnut (G) C2C 10348
Torx Screw (J) C2G 1964
Removal
The removal of the Torx Screw is carried out using a T30 Torx Driver. The Rivnut is not an original fixing.
Installation
The Torx Screw is installed using a T30 Torx Driver. The Rivnut is installed using the Wurth HES412 Rivet Nut Thread Setter,
(Part No: 964948900).
Bonding
This section provides information on the bonded joints used in repair throughout the all new XJ aluminium body. The following
topics are covered:
Equipment
Materials
Bonding Pre Treatment
Bonding Application
It is a pre-requisite that any person undertaking any repairs which involve panel bonding has attended Jaguar Approved
Training and has achieved the correct skill level to undertake these processes. Bonding is classed as a Category 'A' repair.
Equipment
The approved bonding equipment consists of:
Pyrosil gas applicator kit
Approved two-pack adhesive applicator
Bonding Pre Treatment
Pre-treating the panels to be bonded, as described in this section, promotes the improved adhesion of the bonding adhesive.
The pre-treatment is carried out using the approved "Pyrosil kit". The kit contains all of the equipment required to perform the
pre-treatment process.
CAUTION: Bonding without pre-treatment will reduce the performance of the joint.
The pre-treatment application is a two stage process:
Chemical application via a flame
Coupling Agent
Performing the Pre-treatment Application
CAUTION: Apply caution when using a naked flame. Remove all risk of combustion. Do not overheat the alloy. Move the
flame over the work piece at a constant velocity.
The application is colourless and has no visual indication.
Remove any original adhesive, or E-Coat from new panels
Clean surface to be treated using approved pre-cleaner/degreaser
Using the Pyrosil torch, pass the flame, (use the blue tip which is the oxidisation flame), across the surface of the joint
Immediately brush coupling agent (primer) onto panel surface and allow to dry
CAUTION: Apply the bonding adhesive immediately after the pre-treatment process.
Bonding Application
The approved bonding adhesive is supplied in a two pack cartridge.
A two-pack cartridge gun with a disposable mixing nozzle is used for the application of the adhesive.
NOTE: The curing process of the adhesive begins once mixed and has a working time of approx 30 minutes.
Apply a 5mm "zig zag" bead directly to either the replacement panel or vehicle structure.
Make sure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing holes.
On completion the mixing nozzle must be discarded. Make sure an air tight seal is provided for the cartridges.
Materials
The materials listed in this section are those approved to be used on the all new XJ aluminium range in conjunction with the
repairs shown in this manual.
Approved Materials
Consumable Material Supplier

Weld Crack Penetrant Rocol Jaguar Equipment Programme
Weld Crack Developer Rocol Jaguar Equipment Programme
Weld Crack Cleaner Rocol Jaguar Equipment Programme
Pyrosil coupling agent (primer) SurAlink GP15 Jaguar Equipment Programme
Pyrosil refill cartridge Sura - Pyrosil Jaguar Equipment Programme
Bonding Adhesive Structural Adhesive DP490 3M
Bonding Adhesive Structural Adhesive 8115 3M
Cavity Foam DM4330 Foam 3M
Semi Rigid Sealer 0893-2251 Wurth
Seam Sealer Terostat 1K PUR 11272C (4500010) Teroson
Cleaner/De-greaser 08984 3M
Cleaner/De-greaser 3608S DuPont
MIG Weld Wire (6111) 4043/4047 Filler Wire Fronius Dealer Network
MIG Weld Wire (5754) 5554 Filler Wire Fronius Dealer Network
Abrasive Discs Roloc Bristle Discs 07528 3M
Self Piercing Fixings (all variants) JEPC Jaguar Dealer Network
Hemlok Fixings (all variants) JEPC Jaguar Dealer Network
Aluminium Welding
Health and Safety
Refer to equipment manufacturers' manual.
Set Up/Equipment Check
Refer to equipment manufacturers operator's manual.
Weld Process
This section provides information on aftermarket aluminium welding for the all new XJ aluminium range. It covers the following
areas:
Equipment: Metal Inert Gas (MIG)
Materials: Extruded and pressed aluminium sheet alloy.
Weld Structure: Fusion welding process: Metal Inert Gas (MIG).

Weld Procedures: Pre-weld, test weld, weld and post weld checks.
Weld Types: Lap weld, Butt weld, Plug weld.
Equipment
NOTE: Approved equipment is obtained from the Jaguar Equipment Programme, (JEP).
Approved MIG Welder: Fronius 2700 Alu Edition Pulsed MIG Welder
The Fronius 2700 Alu Edition MIG Welder utilises a 100% digitally controlled power source, this produces final weld attributes
of:
Smoothness
Refinement
Consistency
Repeatability
The accuracy of the approved equipment enables the delivery of one droplet of wire per pulse. This enables welding of
incredibly thin parent material, i.e 0.6mm sheet can be welded using a 1.2mm filler wire.
The approved MIG welder uses Direct Current, (DC) and does not produce High Frequency, (HF), at start up, (initial arc).
Welder Set Up
NOTE: The user should always refer to the operators manual for detailed instructions.
The following provides an overview of the set-up procedure:
Health and Safety - read operators manual
Check correct power supply
Check gas supply
Check all equipment parts - safety check
Attach power cables, connect to supply
Purge gas bottle, attach
Attach clamp
Approved equipment obtained from the Jaguar Equipment Programme, (JEP):
Speedglas with Adflo face shield/weld mask
Approved fume extractor
Stainless Steel Brush

Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
Materials
Prior to any welding activity, it is necessary to identify the type of material to be welded. The all new XJ aluminium range is
constructed from a number of aluminium Alloys, each has different attributes that should be considered prior to the weld
process.
Body Materials
The repair methods shown focus on the replacement of:
Pressed Aluminium Alloy sheet - 6111 - Used in skin-panels
Extruded Aluminium Alloy - 5754 - Used in structural panels
Weld Wire
The approved weld wires for these alloys are:
6111 - 4043 or 4047 filler wire
5754 - 5554 filler wire
Weld Structure
The approved aftermarkets weld process is based on Fusion Welding:
Metal Inert Gas (MIG) Welding
The approved MIG welder uses DC current. The Electrode, (filler wire), is Positive Pole and the work piece is Negative Pole. The
arc burns between a melting electrode, (which also acts as the filler wire) and the work piece. The shielding gas is Argon,
Helium or a mixture of these, (MIG).
Successful aluminium welding is partly dependent on the removal of surface Oxidisation. Oxide MUST be removed prior to
welding.The oxide melts at a different temperature:
Aluminium melting temperature - approximately 660°C
Aluminium Oxide melting temperature - approximately 2040°C
Weld Procedures
Pre Weld
Prior to starting any weld procedure, the following safety precautions should always be implemented:
Disconnect the vehicle battery
Disconnect the generator electrical connectors
Remove any ECMs within 500mm of the weld area
Remove the battery before carrying out welding work in its vicinity
Utmost care must be taken when welding near the fuel tank or other components that contain fuel. If the tank filler
neck or a fuel line must be detached to allow access for welding work, then the fuel tank must be drained and removed
Adjacent vehicle parts and adjacent vehicles must be shielded against flying sparks and heat
The aluminium surfaces MUST be cleaned prior to welding. Cleaning will aid penetration and avoid contamination. There are
three steps to this process:
1. Clean surface:
To remove wax and any other contaminants use a chemical surface cleaner:
Jaguar approved product: DuPont 3608S
Alternatively, an Isopropyl based product
2. Remove Oxide
This can be achieved through a number of processes:
NOTE: Items used to remove oxide should not be contaminated by use on a steel vehicle.
Stainless Steel brush
80 Grit abrasive paper
Non-Metallic scuff pad

3. Remove Oxide Dust
Remove dust with a lint free cloth
NOTE: Oxide builds up very quickly, therefore, perform steps 2 and 3 immediately prior to welding. If left for a period of
time, steps 2 and 3 should be repeated.
Weld Types
The following identifies the three types of joint used in Category A panel replacement. It is not a guide to welding, as all
Category A repairers will have staff who are suitably qualified in welding aluminium. This section highlights the key points for
each weld type.
Lap Weld
Key points:
Run-In/Out distance of 5mm
Minimum overall length of 20mm
Must use Start/Finish tabs
Butt Weld
Key Points:
Run-In/Out distance of 5mm
Minimum overall length of 20mm
Must use Start/Finish tabs
Nominal penetration of fillet required
Plug Weld
Key Points:
Hole size 10mm
Position of MIG nozzle - vertical
Test Weld
A test weld using identical coupons from waste panels should take place prior to working on the vehicle. The test piece is then
visually checked and destructively tested to make sure all settings are correct and an acceptable weld has been achieved.
Prior to starting, the following should be checked:
Gas - Correct for the type of job
Filler Wire - Correct for the type of material to be welded
An effective weld should demonstrate the following qualities:
All visible weld surfaces shall be clean, bright and of a uniform profile
The weld seam should show uniform height and width over its entire length
There shall be complete fusion between the surfaces of the work piece and the weld metal deposit
Correct level of penetration will be visible at the rear of the coupon as a fine continuous line.
Effective Weld Length
The effective weld length is the weld seam as described in the Body Repair Sections. The effective weld length does not
include allowances for the run-in/run-out, or termination defects, (start/stop), of the weld seam. It is permissible that the
overall weld length is longer than detailed in the repair section, as the overall weld will include a minimum of 5mm at both the
start and the stop of the weld seam, provided the function of the part is not affected, or the weld finishes on the edge of a
panel.
Post Weld Checks
Weld inspections take the form of a visual examination, non-destructive and destructive testing.
Visual Examination
A visual examination of fusion welds should be carried out in accordance with the acceptance criteria detailed in the following
Imperfections/Defect Levels table.
Imperfection/Defect Levels Table
Defect/Imperfection
Type Details Limits
Burn-through Burn holes Not permitted
Seam offset, sides Incomplete fusion Not permitted within effective weld length
melted away
Cracks Any form of cracking is not permitted at Not permitted
any position along the entire length of
the weld seam
Fused weld spatter Limited acceptance. Not permitted on visible surfaces or in
areas where functional performance of the part is affected,
e.g. mating surfaces, sealing surfaces, etc. In such instances
spatter is to be removed. All loosely adherent spatters must
be removed
Visible ignition marks Local melting of parent metal due to Permitted provided functional performance of the component
arc is not affected.
Open end crater Reduces the cross sectional area of the Not permitted
weld seam
Visual pores Not permitted
Weld skip Discontinuity/interruption in weld seam Not permitted at any position along the entire length of the
weld seam
Non Destructive
Dye penetrate testing MUST be used for detection of discontinuities, such as cracks, laps, folds, porosity and lack of fusion
that are open to the surface of the material. Typical defects include start, (cold start/incomplete fusion) and stop, (crater
cracking), defects within a fusion weld run. In addition to this lack of fusion/coalescence at the weld toe, solidification cracks
in the weld bead may also be detected.
Non Destructive Crack Inspection Process
Use the product as listed in the Approved Materials Section, this product is supplied within the Category A tool kit. The product
is an aerosol applied dye system. It is designed to penetrate the finest cracks and flaws to facilitate detection, the system
includes: Cleaner, Penetrant and Developer.
The process is as follows:
1. Use the cleaner to de-grease/clean the test area, then wipe with a lint free cloth.
2. When the surface is completely dry apply the penetrant. Cover the test area and allow a minimum contact time of 10
minutes.
3. Remove excess penetrant from the surface with a lint free cloth wetted with the cleaner.
4. Apply a THIN film of the developer and leave for a minimum of 10 minutes to draw up the retained dye from flaws or
cracks.
5. Suspect areas should then be examined under natural or electric light for signs of flaws and/or cracks. Cracks will
show up as lines whilst porosity will appear as pin holes.
Destructive Testing
Each test weld should be pulled apart to check the quality and penetration of the weld.
Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection - Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection
General
The application of additional corrosion protection following body repair is not necessary and not recommended. However, it is
important to be aware of galvanic corrosion and take steps to prevent its occurrence.
Galvanic Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion is the cross-contamination of dissimilar metals, in this case aluminium and steel. Avoidance of galvanic
corrosion is an important issue to be considered in the repair of aluminium bodied vehicles.
Precautions to prevent the contamination of exposed bare aluminium surfaces should be taken. Good housekeeping and
cleanliness should be adopted throughout repairs and especially prior to welding, pre-treatment, (Pyrosil), and adhesive
bonding.
The repair environment requires control and protection from dust and debris from conventional steel body repairs. All
equipment must be clearly identified and used solely on aluminium.
Tools should be kept clean and in good order. Steel fastenings are coated to prevent galvanic corrosion. Fastenings should be
examined during repairs and where damaged or suspect must be renewed.
The use of graphite, penetrating oil, or copper based anti-seize compounds upon the steel fixings is not recommended.
Where the original equipment surface protection (paint), is removed it must be repainted to the recommended standard.
Only Jaguar Land Rover Limited original bodywork components and Jaguar Land Rover Limited approved repair materials,
(sealer, paint, etc), are to be used for bodywork repairs.
Body Repairs - Water Leaks - Water Leaks
General
If water leaks occur after bodywork repairs, the cause can be established using the checks described below. A
systematic and logical procedure is required to locate water leaks. Before beginning extensive checks, a thorough visual
inspection must be carried out.
Visual Inspection
- The following characteristics may indicate existing leaks:
- Check the clearance and accurate fit of ancillary components such as the hood, tailgate, liftgate, doors, and so
on.
- Check for correct fit and possible damage to sealing elements such as blanking plugs, rubber door weather
strips, and so on.
- Check water drain holes for unhindered flow.
Various tests can be used to provide further information on possible leaks:
- Water test
- Washer test
- Road test
- Chalk (powder) test
Practical execution of tests and checks
Water test
NOTE: Never aim a jet of water directly at a door weather strip or rubber seals.
Carry out the water test with a second person present (in the passenger compartment).
Use variable washer nozzles (concentrated water jet to fine spray mist).
Start in the lower section and spray the whole area, working upwards in stages.
Washer test
Further tests can be carried out in the washer system.

Some leaks originate here, or only occur here.
The relevant passenger compartment should be checked using a torch during the wash procedure.
Road test
If no leaks are located during the tests above, road tests should be carried out on wet roads.
Road tests under various conditions:
- At various speeds.
- On various road surfaces (asphalt to cobbles).
- With loaded or unloaded vehicle.
- Driving through puddles (splash water).
Chalk test (powder test)
In this test, the clamping load and the bearing surface of the seal are checked.
Performing the test:
- Dust the door seal with powder or coat with chalk.
- Coat the bearing surface of the seal with a thin film of petroleum jelly.
- Slowly close the door and open it again.
- Check the width and continuity of the imprint on the door seal.
Other test equipment
Other equipment such as stethoscopes, UV lamps, special mirrors or ultrasound measuring instruments can be used to
locate leaks.
Rectifying the leak using recommended tools, auxiliary equipment and materials
Tools and auxiliary equipment:

- Dry, absorbent cloths
- Variable washer nozzle
- Torch, fluorescent tube
- Mirror
- Compressed air
- Seal lip installer
- Wet/dry vacuum cleaner
- Sealing compound compressor
- Remover for interior trim
- Cutter blade or pocket knife
- Wedge (wood or plastic)
- Hot air blower
- Special mirror for concealed leaks
- Air flow checker
- Sealing compound (tape and plastic compound)
- Multi-purpose sticker
- Clinched flange sealer
- Window sealing compound
- Water shield (PVC)
- Double-sided adhesive tape for water shield
- Methylated spirit (available from trade outlets)
- PU adhesive
- Silicone remover
- Tar remover
Water leaks according to mileage or running time
Increasing mileage has an effect on the problem of leaks in a vehicle. Possible influencing factors are:
Servicing and maintenance of seals:

- No maintenance, lack of maintenance or incorrect maintenance
- Using an incorrect agent
Damaged seals:
- As a result of aging, wear or incorrect handling/assembly.
Heavy soiling of the vehicle:
- Heavy soiling of a vehicle can seriously impair the function of water drainage channels in particular, and also of
rubber seals.
Age-related factors:
- Environmental factors
- UV radiation
- Extreme climatic conditions
Corrosion can have a serious impact on bodywork, in particular as a result of:
- Lightly or heavily rusted seal carriers
- Rusted body seal welds
- Perforation corrosion
Water leaks after body repairs
If a vehicle develops a leak after body repairs, the following points must be taken into consideration in particular:
The correct seating of ancillary components and their seals must be checked.
The correct alignment of doors/tailgate and liftgate must be checked. The associated seals must not be damaged and
must be installed correctly.
Check that panel seams are correctly sealed.
The correct seating of rubber grommets must be checked.
Directly-glazed windows must have correct and complete bonding.
Water drainage system
If a vehicle develops water leaks, then areas into which water is routed or drained should be checked first.
Water drainage system (illustration for reference only)
Item Description
1 Water drainage, front
2 Water drainage, side and rear
3 Roof drainage
4 Engine compartment drainage
Water leaks, diagnosis and corrective action: Front passenger compartment
Windscreen
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into A-pillar area or instrument cluster area and rocker panel area.
Cause:
- Breaks in adhesive beads.
- The breaks in adhesive beads can be located from inside by using compressed air. The leak can be identified
from outside by the escaping air.
- The second test method is by means of a water test. The outer trims must be raised carefully using a plastic
wedge. The leak should be located from inside by a second assistant.
Corrective action:
- Remove the windscreen. Remove the existing adhesive bead and reapply using the correct bonding procedure.
Side windows
In the case of side windows, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The same corrective actions must therefore be
used.
Door seal
Diagnosis:
- Water ingress in the lower part of the interior door trim or in the rocker panel area.
Cause:
- The water shield fitted behind the interior door trim exists to drain off water that has entered the door via the
drainage holes, either downwards or outwards. If the water shield seal is damaged or has been fitted incorrectly,
then water can get into the passenger compartment.
- In addition to this, the drainage holes can become clogged with leaves, dirt or excess cavity protection agents.
Water gathers in the door and ingresses into the passenger compartment.
- Check water shield for damage or correct fitting.
- If the water shield needs to be re-bonded, then approved seam sealer should be used.
- Before the water shield is installed, the drainage holes must be checked for unhindered flow.
Door seals
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the rocker panel area
Cause:
- Insufficient clamping load between seal and door.
Corrective action:
NOTE: When adjusting the clamping load, the profile alignment of the relevant components must always be taken
into consideration.
NOTE: Do not realign the flange too far in the direction of the door, as this can reduce the bearing surface of the
seal to the door.
- Check clamping load:

- The easiest way to check the clamping load of a seal to the respective bearing surface is by means of a paper
strip test. This consists of trapping strips of paper at various points between the door and the seal, and fully
closing the door. If it is possible to pull out the paper with no great resistance, then the clamping load is too
low.
- Adjust the clamping load:
- The clamping load is normally adjusted using the striker. When doing so, the edge alignment from the door to
the side panel, or from the front door to the rear door must be taken into account.
- Another setting method is to realign the panel flange for the seal mounting. The clamping load is increased by
moving the flange towards the door.
- Check the bearing surface:
- Apply chalk evenly to the surface of the seal. Evenly coat the bearing surface of the door with petroleum jelly.
- Close the door fully, the lock must engage. Open the door. The imprint of the chalk (bearing surface) can be
identified in the film of petroleum jelly.
- The bearing surface should be at least 5mm across at all points.
Other causes:
- The door seal must completely seal the door where it meets the bodywork.
- Water can ingress directly or indirectly into the interior of the vehicle if the seal is damaged at any point.
Corrective action:
- A damaged or worn door seal must always be installed in full.
- When installing the seal, the following must be taken into account:
- Always fit the seal first in the area of the narrow radii (corner points).
- Next, secure the seal to the flange evenly by tapping lightly with a rubber hammer. The installed seal must not
be kinked at any point.
NOTE: The prescribed length of a seal must not be shortened.
Other cause:
- The door seal is attached to the welded flange all the way round. If this welded flange is uneven or damaged at
any point (usually in areas with small radii) then this point could be subject to leaks.
- A stretched seal carrier can also cause a leak.
- In both cases, water gets into the vehicle interior under the seal carrier.
Corrective action:
- Align the deformed welded flange using a hammer and anvil block, prevent and, if necessary, repair any paint
damage.
Roof opening panel - front and rear fixed glass panels
In the case of the roof opening panel - front and rear fixed glass panels, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The
same corrective actions must therefore be used.
Roof opening panel - sliding central glass panel
NOTE: In the case of the sliding central glass panel, the rubber seals and the lock actuator or latch mechanism must be
checked first of all.
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water at the roof opening panel.
Cause:
- The roof opening panel frame incorporates drain holes in each front corner allowing water to drain via the
A-pillars and each rear corner allowing water to drain via the roof panel channels.
- Damaged, worn, or incorrectly fitted seals on the sliding central glass panel.
- Incorrect alignment of the sliding central glass panel.
- Damaged, worn, or incorrectly fitted seals on the roof opening panel frame.
- Water drain channels or water drain holes blocked.
Corrective action:
- Check the seals on the sliding central glass panel, install as necessary.
- Check the correct adjustment of the sliding central glass panel, adjust as necessary, replace any worn or
damaged components as necessary.
- Check the internal seal of the roof opening panel frame, realign or install as necessary.
- Check the water drain channels and holes for blockages, clear blockages as necessary.
- Check the drainage system for unhindered flow.
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the luggage area.
Cause:
- The leak problems of the luggage compartment lid correspond to those of the doors.
- In addition to this, the area to be sealed is much bigger. The routing holes for cables and hoses must also be
sealed.
- The rubber grommets for the routing holes must be checked for damage and correct seating (fully unhooked).
- The grommets around the luggage compartment lid hinges may leak.
Corrective action:
- Check the rubber grommets and re-position, reseal or install new, if necessary.
Forced air extraction
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into side luggage compartment area
Cause:
- The forced air extraction for the vehicle interior is located in the quarter panel lower extension.
- The rubber flap of the forced air extraction must be able to move freely.
Corrective action:
- Remove the forced air extraction.
- Check the seal area between the bodywork and housing, as well as the rubber flap.
- Install a new seal if necessary.
Rear window
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the passenger compartment area
Cause:
- Rear window leaking via breaks in the adhesive bead.
- Check for leaks in the same way as for a leaking windscreen.
Corrective action:
- In the case of the rear window, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The same corrective actions
must therefore be used.
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks - Body and
Frame
Front End Body Dimensions

NOTES:
All dimensions shown are in millimetres (mm).
Dimensions shown to holes, are always taken from/to the hole centre. They are also always to the body panel surface,
not to the top of bolts or components.
Item From To Dimension

A Front fender RH, front fixing hole Front fender LH, front fixing hole 1580.0
B Front fender RH, second front fixing hole Front fender LH, second front fixing hole 1570.0
C Front fender RH, second front fixing hole Front fender LH, rear fixing hole 1689.4
D Front fender LH, second front fixing hole Front fender RH, rear fixing hole 1689.4
A Side member deformation element RH, top inboard Side member deformation element LH, top inboard 712.5
fixing hole fixing hole
A Suspension top mount RH, front outboard fixing Suspension top mount LH, front outboard fixing 986.5
B Suspension top mount RH, front outboard fixing Front fender LH, rear fixing 1379.9
C Suspension top mount LH, front outboard fixing Front fender RH, rear fixing 1379.9

A Instrument panel carrier RH top fixing hole Instrument panel carrier LH top fixing hole 1416
B Instrument panel carrier RH bottom fixing hole Instrument panel carrier LH bottom fixing hole 1416
Side Panel Dimensions

A Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1109.1
B Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1119.9
C Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1184.8
D Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1108.9
E (short wheel base) Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 885.6
E (long wheel base) Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 1009.5
F (short wheel base) Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 914.0
F (long wheel base) Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door striker, top fixing hole 1036.8

A-B Front seat belt adjuster LH, top fixing hole Front seat belt retractor RH, mounting hole 1606.2
C-D Front seat belt adjuster RH, top fixing hole Front seat belt retractor LH, mounting hole 1606.2
Rear End Body Dimensions

A Rear bumper RH lower fixing hole Rear bumper LH lower fixing hole 995.92
Under Body Dimensions

A-B Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Front subframe, LH front fixing hole 839.0
C-D Front subframe, RH rear fixing hole Front subframe, LH rear fixing hole 833.0
E-F Front side member RH, tooling hole Front side member LH, tooling hole 820.0
A-D Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Front subframe, LH rear fixing hole 982.5
B-C Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Front subframe, RH rear fixing hole 982.5
A-F Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Front side member LH, tooling hole 1412.2
B-E Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Front side member RH, tooling hole 1412.4
G-H Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole 908.9
I-J Rear subframe, RH rear fixing hole Rear subframe, LH rear fixing hole 1015.3
G-J Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH rear fixing hole 1136.9
H-I Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole Rear subframe, RH rear fixing hole 1136.9
A-G (short wheel base) Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole 3181.6
B-H (short wheel base) Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole 3181.6
A-H (short wheel base) Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole 3299.3
B-G (short wheel base) Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole 3299.3
A-G (long wheel base) Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole 3306.6
B-H (long wheel base) Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole 3306.6
A-H (long wheel base) Front subframe, RH front fixing hole Rear subframe, LH front fixing hole 3419.9
B-G (long wheel base) Front subframe, LH front fixing hole Rear subframe, RH front fixing hole 3419.9
Gap and Profile measurements

The following information is to be used as a guide to assist the technician in installing exterior body panels and trim items so
as to achieve a correctly aligned and cosmetically acceptable vehicle.
NOTE: All dimensions shown are in millimetres, (mm).
A-A Hood to headlamp 6.0 ± 1.0

B-B Hood to front bumper cover 3.5 ± 1.0
C-C Hood to front fender 3.5 ± 1.0
D-D Front bumper cover to headlamp 1.0 ± 0.5
E-E Front fender to front bumper cover 0.0 + 1.0
F-F Front fender to A-pillar 3.5 ± 1.0
A-A Front bumper cover to headlamp 1.0 ± 0.5
B-B Hood to front bumper cover 3.5 ± 1.0
C-C Front bumper cover to front fender 0.0 + 1.0
D-D Front bumper cover to front fender 0.0 + 1.0
E-E Front door to A-pillar 4.0 ± 1.0
F-F Front fender to A-pillar 3.5 ± 1.0
www.JagDocs.com
A-A Rear door to rocker panel 5.0 ± 1.0
B-B Windshield encapsulation to front glass roof panel encapsulation 0.0
C-C Front door to rear door 4.0 ± 1.0
D-D Front door to rear door 4.0 ± 1.0
E-E Front door to rear door 4.0 ± 1.0
F-F Front door to A-pillar / roof panel 6.5 ± 1.0
A-A Rear door to quarter panel 4.0 ± 1.0
B-B Rear quarter window glass encapsulation to quarter panel finisher 0.0
C-C Rear door to rocker panel 5.0 ± 1.0
D-D Rear door to roof panel 6.5 ± 1.0
A-A Rear bumper cover to quarter panel 0.0 + 1.0
B-B Rear bumper cover to rear lamp assembly 1.0 ± 0.5
C-C Rear bumper cover to luggage compartment lid 6.0 ± 1.0
D-D Quarter panel to luggage compartment lid 6.0 ± 1.0
E-E Quarter panel to quarter panel finisher 0.0 + 1.0
F-F Luggage compartment lid to rear lamp assembly 3.5 ± 1.0
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front End Sheet Metal
Front End Sheet Metal

Front end service panels
NOTE: The illustration may indicate either hand of the service panel, the opposite hand will be similar.
Item Description
1 Hood hinge
2 Hood
Item Description
3 Suspension top mount
4 Front side member & suspension top mount assembly
5 Front side member closing panel section
6 Front side member section
7 Front fender
8 Front bumper cover
9 Front bumper
10 Hood latch panel mounting bracket
11 Hood latch panel
12 Side member deformation element
13 Front side member to deformation element bracket
14 Fender apron panel
15 Hood strut mounting bracket
16 Fender apron panel closing panel
Time Schedules, Front End Sheet Metal

The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels. This time includes removal of Mechanical,
Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends for adjacent panels not
included).
The times shown are to be used as a guide only.
Single panel times

Panel Description Hours
Hood hinge 0.60
Suspension top mount 10.50
Front Side member and suspension top mount assembly 20.60
Front side member closing panel 18.70
Front side member 18.70
Front Fender 5.30
Hood latch panel 11.00
Side member deformation element TBC
Front Side member to deformation element bracket TBC
Fender apron panel 4.80
Fender apron panel closing panel 4.80
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel
Removal
NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in question is being
replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
1. The fender apron panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The fender apron panel is manufactured from aluminium

alloy 5754-NG.
The fender apron panel is serviced as a separate riveted and bonded

panel, including the hood latch panel mounting and the hood hinge
mounting. It does not include the hood strut mounting panel.
3. The fender apron panel closing panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Front door
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood latch panel
4. For additional information relating to this repair procedure please see the following:
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation) /
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information, Description and
Operation) /
Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection, Description and
Operation) /
Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
5. Disconnect the vehicle battery.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery,
Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
6. Remove the fender apron panel closing panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel (501-27 Front
End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the hood hinge.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Hinge (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
8. Prior to removal, mark the position of the fender apron panel in relation to adjacent
panels, for ease of alignment on installation.
9. NOTE: If the hood strut mounting bracket is to be replaced, it is
not necessary to remove it. Retain if being re-used.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing rivets to the
hood strut mounting panel.
10. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing rivets.
11. Separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
1. Remove rivet remnants.
2. Dress flanges where necessary.
3. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct proceed
to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
4. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces of the hood
strut mounting panel.
5. NOTE: If a new hood strut mounting panel is required, it can be installed with 2
self piercing rivets using the ESN50.
Offer up the original hood strut mounting panel to the new fender apron panel, align
and clamp into position.
6. NOTE: Where it is not possible to install Hemloks, due to tooling

access, torx screws and rivet nuts must be installed.
Mark the position where the rivet nuts are to be installed.
7. Using a
6.5mm
Cryobit
drill bit,
drill
holes at
the
points
where
Hemloks
are to be
installed.
8. Remove the new panel and separate the hood hinge mounting panel.
9. Using a 9.5mm drill bit, drill the marked holes for the rivet nuts.
10. Debur the drilled holes.
11. Using the HES 412 rivet nut tool, insert the rivet nuts.
12. Offer up the new panel into position to ensure holes for rivets and torx screws are
aligned. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
13. Remove the new panel.
14. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces.
15. Pyrosil the joints at the points where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied.
16. Apply the coupling agent where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied and allow to dry.
17. NOTE: Make sure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the body joints.
18. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position.

19. Loosely install the torx screws, do not tighten.
20. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks.

21. Fully tighten the torx screws.
Tighten to 6 Nm.
22. Remove any excess adhesive.
23. NOTES:
The hood strut mounting panel is manufactured from mild steel,

any mating surfaces should be suitably sealed prior to installation.
If a new hood strut mounting panel is required, it can be installed

with 2 self piercing rivets using the ESN50.
Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks.
24. Make sure that any open or exposed panel joints are suitably sealed following this
procedure.
25. The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of removal
procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Removal
NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in question is being
replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
1. The fender apron panel closing panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The fender apron panel closing panel is manufactured from

aluminium alloy 5754-NG.
The fender apron panel closing panel is serviced as a separate riveted

and bonded panel, including its inner reinforcement.
3. The fender apron panel closing panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Front door
Hood
Hood latch panel
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information, Description and Operation)
/
Operation) /

6. Remove the hood latch panel.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
7. Remove the front fender.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
8. Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator and its mounting bracket.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH (501-20C
Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System,
9. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the
anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (206-09
10. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the fuel
filter, (diesel engine only).
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filter (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6
11. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, release and
position the air conditioning (A/C) pipes to one side.
12. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the fuel
lines.
13. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the
anti-theft alarm horn.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft Alarm Horn (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active,
14. If the right-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the engine
junction box (EJB).
For additional information, refer to: Engine Junction Box (EJB) (418-00 Module
Communications Network, Removal and Installation).
15. If the left-hand fender apron panel closing panel is to be replaced, remove the engine
control module (ECM) and its mounting bracket.
16. Remove any electrical components in the local area of repair to prevent damage.
17. Release the fender apron panel closing panel wiring harness and position it to one
side.
18. Remove any remaining miscellaneous components from the repair area as necessary.
19. Prior to removal, mark the position of the fender apron panel in relation to adjacent
panels, for ease of alignment on installation.
20. Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove
the self piercing rivets.
21. Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets.
23. Remove
the
monobolts.
24. Remove the bolts.
25. NOTE: Remove and retain the noise vibration and harshness (NVH) components if
they are to be reused.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the NVH components.
Installation
1. NOTE: New NVH components should be installed if the originals are damaged.
If the original NVH components are to be reused, trim and prepare them and their
mating surfaces.
4. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct proceed to
next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
5. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old panels into the new panel,
at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.
11. NOTE: Do not apply semi-rigid sealer in the areas where 3M 8115 adhesive is to
be applied.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the new panel where the NVH components are to be
installed. Install the NVH components.
12. NOTE: Do not apply semi-rigid sealer in the areas where 3M 8115
adhesive is to be applied.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH components.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive as indicated.

15. Loosely install the bolts, do not tighten.

19. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts.
20. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets.

21. Fully tighten the bolts.
NOTE: Bolts are pre-coated to inhibit galvanic corrosion and can be reused
only if the coating is not damaged.
Tighten to 25 Nm.
procedure.
procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Fender
Removal
1. The front fender is a category B repair.
2. NOTE: The front fender is manufactured from

aluminium alloy 6111-T4.
The front fender is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
3. The front fender is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
NOTE: Removal of the front door allows access to the front

fender retaining bolts.
Front door
4. WARNING: The front fender and its associated components form

part of the pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any repair
or replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the system.
For additional information relating to the pedestrian safety system

please see the following:
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System
(501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Description and Operation).

the following:
and Operation) /

7. If the right-hand front fender is to be repaired, remove the windshield

washer reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Windshield Washer Reservoir
(501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the headlamp assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior
Lighting, Removal and Installation) /
Headlamp Assembly (417-01, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove the rocker panel outer moulding.
10. Remove the front door.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures,
11. Remove the plastic trim covering the front fender upper rear retaining
nut.
12. NOTE: If necessary, remove and retain the front fender to A-pillar
mounting brackets.
Remove the front fender retaining bolts.

access only.
Remove the front fender moulding.
Installation
1. Clean and prepare the panel joint surfaces where the sealer adhesive is
to be applied.
2. NOTES:
If necessary, install the front fender to A-pillar

mounting brackets to the front fender.
To aid alignment of the front fender to the front door,

there is an adjustable mounting in the rocker panel where
the front fender mounts.
Offer up the front fender and the front door. Check

alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not rectify and
3. Remove the front fender and the front door.
4. Apply sealer adhesive to the noise, vibration and harshness

(NVH) components.
5. Offer up the front fender and the front door. Check alignment, if correct

Tighten to 10 Nm.
7. Install the plastic trim covering the front fender upper rear retaining nut.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member and Suspension Top
Mount Assembly
Removal
NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in
question is being replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
1. The suspension top mount is a category A repair.
2. NOTES:
The front side member and suspension top mount

assembly is, an assembly of panels, manufactured from
aluminium alloy 5754-NG. The side member deformation
element is manufactured from aluminium alloy 6014-T6/7.
The right-hand front side member and suspension top

mount assembly contains the stamped Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). When a new right hand front
side member and suspension top mount assembly is
requested it will be supplied stamped with the VIN. This
operation is carried out within the Jaguar parts supply
process
The front side member and suspension top mount assembly

is serviced as a separate riveted and bonded panel. The
assembly includes, the deformation element, front side
member to deformation element bracket, front side
member, front side member closing panel, suspension top
mount and the inner apron and wheelhouse panels.
3. In this procedure, to make sure that the vehicle is correctly aligned, it

must be placed on an approved alignment jig.
4. The front side member and suspension top mount assembly is replaced
in conjunction with:
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front fender
Hood
Hood hinge
Front door
Hood latch panel
Fender apron panel
Instrument panel upper section
Engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension as an
assembly

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the front bumper.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,
8. Remove the fender apron panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front
9. Remove the instrument panel upper section.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Upper Section
(501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove the engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension
as an assembly.
11. Remove the front seat.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10, Removal and
Installation).
12. Remove the automatic transmission control mechanism.
13. Remove the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument
Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
14. Remove the in-vehicle crossbeam.

For additional information, refer to: In-Vehicle Crossbeam (501-12,
15. Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator
LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection
16. Remove the A-Pillar.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
17. Remove the B-Pillar lower trim panels.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05
18. Remove the left-hand and right-hand front floor covering.
19. If the drivers side front side member and suspension top mount
assembly is to be replaced, remove the heater pipes.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the pedal box.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the accelerator pedal.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the brake master cylinder and brake
booster.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
assembly is to be replaced, remove the windshield wiper motor and pivot
arm.
For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Motor - LHD RWD
(501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation) /
Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
assembly is to be replaced, remove the front to rear brake pipes.
25. If the passenger side front side member and suspension top mount
assembly is to be replaced, remove the engine control module, (ECM).
For additional information, refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM)
(303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation) /
Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V8
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
assembly is to be replaced, remove the brake pipes at the bulkhead.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the fuel supply and return pipes.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the fuel cooler (if equipped).
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Cooler (310-01A Fuel Tank and
Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
assembly is to be replaced, remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS)
module.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Module (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Removal and
Installation).
assembly is to be replaced, remove the air conditioning (A/C) pipes.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the side member heatshield.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the hood release cable.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the fuel filter (vehicles with diesel
engine).
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filter (310-01A Fuel Tank and
Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
34. Release and position the front side member and suspension top mount
wiring harness to one side.
35. Remove any remaining miscellaneous components from the repair area
as necessary.
36. Remove the sealer and NVH (noise vibration and harshness), sound
deadening material in the areas of repair, as required to reveal the panel
joints.
37. Prior to removal, mark the position of the front side member and
suspension top mount assembly in relation to adjacent panels for ease
of alignment on installation.
39. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing
rivets.
40. Remove the Hemloks.

Remove the centre of the fixings with a 4.0mm
punch then drill with a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit.
rivets.
42. Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm Cryobit drill

bit, remove the self piercing rivets.
43. CAUTION: This step requires the aid of another technician as the
removed panel will be heavy.
NOTE: Retain the old panel as it will be required for reference on

installation.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
3. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces,
removing any sealer and adhesive residue.
4. Enlage the 2 holes and using the HES 412 rivet nut tool,
install 2 M6 rivet nuts as indicated.
5. Using the old panel for reference, mark the location and
using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes where Hemloks
are to be installed as indicated.
6. Where there is no access to drill through both old and new panels when
they are offered up on the vehicle, use the old panel for reference and
measure and mark the Hemlok locations on the new panel. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill the holes where Hemloks are to be installed
prior to the offer up.
8. CAUTION: This step requires the aid of another technician as the

removed panel will be heavy.
NOTE: make sure correct alignment of rivet nuts and drilled holes
for Hemloks.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
9. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old panels into
the new panel, at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.
14. Apply the coupling agent where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied and
allow to dry.
15. NOTE: Make sure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing

holes.
16. Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position.
17. Loosely install the retaining screws.

Do not tighten the retaining screws at this stage.


23. NOTE: The illustration shows a right-hand drive vehicle. The

Hemloks installed to the drivers side, right-hand, differ to those
installed on the passenger side, left-hand.

26. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemlok.

30. Check the tightness of the bolts to the side member deformation
element bracket.

Tighten to 62 Nm.
31. Fully tighten the retaining screws.
Tighten to 6 Nm.
32. Install the NVH material in the areas indicated.
33. Make sure that any open or exposed panel joints are suitably sealed
following this procedure.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Closing Panel Section
Removal
1. The front side member closing panel section is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The front side member closing panel section is

manufactured from aluminium alloy 5754-NG.
The front side member closing panel section is cut from the
front side member closing panel service panel.

4. The front side member closing panel section is replaced in conjunction

with:
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Hood latch panel mounting bracket
Engine, transmission / transaxle, front subframe and front
suspension, as an assembly

the following:
and Operation) /
6. NOTE: This procedure assumes that if the front side member

closing panel section is damaged, the front side member section will
also be damaged. Therefore the removal procedure for the front side
member closing panel section is combined within the front side member
section procedure.
Remove the front side member section.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Section (501-27
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Installation

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Section
Removal
question is being installed in isolation or is being installed in combination with panels other than those listed.
1. The front side member section is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The front side member section is manufactured

from aluminium alloy 5754-NG.
The front side member section is cut from the front side
member service panel.

4. NOTE: This procedure assumes that the front side member closing
panel section is damaged. Therefore, the procedure combines the repair
of the front side member section and the front side member closing
panel section.
The front side member section is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension as an
assembly

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the hood latch panel mounting bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
(501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
8. NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the front side member, the
front side member to deformation element bracket must always be
renewed. When renewing the bracket and side member in combination,
removal of the bracket is not required.
Remove the front side member to deformation element bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member To Deformation
Element Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
9. Remove the engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension,

as an assembly.

11. Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.
12. If the right-hand front side member section is to be repaired, remove the
front side member heatshield.
13. If the right-hand front side member section is to be repaired, remove the
auxiliary radiator.
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Radiator (303-03A Engine
Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Auxiliary Radiator (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
14. If the left-hand front side member section is to be repaired, remove the
air conditioning (A/C) high pressure line.
15. Release the front side member wiring harness and position it to one
side.
16. Remove any miscellaneous components in the area of repair.
17. Mark out the position where the front side member section
MIG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the front side
member at this point, also cutting through the front side
member closing panel, as indicated.
18. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through
into the front side member.
Mark out the position where the front side member closing
panel section MIG butt joint is to be made. Cut through the
front side member closing panel at this point, as indicated.

bit, remove the self piercing rivets from the front side
member.
20. Separate the joints and remove the front side member closing panel
remnant.
Installation
1. Remove the rivet remnants.
2. Dress the flanges where necessary.

3. Mark out the position on the front side member service
panel, where the section MIG butt joint is to be made and
cut the panel at this point as indicated.
4. Mark out the position on the front side member closing

panel service panel, where the section MIG butt joint is to
be made and cut the panel at this point as indicated.
5. Install the front side member to deformation element bracket into the
side member deformation element.
6. Using panel pin clamps, temporarily install the front side member to
deformation element bracket and side member deformation element
assembly into the new front side member section.
7. Offer up the new front side member section, including the front side
member to deformation element bracket and side member deformation
element assembly and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct,
8. Offer up the new front side member closing panel section and using
panel pin clamps align with the new front side member to deformation
element bracket and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct,
9. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes at the points where Hemloks
are to be installed. Where it is not possible to drill, scribe mark the hole
locations on the new panel.
10. Remove the new panels, leaving the side member deformation element
and the front side member to deformation element bracket assembled.
11. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill the marked holes.

including the inner panel surfaces where backing plates are to be
welded.
14. Measure and cut a 50mm wide backing plate, (25mm each side of the
MIG butt joint), from the discarded part of the new front side member
panel, or from similar material. Two horizontal cuts are required, to
remove a 10mm section from the backing plate so that it fits within the
front side member.
15. Measure and cut a 50mm wide backing plate, (25mm each side of the
MIG butt joint), from the discarded part of the new front side member
closing panel, or from similar material.
16. Cut 2 run on/run off tabs from the discarded part of the new front side
member panel, or from similar material.
17. Cut 2 run on/run off tabs from the discarded part of the new front side
member closing panel, or from similar material.
18. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the backing plates and
run on/run off tabs.
19. Using panel pin clamps, temporarily install the side member deformation
element and front side member to deformation element bracket
assembly into the new front side member section. Offer up, align and
clamp into position.
20. NOTE: The backing plates should be secured with 8

welds of 20mm, 4 at the top, 4 at the bottom and 1 central
weld of 50mm.
MIG weld the backing plate into the front side member.
21. NOTE: The backing plate should be secured with 2

vertical welds of 20mm.
MIG weld the backing plate onto the new front side member
closing panel section.
22. Tack weld the run-on/run off tabs to the front side member section.
23. MIG weld the front side member section butt joint.
24. Cut off the run on/run off tabs.
25. Dress the inner part of the front side member section MIG butt joint.
26. Offer up the new front side member closing panel section, align and
27. Drill 2 holes through the front side member closing panel into the
backing plate, to allow panel pin clamps to be installed.
28. Remove the front side member closing panel section.
30. Remove the front side member to deformation element bracket and side
member deformation element assembly.
31. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel joints.
32. Pyrosil the joints.
33. Apply the coupling agent and allow to dry.

holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the front side
member to deformation element bracket.
35. Offer up the front side member to deformation element bracket and side
member deformation element assembly and align.
37. NOTE: Make sure a continuous bead of adhesive

surrounds fixing holes. Do not apply adhesive in the vicinity
of the MIG plug welds.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the front

side member and to the deformation element bracket.
38. NOTE: The detached side of the backing plate is secured with panel
pin clamps.
Offer up the new front side member closing panel section, align and
41. Tack weld the run-on/run off tabs to the front side member closing panel
section.
42. MIG weld the front side member closing panel section butt
joint.
43. Remove the panel pins from the front side member closing panel.
Increase the 2 holes to 10mm in preparation for MIG plug welding.
44. Install 2 MIG plug welds.

45. Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the MIG butt joints. If
proceeding.
46. Dress the welded joints.
47. Fully tighten the bolts to the side member deformation element bracket.

can be re-installed only if the coating is not damaged.
Tighten to 62 Nm.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member To Deformation Element
Bracket
Removal
1. The front side member to deformation element bracket is a category A

repair.
2. NOTE: The front side member to deformation element

bracket is manufactured from gravity die-cast (GDC)
aluminium.
The front side member to deformation element bracket is

serviced as a separate bolted and bonded panel.

4. NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the front side member, the

front side member to deformation element bracket must be renewed.
When renewing the front side member to deformation element bracket
and the front side member in combination, removal of the bracket is not
required.
The front side member section is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Removal of the front subframe is required for access.

the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the side member deformation element.
For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation Element

8. NOTE: If damage dictates, it may be preferable to remove the

engine, transmission and front subframe, as an assembly.
Remove the front subframe.

For additional information, refer to: Front Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body,
Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
9. NOTE: Retain the washers for reuse on installation.
Remove the Hemloks, remove the centre of the fixings with a 4.0mm
punch then drill with a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit.
10. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the front side member when
removing the front side member to deformation element bracket.
Separate and remove the front side member deformation element

bracket from the front side member. Adhesive is applied in production so
the bracket will need to be eased from the front side member, use a
hammer and chisel on the lip of the bracket to remove.
Installation

3. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the front side member when
removing the adhesive residue.
Using a belt sander, remove adhesive residue from inside the front side
member.
6. Offer up the front side member to deformation element bracket to the

front side member.
7. Offer up the side member deformation element to the front side member
to deformation element bracket.
8. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts or install the Hemloks.
Loosely fit the bolts to the side member deformation element and
loosely fit the Hemloks to the front side member to deformation element
bracket.
9. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and

10. Install 4 T50 bolts to the side member deformation element bracket.

Tighten to 62 Nm.
11. Remove the front side member deformation element and front side
member deformation element bracket, as an assembly.
allow to dry.

holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the new panel and to
the body joints.
15. Offer up the front side member deformation element and front side
member to deformation element bracket assembly to the front side
member and align.

17. NOTE: Make sure the washers are fitted to the
Hemloks prior to installation.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Hinge
Removal
1. The hood hinge is a category B repair.
2. NOTE: The hood hinge is manufactured from mild

steel.
The hood hinge is serviced as a separate bolt-on panel.
3. NOTE: The hood hinges deform during the pedestrian protection

system deployment process and will need to be installed.
The hood hinge is replaced in conjunction with:

Hood
4. WARNING: The hood hinge and its associated components form

part of the pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any repair
or replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the system.


the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the hood.

For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body
Panels, Removal and Installation).

8. Remove the cowl vent screen.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Motor - LHD RWD
(501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
9. Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator
LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection
10. Remove the retaining bolts to the fender apron panel.
Installation
1. Offer up the hood hinge. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next

step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
2. Tighten the hood hinge retaining bolts.
NOTE: Bolts are pre-coated to inhibit galvanic

corrosion and are reusable only if the coating is
undamaged.
Tighten to 25 Nm.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Latch Panel
Removal
1. The hood latch panel is a category B repair.
2. NOTE: The hood latch panel is manufactured from

magnesium die cast alloy (AM60B).
The hood latch panel is serviced as a separate bolt-on

panel.
3. NOTE: It is possible to remove and install the hood latch panel by

releasing the front fenders and carefully easing them aside. For method
detail, refer to further instructions within this procedure.
The hood latch panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
4. WARNING: The hood latch panel and its associated components

form part of the pedestrian protection system, it is essential that any
repair or replacement operations do not affect the safe working of the
system.


the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove both hood latch panel braces.
8. Remove both pedestrian impact sensors.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Impact Sensor (501-20C
Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove both hood latches.
10. Remove the hood safety hook guide.
11. Remove both hood latch panel buffers.
12. Release the hood latch panel wiring harness and position it to one side.
13. Release the air filter housing and move it aside for access.
14. Remove the RH and LH headlamp mounting brackets.
15. CAUTION: Protect the paintwork where the front fender meets the
A-pillar and use care not to damage the front fenders or their noise,
vibration and harshness (NVH) components.
Release the RH and LH front fender upper fixings to allow the front
fenders to be carefully eased aside.
Installation
1. Offer up the hood latch panel. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to

next step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
2. Install the hood latch panel.

Tighten to 25 Nm.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
Removal
1. The hood latch panel mounting bracket is a category B repair.
2. NOTE: The hood latch panel mounting bracket is

manufactured from aluminium alloy 6014-T6/7.
The hood latch panel mounting bracket is serviced as a

3. The hood latch panel mounting bracket is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Hood latch panel
Front fender(s)

the following:
and Operation) /


For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27 Front End
Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).

Installation
1. Loosely install the hood latch panel mounting bracket.
2. Offer up the hood latch panel. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to

next step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
3. With the hood latch panel correctly aligned, align and fully
tighten the hood latch panel mounting bracket retaining
bolt.
NOTE: Bolts are pre-coated to inhibit galvanic

corrosion and can be reused only if the coating is
not damaged.
Tighten to 25 Nm.

removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Member Deformation Element
Removal
1. NOTE: The side member deformation element is

manufactured from aluminium alloy 6014-T6/7
The side member deformation element is serviced as a

2. NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the side member deformation

element, the front side member to deformation element bracket must
always be checked for damage. Where damage is evident or suspected,
a new bracket must be installed.
The side member deformation element is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Hood latch panel

the following:
and Operation) /


For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket
6. Remove the coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03A
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the radiator.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A Engine Cooling -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Radiator - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Radiator - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Radiator (303-03C Supercharger Cooling, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the air cleaner(s).

Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner LH (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner RH (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
9. CAUTION: If both front subframe front retaining bolts are removed,

the engine must be supported.
Remove the front subframe front retaining bolts.
10. Release the side member deformation element wiring harness and
position to one side.
11. Remove the bolts from the side member deformation element bracket.
Installation
1. Offer up the side member deformation element. Check alignment, if

correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
2. NOTE: Bolts are pre-coated to inhibit galvanic corrosion and can be

re-installed only if the coating is not damaged.
Install the bolts to the side member deformation element bracket.

Tighten to 62 Nm.
removal procedure.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Suspension Top Mount
Removal
1. The suspension top mount is a category A repair.
2. NOTES:
The suspension top mount is manufactured from high

pressure die cast aluminium HPDC.
The right-hand suspension top mount contains the

stamped Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN). When a new
right hand suspension top mount is requested it will be
supplied stamped with the Vehicle Identification Number,
(VIN). This operation is carried out within the Jaguar parts
supply process.
The suspension top mount is serviced as a separate riveted

and bonded panel, including the hood latch panel mounting
and the hood hinge mounting. It does not include the hood
strut mounting panel. The suspension top mount is also
part of the front side member and suspension top mount
service panel.

4. The suspension top mount is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Front door
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood latch panel
Fender apron panel
Fender apron panel closing panel.
Engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension, as an
assembly

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the fender apron panel.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front
8. Remove the engine, transmission, front subframe and front suspension

as an assembly.
9. If the right-hand suspension top mount is to be replaced, remove the

side member heatshield.
10. Remove the insulating material from the outer bulkhead and
transmission tunnel.
11. Remove the front suspension upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
(204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm LH - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal
and Installation) /
Upper Arm RH - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
as necessary.

14. NOTE: Retain the old panel as it will be used as a template.

15. Cut a section from the old panel to be used as a template,
as indicated.
Installation
3. Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
proceeding.
5. Clamp the template to the new panel and using a 6.5mm

Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the template into the
new panel, ready for Hemloks to be installed.

8. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes at the points
where Hemloks are to be installed.
allow to dry.

holes.


19. NOTE: This Hemlok is installed following the

installation of the fender apron panel and fender apron
panel closing panel.
Following the installation of the fender apron panel and the

fender apron panel closing panel, install the Hemlok.

removal procedure.
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof
Roof service panels
Item Description
1 Roof panel
Time schedules, roof panels

included).
Single panel times

Roof panel 19.20
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof Panel
Removal
1. The roof panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The roof panel is manufactured from aluminium

alloy 6111-T4.
The roof panel is serviced as a separate riveted and bonded

panel.
3. The roof panel is replaced in conjunction with:
NOTE: The headliner is released and lowered only and not

removed from the vehicle.
Headliner
Roof opening panel frame
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /

6. Remove the roof opening panel frame.

For additional information, refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame (501-17
Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the rear window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Window Glass (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the right-hand and left-hand side air curtain module(s).

For additional information, refer to: Side Air Curtain Module (501-20B
9. Remove the right-hand and left-hand roof mouldings.
10. Remove any electrical components in the local area of repair to prevent
damage.
11. Release and position the roof panel wiring harness to one side.
12. NOTE: Prior to removal, mark the position of the roof

panel within its aperture for ease of alignment on
installation.
Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets.
13. Separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
removing any adhesive residue.
4. NOTE: Use the marks made prior to removal to aid alignment.
proceeding.
5. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old
panels into the new panel, at the points where Hemloks are
to be installed.
7. Deburr the drilled holes.
allow to dry.
11. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the body at the points indicated.

surrounds fixing holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the body

joints.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel Sheet Metal
Side service panels

Item Description
1 Front fender
2 Front door
3 Rear door
4 Quarter panel
5 Rocker panel
6 Rocker panel front section (cut from rocker panel)
7 Rocker panel rear section (cut from rocker panel)
8 Rocker panel dogleg section (cut from rocker panel)
9 Rocker panel inner reinforcement
10 Rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
11 B-pillar reinforcement
12 B-pillar inner panel
13 A-pillar outer panel
14 A-pillar reinforcement
15 Fender apron panel closing panel
16 Inner quarter panel rear section
17 Rear wheelhouse outer
Time schedules, side panels

The following information shows the total time taken to install single panels. This time includes removal of Mechanical,
Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends to adjacent panels are not
included).
Single panel times

A Pillar Outer Panel 23.90
A Pillar Reinforcement TBC
Rocker Panel & B Pillar Outer Panel 39.80
B Pillar Reinforcement 4.20
Rocker Panel 18.60
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement TBC
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
1. The A-pillar outer panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The A-pillar outer panel is manufactured from

The A-pillar outer panel is serviced as a separate welded,

bonded and riveted panel.
3. The A-pillar outer panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Hood
Hood hinge
Front door
Front fender
Headliner
Windshield glass remove and install

the following:
and Operation) /


For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End
For additional information, refer to: Hood Hinge (501-27 Front End Sheet
9. If the passenger side A-pillar outer panel is to be installed, remove the

hood release cable.
10. Remove the instrument panel upper section.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Upper Section
(501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
11. If the drivers side A-pillar outer panel is to be installed, remove the
pedal box.
assembly is to be replaced, remove the brake master cylinder and brake
booster.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation) /
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
13. Remove the headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and

Installation).
15. Remove the side air curtain module.

as necessary.
17. Release the A-pillar outer panel wiring harness and position it to one
side.
18. NOTE: If the front fender lower mounting bracket is

undamaged, retain for re-use on installation.
Remove the monobolts as indicated.

into inner panels or reinforcements.
NOTE: If necessary, cut locations can be adjusted to

avoid self piercing rivets.
Measure, mark and cut the old panel as indicated.


the self piercing rivets in the areas indicated.
22. NOTES:
Retain the old panel remnant as it will be used in installation.
Remove and retain the noise, vibration and harshness (NVH)

component, if it is to be reused.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the NVH
components.
Installation
also removing any adhesive residue.
4. NOTE: Retain the remnants of the new panel as these

may be used for backing strips on installation.
Using the old panel for reference, measure, mark and cut
the new A-pillar outer panel at the points where the MIG
butt joints are to be made as indicated.
5. Debur the new panel.
6. Trim, clean and prepare the lower NVH component.
proceeding.
8. NOTE: The Hemloks will be installed adjacent to the original self

piercing rivet location holes.
Using the old panel for reference, measure the positions of the removed
self piercing rivet locations and mark these onto the new panel. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes adjacent to these locations at the
points where Hemloks are to be installed as indicated.
9. NOTE: Replacement self piercing rivets should be installed
adjacent to the removed originals wherever possible. If the pitch
between the centres of removed self piercing rivets is less than 25mm,
Hemloks should be installed in the hole created by the removed self
piercing rivet(s).
Where the pitch of the removed self piercing rivets is 25mm or less, or
there is no access for the ESN50, use a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit to drill
through the removed self piercing rivet holes on the vehicle, into the
new panel. Hemloks will be installed in these locations when the new
A-pillar outer panel is installed.
11. NOTE: The backing plates should be an interference fit.
Fabricate backing plates from the old A-pillar outer panel remnant. Debur
and offer up the backing plates to the vehicle. If correct proceed to next
step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
12. Remove the backing plates.
13. Fabricate run-on/run-off tabs from the old A-pillar outer panel remnant.
14. Debur the run-on/run-off tabs.
16. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the old and new panel
joint surfaces.
17. NOTE: The backing plates are installed with an interference fit.
Install and align the backing plates to the vehicle.
allow to dry.
20. NOTE: Do not apply semi-rigid sealer in the areas

where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the upper NVH component and

install to the new A-pillar outer panel as indicated.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the upper and lower NVH components.

holes. Do not apply adhesive in the vicinity of the MIG welds.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to all joints.
24. Tack weld the run-on/run-off tabs to all MIG butt joints.
25. MIG weld the MIG butt joints.
26. NOTE: It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing
by referencing the following table prior to installation.
Using the Genesis G4, install any remaining Hemloks in the areas as
indicated.
Hemlok Rivet Size Material Stack Jaguar Service Number
6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
27. NOTES:
Replacement self piercing rivets should be installed adjacent to the

removed originals wherever possible. If the pitch between the centres of
removed self piercing rivets is less than 25mm, Hemloks should be
installed in the hole created by the removed self piercing rivet(s).
It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing by

referencing the following table prior to installation.
indicated.

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
28. NOTES:


Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets in the areas as
indicated.
Self Piercing Rivet Size Material StackJaguar Service Number

4.8mm x 5.0mm 3.0mm C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm 4.0mm C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm 5.0mm C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm 5.5mm C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm 6.0mm C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm 6.5mm C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm 8.0mm C2C 20595
29. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts to the front
fender lower mounting bracket as indicated.
31. Remove the run-on/run-off tabs.
proceeding.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
question is being replaced in isolation or, is being replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
1. The A-pillar reinforcement is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The A-pillar reinforcement is manufactured from

The A-pillar reinforcement is serviced as a separate rivetted

and bonded panel, it includes its inner reinforcements.
3. In this procedure, to make sure the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must

be placed on an approved alignment jig.
4. The A-pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Hood
Hood hinge
Front door
Front fender
Hood latch panel
Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the fender apron panel closing panel.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
8. Remove the A-pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel (501-29 Side
Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Hood Hinge (501-27 Front End Sheet
10. Release the A-pillar wiring harness and position it to one side.
as necessary.
12. Prior to removal, mark the position of the A-pillar reinforcement in

relation to adjacent panels, for ease of alignment on installation.
13. NOTE: If the fender apron panel closing panel bracket

is to be installed, it is not necessary to remove it. Retain if
being re-used.
Remove the Monobolts, to release the fender apron panel

closing panel bracket as indicated.
14. Remove the Monobolt as indicated.
16. NOTES:
Retain the old panel as it will be used as a template.
Remove and retain the noise, vibration and harshness (NVH)

components, if they are to be reused.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the inner
NVH component.
Installation

3. Cut a template from the old A-pillar reinforcement panel

remnant as indicated.
4. Clean and dress the template.
5. Offer up, align and clamp the template in place on the new
A-pillar reinforcement service panel. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit
drill bit, drill through the template into the new panel at
the points indicated.
6. Remove the template.



15. Debur the drilled holes in the new panel.
correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
17. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the removed self
piercing rivet location holes in the areas as indicated.
18. Using the old panel for reference, mark and measure out
the position of the removed self piercing rivet locations, as
indicated. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes below
these locations at the points where Hemloks are to be
installed as indicated.
surfaces.
22. Trim, clean and prepare the NVH components.
allow to dry.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the inner NVH component and install it to the
new A Pillar Reinforcement, then apply semi-rigid sealer to the exposed
edge of the NVH component for installation to the vehicle.

holes.
27. CAUTION: Make sure any panel joints containing adhesive are fully
clamped to avoid any separation prior to the installation of external
panels. These joints must be left clamped until the adhesive has cured.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position.
28. NOTE: It is important to identify and select the

correct size fixing by referencing the following table prior to
installation.
Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks in the areas as

indicated.
Hemlok Rivet Jaguar Service

Size Material Stack Number
6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - C2C 36008
10.8mm

installation.

indicated.

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - C2C 36008
10.8mm
30. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivet as indicated.
31. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolt.

32. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts to the fender
apron panel closing panel bracket as indicated.
33. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the outer lower NVH component and install it
to the new A Pillar Reinforcement.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
1. The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is

manufactured from aluminium alloy 6111-T4.
The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is serviced as a

separate welded, bonded and riveted panel.
3. The rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is replaced in conjunction with:
Front door.
Rear door
Headliner
Roof glass front
Roof glass rear

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the roof opening panel frame.

For additional information, refer to: Roof Opening Panel Frame (501-17
Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures,
9. Remove the rear door.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door (501-03 Body Closures,
10. Remove the rear door upper and lower hinges from the B-pillar.

Installation).

14. Remove the front safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A
Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
15. Remove the safety belt shoulder height adjuster.

For additional information, refer to: Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
(501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
16. Release the floor covering and position it to one side.
17. Remove the underfloor splash shield.
as necessary.
19. Release the inner rocker panel wiring harness and position to one side.
20. NOTE: The points marked on the vehicle are for

reference only, do not cut the panels in these locations.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position over the old
panel. Mark the position of the new panel service cuts onto
the vehicle as indicated.
www.JagDocs.com

Cut the old rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel 10-15mm
inside the previously marked positions as indicated.
rivets.
25. NOTE: Retain the old panel remnant as it may be used as a
template and to fabricate backing strips and run-on/run off tabs.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing it from the
central noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) component.
Installation
4. Cut a template from the old rocker panel and B-pillar outer
panel remnant as indicated.

rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel service panel. Drill
through the template into the new panel at the points
indicated.
proceeding.

NOTE: The new panel should be cut in approximately

5mm inside the service cuts.
Cut through the new panel and the old panel as indicated.

piercing rivet(s).
through the removed self piercing rivet holes of the old panel, into the
rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel is installed.
12. Remove the new panel
13. Remove the old panel remnants.
Fabricate backing plates from the old rocker panel and B-pillar outer
panel remnant. Debur and offer up the backing plates to the rocker panel
and B-pillar outer panel. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify
and recheck before proceeding.
16. Fabricate run-on/run-off tabs from the old rocker panel and B-pillar outer
panel remnant.
18. Trim, clean and prepare the central NVH component.
joint surfaces.
allow to dry.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the central NVH component as

indicated.

Apply semi-rigid sealer to the B-pillar reinforcement as

indicated.

Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks in the areas as indicated.

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
31. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks as indicated.
32. NOTES:


indicated.

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
33. NOTES:


indicated.

4.8mm x 5.0mm 3.0mm C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm 4.0mm C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm 5.0mm C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm 5.5mm C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm 6.0mm C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm 6.5mm C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm 8.0mm C2C 20595
proceeding.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Inner Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: The B-pillar inner panel is manufactured from

The B-pillar inner panel is cut from the bodyside inner front
section service panel.

3. The B-pillar inner panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Rear bumper cover
Front door
Rear door
Front fender
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood latch panel
Quarter panel
Rocker panel and b-pillar outer panel
B-pillar reinforcement
Rocker panel
Rocker panel inner reinforcement
Headliner
Rear window glass
Roof glass front
Roof glass rear

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the B-pillar reinforcement.
For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side
6. Remove the A-pillar reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side
7. Remove the rocker panel inner reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
(501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).

as necessary.
11. Prior to removal, mark the position of the B-pillar inner in relation to
adjacent panels, for ease of alignment on installation.

Measure, mark and cut the old panel, at the point where
the upper MIG butt joint is to be performed as indicated.

Measure, mark and cut the old panel, at the point where
the lower MIG butt joint is to be performed as indicated.
14. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to drill through
Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm Cryobit drill

bit, remove any remaining self piercing rivets from the
areas indicated.

bit, remove any remaining self piercing rivets from the
areas indicated.

template and to fabricate backing strips and run-on/run off tabs.
Installation
4. Cut a template from the old B-pillar inner panel remnant as
indicated. Clean and dress the template.
5. Offer up, align and clamp the template in place on the

B-pillar inner service panel. Cut the B-pillar inner panel
service panel at the point indicated.
6. NOTE: Retain the new panel remnant as it will be

used as a template and to fabricate backing strips and
run-on/run off tabs.
Measure, mark and cut the new panel, at the point where
the lower MIG butt joint is to be performed as indicated.
7. Cut a template from the old B-pillar inner panel remnant as

indicated. Clean and dress the template.
8. Offer up, align and clamp the template in place on the
B-pillar inner service panel. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit,
drill holes as indicated.
9. Debur the drilled holes and the section cuts.
proceeding.
11. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes for Hemloks in
the areas indicated.
12. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes for Hemloks in
the areas indicated.

Using a 10mm drill bit, drill holes for MIG plug welds for the
installation of the upper backing plate as indicated.

Using a 10mm drill bit, drill holes for MIG plug welds for the
installation of the lower backing plate as indicated.
17. Cut run on/run off tabs from the unused part of the old/new B-pillar
inner panel remnants.
18. NOTE: The backing plate should be wide enough to accommodate
10mm MIG plug welds.
Fabricate backing plates from the old/new B-pillar inner panel remnants.
Debur and offer up the backing plates to the vehicle. If correct proceed
20. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean the backing plates and the panel
surfaces where the backing plates are to be welded.
21. Offer up the backing plates, align and clamp into position. Check
alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
22. MIG plug weld the upper backing plate to the vehicle as
indicated.
23. MIG plug weld the lower backing plate to the vehicle as
indicated.
24. Clean and prepare all remaining panel joint surfaces including the run
on/run off tabs.

holes. Do not apply adhesive in the vicinity of the MIG weld.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the vehicle.

clamped to avoid any separation prior to the installation of other panels.
These joints must be left clamped until the adhesive has cured.
NOTE: If necessary and to aid alignment, the unattached side of

the backing plate can be secured with panel pin clamps.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position. If correct proceed
30. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets as

indicated.
31. Tack weld the run-on/run-off tabs to the rear side member closing panel
section.
32. Clean the area of the MIG butt joint prior to welding.
33. MIG weld the B-pillar inner panel butt joints.
proceeding.
36. Dress the MIG butt joints and the MIG plug welds.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
1. The B-pillar reinforcement is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The B-pillar reinforcement is manufactured from

The B-pillar reinforcement is serviced as a separate riveted

and bonded panel, it includes its inner reinforcements.

4. The B-pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

Front door.
Rear door
Rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel
Headliner
Roof glass front
Roof glass rear

the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the rocker panel and B-pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel and B-Pillar Outer
Panel (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).


as necessary.
9. Prior to removal, mark the position of the B-pillar reinforcement in

10. Remove the Monobolts as indicated.
11. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing rivets as
indicated.
12. NOTES:
Retain the old panel as it will be used as a template.

Remove and retain the central noise, vibration and harshness
(NVH) component, if it is to be reused.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing it from the
lower NVH component.
Installation
proceeding.
4. NOTE: New self piercing rivets should be installed

adjacent to the removed originals wherever possible. If the
pitch between the centres of removed self piercing rivets is
less than 25mm, Hemloks should be installed in the hole
created by the removed self piercing rivet(s).
Where the pitch of the removed self piercing rivets is 25mm

or less, use a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit to drill through the
removed self piercing rivet holes of the old panel, into the
new panel. Hemloks will be installed in these locations
when the outer panel is installed.
6. Cut a section from the lower part of the old panel to be

used as a template as indicated.
7. Debur the template.

8. Offer up, align and clamp the template to the new panel.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the
template into the new panel, ready for Hemloks to be
installed.
9. Remove the template from the new panel.
surfaces.
allow to dry.

Apply semi-rigid sealer to the lower NVH component.

holes.


indicated.
21. Apply semi rigid to the central NVH component and install.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel
Removal
1. The rocker panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rocker panel is manufactured from

The rocker panel is serviced as a separate riveted and

bonded panel.
3. This procedure identifies the method for the replacement of the rocker
panel in full. The following graphic and table identify possible alternative
sections of the rocker panel that can be performed dependant on the
extent of damage to the vehicle, and/or the replacement of associated
panels. Where an alternative section is selected, some steps within this
procedure may not be necessary.
Panel sections available Cut locations

Rocker panel (full panel) A+C+E
Rocker panel front section A + C + D
Rocker panel rear section B+C+E
Rocker panel dogleg section D + E
4. The rocker panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Front fender
Front door
Rear door
Quarter panel
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /

8. Remove the quarter panel.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel (501-30 Rear End

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End

Installation).

12. Remove the A-Pillar trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
13. Remove the B-Pillar lower trim panel.

14. Release the floor covering and position it to one side.
15. Remove the B-Pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05
16. Remove the front safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A
17. Remove the C-Pillar side impact sensor.
For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B
18. Release the rocker panel wiring harness and position it to one side.
as necessary.
20. NOTE: If the front fender lower mounting bracket is

undamaged, retain for re-use on installation.
Remove the monobolts as indicated.
21. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through into inner
panels or reinforcements.
NOTE: If necessary, cut locations can be adjusted to avoid self

piercing rivets.
Using the new panel for reference, mark and cut the old panel in the
areas as indicated.
the self piercing rivets in the areas indicated.
23. NOTE: Retain the old panel remnant as it will be used in

installation.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the noise,
vibration and harshness (NVH) components.
Installation
4. Using the old panel for reference, trim the excess from the new panel to
allow for an overlap in the areas of the MIG butt joints
proceeding.
8. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through into inner

panels or reinforcements.
Cut through the new panel and the old panel as indicated.

piercing rivet(s).
through the removed self piercing rivet holes of the old panel, into the
rocker panel is installed.
10. NOTE: The Hemloks will be installed adjacent to the original self
piercing rivet location holes.
Using the old panel for reference, measure the positions of the removed
self piercing rivet locations and mark these onto the new panel. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes adjacent to these locations at the
points where Hemloks are to be installed as indicated.
11. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill through the removed self piercing
rivet holes of the old panel, into the new panel, at the points where
Hemloks are to be installed as indicated.
12. Remove the new panel
13. Remove the old panel remnants and any remaining self piercing rivets.
Fabricate backing plates from the old rocker panel remnant. Debur and
offer up the backing plates to the rocker panel. If correct proceed to next
step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
16. Fabricate run-on/run-off tabs from the old rocker panel remnant.
joint surfaces.
Apply the coupling agent where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied and

allow to dry.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH component on the

A-pillar reinforcement as indicated.


B-pillar reinforcement as indicated.


B-pillar reinforcement as indicated.


6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
32. NOTES:



6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - 10.8mmC2C 36008
33. NOTES:


indicated.

4.8mm x 5.0mm 3.0mm C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm 4.0mm C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm 5.0mm C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm 5.5mm C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm 6.0mm C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm 6.5mm C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm 8.0mm C2C 20595
34. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts to the front
fender lower mounting bracket as indicated.
proceeding.

removal procedure.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
Removal
1. The rocker panel inner reinforcement is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rocker panel inner reinforcement is

The rocker panel inner reinforcement is serviced as a

separate rivetted and bonded panel.

4. The rocker panel inner reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with:

Front bumper cover
Rear bumper cover
Front door
Rear door
Front fender
Hood
Hood hinge
Hood latch panel
Quarter panel
Rocker panel and b-pillar outer panel
B-pillar reinforcement
Rocker panel
Headliner
Rear window glass
Roof glass front
Roof glass rear

the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the B-pillar reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side
7. Remove the A-pillar reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Reinforcement (501-29 Side
8. Remove the rocker panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel (501-29 Side Panel

as necessary.
11. Prior to removal, mark the position of the rocker panel inner
reinforcement in relation to adjacent panels, for ease of alignment on
installation.
12. Using the ESN50, remove any remaining self piercing rivets
from the areas indicated.
13. NOTE: Remove and retain the noise, vibration and harshness (NVH)
component, if it is to be reused.
component if required.
Installation
proceeding.
5. NOTE: Replacement self piercing rivets should be
installed adjacent to the removed originals wherever
possible. If the pitch between the centres of removed self
piercing rivets is less than 25mm, Hemloks should be
installed in the hole created by the removed self piercing
rivet(s).
Where the pitch of the removed self piercing rivets is 25mm

or less, use a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit to drill through the
removed self piercing rivet holes of the old panel, into the
new panel. Hemloks will be installed in these locations
when the outer panel is installed.
surfaces, also removing any adhesive residue.
allow to dry.

holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the vehicle.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position. If correct proceed
13. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivet as indicated.

15. Trim, clean and prepare the NVH component.
16. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH component and install to

the new panel.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear End Sheet Metal
Rear end service panels

Item Description
1 Luggage compartment lid hinge L/H and R/H
2 Luggage compartment lid
3 Rear bumper cover
4 Rear bumper
5 Back panel
6 Inner quarter panel extension
7 Inner quarter panel rear section
8 Quarter panel
9 Quarter panel lower extension
10 Rear wheelhouse outer
11 Rear side member closing panel section
12 Rear floor side extension
13 Rear bumper mounting
14 Rear side member inner reinforcement
15 Rear suspension cast aluminium mounting
16 Rear side member section
17 Spare wheel well
Time Schedules, Front End Sheet Metal

included).
Single panel times

Back Panel 10.70
Inner Quarter Panel Extension 1.90
Inner Quarter Panel Section 9.30
Quarter Panel 11.40
Quarter Panel Lower Extension TBC
Rear Bumper Mounting TBC
Rear Floor Side Extension TBC
Rear Side Member Closing Panel 13.40
Rear Wheelhouse Outer 3.00
Spare Wheel Well 12.10
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Back Panel
Removal
1. The back panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The back panel is manufactured from

The back panel is serviced as a separate riveted and

bonded panel, it includes the back panel inner.
3. The back panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the rear bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,
6. Remove both the loadspace trim panels.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05
Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
7. Remove the luggage compartment lid weatherstrip.

10. Remove both the rear mufflers.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust
System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Rear Muffler (309-00B Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
11. Remove the right-hand and left-hand rear muffler heatshields.
12. Remove the auxiliary junction box (AJB).

For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) (418-00
Module Communications Network, Removal and Installation).
13. Remove the rear junction box (RJB).

For additional information, refer to: Rear Junction Box (RJB) (418-00
14. Release the back panel and loadspace wiring harness and position it to
one side.
15. Remove the luggage compartment latch striker.
16. Remove the air suspension compressor.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Compressor (204-05
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
damage.
18. Saw cut the old panel along the point shown in the illustration. This
allows access to allow the use of the ESN50.
19. Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets from the spare wheel
well and rear side members.
20. Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets from the rear floor side
extensions.
21. Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets (3 each
side) from the quarter panel lower extensions.
bit, remove the self piercing rivets (10 each side) from the
quarter panels.
23. CAUTION: Use care not to drill through into inner

panels.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing

rivets (2 each side) from the junction box and modules
mounting panels.
24. Separate the joints and remove the old panel, carefully releasing the
adhesive at the points illustrated.
Installation
2. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, remove the adhesive residue.
proceeding.
the new panel, at the points where Hemloks are to be installed. Where
it is not possible to drill, scribe mark the hole locations on the new
panel.
7. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes in the new panel at the scribe
marked locations.
8. Using a 10mm drill bit, drill 2 holes in the old quarter panel
ready for MIG plug welding.
10. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the panel.
Remove seam sealer where applicable.
14. Apply the semi-rigid sealer at the points illustrated.

holes. Do not apply adhesive in the vicinity of the MIG plug welds.
Apply a 5mm zig zag style bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the body joints.
17. Using the Genesis G4, install 8 Hemloks (4 each side) into the rear side
member. Install a further 22 Hemloks (11 each side) into the spare
wheel well and rear floor side extension.
18. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks (2 each side)
into the junction box and modules mounting panels.
19. Using the Genesis G4, install 12 Hemloks (6 each side) into
the quarter panel. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing
rivets (3 each side) into the quarter panel.
20. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets into the rear floor side
extension.
21. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets (3 each
side) into the quarter panel lower extension.
23. Install 2 MIG plug welds (1 each side) into the quarter
panel.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Inner Quarter Panel Extension
Removal
1. NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this

procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in question is
being replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with
panels other than those listed.
The inner quarter panel extension is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The inner quarter panel extension is

The inner quarter panel extension is serviced as a separate

rivetted and bonded panel.
3. The inner quarter panel extension is installed in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Quarter panel
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /


7. Remove the back panel.
For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet
8. Remove the rear suspension vertical accelerometer.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Suspension Vertical
Accelerometer (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
9. If the right-hand inner quarter panel extension is to be installed, remove

the differential locking module.

the adaptive damping module.
For additional information, refer to: Adaptive Damping Module (204-05

the air suspension control module.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Control Module
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
damage.
13. Release and position the loadspace wiring harness to one side.
14. Prior to removal, mark the position of the inner quarter panel extension
in relation to adjacent panels for ease of alignment on installation.
15. CAUTION: Use care not to damage adjacent panels.
Saw cut to remove the panel bulk as indicated.

16. Use a hole saw to cut an access hole to expose the hidden
self piercing rivet.
rivet through the access hole.
www.JagDocs.com
18. NOTE: Drill through all panels as Hemloks will be used
for installation.
Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm Cryobit drill

bit remove the self piercing rivets.
19. NOTE: Drill through all panels as Hemloks will be used

for installation.

rivets.
20. Separate the joints and remove the old panel remnant.
Installation
proceeding.
the new panel at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.

allow to dry.

holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the body joints. Not
to the quarter panel or back panel as these will be bonded later.

16. CAUTION: Make sure that adhesive is applied between the rear
floor side extension and the lower flange of the inner quarter panel
extension when installing the quarter panel.
The installation of associated panels and components is the reversal of

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Inner Quarter Panel Rear Section
Removal
NOTES:
The removal and installation steps shown within this procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in question is
being replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
The procedure shown is for the right-hand inner quarter panel rear section, the procedure for the left-hand is similar.
1. The inner quarter panel rear section is a category A repair.
2. The inner quarter panel rear section is serviced as a

separate welded, bonded and riveted panel.
3. The inner quarter panel rear section is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Rear Door
Quarter panel
Rear window glass
Headliner

the following:
and Operation) /


8. Remove the rear door.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door (501-03 Body Closures,
9. Remove the headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and

11. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, drain the fuel tank.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Draining - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures) /
Fuel Tank Draining - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel
12. If the right-hand rear quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the fuel
filler pipe.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01A Fuel
Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
as necessary.
14. Release the inner quarter panel wiring harness and position to one side.
15. Prior to removal, mark the position of the inner quarter panel rear
section in relation to adjacent panels for ease of alignment on
installation.


any remaining self piercing rivets to release the inner quarter panel rear
section.
18. NOTES:
Retain the old panel remnant as it will be used in installation.
Remove and retain the noise vibration and harshness (NVH)

components if they are to be reused.
components.
Installation
CAUTION: Installation of rivets should always be referenced against the stack size of the panels, access and the pitch
between the original removed rivets locations, to make sure the correct type and size of rivet is installed.
NOTE: Installation of self piercing rivets should be installed adjacent to the removed originals wherever possible. If the
pitch between the centres of removed self piercing rivets is less than 25mm, Hemloks should be installed in the hole created
by the removed self piercing rivets.

4. NOTE: Retain the remnants of the new panel as these
may be used for backing strips on installation.
Using the old panel for reference, measure, mark and cut
the new inner quarter panel rear section at the points
where the MIG butt joints are to be made as indicated.
proceeding.
7. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes at the points where Hemloks
are to be installed.
10. Measure and cut backing plates and run on/run off tabs, from the old and
new panel remnants.
11. NOTE: The backing plates should be an interference

fit.
Offer up the backing plates to the vehicle. Check alignment,

if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
allow to dry.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the new panel where the lower NVH
component is to be installed. Install the NVH component to the new
panel.

Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH component as indicated.
Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH component on the new panel.



installation.

indicated.

indicated.

4.8mm x 5.0mm 3.0mm C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm 4.0mm C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm 5.0mm C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm 5.5mm C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm 6.0mm C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm 6.5mm C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm 8.0mm C2C 20595
proceeding.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel
Removal
1. The quarter panel is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The quarter panel is manufactured from

The quarter panel is serviced as a separate riveted and

bonded panel, it includes the quarter panel lower
extension.
3. The quarter panel is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Rear window glass

the following:
and Operation) /
5. Remove the rear bumper.

6. Remove the rear window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Window Glass (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the luggage compartment lid hinge.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Hinge
(501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).


10. Remove the rear muffler.
11. Remove the rear muffler heatshields.
12. Remove both the loadspace trim panels.

Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
13. Remove the luggage compartment lid weatherstrip.
14. Remove the parcel shelf.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
15. Remove the B-Pillar lower trim panel.

16. Remove the C-Pillar side impact sensor.

For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B
17. Remove the rear quarter window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window Glass (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
18. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A
19. Remove the rear door striker.
21. Remove the quarter panel splash shield.
22. Remove the forced air extraction grille.
23. Remove the rear bumper cover side retainer.
24. If the right-hand quarter panel is to be repaired, remove the auxiliary

junction box (AJB).
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) (418-00
25. If the right-hand quarter panel is to be repaired remove the rear junction
box (RJB).
26. If the right-hand quarter panel is to be repaired remove the fuel filler
door assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Door Assembly (501-03
Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
damage.
one side.
29. Remove the Monobolts from the quarter panel inner. Using
the ESN50 remove the self piercing rivets from the quarter
panel inner.
30. Remove the Monobolts from the rocker panel. Using the
ESN50 remove the self piercing rivet from the rear
wheelhouse outer.
bit, remove the self piercing rivets from the rear parcel
shelf panel.

bit, remove the self piercing rivets from the back panel.
33. Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets from the
back panel.
34. Using the ESN50, the self piercing rivets from the rear floor
side extension and rear wheelhouse outer.
rear door aperture.
junction box and control module mounting panel.
37. Carefully separate and release the adhesive from the
wheelarch outer.
38. Carefully separate and release the adhesive from the rear
parcel shelf panel.
39. Carefully separate and release the adhesive from the
quarter panel inner.
40. If the right hand quarter panel is to be repaired, carefully

separate and release the adhesive from the fuel filler door
aperture.
41. Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the noise,
vibration and harshness, (NVH), components.
Installation
1. If necessary, install the NVH components.
proceeding.
the new panel at the points where Hemloks are to be installed. Where it
is not possible to drill, scribe mark the hole locations on the new panel.
7. Remove the transit lug from the new panel.
9. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes in the new panel at the scribe
marked locations.
10. Drill 1 10mm hole in the new quarter panel ready for MAG
plug welding.
12. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the panel.
Remove seam sealer where applicable.

16. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the body at the wheelarch outer.
17. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the body at the rear parcel shelf
panel.
18. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the body at the quarter panel
inner.
19. If the right hand quarter panel is to be repaired, apply

semi-rigid sealer to the body at the fuel filler door aperture.
20. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the NVH components.
21. NOTE: make sure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds the

fixing holes. Do not apply adhesive in the vicinity of the MIG plug welds.

23. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts into the
quarter panel inner. Using the ESN50, install the self
piercing rivets into the quarter panel inner.
24. Using the Genesis G4, install the Monobolts into the rocker
panel. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivet into
the rear wheelhouse outer.
25. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks into the rear
parcel shelf panel. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing
rivets into the rear parcel shelf panel.
26. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks into the back
panel. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets into
the back panel.
27. Using the ESN50, install the self piercing rivets into the
back panel.
rear floor side extension and rear wheelhouse outer.
rear door aperture.
junction box and control module mounting panel.

32. Install the MIG plug weld into the back panel.
33. Install the NVH material as indicated.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Removal
1. The quarter panel lower extension is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The quarter panel lower extension is

manufactured from aluminium alloy 5754-NG
The quarter panel lower extension is serviced as a separate

riveted and bonded panel, it is also serviced as part of the
quarter panel.
3. The quarter panel lower extension is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper

the following:
and Operation) /

6. Remove the Rear Bumper.

7. Remove the muffler and tailpipe.

8. Remove the rear bumper cover side retainer.
9. Remove the rear wheel and tire.

10. Remove the rear fender splash shield.
11. Remove the forced air extraction grille.
12. If the right-hand quarter panel is to be repaired remove the rear junction
box (RJB).
one side.
damage.
back panel.
rear floor side extension and wheelhouse outer.
quarter panel.

panels.

rivets from the quarter panel.
19. CAUTION: Use care when separating the joints to avoid distorting
adjacent panels.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel, also releasing the noise,
vibration and harshness, (NVH) component.
Installation
NOTES:
Self Piercing Rivets should be installed adjacent to their original positions and not into any holes made during removal.
Self piercing rivets should be installed adjacent to their original positions and not into any holes made during removal.
1. Remove the rivet remnants.

proceeding.

panels.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old
panels into the new panel, at the points where Hemloks are
to be installed.
6. NOTE: Due to the proximity of inner panels, it is not

possible to install a Hemlok in the same location as the
original self piercing rivet. In this case the Hemlok is
installed approximately 70mm rearward.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1 hole as indicated.
allow to dry.
12. Apply semi-rigid sealer to the new panel as indicated.
13. NOTE: Make sure that a continuous bead of adhesive

Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the new

panel as indicated.
14. NOTE: Make sure that a continuous bead of adhesive


joints as indicated.

19. Using the HES 412 Rivet Nut Tool, insert the rivet nuts.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Bumper Mounting
Removal
1. NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this procedure may differ
depending on whether the panel in question is being replaced in isolation, or, is being
replaced in combination with panels other than those listed.
The rear bumper mounting is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper mounting is manufactured from gravity die-cast

aluminium (GDC).
The rear bumper mounting is serviced as a separate riveted and bonded

panel, it is also on the rear side member service panel.
3. In this procedure, to make sure that the vehicle is correctly aligned, it must be placed on
an approved alignment jig.
4. The rear bumper mounting is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
NOTE: A new rear side member closing panel service panel will be required
A section of the rear side member closing panel is required for access
The adjoining flanges of the spare wheel well and the rear floor side extension
will need to be opened up to enable welding access
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs - General Information, Description and Operation) /
Operation) /


For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
9. If the right-hand rear bumper mounting is to be replaced, remove the battery and battery
tray.
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
10. If the right-hand rear bumper mounting is to be replaced, remove the insulating material
from the luggage compartment floor.
11. Remove any electrical components in the local area of repair to prevent damage.
12. Release and position the back panel and loadspace wiring harness to one side.
13.
CAUTION:
Consideration
should be
given to the
location of
holes,
weld-studs
and
rivet-nuts.
Mark out the

position
where the
rear side
member
closing panel
section MIG
butt joint is
to be made
as indicated.
14. Remove sealer from the area of repair as required, to reveal the panel joints.
15. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the self piercing rivets from the spare wheel well
and from the rear floor side extension.
16. Remove the Hemloks from the rear side member closing panel.
17. Remove the Hemloks from the rear side member panel.
18. Carefully separate the flanges of the spare wheel well and the rear floor side extension
to allow access to where the rear side member closing panel is to be sectioned.
19. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to cut through into the inner
reinforcement.
Cut through the rear side member closing panel as indicated.

20. Separate the joints and remove the rear side member closing panel section.
21. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the Hemloks from the rear bumper
mounting.
22. Separate the joints and remove the rear bumper mounting.
Installation
2. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces removing any sealer
and adhesive residue.
4. Offer up the new rear bumper mounting and clamp into position. Check alignment, if
correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
5. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill a hole through the rear side member
panel into the rear bumper mounting.
6. Mark out the position on the rear side member closing panel service panel,
where the section MIG butt joint is to be made and cut the panel at this
point as indicated.
7. Offer up the new rear side member closing panel section and clamp into position. Check
alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
8. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes at the points where Hemloks are
to be installed.
11. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces, including the inner
panel surfaces where backing plates are to be welded.
12. NOTE: The backing plate may need to be trimmed to fit around holes and rivet-
studs.
Measure and cut a backing plate, approxinately 50mm wide (25mm each side of the MIG
butt joint), from the unused part of the new rear side member closing panel or from
similar material.
13. Cut a run on/run off tab from the unused part of the new rear side member closing panel,
or from similar material.
14. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the backing plates and the run on/run
off tab.
15. MIG weld the backing plate onto the new rear side member closing panel
section.
16. Drill 2 10mm holes through the rear side member closing panel, where the
backing plate is to be MIG plug welded.
17. Deburr drilled holes.
18. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel joints.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the rear bumper mounting.
22. Offer up the new rear bumper mounting, align and clamp into position.
25. NOTE: Make sure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing holes. Do not
apply adhesive in the vicinity of the MIG weld.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the rear side member and the rear
bumper mounting.
26. Offer up the new rear side member closing panel section, align and clamp into position.
28. Tack weld the run-on/run-off tab to the rear side member closing panel
section.
29. Install 2 MIG plug welds.

30. MIG weld the rear side member section butt joint.
31. Cut off the run on/run off tab.
33. Pyrosil the flanges of the spare wheel well and rear floor side extension, at the points
34. Apply the coupling agent to the flanges of the spare wheel well and rear floor side
extension where 3M 8115 adhesive is to be applied and allow to dry.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the flanges of the spare wheel well
and rear floor side extension.
36. Re-align the flanges of the spare wheel well and rear floor side extension and clamp into
position.
39. Using the old panel for reference, install the rivet-studs into the new rear side member
procedure.
procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Floor Side Extension
Removal
1. NOTE: The removal and installation steps shown within this

procedure may differ depending on whether the panel in question is
being replaced in isolation, or, is being replaced in combination with
panels other than those listed.
The rear floor side extension is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rear floor side extension is manufactured

The rear floor side extension is serviced as a separate

rivetted and bonded panel.
3. The rear floor side extension is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel

the following:
and Operation) /


7. If the right-hand rear floor side extension is to be replaced, remove the

battery.
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting
and Cables, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove sealer from the area of repair as required, to reveal the panel
joints.
9. Prior to removal, mark the position of the rear floor side extension in

panels.

rivet from the wheelhouse.
14. NOTE: This fixing is not replaced on installation, due

to restricted access.
Using a belt sander, remove the self piercing rivet from the
wheelhouse.
15. Separate the joints and remove the old panel remnant.
Installation
proceeding.
4. NOTE: The joint to the quarter panel lower extension uses self
piercing rivets.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old panels into
the new panel at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.

allow to dry.


joints.

quarter panel lower extension.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section
Removal
1. CAUTION: The rear side member closing panel must be sectioned

at the point indicated so that the aluminium casting of the rear
suspension mounting can be inspected for damage.
The rear side member closing panel section is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rear side member closing panel section is

The rear side member closing panel section is cut from the
rear side member closing panel service panel.

4. The rear side member closing panel section is replaced in conjunction

with:
Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Rear side member section
Rear side member inner reinforcement and noise, vibration and
harshness (NVH) component (plastic)

the following:
and Operation) /
6. NOTE: This procedure assumes that if the rear side member closing
panel section is damaged, the rear side member section will also be
damaged. Therefore the replacement procedure for the rear side member
closing panel section is combined within the rear side member section
procedure.
Remove the rear side member section.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Section (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Installation

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Section
Removal
1. The rear side member section is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The rear side member section is manufactured

The rear side member section is cut from the rear side
member service panel, it includes the rear bumper
mounting.

4. CAUTION: The rear side member closing panel must be sectioned

at the point indicated so that the aluminium casting of the rear
suspension mounting can be inspected for damage.
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the rear side member closing
panel section is damaged. Therefore, the procedure combines the repair
of the rear side member section and the rear side member closing panel
section.
The rear side member section is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel
Spare wheel well
Rear side member closing panel section
Rear side member inner reinforcement and noise, vibration and
harshness (NVH) component (plastic)

the following:
and Operation) /
6. Remove the spare wheel well.

For additional information, refer to: Spare Wheel Well (501-30 Rear End
7. Remove the rear floor side extension.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Floor Side Extension (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
as necessary.
11. Release rear side member wiring harness and position it to one side.


Measure, mark and cut the old rear side member closing
panel as indicated.
any remaining self piercing rivets to release the rear side member
14. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove any remaining

Hemloks to release the rear side member closing panel
section.

template and to fabricate a backing strip.
Separate the joints and carefully remove the old rear side member
16. NOTE: Retain the rear side member inner
reinforcement and its NVH component for reuse on
installation. If damaged, a new component must be
installed
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove the Hemloks from

the rear side member inner reinforcement. Separate the
joints and carefully remove the rear side member inner
reinforcement, also releasing and removing the NVH
component.
17. Remove any adhesive, clean and inspect the aluminium

casting of the rear suspension mounting for damage. A
non-destructive crack inspection must be carried out to
identify any unseen damage. Only proceed to next step if
no damage is identified.
18. NOTE: Retain the old panel remnant as it may be

used as a template and to fabricate a backing strip.
Measure, mark and cut the old rear side member as

indicated.
Installation

3. Mark out the position on the rear side member service
panel, where the section MIG butt joint is to be made and
cut the panel at this point as indicated.
proceeding.
6. Fabricate a 25mm backing plate from the old/new rear side

member remnant. Debur and offer up to the rear side
member as indicated.
7. Cut a run on/run off tab from the unused part of the old/new rear side
member remnant.
8. Remove the new rear side member section and its backing plate.
9. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean and prepare the rear side member
panel surfaces, the backing plate and the run on/run off tabs, including
the inner panel surfaces where the backing plate is to be welded.
10. Offer up the new rear side member section with its backing plate, align
and clamp into position. Check alignment, if correct, proceed to next
step, if not rectify and recheck before proceeding.
11. NOTE: MIG weld runs should avoid the hole in the rear
side member.
MIG weld the backing plate into the rear side member using
20mm runs as indicated.
12. Tack weld the run-on/run-off tabs to the rear side member section.
14. MIG weld the rear side member section butt joint.
16. Dress the mating panel flanges of the rear side member section MIG
butt joint to ensure correct alignment with the rear side member closing
panel.
17. Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the rear side member
MIG butt joint. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
18. Dress the rear side member MIG butt joint.
19. Cut a template from the old rear side member closing panel remnant,
clean and dress the template.
20. Offer up, align and clamp the template in place on the rear
side member closing panel service panel. Cut the rear side
member closing panel service panel at the point indicated.
21. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill through the template
into the new side member closing panel section at the
points indicated.
proceeding.
25. NOTE: The old rear side member and rear side member closing
panel remnants can be used to identify where rivet locations are to be
drilled.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the rear side member
and rear side member closing panel where the spare wheel well and rear
floor side extension Hemloks are to be installed.

28. Using a 10mm drill bit, drill holes for MIG plug welds for the
installation of the backing plate as indicated.
30. NOTE: It may be necessary to fabricate the backing plate from

several pieces welded together. The backing plate should be wide
enough to accommodate 10mm MIG plug welds.
Fabricate a backing plate from the old/new rear side member closing
panel remnant. Debur and offer up the backing plate to the rear side
member closing panel and to the new rear side member closing panel
section. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
31. Remove the backing plate.
32. Using a Roloc fine bristle disc, clean the backing plate and the panel
surfaces where the backing plate is to be welded.
33. Offer up the backing plate, align and clamp into position. Check
alignment, if correct, proceed to next step, if not rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
34. MIG plug weld the backing plate as indicated.
35. Clean and prepare the all remaining panel joint surfaces.
36. Pyrosil the joints of the rear side member and the rear side member
closing panel, new and old.

38. NOTES:
An adhesive kit is supplied with the rear side member inner

reinforcement service part.
Do not apply adhesive in the areas where 3M 8115 adhesive is to

be applied, or in the vicinity of the MIG welded butt joint.
Apply adhesive to the rear side member and the rear side member inner
reinforcement where the NVH component is to be installed.
39. Install the NVH component to the rear side member inner reinforcement
and install the rear side member inner reinforcement to the rear side
member.
41. NOTES:
An adhesive kit is supplied with the rear side member inner

reinforcement service part.
Do not apply adhesive in the areas where 3M 8115 adhesive is to

be applied.
Apply adhesive to the NVH component where it comes into contact with
the rear side member closing panel section.
42. NOTE: Ensure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing

Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the rear side member.
NOTE: If necessary and to aid alignment, the unattached side of

the backing plate can be secured with panel pin clamps.
Offer up the new rear side member closing panel section, align and

indicated.
46. Cut a run on/run off tab from the unused part of the old/new rear side
member closing panel remnant.
47. Tack weld the run-on/run-off tabs to the rear side member closing panel
section.
49. MIG weld the rear side member closing panel section butt
joint.
51. Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the rear side member
closing panel section MIG butt joint. If correct proceed to next step, if
not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
52. Dress the rear side member closing panel MIG butt joint and MIG plug
welds.
53. Using the Genesis G4, install the Hemloks as indicated.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Removal
1. The inner quarter panel rear section is a category A repair.
2. NOTES:
The rear wheelhouse outer is manufactured from

The illustration shows the left-hand service panel, the

right-hand is similar but with the fuel filler aperture.
The rear wheelhouse outer is serviced as a separate riveted

and bonded panel.
3. The rear wheelhouse outer is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Quarter Panel
Rear window glass
Headliner
Inner quarter panel rear section
Rear Door

the following:
and Operation) /

7. Remove the inner quarter panel rear section.

For additional information, refer to: Inner Quarter Panel Rear Section
(501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
8. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is to be replaced, remove the

DLM (Differential Locking Module).
9. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is to be replaced, remove the

ADM (Adaptive Damping Module).
For additional information, refer to: Adaptive Damping Module (204-05
10. If the right-hand rear wheelhouse outer is to be replaced, remove the air
suspension control module.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Control Module
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
as necessary.
12. Release and lay aside the rear wheelhouse outer wiring harness.
13. Prior to removal, mark the position of the rear wheelhouse outer in
14. NOTE: Retain the rocker panel inner reinforcement

section for installation.
Saw cut and remove a minimal section from the rocker

panel inner reinforcement to allow access to the self
piercing rivets as indicated.
15. Remove the monobolts.

17. Carefully separate the joints and remove the old panel.
Installation
CAUTION: Installation of rivets should always be referenced against the stack size of the panel/s, access and the pitch
between the original removed rivets locations, to make sure the correct type and size of rivet is installed.
NOTE: Hemloks should be installed in the hole created by the removed self piercing rivets.
proceeding.
5. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill through the old panel holes into the
new panel, at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.
allow to dry.

holes.
Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the new panel and to
the corresponding body joints.

installation.

indicated.

6.4mm x 13.7mm 1.5mm - 3.0mm C2S 45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm 2.8mm - 4.8mm C2C 36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm 4.8mm - 6.8mm C2C 36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm 6.8mm - 8.8mm C2C 36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm 7.5mm - 9.5mm C2C 22613
6.4mm x 21.0mm 8.8mm - C2C 36008
10.8mm
16. Dress, clean and prepare the panel joint surfaces of the rocker panel
inner reinforcement section.
17. Offer up the rocker panel inner reinforcement section and clamp into
position. Check alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify
and recheck before proceeding.
18. NOTE: Hemloks for the rocker panel inner reinforcement section will
be installed with the installation of outer panels.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill holes through the old rocker panel
inner reinforcement section, at the points where Hemloks are to be
installed.
19. Remove the rocker panel inner reinforcement section.
allow to dry.

Apply a 5mm zig zag bead of 3M 8115 adhesive to the rocker panel inner
reinforcement section.
26. NOTE: The run-on/run-off tabs should be fabricated from similar

material.
Tack weld the run-on/run-off tabs to all MIG butt joints.
27. MIG weld the MIG butt joint.
29. Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the MIG butt joint. If
proceeding.
30. Dress the welded joint.

removal procedure.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Spare Wheel Well
Removal
1. The spare wheel well is a category A repair.
2. NOTE: The spare wheel well is manufactured from

The spare wheel well is serviced as a separate riveted and

bonded panel. It is not serviced with all its rivet-studs.
3. NOTE: The rear suspension and subframe assembly can remain in

place, however, some aspects of the refinishing process will need to be
carried out prior to the installataion of the new panel.
The spare wheel well is replaced in conjunction with:

Rear bumper cover
Rear bumper
Back panel

the following:
and Operation) /


7. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01A Fuel
Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the battery.

For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting
and Cables, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove sealer from the area of repair as required, to reveal the panel
joints.
10. Prior to removal, mark the position of the spare wheel well in relation to
adjacent panels, for ease of alignment on installation.
12. NOTE: Remove the sealer to expose the self piercing

rivets.
Using the ESN50, remove the self piercing rivets.
13. NOTE: Retain the remnant as it will be used as a template.
Separate the joints and remove the old panel remnant.

Installation
1. Using the old panel for reference, install the rivet-studs

into the new panel as indicated.
4. Trim, clean and prepare the old panel remnant to be used as a template.
5. Clamp the template to the new panel and using a 6.5mm

Cryobit drill bit. Drill holes through the template into the
new panel, ready for Hemloks to be installed.
6. Remove the template from the new panel.
proceeding.
10. Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Drill holes through the old panels into
the new panel, at the points where Hemloks are to be installed.
allow to dry.

holes.

removal procedure.
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System -
NOTE: * Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Front lower arm to front subframe retaining nut and 175 129 -
bolt
Rear lower arm to front subframe retaining nut and 175 129 -
bolt
Lower arm to rear subframe nuts and bolts 192 142
Upper arm to rear subframe nuts and bolts 115 85
Engine mount lower retaining nut 63 46 -
Steering gear retaining bolts 100 74 -
Front Shock absorber and spring assembly retaining 175 129 -
bolt
* Front subframe to body front retaining bolts Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - 270 Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - 270 -
degrees degrees
* Front subframe to body rear retaining bolts Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - 240 Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - 240 -
degrees degrees
* Rear subframe to body mounting bolts Stage 1 - 60 Stage 2 - 240 Stage 1 - 44 Stage 2 - 240
degrees degrees
Front Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 43 32 -
Front Stabilizer bar link to rear lower arm nut and bolt 70 52 -
Front Stabilizer bar link to subframe bolts 55 41
Rear Stabilizer bar link to subframe bolts 55 41
Rear Stabilizer bar link to rear Stabilizer bar 48 35
Rear Shock absorber and spring assembly retaining 133 98 -
bolt
Rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts 35 26 -
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Front Subframe TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal
and Installation).
Installation).
6. Secure the radiator assembly.
7.
Torque: 22 Nm
Support the engine with the lifting equipment.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-021
9.
10.
11.
12.

14.
15.
16. NOTES:
Make sure to support the steering gear.
17.
18.
19.
21. NOTE: Note the fitted position of each bolt, mark the washers and
sub-frame before removal to aid assembly.
22. CAUTION: Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to
NOTE: Note the fitted position of each bolt, mark the washers and
sub-frame before removal to aid assembly.
23.
24. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the A/C pipes when
lowering the component.
NOTES:
Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access

only.
General Equipment: Powertrain Jack
25.
26.
27.
Installation
1. Torque: 8 Nm
2. NOTE: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this
stage.
3. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque:
Bolt 1 63 Nm
Bolt 2 63 Nm
Bolt 1 63 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. General Equipment: Powertrain Jack

7. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:240°
8. Torque:
Stage 1:100 Nm
Stage 2:270°
9. CAUTION: Make sure each bolt aligns with the removal markings.
Torque: 175 Nm
10. CAUTION: Make sure each bolt aligns with the removal markings.
Torque: 175 Nm
Torque: 175 Nm
12. Torque: 43 Nm
13. Torque: 43 Nm
14. Torque: 63 Nm
Torque: 100 Nm
16.
17.
Torque: 20 Nm
19. Torque: 7 Nm
20.
21.
22.
Special Tool(s): 303-021, 303-1129
24.
25. Release the radiator assembly.

Installation).
and Installation).

Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
3. Remove the rear wheels and tires
Installation).
4. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (310-00 Fuel System -
NOTE: The fuel tank has a non-return valve in the

filler stub pipe, only the fuel present in the filler hose will
be spilt.
Installation).
8. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.

NOTES:
To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special

tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below
the rest position.
Torque: 38 Nm
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.
Torque: 133 Nm
10.
11.
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm

17. CAUTION: Make sure that new subframe bolts are

installed.
Torque:
Stage 1 60 Nm
Stage 2 240°
18. CAUTION: Make sure when lowering the rear subframe
damage does not occur to the surrounding components.
the vehicle.

Torque: 55 Nm
Torque: 48 Nm
22.
23.
24. Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 18 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 115 Nm
Torque: 192 Nm
Torque: 90 Nm

32. Torque:
M14 190 Nm
M12 90 Nm
33.
36.
Installation
1.
Clean the components mating faces.

4. CAUTION: The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left
in place, until the halfshaft is fully installed.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the halfshaft

splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.

7. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft circlip is

installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft gently to make
sure it is engaged.

10. Install the rear wheels and tires
Installation).

Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe Rear Bushing
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Forcing bolt
204-469
Reciever-bush
204-475
Replacer-bush
204-474
Remover bush
204-473
Remover support-bush
204-472
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation) / Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the bushing is correctly orientated.
2. For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation) / Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
www.JagDocs.com

X351 - Service & Repair Manual 2010 To 2012 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

X351 - Service & Repair Manual 2010 To 2012 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Workshop Manual

References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

Vehicle LH and RH definition

Item Part Number Description

How to use Repair Procedures

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets

Types of self-locking nuts and bolts

Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.

INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.

Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.

Active Safety Belt Module (SPMA/SPMB)

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

U2001-68 Reduced System

U3000-45 Control Module -

U3000-49 Control Module -

U3000-4B Control Module -

U3003-62 Battery Voltage -

U3006-16 Control Module

U0452-29 Invalid Data

U0452-31 Invalid Data

U0415-29 Invalid Data

U0415-31 Invalid Data

U0422-29 Invalid Data

Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

C101D-14 Left Front

C101D-22 Left Front

C101D-78 Left Front

C101E-12 Right Front

C101E-14 Right Front

C101E-22 Right Front

C101E-26 Right Front

C101E-78 Right Front

C102C-14 Right Rear

C102C-22 Right Rear

C102C-26 Right Rear

C102C-78 Right Rear

C1030-12 Left Rear

C1030-14 Left Rear

C1030-22 Left Rear

C1030-26 Left Rear

C1030-78 Left Rear

C1A03-12 Left Front

C1A03-14 Left Front

C1A03-21 Left Front

C1A03-22 Left Front

C1A03-76 Left Front

C1A04-14 Right Front

C1A04-21 Right Front

C1A04-22 Right Front

C1A04-76 Right Front

C1A05-14 Left Rear Height

C1A05-21 Left Rear Height

C1A05-22 Left Rear Height

C1A05-76 Left Rear Height

C1A06-14 Right Rear